Service Manual

iR7105/7095/7086 Series iR7105

Mar 27 2009

Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory, installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does not apply to your locality.

Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition of this manual. The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law.

Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies.

Copyright
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Canon Inc.

COPYRIGHT 2001 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan

Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.

Introduction

Symbols Used
This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information:

Symbol

Description
Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks.

Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire).

Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.

Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet.

Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question.
Memo

Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question.

REF.

Provides a description of a service mode.

Provides a description of the nature of an error indication.

Introduction The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual: 1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation. In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol , the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal. The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with power. 2. In the digital circuits, '1'is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is "High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low".(The voltage value, however, differs from circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when '0'. In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads. The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of Service Information bulletins. All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine."

Contents

Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction 1.1 System Construction ..................................................................................................................................1- 1
1.1.1 System Configuration with Input/Output Accessories.............................................................................................. 1- 1 1.1.2 Combination of Delivery Accessories ...................................................................................................................... 1- 2 1.1.3 System Configuration with Printing/Transmission Accessories............................................................................... 1- 6 1.1.4 Functions of Printing/Transmission Accessories ..................................................................................................... 1- 7

1.2 Product Specifications ................................................................................................................................1- 8

1.2.1 Names of Parts........................................................................................................................................................ 1- 8
1.2.1.1 External View ........................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 8 1.2.1.2 Cross Section........................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 9

1.2.2 Using the Machine................................................................................................................................................. 1- 10

1.2.2.1 Power Switch ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 10 1.2.2.2 Points to Note About Turning Off the Main Power Switch ..................................................................................................... 1- 10 1.2.2.3 Control Panel ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 11

1.2.3 User Mode Items ................................................................................................................................................... 1- 12

1.2.3.1 Common Settings .................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 12 1.2.3.2 Timer Settings........................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 14 1.2.3.3 Adjustment/Cleaning.............................................................................................................................................................. 1- 14 1.2.3.4 Report Settings ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 14 1.2.3.5 System Settings ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 15 1.2.3.6 Copy Settings......................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 16 1.2.3.7 Communications Settings ...................................................................................................................................................... 1- 17 1.2.3.8 Mail Box Settings ................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 17 1.2.3.9 Address Book Settings........................................................................................................................................................... 1- 18 1.2.3.10 Voice Guide Settings............................................................................................................................................................ 1- 18

1.2.4 Safety .................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 18

1.2.4.1 Safety About Laser Light........................................................................................................................................................ 1- 18 1.2.4.2 CDRH Regulations................................................................................................................................................................. 1- 18 1.2.4.3 Handling of the Laser Assembly ............................................................................................................................................ 1- 19 1.2.4.4 Safety of Toner ...................................................................................................................................................................... 1- 19

1.2.5 Product Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 1- 20

1.2.5.1 Product Specifications ........................................................................................................................................................... 1- 20

1.2.6 Function List .......................................................................................................................................................... 1- 21

1.2.6.1 Print Speed ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 21 1.2.6.2 Paper Type ............................................................................................................................................................................ 1- 23

1.2.7 RDS Specification.................................................................................................................................................. 1- 23

1.2.7.1 Embedded RDS (e-RDS)....................................................................................................................................................... 1- 23

Chapter 2 Installation 2.1 Making Pre-Checks ....................................................................................................................................2- 1

2.1.1 Points to Note Before Starting the Installation Work ............................................................................................... 2- 1 2.1.2 Selecting the Site of Installation .............................................................................................................................. 2- 1 2.1.3 Installation Space .................................................................................................................................................... 2- 1 2.1.4 Checking the Contents ............................................................................................................................................ 2- 3 2.1.5 Order of Installing Accessories................................................................................................................................ 2- 5

2.2 Unpacking and Installation .........................................................................................................................2- 6

2.2.1 Points to Note When Turning On/Off the Main Power............................................................................................. 2- 6 2.2.2 Unpacking................................................................................................................................................................ 2- 6 2.2.3 Mounting the Scanner System ................................................................................................................................ 2- 8 2.2.4 Mounting the Fixing Assembly................................................................................................................................. 2- 8 2.2.5 Mounting the Charging Assembly............................................................................................................................ 2- 8 2.2.6 Mounting the Developing Assembly ...................................................................................................................... 2- 10

Contents

2.2.7 Mounting the Pickup Assembly..............................................................................................................................2- 12 2.2.8 Mounting the Control Panel ...................................................................................................................................2- 12 2.2.9 Supplying Toner.....................................................................................................................................................2- 17 2.2.10 Turning On the Main Power .................................................................................................................................2- 17 2.2.11 Stirring the Toner .................................................................................................................................................2- 17 2.2.12 Index Sheet Attachment.......................................................................................................................................2- 18 2.2.13 Others ..................................................................................................................................................................2- 18 2.2.14 Attaching the Labels, Placing Paper, and Checking Images and Operation........................................................2- 19 2.2.15 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration ...................................................................................................................2- 20 2.2.16 Adjusting the Lead Edge Registration..................................................................................................................2- 21 2.2.17 Setting the Cassette.............................................................................................................................................2- 21 2.2.18 Correcting the Skew.............................................................................................................................................2- 22 2.2.19 Switching Over the Paper Size for the Front Deck (right, left) .............................................................................2- 22 2.2.20 Fixing Host Machine in Place...............................................................................................................................2- 22 2.2.21 Checking the Operation in a System Configuration .............................................................................................2- 23

2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network ................................................................................................. 2- 24

2.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................2- 24 2.3.2 Checking the Network Connections.......................................................................................................................2- 24 2.3.3 Using the PING Command ....................................................................................................................................2- 24 2.3.4 Making a Check Using a Remote Host Address....................................................................................................2- 24

2.4 Troubleshooting the Network ................................................................................................................... 2- 24

2.4.1 Troubleshooting the Network .................................................................................................................................2- 24 2.4.2 Making a Check Using a Loop Back Address........................................................................................................2- 24 2.4.3 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address........................................................................................................2- 24

2.5 Installing the Card Reader........................................................................................................................ 2- 24

2.5.1 Checking the Contents...........................................................................................................................................2- 24 2.5.2 Turning Off the Host Machine ................................................................................................................................2- 25 2.5.3 Installing the Card Reader-D1 ...............................................................................................................................2- 25

2.6 Installing the Reader Heater..................................................................................................................... 2- 27

2.6.1 Checking the Contents...........................................................................................................................................2- 27 2.6.2 Turning Off the Host Machine ................................................................................................................................2- 27 2.6.3 Installation Procedure ............................................................................................................................................2- 27

2.7 Installing the Cassette Heater .................................................................................................................. 2- 29

2.7.1 Checking the Contents...........................................................................................................................................2- 29 2.7.2 Turning Off the Host Machine ................................................................................................................................2- 29 2.7.3 Mounting the Cassette Heater ...............................................................................................................................2- 29

2.8 Installing the Deck Heater ........................................................................................................................ 2- 31

2.8.1 Unpacking and Checking the Components............................................................................................................2- 31 2.8.2 Installing to the Paper Deck (Cassette Heater Unit-31/32) ....................................................................................2- 32 2.8.3 Installing to the host machine (Cassette Heater Unit-31/32) .................................................................................2- 34 2.8.4 Unpacking and Checking the Components............................................................................................................2- 35 2.8.5 Installing to the Paper Deck (Cassette Heater Unit-23/25) ....................................................................................2- 36 2.8.6 Installing to the host machine (Cassette Heater Unit-23/25) .................................................................................2- 37

2.9 Installing the Deck Heater (Large Deck)................................................................................................... 2- 39

2.9.1 Unpacking and Checking the Components............................................................................................................2- 39 2.9.2 Installing to the paper Deck (Cassette Heater Unit-31/32) ....................................................................................2- 39 2.9.3 Unpacking and Checking the Components............................................................................................................2- 44 2.9.4 Installing to the paper Deck (Cassette Heater Unit-23/25) ....................................................................................2- 45

2.10 Installing the Voice Guidance Kit ............................................................................................................ 2- 49

2.10.1 Checking Items in the Package............................................................................................................................2- 49 2.10.2 Turning Off the Host Machine ..............................................................................................................................2- 50 2.10.3 Installation Procedure .........................................................................................................................................2- 50

Chapter 3 Basic Operation

Contents

3.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................3- 1

3.1.1 Functional Construction........................................................................................................................................... 3- 1 3.1.2 Wiring Diagram of the Major PCBs.......................................................................................................................... 3- 2 3.1.3 Controlling the Main Motor (M1) .............................................................................................................................. 3- 2

3.2 Basic Sequence..........................................................................................................................................3- 4

3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations (power-on).............................................................................................................. 3- 4

Chapter 4 Main Controller 4.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................4- 1

4.1.1 Construction/Functions............................................................................................................................................ 4- 1

4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry........................................................................................................4- 2

4.2.1 Main Controller PCB................................................................................................................................................ 4- 2 4.2.2 Main Controller PCB (up graded version)................................................................................................................ 4- 3

4.3 Start-Up Sequence .....................................................................................................................................4- 4

4.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................. 4- 4 4.3.2 Start-Up Sequence .................................................................................................................................................. 4- 5 4.3.3 Action to Take in Response to E602 ....................................................................................................................... 4- 6

4.4 Shut-Down Sequence.................................................................................................................................4- 8

4.4.1 Flow of Operation .................................................................................................................................................... 4- 8

4.5 Image Processing .......................................................................................................................................4- 8

4.5.1 Overview of the Image Flow .................................................................................................................................... 4- 8 4.5.2 Configuration of the Image Processing Modules..................................................................................................... 4- 9 4.5.3 Reader Input Image Processing ............................................................................................................................ 4- 10 4.5.4 Compression/Expansion/Editing Block.................................................................................................................. 4- 11 4.5.5 Printer Output Image Processing .......................................................................................................................... 4- 12

4.6 Parts Replacement Procedure .................................................................................................................4- 13

4.6.1 Main Controller Box ............................................................................................................................................... 4- 13
4.6.1.1 Making Preparations .............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 13 4.6.1.2 Removing the Main Controller Box ........................................................................................................................................ 4- 13

4.6.2 Main Controller PCB.............................................................................................................................................. 4- 14

4.6.2.1 Making Preparations .............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 14 4.6.2.2 Removing the Main Controller PCB ....................................................................................................................................... 4- 15 4.6.2.3 Removing the Main Controller PCB (up graded version)....................................................................................................... 4- 15 4.6.2.4 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB............................................................................................................................. 4- 15 4.6.2.5 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (up graded version)............................................................................................. 4- 16

4.6.3 SDRAM.................................................................................................................................................................. 4- 17
4.6.3.1 Making Preparations .............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 17 4.6.3.2 Removing the DDR-SDRAM.................................................................................................................................................. 4- 17

4.6.4 Boot ROM.............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 17

4.6.4.1 Making Preparations .............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 17 4.6.4.2 Removing the Boot ROM ....................................................................................................................................................... 4- 18 4.6.4.3 Removing the Boot ROM (up graded version)....................................................................................................................... 4- 18

4.6.5 HDD....................................................................................................................................................................... 4- 18
4.6.5.1 Points to Note on Handling the Hard Disk ............................................................................................................................. 4- 18 4.6.5.2 Making Preparations .............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 18 4.6.5.3 Removing the Hard Disk ........................................................................................................................................................ 4- 18 4.6.5.4 Removing the Hard Disk(up graded version)......................................................................................................................... 4- 18 4.6.5.5 Points to Note When Mounting the Hard Disk ....................................................................................................................... 4- 19 4.6.5.6 After Replacing the Hard Disk................................................................................................................................................ 4- 19

4.6.6 Video PCB ............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 19

4.6.6.1 Making Preparations .............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 19 4.6.6.2 Removing the Video PCB ...................................................................................................................................................... 4- 20

4.6.7 Reader I/F PCB ..................................................................................................................................................... 4- 20

4.6.7.1 Making Preparations .............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 20 4.6.7.2 Removing the Reader I/F PCB .............................................................................................................................................. 4- 21

4.6.8 Controller Fan........................................................................................................................................................ 4- 21

4.6.8.1 Making Preparations .............................................................................................................................................................. 4- 21

Contents

4.6.8.2 Removing the Controller Fan ................................................................................................................................................. 4- 21

Chapter 5 Original Exposure System 5.1 Construction ............................................................................................................................................... 5- 1

5.1.1 Specifications, Controls, and Functions...................................................................................................................5- 1 5.1.2 Major Components...................................................................................................................................................5- 2 5.1.3 Construction of the Control System .........................................................................................................................5- 3

5.2 Basic Sequence ......................................................................................................................................... 5- 4

5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations ................................................................................................................................5- 4 5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key .................................................................5- 4

5.3 Various Control........................................................................................................................................... 5- 5

5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System .....................................................................................................................5- 5
5.3.1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 5- 5 5.3.1.2 Controlling the Scanner Motor ................................................................................................................................................. 5- 5

5.3.2 Enlargement/Reduction ...........................................................................................................................................5- 6

5.3.2.1 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction ................................................................................................ 5- 6 5.3.2.2 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction ................................................................................................. 5- 6

5.3.3 Controlling the Scanning Lamp................................................................................................................................5- 6

5.3.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 5- 6 5.3.3.2 Scanning Lamp ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5- 7 5.3.3.3 Controlling the Activation ......................................................................................................................................................... 5- 7

5.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals.................................................................................................................................5- 7

5.3.4.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 5- 7 5.3.4.2 Points of Measurement Used for Original Size Identification................................................................................................... 5- 7 5.3.4.3 Overview of Operation ............................................................................................................................................................. 5- 8

5.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control ................................................................................................................................................5- 10

5.3.5.1 Dust Detection in Stream Reading Mode............................................................................................................................... 5- 10 5.3.5.2 White Plate Dust Detection Control ....................................................................................................................................... 5- 11

5.3.6 Image Processing ..................................................................................................................................................5- 11

5.3.6.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 5- 11 5.3.6.2 CCD Drive.............................................................................................................................................................................. 5- 12 5.3.6.3 CCD Output Gain Correction, Offset Correction .................................................................................................................... 5- 13 5.3.6.4 CCD Output A/D Conversion ................................................................................................................................................. 5- 13 5.3.6.5 Outline of Shading Correction................................................................................................................................................ 5- 13 5.3.6.6 Shading Adjustment............................................................................................................................................................... 5- 13 5.3.6.7 Shading Correction ................................................................................................................................................................ 5- 13

5.4 Parts Replacement Procedure ................................................................................................................. 5- 14

5.4.1 CCD Unit................................................................................................................................................................5- 14
5.4.1.1 Before Starting the Work........................................................................................................................................................ 5- 14 5.4.1.2 Removing the CCD Unit......................................................................................................................................................... 5- 14 5.4.1.3 When Replacing Components of the Scanning System ........................................................................................................ 5- 14

5.4.2 Copyboard glass ....................................................................................................................................................5- 14

5.4.2.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass ............................................................................................................................................ 5- 14 5.4.2.2 When Replacing Components of the Scanning System ........................................................................................................ 5- 14

5.4.3 Standard White Plate .............................................................................................................................................5- 14

5.4.3.1 Removing the Standard White Plate...................................................................................................................................... 5- 14 5.4.3.2 When Replacing Components of the Scanning System ........................................................................................................ 5- 15

5.4.4 Scanning Lamp ......................................................................................................................................................5- 15

5.4.4.1 Before Starting the Work........................................................................................................................................................ 5- 15 5.4.4.2 Removing the Scanning Lamp............................................................................................................................................... 5- 16 5.4.4.3 When Replacing Components of the Scanning System ........................................................................................................ 5- 16

5.4.5 Reader Controller PCB ..........................................................................................................................................5- 16

5.4.5.1 Before Starting the Work........................................................................................................................................................ 5- 16 5.4.5.2 Removing the Reader Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................... 5- 16 5.4.5.3 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB........................................................................................................................... 5- 17

5.4.6 Interface PCB.........................................................................................................................................................5- 17

5.4.6.1 Before Starting the Work........................................................................................................................................................ 5- 17 5.4.6.2 Removing the Interface PCB ................................................................................................................................................. 5- 17

Contents

5.4.7 Inverter PCB .......................................................................................................................................................... 5- 18

5.4.7.1 Before Starting the Work........................................................................................................................................................ 5- 18 5.4.7.2 Removing the Inverter PCB ................................................................................................................................................... 5- 18 5.4.7.3 When Replacing Components of the Scanning System ........................................................................................................ 5- 18

5.4.8 Scanner Motor ....................................................................................................................................................... 5- 18

5.4.8.1 Before Starting the Work........................................................................................................................................................ 5- 18 5.4.8.2 Removing the Scanner Motor ................................................................................................................................................ 5- 18 5.4.8.3 Mounting the Scanner Motor.................................................................................................................................................. 5- 18

5.4.9 ADF Open/Close Sensor ....................................................................................................................................... 5- 19

5.4.9.1 Before Starting the Work........................................................................................................................................................ 5- 19 5.4.9.2 Removing the ADF Open/Closed Sensor .............................................................................................................................. 5- 19

5.4.10 Original Size Sensor ............................................................................................................................................ 5- 19

5.4.10.1 Before Starting the Work...................................................................................................................................................... 5- 19 5.4.10.2 Removing the Original Size Sensor Unit.............................................................................................................................. 5- 19 5.4.10.3 Removing the Original Size Sensor ..................................................................................................................................... 5- 19

5.4.11 Scanner Home Position Sensor........................................................................................................................... 5- 20

5.4.11.1 Before Starting the Work...................................................................................................................................................... 5- 20 5.4.11.2 Removing the Scanner Home Position Sensor.................................................................................................................... 5- 20

5.4.12 Cooling Fan ......................................................................................................................................................... 5- 20

5.4.12.1 Before Starting the Work...................................................................................................................................................... 5- 20 5.4.12.2 Removing the Reader Cooling Fan 1/2................................................................................................................................ 5- 20

5.4.13 Scanner Drive Cable............................................................................................................................................ 5- 21

5.4.13.1 Before Starting the Work...................................................................................................................................................... 5- 21 5.4.13.2 Removing the Scanner Drive Cable..................................................................................................................................... 5- 22 5.4.13.3 Fitting the Scanner Drive Cable ........................................................................................................................................... 5- 22 5.4.13.4 Adjusting the Position of the No. 1/No. 2 Mirror Base.......................................................................................................... 5- 23

Chapter 6 Laser Exposure 6.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................6- 1

6.1.1 Outline of the Laser Exposure System .................................................................................................................... 6- 1

6.2 Basic Sequence..........................................................................................................................................6- 3

6.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations (laser exposure system)......................................................................................... 6- 3

6.3 Various Controls .........................................................................................................................................6- 3

6.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing ................................................................................................................... 6- 3
6.3.1.1 Turning On and Off the Laser Unit........................................................................................................................................... 6- 3 6.3.1.2 Flow of the BD Signal .............................................................................................................................................................. 6- 4

6.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light .................................................................................................................... 6- 4

6.3.2.1 APC Control ............................................................................................................................................................................. 6- 4

6.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor....................................................................................................................... 6- 5

6.3.3.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 6- 5

6.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter................................................................................................................................... 6- 5

6.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter ................................................................................................................................................... 6- 5

6.4 Parts Replacement Procedure ...................................................................................................................6- 7

6.4.1 Laser Scanner Unit.................................................................................................................................................. 6- 7
6.4.1.1 Before Starting the Work.......................................................................................................................................................... 6- 7 6.4.1.2 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 6- 7 6.4.1.3 When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit................................................................................................................................. 6- 7

Chapter 7 Image Formation 7.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................7- 1

7.1.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 1 7.1.2 Major Components .................................................................................................................................................. 7- 2 7.1.3 Pre-Transfer Exposure LED .................................................................................................................................... 7- 2

7.2 Image Formation Process ..........................................................................................................................7- 2

7.2.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................. 7- 2

7.3 Basic Sequence..........................................................................................................................................7- 3

Contents

7.3.1 Basic Sequence .......................................................................................................................................................7- 3

7.4 Potential Control ......................................................................................................................................... 7- 3

7.4.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................7- 3 7.4.2 Basics Sequence of Operations...............................................................................................................................7- 4 7.4.3 Determining the Optimum Grid Bias ........................................................................................................................7- 5 7.4.4 Grid Bias Corrective Control ....................................................................................................................................7- 5 7.4.5 Determining the Optimum Laser Output ..................................................................................................................7- 6 7.4.6 Laser Output Corrective Control ..............................................................................................................................7- 6 7.4.7 Determining the Optimum Developing Bias .............................................................................................................7- 7 7.4.8 Potential Control for Transparency Mode ................................................................................................................7- 8 7.4.9 Target Potential Correction in Each Mode ...............................................................................................................7- 9

7.5 Charging Mechanism ............................................................................................................................... 7- 11

7.5.1 Primary Charging Mechanism................................................................................................................................7- 11
7.5.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 11 7.5.1.2 Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism................................................................................................................ 7- 13 7.5.1.3 Others .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 13

7.5.2 Dust-Collecting Roller Bias ....................................................................................................................................7- 13

7.5.2.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 13

7.5.3 Pre-Transfer Charging Mechanism........................................................................................................................7- 14

7.5.3.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 14 7.5.3.2 Controlling the Output to Suit the Environment (fuzzy control) .............................................................................................. 7- 15 7.5.3.3 Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism ........................................................................................................ 7- 16 7.5.3.4 Others .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 16

7.6 Drum Cleaner Unit.................................................................................................................................... 7- 16

7.6.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................7- 16 7.6.2 Detecting the Waste Toner (case full condition) ....................................................................................................7- 17

7.7 Developing Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 7- 18

7.7.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................7- 18 7.7.2 Controlling the Developing Assembly ....................................................................................................................7- 19 7.7.3 Controlling the Toner Cartridge Drive Mechanism.................................................................................................7- 20 7.7.4 Controlling the Developing Bias.............................................................................................................................7- 21 7.7.5 Detecting the Toner Level and Controlling the Toner Supply Mechanism.............................................................7- 22

7.8 Transfer Mechanism................................................................................................................................. 7- 25

7.8.1 Transfer Guide Bias ...............................................................................................................................................7- 25
7.8.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................................................ 7- 25 7.8.1.2 Controlling the Output to Suit the Environment...................................................................................................................... 7- 26

7.8.2 Transfer Charging Mechanism...............................................................................................................................7- 26

7.8.2.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 26 7.8.2.2 Controlling the Output to Suit the Environment (fuzzy control) .............................................................................................. 7- 27 7.8.2.3 Correcting the Output at the Trailing Edge of Paper.............................................................................................................. 7- 27 7.8.2.4 Transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism............................................................................................................... 7- 29 7.8.2.5 Others .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 29

7.9 Separation Mechanism............................................................................................................................. 7- 29

7.9.1 Separation Charging Mechanism...........................................................................................................................7- 29
7.9.1.1 Outline.................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 29 7.9.1.2 Correcting the Output to Suit the Environment and the Toner Deposit.................................................................................. 7- 30 7.9.1.3 Correcting the Output upon Detection of Leakage................................................................................................................. 7- 31 7.9.1.4 Others .................................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 31

7.10 Parts Replacement Procedure ............................................................................................................... 7- 32

7.10.1 Process Unit.........................................................................................................................................................7- 32
7.10.1.1 Before Starting the Work...................................................................................................................................................... 7- 32 7.10.1.2 Removing the Process Unit.................................................................................................................................................. 7- 32 7.10.1.3 Mounting the Process Unit ................................................................................................................................................... 7- 32

7.10.2 Pre-Exposure Lamp .............................................................................................................................................7- 33

7.10.2.1 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit............................................................................................................................... 7- 33

7.10.3 Primary Charging Assembly.................................................................................................................................7- 33

7.10.3.1 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly ......................................................................................................................... 7- 33

Contents

7.10.4 Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly ........................................................................................................................ 7- 33

7.10.4.1 Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly.................................................................................................................. 7- 33

7.10.5 Photosensitive Drum............................................................................................................................................ 7- 34

7.10.5.1 Points to Note About Handling the Photosensitive Drum..................................................................................................... 7- 34 7.10.5.2 Removing the Photosensitive Drum..................................................................................................................................... 7- 34

7.10.6 Drum Cleaner Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 7- 35

7.10.6.1 Construction ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7- 35 7.10.6.2 Removing the Cleaning Blade.............................................................................................................................................. 7- 35 7.10.6.3 Mounting the Cleaning Blade ............................................................................................................................................... 7- 35 7.10.6.4 Removing the Blade Vibrating Unit ...................................................................................................................................... 7- 35

7.10.7 Photosensitive Drum Heater................................................................................................................................ 7- 36

7.10.7.1 Replacing the Photosensitive Drum Heater ......................................................................................................................... 7- 36

7.10.8 Sub Hopper.......................................................................................................................................................... 7- 36

7.10.8.1 Before Starting the Work...................................................................................................................................................... 7- 36 7.10.8.2 Removing the Sub Hopper Unit ........................................................................................................................................... 7- 36

7.10.9 Developing Assembly .......................................................................................................................................... 7- 37

7.10.9.1 Before Starting the Work...................................................................................................................................................... 7- 37 7.10.9.2 Removing the Developing Assembly ................................................................................................................................... 7- 37 7.10.9.3 Points to Note When the Developing Assembly................................................................................................................... 7- 38 7.10.9.4 Removing the Hopper .......................................................................................................................................................... 7- 38

7.10.10 Developing Cylinder........................................................................................................................................... 7- 39

7.10.10.1 Removing the Developing Cylinder .................................................................................................................................... 7- 39

7.10.11 Developing Blade............................................................................................................................................... 7- 40

7.10.11.1 Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................................................................... 7- 40 7.10.11.2 Removing the Blade Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 7- 40 7.10.11.3 Mounting the Blade ............................................................................................................................................................ 7- 40

7.10.12 Developing Cylinder Deceleration Clutch .......................................................................................................... 7- 40

7.10.12.1 Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................................................................... 7- 40 7.10.12.2 Removing the Developing Cylinder Decelerating Clutch.................................................................................................... 7- 40

7.10.13 Developing Cylinder Clutch................................................................................................................................ 7- 41

7.10.13.1 Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................................................................... 7- 41 7.10.13.2 Removing the Developing Cylinder Clutch......................................................................................................................... 7- 41

7.10.14 Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly ........................................................................................................... 7- 41

7.10.14.1 Removing the Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly .................................................................................................... 7- 41

7.10.15 Pre-Transfer Exposure LED............................................................................................................................... 7- 42

7.10.15.1 Removing the Pre-Transfer Exposure LED........................................................................................................................ 7- 42

7.10.16 Separation Claw/Separation Claw Drive Assembly ........................................................................................... 7- 42

7.10.16.1 Separation Claw/Separation Claw Drive Assembly............................................................................................................ 7- 42

7.10.17 Potential Sensor................................................................................................................................................. 7- 43

7.10.17.1 Removing the Potential Sensor Unit .................................................................................................................................. 7- 43 7.10.17.2 Removing the Potential Control PCB ................................................................................................................................. 7- 43 7.10.17.3 When Replacing the Potential Sensor/Potential Control PCB............................................................................................ 7- 44

7.10.18 Dust-Collecting Roller ........................................................................................................................................ 7- 44

7.10.18.1 Removing the Dust-Collecting Roller ................................................................................................................................. 7- 44

7.10.19 Charging Wire .................................................................................................................................................... 7- 45

7.10.19.1 Outline ................................................................................................................................................................................ 7- 45 7.10.19.2 Removing the Wire Cleaner for the Primary Charging Assembly ...................................................................................... 7- 45 7.10.19.3 Removing the Wire Cleaner of the Transfer Separation Charging Assembly .................................................................... 7- 45 7.10.19.4 Stringing the Charging Wire ............................................................................................................................................... 7- 46 7.10.19.5 Stringing the Grid of the Primary Charging Assembly........................................................................................................ 7- 46 7.10.19.6 Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire ......................................................................................................................... 7- 47

Chapter 8 Pickup/Feeding System 8.1 Construction ...............................................................................................................................................8- 1

8.1.1 Specifications and Construction .............................................................................................................................. 8- 1 8.1.2 Arrangement of Rollers and Sensors ...................................................................................................................... 8- 1 8.1.3 Control System ........................................................................................................................................................ 8- 2 8.1.4 Controlling the Pickup Motor (M2) ........................................................................................................................... 8- 3

Contents

8.1.5 Index Paper Attachment ..........................................................................................................................................8- 3

8.2 Basic Sequence ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 4

8.2.1 Right Deck ...............................................................................................................................................................8- 4 8.2.2 Pickup from the cassette 4.......................................................................................................................................8- 4

8.3 Detecting Jams........................................................................................................................................... 8- 5

8.3.1 Jam Detection Outline..............................................................................................................................................8- 5
8.3.1.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 5

8.3.2 Delay Jams ..............................................................................................................................................................8- 6

8.3.2.1 Cassette Pickup (Right deck, Left deck, cassette 3, 4)............................................................................................................ 8- 6 8.3.2.2 Other Delay Jams .................................................................................................................................................................... 8- 6

8.3.3 Stationary Jams .......................................................................................................................................................8- 7

8.3.3.1 Common Stationary Jams........................................................................................................................................................ 8- 7 8.3.3.2 Stationary Jam at Power-On.................................................................................................................................................... 8- 7

8.4 Cassette Pick-Up Unit ................................................................................................................................ 8- 7

8.4.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................8- 7 8.4.2 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper ..............................................................................................................8- 9 8.4.3 Detecting the Level of Paper....................................................................................................................................8- 9 8.4.4 Cassette 3/4...........................................................................................................................................................8- 11 8.4.5 Markings on the Width Guide Rail .........................................................................................................................8- 11 8.4.6 Paper Size .............................................................................................................................................................8- 12

8.5 Manual Feed Pickup Unit ......................................................................................................................... 8- 14

8.5.1 Pickup Operation ...................................................................................................................................................8- 14 8.5.2 Detecting the Paper Size .......................................................................................................................................8- 15

8.6 Deck ......................................................................................................................................................... 8- 16

8.6.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................8- 16 8.6.2 Lifter Limiter (deck right/left) ..................................................................................................................................8- 17 8.6.3 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper ............................................................................................................8- 17 8.6.4 Detecting the Level of Paper..................................................................................................................................8- 18 8.6.5 Cassette Deck Right/Left .......................................................................................................................................8- 20

8.7 Registration Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 8- 20

8.7.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................................................8- 20 8.7.2 Sequence of Operations (registration brake) .........................................................................................................8- 21

8.8 Duplex Feeding Unit ................................................................................................................................. 8- 22

8.8.1 Copying on the First Side.......................................................................................................................................8- 22 8.8.2 Copying on the Second Side .................................................................................................................................8- 22 8.8.3 Sequence of Operations ........................................................................................................................................8- 23 8.8.4 Controlling the reversal motor (M11) .....................................................................................................................8- 23 8.8.5 Controlling the duplexing feeder motor (M12)........................................................................................................8- 24 8.8.6 No-Stacking Operation...........................................................................................................................................8- 24 8.8.7 Detecting the Horizontal Registration Position.......................................................................................................8- 29 8.8.8 Controlling the Horizontal Registration Motor (M15)..............................................................................................8- 30

8.9 Delivery .................................................................................................................................................... 8- 31

8.9.1 Reversal Delivery...................................................................................................................................................8- 31

8.10 Detecting the Double-Feed..................................................................................................................... 8- 32

8.10.1 Detecting Double Feeding....................................................................................................................................8- 32

8.11 Parts Replacement Procedure ............................................................................................................... 8- 34

8.11.1 Cassette Pickup Assembly...................................................................................................................................8- 34
8.11.1.1 Removing the Right Deck / Cassette Pickup Assembly....................................................................................................... 8- 34 8.11.1.2 Removing the Vertical Path 3/4 Sensor and the Cassette 3/4 Pickup Sensor..................................................................... 8- 34

8.11.2 Cassette Lifter Motor............................................................................................................................................8- 34

8.11.2.1 Removing the Lifter Motor (M16/M17) of the Cassette (3/4)................................................................................................ 8- 34

8.11.3 Right Deck Pickup Assembly ...............................................................................................................................8- 34

8.11.3.1 Removing the Right Deck / Cassette Pickup Assembly....................................................................................................... 8- 34

8.11.4 Left Deck Pickup Assembly..................................................................................................................................8- 34

8.11.4.1 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Assembly .......................................................................................................................... 8- 34

8.11.5 Left Deck Pickup Sensor......................................................................................................................................8- 35

Contents

8.11.5.1 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Sensor............................................................................................................................... 8- 35

8.11.6 Right Deck Pickup Sensor ................................................................................................................................... 8- 35

8.11.6.1 Removing the Right Deck Feed Sensor/Right Deck Pickup Sensor .................................................................................... 8- 35

8.11.7 Manual Tray Assembly ........................................................................................................................................ 8- 36

8.11.7.1 Removing the Manual Feeder Tray Unit .............................................................................................................................. 8- 36 8.11.7.2 Fitting the Side Guide Timing Belt for the Manual Feed Tray Assembly.............................................................................. 8- 36

8.11.8 Manual Feed Pull-Out Roller Unit ........................................................................................................................ 8- 36

8.11.8.1 Removing the Manual Feeder Pull-Off Roller Unit ............................................................................................................... 8- 36

8.11.9 Manual Pickup Roller........................................................................................................................................... 8- 37

8.11.9.1 Removing the Pickup Roller................................................................................................................................................. 8- 37 8.11.9.2 Mounting the Pickup Roller .................................................................................................................................................. 8- 37

8.11.10 Manual Feed Roller............................................................................................................................................ 8- 37

8.11.10.1 Removing the Feeding Roller............................................................................................................................................. 8- 37 8.11.10.2 Orientation of the Feeding Roller ....................................................................................................................................... 8- 37 8.11.10.3 Removing the multiple curling prevention roller ................................................................................................................. 8- 38 8.11.10.4 Mounting the multiple curling prevention roller................................................................................................................... 8- 38

8.11.11 Manual Separation Roller .................................................................................................................................. 8- 38

8.11.11.1 Removing the Separation Roller ........................................................................................................................................ 8- 38

8.11.12 Manual Feed Tray paper sensor........................................................................................................................ 8- 39

8.11.12.1 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Paper Sensor ................................................................................................................ 8- 39

8.11.13 Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid ........................................................................................................................... 8- 40

8.11.13.1 Position of the Pickup Roller Release Solenoid of the Manual Feed Tray ......................................................................... 8- 40

8.11.14 Registration Roller ............................................................................................................................................. 8- 40

8.11.14.1 Removing the Pre-Registration Roller................................................................................................................................ 8- 40

8.11.15 Registration Clutch............................................................................................................................................. 8- 41

8.11.15.1 Removing the Registration Clutch...................................................................................................................................... 8- 41

8.11.16 Registration Brake Clutch .................................................................................................................................. 8- 41

8.11.16.1 Removing the Registration Brake Clutch ........................................................................................................................... 8- 41

8.11.17 Fixing/Feed Unit................................................................................................................................................. 8- 41

8.11.17.1 Removing the Fixing/Feed Unit .......................................................................................................................................... 8- 41

8.11.18 Feeding Roller.................................................................................................................................................... 8- 42

8.11.18.1 Removing the Feeding Roller............................................................................................................................................. 8- 42 8.11.18.2 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Deck/Cassette Pickup Assembly......................................................................... 8- 42

8.11.19 Vertical Path Roller ............................................................................................................................................ 8- 42

8.11.19.1 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 1/3/4 ............................................................................................................................ 8- 42 8.11.19.2 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 2 .................................................................................................................................. 8- 42

8.11.20 Fixing Feeding Unit Releasing Lever Sensor..................................................................................................... 8- 43

8.11.20.1 Removing the Fixing Feeding Unit Releasing lever Sensor ............................................................................................... 8- 43

8.11.21 Feeding Belt....................................................................................................................................................... 8- 43

8.11.21.1 Removing the Feeding Belt ................................................................................................................................................ 8- 43

8.11.22 Duplexing Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 8- 44

8.11.22.1 Removing the Duplexing Unit............................................................................................................................................. 8- 44 8.11.22.2 Removing the Reversal Motor............................................................................................................................................ 8- 44 8.11.22.3 Removing the Front Cover of the Duplexing Unit............................................................................................................... 8- 44 8.11.22.4 Removing the Duplex Left Feed Motor............................................................................................................................... 8- 44 8.11.22.5 Removing the Duplex Right Feed Motor ............................................................................................................................ 8- 44 8.11.22.6 Removing the Reversing Flapper Solenoid........................................................................................................................ 8- 44 8.11.22.7 Removing the Left Deck Feed Sensor ............................................................................................................................... 8- 45 8.11.22.8 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor...................................................................................................................... 8- 45 8.11.22.9 Removing the Deck (left) Draw- Out Clutch/Lower Feeder Middle Clutch ......................................................................... 8- 45 8.11.22.10 Removing the Lower Feeding Right Clutch ...................................................................................................................... 8- 46 8.11.22.11 Removing the Pre-Confluence Sensor ............................................................................................................................. 8- 46 8.11.22.12 Removing the Post-Confluence Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 8- 46 8.11.22.13 Removing the Front Deck (lifter) Draw-Out Sensor.......................................................................................................... 8- 46 8.11.22.14 Removing the Horizontal Registration Sensor.................................................................................................................. 8- 46

8.11.23 Separation Roller ............................................................................................................................................... 8- 47

8.11.23.1 Removing the Separation Roller ........................................................................................................................................ 8- 47 8.11.23.2 Orientation of the Separation Roller ................................................................................................................................... 8- 47

8.11.24 Double Feeding Detection Sensor ( Transmission ) .......................................................................................... 8- 47

8.11.24.1 Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................................................................... 8- 47

Contents

8.11.24.2 Removing the Double-Feed Sensor (transmitting) ............................................................................................................. 8- 48

8.11.25 Double Feeding Detection Sensor ( Reception )................................................................................................8- 49

8.11.25.1 Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................................................................... 8- 49 8.11.25.2 Removing the Double-Feed Sensor (receiving) ................................................................................................................. 8- 49

Chapter 9 Fixing System 9.1 Construction ............................................................................................................................................... 9- 1

9.1.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................9- 1 9.1.2 Major Components...................................................................................................................................................9- 1 9.1.3 Overview of the Fixing Drive System .......................................................................................................................9- 2 9.1.4 Controlling the Fixing Roller Drive ...........................................................................................................................9- 3 9.1.5 Controlling the Cleaning Web Drive.........................................................................................................................9- 3 9.1.6 Controlling the Thermistor Reciprocating Mechanism .............................................................................................9- 4 9.1.7 Controlling the Upper Separation Claw Reciprocating Mechanism .........................................................................9- 4 9.1.8 Controlling the Fixing Inlet Sensor Drive..................................................................................................................9- 4

9.2 Basic Sequence ......................................................................................................................................... 9- 6

9.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations ................................................................................................................................9- 6

9.3 Various Control Mechanisms ..................................................................................................................... 9- 7

9.3.1 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature ...............................................................................................................9- 7
9.3.1.1 Controlling the Down Sequence .............................................................................................................................................. 9- 7 9.3.1.2 Transparency Mode ................................................................................................................................................................. 9- 7 9.3.1.3 Heavy Paper Mode .................................................................................................................................................................. 9- 8 9.3.1.4 Power Save Mode.................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 8

9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Bias Temperature .......................................................................................................9- 9

9.3.2.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................... 9- 9

9.4 Protective Functions ................................................................................................................................. 9- 10

9.4.1 Error Detection.......................................................................................................................................................9- 10

9.5 Parts Replacement Procedure ................................................................................................................. 9- 12

9.5.1 Fixing Unit ..............................................................................................................................................................9- 12
9.5.1.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly.............................................................................................................................................. 9- 12

9.5.2 Upper Fixing Roller ................................................................................................................................................9- 13

9.5.2.1 Removing the Fixing Upper Roller ......................................................................................................................................... 9- 13 9.5.2.2 Mounting the Fixing Upper Roller .......................................................................................................................................... 9- 14

9.5.3 Lower Fixing Roller ................................................................................................................................................9- 14

9.5.3.1 Removing the Lower Fixing Roller ......................................................................................................................................... 9- 14 9.5.3.2 Adjusting the Lower Roller Pressure (nip) ............................................................................................................................. 9- 14

9.5.4 External Delivery Roller .........................................................................................................................................9- 14

9.5.4.1 Removing the External Delivery Roller .................................................................................................................................. 9- 14

9.5.5 Internal Delivery Roller...........................................................................................................................................9- 15

9.5.5.1 Removing the Internal Delivery Roller ................................................................................................................................... 9- 15

9.5.6 Main Thermistor .....................................................................................................................................................9- 15

9.5.6.1 Removing the Main Thermistor.............................................................................................................................................. 9- 15 9.5.6.2 Mounting the Main Thermistor ............................................................................................................................................... 9- 16

9.5.7 Sub Thermistor ......................................................................................................................................................9- 16

9.5.7.1 Removing the Sub Thermistor ............................................................................................................................................... 9- 16

9.5.8 Thermal Switch ......................................................................................................................................................9- 16

9.5.8.1 Removing the Thermal Switch Unit........................................................................................................................................ 9- 16 9.5.8.2 Mounting the Thermal Switch Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 9- 16

9.5.9 Fixing Heater..........................................................................................................................................................9- 17

9.5.9.1 Removing the Main/Sub Heater............................................................................................................................................. 9- 17 9.5.9.2 Mounting the Main/Sub Heater .............................................................................................................................................. 9- 17 9.5.9.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Heater.................................................................................................................. 9- 17

9.5.10 Fixing Cleaning Belt .............................................................................................................................................9- 17

9.5.10.1 Removing the Fixing Cleaning Belt ...................................................................................................................................... 9- 17 9.5.10.2 Mounting the Fixing Cleaning Belt ....................................................................................................................................... 9- 18

9.5.11 Claw Jam Sensor .................................................................................................................................................9- 18

9.5.11.1 Removing the Claw Jam Sensor.......................................................................................................................................... 9- 18

Contents

9.5.12 External Delivery Sensor ..................................................................................................................................... 9- 19

9.5.12.1 Remove the External Delivery Sensor ................................................................................................................................. 9- 19

9.5.13 Internal Delivery Sensor ...................................................................................................................................... 9- 19

9.5.13.1 Removing the Internal Delivery Sensor................................................................................................................................ 9- 19

9.5.14 Reversal Sensor .................................................................................................................................................. 9- 19

9.5.14.1 Removing the Reversal Sensor ........................................................................................................................................... 9- 19

9.5.15 Fixing Inlet Sensor ............................................................................................................................................... 9- 19

9.5.15.1 Before Starting the Work...................................................................................................................................................... 9- 19 9.5.15.2 Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor/Fixing Inlet HP Sensor ................................................................................................... 9- 20

9.5.16 Fixing/Feeding Outlet Sensor .............................................................................................................................. 9- 20

9.5.16.1 Remove the Fixing/Feeder Unit Outlet Sensor .................................................................................................................... 9- 20

9.5.17 Delivery Speed Switch Clutch.............................................................................................................................. 9- 20

9.5.17.1 Removing the Delivery Speed Switching Clutch .................................................................................................................. 9- 20

9.5.18 Upper Separation Claw........................................................................................................................................ 9- 21

9.5.18.1 Removing the Upper Separation Claw................................................................................................................................. 9- 21

9.5.19 Lower Separation Claw........................................................................................................................................ 9- 21

9.5.19.1 Removing the Lower Separation Claw................................................................................................................................. 9- 21

Chapter 10 External and Controls 10.1 Control Panel ..........................................................................................................................................10- 1

10.1.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 1

10.2 Counters .................................................................................................................................................10- 1

10.2.1 Soft Counter......................................................................................................................................................... 10- 1

10.3 Fans ........................................................................................................................................................10- 2

10.3.1 Fans..................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 2 10.3.2 Sequence of Fan Operation................................................................................................................................. 10- 4

10.4 Power Supply System.............................................................................................................................10- 4

10.4.1 Power Supply....................................................................................................................................................... 10- 4
10.4.1.1 Overview of the Power Supply System ................................................................................................................................ 10- 4

10.4.2 Protection Function.............................................................................................................................................. 10- 5

10.4.2.1 Protective Functions............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 5

10.4.3 Backup Battery .................................................................................................................................................... 10- 5

10.4.3.1 Back-Up Battery ................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 5

10.4.4 Energy-Saving Function ...................................................................................................................................... 10- 6

10.4.4.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................................................. 10- 6 10.4.4.2 SNMP setup ......................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 7

10.5 Parts Replacement Procedure................................................................................................................10- 9

10.5.1 External Covers ................................................................................................................................................... 10- 9
10.5.1.1 Front Cover .......................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 9 10.5.1.2 Rear Cover........................................................................................................................................................................... 10- 9 10.5.1.3 Inside Upper Cover .............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 9 10.5.1.4 Fixing/Feeding Unit Cover.................................................................................................................................................... 10- 9 10.5.1.5 Upper Vertical Path Cover ................................................................................................................................................. 10- 10 10.5.1.6 Upper Front Cover Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 10- 10 10.5.1.7 Upper Rear Cover .............................................................................................................................................................. 10- 10 10.5.1.8 Main Controller Box Cover ................................................................................................................................................. 10- 10 10.5.1.9 System Connector Cover ................................................................................................................................................... 10- 10 10.5.1.10 Reader Controller Cover .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 11

10.5.2 Left Pickup Drive Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 10- 11

10.5.2.1 Removing the Left Pickup Drive Assembly ........................................................................................................................ 10- 11

10.5.3 Pickup Drive Assembly ...................................................................................................................................... 10- 11

10.5.3.1 Removing the Pickup Drive Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 10- 11

10.5.4 Developing Drive Assembly............................................................................................................................... 10- 12

10.5.4.1 Removing the Developing Drive Assembly ........................................................................................................................ 10- 12

10.5.5 Vertical Path Drive Assembly ............................................................................................................................ 10- 12

10.5.5.1 Removing the Vertical Path Drive Assembly...................................................................................................................... 10- 12

10.5.6 Waste Toner Drive Assembly ............................................................................................................................ 10- 13

Contents

10.5.6.1 Removing the Waste Toner Drive Assembly ..................................................................................................................... 10- 13

10.5.7 Multifeeder Pickup Drive Assembly....................................................................................................................10- 13

10.5.7.1 Removing the Multifeeder Pickup Drive Assembly ............................................................................................................ 10- 13

10.5.8 Lifter Drive Assembly .........................................................................................................................................10- 13

10.5.8.1 Removing the Lifter Drive Assembly (right deck) ............................................................................................................... 10- 13 10.5.8.2 Removing the Lifter Drive Assembly (left deck) ................................................................................................................. 10- 14

10.5.9 Main Drive Assembly .........................................................................................................................................10- 14

10.5.9.1 Removing the Main Drive Assembly .................................................................................................................................. 10- 14

10.5.10 Drum Drive Assembly.......................................................................................................................................10- 14

10.5.10.1 Removing the Drum Drive Assembly ............................................................................................................................... 10- 14

10.5.11 Cassette Pickup Drive Assembly .....................................................................................................................10- 15

10.5.11.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Drive Assembly .............................................................................................................. 10- 15

10.5.12 Power Supply Unit............................................................................................................................................10- 15

10.5.12.1 Removing the Power Supply Unit..................................................................................................................................... 10- 15

10.5.13 Control Panel....................................................................................................................................................10- 16

10.5.13.1 Removing the Control Panel ............................................................................................................................................ 10- 16 10.5.13.2 Removing the Control Panel Interface PCB ..................................................................................................................... 10- 17

10.5.14 Control Panel LCD Unit ....................................................................................................................................10- 17

10.5.14.1 Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 17 10.5.14.2 Removing the Control Panel LCD .................................................................................................................................... 10- 17

10.5.15 Cover Switch Assembly....................................................................................................................................10- 17

10.5.15.1 Removing the Front Cover Switch Assembly ................................................................................................................... 10- 17

10.5.16 Manual Feed Tray Switch Assembly ................................................................................................................10- 18

10.5.16.1 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Switch Assembly......................................................................................................... 10- 18

10.5.17 Drum Heater Switch Assembly.........................................................................................................................10- 18

10.5.17.1 Removing the Drum Heater Switch Assembly ................................................................................................................. 10- 18

10.5.18 DC Controller PCB ...........................................................................................................................................10- 18

10.5.18.1 Removing the DC Controller PCB .................................................................................................................................... 10- 18 10.5.18.2 After Replacing the DC Controller PCB............................................................................................................................ 10- 18

10.5.19 Control Panel Inverter PCB ..............................................................................................................................10- 19

10.5.19.1 Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 19 10.5.19.2 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB....................................................................................................................... 10- 19

10.5.20 Control Panel Key Switch PCB ........................................................................................................................10- 19

10.5.20.1 Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 19 10.5.20.2 Removing the Control Panel KEY PCB............................................................................................................................ 10- 20

10.5.21 Control Panel Family PCB................................................................................................................................10- 20

10.5.21.1 Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 20 10.5.21.2 Removing the Control Panel LED PCB ............................................................................................................................ 10- 20

10.5.22 Control Panel CPU PCB...................................................................................................................................10- 20

10.5.22.1 Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 20 10.5.22.2 Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB ........................................................................................................................... 10- 21

10.5.23 AC Driver PCB .................................................................................................................................................10- 21

10.5.23.1 Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 21 10.5.23.2 Removing the AC Driver PCB .......................................................................................................................................... 10- 21

10.5.24 All Night Power Supply PCB ............................................................................................................................10- 21

10.5.24.1 Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 21 10.5.24.2 Removing the All Night Power Supply PCB ..................................................................................................................... 10- 21

10.5.25 Relay PCB........................................................................................................................................................10- 21

10.5.25.1 Removing the Relay PCB................................................................................................................................................. 10- 21

10.5.26 High-Voltage Transformer (AC)........................................................................................................................10- 22

10.5.26.1 Removing the High-Voltage Transformer Assembly (AC)................................................................................................ 10- 22

10.5.27 HV-AC PCB......................................................................................................................................................10- 22

10.5.27.1 Removing the HV-AC PCB............................................................................................................................................... 10- 22

10.5.28 HV-DC PCB......................................................................................................................................................10- 22

10.5.28.1 Removing the HV-DC PCB .............................................................................................................................................. 10- 22 10.5.28.2 After Replacing the HV-DC PCB ...................................................................................................................................... 10- 22

10.5.29 High-Voltage PCB ............................................................................................................................................10- 23

10.5.29.1 Removing the High-Voltage Assembly............................................................................................................................. 10- 23

10.5.30 Motor Driver PCB .............................................................................................................................................10- 23

Contents

10.5.30.1 Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 23 10.5.30.2 Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor Lift Motor Driver PCB ................................................................................................. 10- 23

10.5.31 Transceiver PCB.............................................................................................................................................. 10- 23

10.5.31.1 Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 23 10.5.31.2 Removing the Transceiver PCB ....................................................................................................................................... 10- 24

10.5.32 Double Feeding Detection PCB ( Transmission ) ............................................................................................ 10- 25

10.5.32.1 Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 25 10.5.32.2 Removing the Double-Feed Detection Unit (transmitting)................................................................................................ 10- 25

10.5.33 Double Feeding Detection PCB ( Reception ) ................................................................................................. 10- 25

10.5.33.1 Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 25 10.5.33.2 Removing the Double-Feed Detection Unit (reception).................................................................................................... 10- 25

10.5.34 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan .............................................................................................................................. 10- 25

10.5.34.1 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan (FM2) ............................................................................................................. 10- 25

10.5.35 Laser Cooling Fan............................................................................................................................................ 10- 25

10.5.35.1 Removing the Laser Motor Cooling Fan (FM1) ................................................................................................................ 10- 25 10.5.35.2 Removing the Laser Cooling Fan 1 (FM3) ....................................................................................................................... 10- 26

10.5.36 De-Curling Fan................................................................................................................................................. 10- 26

10.5.36.1 Removing the Curl-Removing Fan ................................................................................................................................... 10- 26

10.5.37 Drum Fan ......................................................................................................................................................... 10- 26

10.5.37.1 Removing the Drum Fan (FM8)........................................................................................................................................ 10- 26

10.5.38 Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly Fan ............................................................................................................. 10- 27

10.5.38.1 Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly Fan (FM10) .......................................................................................... 10- 27

10.5.39 Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 ........................................................................................................................... 10- 27

10.5.39.1 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 (FM11) ........................................................................................................ 10- 27

10.5.40 Power Supply Cooling Fan 2 ........................................................................................................................... 10- 27

10.5.40.1 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan 2 (FM12) ........................................................................................................ 10- 27

10.5.41 Separation Fan ................................................................................................................................................ 10- 28

10.5.41.1 Removing the Separation Fan (FM13) ............................................................................................................................. 10- 28

10.5.42 Developing Fan................................................................................................................................................ 10- 28

10.5.42.1 Removing the Developing Fan (FM15) ............................................................................................................................ 10- 28

10.5.43 Delivery Anti-Adhesion Fan ............................................................................................................................. 10- 28

10.5.43.1 Removing the Delivery Anti-Adhesion Fan (FM17) .......................................................................................................... 10- 28

10.5.44 Duplex Feed Fan ............................................................................................................................................. 10- 28

10.5.44.1 Removing the Duplex Feed Fan (FM19) .......................................................................................................................... 10- 28

10.5.45 Separation Heat Discharge Fan....................................................................................................................... 10- 29

10.5.45.1 Removing the Separation Heat Discharge Fan (FM20) ................................................................................................... 10- 29

10.5.46 Reader Heat Discharge Fan 2 ......................................................................................................................... 10- 29

10.5.46.1 Removing the Reader Heat Discharge Fan 2 .................................................................................................................. 10- 29

10.5.47 Fixing Inlet Sensor Motor ................................................................................................................................. 10- 29

10.5.47.1 Before Starting the Work .................................................................................................................................................. 10- 29 10.5.47.2 Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor Lifter Motor ................................................................................................................. 10- 29

Chapter 11 MEAP 11.1 MEAP......................................................................................................................................................11- 1

11.1.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................................................. 11- 1 11.1.2 MEAP Counter..................................................................................................................................................... 11- 1 11.1.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform ..................................................................................................................... 11- 1 11.1.4 Checking the Operating Environment.................................................................................................................. 11- 2 11.1.5 Setting Up the Network........................................................................................................................................ 11- 5 11.1.6 Setting the method to login to SMS ..................................................................................................................... 11- 6 11.1.7 Login to SMS ....................................................................................................................................................... 11- 9 11.1.8 Checking Application List................................................................................................................................... 11- 11 11.1.9 Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application ....................................................................................................... 11- 12 11.1.10 Checking the Platform Information................................................................................................................... 11- 13 11.1.11 MEAP Specifications........................................................................................................................................ 11- 14 11.1.12 Checking the System Information of a MEAP Application with SMS ............................................................... 11- 15 11.1.13 Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application .................................................................................. 11- 16

Contents

11.1.14 Reference (Application System Information)....................................................................................................11- 17 11.1.15 Installing an Application....................................................................................................................................11- 18 11.1.16 MEAP Enterprise Service Manager..................................................................................................................11- 20 11.1.17 Adding a License File .......................................................................................................................................11- 21 11.1.18 Disabling a License File (suspending a license) ..............................................................................................11- 23 11.1.19 Downloading/Removing an Invalidated License File........................................................................................11- 25 11.1.20 Reusable license ..............................................................................................................................................11- 27 11.1.21 License for forwarding ......................................................................................................................................11- 27 11.1.22 Uninstalling an Application ...............................................................................................................................11- 30 11.1.23 Changing Login Services .................................................................................................................................11- 31 11.1.24 Initializing the Password...................................................................................................................................11- 35 11.1.25 Creating a Backup for MEAP Application Area, Formatting the Hard Disk, Restoring the MEAP Application Area with the Backup, Using the SST (Service Support Tool)..........................................................................................11- 36 11.1.26 Replacing the Hard Disk Drive .........................................................................................................................11- 38 11.1.27 MEAP Safe Mode.............................................................................................................................................11- 38 11.1.28 Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2) ............................................................................................11- 39 11.1.29 Reference material ...........................................................................................................................................11- 42 11.1.30 Option for exclusive individual measure...........................................................................................................11- 43

Chapter 12 e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote 12.1 e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote..................................................................................................... 12- 1

12.1.1 Application operation mode..................................................................................................................................12- 1 12.1.2 Service Center URL and Port Specification .........................................................................................................12- 1 12.1.3 Communication test .............................................................................................................................................12- 1 12.1.4 Communication log ..............................................................................................................................................12- 1 12.1.5 Detailed Communication log ................................................................................................................................12- 1 12.1.6 SOAP communication function ............................................................................................................................12- 1 12.1.7 Resend at SOAP transmission error ....................................................................................................................12- 2 12.1.8 e-RDS setting screen ...........................................................................................................................................12- 2 12.1.9 Sleep operation ....................................................................................................................................................12- 4 12.1.10 Network Setting (Maintenance) ..........................................................................................................................12- 4 12.1.11 e-RDS Setting (Maintenance) ............................................................................................................................12- 4 12.1.12 Trouble shoot .....................................................................................................................................................12- 5 12.1.13 Error message....................................................................................................................................................12- 5

Chapter 13 Maintenance and Inspection 13.1 Periodically Replaced Parts.................................................................................................................... 13- 1

13.1.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................................13- 1 13.1.2 Machine Proper....................................................................................................................................................13- 1

13.2 Durables and Consumables ................................................................................................................... 13- 1

13.2.1 Overview ..............................................................................................................................................................13- 1 13.2.2 Machine Proper....................................................................................................................................................13- 1

13.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure ................................................................................................... 13- 3

13.3.1 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure .................................................................................................................13- 3 13.3.2 Scheduled Servicing Chart...................................................................................................................................13- 5 13.3.3 Scheduled Maintenance Work Procedure............................................................................................................13- 7 13.3.4 Points to Note About Schedule Servicing ..........................................................................................................13- 11

Chapter 14 Standards and Adjustments 14.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure ....................................................................................................... 14- 1
14.1.1 Making Pre-Checks..............................................................................................................................................14- 1 14.1.2 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking the Images).................................................................................14- 1 14.1.3 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking the Density Slope) ......................................................................14- 2

Contents

14.1.4 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking the Solid Black Density) ............................................................. 14- 3 14.1.5 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking for fogging) ................................................................................. 14- 4 14.1.6 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking Halftone Density)........................................................................ 14- 4 14.1.7 Making Checks on the Reader Unit ..................................................................................................................... 14- 5 14.1.8 Potential Control System Conversion Table ........................................................................................................ 14- 7

14.2 Image Adjustments ...............................................................................................................................14- 11

14.2.1 Standards of Image Position.............................................................................................................................. 14- 11 14.2.2 Checking the Image Position ............................................................................................................................. 14- 11 14.2.3 Adjusting Side Registration................................................................................................................................ 14- 11 14.2.4 Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Margin........................................................................................................ 14- 13 14.2.5 Adjusting the Left/Right Non-Image Width......................................................................................................... 14- 13 14.2.6 Adjusting the Leading Edge Non-Image Width.................................................................................................. 14- 13

14.3 Scanning System ..................................................................................................................................14- 13

14.3.1 When Replacing Components of the Scanning System .................................................................................... 14- 13 14.3.2 Adjusting the Position of the No. 1/No. 2 Mirror Base ....................................................................................... 14- 13

14.4 Laser Exposure System........................................................................................................................14- 14

14.4.1 When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit........................................................................................................... 14- 14

14.5 Image Formation System......................................................................................................................14- 14

14.5.1 Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire......................................................................................................... 14- 14

14.6 Fixing System .......................................................................................................................................14- 14

14.6.1 Adjusting the Lower Roller Pressure (nip) ......................................................................................................... 14- 14 14.6.2 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Heater.............................................................................................. 14- 15

14.7 Electrical Components ..........................................................................................................................14- 15

14.7.1 After Replacing the Hard Disk ........................................................................................................................... 14- 15 14.7.2 After Replacing the Main Controller................................................................................................................... 14- 15 14.7.3 After Replacing the DC Controller PCB ............................................................................................................. 14- 16 14.7.4 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB ...................................................................................................... 14- 17 14.7.5 After Replacing the HV-DC PCB ....................................................................................................................... 14- 17 14.7.6 When Replacing the Potential Sensor/Potential Control PCB ........................................................................... 14- 17 14.7.7 Checking the Surface Potential Control System................................................................................................ 14- 18 14.7.8 Checking the Environment Sensor .................................................................................................................... 14- 19

14.8 Pickup/Feeding System ........................................................................................................................14- 19

14.8.1 Orientation of the Deck/Cassette Pickup Roller................................................................................................. 14- 19 14.8.2 Orientation of the Deck/Cassette Separation Roller .......................................................................................... 14- 19 14.8.3 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Deck/Cassette Pickup Assembly ........................................................ 14- 20 14.8.4 Orientation of the Manual Feed Tray/Side Paper Deck Pickup Roller ............................................................... 14- 20 14.8.5 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Manual Feed Tray............................................................................... 14- 20 14.8.6 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Side Paper Deck................................................................................. 14- 20 14.8.7 Adjusting the Pressure of the Deck/Cassette Separation Roller ....................................................................... 14- 20 14.8.8 Adjusting the Pressure of the Pickup/Feeding Roller of the Manual.................................................................. 14- 21 14.8.9 Location of the solenoids ................................................................................................................................... 14- 21 14.8.10 Position of the Fixing Web Solenoid (SL2) ...................................................................................................... 14- 21 14.8.11 Position of the Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL3) .............................................................................................. 14- 22 14.8.12 Position the Fixing/Feeder Unit Locking Solenoid (SL4).................................................................................. 14- 22 14.8.13 Position of the Multifeeder Latch Solenoid (SL6)............................................................................................. 14- 22 14.8.14 Position of the Deck (right) Pickup Solenoid (SL7) .......................................................................................... 14- 22 14.8.15 Position of the Deck (Left) Pickup Solenoid (SL8) ........................................................................................... 14- 22 14.8.16 Position of the Cassette 3/4 Pickup Solenoid (SL9/10) ................................................................................... 14- 23 14.8.17 Position of the Side Paper Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid ................................................................ 14- 23 14.8.18 Fitting the Side Guide Timing Belt of the Manual Feed Tray Assembly........................................................... 14- 23 14.8.19 Fitting the Drive Belt......................................................................................................................................... 14- 23 14.8.20 Cleaning the Double-Feed Sensor (transmission) ........................................................................................... 14- 23

Chapter 15 Correcting Faulty Images

Contents

15.1 Making Initial Checks.............................................................................................................................. 15- 1

15.1.1 Checking the Side of Installation..........................................................................................................................15- 1 15.1.2 Checking the Originals .........................................................................................................................................15- 1 15.1.3 Checking the Copyboard Cover, Copyboard Glass, and Standard White Plate ..................................................15- 1 15.1.4 Checking the Charging Assemblies .....................................................................................................................15- 1 15.1.5 Cheiking the Develop Unit....................................................................................................................................15- 1 15.1.6 Checking the Paper..............................................................................................................................................15- 1 15.1.7 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts ...........................................................................................................15- 1 15.1.8 Others ..................................................................................................................................................................15- 1

15.2 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................................... 15- 1

15.2.1 Image Faults ........................................................................................................................................................15- 1
15.2.1.1 Light Image/Weak Density ................................................................................................................................................... 15- 1 15.2.1.2 Uneven Density.................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 2 15.2.1.3 Image Displacement/Out of Focus....................................................................................................................................... 15- 2 15.2.1.4 Partially Blank/Streaked ....................................................................................................................................................... 15- 3 15.2.1.5 Smudged/Streaked .............................................................................................................................................................. 15- 5

15.2.2 Faulty Feeding .....................................................................................................................................................15- 7

15.2.2.1 Double-Feed/ Multiple Feed................................................................................................................................................. 15- 7 15.2.2.2 Skew Feed ........................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 8 15.2.2.3 Fold/Rip................................................................................................................................................................................ 15- 9 15.2.2.4 Ripple/Curl ........................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 9 15.2.2.5 Wrap................................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 10

15.2.3 Malfunction.........................................................................................................................................................15- 10
15.2.3.1 Control Panel-Related........................................................................................................................................................ 15- 10 15.2.3.2 Malfunction/Faulty Detection.............................................................................................................................................. 15- 11 15.2.3.3 Noise .................................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 14 15.2.3.4 User Warning Message...................................................................................................................................................... 15- 14 15.2.3.5 Other Defect....................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 18 15.2.3.6 Part Breakage/Detachment................................................................................................................................................ 15- 29

15.2.4 Network ..............................................................................................................................................................15- 32

15.2.4.1 Ping Failure ........................................................................................................................................................................ 15- 32 15.2.4.2 Connection Problem........................................................................................................................................................... 15- 33

15.2.5 Transmission/fax-related....................................................................................................................................15- 34
15.2.5.1 Transmission Problem ....................................................................................................................................................... 15- 34 15.2.5.2 Other Operational Defect ................................................................................................................................................... 15- 34 15.2.5.3 Setting/Registration Defect ................................................................................................................................................ 15- 34

15.2.6 Jam (Main Unit)..................................................................................................................................................15- 34

15.2.6.1 Numeral number "51" is indicated on "L (location)" column of Jam History of machine: High Capacity Stacker-A1 ......... 15- 34 15.2.6.2 0101/0114 Jam Code: Right Lock Plate has moved out of place ...................................................................................... 15- 34 15.2.6.3 0105 Jam Code: Deck Feed Clutch of Side Paper Deck-X1 slips ..................................................................................... 15- 35 15.2.6.4 0119 Jam Code/Abnormal sound occurs upon installation: Friction between separation (sponge) roller and feed roller found in Manual Feeder is high................................................................................................................................................................ 15- 35 15.2.6.5 020C Jam Code: Due to malfunction of external delivery sensor flag ............................................................................... 15- 35 15.2.6.6 0216 Jam Code: Because spring of Multiple curling prevention sensor lever comes off ................................................... 15- 36

15.2.7 Jam (Document Feeder) ....................................................................................................................................15- 36

15.2.7.1 0064 Jam Code appears after leaving this machine for long period of time: Pre-reversal flapper of DADF-Q1causes malfunction 15- 36 15.2.7.2 0094 Jam Code: Separation sensor (S4) of DADF-Q1 is faulty......................................................................................... 15- 37

15.2.8 Jam (FIN) ...........................................................................................................................................................15- 37

15.2.8.1 1422 Jam code Saddle Finisher-V2 indicates : Front cover open sensor (PS1) makes false detection............................ 15- 37 15.2.8.2 1004 Jam Code: Because tape that fixes Shift Assembly inside Finisher is not removed................................................. 15- 38 15.2.8.3 1004/1103/1721 Jam Code occurs, then 1320 Jam Code occurs when turning Finisher off/ on: Guide rotation shaft of FinisherV1/V2 is deformed...................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 38 15.2.8.4 1004 Jam Code: Mylar sheet of Finisher-V1/V1L and Saddle Finisher- V2/V2L breaks.................................................... 15- 39 15.2.8.5 1006 Jam Code: Because transparency is not selected as paper type for Stack Bypass ................................................. 15- 39 15.2.8.6 1109 Jam Code: Paper curled downward comes into contact with surface of paper waiting in Buffer area of Finisher-V1/V1L/ V2/V2L........................................................................................................................................................................................ 15- 39 15.2.8.7 1143/114B Jam Code occurs when using LTR-R size paper with Finisher-V2/V2L causes Aligning plate malfunctions .. 15- 40 15.2.8.8 1143 Jam Code: Flapper of Finisher-V2/V2l comes off ..................................................................................................... 15- 40 15.2.8.9 1145 Jam Code occurs when using A4R-size paper: Timing Belt of Saddle Assembly in Saddle Finisher-V2 slips off.... 15- 41

Contents

15.2.8.10 1185 Jam Code: Solenoid (SL74) of Paper Folding Unit-D1 is mounted incorrectly........................................................ 15- 41 15.2.8.11 11C7 Jam Code: E0005a7-11C7 Drive belt of Trimer-B1 has low tension (Trimmer-B1) ................................................ 15- 42 15.2.8.12 1320 Jam Code does not disappear upon installation of Saddle Finisher-V2: Connector of Finisher Controller PCB has poor contact........................................................................................................................................................................................ 15- 43 15.2.8.13 17DE Jam Code (Saddle Finishr-V2 + Booklet Trimmer-B1) ........................................................................................... 15- 43 15.2.8.14 17DE Jam Code occurs when performing saddle-stitch jobs continuously (Saddle Finishr-V2 + Booklet Trimmer-B1).. 15- 43 15.2.8.15 1F25 Jam Code/ 110D Jam Code occurs when switching job mode from two-sided to one-sided (iR7095i + Perfect Binder-A1 + Saddle Finisher-V2) ................................................................................................................................................................ 15- 44

15.2.9 Error Code ......................................................................................................................................................... 15- 44

15.2.9.1 E003-0000 Error Code: J508 on DC controller PCB has poor contact .............................................................................. 15- 44 15.2.9.2 E003-0000 is displayed upon recovery from sleep mode: Noise affects thermistor line.................................................... 15- 44 15.2.9.3 E004-0001 Error Code: Main heater has short-circuit........................................................................................................ 15- 44 15.2.9.4 E010-0000 Error Code: Because J1702 connector of Relay PCB has poor contact ......................................................... 15- 44 15.2.9.5 E012 Error Code: J1721 connector on Relay PCB has poor contact ................................................................................ 15- 44 15.2.9.6 E013-0000 Error Code: Because J512 connector on DC controller PCB has poor contact .............................................. 15- 45 15.2.9.7 E013-0010 Error Code: Because Error Clear is not executed in service mode ................................................................. 15- 45 15.2.9.8 E014-0000 Error Code: Because J1720 connector of Relay PCB has poor contact ......................................................... 15- 45 15.2.9.9 E020-0009 : Hopper Assembly causes malfunction .......................................................................................................... 15- 45 15.2.9.10 E025 Error Code: Because Connector on Relay PCB has poor contact.......................................................................... 15- 45 15.2.9.11 E110-0000 Error Code occurs when progress bar runs its entire length: Because In primary cover is mounted improperly 1545 15.2.9.12 E110 Error Code: Because J507/J506 of DC controller PCB has poor contact............................................................... 15- 46 15.2.9.13 E110-0000 Error Code: Because Relay PCB is faulty ..................................................................................................... 15- 46 15.2.9.14 E110 Error Code occurs because primary corona assembly cover is removed with machine remained supplied with power .. 15- 46 15.2.9.15 E121-0002 Error Code: Because J512 on DC controller PCB has poor contact ............................................................. 15- 46 15.2.9.16 E197 Error Code: Because Transfer/Separation Corona Assembly is mounted incorrectly ............................................ 15- 46 15.2.9.17 E197 Error Code: Due to noise of bias applied to Transfer Guide ................................................................................... 15- 47 15.2.9.18 E202 Error Code: Scanner lamp fixing screw is not removed during installation (iR7095) .............................................. 15- 47 15.2.9.19 E220 Scanning lamp fails to come on (iR8570N)............................................................................................................. 15- 48 15.2.9.20 E225-0001 light image: ADJ-S (shading correction data measurement position) setting is incorrect .............................. 15- 48 15.2.9.21 E227-0004/E500-0001/E711-0001/E732-0001 Error Code: Due to lack of power capacity (iR7086N equipped with FinisherV1L)............................................................................................................................................................................................ 15- 48 15.2.9.22 E500 Error Code: Because procedure taht should be performed after replacement of DC controller PCB is not carried out completely .................................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 49 15.2.9.23 E500-0001/E711-0001 Error Code: Terminator is not connected to signal cable ............................................................ 15- 49 15.2.9.24 E503-0003 Communication error occurs between Professional-A1 and Finisher-V1/V2 ................................................. 15- 50 15.2.9.25 E505-0001 is shared between Finisher-V1/V2 and Perfect Binder-A1 ............................................................................ 15- 51 15.2.9.26 E509-0003 occurs when replacing the master controller on Perfect Binder-A1............................................................... 15- 51 15.2.9.27 E532-8001/E566-8002 J805 connector on Upper Door Switch (MSW71) found in Paper Folding Unit-D1 is disconnected 1551 15.2.9.28 E532-8002/E531-8001 As jammed paper is pulled out, upper part of stapler unit of Finisher-V1/V2 gets stuck............. 15- 52 15.2.9.29 E540-8002 Description on position of Tray A Area Sensor.............................................................................................. 15- 52 15.2.9.30 E567-8001 Error Code is indicated upon startup: FU274 of Feeder Motor Driver PCB on Saddle Finisher-V2 blows .... 15- 52 15.2.9.31 E567-8001 : Due to faulty horizontal shift motor (M7) of Saddle Finisher-V2, fuse (FU274) on Feeder Motor Driver PCB blows 15- 52 15.2.9.32 E578-8001 Error Code/110D Jam Code: Meshing failure occurs between rack and gear of variable lever found in Finisher-V1/ V1L/V2/V2L ................................................................................................................................................................................ 15- 53 15.2.9.33 E583-8001 is displayed when this machine starts: FU274 on Feeder Motor Driver PCB of Finisher-V1/V2 blows ......... 15- 53 15.2.9.34 E5A4 : caused by locked press ball screw in trimming assembly, Perfect Binder-A1...................................................... 15- 53 15.2.9.35 E5AD-8001 Wire saddle is mounted onto hole for unlocking Book Stacking Assembly of Perfect Binder-A1 ................. 15- 54 15.2.9.36 E5B5-8002/E5AB-8003 occurs because spread glue amount is excessive: How to perform glue amount adjustment (adjustment by stack thickness) on Perfect Binder-A1............................................................................................................... 15- 55 15.2.9.37 E5B5-8013 Registration sensors of Perfect Binder-A1 have poor sensitivity................................................................... 15- 55 15.2.9.38 E5B5-8017 : due to damage of glew roller cable, Perfect Binder-A1 ............................................................................... 15- 55 15.2.9.39 E5BB-0005 : Spine Plate Closed Sensor (S69) of Perfect Binder-A1 has broken cable wire.......................................... 15- 55 15.2.9.40 E5D4-8007 Error in gluing: Packing tape is not removed during installation of Perfect Binder-A1 .................................. 15- 55 15.2.9.41 E5F1-8001 Error code with 104A/114B/147 Jam Code when performing saddle-stitch job using out-of-spec heavy paper on Saddle Finisher-V2..................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 56 15.2.9.42 E711-0001 Message "Check the finisher." is displayed: FU414 on AC Fuse Box PCB on Finisher-V1/V1L/V2/V2L blows . 1556 15.2.9.43 E721-0061 occurs upon power-on after installing iR7105s V2 and Perfect Binder-A1 .................................................... 15- 57 15.2.9.44 E730/E503 Error Code occurs with machine equipped with such delivery options as Finisher and so on: Because delivery

Contents options are shut down in wrong order ........................................................................................................................................ 15- 57 15.2.9.45 E732 Error Code: Occurs at irregular-size original stream-reading with DADF-Q1 in use............................................... 15- 57 15.2.9.46 E732-0001 Error Code: Because J1702 connector of Relay PCB has poor contact ....................................................... 15- 58 15.2.9.47 E732-0001 Error Code occurs upon installation: Left reader power supply cable has poor contact................................ 15- 58 15.2.9.48 E733-0001 Error Code: Poor contact between Main Controller PCB and Video Controller PCB .................................... 15- 58 15.2.9.49 E748-4910 Error Code: Different Main Controller PCB is mounted ................................................................................. 15- 58 15.2.9.50 E840 Error Code: J553 connector on DC controller PCB has poor contact..................................................................... 15- 58

15.2.10 Alarm Code ......................................................................................................................................................15- 59

15.2.10.1 300003 Alarm Code: Due to foreign substance under charging wire of Transfer/separation Charging Assembly .......... 15- 59

15.2.11 FAX # Code......................................................................................................................................................15- 59

15.2.11.1 #857 FAX Error Code is displayed when printing............................................................................................................. 15- 59

15.2.12 Specifications-related FAQ...............................................................................................................................15- 59

15.2.12.1 FAQ on Main Unit Specifications...................................................................................................................................... 15- 59 15.2.12.2 FAQ on LIPS Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 15- 66

15.3 Outline of Electrical Components ......................................................................................................... 15- 66

15.3.1 Clutch/Solenoid ..................................................................................................................................................15- 66
15.3.1.1 Clutches ............................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 66 15.3.1.2 Solenoids ........................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 68

15.3.2 Motor ..................................................................................................................................................................15- 68

15.3.2.1 Motors ................................................................................................................................................................................ 15- 68

15.3.3 Fan .....................................................................................................................................................................15- 70

15.3.3.1 Fans ................................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 70

15.3.4 Sensor................................................................................................................................................................15- 72
15.3.4.1 Sensor (reader) .................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 72 15.3.4.2 Sensor 1............................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 73 15.3.4.3 Sensor 2............................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 76

15.3.5 Switch.................................................................................................................................................................15- 76
15.3.5.1 Switches............................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 76

15.3.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ..............................................................................................................................15- 77

15.3.6.1 Heaters, Lamps, and Others .............................................................................................................................................. 15- 77

15.3.7 PCBs ..................................................................................................................................................................15- 78

15.3.7.1 PCBs .................................................................................................................................................................................. 15- 78

15.3.8 Connectors.........................................................................................................................................................15- 81
15.3.8.1 Connectors......................................................................................................................................................................... 15- 81

15.3.9 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB...............................................15- 88
15.3.9.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB............................................................... 15- 88 15.3.9.2 Main controller PCB ........................................................................................................................................................... 15- 88 15.3.9.3 Main controller PCB (up graded version) ........................................................................................................................... 15- 89 15.3.9.4 DC controller PCB.............................................................................................................................................................. 15- 89

Chapter 16 Self Diagnosis 16.1 Error Code Table .................................................................................................................................... 16- 1

16.1.1 Error Code Table..................................................................................................................................................16- 1

16.2 Error Code Details .................................................................................................................................. 16- 3

16.2.1 Error Code Details................................................................................................................................................16- 3 16.2.2 E602 Detail.........................................................................................................................................................16- 10

16.3 Jam Code ............................................................................................................................................. 16- 12

16.3.1 Jam Code (printer) .............................................................................................................................................16- 12 16.3.2 Jam Code (DADF-Q1)........................................................................................................................................16- 12 16.3.3 Jam Code (Delivery Accessories) ......................................................................................................................16- 14

16.4 Alarm Code........................................................................................................................................... 16- 17

16.4.1 Alarm Code ........................................................................................................................................................16- 17

Chapter 17 Service Mode 17.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 17- 1

17.1.1 Service mode screen configuration......................................................................................................................17- 1

Contents

17.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes.................................................................................................................... 17- 2 17.1.3 Exiting service modes.......................................................................................................................................... 17- 2 17.1.4 Backing Up Service Mode ................................................................................................................................... 17- 2 17.1.5 Initial screen......................................................................................................................................................... 17- 3 17.1.6 Main/intermediate item screen............................................................................................................................. 17- 3 17.1.7 Sub-item screen................................................................................................................................................... 17- 4

17.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) ............................................................................................................17- 5

17.2.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................................... 17- 5
17.2.1.1 COPIER Items...................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 5

17.2.2 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................................ 17- 11

17.2.2.1 FEEDER Items................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 11

17.3 I/O (I/O Display Mode) ..........................................................................................................................17- 13

17.3.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................ 17- 13 17.3.2 <DC-CON> ........................................................................................................................................................ 17- 13 17.3.3 <R-CON>........................................................................................................................................................... 17- 18 17.3.4 <FEEDER> ........................................................................................................................................................ 17- 19 17.3.5 <SORTER> (P001-P067) .................................................................................................................................. 17- 21 17.3.6 <SORTER> (P068-P100) .................................................................................................................................. 17- 29 17.3.7 <SORTER> (P101-P171) .................................................................................................................................. 17- 37 17.3.8 <MN-CONT>...................................................................................................................................................... 17- 42

17.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode).................................................................................................................17- 43

17.4.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................................. 17- 43
17.4.1.1 COPIER Items.................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 43

17.4.2 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................................ 17- 49

17.4.2.1 FEEDER Items................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 49

17.4.3 SORTER............................................................................................................................................................ 17- 50

17.4.3.1 SORTER Items .................................................................................................................................................................. 17- 50

17.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode).............................................................................................17- 54

17.5.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................................. 17- 54
17.5.1.1 COPIER Items.................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 54

17.5.2 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................................ 17- 61

17.5.2.1 FEEDER Items................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 61

17.5.3 SORTER............................................................................................................................................................ 17- 63

17.5.3.1 SORTER Items .................................................................................................................................................................. 17- 63

17.6 OPTION (Machine Settings Mode) .......................................................................................................17- 64

17.6.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................................. 17- 64
17.6.1.1 COPIER Items.................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 64 17.6.1.2 Soft Counter Specifications................................................................................................................................................ 17- 85

17.6.2 FEEDER ............................................................................................................................................................ 17- 92

17.6.2.1 FEEDER Items................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 92

17.6.3 SORTER............................................................................................................................................................ 17- 93

17.6.3.1 SORTER Items .................................................................................................................................................................. 17- 93

17.6.4 BOARD .............................................................................................................................................................. 17- 94

17.6.4.1 BOARD Items..................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 94

17.7 TEST (Test Print Mode) ........................................................................................................................17- 94

17.7.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................................. 17- 94
17.7.1.1 COPIER Items.................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 94

17.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode) ..................................................................................................................17- 96

17.8.1 COPIER ............................................................................................................................................................. 17- 96
17.8.1.1 COPIER Items.................................................................................................................................................................... 17- 96

Chapter 18 Upgrading 18.1 Outline ....................................................................................................................................................18- 1

18.1.1 Overview of Upgrading Work............................................................................................................................... 18- 1 18.1.2 Outline of the Functions and Operations ............................................................................................................. 18- 2 18.1.3 Points to Note at Time of Downloading ............................................................................................................... 18- 4

Contents

18.2 Making Preparations............................................................................................................................... 18- 5

18.2.1 Installing the System Software (System CD -> SST) ...........................................................................................18- 5 18.2.2 Copying the System Software (SST -> USB).......................................................................................................18- 6 18.2.3 Making Connections (SST in use)........................................................................................................................18- 8 18.2.4 Making Connections (USB device in use)............................................................................................................18- 9

18.3 Formatting the HDD.............................................................................................................................. 18- 10

18.3.1 Formatting the HDD for All Partition...................................................................................................................18- 10 18.3.2 Formatting the HDD for Selected Partitions .......................................................................................................18- 11 18.3.3 Formatting the Partitions ....................................................................................................................................18- 11

18.4 Downloading System Software............................................................................................................. 18- 13

18.4.1 Downloading the System Software (ALL) ..........................................................................................................18- 13
18.4.1.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 18- 13 18.4.1.2 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 18- 13

18.4.2 Downloading the System Software (Single).......................................................................................................18- 16

18.4.2.1 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 18- 16

18.4.3 Other Upgrade Methods.....................................................................................................................................18- 19

18.4.3.1 Upgrading an old model to the upgraded device ............................................................................................................... 18- 19

18.4.4 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data.........................................................................................................18- 20

18.4.4.1 Outline................................................................................................................................................................................ 18- 20 18.4.4.2 Uploading Procedure ......................................................................................................................................................... 18- 21 18.4.4.3 Downloading Procedure..................................................................................................................................................... 18- 23

18.4.5 Version Upgrade using USB ..............................................................................................................................18- 24

18.4.5.1 Overview of Menus and Functions..................................................................................................................................... 18- 24 18.4.5.2 Points to Note..................................................................................................................................................................... 18- 25 18.4.5.3 Downloading/Writing the System Software (auto).............................................................................................................. 18- 26 18.4.5.4 Downloading the System Software (auto or selective)....................................................................................................... 18- 27 18.4.5.5 Downloading the System Software (overwriting) ............................................................................................................... 18- 28 18.4.5.6 Formatting the HDD ........................................................................................................................................................... 18- 30 18.4.5.7 Other Functions.................................................................................................................................................................. 18- 31

Chapter 19 Service Tools 19.1 Service Tools .......................................................................................................................................... 19- 1

19.1.1 Special Tools Table..............................................................................................................................................19- 1 19.1.2 Solvents/Oils ........................................................................................................................................................19- 2

Chapter 1 Introduction

Contents

Contents
1.1 System Construction ......................................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 System Configuration with Input/Output Accessories ................................................................................................................ 1-1 1.1.2 Combination of Delivery Accessories ......................................................................................................................................... 1-2 1.1.3 System Configuration with Printing/Transmission Accessories.................................................................................................. 1-6 1.1.4 Functions of Printing/Transmission Accessories......................................................................................................................... 1-7

1.2 Product Specifications....................................................................................................................................................1-8

1.2.1 Names of Parts ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-8
1.2.1.1 External View..................................................................................................................................................................................................1-8 1.2.1.2 Cross Section...................................................................................................................................................................................................1-9

1.2.2 Using the Machine ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-10

1.2.2.1 Power Switch ................................................................................................................................................................................................1-10 1.2.2.2 Points to Note About Turning Off the Main Power Switch..........................................................................................................................1-10 1.2.2.3 Control Panel.................................................................................................................................................................................................1-11

1.2.3 User Mode Items........................................................................................................................................................................ 1-12

1.2.3.1 Common Settings ..........................................................................................................................................................................................1-12 1.2.3.2 Timer Settings ...............................................................................................................................................................................................1-14 1.2.3.3 Adjustment/Cleaning.....................................................................................................................................................................................1-14 1.2.3.4 Report Settings ..............................................................................................................................................................................................1-14 1.2.3.5 System Settings .............................................................................................................................................................................................1-15 1.2.3.6 Copy Settings ................................................................................................................................................................................................1-16 1.2.3.7 Communications Settings..............................................................................................................................................................................1-17 1.2.3.8 Mail Box Settings..........................................................................................................................................................................................1-17 1.2.3.9 Address Book Settings ..................................................................................................................................................................................1-18 1.2.3.10 Voice Guide Settings...................................................................................................................................................................................1-18

1.2.4 Safety ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-18

1.2.4.1 Safety About Laser Light ..............................................................................................................................................................................1-18 1.2.4.2 CDRH Regulations........................................................................................................................................................................................1-18 1.2.4.3 Handling of the Laser Assembly...................................................................................................................................................................1-19 1.2.4.4 Safety of Toner..............................................................................................................................................................................................1-19

1.2.5 Product Specifications ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-20

1.2.5.1 Product Specifications...................................................................................................................................................................................1-20

1.2.6 Function List .............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-21

1.2.6.1 Print Speed ....................................................................................................................................................................................................1-21 1.2.6.2 Paper Type ....................................................................................................................................................................................................1-23

1.2.7 RDS Specification...................................................................................................................................................................... 1-23

1.2.7.1 Embedded RDS (e-RDS) ..............................................................................................................................................................................1-23

Chapter 1

1.1 System Construction

1.1.1 System Configuration with Input/Output Accessories
The following shows a typical system configuration:
[1] [12] [14]
0010-6823

[4] [19]

[10]

[11] [7]

[20] [9] [5] [3] [13] [8] [16]

[6] [17] [2]

F-1-1 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] DADF-Q1/M1 (standard) Finisher-V1 Saddle Finisher-V2 Document Insertion Unit-C1 Paper Folding Unit-D1 Punch Unit-U1/V1/W1/X1 High Capacity Stacker-A1 Booklet Trimmer-B1 Booklet Trimmer-C1* Professional Puncher-A1 Paper Deck-W1 Paper Deck-X1 Document Tray-L1 Tab Feeding Attachment-A1 (standard) Card Reader-D1 Stacker Dolly-A1 Double Feeding Detection Kit-A1 Finisher Option Power Supply Unit-R1 ADF Access Handle-A1 Inserter Attachment Kit-A1 Perfect Binder-A1

[18] [15]

* up graded version Not all products are necessarily available in all sales areas.

1-1

Chapter 1

1.1.2 Combination of Delivery Accessories

5 Possible Combinations 1. Main Unit + Finisher
[E]
0011-5553

[A] [B] [C] [D]

[F]
F-1-2 [A] [B] [C] Professional Puncher (outside Japan) Paper Folding Unit Punch Unit [D] [E] [F] Finisher Insertion Unit Booklet Trimmer

* Either a professional puncher or a punch unit may be used. * A trimmer must be used in combination with a saddle finisher. * If the use of an inserter is planned, an Inserter Mounting Kit will be needed. 2. Main Unit + High Capacity Stacker

[A]
F-1-3 [A] High Capacity Stacker

1-2

Chapter 1 3. Main Unit + High Capacity Stacker + Finisher

[F]

[A] [B] [C] [D] [E]

[G]
F-1-4 [A] [B] [C] [D] High Capacity Stacker Professional Puncher (outside Japan) Paper Folding Unit Punch Unit [E] [F] [G] Finisher Insertion Unit Booklet Trimmer

* Either a professional puncher or a punch unit may be used. * A trimmer must be used in combination with a saddle finisher. * If the use of an inserter is planned, an Inserter Mounting Kit will be needed.

1-3

Chapter 1 4. Main Unit + Perfect Binder + Finisher

[E]

[A] [B] [C] [D]

[F]
F-1-5 [A] [B] [C] Perfect Binder Paper Folding Unit Punch Unit [D] [E] [F] Finisher Insertion Unit Booklet Trimmer

* Either the perfect binder or the professional puncher is used * Trimmer can be used if the saddle finisher is attached * If attaching the inserter to the finisher, the inserter attachment kit-A1, which is sold separately, is required (no need in the case of attaching the perfect binder).

1-4

Chapter 1 5. Main Unit + High Capacity Stacker + Perfect Binder + Finisher

[F]

[A]

[B] [C] [D] [E]

[G]
F-1-6 [A] [B] [C] [D] High Capacity Stacker Perfect Binder Paper Folding Unit Punch Unit [E] [F] [G] Finisher Insertion Unit Booklet Trimmer

* Either the perfect binder or the professional puncher is used * Trimmer can be used if the saddle finisher is attached * If attaching the inserter to the finisher, the inserter attachment kit-A1, which is sold separately, is required (no need in the case of attaching the perfect binder).

1-5

Chapter 1

1.1.3 System Configuration with Printing/Transmission Accessories

The following is a diagram of the system configuration:
[14] [3] [11] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [1] [10] [12] [13]
0011-4264

[2]
F-1-7

* up graded version
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] Multi-PDL Printer Kit-H1 (Boot) Expansion Bus-D1 Security Expansion Board-F1 iR Security Kit-A2 (license certificate) Univrsal Send Kit-E1 (license certificate) Universal Send Enhancement Kit-C1 (license certificate) Encrypted Printing Software-A3 (license certificate) Web Access Software-C1 (license certificate) Remote Operators Software Kit-A1 (license certificate) Voice Guidance Kit-A2 Barcode Printing Kit-B1 (license certificate) Security Mark-A1 (license certificate)

1-6

Chapter 1

1.1.4 Functions of Printing/Transmission Accessories

The following shows the accessories needed for individual functions: * up graded version
T-1-1 UFR II/PCL/PS printing + PDF/Tiff direct printing UFR II/PCL/PS printing + PDF/Tiff direct printing * ==> ==> Multi-PDL Printer Kit-H1 Multi-PDL Printer Kit-H2
0011-4265

transmission security function (HDD formatting + encryption)

==> ==>

Univrsal Send Kit-E1 Security Expansion Board-F1 Expansion Bus-D1 iR Security Kit-A2 HDD Data Encryption Kit-B2 Expansion Bus-D2 HDD Data Erase Kit-A1 Univrsal Send Kit-E1 Universal Send PDF Encryption Kit-B1 Univrsal Send Kit-E1 Universal Send Searchable PDF Kit-A1 Voice Guidance Kit-A2 Expansion Bus-D1 Voice Guidance Kit-B1 Expansion Bus-D2 Remote Operators Software Kit-A1 Web Access Software-C1 Web Access Software-F1 Multi-PDL Printer Kit-H2 Barcode Printing Kit-B1 Encrypted Printing Software-A3 Encrypted Secure Print Software-C1 Security Mark-A1

security function (HDD formatting + encryption) *

==>

encryption PDF function

==>

searchable PDF function

==>

voice guidance

==>

voice guidance *

==>

remote operation web browsing web browsing * barcode printing

==> ==> ==> ==>

secure printing secure printing * security mark printing

==> ==> ==>

1-7

Chapter 1

1.2 Product Specifications

1.2.1 Names of Parts 1.2.1.1 External View
0010-7405

[2] [1]

[20]

[21] [22]

[3] [19] [4] [5] [18] [6] [7] [8] [9] [29] [30] [23]

[17]

[16]

[15] [11] [13] [12]

[10]

[24]

[14]

[28] [25] [27]

F-1-8

[26]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]

ADF Control panel Reader right cover Main power supply cover Main power supply switch Upper right cover Rear right upper cover Manual feeder tray Rear right lower cover Upper right door Lower right door Lower right cover Cassette 4 Cassette 3 Right deck

[16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30]

Left deck Front cover Toner supply cover Upper front cover Original delivery tray Reader rear cover Reader left cover Upper left cover Lower left cover Rear left cover Heater switch Leakage breaker ARCNET connector Rear cover Reader right rear cover

1-8

Chapter 1

1.2.1.2 Cross Section

0010-7406

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4] [5]

[6]

[7]

[8] [9] [10] [11]

[12]

[13]

[44] [43]

[14] [15] [42] [41] [40] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [39] [38] [37] [36] [27] [24] [25] [26]

[28] [29] [30] [35] [31] [32] [33] [34]

F-1-9 T-1-2 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] No.1 mirror Scanning lamp Fixing assembly Copyboard glass Fixing web Feeding assembly Drum cleaner assembly Photosensitive drum Primary charging assembly CCD unit Laser/scanner unit Toner bottle Buffer unit Developing cylinder Pre-transfer charging assembly [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34] [35] [36] [37] Right deck pickup roller Right deck feeding roller Right deck separation roller Right deck Cassette 3 pickup roller Cassette 3 feeding roller Cassette 3 separation roller Cassette 4 pickup roller Cassette 4 feeding roller Cassette 4 separation roller Cassette 4 Cassette 3 Left deck Left deck separation roller Left deck feeding roller

1-9

Chapter 1
[16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] Manual feed feeding roller Manual feed pick roller Manual feed separation roller Pre-transfer exposure LED Registration roller Transfer charging assembly Separate charging assembly [38] [39] [40] [41] [42] [43] Left deck pickup roller Fixing lower roller Fixing upper roller External delivery roller No.3 mirror No.2 mirror

1.2.2 Using the Machine 1.2.2.1 Power Switch

The machine is equipped with 2 switches: main power switch and control panel power switch. The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on. To end power save mode, low power mode, or sleep mode, turn on the control panel power switch.
0010-7408

[1]

[2]

ON

[3]

F-1-10

[1] Control panel power switch [2] Main power lamp [3] Main power switch

Do not turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated (access to the HDD under way). Otherwise, the HDD can suffer damage (E602).

Starting up. Please wait.

F-1-11

1.2.2.2 Points to Note About Turning Off the Main Power Switch
0010-7409

1-10

Chapter 1 Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power Switch Before turning off the main power switch, be sure to hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more and go through the shut-down sequence while keeping the following in mind: 1. be sure that the Execute/Memory lamp on the control panel is off. 2. do not turn off the main power switch while downloading is under way. Otherwise, the machine may fail to operate. 3. If the heater switch is on, the cassette heater and the drum heater remain powered even after the main power switch has been turned off.

[1] [2]

ON

[3]

[4]

F-1-12

[1] Control panel power switch [2] Processing/data indicator [3] Main power switch [4] Heater switch

1.2.2.3 Control Panel

0010-7410

[1]

[2]

[3] [4] [5] [6]

[7]

[8] [9] [10] [11]

[15]
F-1-13 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Processing/data indicator Error indicator Help key Counter Check key Additional functions key [9] [10] [11] [12] [13]

[14] [13] [12]

Clear key ID key Main power indicator Stop key Start key

1-11

Chapter 1
[6] [7] [8] Energy save key Control panel power switch Numeric keys [14] [15] Reset key Touch panel display

1.2.3 User Mode Items 1.2.3.1 Common Settings

*1 Indicates the default setting. *2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached. *3 Indicates information that is delivered only if the number of output trays in the host machine and client machines is the same.
T-1-3 Item Initial Function Settings Select Initial Function: Copy*1, Send, Mail Box, MEAP Set System Monitor as the Initial Function: On/Off*1 Set the default screen for System Monitor: Settings: Print Status*1, Consumables, Others (Copy*1, Send, Receive), Status*1, Log Auto Clear Setting Function Order Settings Initial Function*1/Selected Function Function Order Settings: Copy*1, Send*2, Mail Box, Scan, Printer*2 Settings for Function Group Order: Group A, Group B, MEAP Audible Tones Entry Tone: On*1, Off Invalid Entry Tone: On, Off*1 Restock Supplies Tone: On, Off*1 Error Tone: On*1, Off Job Done Tone: On*1, Off Forgot Original Tone (for the imageRUNNER 7086): On, Off*1 ON*1/OFF ON*1/OFF Copy, Printer, Mail Box, Receive, Other: (Stack Bypass: On/Off*1, All Other Paper Sources: On*1/Off) Copy: Consider Paper Type: On/Off*1 Register Paper Type Paper Drawers 1 and 2 and Paper Deck-W1 or Paper Deck-X1: Plain*1, Recycled, Color, Letterhead, Bond, 3-Hole Punch, Heavy Paper Drawers 3 and 4: Plain*1, Recycled, Color, Letterhead, Bond, 3-Hole Punch, Heavy, Tab Paper Energy Saver Mode Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode LTRR/STMT Original Selection Tray Designation*2*3 -10%*1/-25%/-50%/None Low*1/High Distinguish Manually, Use LTRR Format*1, Use STMT Format If the Optionl Finisher-V1 or Saddle Finisher-V2 Is Attached: Tray A: Copy*1, Mail Box*1, Printer*1, Receive*1, Other*1 Tray B: Copy*1, Mail Box*1, Printer*1, Receive*1, Other*1 If the Optional Finisher-V1 or Saddle Finisher-V2, and High Capacity Stacker A1 Are Attached: Tray A: Copy*1, Mail Box*1, Printer*1, Receive, Other Tray B: Copy*1, Mail Box*1, Printer*1, Receive, Other Tray C: Receive*1, Other*1 High Volume Stack Mode*2 Printing Priority ON/OFF*1 Copy: 1*1/2/3 Printer : 1/2*1/3 Mail Box, Receive, Other: 1/2/3*1 Register (Entire Image Composition*1, Transparent Image), Erase, Check Print, Details Register, Edit, Erase ON/OFF*1 Register/Edit, Erase, Register Name
0010-7412

Display Remaining Paper Message Inch Entry Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS

Register Form for Form Composition Register Characters for Page No./Watermark Stack Bypass Standard Settings Registering Irregular Size for Stack Bypass

1-12

Chapter 1
Item Standard Local Print Settings Settings Paper Select: Auto*1, All Paper Sources Copies: 1*1 to 9,999 sets Finishing: If the Optional Finisher-V1 or Saddle Finisher-V2 Attached: Do Not Collate, Collate, Offset Collate*1, Group, Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right) (Double: Left, Right) If the Optional Punch Unit-V1 Is Attached to the Optional Finisher-V1 or Saddle Finisher-V2: Do Not Collate, Collate, Offset Collate*1, Group, Offset Group, Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right), (Double: Left, Right), Hole Punch If the Optional Paper Folding Unit-D1 Is Attached to the Optional Finisher-V1 or Saddle Finisher-V2: Do Not Collate, Collate, Offset Collate*1, Group, Offset Group, Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right), (Double: Left, Right), Z-Fold If the Optional Punch Unit-V1 and Paper Folding Unit-D1 Are Attached to the Optional Finisher-V1 or Saddle Finisher-V2: Do Not Collate, Collate, Offset Collate*1, Group, Offset Group, Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right), (Double: Left, Right), Hole Punch, Z-Fold If the Optional High Capacity Stacker-A1 Is Attached Do Not Collate, Collate, Offset Collate*1, Group, Offset Group If the Optional High Capacity Stacker-A1 and Finisher-V1 or Saddle Finisher-V2 Are Attached: Do Not Collate, Collate, Offset Collate*1, Group, Offset Group, Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right) (Double: Left, Right) If the Optional High Capacity Stacker-A1 and Punch Unit-V1 Are Attached to the Optional Finisher-V1 or Saddle Finisher-V2: Do Not Collate, Collate, Offset Collate*1, Group, Offset Group, Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right) (Double: Left, Right), Hole Punch If the Optional High Capacity Stacker-A1 and Paper Folding Unit-D1 Are Attached to the Optional FinisherV1 or Saddle Finisher-V2: Do Not Collate, Collate, Offset Collate*1, Group, Offset Group, Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right) (Double: Left, Right), Z-Fold If the Optional High Capacity Stacker-A1, Punch Unit-V1 and Paper Folding Unit-D1 Are Attached to the Optional Finisher-V1 or Saddle Finisher-V2: Do Not Collate, Collate, Offset Collate*1, Group, Offset Group, Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right) (Double: Left, Right), Hole Punch, Z-Fold Offset: 1*1 to 9,999 sets Face Up/Face Down: Auto*1, Face Down (Normal), Face Up (Reverse) Stack. Destination*2 Stacker*1, Output Tray Two-sided Print: On (Book Type, Calender Type), Off*1 Merge Documents: On, Off*1

Language Switch Reversed Display (Color) Offset Jobs*2 Job Separator between Jobs Job Separator between Copies Number of Copies/Wait Time Status Display Register Sizes for Side Paper Deck*2 Different Paper Sizes for the Output Tray*2 Cleaning Display for the Original Scanning Area Limited Functions Mode*2

ON/OFF*1 ON/OFF*1 ON*1/OFF ON/OFF*1 ON/OFF*1 ON*1/OFF A3/A4/A4R/B4/B5/11"X17"/LGL/LTR/LTRR ON*1/OFF ON*1/OFF Finisher Tray A/B: ON/OFF*1 Finisher Saddle Stitcher Unit: ON/OFF*1 Finisher Inserter: ON/OFF*1 Folding Unit: ON/OFF*1 Puncher Unit: ON/OFF*1 Stacker: ON/OFF*1

1-13

Chapter 1
Item Shutdown Mode Initialize Common Settings Settings Press [Start] Initialize

1.2.3.2 Timer Settings

*1 Indicates the default setting.
T-1-4 Item Time Fine Adjustment Auto Sleep Time Auto Clear Time Time Until Unit Quiets Down Daily Timer Settings Low-power Mode Time Setting 00:00 to 23:59, in one minute increments 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 min., 1 hour*1, 90 min., 2, 3, 4 hours 0 (Off) to 9 minutes, in one minute increments; 2 min.*1 0 (Off) to 9 minutes, in one minute increments; 1 min.*1 Sunday to Saturday, 00:00 to 23:59, in one minute increments 10, 15*1, 20, 30, 40, 50 min., 1 hour, 90 min., 2, 3, 4 hours
0010-7413

1.2.3.3 Adjustment/Cleaning
*1 Indicates the default setting. *2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
T-1-5 Item Zoom Fine Adjustment Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment*2 Double Staple Space Adjustment Trim Width Adjustment Adjust Creep (Displacement) Correction Setting X/Y: -1.0% to +1.0% in 0.1% increments; 0.0%*1 All paper size: -2.0 mm to +2.0 mm, in 0.25 mm increments; 1.00 mm*1 4 3/4" to 5 7/8" (120 mm to 150 mm), 4 3/4" (120 mm)*1 0.08" to 0.78" (2.00 mm to 20.00 mm), in 0.01" (0.1 mm) increments; 0.08" (2.00 mm)*1 Correction (foe each paper type) 0.000" to 0.078" (0.00 mm to 2.00 mm), 0.002" (0.05 mm) increments; 0.010" (0.25 mm)*1 Copy/Inbox, Send: Light, Dark: 1 to 9 levels; 5*1 Relative Contrast Value: -7 to +7; 0*1 Sample Print Sample Print Settings: Background Pattern: None*1, Arabesque, Fans, Polka Dots, Stars, Mesh, Clouds, Cherry Blossoms, Leaves Size: Small (36 pt.), Medium (54 pt.)*1, Large (72 pt.) White Letters on Colored Background: On, Off*1 Print Characters Vertically: On, Off*1 Standard Value Settings: 0 to 64; 20*1 Sample Print Print Settings: Sample Print Settings: Background Pattern: None*1, Arabesque, Fans, Polka Dots, Stars, Mesh, Clouds, Cherry Blossoms, Leaves Size: Small (36 pt.), Medium (54 pt.)*1, Large (72 pt.) White Letters on Colored Background: On, Off*1 Print Characters Vertically: On, Off*1 Latent String Density: 0 to 36; 8*1
0010-7414

Exposure Recalibration Character/Background Contrast Adjustment

Feeder Cleaning Wire Cleaning

Press [Start] Press [Start]

1.2.3.4 Report Settings

*1 Indicates the default setting. *2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached. *4 The Activity Report does not appear when the optional iR Security Kit is activated.
0010-7415

1-14

Chapter 1
T-1-6 Item Settings: Send*2 TX Report Activity Report*4 For Error Onry*1, On, Off Report With TX Image: On*1, Off Aut Print: On*1, Off Daily Activity Report Time: On, Off*1 Timer Setting: 00:00 to 23:59 Send/Receive Separate: On, Off*1 Setting

Print List: Send*2 Address Book List User's Data List Print List: Netwoak*2 Print List: Printer*2 Address Book 1 to 10; Address Book 1*1, One-touch Buttons, Print Lisst Print List

1.2.3.5 System Settings

*1 Indicates the default setting. *2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached. *5 Indicates items that are not delivered as device information.
T-1-7 Item System Manager Settings Setting System Manager ID: 7 digit number maximum System Password: 7 digit number maximum System Manager: 32 characters maximum E-mail Address: 64 characters maximum Contact Information: 32 characters maximum Comment: 32 characters maximum Deppt. ID Management: On, Off*1 Register Dept. ID/Password: Register, Edit, Erase, Limit Functions Page Totals: Clear, Print List, Clear All Totals Allow Printer Jobs With Unknown IDs: On*1, Off Allow Remote Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs: On*1, Off E-mail/I-Fax Settings Maximum Data Size For Sending: 0 (OFF), 1 to 99 MB; 3 MB*1 Full Mode TX Timeout: 1 to 99 hours, 24 hours*1 Divided Data RX Timeout: 0 to 99 hours, 24 hours*1 Default Subject: 40 characters maximum; Attached*1 Print MDN/DSN on Receipt: On, Off*1 Always send notice for RX errors: On*1, Off Use Send Via Server: On, Off*1 Memory RX Inbox Settings Memory RX Inbox Password: 7 digit number Use I-Fax Memory Lock: On, Off*1 Memory Lock Start Time: Everyday, Select Days, Off*1 Memory Lock End Time: Everyday, Select Days, Off*1 On*1, Off Use SSL*5: On, Off*1 Address Book Password: 7 digit number Access Number Management: On, Off*1 Restrict New Addresses: On, Off*1 E-Mail/I-Fax Domain Sending Restriction: Restrict Sending to Domain: On (Register*5, Edit*5, Erase*5), Off*1 Device Name: 32 maximum Location: 32 maximum
0010-7416

Dept. ID Management

Communications Settings*2

Remote UI Restrict Access to Destinations*2

Device Information Settings Network Settings*2 Forwarding Settings*2 Clear Message Board Auto Online/Offline Date & Time Settings

Validate/Invalidate, Register, Forward w/o Conditions E-mail Priority, Edit, Erase, Print List Clear Auto Online: On, Off*1 Auto Offline: On, Off*1 Date and Time Setting (12 digit number) Time Zone: GMT -12:00 to GMT +12:00; GMT -05:00*1 Daylight Saving Time: On*1, Off Register, Edit, Erase, Print List 24 characters maximum

Register LDAP Server*2 License Registration

1-15

Chapter 1
Item Copy Set Numbering Option Settings MEAP Settings Setting Copy Set Num. Op: On (Dept. ID: On, Off; Date: On, Off; Characters: On, Off), Off*1 Use HTTP: On*1, Off Use SSL*5: On, Off*1 Print System Information: Print Transmitting Settings Register Destinations: Select All, Auto Search/Register, Register, Details, Erase, Print List Auto Delivery Settings: Everyday, Select Days, Off*1 Add. Functions Settings Value: On (Network Settings: Include, Exclude*1), Off*1 Dept. ID: On, Off*1 Address Book: On, Off*1 Select All, Details Manual Delivery Add. Functions Settings Value: On (Network Settings: Include, Exclude*1), Off*1 Dept. ID: On, Off*1 Address Book: On, Off*1 Select All, Details, Manual delivery Start Receiving Settings Restrictions for Receiving Device Info.: On, Off*1 Restore Data: Add. Functns Set. Value, Dept. ID, Address Book Press [Start]. Receive Restriction for Each Function: Add. Functions Settings Value: On*1, Off Dept. ID: On*1, Off Address Book: On*1, Off Communication Log: Details, Print List, Report Settings: Auto Print: On*1, Off Daily Activity Report Time: On*1, Off Separate Report Type: On, Off*1 Initialize All Data/Settings Initialize

Device Information Delivery Settings

Display Dept.ID/User Name Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords Forced Secure Watermark Mode*2

On*1, Off On*1, Off Copy: Do Not Set*1, Set Watermark: (COPY, INVALID, CONFIDENTIAL, FILE COPY, TOP SECRET, Create: Enter, Register) Date: Select the date format. Copy Set Numbering: 1 to 9,999; 1*1 Serial Number: Print Dept. ID: Print Mail Box: Do Not Set*1, Set Watermark: (COPY, INVALID, CONFIDENTIAL, FILE COPY, TOP SECRET, Create: Enter, Register) Date: Select the date format. Copy Set Numbering: 1 to 9,999; 1*1 Serial Number: Print Dept. ID: Prin Printer: Do Not Set*1, Set Watermark: (COPY, INVALID, CONFIDENTIAL, FILE COPY, TOP SECRET, Create: Enter, Register) Date: Select the date format. Copy Set Numbering: 1 to 9,999; 1*1 Serial Number: Print Dept. ID: Print

1.2.3.6 Copy Settings

*1 Indicates the default setting. *2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
T-1-8 Item Screen Display Setting Settings Regular Copy Only*1, Regular and Express Copy, Express Copy Only Regular Copy Screen Priority: On*1, Off Large*1: Four paper sources maximum (Stack Bypass, Stack Bypass Settings, Paper Drawer 1, Paper Drawer 2, Paper Drawer 3, Paper Drawer 4, or Paper Deck-W1/X1), Small
0010-7418

Paper Select Key Size for Express Copy Screen

1-16

Chapter 1
Item Standard Key 1, 2 Settings for Regular Screen Standard Key Settings for Express Copy Screen Settings Various modes; No Settings*1 Displayed Standard Keys: Up to 5 Set Keys*1, Up to 10 Set Keys, Settings: Various modes; No Settings*1 On*1, Off

Auto Collate*2

Image Orientation Image Orientation

On, Off*1

Auto Orientation

On*1, Off

Photo Mode Standard Settings Register Remote Device Remote Device Transmission Timeout Initialize Copy Settings

On, Off*1 Store, Initialize Register (Seven devices maximum), Details, Erase, Move To Top 5 to 30 seconds; 30 seconds*1 Initialize

1.2.3.7 Communications Settings

*1 Indicates the default setting. *2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
T-1-9 Item Common Settings: TX Settings Unit Name*2 Erased Failed TX*2 Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors*2 Photo Mode*2 Retry Times*2 Edit Standard Send Settings*2 Register Favorites Button*2 PDF(OCR) Settings*2 24 characters maximum On*1, Off Always Print, Store/Print, Off*1 On, Off*1 0 to 5 times; 3 times*1 Scanning Mode, File Format, Divide into Pages, Stamp (for the imageRUNNER 7086 only) Register/Edit, Erase (M1 to M18) Smart Scan: On*1, Off Num. of Char. for Doc. Name Setting: 1 to 24 characters; 10 characters*1 Settings
0010-7419

Default Screen for Send*2 TX Terminal ID*2 Initialize TX Settings*2 Common Settings: RX Settings Two-sided Print*2 Select Cassette*2

Favorites Buttons, One-touch Buttons, New Address*1 On*1 (Printing Position: Inside, Outside*1; Display Destination Name: On*1, Off), Off Initialize

On, Off*1 Switch A: On*1, Off Switch B: On*1, Off Switch C: On*1, Off Switch D: On*1, Off On*1: RX Reduction: Auto*1, Fixed Reduction, Reduce % Reduce Direction: Vertical & Horizontal, Vertical Only*1 Off On, Off*1 On, Off*1

Receive Reduction*2

Received Page Footer*2 2 On 1 Log*2

1.2.3.8 Mail Box Settings

*1 Indicates the default setting. *2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
0010-7420

1-17

Chapter 1 *5 Indicates items that are not delivered as device information.

T-1-10 Item User Inboxes Settings Settings Inbox No.: 00 to 99 Register Inbox Name: 24 characters maximum Password*5: Seven digits maximum Time until Doc. Auto Erase: 0 (Off), 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hours, 1, 2, 3*1, 7, 30 days URL Send Settings Print upon storing from the printer driver: On, Off*1 Initialize*5

Photo Mode Standard Scan Settings Confidential Fax Inboxes Settings*2

On, Off*1 Store, Initialize Inbox No.: 00 to 49 Register Inbox Name: 24 characters maximum Password*5: Seven digits maximum URL Send Settings Initialize*5

1.2.3.9 Address Book Settings

*1 Indicates the default setting. *2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
T-1-11 Item Register Address*2 Settings Register New Address, Edit, Erase
0010-7421

Register Address Book Name*2

Address Book 1 to 10; Address Book 1*1, Register Name (16 characters maximum) Register/Edit (from 001 to 200), Erase

One-touch Buttons*2

1.2.3.10 Voice Guide Settings

*1 Indicates the default setting. *2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
T-1-12 Mode voice guide reading volume/speed*2 voice type*2 auto clear in voice guide*2 initialize voice guide settings*2 speaker/headphone switch*2 Description volume: 1 to 5*1 to 9 speed: (slow) -5 to 0*1 to +5 (fast) male/female*1 ON/OFF*1 Is it OK to initialize? yes/no speaker*1/headphone
0011-0595

1.2.4 Safety 1.2.4.1 Safety About Laser Light

Laser light can be harmful to the human body. The machine's laser system is completely blocked by means of a protective housing and external covers, and its light will not escape outside the machine as long as it is used for its intended purposes.
0010-7422

1.2.4.2 CDRH Regulations

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drug Administration put into effect regulations to govern laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply to laser products manufactured on and after August 1, 1976, and all laser products must be certified under the regulations for sale within the United Sates. The following shows the label used to certify compliance with the CDRH regulations, and laser products intended for sale in the US are required to bear this label.
0010-7423

1-18

Chapter 1

CANON
30-2, SHIMOMARUKO, 3-CHOME, OHTAKU, TOKYO, 146, JAPAN.

MANUFACTURED:
THIS PRODUCT CONFORMS WITH CQRH RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARD 21CFR CHAPTER 1 SUBCHAPTER J.

F-1-14

The text on the label may differ among product models.

1.2.4.3 Handling of the Laser Assembly

Take full care when servicing the area around the laser scanner system, as by avoiding bringing a reflective tool (e.g., screwdriver) into the laser path and removing watches and rings before starting the work. (These items are likely to reflect the laser light, and exposure to laser light can permanently damage the eye.) The machine uses red laser light, and its covers that possibly reflect the light are identified by an appropriate label. Be sure to take extra care if you must service the area behind any of these covers.
0010-7424

A cover used to block laser light is identified by the following label:

F-1-15

1.2.4.4 Safety of Toner

The machine's toner is a non-toxic material consisting of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye. If your skin or clothes have come into contact with toner, use paper tissue to remove as much toner as possible, and then wash with water. Do no use warm or hot water, which will cause the toner to turn jelly-like and fuse permanently with the fibers of clothes. Also, do not bring toner into contact with vinyl, which it will readily react.
0010-7425

1-19

Chapter 1

Do not throw toner into fire. It can explode.

1.2.5 Product Specifications 1.2.5.1 Product Specifications

0010-6731

Body Copyboard Light source type Lens type Photosensitive medium Reproduction method Charging method Exposure method Copy density adjustment function Development method Pickup method

Console Fixed Xenon lamp fixed array Amorphous silicon drum (108-mm dia.) indirect static charging by corona by 4-beam laser Auto or manual dry, 1-component toner projection - Paper deck (2 cassettes; right deck, left deck) - Cassette (2 cassettes; cassette 3, caste 4) - Manual feed tray Separation retard Separation retard Separation retard corona transfer, post charging/exposure Electrostatic Blade + magnet roller Heat roller Soft counter Magnetic, positive toner Toner bottle Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.) A3/279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17) 100% (1:1), reduce (1:0.250, 1:0.500, 1:0.611, 1:0.707, 1:0.816, 1:0.865), enlarge (1:1.154, 1:1.224, 1:1.414, 1:2.000, 1:4.000), zoom (1:0.250 to 4.000) (25% to 400%:in increments of 1%)

Cassette pickup method Paper deck pickup method Multifeeder pickup method Transfer method Separation method Drum cleaning method Fixing method Counter Toner type Toner supply type Original type Maximum original size Reproduction ratio

Fine adjustment of reproduction for 100%, in user mode ratio Warm-up time First print time 6 min or less (20 deg C, rated input) feeder: 4.1 sec (stream reading, right deck (manual), 1 original, 100%, A4/LTR, non-AE, straight delivery, lamp pre-heating included) copyboard: 2.8 sec (book mode, right deck, manual, 100%, A4/LTR, non-AE, straight delivery, lamp pre-heating not included) 1 to 9999 prints iR7105/7095 single-sided: 85 ipm double-sided: 40 ipm iR7086 single-sided: 68 ipm double-sided: 46 ipm iR7105: 105 ppm iR7095: 95 ppm iR7086: 86 ppm 600dpi X 600dpi 1200 (equivalent) x 600 dpi 256 gradations right/left: 1500 sheets (80 g/m2 paper) cassette 3/4: 550 sheets (80 g/m2 paper) manual feeder tray: 50 sheets (80 g/m2 paper) 40GB Direct/R-E: 4.0 + 1.5/-1.0 mm (when an ADF is used: 4.0 -/+1.8 mm/1.4 mm) Direct/R-E: 2.5 -/+1.5 mm (when an ADF is used: 2.5 -/+1.8mm) Direct/R-E: 2.5 -/+1.5 mm (when an ADF is used: 2.5 -/+1.8mm) Direct/R-E: 4.0 + 1.5/-1.0 mm (when an ADF is used: 4.0 -/+1.5/-1.0 mm) Direct/R-E: (one-sided) 2.5 -/+1.5 mm (when an ADF is used:2.5 -/+1.5 mm) Direct/R-E: (two-sided) 2.5 -/+2.0 mm (when an ADF is used: 2.5 -/+2.0 mm) Direct/R-E: 2.5 + 1.5 mm (when an ADF is used: 2.5 -/+1.5mm) (on left, 0.5 mm or more)

Continuous reproduction Reading speed

Printing speed

Reading resolution Printing resolution Gradation Paper deck capacity Cassette capacity Multifeeder tray capacity Hard disk Non-image width (leading edge) Non-image width (trailing edge) Non-image width (left/right) Image margin (leading edge) Image margin (trailing edge)

Image margin (left/right)

1-20

Chapter 1
Auto Clear Auto power off Low-power mode Sleep mode Energy save mode Option Operating environment (temperature range) Operating environment (humidity range) Operating environment (atmospheric pressure) Power supply rating yes (2 min standard; may be varied between 0 and 9 min in 1-min increments) No yes (15 min standard; may be varied for following in user mode: 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 90 min; 2, 3, 4 hr) yes (60 min standard; may be varied for following in user mode: 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 90 min; 2, 3, 4 hr) yes (-10% standard; may be varied for following in user mode: -10%, 25%, -50%; 0% if no return) See "System Configuration." See Installation>Selecting the Site of Installation. See Installation>Selecting the Site of Installation. 810.6 to 1013.3 hpa (0.8 to 1.0 atm) 200 V/15 A (50/60 Hz) 208 V/12 A (60 Hz) 230 V/13 A (50 Hz)

Power consumption (maximum) 2.5 kw or less Noise Ozone during copying: 79 dB or less; during standby: 63 dB or less initially, 0.02 ppm or less avr and 63 dB or less during standby over time (after 250,000 prints), 0.05 ppm or less avr, 0.10 ppm or less max. 1163 mm (W) x 795 (D) x 1430 (H) mm approx. 280 kg (approx.; including ADF) drum heater: standard for all models cassette heater (common for all): standard for 100/200V model; not offered for 208V model; offered as service part for 230V model reader heater (common for all): optional for 100/200V model; not offered for 208V model; offered as service part for 230V model deck heater (common for all): optional for 100/200V model; not offered for 208V model; offered as service part for 230V model

Dimensions Weight Environmental consideration

1.2.6 Function List 1.2.6.1 Print Speed

The value in brackets <> represents the iR7095. The value in brackets [] represents the iR7086.
T-1-13
0010-7403

- AB
Enlargement/reduction Direct Size A3 (297 x 420 mm) A4 (210 x 297 mm) B4 (257 x 364 mm) B5 (182 x 257 mm) A4R (297 x 210 mm) B5R (257 x 182 mm) A5R (210 x 148 mm) Reduce II (50.0 %) III (61.1 %) IV (70.7 %) A3 -> A5R A3 -> B5R B4 -> B5R A3 -> A4R V (81.6 %) B4 -> A4R B5R -> A5R VI (86.5 %) A4 -> B5 A3 -> B4 A3 A4 B4 B5 A4R B5R A5R A5R B5R B5R A4R A4R A5R B5 B4 Paper size Copies/min (1-to-N) cassette/deck 53 <50> [44] 105 <95> [86] 62 <59> [56] 105 <95> [86] 72 <68> [63] 84 <79> [73] 100 <95> [86] 100 <95> [86] 84 <79> [73] 84 <79> [73] 72 <68> [63] 72 <86> [63] 100 <95> [86] 105 <95> [86] 62 <59> [56] manual feeder 50 <47> [44] 90 <90> [86] 57 <56> [55] 90 <90> [86] 72 <68> [63] 80 <78> [73] 90 <90> [86] 90 <90> [86] 80 <78> [73] 80 <78> [73] 72 <68> [63] 72 <68> [63] 90 <90> [86] 90 <90> [86] 57 <56> [55]

1-21

Chapter 1
Copies/min (1-to-N) cassette/deck 53 <50> [44] 53 <50> [44] 62 <59> [56] 62 <59> [56] 105 <95> [86] 53 <50> [44] 105 <95> [86] manual feeder 50 <47> [44] 50 <47> [44] 57 <56> [55] 57 <56> [55] 90 <90> [86] 50 <47> [44] 90 <90> [86]

Enlargement/reduction Enlarge IV (200.0 %) III (141.4 %) A5R -> A3 A4R -> A3 B5R -> B4 II(122.4 %) A4R -> B4 A5 -> B5 I (115.4 %) B4 -> A3 B5 -> A4

Size A3 A3 B4 B4 B5 A3 A4

Paper size

Delivery from copier, auto paper select, density auto adjust, non-sort, deck/cassette
T-1-14

- Inch
Paper size 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17) LTR LTR (index sheet) LGL LTRR STMTR STMTR size Copies/min (1-to-N) cassette/deck 53 <49> [43] manual feeder 49 <46> [43]

Enlargement/reduction Direct

Size 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17) LTR LTR (index sheet) LGL LTRR STMTR

105 <95> [86] 95 <87> [80] 63 <60> [57] 77 <72> [67] 100 <95> [86] 100 <95> [86]

90 <90> [86] 79 <79> [79] 59 <56> [52] 75 <72> [67] 90 <90> [86] 90 <90> [86]

Reduce

II (50.0 %)

279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17) -> STMTR 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17) -> LTRR 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17)->LGL LGL -> LTRR STMTR* -> 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17) LTRR -> 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17) LGL-> 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17)

III (64.7 %)

LTRR

77 <72> [67]

76 <72> [67]

IV (73.3 %)

LGL

63 <60> [57]

59 <56> [52]

V (78.6 %) Enlarge III (200.0 %)

LTRR 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17)

77 <72> [67] 53 <49> [43]

76 <72> [67] 49 <46> [43]

II (129.4 %)

279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17)

53 <49> [43]

49 <46> [43]

I (121.4 %)

279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17)

53 <49> [43]

49 <46> [43]

Delivery from copier, auto paper select, density auto adjust, non-sort, deck/cassette * The ADF does not accommodate STMTR originals. The values in the foregoing tables are subject to change for product revisions.

1-22

Chapter 1

1.2.6.2 Paper Type

0010-7404

T-1-15 Source Type Size cassette Plain paper (64 to 90g/m2) Recycled paper Colored paper Heavy paper (91 to 200g/m2) Bond paper Letterhead A3, B4, A4R, A5R, B5R, 11"x17", LGL, LTRR, STMTR, 8K, 16K A4, B5, LTR EXECTIVE no no yes yes yes deck (left/right) no yes manual feeder yes yes

Special paper

Transparency Postcard label sheet index sheet Tracing paper 3-hole paper Card Stock

A4, A4R, LTR, LTRR Postcard, Reply Postcard, 4 on 1 Pcard A4, A4R, B4, LTR, LTRR A4, LTR A3, B4, A4R, A4 A4, LTR 4"x6", 5"x8"

no no no yes no yes no

no no no no no yes no

yes yes yes no yes yes yes

1.2.7 RDS Specification 1.2.7.1 Embedded RDS (e-RDS)

Product Overview Embedded RDS (hereafter, e-RDS) is a front-end module of e-Maintenance system built into the network module of the device controller.
0011-6828

Product package composition/commodity composition It is built in the network module of the device. Feature It is built into the network module of the device controller, and the front-end module of e-Maintenance system is achieved without needing hardware other than the device. In a past e-Maintenance system, software for e-Maintenance was installed in special hardware such as a small box Linux computer or Windows PC in the front end. (RDS Agent or RDS server). The e-Maintenance system can be introduced without putting a strain in the user by being built in the device controller. Moreover, the serviceman's loads for the installation are greatly reduced. e-RDS transmits device information on counter, trouble, and articles of consumption, etc. by using the SOAP protocol for the back end server of e-Maintenance system (hereafter, UGW). List of Supported Devices
e-RDS Supported version Model name iR2270, iR2870, iR3570, iR4570 Version number v31.01 Point of correction #1, #2 e-RDS Full supported version Version number v32.02 #3 Point of correction

iR2230, iR2830, iR3530 (Make sure that the device can be connected on network)

v5.xx

#1, #2

v20.25

#3

iR5570, iR6570 iR85+, iR8070 iR105, iR9070

v12.04 v10.40

#1, #2 #1, #2

v20.65 v11.05

#3 #3

1-23

Chapter 1

iR C3170 series iR C2570 series USA: imageRunner C3170 Color imageRunner C3170N EU, Other: iR 2570C / iR 2570CN iR 3170C / iR 3170CN

v10.15

#2

v20.29

#3

iR C6870, iR C5870 USA: imageRunner C3170 Color imageRunner C3170N EU: iR 5870C / iR 5870Ci iR 6870C / iR 6870Ci Other: iR C5870 / iR 5C870i iR C6870 / iR C6870i iR7105/7095/7086

From the first mass production machine

Title #1 e-RDS Proxy server connection trouble #2 e-RDS freeze #3 e-RDS Parts counter trouble

Description It cannot connect a proxy server via e-RDS At rare intervals, the e-RDS gets into the freezing, and does not send the billing counter data. The e-RDS sends the wrong value of parts counter sometimes.

1-24

Chapter 2 Installation

Contents

Contents
2.1 Making Pre-Checks........................................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 Points to Note Before Starting the Installation Work .................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1.2 Selecting the Site of Installation .................................................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1.3 Installation Space ......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.4 Checking the Contents ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-3 2.1.5 Order of Installing Accessories.................................................................................................................................................... 2-5

2.2 Unpacking and Installation ............................................................................................................................................2-6

2.2.1 Points to Note When Turning On/Off the Main Power ............................................................................................................... 2-6 2.2.2 Unpacking .................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-6 2.2.3 Mounting the Scanner System ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.2.4 Mounting the Fixing Assembly ................................................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.2.5 Mounting the Charging Assembly ............................................................................................................................................... 2-8 2.2.6 Mounting the Developing Assembly ......................................................................................................................................... 2-10 2.2.7 Mounting the Pickup Assembly................................................................................................................................................. 2-12 2.2.8 Mounting the Control Panel....................................................................................................................................................... 2-12 2.2.9 Supplying Toner......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-17 2.2.10 Turning On the Main Power .................................................................................................................................................... 2-17 2.2.11 Stirring the Toner ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-17 2.2.12 Index Sheet Attachment ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-18 2.2.13 Others ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-18 2.2.14 Attaching the Labels, Placing Paper, and Checking Images and Operation............................................................................ 2-19 2.2.15 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration ..................................................................................................................................... 2-20 2.2.16 Adjusting the Lead Edge Registration ..................................................................................................................................... 2-21 2.2.17 Setting the Cassette .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-21 2.2.18 Correcting the Skew................................................................................................................................................................. 2-22 2.2.19 Switching Over the Paper Size for the Front Deck (right, left) ............................................................................................... 2-22 2.2.20 Fixing Host Machine in Place.................................................................................................................................................. 2-22 2.2.21 Checking the Operation in a System Configuration ................................................................................................................ 2-23

2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network ....................................................................................................................2-24

2.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-24 2.3.2 Checking the Network Connections .......................................................................................................................................... 2-24 2.3.3 Using the PING Command ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-24 2.3.4 Making a Check Using a Remote Host Address........................................................................................................................ 2-24

2.4 Troubleshooting the Network ......................................................................................................................................2-24

2.4.1 Troubleshooting the Network .................................................................................................................................................... 2-24 2.4.2 Making a Check Using a Loop Back Address ........................................................................................................................... 2-24 2.4.3 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address ........................................................................................................................... 2-24

2.5 Installing the Card Reader............................................................................................................................................2-24

2.5.1 Checking the Contents ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-24 2.5.2 Turning Off the Host Machine................................................................................................................................................... 2-25 2.5.3 Installing the Card Reader-D1 ................................................................................................................................................... 2-25

2.6 Installing the Reader Heater.........................................................................................................................................2-27

2.6.1 Checking the Contents ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-27 2.6.2 Turning Off the Host Machine................................................................................................................................................... 2-27 2.6.3 Installation Procedure ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-27

2.7 Installing the Cassette Heater.......................................................................................................................................2-29

2.7.1 Checking the Contents ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-29 2.7.2 Turning Off the Host Machine................................................................................................................................................... 2-29 2.7.3 Mounting the Cassette Heater .................................................................................................................................................... 2-29

2.8 Installing the Deck Heater............................................................................................................................................2-31

Contents

2.8.1 Unpacking and Checking the Components................................................................................................................................ 2-31 2.8.2 Installing to the Paper Deck (Cassette Heater Unit-31/32)........................................................................................................ 2-32 2.8.3 Installing to the host machine (Cassette Heater Unit-31/32) ..................................................................................................... 2-34 2.8.4 Unpacking and Checking the Components................................................................................................................................ 2-35 2.8.5 Installing to the Paper Deck (Cassette Heater Unit-23/25)........................................................................................................ 2-36 2.8.6 Installing to the host machine (Cassette Heater Unit-23/25) ..................................................................................................... 2-37

2.9 Installing the Deck Heater (Large Deck) .................................................................................................................... 2-39

2.9.1 Unpacking and Checking the Components................................................................................................................................ 2-39 2.9.2 Installing to the paper Deck (Cassette Heater Unit-31/32)........................................................................................................ 2-39 2.9.3 Unpacking and Checking the Components................................................................................................................................ 2-44 2.9.4 Installing to the paper Deck (Cassette Heater Unit-23/25)........................................................................................................ 2-45

2.10 Installing the Voice Guidance Kit ............................................................................................................................. 2-49

2.10.1 Checking Items in the Package ................................................................................................................................................ 2-49 2.10.2 Turning Off the Host Machine................................................................................................................................................. 2-50 2.10.3 Installation Procedure ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-50

Chapter 2

2.1 Making Pre-Checks

2.1.1 Points to Note Before Starting the Installation Work
0010-8937

1) Moving a machine from a cold to warm place can cause condensation, in which drops of water form on metal surfaces, leading to image faults if used as they are. If the machine has just been brought from a cold place, leave it alone for 1 hr or more without unpacking so that it becomes used to the room temperature. 2) When moving the machine to/from the user's, be sure to take note of the following if the move involves the use of stairs: a. before starting to move, remove the ADF assembly, fixing transport assembly, intermediate tray assembly, and copy paper; move them separately from the machine body. b. when lifting the machine, do not use the grips found on the pickup and delivery assemblies; instead, support the machine at its 4 bottom corners. 3) Check to be sure that the 2 adjusters (front) found on the bottom of the machine are shifted up and are unlocked. Also, take care that the adjusters will not fall out during the move. 4) Be sure to work in a group of 4 when installing the machine. Particularly when removing the pad, have one person stand at the rear and another at the front holding one grip each and tilting the machine; another person then may remove the pad with the remaining person supporting the machine for safety. 5) All accessories (e.g., side paper deck, finisher, paper feeding unit) must be removed from the machine to prevent damage before moving the machine into or out of the user's.

2.1.2 Selecting the Site of Installation

The site of installation must meet the following requirements, and it is a good idea to visit the user's before delivery of the machine: 1) There must be a properly grounded source of power that may be used exclusively by the machine: for the 100V model, 90 to 110 V, 15 A or more; for the 200V model, 180 to 220 V, 15 A or more; for the 208V model, 188 to 228 V, 12 A or more; for the 230V model, 198 to 264 V, 13 A or more. 2) The following installation environment is required.Avoid to install the machine near a faucet, water boiler, humidifier humidifier and refrigerator. - Operation/image guarantee range:Temperature 10.0 to 30.0 deg C,Humidity 20% to 80% 3) The machine must not be installed near a source of fire or in an area subject to dust or ammonium gas. If the area is subject to direct rays of the sun, there must be shades or curtains to block the rays. 4) The level of ozone generated by the machine is not likely to affect the health of the individuals around it. Some, nevertheless, may find the odor rather unpleasant, and it is important that the room be well ventilated. 5) The machine's feet must be in contact with the floor, and the machine must remain level. 6) There must be enough space around the machine for printing work. (See the installation space.) 7) Be sure the area is well ventilated. If multiple machines exist, it is important to make sure that the exhaust from another machine will not be drawn into the machine. Also, the machine must not be installed near the air vent of the room.
0010-8936

F-2-1 MEMO: In general, the silicon gas (vapor of silicone oil from the fixing assembly) tends to soil the corona charging wire, reducing its life. This is particularly true of a low humidity environment.)

2.1.3 Installation Space

Diagram of the Work Space There must be enough space around the machine. The following diagram shows the minimum dimensions; whenever possible, be sure there will be more space than indicated:
MEMO: The spatial requirements differ between when installing a full system and when installing in a configuration consisting of a Professional Puncher [A] and a Perfect Binder [B].
0011-6508

2-1

Chapter 2

7 1/8" (179 mm) 12" (305 mm) 39 3/8" (1000 mm) 55 3/8" (1406 mm) 18 1/2" (470 mm) 33 7/8" (860 mm) 23 3/8" (593 mm)

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

31 1/2" (800 mm) 179 1/8" (4550mm)

52" (1320 mm)

F-2-2

[1] Trimmer [2] Finisher/Saddle Finisher [3] Paper Folding Unit [4] Professional Puncher [5] High Capacity Stacker [6] Host Machine [7] Side Paper Decik
[B]
18 1/2" (470 mm) 7 1/8" (179 mm) 36 1/4" (920 mm) 33 7/8" (860 mm) 23 3/8" (593 mm)

39 3/8" (1000 mm)

55 3/8" (1406 mm)

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

31 1/2" (800 mm) 203 3/8" (5165mm)

52" (1320 mm)

F-2-3

[1] Trimmer [2] Finisher/Saddle Finisher [3] Paper Folding Unit [4] Perfect Binder [5] High Capacity Stacker [6] Host Machine [7] Side Paper Decik

2-2

39 3/8" (1000 mm)

63 1/2" (1614 mm)

39 3/8" (1000 mm) or more

39 3/8" (1000 mm)

39 3/8" (1000 mm)

63 1/2" (1614 mm)

39 3/8" (1000 mm) or more

39 3/8" (1000 mm)

[A]

Chapter 2

2.1.4 Checking the Contents

0011-6922

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[10]

[11]

[12]

[13]

[14]

[15]

[16]

[17]

[18]

[19]

[20]

[21]

[22]

[23]

[24]

[25]

[26]

[27]

[28]

[29]

[30]

[31]

[32]

[33]

[34]

[35]
F-2-4

[36]

[37]

[38]

[39]

[40]

[41]

[42]

[43]

[1] [3] [5] [7] [9] [11] [13] [15] [17] [19] [21] [23] [25] [27] [29] [31] [33]

Control panel Control panel arm unit Arm cover 4 Arm cover 2 Lock hinge cover R Hinge slide cover Developing assembly pressure plate Grip Inch-stop roll Coaxial connector Size plate Cassette size label 3-hole paper placement label Lamp Warning label Included Delivery Guide Index paper attachment Screw (binding; M4X10)

1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 4 pc. 2 pc. 2 pc. 2 pc. 1 pc. 4 pc. 1 pc. 1pc. 15 pc.

[2] [4] [6] [8] [10] [12] [14] [16] [18] [20] [22] [24] [26] [28] [30] [32] [34]

Arm unit Arm cover 1 Cover support plate Arm cover 3 Lock hinge cover L Developing assembly Pull-off unit Left deck locking plate T-shaped connector Connector cover Touch pen Shut-down instructions label Cleaning Instructions label Manual Feeder Set label Base sheet One-touch supports Screw (binding; M4X14)

1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 4 pc. 1 pc. 1pc. 2pc. 5 pc.

2-3

Chapter 2
[35] [37] [39] [41] [43] Screw (TP; M3X8; white) Screw (P tightening; M4X10) Screw (W sems; M4X12) Screw (TP; M4X6 black) Screw (binding; M3X4) 3 pc. 2 pc. 1 pc. 6 pc. 2 pc. [36] [38] [40] [42] Screw (P tightening; M3X10) Flat-head screw (M4X10) Cover rubber (for M3) Screw (RS tightening; M4X10) 2 pc. 1 pc. 2 pc. 2 pc.

Check the contents (User's Manual, CD, and others) against the following tables:
iR7105 Merchandise Code Reference Guide Copying/Mail Box MEAP Administration CD Easy Operation Guide EULA Revision Notice for Option Combination Manual CD Support Guide 0512B008AA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes iR7095 0513B008AA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes iR7105 0512B038AA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes iR7095 0513B038AA Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

2-4

Chapter 2

2.1.5 Order of Installing Accessories

If you are planning to install other accessories also, go through the following in the order indicated: 1. side paper deck [1] (See the Side Paper Deck Installation Procedure.) 2. high-capacity stacker [2] (See the High-Capacity Stacker Installation Procedure.) 3. finisher [3]/saddle finisher [4] (See the "Preparing the Finisher" in Finisher/Saddle Finisher Installation Procedure.) 4. finisher accessories power supply unit [5] (See the Finisher Accessories Power Supply Unit Installation Procedure.) 5. punch unit [6]* (See the Punch Unit Installation Procedure.) 6. paper folding unit [7] (See the Paper Folding Unit Installation Procedure.) 7. perfect binder [8]* (See the Perfect Binder Installation Procedure.) 8. professional puncher [9]* (See the Professional Puncher Installation Procedure.) 9. inserter [10] (See the Inserter Installation Procedure.) 10. trimmer [11] (See the Trimmer Installation Procedure.) * The punch unit [6] and the professional puncher unit [9] cannot be installed as part of the same system. The perfect binder [8] and the professional puncher unit [9] cannot be installed as part of the same system.
[1] [2]
0011-6504

[10] [9]

[7]

[3]

[11]

[6] [5]

[8]

[4]

F-2-5

2-5

Chapter 2

2.2 Unpacking and Installation

2.2.1 Points to Note When Turning On/Off the Main Power
0011-4949

[A] [B]

Turning Off the Main Power (host machine) Be sure to go through the following when turning off the main power to protect the hard disk:

1. Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more. 2. Go through the instructions on the shut-down sequence screen so that the main switch may be turned off. 3. Turn off the main power switch. F-2-8 4. Disconnect the power cable (for the power outlet).

[2]

[1]

Order of Turning On the Machines (host machine + accessories) When mounting delivery options, such as finisher, be sure to turn on the power of main body and option. If you do not turn on the power in the correct order, the main body cannot detect the option. <Turning On the Power> 1. high-capacity stacker, perfect Binder, finisher (either) 2. professional puncher 3. host machine

5) Insert the grip [1] taken out in step 3) into the machine at an angle while holding down the spring [2]; then, keep the grip in horizontal orientation so that the claw [3] is hooked on the plate at the rear.

[3]

2.2.2 Unpacking
1) Unpack the machine. Open the plastic bag. 2) Remove the grip cover (rear) [1] found on the right side of the machine using a flat-blade screwdriver, and shift up the grip [2] found at the rear.
0010-8941

[1]

[2]
[2]
F-2-9

6) Close the upper right cover. 7) Shift up the grip (front, rear) [1] found on the left side of the machine.

[1]
[1]

F-2-6

3) Take out the grip [1] from the contents box.

[1]
[1]

F-2-10

F-2-7

Be sure to go through steps 8) and 9) in correct sequence; otherwise, the machine can become displaced.

4) Open the upper right cover and slide the face cover (small) [1] in the direction of A arrow. Then, detach the face cover (large) [2] in the direction of B arrow.

8) Holding the grips (front, rear) on the delivery side of the machine, lift the machine slightly to remove the pad. At this time, put away the plastic bag toward the pad.

2-6

Chapter 2

[2] [1]
F-2-11

9) Holding the grips (front, rear) on the pickup side of the machine, lift the machine slightly, and remove the remaining pad and the plastic bag at the same time.

F-2-14

12) Remove the 2 pins [2] taped in place to the slope plate [1]. Turn over the slope plate [1], and match the pin hole of the skid and the pin hole of the slope plate; then, fit a pin [2] (1 pc. each) through the holes. Holding the grips (front, rear) on the delivery side of the machine, move the machine off the skid by sliding it along the slope plates.

[2]

[1]
F-2-12 F-2-15

10) Shift the 2 adjusters (front) [1] found at the bottom of the machine so that they face upward, making sure that they are unlocked.

13) Remove the grip [1] fitted in step 5) while pushing the leaf spring with a flat-blade screwdriver.

[1]

[1]

F-2-13

11) Take out the 2 slope plates [2] from the middle of the skid [1].

F-2-16

14) Remove the packing tape from the machine. 15) Open the front cover. 16) Open the compartment cover [2] found behind the front cover, and put in the grip [3] for storage.

2-7

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]
F-2-17

17) Open the upper right cover, and mount the face cover (small, large). 18) Close the upper right cover.

[1]
F-2-20

If condensation is found on the outside or inside of the machine at this point, stop the work and wait unit the machine becomes fully used to the room temperature. Resume the work after making sure that the machine is free of condensation.

4) Remove the tape [1]; then, remove the tag [2] of the fixing transport assembly and the separation release member [3].

Remove all foreign matter (e.g., glue from tape) from the transport belt.

2.2.3 Mounting the Scanner System

1) Open the ADF. Remove the copyboard glass protective pad and tape. 2) Remove the scanner system fixing screw [1]. (Store the screw away for possible relocation of the machine in the future.)
0010-8943

[1]

[3]

[2]

[1]

F-2-21

5) Remove the tape used to keep the tag in place, and open the delivery assembly [1]; then, remove the 2 fixing nip release screws [2] from the front and the rear.
[2]

F-2-18

2.2.4 Mounting the Fixing Assembly

1) Open the front cover. 2) Shift the fixing transport assembly release lever [1] in the direction of the arrow to unlock the transfer/separation charging assembly.
[1]
0010-8944

[1]

F-2-22

6) Close the delivery assembly.

2.2.5 Mounting the Charging Assembly

1) Remove the transfer separation charging assembly front cover [1]. - screw [2]
F-2-19
0010-8947

3) Slide out the fixing transport unit [1] to the front.

2-8

Chapter 2

[3]

[2]

[1]

[3]

[2]

[1]
F-2-23

2) Remove the fixing [1] (1 screw [2]), and disconnect the connector [3].
[2]

[3]
F-2-26

[4]

[1] [3]
F-2-24

5) Connect the connector of the transfer separation charging assembly, and fit the fixing in place. 6) Attach the transfer separation charging assembly front cover. 7) Return the fixing feed unit inside the device and return the fixing feed unit release lever [1] in the original place.
[1]

3) While holding the front side and [A] part of the transfer separation charging assembly [1], pull it by approx. 1 cm and then, remove it by lifting upper left direction. Clean the transfer separation charging wire with alcohol solution.
[A]

[A]

F-2-27

[1]
F-2-25

8) Remove the primary charging assembly front cover [1]. - screw [2]
[1] [2]

4) Attach the transfer separation charging assembly [1] with paying attention to the following points. - Check that the solvent dries completely. - Be careful not to cut the transfer guide [2] by hitting the wire. - Be sure that the grounding plate [3] is located outside of the charging assembly frame [4].

F-2-28

9) Disconnect the connector [1] and press the primary charging assembly lock lever [2] to release it, and then remove the primary charging assembly [3]. Clean the primary charging wire and the grid wire using alcohol.

2-9

Chapter 2

[2]

[1]
- Check to be sure that the solvent is fully dry. - Check to be sure that the one-way arm [1] of the pre-transfer charging assembly is on the eccentric cam [2].

[1]

[3]
F-2-29

All solvent must be fully dry before fitting the parts back in place.

10) Remove the pre-transfer charging assembly front cover [1]. - screw [2]

[1]

[2]

14) Mount the primary charging assembly front cover and the pre-transfer charging assembly cover. 15) Close the front cover.

2.2.6 Mounting the Developing Assembly

1) Open the manual feed cover. 2) Remove the tape [1]; then, remove the hopper supply mouth cover [2].
[1]
0010-8950

[2]
F-2-30

11) Disconnect the connector [1], and release the locking lever [2] of the pretransfer charging assembly; then, remove the pre-transfer charging assembly [3]. Clean the pre-transfer charging assembly using alcohol.
[1]
[2]

[2]
F-2-32

3) Holding the developing assembly [1] as shown, fit it in place in the machine.

When mounting the developing assembly, take care not to hit against the developing cylinder [2].

[2]

[3]
F-2-31

12) While keeping it unlocked, fit in the primary charging assembly, and connect the connector.

Check to make sure that the solvent is fully dry.

13) While keeping it unlocked, fit the pre-transfer charging assembly in place, and connect the connector.

[1]
F-2-33

4) Connect the connectors [1], [2].

2-10

Chapter 2

Check to be sure that the connector will not become disconnected. Poor contact will lead to blank prints.

[1]
F-2-36

[1]

7) Remove the tape from the pull-off unit. 8) Hold the pull-off unit [1] as follows, and hook the 4 holes [3] of the pulloff unit on the 4 protrusions [2] of the rail.

[3]
[2] [1]

[2]

[3]

F-2-34

5) Mount the developing assembly locking plate [1]. - 2 bosses [2] - 6 screws (TP; M4X6; black) [3]
[3] [1] [3]

[2]

[1]
F-2-37

9) Fix the extraction unit with the 2 screws (binding; M3X4) and push the extraction unit until it locks.

[1]

[2]
F-2-35

[2]

Check to be sure that the developing assembly locking plate is free of a gap and displacement, which are likely to cause image faults. (Especially, it must not be riding over the bosses found below.) When mounting the developing assembly locking plate, take care not to trap the cable [1].

F-2-38

10) Fit the reuse band [1] in the hole [2] of the host machine.
[1] [2]

F-2-39

11) Connect the connector [1].

[1]

6) Slide out the 2 rails [1] of the pull-off unit.

2-11

Chapter 2

[1]

MEMO: If the deck/cassette is inside the machine, the spacer is locked in place and cannot be removed; be sure to slide the unit out halfway to unlock it.

[1]

F-2-40

12) Attach the connector cover [1]. - screw (RS tightening; M4X10) [2]

[3]
F-2-43

[2]

6) Close the upper right cover and the lower right cover. 7) Close the front deck (right) and the cassette 3/4. 8) Press the release button of the front deck (left), and slide out the deck. 9) Mount the included deck locking plate [1] to the front deck (left). - screw (RS tightening; M4X10; white) [2]

[1]

[1] [2]

[2]

F-2-41

2.2.7 Mounting the Pickup Assembly

1) Shift the lever [1] in the direction of the arrow, and remove the pickup roller release spacer [2].
F-2-44
0010-8957

10) Close the front deck (left).

2.2.8 Mounting the Control Panel

1) Remove the upper rear right cover [1]. - 3 screws [2]
[1]
0011-4903

[2]

[1]
F-2-42

[2]
[2]
F-2-45

2) Open the manual feed cover. 3) Push the release button of the front deck (right) and the cassette 3/4, and slide them out halfway. 4) Slide out the cassette 3/4, and remove the packing tape from where the host machine and the cassette come into contact (left side of the host machine and right side of cassette 4). 5) Open the upper right cover [1] and the lower right cover [2], and remove the 3 pickup roller release spacers [3].

2) Match the 2 bosses [3] of the arm cover 3 [2] with the Control panel arm unit [1], and fix it in place with a screw (binding; M4X10) [4].

2-12

Chapter 2

[4] [3] [3]

[4]

[2]

[2]

[3]

[1]
F-2-49

[1]
F-2-46

6) Hook the claw [2] of the cover support plate [1], and fix it in place using 2 screws (binding; M4X10) [3].
[3] [2] [3] [1]

3) Route the control panel interface cable through the Control panel arm unit [1], and fix it in place with the edge saddle [3].
[1]

[2]

[3]
F-2-50

7) Open the DF, and lead the control panel interface cable [2] along the arm cover 2 [1]; then, put the cover over the control panel arm unit.
F-2-47

4) Hook the claw [2] of the Control panel arm unit [1], and tighten the 4 screws (binding; M4X10) [3] and 4 screws [4].

[2]

[1]

- Be sure to tighten the screws in the correct order. - Do not drop the screws.

[4] [1] [2]

F-2-51

When putting the arm cover 2 in place, be sure it is correctly oriented in relation to the plate [1].

[3]
F-2-48

[3]

5) Adjust the control panel interface cable [1] so that the length [4] from the edge saddle [2] and the seal [3] is about 5 cm, and fix it in place using the edge saddle.

[1]

[1]

8) Tighten the screw (binding; M4X10) [1].

2-13

Chapter 2

When tightening the screw [1], be sure to hold down the arm cover 2.

[1]
F-2-55

12) Tighten the screw (binding; M4X14) [2] and then the 4 screws [3] of the arm unit [1].
[1]
F-2-52

9) Tighten the screw (binding; M4X10) [1].

- Be sure to tighten the screws in the correct order. - Be sure to tighten the screws while keeping the arm in the direction of the arrow to avoid contact with the extension tray.

Be sure to tighten the screw at an angle.

[1]

[3] [2]

[3]

F-2-53

10) Hook the claw [1] of the arm unit on the hole [2] in the Control panel arm unit.

[1]

[1]
[2]
F-2-56

13) Fix the control panel interface cable [1] in place using the 3 wire saddles [2].

Match the wire saddle at the rear and the seal [3].

F-2-54

11) Turn it in the direction of the arrow until the screw hole [1] of the arm unit matches the hole in the Control panel arm unit.

[3]

[2]
F-2-57

[1]

14) Route the control panel interface cable [1] through the arm cover 1 [2]. 15) Hook the claw [3] on the cut-off [4] of the arm unit, and put the arm cover

2-14

Chapter 2 1 [2] in place.

[1] [2]

[2]

[3]

[1]

F-2-60

[4]
F-2-58 Fit the tip of the shaft [1] of the control panel in the round hole of the arm unit.

Take care not to trap the cable.

[1]

[1]

16) Fix the arm cover 1 in place from behind the arm unit. - 2 screws (P tightening; M4x10) [1]
[1]

18) Tighten the screw (flat-head; M4X10) [1] from behind the arm unit.

F-2-59

Make sure there is no discrepancy between the arm cover 1 and the arm cover 2.

[1]
F-2-61

19) Tighten the screw (W sems; M4X10) [1] from behind the control panel.

17) Fit the shaft [1] of the control panel in place on the arm unit [2].

[1]
F-2-62

20) Fix the control panel interface cable [1] in place using the 2 edge saddles [2] and the wire saddle [3]; then, connect the connector [4] to the control panel.

2-15

Chapter 2 - 2 bosses [2] - 2 screws (P tightening; M3X10) [3]

[2]

[4]

[3]

[1]

[3]

[2]
F-2-65

[2]
F-2-63

[1]

23) Mount the lock hinge cover L [1]. - 2 bosses [2] - screw (TP; M3x8) [3]
MEMO: Keep the arm and the control panel upright to facilitate mounting of the lock hinge cover R.

Be sure to adjust the length of the cable [1] so that it is inside the plate [2].

[2] [1]

[2] [1]

[2]

[1]
MEMO: If the control panel is tilting, go through the following steps to correct: 1) Loosen the 4 screws [1] found on the back of the control panel. 2) Shift the control panel [2] to its correct orientation, and tighten the screws loosened previously. F-2-66

[3]

24) Tilt the control panel [1] in the direction of the arrow.
[1]

[2]

[1]

F-2-67

25) Fit the Hinge slide cover [1] in the direction of the arrow. 21) Mount the arm cover 4 [1] from behind the arm unit. - screw (binding; M4X10) [2]
[2] [1]
[1]

[1]

F-2-68 F-2-64

22) Mount the lock hinge cover R [1].

26) Fix the Hinge slide cover in place. - 2 screws (TP; M3X8) [1] - 2 Cover rubber (for M3)

2-16

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]
F-2-69

5) Fit the toner bottle [1] in place.

27) Hook the claw [1] of the rear upper right cover on the hole of the cover support plate; then, fit the rear upper right cover [2] in place. - 3 screws [3] (removed in step 1)) - screw (included; binding; M4X10) [4]
[2] [1]

Be sure to push it until it stops.

[1]

[4]

6) Shift the toner cartridge locking lever [1] to the right to lock it in place.
[3]
F-2-70

[3]

2.2.9 Supplying Toner

1) Open the hopper cover [1].
0010-8961

[1]

[1]
F-2-73

7) Close the hopper cover.

2.2.10 Turning On the Main Power

0011-6943

F-2-71

2) Peel off the packing tape from the machine. 3) Shift the toner cartridge locking lever [1] to the left to release.

Be sure to remove all packing material from inside the cassette before turning on the main power.

1) Slide out the duplexing unit, and check to make sure there is no foreign matter and damage. 2) Check to make sure that the main power switch is at OFF; then, connect the machine's power plug to the power outlet. 3) Turn on the main power switch by shifting it to ON. - A screen appears indicating that programs are being loaded. - A message appears indicating that the machine is starting up.
MEMO: The message prompting replacement of the toner container is displayed, however this does not indicate an error.

[1]

2.2.11 Stirring the Toner

F-2-72

When the wait period is over, start service mode to supply toner to the developing unit.

0011-1246

4) Hold the toner bottle [1] as shown, and turn the cap [2] in the direction of the arrow to detach the cap from the bottle.

Do not shake the toner bottle.

1) Start service mode. ( > '2' and '8' at the same time > ) 2) Make the following selections: COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > TONER-S. 3) See that the following message has appeared: "Check the Developer." 4) Check to see that the developing assembly is mounted properly; then, press the OK key. - The supply operation lasts about 8 to 10 min, and stops automatically. (At the end of the operation, the message "STOP!" appears.) 5) End service mode.

2-17

Chapter 2

[1]
Do not perform the following while the machine is in operation:

- turning off the power - opening/closing the ADF - opening/closing any of the various covers - opening/closing the cassettes - opening/closing the deck

2.2.12 Index Sheet Attachment

1) Choose cassette 1 or 2 for use with index sheets. Press the release button of the cassette you have chosen, and slide out the cassette. Match the 2 one-touch supports [1] against the holes [2] of the cassette, and fit in the pins to attach. 2) Holding it so that the protrusion is at the top, match the hole in the index sheet attachment [3] against the one-touch support [1]. 3) Place the base sheet [4] into the cassette, and put the cassette back into the machine.
[1] [3]
0010-8965

F-2-76

<Original Size Label> 1) Fit the Original Size label [1] as indicated on the ADF open/close cover, and attach it in place.

A4 A3

B5 B4

A5 A4R

B5R

A5R

[1] [4]

[1]
F-2-77

[2]
F-2-74

2.2.13 Others
<Shut-Down Caution Label> 1) Affix the shut down instruction label [1] in the appropriate language on the indicated position.
0011-9786

iR7105/7095 Only <Cleaning Instructions Label> 1) Fit the cleaning instructions label [1] of the appropriate language on the upper rear cover as indicated, and attach it over the existing label. (The English label is attached at time of shipment.)

[1]

[1]

ON

F-2-78

<Lamp Warning Label> 1) Fit the Lamp Warning Label [1] of the appropriate language on the upper rear cover as indicated, and attach it over the existing label. (The English label is attached at time of shipment.)
F-2-75

iR7086 Only <Cleaning Position Label> 1) Fit the Cleaning Position label [1] as indicated on the front cover, and attach it in place.

2-18

Chapter 2

[1]

[1]
F-2-83

8) Affix the corresponding cassette size label [1] onto the paper size plate [2] of the cassette. Set the paper size plate in the cassette cover.
F-2-79

[2] [1]

<Manual Feeder Set Label> 1) Open the manual feeder assembly [1] of the ADF; then, fit the Manual Feeder Set Label [2] as indicated, and attach it in place.

[2]

[1]
F-2-80

F-2-84

9) Close the deck/cassette. 10) To ensure stable reproduction of images, generate 2 solid black prints (A3) as follows: 11) Start service mode. ( '2' and '8' at the same time > ) 12) Make the following selections: COPIER > TEST > PG > PG-PICK. 13) Select the source of paper containing A3 paper, and press the OK key. ('3' for cassette 3; '4' for cassette 4) 14) Press reset once. 15) Make the following selections: COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE. 16) Type in '7', and press the OK key. ('7' for solid black; PG-TYPE7) 17) Press the Start key to generate a single solid black (A3) print. Check the output, and wait for about 5 sec. Then, press the Start key to generate another print. 18) When done, press the Reset key twice to end service mode. 19) Place the test sheet on the copyboard, and check the copy image. Check to be sure that the pickup operation for all sources of paper is normal (by making 3 test copies each from decks and cassettes). - check to be sure that there is no abnormal noise. - check to see that images at all default magnifications are normal. - check to see that as many copies as specified are made normally. - if there is a difference in density between left and right, correct it by adjusting the height of the primary charging wire at the front or the rear. - Check to see that copying operation is normal. horizontal registration standard (margin at image left): 2.5 +/-1.5 mm lead edge registration standard (margin at image lead edge): 4.0 +1.5/-1.0 mm If not as indicated, make adjustments by referring to the instructions under "Adjusting the Horizontal Registration" and "Adjusting the Lead Edge Registration."

2.2.14 Attaching the Labels, Placing Paper, and Checking Images and Operation
1) Check with the user to find out the size of paper that will be used. 2) Press the release button of the front deck (right, left), and slide out the deck.
0010-8971

If you are changing the size of the front deck (right, left), refer to the instructions under "Switching Over the Front Deck (right/left) Paper Size."

3) Attach the 3-hole paper placement label [1].

[1]
F-2-81

4) Put paper in the front deck (right/left). 5) Close the front deck (right/left). Affix the corresponding cassette size label [1] onto the paper size plate of the each deck.

At times, the first 10 copies or so may show soiled images because of toner dropping from the drum separation claw. The symptom should disappear as additional copies are made.

[1]
F-2-82

20) Make double-sided copies to check the machine operation. 21) Make standard settings in additional functions and service mode to suit the needs of the user. 22) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode. 23) Clean up the area around the machine. 24) Move the machine to its final place, and fix it in place using the adjusters. 25) If you are installing accessories, do so according to their respective Installation Procedures.

6) Press the release button of the cassette 3/4, and slide out the cassette. 7) Attach the 3-hole paper placement label [1].

2-19

Chapter 2

MEMO: For the Card Reader-D1, see "Card Reader-D1 Installation Procedure."

[2]

26) Fill out the service sheet.

2.2.15 Adjusting the Horizontal Registration

<Cassette 3/4> 1) Press the release button of cassette 3/4, and slide out the cassette. 2) Detach the cassette front cover [1] in the direction of the arrow. - 2 screws [2]
[2]
0011-1257

[1]
F-2-88

8) Put cassette 3/4 back inside the machine. 9) When done, execute the following service mode items: 10) Exit the service mode. Cassette 3 COPIER > FUNCTION > CST > C3-STMTR COPIER > FUNCTION > CST > C3-A4R Register the paper width basic value for cassette 3. 9-1) Place STMTR paper in the cassette 3, and move the side guide plate to suit the STMTR width. 9-2) Select C3-STMTR in service mode to highlight, and press the OK key so that adjustment will be executed and the value will be registered automatically. 9-3) Likewise, repeat steps 9.1) and 9.2) for A4R. Cassette 4 COPIER > FUNCTION > CST > C4-STMTR COPIER > FUNCTION > CST > C4-A4R Perform the work you performed for cassette 3. <Front Deck Left/Right> 1) Press the release button of the front deck (left/right), and slide out the deck. 2) Loosen the 4 screws [1].
[2] [2]

[1]
F-2-85

3) Loosen the 2 fixing screws [1] found on the right/left of the cassette. 4) Move the cassette case [2] to the front or the rear to make adjustments. - move it to the rear to decrease the horizontal registration (left margin). - move it to the front to increase the horizontal registration (left margin).

[1]

[1] [1]
F-2-86

5) Check to make sure that the horizontal registration value (L; left margin) of the image made on paper from cassette 3/4 is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.

[1]

[1]

image

L1

F-2-89

F-2-87

[1] Paper movement 6) When done, tighten the 2 fixing screws loosened in step 3). 7) Shift up the cassette front cover [1] in the direction of the arrow, and secure it in place using 2 screws [2].

3) Move the cassette guide assembly (front) [1] to the front or the rear to make adjustments. - move the guide plate to the rear to decrease the horizontal registration (left margin). - move the guide plate to the front to increase the horizontal registration (left margin).

2-20

Chapter 2

Wl

[1]

0 2 4 6 8

F-2-90

10
F-2-93

4) Check to see that the horizontal registration (L; left/right margin) of the images made on paper from the front deck (left/right) is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.

2.2.16 Adjusting the Lead Edge Registration

1) Make the following selections in service mode so that the image margin will be as indicated: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REGIST. 2) Exit the service mode. - if the margin is too large, increase the setting of REGIST (a change of 10 will decrease the margin by 1 mm). - if the margin is too small, decrease the setting of REGIST (a change of 10 will increase the margin by 1 mm). Lf=4.0+1.5/-1.0
0011-3857

[1]

image

L1

F-2-91

[1] Paper movement 5) Tighten the 4 screws you loosened in step 2). 6) Put the front deck (left/right) back in place. <Manual Feeder Tray> 1) Move the side guide plate [1] to the center, and loosen the 2 manual feeder tray mounting screws [2]; then, adjust the position of the manual feeder tray.
[2]
0 2 4 6 8 10
F-2-94

Lf

2.2.17 Setting the Cassette

1) Press the release button of cassette 3/4, and slide out the cassette. 2) Fit the side guide plate [1] in the hole (A4/A3) identified by the marking M [2].
[1]
0010-8964

[1]

F-2-92

<Duplexing Transport Unit> 1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-REFER so that the image margin on the 2nd side will be as indicated. 2) Exit the service mode. - if the margin is too large, decrease the setting of ADJ-REFER (a change of 10 will decrease the margin by 1 mm). - if the margin is too small, increase the setting of DJ-REFER (a change of 10 will increase the margin by 1 mm). W1=2.5 +/-2.0 mm

[2]

F-2-95

3) Fit the included inch block from inside the cassette so that the hole (STMT-R) of marking A [1] and the hole (LTR-R) of marking H [2] are covered.

- Be sure there is no gap. - Perform the foregoing steps if the user is going to use AB series sheets only.

2-21

Chapter 2

[1]

[1]

[2]

F-2-96

[2]
F-2-99
0011-4484

4) Put the cassettes back in the machine.

2.2.18 Correcting the Skew

If paper from the left/right deck moves askew, go through the following: 1) Loosen the 2 screws [1]. 2) Push the side guide plate (front) [2] against the paper.
[2] [1]

4) Put paper in the front deck. 5) Close the front deck. 6) Choose the appropriate deck size label [1] from the backing paper (cassette/deck), and attach it to the paper size plate of the deck.

[1]
F-2-100

7) Start service mode, and register the front deck paper size.
F-2-97 MEMO: right deck: COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C1 left deck: COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C2 A4=6, B5=15, LTR=18

3) With the side guide plate (front) against the paper, tighten the screw.

2.2.19 Switching Over the Paper Size for the Front Deck (right, left)
1) Press the front deck release button, and slide out the deck. 2) Remove the screw [2] of the rear guide plate [1], and fix the guide plate in place to match the size specified by the user.
[1] [2]
0010-8997

8) Exit the service mode. 9) When done, go through the shut-down sequence to turn off and then on the main power.

2.2.20 Fixing Host Machine in Place

<After installing the host machine> 1) Clean up the area around the host machine. 2) Move the host machine in a desired place and fix it in place with 2 adjustors.
MEMO: If the adjustor cannot be rotated by hand, use a screwdriver to rotate it.
0017-8636

F-2-98

3) Remove the screw [2] from the left/right guide plate [1], and fix the guide plate in place to match the size specified by the user.

2-22

Chapter 2

[1]

3) Complete the necessary information in a service book and store it in a service book storage.

2.2.21 Checking the Operation in a System Configuration

1) Install the accessories according to their respective Installation Procedures. 2) Check to make sure that all accessories have been connected correctly. - Make a check in service mode: Start service mode, and make the following selections: COPIER > OPTION > ACCPST-D > ACC1 through 8. Check to see that the order and the model names are indicated correctly. End service mode. - Click 'system status/stop' to check the device information. Check to make sure that all connected accessories are indicated. 3) Check the operation using the accessories. - Make sure paper does not jam, move askew, or fail to deposit properly.
0011-4297

2-23

Chapter 2

2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network

2.3.1 Overview
The information in this section applies when connecting the host machine to a network. If the user's network is in TCP/IP environment, use the PING command to see that the network settings are correct. There is no need to check the settings using the PING command if the use's network is in an IPX/SPX or Apple Talk environment.
0017-8463

MEMO: A remote host address refers to the IP address of a PC connected to the TCP/ IP network to which the machine is also connected.

1) Tell the user's system administrator that you are going to check the connection to the network using the PING command. 2) Check with the system administrator to find out the remote host address. 3) Type in the remote host address for 'PING'.
MEMO: > [Additional Functions] > [System Settings] > [Network Settings] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 Settings] > *[ PING command] > [Done]

2.3.2 Checking the Network Connections

0010-9001

Perform the following work only if the machine is connected to a network.

*PING Command: Contact a system administrator to get the IP address for the device connected with the network.

1) Go through the shut-down sequence to turn off the main power. 2) Connect the network cable to the machine, and turn on the main power switch. 3) Tell the user's system administrator that the machine has been installed, and ask him/her to make the machine's network settings. 4) If the message is 'Response from host', the connection to the network is normal. 5) If the message is 'No response from host', the machine is not correctly connected to the network. Start the troubleshooting work in the next section.

The following additional functions items must be set to 'ON' when making network settings: system administrator setup > network setup > change network settings/ check connection.

2.4 Troubleshooting the Network

2.4.1 Troubleshooting the Network
0010-9004

4) When the network settings have been made, go through steps 1) thorough 3) to turn off and then on the main power so that the settings will become valid.

2.3.3 Using the PING Command

0010-9002

Perform the following work only if the machine is connected to the network:

The information in this section applies when connecting the host machine to a network. If the user's network is in TCP/IP environment, use the PING command to see that the network settings are correct. There is no need to check the settings using the PING command if the use's network is in an IPX/SPX or Apple Talk environment.

An attempt to connect to the network may fail because of the following: a. faulty connection between network and main controller PCB b. incorrect machine settings or TCP/IP settings c. faulty main controller PCB, faulty mounting of the PCB d. faulty user network

2.4.2 Making a Check Using a Loop Back Address

A loop back address comes back before reaching the main controller PCB. Executing the PING command using it will enable a check on the TCP/IP settings of the machine. 1) Type in the loop back address (127.0.0.1) for 'PING'. - If the message is 'No response from host', the machine is not correctly connected to the network. Start the troubleshooting work in the next section. - If the message is 'Response from host', the connection to the network is normal.
0010-9005

1) Make the following settings in service mode: COPIER > TEXT > NETWORK > PING. 2) Type in the IP address using the control panel keypad, and press the OK key. 3) Press the OK key. - When the check with the PING command is successful, 'OK' will be indicated; otherwise, 'NG' will be indicated.

2.4.3 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address

A local host address is the IP address of the machine, and it comes back after reaching the main controller PCB, thus enabling a check on the machine itself. 1) Type in the IP address of the machine for 'PING' - If the message is 'No response from host', the machine is not correctly connected to the network. Start the troubleshooting work in the next section. a. the IP address of the machine may be faulty. Check with the system administrator to see if the IP address settings of the machine are correct and the IP address assigned to the machine is correct. b. the main controller PCB may have poor connection. Check the connectors of the main controller PCB. c. the main controller PCB may be faulty. Replace the controller PCB. - If the message is 'Response from host', the connection to the network is normal.
0010-9006

<NETWORK> PING

< 1/1 > 0. 0. 0. 0

<READY >

[1]

[2]

2.5 Installing the Card Reader

+/OK

2.5.1 Checking the Contents

<Card Reader-D1>
0010-9008

F-2-101

[1] Result (OK/NG) [2] IP address input

2.3.4 Making a Check Using a Remote Host Address

You can check to see if the connection to the network is correct by executing the PING command using a remote host address.
0010-9003

2-24

Chapter 2

[1] [2]

[1]

[3]
F-2-102 T-2-1 [1] [2] [3] Card reader unit Screw (binding; B tight; M3x10) Screw (flat-head; small; M4x6) 1 pc. F-2-104

6) Remove the primary charging assembly front cover [1]. - screw [2]
[1]
4 pc.* 1 pc.*

[2]

* No use in the host machine.

2.5.2 Turning Off the Host Machine

0018-0078

Turning Off the Main Power When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following in strict sequence to protect the machine's hard disk:

F-2-105

1) Hold down on the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more. 2) Operate on the touch panel according to the shut-down sequence indicated so that the main power switch may be turned off. 3) Turn off the main power switch. 4) Disconnect the power cable (for the power outlet).

7) Remove the process unit cover [1]. - 4 screws [2]

[1]

2.5.3 Installing the Card Reader-D1

1) Start service mode, and make the following selections: COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD; then, type in the lowest of the card numbers to be used (1 through 2001). As many as 1000 cards starting with the number you have entered may be used. 2) Go through the shut-down sequence to turn off the main power. 3) Open the hopper cover [1]. 8) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1].
[1]
0010-9009

[2]
F-2-106

[1]

F-2-103

4) Open the front cover. 5) Slide out the fixing transport unit [1].
F-2-107

9) Remove the upper inside cover [1]. - 5 screws [2]

Do not drop the screws.

2-25

Chapter 2

[1]

[3]

[2]
[2]
F-2-108

10) Remove the upper front cover unit [1]. - 3 screws [2]
[2] [1]

[1]

F-2-112

14) Remove the 2 screws [1] from the top of the card reader base. 15) Mount the card reader [3] using the 2 screws [2] used to hold the face plate in place and the 2 screws [1] you have removed previously. 16) Route the harness [4] and the grounding wire [5] under the card reader as shown and through the edge saddle [6].
[1]

F-2-109

[3]

11) Remove the upper front cover unit lower cover [1]. - 8 screws [2]
[2] [1]

[2]

[2] [2]
F-2-110

[4] [5]

[2]

12) Remove the card reader base [1]. - screw [2]

[2]
[6]
F-2-113

17) Remove the toothed screw [1] from the rear of the card reader base. Fix the grounding wire [2] in place using the toothed screw [1] you have removed.

[1]
F-2-111

[1]

13) Remove the face plate [2] from the card reader base [1]. - 2 screws [3] (The removed part will be used in step 18).)

[2]
F-2-114

18) Remove the 2 screws [1] from the front of the card reader base. Change the orientation of the face plate [2] you have removed in step 13),

2-26

Chapter 2 and fix it in place using 2 screws [1] you have removed previously.

2.6 Installing the Reader Heater

2.6.1 Checking the Contents
0011-8534

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[1]
F-2-115

[2]

19) Mount the card reader base to the upper front cover unit. 20) Mount the upper front cover unit lower cover to the upper front cover unit.
F-2-118 Take care not to trap the cable by the upper front cover unit and the upper front cover unit lower cover. [1] [2] Mirror heater Lens heater Cable clamp Heater harness retainer Screw (RS tightening; M4X8) FK2-0229-000 FK2-0228-000 WT2-0507-000 FC5-2945-000 XB3-6400-805 1 pc. 1 pc. 2 pc. 1 pc. 4 pc.

21) Lead the cable [1] of the card reader to the front of the upper front cover unit [2], and mount the upper front cover unit [2] to the machine. - 3 screws [3]
[3] [2]

[3] [4] [5]

2.6.2 Turning Off the Host Machine

0011-8536

Turning Off the Main Power When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following in strict sequence to protect the machine's hard disk: 1) Hold down on the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more. 2) Operate on the touch panel according to the shut-down sequence indicated so that the main power switch may be turned off. 3) Turn off the main power switch. 4) Disconnect the power cable (for the power outlet).

[1]
F-2-116

22) Connect the connector [1] of the machine and the relay connector [2] of the card reader.
[1] [2]

2.6.3 Installation Procedure

1) Open the ADF. 2) Remove the 2 screws [1] and detach the glass retainer [2]. 3) Remove the copyboard glass [3].
[1]
0011-8567

F-2-117

23) Mount the covers by going through the steps used to remove them but only in reverse: - mount the upper inside cover. - connect the connector. - mount the process unit cover. - mount the primary charging assembly front cover. - push in the fixing transport unit. - close the front cover and the hopper cover. 24) Connect the machine's power plug, and turn on the main power switch.
[3]
F-2-119

[2]

When removing the copyboard glass, be sure not to touch the glass surface and the white plate on the backside with your finger. When dirt is attached, clean the glass with lint-free paper.

2-27

Chapter 2 7) Move the mirror 1 mount [1] in the left direction until it stops at the original position.

[1]

F-2-123

8) Insert the cable clamp [1] into the hole [2] of the frame.
[1]

4) Hold the bended area [1] on the mirror stay and move the mirror 1 mount [A] in the right direction until it stops.
[1] [A]
F-2-124

[2]

9) Attach the lens heater [1]. - 1 connector [2] - 1 cable clamp [3] - 1 screw (RS tightening; M4X8) [4]
[2] [3]
F-2-120

5) Insert the front side of the mirror heater [1] under the cable guide, connect the connector [2], and attach it with the 2 screws (RS tightening; M4X8) [3].
[4]

[2]
F-2-125

[1]

[1]

Tighten the screw [3] while pushing the lens heater [1] in the direction of the embossed section [2]. Be careful so that the claw [4] of the heater is not removed. Make sure that the bottom of the heater firmly contacts with the frame.

[3]
F-2-121

6) Attach the heater harness retainer [1]. - 1 screw (RS tightening; M4X8) [2]
[1] [2]

[2]

[4] [3] [1]

10) When the cable [1] is loosened, fix it by inserting the cable clamp [2] into the hole of the frame.

F-2-122

2-28

Chapter 2

[2]

[1]

F-2-126

When the vertical size sensor kit is attached, make sure that the cable is attached to the 2 clamps [A].

[1]
F-2-127

2.7 Installing the Cassette Heater

2.7.1 Checking the Contents
0011-6415

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[A]

F-2-128

11) Attach the copyboard glass and glass retainer in the procedure opposite to the removal procedure. 12) Turn ON the environmental switch [1] located on the rear left side of the main unit.
[1] [2] [3] [4] Heater assembly Heater cable guide Screw (TP; M4X6) Screw (RS tightening; M4X8) FG2-9812-000 FG2-9195-000 XB6-7400-609 XA9-0628-000 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 2pc.

2.7.2 Turning Off the Host Machine

0011-6416

- 10 screws [2]

Turning Off the Main Power When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following in strict sequence to protect the machine's hard disk:

1) Hold down on the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more. 2) Operate on the touch panel according to the shut-down sequence indicated so that the main power switch may be turned off. 3) Turn off the main power switch. 4) Disconnect the power cable (for the power outlet).

2.7.3 Mounting the Cassette Heater

1) Remove the main controller box cover [1].
0011-6417

2-29

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]

[2]

[2]
F-2-132

5) Lift the inside unit [1] of the cassette 4 to detach.

[1]
[2]
F-2-129

2) Remove the rear cover [1]. - reader power cable [2] - 8 screws [3]
[2] [3]

F-2-133

[3]

6) Likewise, detach the inside unit of the cassette 3. 7) Mount the heater cable guide [2] tothe heater unit [1]. - screw (TP; M4X6) [3] 1pc - connector [4] 1pc

[1]

[3]

[4]

[1]
F-2-130

3) Remove the DC controller PCB [1] together with its base. - all connectors - Free the cable from the wire saddle. - 3 screws [2]

[2] [3]
F-2-134

[1]

[2]

8) Lead the cassette heater connector [1] through the long hole [A]; then, hook the metal plate [B] found at the rear of the cassette heater [2] on the hole [C] in the cassette stay.

Check to make sure that the heater cord guide [3] is securely fitted in the long hole [A].

F-2-131

4) Press the release button [1], and slide out the cassette 4 [2].

2-30

Chapter 2

[C] [B]

[B]

[1]

[A]

[2] [1]

[2]
F-2-136

11) Attach the parts that you have removed. - DC controller PCB - rear cover - main controller box cover - internal units of cassettes - cassette 3,4 12) Connect the power plug, and turn on the machine's main power switch.

2.8 Installing the Deck Heater

2.8.1 Unpacking and Checking the Components
< Cassette Heater Unit-31/32>
[3] [3]
0011-9625

[3]
9) Secure the cassette stay [1] in place from the rear of the machine using two screws [2].

[6]

[8]

[1]

[2]
F-2-135

10) Mount the heater cable guide [2] to the herter unit [1].

[7]

F-2-137

2-31

Chapter 2

[1] Heater unit [3] Relay harness unit [5] Screw (w/ washer) [7] Power supply label [9] Stop ring

1pc. 1pc. 2pcs. 1pc. 1pc.

[2] AC input connector [4] AC cable [6] Cable protection bush [8] RS tight screw (M4X8) [10] RS tight screw (M4X8); White

1pc. 1pcs. 1pc. 2pcs. 1pc.

2.8.2 Installing to the Paper Deck (Cassette Heater Unit31/32)

0011-9627

At the rear side of the host machine [2]

[1]

Turning Off the Main Power When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following in strict sequence to protect the machine's hard disk: 1) Hold down on the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more. 2) Operate on the touch panel according to the shut-down sequence indicated so that the main power switch may be turned off. 3) Turn off the main power switch. 4) Disconnect the power cable (for the power outlet).

Be sure to observe the following when installing the heater to the paper deck:

[3]
F-2-139 - Check to make sure that the host machine's and the paper deck have been installed properly. - Take care to identify the types of screws (length, diameter) and location.

3) Remove the three screws [1], and move the right cover [2] of the paper deck in the direction of the arrow to remove.
[2]

< Installation > 1) Disconnect the connector [1] of the paper deck from the host machine's.

[1]

[1]
F-2-140 F-2-138

2) Detach the paper deck [1] from the host machine's; then, push down the latch plate [2] of the compartment of the paper deck to open the compartment [3].

4) Remove the six screws [1] ; then, and remove the rear cover [2] of the paper deck.

2-32

Chapter 2

[1]

[1]

[2]

[1] [2]

[1]
F-2-141

F-2-144

5) Remove the three screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, remove the upper front cover [3].
[1] [2] [3]

8) Put the heater unit [1] under the paper deck top plate [2], and lead out the connector [3] through the opening in the top plate.[1] 9) Engage the two hooks [5] on the heater unit [1] on the top plate of the paper deck [6], and fix it in place to the paper deck with a screw (w/ washer) [7].
[6]

[2]

[5]

[4]

[3]

F-2-142

6) Remove the two screws [1], and remove the upper cover [2].
[1] [2]

[7]

[1]
F-2-145

[5]

[6]

10) Set the heater connector [2] on the panel mount [1].
[1] [2]

F-2-143

7) Install the cable protection bush [1] that comes with the heater to the opening in the paper deck top plate [2].

F-2-146

2-33

Chapter 2

2.8.3 Installing to the host machine (Cassette Heater Unit31/32)

1) Remove the one screws [1], and remove the cover from power supply cord mount [2].
0011-9628

[5]

[1] [2]

[1] [2]
F-2-147

2) Attach the AC input connector [1] to power supply cord mount.

[1]

[4]

[3]
F-2-150

[6]

7) Install the external covers of the paper deck in order: [1] Upper cover* (M4X8: 2 pc.) [2] Upper front cover** (M4X8: 3 pc.) [3] Rear cover (M3X8: 2 pc, M4X8: 4 pc.) [4] Right cover (M4X8: 3 pc.) * Avoid trapping wire. ** Connect the connector. 8) Slide the paper deck to the left to set it to the copier. 9) Connect the connector [1] of the paper deck to the back of the host machine.
[1]
F-2-148

3) Fix the ground wire [2] with a screw (w/washer) [1].

[1]

[1] [2]
F-2-149 F-2-151

4) Mount the relay harness unit [2] to the rear side plate [3] of the paper deck with two screws [1]. 5) Put the lock of the tie-wrap on the relay harness into the hole of the rear side plate [4] as shown to fix the relay harness in place. 6) Connect the connectors on both ends of the relay harness unit to the heater connector [5] and the AC power supply connector [6].

10) Attach the power supply label [1] to the rear cover of the paper deck as indicated.

2-34

Chapter 2

Copier

(front)

Paper deck

2.8.4 Unpacking and Checking the Components

[1]
F-2-152

<Cassette Heater Unit-23/25>

0014-0404

[3]

11) Connect the AC cable [1] to the power supply cord mount of the heater, and connect its power plug [2] to the back of the host machine. - Check to make sure that the host machine's power plug is disconnected. 12) Fit the stop ring [3]. - Screw [4] X 1pc
[2]

[6]

[8]

[3] [4]

[7]

[1]
F-2-153

Be sure to advise the user not to place any object within the area [3] indicated in the figure by shading. F-2-154

[1]

Heater unit

1pc.

[2]

AC input connector

1pc.

2-35

Chapter 2
[3] [5] [7] Relay harness unit Screw (w/ washer) Power supply label 1pc. 2pcs. 1pc. [4] [6] [8] AC cable Cable protection bush RS tight screw (M4X8) 1pcs. 1pc. 2pcs.

2.8.5 Installing to the Paper Deck (Cassette Heater Unit23/25)

0014-0410

3) Remove the three screws [1], and move the right cover [2] of the paper deck in the direction of the arrow to remove.
[2]

Turning Off the Main Power When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following in strict sequence to protect the machine's hard disk: 1) Hold down on the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more. 2) Operate on the touch panel according to the shut-down sequence indicated so that the main power switch may be turned off. 3) Turn off the main power switch. 4) Disconnect the power cable (for the power outlet).

Be sure to observe the following when installing the heater to the paper deck:

- Check to make sure that the host machine's and the paper deck have been installed properly. - Take care to identify the types of screws (length, diameter) and location.

[1]
F-2-157

4) Remove the six screws [1] ; then, and remove the rear cover [2] of the paper deck.
[1]

< Installation > 1) Disconnect the connector [1] of the paper deck from the host machine's.

[1]
[1]

[2]

F-2-155

2) Detach the paper deck [1] from the host machine's; then, push down the latch plate [2] of the compartment of the paper deck to open the compartment [3]. At the rear side of the host machine [2] [1]

[1]
F-2-158

5) Remove the three screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, remove the upper front cover [3].

[3]
F-2-156

2-36

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

[2]
[3]

[6]

[5]

[4]

[3]

F-2-159

6) Remove the two screws [1], and remove the upper cover [2].
[1] [2]

[7]

[1]
F-2-162

[5]

[6]

10) Set the heater connector [2] on the panel mount [1].
[1] [2]

F-2-160

7) Install the cable protection bush [1] that comes with the heater to the opening in the paper deck top plate [2].
[1]
F-2-163

2.8.6 Installing to the host machine (Cassette Heater Unit23/25)

1) Remove the one screws [1], and remove the cover from power supply cord mount [2].
[2]
0014-0411

F-2-161

8) Put the heater unit [1] under the paper deck top plate [2], and lead out the connector [3] through the opening in the top plate.[1] 9) Engage the two hooks [5] on the heater unit [1] on the top plate of the paper deck [6], and fix it in place to the paper deck with a screw (w/ washer) [7].
F-2-164

[1] [2]

2) Attach the AC input connector [1] to power supply cord mount.

2-37

Chapter 2 7) Install the external covers of the paper deck in order: [1] Upper cover* (M4X8: 2 pc.) [2] Upper front cover** (M4X8: 3 pc.) [3] Rear cover (M3X8: 2 pc, M4X8: 4 pc.) [4] Right cover (M4X8: 3 pc.) * Avoid trapping wire. ** Connect the connector. 8) Slide the paper deck to the left to set it to the copier. 9) Connect the connector [1] of the paper deck to the back of the host machine.

[1]
F-2-165

3) Fix the ground wire [2] with a screw (w/washer) [1].

[1]

F-2-168

10) Attach the power supply label [1] to the rear cover of the paper deck as indicated.

[1] [2]
F-2-166

4) Mount the relay harness unit [2] to the rear side plate [3] of the paper deck with two screws [1]. 5) Put the lock of the tie-wrap on the relay harness into the hole of the rear side plate [4] as shown to fix the relay harness in place. 6) Connect the connectors on both ends of the relay harness unit to the heater connector [5] and the AC power supply connector [6].

[5]

[1] [2]
[1]
F-2-169

11) Connect the AC cable [1] to the power supply cord mount of the heater, and connect its power plug [2] to the back of the host machine. - Check to make sure that the host machine's power plug is disconnected.

Be sure to advise the user not to place any object within the area [3] indicated in the figure by shading.

Copier

(front)

Paper deck

[1]

[4]

[3]
F-2-167

[6]

2-38

Chapter 2

2.9 Installing the Deck Heater (Large Deck)

2.9.1 Unpacking and Checking the Components
<Cassette Heater Unit-31/32>
[1] [2] [3]
0011-9629

[4]

[5]

[6]
F-2-170

[7]

[8]

[9]*

[10]*

[1] [3] [5] [7] [9]*

Heater unit Relay harness unit Screw (w/ washer) Power supply label Stop ring

1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc.

[2] [4] [6] [8] [10]*

Power cord base AC cable (for copier outlet) Cable protection bush RS tightening screw (M4X8) RS tightening screw (M4X8; White)

1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 2 pc. 1 pc.

* iR7105/7095/7086 Series only

2.9.2 Installing to the paper Deck (Cassette Heater Unit-31/32)

0011-9630

Be sure of the following when installing the heater to the paper deck.

- The host machine and the power deck have properly been installed. - The screws are identified by type (length, diameter) and location of use.

Turning Off the Main Power When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following in strict sequence to protect the machine's hard disk: 1) Hold down on the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more. 2) Operate on the touch panel according to the shut-down sequence indicated so that the main power switch may be turned off. 3) Turn off the main power switch. 4) Disconnect the power cable (for the power outlet).

< Installation > 1) Disconnect the connector of the paper deck from the host machine. 2) Release the paper deck from the host machine, and push down the latch plate [2] of the compartment [1] to open the compartment.

2-39

Chapter 2

[2]

[1]
F-2-171

3) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the right cover [2] in the direction of the arrow.

F-2-172

4) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the rear cover [2].

F-2-173

5) Remove the 4 screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]. Then, detach the upper front cover [3].

2-40

Chapter 2

F-2-174

6) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the upper cover [2].

F-2-175

7) Fit the cable protection bush [1] into the hole of the top plate. 8) Remove the 2 screw [2], and detach the heater top plate [3].

F-2-176

9) Mount the heater top plate [2] to the heater unit [3] using a screw (w/ washer) [1].

2-41

Chapter 2

F-2-177

10) Fit the heater unit [1] under the top plate [2], and lead out the connector [3] through the hole [4] in the top plate. 11) Engage the 2 hooks [5] of the heater unit on the TP plate, and secure it in place with 2 screws [6].

F-2-178

12) Fit the connector [2] of the heater to the panel mount [1].

F-2-179

13) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the power cord base [2]. Then, mount the included power cord base using the 2 included screws [1].

You will not be using the screw [1] and the power cord base [2] you have removed from the paper deck.

[1]

[2]

F-2-180

2-42

Chapter 2 14) Mount the relay harness unit [2] to the rear side plate using 2 screws [1]. 15) Fit the 2 tie-wraps (w/ lock) [3] of the relay harness in the holes of the rear side plate as shown to fix the relay harness in place. 16) Connect the 2 connectors [4] on both sides of the relay harness unit.

F-2-181

17) Mount the external covers of the paper deck in sequence as follows. 1. Upper over (M4x8, 4 pc.; Be sure to avoid trapping the wire.) 2. Upper front cover (M4x8, 4 pc.; Connect the connector.) 3. Rear cover (M3x8, 2 pc.; M4x8, 5 pc.) 4. Right cover (M4x8, 3 pc.) 18) Slide the paper deck to the left by hand to set it to the host machine. 19) Attach the power supply label [1] to the rear over of the paper deck as shown.

[1]
F-2-182

20) Connect the power cable [1] to the power cord base of the heater. Then, connect the other power plug [2] to the AC outlet of the host machine. 21) Fit the stop ring [3]. - RS tightening screw (M4X8; White)[4]

2-43

Chapter 2

[2]

[3] [4]

[1]
F-2-183

Be sure to advise the user not to place any object within the area [3] indicated in the figure by shading.

Copier

(front)

Paper deck

2.9.3 Unpacking and Checking the Components

<Cassette Heater Unit-23/25>
0014-0416

2-44

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]
F-2-184

[7]

[8]

[1] [3] [5] [7]

Heater unit Relay harness unit Screw (w/ washer) Power supply label

1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc.

[2] [4] [6] [8]

Power cord base AC cable (for copier outlet) Cable protection bush RS tightening screw (M4X8)

1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 2 pc.

2.9.4 Installing to the paper Deck (Cassette Heater Unit-23/25)

0014-0418

Be sure of the following when installing the heater to the paper deck.

- The host machine and the power deck have properly been installed. - The screws are identified by type (length, diameter) and location of use.

Turning Off the Main Power When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following in strict sequence to protect the machine's hard disk: 1) Hold down on the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more. 2) Operate on the touch panel according to the shut-down sequence indicated so that the main power switch may be turned off. 3) Turn off the main power switch. 4) Disconnect the power cable (for the power outlet).

< Installation > 1) Disconnect the connector of the paper deck from the host machine. 2) Release the paper deck from the host machine, and push down the latch plate [2] of the compartment [1] to open the compartment.

[2]

[1]
F-2-185

2-45

Chapter 2 3) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the right cover [2] in the direction of the arrow.

F-2-186

4) Remove the 7 screws [1], and detach the rear cover [2].

F-2-187

5) Remove the 4 screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]. Then, detach the upper front cover [3].

F-2-188

6) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the upper cover [2].

2-46

Chapter 2

F-2-189

7) Fit the cable protection bush [1] into the hole of the top plate. 8) Remove the 2 screw [2], and detach the heater top plate [3].

F-2-190

9) Mount the heater top plate [2] to the heater unit [3] using a screw (w/ washer) [1].

F-2-191

10) Fit the heater unit [1] under the top plate [2], and lead out the connector [3] through the hole [4] in the top plate. 11) Engage the 2 hooks [5] of the heater unit on the TP plate, and secure it in place with 2 screws [6].

F-2-192

12) Fit the connector [2] of the heater to the panel mount [1].

2-47

Chapter 2

F-2-193

13) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the power cord base [2]. Then, mount the included power cord base using the 2 included screws [1].

You will not be using the screw [1] and the power cord base [2] you have removed from the paper deck.

[1]

[2]

F-2-194

14) Mount the relay harness unit [2] to the rear side plate using 2 screws [1]. 15) Fit the 2 tie-wraps (w/ lock) [3] of the relay harness in the holes of the rear side plate as shown to fix the relay harness in place. 16) Connect the 2 connectors [4] on both sides of the relay harness unit.

F-2-195

17) Mount the external covers of the paper deck in sequence as follows. 1. Upper over (M4x8, 4 pc.; Be sure to avoid trapping the wire.) 2. Upper front cover (M4x8, 4 pc.; Connect the connector.) 3. Rear cover (M3x8, 2 pc.; M4x8, 5 pc.) 4. Right cover (M4x8, 3 pc.) 18) Slide the paper deck to the left by hand to set it to the host machine. 19) Attach the power supply label [1] to the rear over of the paper deck as shown.

2-48

Chapter 2

[1]
F-2-196

Be sure to advise the user not to place any object within the area [3] indicated in the figure by shading.

Copier

(front)

Paper deck

2.10 Installing the Voice Guidance Kit

2.10.1 Checking Items in the Package
<Voice Guidance Kit-A2>
0011-2709

2-49

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[10]

[11]

[12]

[13]

[14]

[15]

[16]

[17]
F-2-197

[1] [3]* [5] [7] [9] [11] [13]* [15]* [17]

Speaker unit (upper) Cable (1300mm) Cord guide (4 cord guide to be used) Voice Guidance Board Face Plate Binding screw (M3X6) Binding screw (M4X40) Binding screw (M4X16) Clamp User Manual CD-ROM *Not to be used for this machine

1 pc. 1 pc. 7 pc. 1 pc. 2 pc. 2 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc.

[2] [4] [6] [8]* [10] [12]* [14] [16]

Speaker unit (lower) Cable (1850mm) Voice Guidance Board Voice Guidance Board Face Plate Binding screw (M4X6) Binding screw (M3X16) Ferrite core Users Guide

1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc.

2.10.2 Turning Off the Host Machine

0011-8636

Turning Off the Main Power When turning off the main power, be sure to go through the following in strict sequence to protect the machine's hard disk:

1) Hold down on the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more. 2) Operate on the touch panel according to the shut-down sequence indicated so that the main power switch may be turned off. 3) Turn off the main power switch. 4) Disconnect the power cable (for the power outlet).

2.10.3 Installation Procedure

1. Installation Procedure
0011-2711

Before starting to install the Voice Guidance Kit, check to be sure that the Expansion Bus-D1 has properly been installed.

2. Installation 1) Remove the main controller box cover [1]. - 10 screws [2]

2-50

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]

[2]

[2]

[2]
F-2-198

2) Mount the facing plate [2] to the voice board [1] by 2 binding screws (M3X6) [3].

[3]

[2]

[1]

F-2-199

3) The slide switch SW1 found on the voice guidance board is set to 33 MHz at time of shipment; be sure to set it to 66 MHz for use on this machine.

66MHz

F-2-200

Checking the slide switch SW1 on the voice guidance board The slide switch (SW1) on the Voice Guidance Board-A1 is provided as a means of switching frequencies (33 MHz/66 MHz) to suit the transfer speed of the PCI bus. It is important for the switch setting to suit the transfer speed so that the voice will be free of interruption. For the machine, 66MHz is the correct position of the switch.

2-51

Chapter 2

33MHz

66MHz

4) Remove the face plate [1]. - 2 screws [2]

[1] [2]

F-2-201

5) Fit the voice guidance board [1] into the slot found at the front of the Expansion Bus-D1; then, fix it in place using the 2 screws [2] removed in step 3).

Points to Note The Voice Guidance Kit [1] must be fitted in a specific slot. Be sure to use slot A of the Expansion Bus-D1, avoiding slots B and C.

If slot A has been taken, relocate the existing board, and use slot A for the Voice Guidance Board

Be sure to hold the PCB perpendicular in relation to the connector.

[1]

[1]

[1] [C] [B] [A]

2-52

Chapter 2

[1] [2]

F-2-202

6) Attach the main controller box cover. 7) Remove the 2 rubber caps [1] and the 2 screws found on the upper right cover.

MEMO: The removed rubber caps will no longer be used.

[2] [1]

[2] [1]
F-2-203

8) Attach the speaker unit (lower) [1] to the upper right cover of the machine using 2 screws (binding; M4x40) [2].

[1]

[2]
F-2-204

9) Mount the speaker unit (upper) [1] to the speaker unit (lower) you have mounted in step 8); then, secure it in place from below with a screw (binding; M4x6) [2].

2-53

Chapter 2

[1]

[2]
F-2-205

10) Remove a cord guide cover [1].

[1]

F-2-206

11) Peel off the release paper of cord guide [1] and affix them as shown in the figure.

right side: 2 locations

ON OFF

ON OFF

[1]
F-2-207

rear side: 4 locations

2-54

Chapter 2

[1]

[1]
F-2-208

12) Plug the cable [2] into the speaker unit [1].

[1]

[2]

F-2-209

13) Run the cable [1] through the cord guide [2] and mount the cord guide cover [3].

Be sure that there is no slack of the cable.

[1]

[2]

[3]
F-2-210

14) Route the cable [1] under the cable [2] and through the 4 cord guides [3]; then, fix it in place using the 2 clamps [4]. Attach the cord guide cover [5] (4 locations).

Be sure that there is no slack of the cable.

2-55

Chapter 2

[3]

[5]

[4]

[5]

[1]

[5]

[2]
F-2-211

[3]

15) Mount the ferrite core [1] on the cable. The length [2] should be less than 50mm.

[1]

[2]
F-2-212

16) Plug the cable [1] into the terminal [2] of voice board.

[1]

[2]

F-2-213

17) Plug the power cable of host machine into a wall outlet 18) Turn on the main power switch. 19) Check if the voice board is recognized. Enter service mode (" "->"2"& "8"at the same time ->" ") COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS > PCI1 If 'voice board' is indicated for PCI1, the board is correctly recognized by the machine. 3. Making Settings After Installation To make use of the Voice Guidance Kit-A2 after turning on the host machine, you need to make the following settings in Additional Function: 1) Additional Function > System Setting > Voice Guide Manegement Setting > Use Voice Guide. 2) Select [ON]. 3) Press [OK]. default : OFF

2-56

Chapter 2 4. Checking the Operation - To Enable 1) Hold down the Reset key 3 sec or more. 2) See that the copy count on the screen is enclosed in red, indicating 'Voice Guidance' is ready for use. - To Disable 1) Hold down the Reset key for 3 sec or more.

2-57

Chapter 3 Basic Operation

Contents

Contents
3.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Functional Construction............................................................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1.2 Wiring Diagram of the Major PCBs ............................................................................................................................................ 3-2 3.1.3 Controlling the Main Motor (M1)................................................................................................................................................ 3-2

3.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................3-4

3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations (power-on) .................................................................................................................................. 3-4

Chapter 3

3.1 Construction
3.1.1 Functional Construction
The copier is divided into the following five functional blocks - Original exposure system - Laser exposure system - Image formation system - Pickup/feeding system - Control system
Original
0010-7426

Optical path

Original illumination

DC controller PCB

Control panel

CCD PCB Reader controller PCB

HDD

Main controller PCB

Original Exposure System

Relay PCB DC power supply PCB

SDRAM

Laser driver PCB Laser scanner Laser Exposure System

Control System

Charging Cleaning Photosensitive drum Development Image Fomation System Pickup control Manual feedtray

Separation

Derivery tray

Feeding

Lower feeding assembry Deck left Deck right

Transfer

Fixing

Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Pickup/Feeding System

Side Paper_Deck (accessory)

F-3-1

3-1

Chapter 3

3.1.2 Wiring Diagram of the Major PCBs

0010-7427

J552,J553 Fixing sensor PCB J4001 J4002 J551 Transceiver PCB J107 Potential control PCB J3 Stack-less transport driver PCB J1311 J1316 Laser driver PCB 2 J1319 J1317 Soft ID PCB J9001 J1023 J9201 Main controller PCB J1014 J9204 Differential PCB relay PCB J9203 Reader controller PCB J204 J101 J1733 CCD/AP PCB J506 J507 J1406 J1401 Video J1403 PCB DC controller PCB J510 HVT-DC1 PCB J723 J502 CN3 Inverter PCB J519 J3602 J526 J1022 J2117 J1019 Differential PCB J9202 J313 Liquid crystal display panel J6805 J9802 CN902 Key PCB

Control J6802 J6803 panel CN2 CN901 CN1 CPU PCB J6804

J1301 Laser driver PCB 1

J1402

J1306

J3701 BD PCB

Card J1024 Reader-D1 (optional) J1530 Copy data controller (optional)

J1015 J1022 J1530 J1731 J1732 J1718 Relay PCB J1701 J1706 DC power supply PCB J701 J782 Continuous power supply J783 PCB J781 Inverter PCB J601 J1027,J1041 J1042,J1043

J516 Environment sensor J302 J516 Cassette 3 paper level detection PCB J295 J516 Cassette 4 paper level detection PCB J296 AC driver PCB Main power switch J505 J792 J4 J105

J208

J102

J203 J1102

Note: The

in the diagram indicates major wiring between PCBs, not the direction of signals.
F-3-2

3.1.3 Controlling the Main Motor (M1)

Table shows the functions of the main motor control circuit, and Figure is a block diagram of the circuit.
T-3-1 Item Power supply Drive signal Operating/drive assembly Description 38 V from the relay PCB. Signals (MAIN_MOTOR_ON) from the DC controller PCB. Waste toner feeding screw Cleaner assembly Feeding belt Internal delivery roller External delivery roller Reversing roller Separation claw (reciprocating operation) Developing assembly unit (through CL10) ON/OFF control Constant speed control Error code E010
0010-7428

Control Error detection

3-2

Chapter 3

J1720 Relay PCB 1 2

38V GND

J611 1 2

Drive circuit

Main motor (M1) Clock pulse generation circuit

DC controller PCB

J514 J612 0V 1 B7 5V 2 B6 MAIN_MOTOR_ON 3 B5 MAIN_MOTOR_FG 4 B4 0V 5 B3

Control panel

Reference signal generation circuit

When the main motor drive signal goes '1', the main motor starts to rotate. When the main motor starts to rotate, the pulse signal goes '1'. When the pulse signal goes '0', error code E010 is indicated.
F-3-3

3-3

Chapter 3

3.2 Basic Sequence

3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations (power-on)
0010-7429

Main power switch ON Control panel power switch ON 183 (outside Jpn: 193 deg C) WMUP
Scanner block

188

(outside Jpn: 198 deg C) STBY

WMUPR

Scanner home position sensor PS1 Scanning lamp Scanner motor FL1 M4 H1 H2 M3

Fixing main heater Fixing sub heater Fixing drive motor Main motor Drum motor
Printer block

M1 M0

Pre-exposure LED Primary charging Grid bias Developing bias Developing bias Bias roller Pre-transfer charging DC Pre-transfer charging AC Transfer charging Separation charging Surface potential measurement Primary, pre-transfer, transfer, separation, charging wire cleaning motor
F-3-4 T-3-2

DC AC

VD

VL

Period WMUP (warm-up)

Description From when the power switch is turned on to when the surface temperature of the fixing assembly reaches 193 degrees.

WMUPR (warm-up rotation)

To execute potential stabilization control and surface potential control.

3-4

Chapter 4 Main Controller

Contents

Contents
4.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 Construction/Functions ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-1

4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry .........................................................................................................................4-2

4.2.1 Main Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................................... 4-2 4.2.2 Main Controller PCB (up graded version)................................................................................................................................... 4-3

4.3 Start-Up Sequence..........................................................................................................................................................4-4

4.3.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-4 4.3.2 Start-Up Sequence ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-5 4.3.3 Action to Take in Response to E602............................................................................................................................................ 4-6

4.4 Shut-Down Sequence .....................................................................................................................................................4-8

4.4.1 Flow of Operation ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4-8

4.5 Image Processing ...........................................................................................................................................................4-8

4.5.1 Overview of the Image Flow ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-8 4.5.2 Configuration of the Image Processing Modules......................................................................................................................... 4-9 4.5.3 Reader Input Image Processing ................................................................................................................................................. 4-10 4.5.4 Compression/Expansion/Editing Block ..................................................................................................................................... 4-11 4.5.5 Printer Output Image Processing ............................................................................................................................................... 4-12

4.6 Parts Replacement Procedure.......................................................................................................................................4-13

4.6.1 Main Controller Box .................................................................................................................................................................. 4-13
4.6.1.1 Making Preparations .....................................................................................................................................................................................4-13 4.6.1.2 Removing the Main Controller Box..............................................................................................................................................................4-13

4.6.2 Main Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-14

4.6.2.1 Making Preparations .....................................................................................................................................................................................4-14 4.6.2.2 Removing the Main Controller PCB.............................................................................................................................................................4-15 4.6.2.3 Removing the Main Controller PCB (up graded version) ............................................................................................................................4-15 4.6.2.4 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB...................................................................................................................................................4-15 4.6.2.5 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (up graded version) ..................................................................................................................4-16

4.6.3 SDRAM ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-17

4.6.3.1 Making Preparations .....................................................................................................................................................................................4-17 4.6.3.2 Removing the DDR-SDRAM .......................................................................................................................................................................4-17

4.6.4 Boot ROM.................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-17

4.6.4.1 Making Preparations .....................................................................................................................................................................................4-17 4.6.4.2 Removing the Boot ROM .............................................................................................................................................................................4-18 4.6.4.3 Removing the Boot ROM (up graded version) .............................................................................................................................................4-18

4.6.5 HDD ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-18

4.6.5.1 Points to Note on Handling the Hard Disk....................................................................................................................................................4-18 4.6.5.2 Making Preparations .....................................................................................................................................................................................4-18 4.6.5.3 Removing the Hard Disk...............................................................................................................................................................................4-18 4.6.5.4 Removing the Hard Disk(up graded version) ...............................................................................................................................................4-18 4.6.5.5 Points to Note When Mounting the Hard Disk .............................................................................................................................................4-19 4.6.5.6 After Replacing the Hard Disk......................................................................................................................................................................4-19

4.6.6 Video PCB ................................................................................................................................................................................. 4-19

4.6.6.1 Making Preparations .....................................................................................................................................................................................4-19 4.6.6.2 Removing the Video PCB.............................................................................................................................................................................4-20

4.6.7 Reader I/F PCB .......................................................................................................................................................................... 4-20

4.6.7.1 Making Preparations .....................................................................................................................................................................................4-20 4.6.7.2 Removing the Reader I/F PCB......................................................................................................................................................................4-21

4.6.8 Controller Fan ............................................................................................................................................................................ 4-21

4.6.8.1 Making Preparations .....................................................................................................................................................................................4-21 4.6.8.2 Removing the Controller Fan........................................................................................................................................................................4-21

Chapter 4

4.1 Construction
4.1.1 Construction/Functions
0010-7836

Component [1] [2] [3] Main controller PCB SRAM DDR SDRAM (image memory) Boot ROM Hard disk

Description controls the system; controls the memory; serves as an interface for printer/reader inputs/outputs; processes images; controls the control panel; controls the network communications retains service mode settings and HDD management information (backed up by a lithium battery) temporarily stores image data; temporarily stores system software (capacity: 1 GB) holds the start-up program retains image data; holds system software (40 GB)

[4] [5]

[6]

Lithium battery

backs up data in SRAM Life: about 10 years

[7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]

PCI slot (peripheral component interconnect) USB (H) port USB (D) port Network port Reader I/F PCB Video PCB

connects the PCI expansion board (optional) using the functional expansion slot; the PCI expansion board accommodates an encryption board and a voice board (options) USB 2.0 host I/F USB2.0 device I/F Ethernet I/F Reader I/F executes pixel/line conversion; controls the laser scanner motor

[1] [4]

[3]

[9] [2] [6] [8] [7] [12] [5]

DCON

[10]

[11]

F-4-1

4-1

Chapter 4

4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry

4.2.1 Main Controller PCB
The following diagram shows the connectors found on the main controller PCB, each connector with its specific function described in the table that follows:
0010-7844

J1027

J1004

J1043

J1003 J1017

J1041 J1010 J1042 J1028 J1021

J1016

J1013

BAT1001

J1061

J1026 J1015 J1023 J1024 J1060

J1022 J1062

J1014

J1040

F-4-2 Notation J1003 J1004 J1010 J1013 J1014 J1015 J1016 J1017 J1021 J1022 J1024 Name DDR SDRAM connection slot Boot ROM connection slot PCI expansion board connection slot Reader I/F connector Printer I/F connector USB host I/F connector USB device I/F connector Power supply control connector NE controller connector New card reader connector Notation J1026 J1027 J1028 J1040 J1041 J1042 J1043 J1060 J1061 J1062 Name Hard disk connector Connector cooling fan/LCD power supply connector (12V) Controller cooling fan power supply control connector Control panel connector (copier model only) Power supply connector (5V continuous) Power supply connector (3.3V continuous) Power supply connector (3.3V, continuous/non-continuous) CC-V connector LAN connector New coin robot connector

4-2

Chapter 4

4.2.2 Main Controller PCB (up graded version)

The following diagram shows the connectors found on the main controller PCB, each connector with its specific function described in the table that follows:
0018-0387

J1027

J1004

J1043

J1003 J1017

J1041 J1010 J1042 J1028 J1021

J1016

J1013

BAT1001

J1061

J1026 J1015 J1023 J1024 J1060

J1022 J1062

J1014

J1040

F-4-3 Notation J1003 J1004 J1010 J1013 J1014 J1015 J1016 J1017 J1021 J1022 J1024 Name DDR SDRAM connection slot Boot ROM connection slot PCI expansion board connection slot Reader I/F connector Printer I/F connector USB host I/F connector USB device I/F connector Power supply control connector NE controller connector New card reader connector Notation J1026 J1027 J1028 J1040 J1041 J1042 J1043 J1060 J1061 J1062 Name Hard disk connector Connector cooling fan/LCD power supply connector (12V) Controller cooling fan power supply control connector Control panel connector (copier model only) Power supply connector (5V continuous) Power supply connector (3.3V continuous) Power supply connector (3.3V, continuous/non-continuous) CC-V connector LAN connector New coin robot connector

4-3

Chapter 4

4.3 Start-Up Sequence

4.3.1 Overview
The system software that controls the machine is stored on its HDD. When the main power is turned on, the CPU on the main controller PCB loads the system software from the HDD to the work memory (DDR-SDRAM) of the main controller PCB according to the instructions of the boot program stored in the boot ROM. While the CPU is initializing the memory or loading the system software, the following graphic will appear on the control panel screen, with a bar indicating the progress of processing under way:
0010-7846

Progress bar
F-4-4

Do not turn off the main power while the progress bar is on the screen, indicating that the HDD is being accessed; otherwise, the HDD can suffer damage (E602).

4-4

Chapter 4

4.3.2 Start-Up Sequence

0010-7848

Progress bar

2
F-4-5

<Boot Program Area> - Boot Program (interval 1) When the main power switch is turned on, the CPU on the main controller PCB runs a self-diagnostic program. The machine checks the condition of the image memory (DDR-SDRAM) and the HDD, indicating an error code upon detection of a fault. If all is normal, the machine loads the control program from the HDD to the image memory.
- When Executing the Boot Program

Image memory (DDR-SDRAM) System area Image data area

CPU

System software

Self diagnostic program Boot ROM

Boot program

HDD

Main controller PCB : access to the program at time of execution. : flow of system program operations.
F-4-6

<Control Program Area> - Control Program 1 (interval 2) 1) The machine checks and initializes the various hardware on the main controller PCB. 2) If the previous shut-down sequence was not performed normally, the machine recovers the system files as needed. (In this case, the start-up time tends to be longer than usual.) 3) The machine initializes the various program modules. - Control Program 2 (interval 3) 1) The machine initializes the various software modules, and checks the configuration of the printer/reader. 2) If the printer/reader is found to be normal, the machine ends the start-up sequence; otherwise, it will indicate E732/E733.

4-5

Chapter 4

- When Executing the Control Program

Image memory (DDR-SDRAM) System area Image data area

CPU

HDD Self diagnostic program Boot ROM Main controller PCB : access to the program at time of execution.
F-4-7

Boot program

When the start-up sequence ends normally, the machine becomes ready for a job. (It shows a control screen in the control panel, and causes the Start Key LED to change from red to green.)

4.3.3 Action to Take in Response to E602

<E602-XXYY> XX= "00"
T-4-1 XX YY 01 There is no system software for the main CPU. At time of start-up, no start-up partition (BOOTDEV) is found. Description The HDD cannot be recognized. Action to take - Turn off the power, and check the HDD cable. Thereafter, turn off the power. - Turn on the power, and listen for a sound from the HDD or touch the HDD, to see if the HDD is rotating. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software. - Replace the main controller PCB. - Start up in safe mode, and perform full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software; then, turn off and then on the power. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software.
0011-1104

02

00 03

An interrupt has been detected while Take action according to the type of error code screen: data is being written to the boot <error code screen is black-and-white> device. - Turn off the power, and turn on the power while holding down the 1 and 9 keys. In response, the machine will automatically start to repair the sector in which the write operation has been interrupted. (The screen changes to solid black.) While repairs are being made, the progress of processing will be indicated on the screen, turning white at its end. When done, turn off and then back on the power. - Start up in safe mode, and perform full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software; then, turn off and the back on the power. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software. <error core screen is normal (spanner mark)> - Set CHK-TYPE=0, and execute HD-CHECK; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software; then, turn off and back on the power. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software. No system software is found for the - Start up in safe mode, and perform full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software; then, turn sub CPU. off and then back on the power. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software. A file used by the Web browser to make references is damaged, or has been deleted. - Reinstall the content of the Web browser. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software.

06

12

4-6

Chapter 4 XX= "01" to "FF"

T-4-2 XX Occurrence at time of start-up Partition Description 03 05 Action 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 FF 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 2 1 FSTDEV IMG_MNG FSTCDEV APL_GEN TMP_GEN TMP_FAX TMP_PSS PDLDEV BOOTDEV APL_MEAP APL_SEND APL_KEEP APL_LOG not specified compressed image data (e.g., Box) file management table, profile job archiving (changing) general-purpose data general-purpose data (temporary file) not used for PDL spool (temporary file) PDL-related file firmware (system, MEAP, key, certificate, PDF dictionary, RUI, content, voice dictionary) MEAP application address book, filter for non-initialization data storage system log check for and recovery of HDD full-fault sectors *3 *1 *2 *3 *1 *4 *8 *5 *6 *8 *5 *7 *9 *10 *11 *12 *1 *5 YY Occurrence during normal execution 13,25 Action 10,12,14, 22,23,24

XX

CHKTYPE

00,01,0 11,21 2,04

YY *1

Description

Action - Set the partition number in question for CHK-TYPE, and execute HD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Enter CHK-TYPE in question (for the partition), and execute HD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Ask the user to download the address book data using a remote UI. - Set the partition number in question for CHK-TYPE, and execute HD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Start download mode, and perform full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software; then turn off and then back on the power. The recovery operation for the boot partition is not possible without the use of the SST in save mode. - Set CHK-TYPE=0, and execute HD-CHECK; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Start download mode, and perform full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Set CHK-TYPE=0, and execute HD-CHECK; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Set CHK-TYPE=1, 2, 3, 5, and execute HD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Enter CHK-TYPE in question (for the partition), and execute HD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software.

*2 03

The ongoing write operation is interrupted (at start-up).

*3

*4 *5

*6 05 *7

The machine is designed so that execution of HD-CLEAR is not possible in service mode (so as to prevent loss of information, e.g., address book, filter information). - Ask the user to download the address book data using a remote UI. - In service mode, start download mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system A file system error has occurred. software; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Set CHK-TYPE=1, 2, 3, 5, and execute HD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software. The recovery operation for the boot partition is not possible without the use of the SST in save mode. - Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software; then, turn off and back on the power. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software.

*8 00 01 02 04 11 21

*9

The HDD has poor contact, or a system error has occurred. The HDD has poor contact.

- Check the cable and the power cord. - Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software; then, turn off and back on the power. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software. - Check the cable and the power cord. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software.

*10

*11

13 25

There is a strong possibility of damage in the file data (e.g., Box) stored on the HDD. - Set the partition number in question for CHK-TYPE, and execute HD-CHECK; then, turn off and back on the power. The ongoing write operation has - Set the partition number in question for CHK-TYPE, and execute HD-CLEAR; then, turn off and back on been interrupted. the power. (In the case of BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 or APL_SEND, execute reformatting using the SST, and reinstall the system software.) - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software. - Start up in safe mode, and perform full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software; then, turn off and back on the power. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software.

*12

10 12 14 22 23 24

A system error or a packet error has been detected.

4-7

Chapter 4

4.4 Shut-Down Sequence

4.4.1 Flow of Operation
If the main power is turned off while the HDD is being accessed, the HDD can suffer damage. It is, therefore, important to perform the shut-down sequence (HDD protection mode), which will stop the ongoing access to the HDD and enable the machine to be turned off safely.
Press on the control panel power switch (3 sec or more) The shutdown sequence starts.
0010-7871

Job check screen

Jobs that are in operation/waiting for execution are displayed.The screen enables you to confirm what job is going to be canceled. The shutdown processing is executed after job cancellation.

HDD protection execution mode End screen

It becomes enabled to turn OFF the main power switch.

F-4-8

4.5 Image Processing

4.5.1 Overview of the Image Flow
0010-7872

Other iR machine Original

A
Copy Scan SEND PullScan E-Mail PDL Print BOX

A
Print output

A
Image data

PC
F-4-9

4-8

Chapter 4

4.5.2 Configuration of the Image Processing Modules

The machine primarily uses the main controller PCB for image processing. The following shows the construction of the modules associated with image processing:
0010-7873

Reader controller PCB

- Image memory - Temporarily stores the program

Reader input image processing block Executes image processing on image data collected by the reader unit.

SDRAM Compression/expansion/editing block Processes compression/expansion/editing.

HDD

Main controller PCB

Printing output image processing block Processes image data for output to the printer

DC controller PCB

F-4-10

4-9

Chapter 4

4.5.3 Reader Input Image Processing

0010-7874

Reader unit

Reader I/F PCB Main controller PCB Reader input image processing block - magnification - editing (Shift, angle, repeat, psymmetric fold, mirror image)

edge enhancement

editing (blanking/framing, negative/positive reversal)

Text mode Text/photo mode Printed photo mode

- intensity-to-density conversion - density adjustment (F value adjustment) - gamma correction

Film photo mode

Binary processing (error diffusion)

Binary processing (screen processing)

Compression/expansion/editing block

Printer output image processing block

Video PCB

DC controller PCB
F-4-11

4-10

Chapter 4

4.5.4 Compression/Expansion/Editing Block

0010-7875

PS print server unit Reader unit

PS data

I/F PCB Reader I/F PCB PCI PCB

Ethernet I/F

Main controller PCB

Rendering block

Reader input image processing block

Compression/expansion/editing block

DDR-SDRAM

Magnification Rotation Integration

Compression/expansion Resolution conversion HDD

Printer output image processing block

Video PCB

DC controller PCB
F-4-12

4-11

Chapter 4

4.5.5 Printer Output Image Processing

0010-7876

Reader unit

Reader I/F PCB Main controller PCB Reader input image processing block

Compression/expansion/editing block Printer output image processing block Binary density conversion *1

Magnification/smoothing *2 /toner save

Line width correction (thickening) *3

Video PCB

DC controller PCB
F-4-13

*1: only at time of copying. *2: only in text mode and text/photo mode. *3: may be set for print (user mode). Printer Settings > Settings > Print Quality > Horizontal Line Refinement, Vertical Line Refinement

4-12

Chapter 4

4.6 Parts Replacement Procedure

4.6.1 Main Controller Box 4.6.1.1 Making Preparations
1) Remove the main controller box cover [1]. - 10 screws [2]
[1] [2]
0010-8725

[1]

F-4-17

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the cable from the edge saddle [2].
[2] [2]

[2]
F-4-14

2) Remove the rear cover [1]. - reader power cable [2] - 8 screws [3]
[2] [3]

[1] [2]
F-4-18

3) Free the cable [1] from the wire saddle [2].

[3]

[3]

[1]

[2]
F-4-19

[1]
F-4-15

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the cable [2] from the 2 wire saddles [3].

3) Disconnect the reader communications cable [1].

[1]

[1]
F-4-16

[2]
F-4-20

[3]

4.6.1.2 Removing the Main Controller Box

1) Disconnect the connector [1].
0011-4467

5) Open the main controller box [1]. - 4 screws [2]

4-13

Chapter 4

[2]

[2]

[3]

[1]

[3]
[2]

[2]

[3]

[1]
F-4-21

6) Remove the main controller box [1]. - connector [2] - 2 hinges [3]
[3]

F-4-24

3) Disconnect the reader communications cable [1].

[2]

[1]

[1]

[3]

F-4-25 F-4-22

4) Remove the reader I/F PCB [1]. - 2 screws [2]

4.6.2 Main Controller PCB 4.6.2.1 Making Preparations

1) Remove the main controller box cover [1]. - 10 screws [2]
[1] [2]
0011-4468

[2]

[1]

F-4-26

5) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1] of the video PCB.

[2] [2]

[2]
F-4-23

[1]

2) Remove the rear cover [1]. - reader power cable [2] - 8 screws [3]

F-4-27

6) Remove the video PCB unit [1]. - 2 screws [2]

4-14

Chapter 4

[2]

[1]

[1]

F-4-28

F-4-31
0010-8730

4.6.2.2 Removing the Main Controller PCB

1) Disconnect the 11 connectors [1].

2) Remove the main controller PCB [1]. - 9 screws [2] - 2 screws [3] (using a precision screwdriver)
[2]

[1]

[1]

F-4-29

[2] [2]

2) Remove the main controller PCB [1]. - 9 screws [2] - 2 screws [3] (using a precision screwdriver)
[2]

[1]

[3]
F-4-32

[2] [2]

4.6.2.4 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB

0010-8734

Before Starting the Work (backing up the data) If possible, perform the following: - Using the SST, download the data stored in the RAM of the main controller. - Print out the user mode/service mode data. - If you are replacing the main controller PCB, be sure to physically transfer the following from the existing to the new PCB: [1] BootROM [2] HDD [3] image memory (DDR-SDRAM) [4] counter memory PCB

[3]
F-4-30

4.6.2.3 Removing the Main Controller PCB (up graded version)

1) Disconnect the 11 connectors [1].
0018-0403

4-15

Chapter 4
Data item deleted Backup possibility No No No No No Yes No

[3]
files yet to be read (those selected for timer transmission or reserved for transmission) forms stored for image synthesis

[1]

MEAP application password for MEAP SMS (service management services); returns to factory default job history information user authentication information stored in relation to SSO (local device authentication) key pairs and server certificates stored in conjunction with system control settings

[4]
F-4-33

[2]

MEMO: Image memory (DDR-SDRAM) The machine is equipped with the following image memory: capacity: 1 GB quantity: 1 pc. Use one of the 2 slots. There is no optional memory for expansion.

*1: limited to those settings that may be exported using a remote UI or transmitted as part of machine information. *2: limited to when the MEAP application in question offers a backup function. *3: limited to data within the User Box. When Replacing the Main Controller PCB - Explain to the user that all user data will be deleted. - As necessary, ask the user to make a backup of those data items that permit making of a backup. - Explain to the user that the following data items do not permit making of a backup, and require remedial action: <Suggestions for Remedial Action> - for mode settings stored using the copy/Box function, ask the user to newly enter the settings. - for read mode settings stored using the transmission function, ask the user to newly enter the settings. - for files that are yet to be transmitted (i.e., files for selected timer transmission or reserved for transmission), ask the user to newly transmit them. - for registered forms used in image synthesis, ask the user to newly enter them. - for MEAP applications, ask the user to newly install them. - for MEAP SMS (service management services) passwords, access the following: http://<iR IP address>:8000/SMS. (Use the factory password "MeapSmsLogin" (case-sensitive) to log in and change the password. - for job histories, if a record is needed, ask the user to store away the history using a remote UI. (However, there is no way of returning the history to the HDD.) - for key pairs and server certificates, if the user has added any, ask for reinstallation.

1) Turn on the power. If there is a backup of the SRAM data (i.e., if downloaded using the SST), upload it. 2) Execute the following service mode item: COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CA-KEY (Level 2) 3) Turn off and then on the power. MEMO: Execution of the following may delete the keys/certificates used for encrypted communications and the CA certificates used for authentication of external server certificates: - replacement/formatting of the HDD - replacement of the main controller PCB/initialization of the RAM If a key/certificate for encrypted communications has been deleted, the control panel screen will indicate a message to the effect that the key has been corrupted: however, the key/certificate/CA certificate installed at time of shipment from the factory may be brought back by executing the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>CA-KEY. If doing so has failed, use the SST to install the key/certificate/CA certificate, and execute CA-KEY once again.

Points to Note When Executing Service Mode Item CA-KEY If the user has generated/added a key/certificate/CA certificate on his/her own, executing CA-KEY will also delete these files. Inform the user of this, and ask him/her to re-install them as necessary after the execution of CAKEY. Points to Note When Fitting the Security Expansion Board Whenever possible, do not replace the main controller PCB as part of the troubleshooting work conducted in relation to the installation of the security expansion board (option). The machine checks the compatibility between the HDD and the main controller PCB when a security expansion board is installed. Replacement with a new board will cause the formatting of the HDD to start automatically, thus deleting all user data.
T-4-3 Data item deleted address data registered in the address book settings made in user mode settings stored in memory license file for MEAP application user authentication information stored using SDL (simple device login) data stored using MEAP application mode memory stored using copy function or Box function data in Box read mode settings stored using transmission function Backup possibility Yes Yes *1 Yes Yes Yes Yes *2 No Yes *3 No

4.6.2.5 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB (up graded version)
0018-0404

Before Starting the Work (backing up the data) If possible, perform the following: - Using the SST, download the data stored in the RAM of the main controller. - Print out the user mode/service mode data. - If you are replacing the main controller PCB, be sure to physically transfer the following from the existing to the new PCB: [1] BootROM [2] HDD [3] image memory (DDR-SDRAM) [4] counter memory PCB
[3]

[1]

[4]
F-4-34

[2]

4-16

Chapter 4 MEMO: Image memory (DDR-SDRAM) The machine is equipped with the following image memory: capacity: 1 GB quantity: 1 pc. Use one of the 2 slots. There is no optional memory for expansion. 1) Turn on the power. If there is a backup of the SRAM data (i.e., if downloaded using the SST), upload it. 2) Execute the following service mode item: COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CA-KEY (Level 2) 3) Turn off and then on the power. MEMO: Execution of the following may delete the keys/certificates used for encrypted communications and the CA certificates used for authentication of external server certificates: - replacement/formatting of the HDD - replacement of the main controller PCB/initialization of the RAM If a key/certificate for encrypted communications has been deleted, the control panel screen will indicate a message to the effect that the key has been corrupted: however, the key/certificate/CA certificate installed at time of shipment from the factory may be brought back by executing the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>CA-KEY. If doing so has failed, use the SST to install the key/certificate/CA certificate, and execute CA-KEY once again. When Replacing the Main Controller PCB - Explain to the user that all user data will be deleted. - As necessary, ask the user to make a backup of those data items that permit making of a backup. - Explain to the user that the following data items do not permit making of a backup, and require remedial action: <Suggestions for Remedial Action> - for mode settings stored using the copy/Box function, ask the user to newly enter the settings. - for read mode settings stored using the transmission function, ask the user to newly enter the settings. - for files that are yet to be transmitted (i.e., files for selected timer transmission or reserved for transmission), ask the user to newly transmit them. - for registered forms used in image synthesis, ask the user to newly enter them. - for MEAP applications, ask the user to newly install them. - for MEAP SMS (service management services) passwords, access the following: http://<iR IP address>:8000/SMS. (Use the factory password "MeapSmsLogin" (case-sensitive) to log in and change the password. - for job histories, if a record is needed, ask the user to store away the history using a remote UI. (However, there is no way of returning the history to the HDD.) - for key pairs and server certificates, if the user has added any, ask for reinstallation.

4.6.3 SDRAM
Points to Note When Executing Service Mode Item CA-KEY If the user has generated/added a key/certificate/CA certificate on his/her own, executing CA-KEY will also delete these files. Inform the user of this, and ask him/her to re-install them as necessary after the execution of CAKEY.

4.6.3.1 Making Preparations

1) Remove the main controller box cover [1]. - 10 screws [2]
[1] [2]
0011-4557

Points to Note When Fitting the Security Expansion Board Whenever possible, do not replace the main controller PCB as part of the troubleshooting work conducted in relation to the installation of the security expansion board (option). The machine checks the compatibility between the HDD and the main controller PCB when a security expansion board is installed. Replacement with a new board will cause the formatting of the HDD to start automatically, thus deleting all user data.
T-4-4 Data item deleted address data registered in the address book settings made in user mode settings stored in memory license file for MEAP application user authentication information stored using SDL (simple device login) data stored using MEAP application mode memory stored using copy function or Box function data in Box read mode settings stored using transmission function files yet to be read (those selected for timer transmission or reserved for transmission) forms stored for image synthesis MEAP application password for MEAP SMS (service management services); returns to factory default job history information user authentication information stored in relation to SSO (local device authentication) key pairs and server certificates stored in conjunction with system control settings Backup possibility Yes Yes *1 Yes Yes Yes Yes *2 No

[2]

[2]

[2]
F-4-35

4.6.3.2 Removing the DDR-SDRAM

1) Free the 2 fixing levers [1] of the slot, and detach the DDR-SDRAM [2].
[2]
0011-4558

Yes *3 No No No No No No Yes

[1]

[1]

F-4-36

4.6.4 Boot ROM

No

4.6.4.1 Making Preparations

1) Remove the main controller box cover [1]. - 10 screws [2]
0011-4559

*1: limited to those settings that may be exported using a remote UI or transmitted as part of machine information. *2: limited to when the MEAP application in question offers a backup function. *3: limited to data within the User Box.

4-17

Chapter 4

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]

[2]

[2]

[2]

[2]

[2]
F-4-37 F-4-40

[2]

4.6.4.2 Removing the Boot ROM

1) Free the fixing lever [1], and detach the boot ROM [2].
0010-8735

4.6.5.3 Removing the Hard Disk

1) Remove the counter PCB [1]. - screw [2]
[2] [1]
0010-8741

[2]

[1]
F-4-38

F-4-41

4.6.4.3 Removing the Boot ROM (up graded version)

1) Remove the Boot ROM [1].
[1]
0018-0407

Be sure to remove the counter PCB before removing the hard disk, which otherwise could hit the PCB and suffer damage. 2) Remove the hard disk [1]. - 2 screws [2]
[1] [2]

F-4-39

4.6.5 HDD 4.6.5.1 Points to Note on Handling the Hard Disk

0010-8740

F-4-42

4.6.5.4 Removing the Hard Disk(up graded version)

Keep the following in mind when attaching/removing the hard disk. 1. Take countermeasures against electrostatic before work to prevent the hard disk from being damaged by electrostatic discharge. 2. Do not give a shock to the hard disk. 1) Remove the counter PCB [1]. - screw [2]
0018-0408

4.6.5.2 Making Preparations

1) Remove the main controller box cover [1]. - 10 screws [2]
0011-4562

4-18

Chapter 4 formatting. (For details, see the chapter on upgrading.) 2) Downloading the System Software Using the SST, download the following: System, LANG, RUI, PSFONT, OCR dictionary, SSL encryption key, SSL CA certificate, MEAP content. 3) Execute the following service mode item: COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CA-KEY (Level 2) 4) Turn off and then on the power. MEMO: Execution of the following may delete the keys/certificates used for encrypted communications and the CA certificates used for authentication of external server certificates: - replacement/formatting of the HDD - replacement of the main controller PCB/initialization of the RAM If a key/certificate for encrypted communications has been deleted, the control panel screen will indicate a message to the effect that the key has been corrupted: however, the key/certificate/CA certificate installed at time of shipment from the factory may be brought back by executing the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>CA-KEY. If doing so has failed, use the SST to install the key/certificate/CA certificate, and execute CA-KEY once again.
F-4-43

[2]

[1]

Be sure to remove the counter PCB before removing the hard disk, which otherwise could hit the PCB and suffer damage. 2) Remove the hard disk [1]. - 1 connector [2] - 2 screws [3]
[1] [2]

Points to Note When Executing Service Mode Item CA-KEY If the user has generated/added a key/certificate/CA certificate on his/her own, executing CA-KEY will also delete these files. Inform the user of this, and ask him/her to re-install them as necessary after the execution of CAKEY.

Points to Note About a HDD to Which System Software Has Been Installed If you must use a HDD to which the system software for a different machine (thus a different serial number) has been installed, be sure to format it after mounting it. Otherwise, the machine operation cannot be guaranteed.

4.6.6 Video PCB

[2] [2]

4.6.6.1 Making Preparations

1) Remove the main controller box cover [1]. - 10 screws [2]
[1] [2]
0011-4578

[2]

F-4-44

4.6.5.5 Points to Note When Mounting the Hard Disk

- When mounting the hard disk, fit the claw [1] found on the back of the hard disk into the opening [2] of the hard disk mounting plate; then, push it in horizontally. If the connector of the hard disk is at an angle in relation to the socket (on the main control PCB), forcing it in could well damage the connector.
[1]
0010-8743

[2]

[2]

[2]
F-4-46

[2]

2) Remove the rear cover [1]. - reader power supply cable [2] - 8 screws [3]

F-4-45

4.6.5.6 After Replacing the Hard Disk

1) Formatting the HDD Start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., turn on the main power while holding down the 2 and 8 keys). Using the HD formatting function of the SST, execute full partition
0010-8745

4-19

Chapter 4

[2]

[3]

[3]

[1]

[3]
[3] [2]
F-4-51

[3]

4.6.7 Reader I/F PCB 4.6.7.1 Making Preparations

1) Remove the main controller box cover [1]. - 10 screws [2]
0011-4579 0011-4583

[1]
F-4-47

4.6.6.2 Removing the Video PCB

1) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1] of the video PCB.
[1] [2]

[2]

[2]

[1]

F-4-48

2) Remove the video PCB unit [1]. - 2 screws [2]

F-4-52

[2]

2) Remove the rear cover [1]. - reader power cable [2] - 8 screws [3]
[2]

[2]

[3]

[1]

[3]
F-4-49

3) Remove the shielding plate [1]. - 4 screws [2]

[1]

[3]
[2]

[1]
F-4-53

3) Disconnect the reader communications cable [1].

[2]
F-4-50

4) Remove the video PCB [1]. - 2 screws [2] - 6 screws [3]

4-20

Chapter 4

[2]

[3]

[1]

[3]

F-4-54

[3]

4.6.7.2 Removing the Reader I/F PCB

1) Remove the reader I/F PCB [1]. - 2 screws [2]
0011-4585

[1]
F-4-57

3) Disconnect the reader communications cable [1].

[2]

[1]
[1]

F-4-55

4.6.8 Controller Fan 4.6.8.1 Making Preparations

1) Remove the main control box cover [1]. - 10 screws [2]
[1] [2]
0011-4567

F-4-58

4) Remove the rear right cover [1]. - 2 screws [2]

[1]

[2]

[2]

[2]

F-4-59

[2]
F-4-56

4.6.8.2 Removing the Controller Fan

1) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the cable out the edge saddle [2].
0010-8746

2) Remove the rear cover [1]. - reader power cable [2] - 8 screws [3]

4-21

Chapter 4

[2]

[1]

F-4-60

2) Remove the controller cooling fan [1]. - 2 screws [2]

[2]

[1]

F-4-61

4-22

Chapter 5 Original Exposure System

Contents

Contents
5.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1.1 Specifications, Controls, and Functions....................................................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1.2 Major Components....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-2 5.1.3 Construction of the Control System............................................................................................................................................. 5-3

5.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................5-4

5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-4 5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key ....................................................................................... 5-4

5.3 Various Control..............................................................................................................................................................5-5

5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System ........................................................................................................................................ 5-5
5.3.1.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................................................................................5-5 5.3.1.2 Controlling the Scanner Motor........................................................................................................................................................................5-5

5.3.2 Enlargement/Reduction................................................................................................................................................................ 5-6

5.3.2.1 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction .....................................................................................................................5-6 5.3.2.2 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction........................................................................................................................5-6

5.3.3 Controlling the Scanning Lamp ................................................................................................................................................... 5-6

5.3.3.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................................................................................5-6 5.3.3.2 Scanning Lamp................................................................................................................................................................................................5-7 5.3.3.3 Controlling the Activation...............................................................................................................................................................................5-7

5.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals .................................................................................................................................................... 5-7

5.3.4.1 Overview .........................................................................................................................................................................................................5-7 5.3.4.2 Points of Measurement Used for Original Size Identification ........................................................................................................................5-7 5.3.4.3 Overview of Operation....................................................................................................................................................................................5-8

5.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control .................................................................................................................................................................... 5-10

5.3.5.1 Dust Detection in Stream Reading Mode......................................................................................................................................................5-10 5.3.5.2 White Plate Dust Detection Control..............................................................................................................................................................5-11

5.3.6 Image Processing ....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-11

5.3.6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................................................5-11 5.3.6.2 CCD Drive ....................................................................................................................................................................................................5-12 5.3.6.3 CCD Output Gain Correction, Offset Correction .........................................................................................................................................5-13 5.3.6.4 CCD Output A/D Conversion .......................................................................................................................................................................5-13 5.3.6.5 Outline of Shading Correction ......................................................................................................................................................................5-13 5.3.6.6 Shading Adjustment ......................................................................................................................................................................................5-13 5.3.6.7 Shading Correction........................................................................................................................................................................................5-13

5.4 Parts Replacement Procedure.......................................................................................................................................5-14

5.4.1 CCD Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-14
5.4.1.1 Before Starting the Work ..............................................................................................................................................................................5-14 5.4.1.2 Removing the CCD Unit ...............................................................................................................................................................................5-14 5.4.1.3 When Replacing Components of the Scanning System ................................................................................................................................5-14

5.4.2 Copyboard glass......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-14

5.4.2.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass....................................................................................................................................................................5-14 5.4.2.2 When Replacing Components of the Scanning System ................................................................................................................................5-14

5.4.3 Standard White Plate.................................................................................................................................................................. 5-14

5.4.3.1 Removing the Standard White Plate .............................................................................................................................................................5-14 5.4.3.2 When Replacing Components of the Scanning System ................................................................................................................................5-15

5.4.4 Scanning Lamp .......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-15

5.4.4.1 Before Starting the Work ..............................................................................................................................................................................5-15 5.4.4.2 Removing the Scanning Lamp ......................................................................................................................................................................5-16 5.4.4.3 When Replacing Components of the Scanning System ................................................................................................................................5-16

5.4.5 Reader Controller PCB .............................................................................................................................................................. 5-16

5.4.5.1 Before Starting the Work ..............................................................................................................................................................................5-16 5.4.5.2 Removing the Reader Controller PCB..........................................................................................................................................................5-16 5.4.5.3 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB.................................................................................................................................................5-17

5.4.6 Interface PCB............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-17

Contents

5.4.6.1 Before Starting the Work .............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-17 5.4.6.2 Removing the Interface PCB ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-17

5.4.7 Inverter PCB .............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-18

5.4.7.1 Before Starting the Work .............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-18 5.4.7.2 Removing the Inverter PCB.......................................................................................................................................................................... 5-18 5.4.7.3 When Replacing Components of the Scanning System................................................................................................................................ 5-18

5.4.8 Scanner Motor............................................................................................................................................................................ 5-18

5.4.8.1 Before Starting the Work .............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-18 5.4.8.2 Removing the Scanner Motor ....................................................................................................................................................................... 5-18 5.4.8.3 Mounting the Scanner Motor ........................................................................................................................................................................ 5-18

5.4.9 ADF Open/Close Sensor............................................................................................................................................................ 5-19

5.4.9.1 Before Starting the Work .............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-19 5.4.9.2 Removing the ADF Open/Closed Sensor ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-19

5.4.10 Original Size Sensor ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-19

5.4.10.1 Before Starting the Work ............................................................................................................................................................................ 5-19 5.4.10.2 Removing the Original Size Sensor Unit.................................................................................................................................................... 5-19 5.4.10.3 Removing the Original Size Sensor............................................................................................................................................................ 5-19

5.4.11 Scanner Home Position Sensor................................................................................................................................................ 5-20

5.4.11.1 Before Starting the Work ............................................................................................................................................................................ 5-20 5.4.11.2 Removing the Scanner Home Position Sensor ........................................................................................................................................... 5-20

5.4.12 Cooling Fan.............................................................................................................................................................................. 5-20

5.4.12.1 Before Starting the Work ............................................................................................................................................................................ 5-20 5.4.12.2 Removing the Reader Cooling Fan 1/2....................................................................................................................................................... 5-20

5.4.13 Scanner Drive Cable ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-21

5.4.13.1 Before Starting the Work ............................................................................................................................................................................ 5-21 5.4.13.2 Removing the Scanner Drive Cable............................................................................................................................................................ 5-22 5.4.13.3 Fitting the Scanner Drive Cable.................................................................................................................................................................. 5-22 5.4.13.4 Adjusting the Position of the No. 1/No. 2 Mirror Base .............................................................................................................................. 5-23

Chapter 5

5.1 Construction
5.1.1 Specifications, Controls, and Functions
The specifications, controls, and functions of the machine's original exposure system are as follows:
T-5-1 Item Scanning lamp Original scanning xenon lamp book mode: by moving the scanner ADF mode (one-side reading): by stream reading (2 fixed points of small-size reading and large-size reading) ADF mode (double-sided reading): by moving the scanner (Fixed reading) Description
0010-7881

Original reading resolution Halftone Scanning position detection lens Magnification

600 x 600 dpi (main scanning x sub scanning) 256 gradations by scanner HP sensor single-focal point, fixed type [1] in platen mode, Fixed reading: 25% to 400%

main scanning direction: image processing by controller block

sub scanning direction: scanning speed variation (No. 1 mirror base; 100% or higher) in combination with image processing by reader block (50% or higher and lower than 100%)

in combination with image processing in reader block and controller block (lower than 50%)

[2] ADF mode: 25% to 200% main scanning direction: image processing in controller block sub scanning direction: original movement speed variation (89% or higher) in combination with image processing by reader block (50% or higher and lower than 89%) in combination with image processing in reader block and controller block (lower than 50%)

Scanner drive control Scanning lamp control

No. 1/2 mirror base: control by pulse motor [1]activation control by pulse motor

[2]error detection control

5-1

Chapter 5
Item Original size detection [1]book mode sub scanning direction: by reflection type sensor main scanning direction: by CCD [2] ADF mode main scanning direction: by slide guide in ADF Description

sub scanning direction: by photosensor in ADF

5.1.2 Major Components

The major components of the original exposure system are as follows:
T-5-2 Item Scanning lamp Scanner motor Reader Cooling fan 1 Reader Cooling fan 2 ADF open/closed sensor Notation LA1 M501 FM501 FM502 PS501 xenon lamp (120,000 lx) 2-phase pulse motor (pulse control) cools the reader block cools the reader block detects the state (open/closed) of the ADF; at 25 deg Description
0010-7882

Scanner HP sensor

PS502

detects scanner home position

Original size sensor (AB)

---

detects the size in sub scanning direction (AB-configuration)

Original size sensor (inch)

---

detects size in sub scanning direction (inch)

Mirror Inverter PCB CCD unit Reader controller PCB

-------

No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors drives the scanning lamp collects image data, performs analog image processing controls the reader unit as a whole, performs digital image processing

---

5-2

Chapter 5

Scanner motor ADF open/closed sensor Original size sensor (A/B) Interface PCB Original size sensor (inch) Reader controller PCB Reader cooling fan 2 Reader cooling fan 1

CCD unit Scanner HP sensor Scanning lamp

F-5-1

Inverter PCB

Home position Copyboard glass No. 2 mirror Image leading edge Scanning lamp No. 1 mirror mount No. 1 mirror No. 3 mirror No. 2 mirror mount
F-5-2

Original

Small-size stream reading point Lens

Large-size stream reading point CCD

Scanner motor

Light-blocking plate Scanner HP sensor

(forward)

scanning lamp

(reverse)

No. 2 mirror base No. 1 mirror base

F-5-3

5.1.3 Construction of the Control System

The construction of the control system of the machine's original exposure system is as follows:
0011-2197

5-3

Chapter 5

To printer

To printer

To ADF

J312 J308 J313

J311

Interface PCB
J305 J304 J303

J307 J302

J310 J306 J301 ADF open/closed sensor Reader controller PCB

Scanner HP sensor

J202 J201

J205 J209

Reader controller PCB J210

J208 J204 Reader cooling fan 2

J203

Scanning lamp

Original size sensor (A/B paper series)

Original size sensor (inch paper series)

CCD unit

Reader cooling fan 1

J602

J601

Inverter PCB

F-5-4

5.2 Basic Sequence

5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations
Basic Sequence of Operation at Power-On
0010-7885

Main power switch ON

SREADY STBY

Reader motor Scanning lamp HP sensor

Forward Reverse

- shift shading - fixed shading - white plate dust detection control - shading correction

Scanner unit position

HP (shading position)

HP (shading position)

CCD output correction

F-5-5

5.2.2 Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key

Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key (book mode; 1 original)
Start key ON
STBY
0011-2182

SREADY
Reverse

SCFW

SCRW

STBY

Reader motor Scanning lamp HP sensor

Forward

Scanning unit position HP (shading position)

Image end

HP (shading position) White plate dust detection control Shading correction

F-5-6

Basic Sequence of Operation in Response to a Press on the Start Key (ADF mode; 1 original)

5-4

Chapter 5

Start key ON STBY Reader motor Scanning lamp HP sensor Scanning unit position Image end Stream reading position Stream reading Stream reading position shift dust detection HP (shading) Shading correction SREADY
Reverse

SCRW

SCFW

STBY

Forward

HP (shading)

Shading position shift

F-5-7

5.3 Various Control

5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System 5.3.1.1 Overview
The following shows the components associated with the scanner drive system:
[1] Reader controller PCB Interface PCB
0010-7886

[2] Scanner motor

Light-blocking plate

(forward) Scanning lamp (reverse) Scanner HP sensor

No.1 mirror base

No.2 mirror base

F-5-8

[1] Scanner Motor M501 Drive Signal starts/stops the motor; controls the direction and speed of its rotation [2] Scanner HP Detection Signal detects the presence of the No. 1 mirror base at home position

5.3.1.2 Controlling the Scanner Motor

The configuration of the system used to control the scanner motor is as follows; the motor driver on the interface PCB operates according to the signals from the CPU to start/stop the scanner motor and to control the direction and speed of its rotation
Reader controller PCB
J202 J205 [1] J303 J302
0010-7887

Interface PCB
+24V/15V A J306 3 1 4 5 2 6

Scanner motor M501

CPU

Motor driver

A* B B*

[1] Scanner motor control signal

F-5-9

a. Reverse Movement After a Scan After an image scan, the No. 1 mirror base is moved in reverse as far as the shading position at 325 mm/sec regardless of the selected magnification. b. Forward Movement During a Scan During an image scan, the No. 1 mirror base is controlled at the speed indicated in the following figure; the No. 1 mirror base is moved forward at 325 mm/sec for 100% magnification.

5-5

Chapter 5

Start position HP Image leading edge Constant speed Image end Stop Acceleration Deceleration

Shift speed

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

Shift distance [1] acceleration interval: accelerates to scanning speed. [2] run-up interval: servers as a margin to ensure stable speed [3] image read interval: reads the image at a specific speed [4] deceleration interval: decelerates at the end of the image and stops.
F-5-10

ERROR CODE: E202 (HP detection error) -0001: when the No. 1 mirror base is moving forward, it fails to reach the HP sensor within a specific period of time -0002: when the No. 1 mirror base is moving in reverse, it fails to reach the HP sensor within a specific period of time SERVICE MODE: COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X (scanner image leading edge position adjustment) Enter a value to adjust the image leading edge position. settings range: 0 to 2970 (a change of '12' causes a shift of 1 mm) COPIER>AJST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S (scanner home position) Do not change the setting.

5.3.2 Enlargement/Reduction 5.3.2.1 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Main Scanning Direction
To change the magnification in main scanning direction (for both platen and ADF modes), the machine reads the image at 100% and applies appropriate image processing in the main controller block.
0010-7889

5.3.2.2 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction

To execute scaling, the moving speed of the mirror 1 mount is changed. Also, digital scaling is concurrently used under the following conditions: - Fixed reading: scaling is from 25 to 99.9% - Stream reading: scaling is from 25 to 88.9%
0010-7890

MEMO: Stream reading is basically executed when a copy is made with the ADF. However, fixed reading is executed instead if scaling is from 25 to 49.9% or a 2-sided copy is made at any scaling factor. Fixed reading is executed whenever a copy is made in book mode.

5.3.3 Controlling the Scanning Lamp 5.3.3.1 Overview

The following shows the items of control and the components of the control system associated with the activation of the scanning lamp: 1) Controlling the Activation The machine turns on or off the scanning lamp using the drive signal (XE-ON) generated by the CPU on the reader controller PCB. In response to the signal, the inverter PCB generates high-frequency high voltage in the activation motor circuit using the drive voltage (+24 V) supplied by the reader controller PCB, thus turning on the scanning lamp. 2) Detecting an Error The machine identifies an error in the intensity of light as an activation error occurring when the lamp is initially turned on (shading correction). ERROR CODE: E225 -0001: at time of shading, the detected intensity of light falls short of a specific level. -0002: in ADF mode, the intensity of light between originals falls short of a specific level.
0010-7891

Inverter PCB Scanning lamp Reader control PCB

LA1

J601 J203 GND 1 9 GND 2 8 GND 3 7 GND 4 6 XE-ON 5 5 24V 6 4 24V 7 3 XSYNC 8 2 24V 9 1

Activation control circuit

CPU

F-5-11

5-6

Chapter 5

5.3.3.2 Scanning Lamp

The machine's scanning lamp is a xenon lamp consisting of a tube in which xenon gas is sealed. On the inner side of the glass tube are 2 electrodes running parallel to the tube axis, while the inner side is coated with fluorescent material. When high-frequency high voltage is applied to the electrodes, the gas inside the tube starts to discharge, thus illuminating the fluorescent material.
Electrode Electrode
0010-7894

Fluorescent material

Opening Glass tube

Electrode
F-5-12

Electrode

5.3.3.3 Controlling the Activation

The machine turns on or off the scanning lamp using the drive signal (XE_ON) from the CPU on the reader controller PCB. In response to the signal, the inverter PCB generates high-frequency high voltage in the activation control circuit using the drive voltage (+24 V) supplied by the reader controller PCB, thus turning on the xenon lamp.
0010-7895

5.3.4 Detecting the Size of Originals 5.3.4.1 Overview

The machine identifies the size of an original with reference to the combination of measurements taken of the light reflected at specific points of the CCD and the output of a reflection type sensor. It takes measurements at 2 points for individual sizes to ensure correct identification even in the event that the original is displaced while the ADF is being closed. - for main scanning direction, by the CCD (for AB, 8 points; for inch-configuration, 6 points) - for sub scanning direction, by a reflection type photosensor (for AB-configuration, 1 point; for inch-configuration, 1 point) The machine identifies the size of an original as follows: 1) External Light (main scanning direction only) While keeping the scanning lamp off, the machine measures the CCD level at individual points of measurement in main scanning direction. 2) Sensor Output Level The machine turns on the scanning lamp, and measures the CCD level at individual points of measurement in main scanning direction. Also, the machine turns on the LED of the reflection type photosensor in sub scanning direction to measure the sensor output. It uses the combination of the measurement and the output to identify the size of the original in question.
0010-7897

5.3.4.2 Points of Measurement Used for Original Size Identification

For main scanning direction, the machine moves the No. 1 mirror base to the point of CCD original detection to measure the CCD level at individual points of measurement. For sub scanning direction, the machine uses the outputs of original sensors 1 and 3.
AB-Configuration Inch-configuration
0010-7898

Original sensor 1

Point of original detection 1

STMTR

Original sensor 3

Point of original detection 1 B6 Print of original A5 detection 2 Point of original detection 3 B5 Point of original detection 4

B5R A4R B4 A4 A3
Point of original detection 2

STMT
Point of original detection 3

LTRR LTR

LGL 279.4431.8mm (11"17")

CCD original detection position

CCD original detection position

F-5-13

1. Checking the Presence/Absence of an Original at 2 Points (individual points of detection) For main scanning direction, the machine identifies the presence/absence of an original with reference to the CCD output at 2 points (nearest).

Original size border line

Near 13-mm point

1A = additional detection point 1

Near 4-mm point

1B = additional detection point 2

Original size border line

F-5-14

5-7

Chapter 5
T-5-3 Result of identification Result of movement A no yes no yes B no no yes yes original absent original present original present original present

Note: Change in the Signal in Response to ADF Open -> Closed change present: no other: yes The OR argument is applied to the outputs at 2 points. 2. Priority on the Presence of an Original at the Front If the machine detects the absence of an original at the rear in spite of detection of the presence at the front for main scanning direction, the machine will identify the size of the original upholding the result of detection at the front.
(rear)

Document size sensor 1

Point of detection 1 Point of detection 2 Point of detection 3 Point of detection 4

(front)

B5

CCD original detection position

F-5-15

EX (B5 original)
T-5-4 Point of detection Result of detection present/absent present absent present absent Result of identification

1 2 3 4 Result

present present present absent B5

5.3.4.3 Overview of Operation

1. In a Wait State No. 1 mirror base: at shading position scanning lamp: off original sensor
0010-7900

5-8

Chapter 5

Scanning lamp Original sensor ADF Reader unit

Point of detection 1 Point of detection 2 Point of detection 3 Point of detection 4

Platen glass

CCD point of original detection

F-5-16

2. ADF Being Opened No.1 mirror base: moves to a specific point of original detection scanning lamp: off original sensor: off

(external light)

F-5-17

3. ADF Being Closed No. 1 mirror base: at point of original detection scanning lamp: off -> on original sensor: original detection operation - When the ADF is at 25 deg or lower, the external light within the width of any original is kept out of external light, thus causing the machine to assume the absence of an original at points of external light detection (external light search operation). The ADF open/closed sensor (main body) identifies the state as being "closed," and the machine starts original size detection. Here, B5, B4, A4, and A3 are eliminated from the list of possible sizes. - When the external light search is over, the machine turns on the xenon lamp for the main scanning lamp, and checks the CCD (4 points) for external light. For sub scanning direction, the machine starts to operate the original sensor.

(external light)

F-5-18

25

F-5-19

4. ADF Fully Closed (8 deg or less) No. 1 mirror base: at point of original detection scanning lamp: on original sensor: original detection operation The machine looks for a change in the output level of individual sensors for a period of 2 sec after the ADF open/closed sensor (ADF) has identified the current state as being "closed." The absence of a change in the level causes the machine to assume the presence of an original at the point in question. The machine uses the combination of changes in the levels of 5 points to identify the size of the original in question.

8
F-5-20

5. In a Wait State (for a press on the Start key) No.1 mirror base: at point of original detection scanning lamp: off original sensor: off

F-5-21

5-9

Chapter 5

AB-Configuration Point of CCD Original 1 size A B A3 B4 A4R A4 B5 B5R A5 B6 absent

F-5-22

detection 2 3 A B A B

Original 4 A B sensor 1

Inch-configuration Point of CCD Original detection Original 1 2 3 size A B A B A B sensor 3 11"x17" LGL LTRR LTR STMTR STMT absent :unchanged :changed

5.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control 5.3.5.1 Dust Detection in Stream Reading Mode
In addition to the common points for stream reading, the machine uses an additional 6 points each for small-size and large-size sheets at intervals of 0.5 mm to avoid areas of dust (in total, 7 points for small-size and 7 points for large-size). If it detects dust, however, it changes the point of reading to prevent dust from appearing in images. The detection of dust is executed at the end of each single job that uses stream reading; the machine moves the ADF belt idly when stream reading is selected and identifies any black line as an area of dust. When it detects dust, it resets the current point of stream reading, and uses the point of reference on the leftmost edge for dust detection; if dust is detected, it moves the point of stream reading to the right by 1 point (0.5 mm) for detection of dust for a second time. If dust is not detected, the machine uses that point as the point for stream reading. If dust is detected once again, it will use the next point. If dust is detected at all 7 points, the machine will indicate the message "Copyboard Glass Soiled," which will remain unit the ADF is opened and the copyboard glass is cleaned. The machine will not use stream reading but use fixed reading as long as the message remains.
0010-8001

3 mm (7 points) Dust

Black line on output

F-5-23

Advise the user to clean the area where the CCD stops in stream reading if the message has appeared. A label indicating the points for stream reading (for smallsize and large-size) is attached to the rear of the copyboard glass. If a jam has occurred, the machine will not execute dust detection at the end of a job. If the ongoing job is cancelled, it will execute dust detection at the end of operation.
Label

185mm 385mm

Small-size point of reference for reading

Large-size point of reference for reading Points of cleaning

F-5-24

SERVICE MODE:

5-10

Chapter 5 COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DFDST-L1 (level 2) use it to adjust dust detection level between sheets (for small size paper) COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DFDST-L2 (level 2) use it to adjust dust detection level at the end of a job (for small size paper) COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DFDST-L3 (level 2) use it to adjust dust detection level between sheets (for large size paper) COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DFDST-L4 (level 2) use it to adjust dust detection level at the end of a job (for large size paper)

5.3.5.2 White Plate Dust Detection Control

The white plate can collect stray dust inside the reader unit, causing lines in images, and the machine is equipped with a mechanism to check for dust on the plate and correct it to limit its effects on output images. Timing of Control 1. Before a Job - white plate dust detection - white plate dust correction 2. After a Job - white plate dust detection - white plate dust correction
0011-2231

Start key ON

1st SCAN Dust detection control

F-5-25

2nd SCAN Dust detection control

Particulars of Control - White Plate Dust Detection The machine compares the data on the light reflected by the white plate at time of fixed shading and shift shading to check for dust on the white plate while at the same time identifying the coordinates and width of the area of dust. - White Plate Dust Correction If the machine detects the presence of dust, it corrects the shading correction coefficient of the area of dust by means of a correction coefficient used for both sides of the area with dust, thus limiting the effects of the dust.
White plate

Dust

Data on light reflected by the white plate (shift shading)) Comparison

Data on light reflected by the white plate (fixed shading)

Identifies the coordinates of the start of dust and width

Correction Algorithm

Point of white plate data measurement at time of fixed shading White plate data correction area at time of shift shading
F-5-26

The machine corrects the correction coefficient of the area of dust using data for areas on both sides

5.3.6 Image Processing 5.3.6.1 Overview

The PCBs used in the image processing system have the following functions: CDD/AP PCB: CCD drive, analog image processing, A/D conversion Reader controller PCB: shading correction, image data conversion (4 channels -> 2 channels)
0011-2241

5-11

Chapter 5

Analog image processing block CCD Analog image processing A/D conversion

distal image processing block Reader controller PCB shading processing image data conversion (4-system -> 2-system)

Controller block

CCD/AP PCB
F-5-27

1. Analog Image processing - CCD drive - CCD output gain correction, offset correction - CCD output A/D conversion
CCD [2] Analog [1]

J102

J208

image signal Analog image process - gain correction - offset correction

CCD drive control

CCD control signal Gain correction data J101 J204 Gain correction data

[4] [3]

[1] [2]

A/D conversion

[5]
20bit

Analog image process - gain correction - offset correction CCD/AP PCB

[3]

[4]

A/D conversion
A12V A5V

[6]
20bit

F-5-28

[1] 1st half even-numbered pixel analog image signal [2] 1st half odd-numbered pixel analog image signal [3] 2nd half even-numbered pixel analog image signal [4] 2nd half odd-numbered pixel analog image signal [5] 1st half digital image signal [6] 2nd half digital image signal 2. Digital Image Processing - shading correction
Reader controller PCB
J102 J208

Gain correction data CPU CCD/AP PCB

EEP-ROM Target value SRAM

J101

J204 J202

[1] [2]
20bit 20bit

[1] Shading correction [2]

8bit 8bit

F-5-29

[1] 1st-half digital image signal [2] 2nd-half digital image signal

5.3.6.2 CCD Drive

1. CCD The CCD used in the machine is a 1-line linear image sensor. - Number of pixels: 7400 - Size of a pixel: 4.7 x 4.7 ym 2. CCD Drive The signals converted by the light-receiving block are sent out in 2 analog video signal channels (even-numbered pixels, odd-numbered pixels).
0011-2249

5-12

Chapter 5

Direction of charge transfer

Direction of charge transfer

Clock pulse C Clock pulse A Transfer unit C Transfer unit A Output Output unit A unit C LightCCD 3704 3703 3702 3701 3700 3699 3698 3697 4 3 2 1 shift receiving 7400 7399 7398 7397 pulse unit Output Output unit D unit B Clock pulse D Clock pulse B Transfer unit D Transfer unit B Direction of charge transfer Direction of charge transfer
F-5-30

5.3.6.3 CCD Output Gain Correction, Offset Correction

The machine processes the analog video signals from the CCD so that the rate of their amplitude is a specific level. The machine also makes sure that the output voltage in the absence of incident light is of a specific level (offset correction).
0011-2257

5.3.6.4 CCD Output A/D Conversion

The odd-numbered and even-numbered pixel analog video signals after correction are further converted into 12-bit digital signals representing specific pixel voltage levels by the A/D converter.
0011-2258

5.3.6.5 Outline of Shading Correction

The machine executes shading correction so that the CCD output will be even when the density of the original is even. The output of the CCD may not necessarily be even because of the following factors even if the density of the original is perfectly even: 1. variation in the sensitivity of the individual pixels of the CCD 2. difference in the degree of light passing through the center of the lens and through its edge 3. difference in the intensity of light between the center and ends of the scanning lamp 4. deterioration of the scanning lamp The machine executes shading correction to make up for the variation in the output of the CCD. Shading correction may be shading adjustment executed to determine a service mode target value or shading correction executed for every job.
0011-2259

5.3.6.6 Shading Adjustment

In shading adjustment, the machine measures the density of a white sheet of paper and the standard white plate, and stores the measurements in memory. The machine then computes these measurements for use as the target value for shading correction. Shading adjustment is executed at time of machine installation or scanning lamp replacement, or when a change has occurred in the intensity of light over time. Service Mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ
0011-2260

5.3.6.7 Shading Correction

The machine executes shading correction for every scan of an original. The machine shines the light of the scanning lamp against the standard white plate, and measures the light reflected by the plate; it then uses the analog image processing block of the CCD/AP PCB to turn the measurements into digital data, which will be sent to the shading correction circuit of the reader controller PCB in the form of a shading coefficient. In the shading correction circuit, the shading coefficient is compared against the target value stored in memory, and the machine uses the differences as the shading correction value. The shading correction value is used to make up for the variation among individual pixels of the CCD occurring at each scan, thus evening out the image density level.
CCD output Characteristics after correction Characteristics before correction
0011-2261

Target value Measurement

White Standard white plate

F-5-31

Original density

5-13

Chapter 5

5.4 Parts Replacement Procedure

5.4.1 CCD Unit 5.4.1.1 Before Starting the Work
1) Remove the copyboard glass. 2) Remove the CCD unit cover [1]. - 9 screws [2]
[2] [1]
F-5-34
0011-8094

[2] [1]

[3]

When removing the copyboard glass, take care not to touch the white plate found on its back. (Dirt will lead to lines in images.) Use lint-free paper moistened with alcohol to remove dirt.
[2]

Take care not to deform the sponge [2] attached to the right glass retainer [1].
[2]

[1]

[2]
F-5-32

3) Remove the original size sensor unit.

5.4.1.2 Removing the CCD Unit

1) Disconnect the 2 flat cables [1] of the reader controller PCB; then, remove the 2 screw [2] and the 2 leaf springs [3]. Thereafter, detach the CCD unit [4].
[1]
0011-7969

[2]

F-5-35

5.4.2.2 When Replacing Components of the Scanning System

[2]

[4] [3]

<Components> CCD unit, copyboard glass, scanning lamp, standard white plate, inverter PCB <Procedure> Execute the following service mode item: 1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CCD-ADJ (shading correction based on the standard white plate)

0011-8731

5.4.3 Standard White Plate 5.4.3.1 Removing the Standard White Plate
0011-8033

[2]

1) Remove the 2 small covers [1]. (Use a precision screwdriver to release the claw.)

F-5-33

5.4.1.3 When Replacing Components of the Scanning System

<Components> CCD unit, copyboard glass, scanning lamp, standard white plate, inverter PCB <Procedure> Execute the following service mode item: 1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CCD-ADJ (shading correction based on the standard white plate)
0011-8730

[1]

5.4.2 Copyboard glass 5.4.2.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass

1) Open the ADF. 2) Remove the copyboard glass [1]. - 2 screws [2] - right glass retainer [3]
0011-7965

F-5-36

2) Remove the standard white plate [1]. - 4 screws [2]

5-14

Chapter 5

[2]

[1]

[3]

[2]
F-5-39

[3]

[1]

10) Remove the reader left cover [1]. - 4 screws [2]

[2]
F-5-37

[2]

5.4.3.2 When Replacing Components of the Scanning System

<Components> CCD unit, copyboard glass, scanning lamp, standard white plate, inverter PCB <Procedure> Execute the following service mode item: 1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CCD-ADJ (shading correction based on the standard white plate)
0011-8732

5.4.4 Scanning Lamp 5.4.4.1 Before Starting the Work

1) Remove the copyboard glass. 2) Remove the hopper upper cover. 3) Remove the primary charging assembly cover. 4) Remove the process unit cover. 5) Remove the upper inside cover. 6) Remove the upper front cover unit [1]. - 3 screws [2]
[2] [1]
0011-8535

[1]

[2]
F-5-40

11) Remove the reader rear cover [1]. - 2 connectors [2] - 5 screws [3]
[2] [1]

[3]
F-5-41 F-5-38

12) Remove the reader upper rear cover [1]. - 1 screw [2]
[1] [2]

7) Remove the lower left cover. 8) Remove the upper left cover. 9) Remove the reader front cover [1]. - 2 screws [2] - 2 magnets [3]

F-5-42

13) Remove the scanning lamp inside cover [1]. - 2 screws [2]

5-15

Chapter 5

[1]

[1]

[2]

[2]
F-5-43

5.4.4.2 Removing the Scanning Lamp

1) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the cable [2] from the cable guide [3] and the snap band [4]. 2) Open the ferrite core [5] to detach. (100/230V machine)
0011-7971

[2]

[1]

[1] [5]
F-5-46

5.4.4.3 When Replacing Components of the Scanning System

<Components> CCD unit, copyboard glass, scanning lamp, standard white plate, inverter PCB <Procedure> Execute the following service mode item: 1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CCD-ADJ (shading correction based on the standard white plate)
0011-8733

[4]
F-5-44

[3]

5.4.5 Reader Controller PCB

When replacing the scanning lamp, be sure to fit the removed ferrite core to the new lamp. (100/230V machine) 3) Slide the No. 1 mirror base [1] to the right so that it matches against the cut-off [2] of the frame.

5.4.5.1 Before Starting the Work

1) Remove the copyboard glass. 2) Remove the CCD unit cover [1]. - 9 screws [2]
[2] [1]
0011-8109

When detaching the No. 1 mirror base, be sure to hold it by the bend [A] on the mirror stay.

[2] [1]
[2] [2]

[2] [A]
F-5-45

4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the scanning lamp [2].

[2]
F-5-47

3) Remove the original size sensor unit.

5.4.5.2 Removing the Reader Controller PCB

1) Disconnect the 5 flat cables [1] and the connector [2], and remove the 4 screws [3]; then, detach the reader controller PCB [4].
0011-7972

5-16

Chapter 5

[3]

[1]

[4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

[3]

[2]

[1]
F-5-48

[3]
[3]
F-5-50

How to Disconnect the Flat Cable Slide the locking lever [1] in the direction of the arrow to release; then, detach the flat cable [2].
[2]

2) Remove the reader upper rear cover.

5.4.6.2 Removing the Interface PCB

1) Remove the interface PCB cover [1]. - 2 screws [2] - 8 screws [3]
[3]
0011-8654

[1]

[1]
[2] [1]

F-5-49

[3]

5.4.5.3 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB

0011-8740

F-5-51

Before Starting the Work (backing up the data) If possible, perform the following: - Using the SST, download the data stored in the RAM of the reader controller PCB. - Print out the user mode/service mode data.

2) Remove the interface PCB [1]. - connectors/flat cables on PCB - 7 screws [2] - 2 screws [3]

1) Turn on the power, and execute the following service mode item: COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > R-CON 2) If the data has successfully been downloaded using the SST before the replacement, upload the data. 3) Set the values indicated on the service label for their respective service mode items. COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X (adjustment of image read start position in sub scanning direction; image lead edge) COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y (adjustment of image read start position in main scanning direction; horizontal registration) COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-S (adjustment of shading correction data measurement position) COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF (adjustment of main scanning position for ADF stream reading) COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-FX (adjustment of main scanning position for ADF fixed reading) COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X-MG (fine-adjustment of magnification in sub scanning direction for copyboard reading) 4) Execute the following service mode item: COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CCD-ADJ (shading correction based on standard white plate) 5) Turn off and then on the power.

[2]

[2]

[3]
F-5-52

[1]

How to Disconnect the Flat Cable Slide the locking lever [1] in the direction of the arrow, and detach the flat cable [2].

5.4.6 Interface PCB 5.4.6.1 Before Starting the Work

1) Remove the reader rear cover [1]. - 2 connectors [2] - 5 screws [3]
0011-8651

5-17

Chapter 5

5.4.8 Scanner Motor

[2]

5.4.8.1 Before Starting the Work

1) Remove the reader rear cover. 2) Remove the reader upper rear cover. 3) Remove the interface PCB cover.
0011-8656

[1]

[1]

5.4.8.2 Removing the Scanner Motor

1) Slide out the reader power supply cover [1]. - 4 screws [2] - Free the cable from the wire saddle found behind the cover.
0011-8657

[1]

F-5-53

5.4.7 Inverter PCB 5.4.7.1 Before Starting the Work

1) Remove the copyboard glass. 2) Remove the CCD unit cover [1]. - 9 screws [2]
[2] [1]
0011-8112

[2]

[2]

F-5-56

2) Disconnect the connector [1] of the interface PCB.

[2] [2]

[1]
F-5-57

[2]
F-5-54

3) Shift the scanner motor [1] in the direction of the arrow to detach. - 2 springs [2] - 3 screws [3]
[2]

3) Remove the original size sensor unit.

5.4.7.2 Removing the Inverter PCB

1) Disconnect the connector [1] and the flat cable [2]; then, release the 2 PCB supports [4] to detach the inverter PCB [5].
0011-7975

[3]

[4]

[2] [4]

[2]
F-5-58

[1]

5.4.8.3 Mounting the Scanner Motor

[1] [3]
F-5-55

[5]

When mounting the scanner motor, check to be sure that the timing belt [3] is properly fitted to the scanner pulley [1] and the motor shaft [2].

0011-7978

5.4.7.3 When Replacing Components of the Scanning System

<Components> CCD unit, copyboard glass, scanning lamp, standard white plate, inverter PCB <Procedure> Execute the following service mode item: 1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CCD-ADJ (shading correction based on the standard white plate)
0011-8734

5-18

Chapter 5

[3]

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2] [2]

F-5-59

[2]

[3]

[2]
F-5-62

3) Remove the original size sensor unit.

5.4.10.2 Removing the Original Size Sensor Unit

1) Remove the 3 screws [1], and shift the original size detection unit [2].
[2]
0011-7967

F-5-60

5.4.9 ADF Open/Close Sensor 5.4.9.1 Before Starting the Work

1) Remove the reader rear cover. 2) Remove the reader upper rear cover. 3) Remove the interface PCB cover.
0011-8671

5.4.9.2 Removing the ADF Open/Closed Sensor

1) Remove the sensor mounting plate [1]. - 1 connector [2] - 1 screw [3]
[3]
0011-8672

[1]
F-5-63

2) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the original size sensor unit [2].
[2]

[1]

[2]

[1]

F-5-61

F-5-64

2) Remove the ADF Open/Closed Sensor.

5.4.10 Original Size Sensor 5.4.10.1 Before Starting the Work

1) Remove the copyboard glass. 2) Remove the CCD unit cover [1]. - 9 screws [2]
0011-9312

5.4.10.3 Removing the Original Size Sensor

1) While releasing the claw at the end, detach the original size sensor [1].
0011-7968

[1]

F-5-65

5-19

Chapter 5

5.4.11 Scanner Home Position Sensor 5.4.11.1 Before Starting the Work
1) Remove the reader rear cover [1]. - 2 connectors [2] - 5 screws [3]
[2] [1]
0011-8629

[3] [4] [1] [1]

[2] [2]
F-5-69

3) Remove the sensor mounting plate [1]. - 1 screw [2]

[2]

[3]
F-5-66

2) Remove the reader upper rear cover. 3) Remove the interface PCB cover [1]. - 2 screws [2] - 8 screws [3]
[3]

[1]

F-5-70

4) Remove the scanner home position sensor [1]. - 1 connector [2]

[2] [1]

[3]
F-5-67

4) Slide out the rear upper cover [1] to the front. - 3 screws [2]
[2]

[2]
F-5-71

[1]

5.4.12 Cooling Fan 5.4.12.1 Before Starting the Work

1) Remove the sub hopper unit. 2) Remove the upper right cover [1]. - 2 screws [2]
0011-8674

[2]
[1]
F-5-68

5.4.11.2 Removing the Scanner Home Position Sensor

1) Remove the reader rear cover (small) [1]. - 1 screw [2] 2) Remove the plate [3]. - 3 screws [4]
0011-8645

[1]

F-5-72

5.4.12.2 Removing the Reader Cooling Fan 1/2

1) Remove the fan cover [1] and the 2 air filters [2]. - 1 screw [3]
0011-7429

5-20

Chapter 5

[2]

[1]

[3]

[2]

[1]
F-5-73

[3]

F-5-77

2) Remove the fan inside cover [1]. - 4 screws [2]

5.4.13 Scanner Drive Cable 5.4.13.1 Before Starting the Work

1) Remove the ADF. 2) Remove the original delivery tray. 3) Remove the control panel support unit. 4) Remove the copyboard glass. 5) Remove the standard white plate. 6) Remove the upper front cover unit. 7) Remove the reader front cover. 8) Remove the reader left cover. 9) Remove the reader rear cover. 10) Remove the reader upper rear cover. 11) Remove the interface PCB cover. 12) Remove the ADF right hinge base cover [1] and the reader upper rear right cover [2]. - 4 screws [3]
[2] [3]
0011-9416

[1]

[2]
F-5-74

3) Remove the scanner motor cooling fan [1]. - 1 connector [2] - 2 screws [3]

[1]

[3]

[1]
F-5-78

[3]
F-5-75

[2]

13) Shift the reader power supply cover to the front. 14) Remove the ADF right hinge base [1]. - 7 screws [2]
[1]

4) Remove the reinforcing plate [1]. - 3 screws [2]

[1]

[2]
[2]

[2]

F-5-76

5) Remove the scanner motor cooling fan 2 [1]. - 1 connector [2] - 2 screws [3]
[2]
F-5-79

15) Remove the 4 screws [1], and shift the ADF open/closed sensor assembly [2] and the ADF open/closed sensor lever assembly [3] to the front.

5-21

Chapter 5

[3]

[1]

[2]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]
[1]
F-5-80

[1]

[2]

16) Remove the reader rear cover (small) [1]. - 1 screw [2] 17) Remove the plate [3]. - 3 screws [4]
[3] [4] [1] [1]

[1]

F-5-83

2) Remove the 2 cable fixing screws [2] of the No. 1 mirror base [1]. 3) Remove the cable fixing screws [3]. 4) Free the 2 hooks [4] of the cable from the right side of the reader unit frame. 5) Detach the cable for the pulleys.
[2] [2]
F-5-81

18) Remove the ADF left hinge base [1]. - 7 screws [2]
[1]
[2]

[4]

[1]

[2]

[2]

[4]

[3] [2]

[2]
F-5-82

F-5-84

5.4.13.2 Removing the Scanner Drive Cable

1) Remove the 24 screws [1], and detach the reader upper frame [2].
0011-7982

5.4.13.3 Fitting the Scanner Drive Cable

1) Put the ball of the cable into the hole of the drive pulley [1], and wind the cable (4 times inside; 5 times outside); then, tape it in place. At this time, make sure that the cable fixing [2] is on the inside. 2) Fit the cable on the pulleys; then, fit one end on the left side hook [3] and the other end on the right side hook [4]. 3) Temporarily fix the cable fixing plate [2] in place on the No. 1 mirror base [5]. 4) Mount the reader unit upper frame.
0011-7983

5-22

Chapter 5

[1]

[C] [B] [A]

[2] [1]

[A] [B]

[4]

[5]
F-5-87

[4]

2) Arrange the mirror positioning tool so that it is ready for use in the machine (by changing the pin position; FRONT).

[C] [B]
[2]

[A]

[3] [3]
F-5-85

[A] [B]

F-5-88

[4]

[5]

3) Fit the pins of the mirror positioning tool (front [2]; rear [3]) into the appropriate holes of the No. 1/No. 2 mirror base).

[4]

[1]
F-5-86

5.4.13.4 Adjusting the Position of the No. 1/No. 2 Mirror Base

1) Arrange the mirror positioning tool (FY9-3009-040) so that it is ready for use in the machine (by changing the pin position; REAR).
0011-9470

F-5-89

5-23

Chapter 5

[3]

[2]
F-5-90

4) Secure the end of the cable that has temporarily been fixed in place on the hook of the reader unit frame. 5) Fully tighten the screws on the cable fixing plate both at the front and the rear. 6) Detach the mirror positioning tool (FRONT, REAR). 7) Put the detached parts back on by reversing the foregoing steps.

5-24

Chapter 6 Laser Exposure

Contents

Contents
6.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 Outline of the Laser Exposure System......................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................6-3

6.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations (laser exposure system)............................................................................................................... 6-3

6.3 Various Controls ............................................................................................................................................................6-3

6.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing..................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.3.1.1 Turning On and Off the Laser Unit.................................................................................................................................................................6-3 6.3.1.2 Flow of the BD Signal.....................................................................................................................................................................................6-4

6.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light ...................................................................................................................................... 6-4

6.3.2.1 APC Control....................................................................................................................................................................................................6-4

6.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor .......................................................................................................................................... 6-5

6.3.3.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................6-5

6.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter....................................................................................................................................................... 6-5

6.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter ..........................................................................................................................................................................6-5

6.4 Parts Replacement Procedure.........................................................................................................................................6-7

6.4.1 Laser Scanner Unit....................................................................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.4.1.1 Before Starting the Work ................................................................................................................................................................................6-7 6.4.1.2 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit ..................................................................................................................................................................6-7 6.4.1.3 When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit ........................................................................................................................................................6-7

Chapter 6

6.1 Construction
6.1.1 Outline of the Laser Exposure System
The laser exposure system consists of a laser unit (source of laser beams) and a polygon mirror. It scans the photosensitive drum (main scanning direction) to create a latent static image. It is a 4-laser mechanism (laser A, laser B, laserC, laserD).
T-6-1 Laser Light Wave length Output Number of beams 645 to 665 mm (visible light) 20mW 4
0010-8009

T-6-2 Laser Scanner Motor Type of motor Revolution DC brushless 29527 rpm (approx.)

T-6-3 Polygon Mirror Number of facets 12 (35-mm dia.)

T-6-4 Control Mechanism Synchronization main scanning direction sub scanning direction Light intensity Others APC laser activation/deactivation*1 (exposes "light" areas)

laser scanner motor laser shutter

6-1

Chapter 6

[4] [5] [6]

[8]

[3] [7]

[2]

[1]

Drum LaserA LaserB

B C

LaserC 1.3mm

LaserD
F-6-1 T-6-5 Item [1] Laser unit Description emits laser light.

LaserB

LaserA LaserD LaserC

[2] [3] [4] [5]

Polygon mirror BD mirror BD PCB Laser mirror 1

scans laser light in main scanning direction. reflects laser light, directing it to the BD PCB. generates the BD signal. reflects laser light, directing it to the photosensitive drum.

[6] [7] [8]

Laser mirror 2 Laser mirror 3 Routing mirror

reflects laser light, directing it to the photosensitive drum. reflects laser light, directing it to the photosensitive drum. reflects laser light, directing it to the photosensitive drum.

6-2

Chapter 6

6.2 Basic Sequence

6.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations (laser exposure system)
0010-8010

Image lead edge in page memory

Control panel power switch ON

When the surface temperature of the fixing roller reaches 198 deg C, full-speed rotation. (for potential control)
198 INTR Copy Start key ON PSTBY PRINT LSTR STBY Half-speed rotation

Laser scanner motor Image lead edge signal (PTOP) Laser A, B, C, D

Half-speed rotation Half-speed rotation Wait activation Wait activation Imaging activation

BD signal (BD) Laser

for 1 scan

Detects laser A, C

Activation for potential control

F-6-2

6.3 Various Controls

6.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing 6.3.1.1 Turning On and Off the Laser Unit
The laser unit is turned on or off by the laser driver PCB 1 in response to the laser control signal (CTL0a/CTL1a/CTL2a/CTL0b/CTL1b/CTL2b) coming from the DC controller PCB.
0011-2630

Laser driver PCB 1

CNT0a CNT1a CNT2a CNT0b CNT1b CNT2b

J1301

J1311
CNT0a CNT1a CNT2a CNT0b CNT1b CNT2b

J1317

J1406

Video PCB

Laser driver PCB 2

F-6-3

6-3

Chapter 6

6.3.1.2 Flow of the BD Signal

0010-8012

When laser light is detected, '0'.

Generates the printer sync signal based on CLK-B.

Executes read operation based on this sync signal.

J3701 1

BD PCB

2 3 4

GND BD 5V

J1319 8 7 6

Sync signal generation

J1317 36 BD

J1406 36

Memory control
J1302

Laser driver J1303 PCB 1

J1312 J1313

VIDEO

J1317

J1406

Laser driver PCB 2

F-6-4

Video signal PCB

Related Service Mode: - COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > PVE-OFST (laser projection position adjustment) If you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB, enter the adjustment value. Setting range: -300 to 300

Setting decreased Front

Setting increased Rear

Laser A, C

Note that the laser B move in sync with the laser A. The laser D move in sync with the laser C.

6.3.2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light 6.3.2.1 APC Control

The machine uses APC control to make sure that the intensity of laser light remains at a specific level by controlling the output of the laser diode of the laser driver. For the control, the machine causes the Video controller to send the laser control signal (CTL0a, CTL1a, CTL2a, CTL0b, CTL1b, CTL2b) to the laser drive IC on the laser driver PCB. As a result, the laser drive IC is set to APC mode, thus forcing the laser diode (LD) to emit light. While the control is under, way, the laser driver IC uses the photo diode (PD) to monitor the laser diode (LD), adjusting the output of the laser diode until a specific level of intensity is reached.
5V PD Laser driver IC LD Laser driver PCB 1
0010-8029

J1301
CNT0a CNT1a CNT2a CNT0b CNT1b CNT2b

J1311
CNT0a CNT1a CNT2a CNT0b CNT1b CNT2b

J1317

J1406

Video PCB

Laser driver PCB 2

F-6-5

SERVICE MODE: COPIER > FUNCTION > LASER > POWER-A, B, C, D (activation for laser power adjustment) Use this mode to turn on the laser when checking laser activation.

6-4

Chapter 6

6.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 6.3.3.1 Outline

The machine controls the laser scanner motor so that the motor rotates at a specific speed using its motor speed control mechanism and reference signal generation mechanism found inside the Video controller PCB. The motor speed control mechanism detects the speed detection signal (FG, BD), and compares it against the reference signal generated by the reference signal generation mechanism, thereby controlling the acceleration signal (ACC) and the deceleration signal (DEC) to make sure that the motor rotates at a specific speed. The machine checks different references for speed detection to suit the state of the printer unit, ultimately reducing the length of time used to control the scanner motor speed. The FG signal is a detection signal used to roughly adjust the scanner motor speed. The BD signal, on the other hand, is a detection signal used to finely adjust the motor speed.
0010-8032

J1319

ACC DEC FG

BD

Laser driver PCB 1 J1317

J1406

Reference signal generation segment ASIC Video PCB

Motor speed control segment

F-6-6

ERROR CODE: E110 (scanner motor error) The FG signal is not detected a specific period of time after the scanner motor starts up. The FG signal is not detected while the scanner motor is rotating at a constant speed.

6.3.4 Controlling the Laser Shutter 6.3.4.1 Controlling the Laser Shutter
The machine is equipped with a mechanism to protect against exposure of its inside by laser light when the primary changing assembly front cover is opened. When the primary changing assembly front cover is opened, the protrusion attached to the cover releases the laser shutter, causing the laser shutter to close so that the laser path is closed.
0011-2631

6-5

Chapter 6

[2] [1]

[2]

[2]

[1]
F-6-7

[1]

[1] Laser light [2] Laser shutter

6-6

Chapter 6

6.4 Parts Replacement Procedure

6.4.1 Laser Scanner Unit 6.4.1.1 Before Starting the Work
1) Remove the manual feed pull-off roller unit. 2) Remove the developing assembly locking plate. 3) Remove the developing assembly. 4) Remove the sub hopper unit.
0011-7559

6.4.1.2 Removing the Laser Scanner Unit

1) Disconnect all connectors [1], and detach the 2 anti-vibration plates [2]. - 2 screws [3]
0010-8803

[1]

[2]

[3]
F-6-8

[2]

2) Remove the laser scanner unit [1]. - 2 bosses [2]

[1]

[2]
F-6-9

6.4.1.3 When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit

There is no special work in conjunction with the replacement of the laser scanner unit.
0010-8804

6-7

Chapter 7 Image Formation

Contents

Contents
7.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1 7.1.2 Major Components....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-2 7.1.3 Pre-Transfer Exposure LED ........................................................................................................................................................ 7-2

7.2 Image Formation Process...............................................................................................................................................7-2

7.2.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-2

7.3 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................7-3

7.3.1 Basic Sequence ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-3

7.4 Potential Control ............................................................................................................................................................7-3

7.4.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.4.2 Basics Sequence of Operations .................................................................................................................................................... 7-4 7.4.3 Determining the Optimum Grid Bias........................................................................................................................................... 7-5 7.4.4 Grid Bias Corrective Control ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-5 7.4.5 Determining the Optimum Laser Output ..................................................................................................................................... 7-6 7.4.6 Laser Output Corrective Control ................................................................................................................................................. 7-6 7.4.7 Determining the Optimum Developing Bias ............................................................................................................................... 7-7 7.4.8 Potential Control for Transparency Mode ................................................................................................................................... 7-8 7.4.9 Target Potential Correction in Each Mode .................................................................................................................................. 7-9

7.5 Charging Mechanism ...................................................................................................................................................7-11

7.5.1 Primary Charging Mechanism ................................................................................................................................................... 7-11
7.5.1.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-11 7.5.1.2 Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism ......................................................................................................................................7-13 7.5.1.3 Others ............................................................................................................................................................................................................7-13

7.5.2 Dust-Collecting Roller Bias ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-13

7.5.2.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-13

7.5.3 Pre-Transfer Charging Mechanism............................................................................................................................................ 7-14

7.5.3.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-14 7.5.3.2 Controlling the Output to Suit the Environment (fuzzy control) ..................................................................................................................7-15 7.5.3.3 Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism...............................................................................................................................7-16 7.5.3.4 Others ............................................................................................................................................................................................................7-16

7.6 Drum Cleaner Unit.......................................................................................................................................................7-16

7.6.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-16 7.6.2 Detecting the Waste Toner (case full condition) ....................................................................................................................... 7-17

7.7 Developing Assembly ..................................................................................................................................................7-18

7.7.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-18 7.7.2 Controlling the Developing Assembly....................................................................................................................................... 7-19 7.7.3 Controlling the Toner Cartridge Drive Mechanism................................................................................................................... 7-20 7.7.4 Controlling the Developing Bias ............................................................................................................................................... 7-21 7.7.5 Detecting the Toner Level and Controlling the Toner Supply Mechanism............................................................................... 7-22

7.8 Transfer Mechanism ....................................................................................................................................................7-25

7.8.1 Transfer Guide Bias ................................................................................................................................................................... 7-25
7.8.1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................................................7-25 7.8.1.2 Controlling the Output to Suit the Environment ...........................................................................................................................................7-26

7.8.2 Transfer Charging Mechanism .................................................................................................................................................. 7-26

7.8.2.1 Outline...........................................................................................................................................................................................................7-26 7.8.2.2 Controlling the Output to Suit the Environment (fuzzy control) ..................................................................................................................7-27 7.8.2.3 Correcting the Output at the Trailing Edge of Paper ....................................................................................................................................7-27 7.8.2.4 Transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism .....................................................................................................................................7-29 7.8.2.5 Others ............................................................................................................................................................................................................7-29

7.9 Separation Mechanism .................................................................................................................................................7-29

7.9.1 Separation Charging Mechanism ............................................................................................................................................... 7-29

Contents

7.9.1.1 Outline .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-29 7.9.1.2 Correcting the Output to Suit the Environment and the Toner Deposit ....................................................................................................... 7-30 7.9.1.3 Correcting the Output upon Detection of Leakage ....................................................................................................................................... 7-31 7.9.1.4 Others............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-31

7.10 Parts Replacement Procedure.................................................................................................................................... 7-32

7.10.1 Process Unit ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-32
7.10.1.1 Before Starting the Work ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-32 7.10.1.2 Removing the Process Unit......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-32 7.10.1.3 Mounting the Process Unit ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-32

7.10.2 Pre-Exposure Lamp ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-33

7.10.2.1 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit..................................................................................................................................................... 7-33

7.10.3 Primary Charging Assembly.................................................................................................................................................... 7-33

7.10.3.1 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly ............................................................................................................................................... 7-33

7.10.4 Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly ............................................................................................................................................ 7-33

7.10.4.1 Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly........................................................................................................................................ 7-33

7.10.5 Photosensitive Drum................................................................................................................................................................ 7-34

7.10.5.1 Points to Note About Handling the Photosensitive Drum .......................................................................................................................... 7-34 7.10.5.2 Removing the Photosensitive Drum ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-34

7.10.6 Drum Cleaner Unit................................................................................................................................................................... 7-35

7.10.6.1 Construction................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7-35 7.10.6.2 Removing the Cleaning Blade .................................................................................................................................................................... 7-35 7.10.6.3 Mounting the Cleaning Blade ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-35 7.10.6.4 Removing the Blade Vibrating Unit ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-35

7.10.7 Photosensitive Drum Heater .................................................................................................................................................... 7-36

7.10.7.1 Replacing the Photosensitive Drum Heater ................................................................................................................................................ 7-36

7.10.8 Sub Hopper .............................................................................................................................................................................. 7-36

7.10.8.1 Before Starting the Work ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-36 7.10.8.2 Removing the Sub Hopper Unit.................................................................................................................................................................. 7-36

7.10.9 Developing Assembly.............................................................................................................................................................. 7-37

7.10.9.1 Before Starting the Work ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-37 7.10.9.2 Removing the Developing Assembly ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-37 7.10.9.3 Points to Note When the Developing Assembly ........................................................................................................................................ 7-38 7.10.9.4 Removing the Hopper ................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-38

7.10.10 Developing Cylinder.............................................................................................................................................................. 7-39

7.10.10.1 Removing the Developing Cylinder ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-39

7.10.11 Developing Blade................................................................................................................................................................... 7-40

7.10.11.1 Before Starting the Work .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-40 7.10.11.2 Removing the Blade Unit ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-40 7.10.11.3 Mounting the Blade .................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-40

7.10.12 Developing Cylinder Deceleration Clutch............................................................................................................................. 7-40

7.10.12.1 Before Starting the Work .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-40 7.10.12.2 Removing the Developing Cylinder Decelerating Clutch ........................................................................................................................ 7-40

7.10.13 Developing Cylinder Clutch .................................................................................................................................................. 7-41

7.10.13.1 Before Starting the Work .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-41 7.10.13.2 Removing the Developing Cylinder Clutch.............................................................................................................................................. 7-41

7.10.14 Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly............................................................................................................................... 7-41

7.10.14.1 Removing the Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly .......................................................................................................................... 7-41

7.10.15 Pre-Transfer Exposure LED .................................................................................................................................................. 7-42

7.10.15.1 Removing the Pre-Transfer Exposure LED.............................................................................................................................................. 7-42

7.10.16 Separation Claw/Separation Claw Drive Assembly .............................................................................................................. 7-42

7.10.16.1 Separation Claw/Separation Claw Drive Assembly ................................................................................................................................. 7-42

7.10.17 Potential Sensor ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-43

7.10.17.1 Removing the Potential Sensor Unit......................................................................................................................................................... 7-43 7.10.17.2 Removing the Potential Control PCB ....................................................................................................................................................... 7-43 7.10.17.3 When Replacing the Potential Sensor/Potential Control PCB.................................................................................................................. 7-44

7.10.18 Dust-Collecting Roller ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-44

7.10.18.1 Removing the Dust-Collecting Roller ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-44

7.10.19 Charging Wire........................................................................................................................................................................ 7-45

7.10.19.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-45 7.10.19.2 Removing the Wire Cleaner for the Primary Charging Assembly ........................................................................................................... 7-45

Contents

7.10.19.3 Removing the Wire Cleaner of the Transfer Separation Charging Assembly ..........................................................................................7-45 7.10.19.4 Stringing the Charging Wire .....................................................................................................................................................................7-46 7.10.19.5 Stringing the Grid of the Primary Charging Assembly.............................................................................................................................7-46 7.10.19.6 Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire ..............................................................................................................................................7-47

Chapter 7

7.1 Construction
7.1.1 Outline
The image formation system has the following principal functions:
T-7-1 Item Description
0010-8034

Pre-exposure

LED array (64 LEDs) on/off control

Primary charging control

DC constant current control: switched over 3 settings in service mode

Grid bias control

DC constant voltage control: determined by potential control

Developing bias control

AC constant voltage control: switched over (frequencies) in service mode DC constant voltage control: determined by potential control

Dust-colleting roller bias control

DC constant voltage control: on/off control only (+1000 V)

Pre-transfer charging control

AC constant current control: fuzzy control by environment sensor DC constant voltage control: on/off control only

transfer guide bias control

DC constant voltage control: switched over according to temperature/humidity (high-humidity environment +200 V, low/normal environment +600 V)

Transfer charging control

DC constant current control: fuzzy control by environment sensor

Separation charging control

DC constant current control: fuzzy control by environment sensor and toner deposit AC constant voltage control [1] determines grid bias [2] sets optimum laser output [3] sets optimum developing bias (DC)

Potential control

Wire auto cleaning

[1] primary charging wire [2] pre-transfer charging wire

7-1

Chapter 7

7.1.2 Major Components

0010-8035

F-7-1

7.1.3 Pre-Transfer Exposure LED

The machine's processing speed is set to 500 mm/sec, thus enabling 105 prints/min (A4, 100%; iR7105). To make up for a drop in charging, the machine uses a photosensitive drum capable of a high charging efficiency and a pre-exposure lamp emitting light of a short wave length (660 mm). A high process speed can also adversely affect static separation, which would lead to poor separation if left alone, and pre-transfer exposure LED is used to ensure correct separation. Reference: Pre-Transfer Exposure Function: In the initial state of the transfer process, the machine decreases the photosensitive drum potential (background potential) in advance so as to reduce the static bonding between the photosensitive drum and the transfer medium, thus facilitating separation. Timing: 100 msec before the lead edge of the image reaches the point of activation of the pre-transfer exposure LED until the trail edge of the image moves past the point.
0010-8037

7.2 Image Formation Process

7.2.1 Overview
The machine's image formation process consists of the following 8 steps:
step 1 step 2 step 3 step 4 step 5 step 6 step 7 step 8 pre-exposure primary charging (positive DC) laser exposure development (AC + positive DC) transfer (negative DC) separation (AC + positive DC) fix drum cleaning
0011-3423

7-2

Chapter 7

Static Image Formation Block

2. Primary charging 1. Pre-exposure

3. Laser exposure

4. Development 8. Drum charging 5. Transfer Delivery 7. Fixing 6. Separation flow of paper Registration Manual feed tray

Deck/cassette

direction of drum rotation

F-7-2

7.3 Basic Sequence

7.3.1 Basic Sequence
0010-8038

ON WMUP WMUPR STBY

ON

OFF

100msec

F-7-3

7.4 Potential Control

7.4.1 Outline
The potential control system is associated with the following control items: [1] Determination of optimum grid bias (VD control) [2] Determination of optimum laser output (VL control) [3] Determination of optimum developing bias (DC; Vdc control) The following shows the construction of the control system associated with the machine's potential control:
0010-8039

7-3

Chapter 7

Laser light

Laser driver PCB

Control signal

Primary charging wire

DC controller PCB

Grid wire

Potential control

High-voltage DC PCB

DC bias

Control signal

DC bias 0V POTENTIAL_SIG POTENTIAL_ON 24 VU J502A

Developing cylinder J3 1 2 3 4

11 10 9 8

When '1', potential sensor goes on

Drum surface potential measurement value

F-7-4

7.4.2 Basics Sequence of Operations

The following shows the basic sequence of operations and timing of operations associated with the machine's control system:
Performs a series of charging operations to stabilize the drum potential. Uses the potential control mechanism that is used when the main power switch is turned on. 193 WMUP Potential stabilization sequence Potential control Optimum laser Optimum grid output determined bias determined WMUPR Potential control for transparency mode Optimum laser output determined 198 STBY
0010-8040

Drum motor(M0) Primary charging bias(DC) Grid bias Laser Developing bias(AC) Developing bias(DC)
F-7-5

Fixed value

7-4

Potential controller PCB

Dete ction

contr

ol

DC bias

Chapter 7

Starting when the fixing assembly temperature reaches 193 deg C, executes potential control every 10 min and 60 min.

After previous potential control, executes potential control every hour.

Main power switch ON

10 min later Potential control Potential for transparency Start key ON control Fixing assembly temperature (end of fixing assembly warm-up)

60 min later 1 hr later Potential control Potential control Potential control

[1] The control panel power switch is turned on. [2] The front door is opened/closed.

Start key ON
F-7-6

SERVICE MODE: - COPIER> OPTION> BODY> PO-CNT (enabling/disabling potential control) 0: potential control OFF 1: potential control ON (default) - COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> EPOTOFST (potential sensor offset value input) If the DC controller PCB has been replaced or the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been initialized, enter the value indicated on the service label. - COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VL-OFST (VL target potential offset value input) If the DC controller PCB has been replaced or the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been initialized, enter the value indicated on the service label. - COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VD-OFST (VD target potential offset value input) If the DC controller PCB has been replaced or the RAM on the DC controller has been initialized, enter the value indicated on the service label. - COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> OFST (potential sensor offset adjustment) This mode item is part of the series of procedures that must be performed when the potential sensor unit is replaced. It is not performed on its own.

7.4.3 Determining the Optimum Grid Bias

The grid bias is determined so that the drum surface potential will be identical to the target potential. (The primary charging bias is set to a fixed value.)
0010-8041

Measurements are taken multiple times to determine the relationship between the drum surface potential (VD) and the grid bias.

VD3 VD2 VD1 550V 650V 750V

Charging characteristics curve If the target VD is attained using this measurement, the control is ended; otherwise, compensatory control is 193
WMUP WMUPR

Grid bias 198

STBY Measurement(VD2) Measurement(VD1orVD3) Measurement (target VD)

Potential sensor Primary charging bias Grid bias 650 V Potential control sequence started 550 V or 750 V Vg A grid bias (Vg) needed to attain the target VD is determined.

After measuring VD2, VD1 will be measured if VD2 is greater than the target VD; if smaller, VD3 will be measured.
F-7-7

7.4.4 Grid Bias Corrective Control

If the optimum grid bias cannot be determined at the end of drum surface potential measurement, the machine starts its compensatory control sequence to determine
0010-8042

7-5

Chapter 7 the bias.

Continues to take measurements while varying the value of the grid bias so that it will be closer to the target VD. VD1 VD3 VD-NG VD2

TargetVD

When the measurement is identical to the target VD, ends the control. The machine executes measurement a maximum of 8 times, possibly using an approximate target VD. 198

193
WMUP WMUPR VD-NG VD1 VD2 VD3 VD8

STBY

Potential sensor Primary charging bias(DC) Grid bas 650 V Potential control sequence started 550 V or 750 V

Vg

Vg1 Vg2 Vg3

Vg8

Compensatory control sequence started

F-7-8

A grid bias (Vg) needed to attain the target VD is determined.

7.4.5 Determining the Optimum Laser Output

The machine determines the optimum laser output so that the drum surface potential (light area potential VL) is identical to the target potential.
0010-8043

The machine takes measurements multiple times to determine the relationship between the drum surface potential (VL) and the laser output. VL3 VL2 VL1 60% 80% 100% Laser output 195 WMUP Potential sensor WMUPR Measurement(VL2) Measurement(VL1orVL3) Measurement (target VL) If this measurement brings about the target VL, ends the control; otherwise, starts compensatory control.

198 STBY

Developing bias(DC) Laser 80% Turn on the lamp at 80% of the reference output determined at time of shipment. After measuring VL2, measures VL3 if VL2 is grater than the target VL; if smaller, measures VL1.
F-7-9

60% or 100%

Pw Determines the laser output (P) needed to attain the target VL.

7.4.6 Laser Output Corrective Control

If the optimum laser output cannot be determined after measuring the drum surface potential, the machine starts its compensatory control sequence to determine the optimum laser output.
0010-8044

7-6

Chapter 7

Continues to take measurements while varying the laser output so that it will approach VL1 Target VL VL-NG VL3 If the measurement is identical to the target VL, ends control; executes measurement a maximum of 8 times, possibly using an approximate value of the target VL. 198 WMUPR VL-NG VL1 VL2 VL3 VL8 STBY

VL2

193 WMUP Potential sensor

Developing bias(DC) Laser 80% 60% or 100% Pw Pw1 Pw2 Pw3 Pw8 Determines a laser output needed to attain the target VL.

Compensatory control sequence started

F-7-10

7.4.7 Determining the Optimum Developing Bias

The machine uses the optimum drum surface potential (VD) to compute the optimum developing bias (Vdc).
0010-8045

7-7

Chapter 7

Potential sensor

Vg VD Vdc

Photosensitive drum The machine uses this VD to compute Vdc. Vdc = VD - Vback(130V) Developing cylinder

193 WMUP VD Potential sensor Optimum grid bias determined Laser Pw Grid bias Vg Selected potential Optimum laser output determined WMUPR VL

198 STBY

Vg

Pw

Vdc

Potential control sequence started

F-7-11

7.4.8 Potential Control for Transparency Mode

To prevent detachment of toner in high-density areas of a transparency print, the machine decreases the contrast to reduce the toner deposit. To that end, the machine executes potential control for transparency mode, thus determining the target value for transparency mode.
0010-8046

7-8

Chapter 7

Vdc VD VL correction value correction value correction value -130V -40V -110V

Uses the target VLohp for transparency mode to execute potential control sequence.

Potential control sequence started 193 WMUP VD Potential sensor WMUPR VL

Potential control for transparency mode started 198 STBY VLohp

Laser Vg Grid bias Vg Selected potential Vdc

F-7-12

Laser power for transparency mode determined Pw Pwohp

Pw

Pwohp

SERVICE MODE: - COPIER> OPTION> BODY> OHP-CNT (enabling/disabling potential control for transparency mode) 1: uses the target value obtained as a result of potential control for transparency mode executed at time of transparency mode operation. (default) 0: does not execute potential control for transparency mode.

Set

Main power switch OFF/ON

Potential control sequence started Transparency mode potential control

COPIER > OPTION > BODY > OHP-CNT

F-7-13

7.4.9 Target Potential Correction in Each Mode

For the following, the machine corrects the laser power/developing bias determined as part of potential control, using the result as the target value for the individual modes:
T-7-2 Purpose Correction
0010-8048

Density adjustment during printing To enable reproduction of fine lines suited to the needs of the user Corrects the laser power/developing bias to suit the F value (PDL input) (PDF data from a PC). setting.

Density adjustment during printing To enable a specific level of density suited to the needs of the (scanner input) user.

Corrects the laser power/developing bias to suit the F value setting

1. Adjusting the Density during Printing (PDL input)

7-9

Chapter 7

F value Lighter Increases the laser power (i.e., increasing the contrast) to enable reproduction of fine lines, each as wide as the diameter of a single toner particle. 1 2 3 4 5 Density 6 7 8 9

Laser power correction value 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.2

Vdc correction value

VD correction value

+20V +40V The laser power reaches the upper limit, causing the machine to correct the developing bias and to increase the contrast.

Darker Corrects the laser power/developing bias to suit the F value setting.

193
WMUP

Potential control sequence started

WMUPR

198
STBY

VD Potential sensor

VL

Laser Vg Grid bias Selected potential Vg Pw Vdc

F-7-14

Pw

SERVICE MODE: - COPIER> OPTION> BODY> CNT-W/PR (enabling/disabling density variable mode during printing) 0: corrects the target value to permit variation of density during printing. (default) 1: does not permit variation of density during printing.

Set

Main power switch OFF/ON Potential control Printing started

A laser power output Vdc suited to the F value setting is used. F value changed

COPIER > OPTION > BODY > CNT-W/PR

F-7-15

2. Adjustment of Density During Printing (scanner input)

7-10

Chapter 7

F value Lighter 1 3

Laser power correction 0.8

Vdc correction value -20V

1.0 Density 5 7 Darker 9 1.2 1.2 +40V

Corrects the laser power/Vdc to suit the F value setting. Potential control sequence started WMUPR VD Potential sensor VL

193 WMUP

198 STBY

Laser Vg Grid bias Vg Selected potential Vdc

F-7-16

Pw

Pw

7.5 Charging Mechanism

7.5.1 Primary Charging Mechanism 7.5.1.1 Outline
The primary charging mechanism is controlled for the following: [1] primary charging bias constant current control [2] grid bias constant voltage control The following shows the construction of the system that relates to primary charging control:
0010-8049

7-11

Chapter 7

The primary charging bias varies as follows in keeping with the potential of PR-CNT:
Primary charging bias

1600 800

A A

If the current is too high or too low, '0'. When '1', high-voltage output is ready.

Relay PCB
24 VH 24 VH GND GND

1 2 3 4 J723 18 1 2 0 V 17 16 3 HVDC_REMOTE 15 4 PRIMARY_CNT 14 5 PRIMARY_ERR 13 6 GRID-CNT 12 7 11 8 10 9 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J510A

J721

11V 12V 3V PR-CNT

Primary charging wire T601 Grid wire

DC controller PCB

High-voltage DC PCB

J731

The grid bias varies as follows in keeping with the potential of GRD-CNT: 900V
Grid bias

300V

3V 11V 12V GRD-CNT

Voltage input (between 0 and 12 V). Uses this voltage to control the current value of the primary charging bias.

Voltage input (between 0 and 12 V). Uses this voltage to control the voltage value of the grid bias.
F-7-17

7-12

Chapter 7

7.5.1.2 Primary Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism

0010-8051

When '1', the wire cleaner moves toward the front. J502A 1 When '1', the wire cleaner moves toward the rear. PRIMARY_W.C_FW PRIMARY_W.C_BK

DC controller PCB

6 7

11 Wire

rea

rd

ire

ctio

fro

nt

dir

ec

tio

Primary charging wire cleaning motor M8

Wire cleaner

Primary charging assembly

F-7-18

Reference: Timing of Cleaning Operation [1] when wire cleaning is executed in user mode. [2] at the end of LSTR after making 6000 prints since previous wire cleaning.

7.5.1.3 Others
0010-8052

SERVICE MODE: - COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> GRID (grid bias output adjustment input) If the DC controller PCB has been replaced or the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been initialized, enter the value indicated on the service label. ERROR CODE: - E065 (primary charging output error) Indicates that over-current has been detected (PRIMARY_ERR=1) because of leakage.

7.5.2 Dust-Collecting Roller Bias 7.5.2.1 Outline

The following is associated with the dust-colleting roller bias control system: [1] enabling/disabling the dust-collecting roller bias The following shows the construction of the control system that relates to the dust-collecting roller bias:
0010-8053

7-13

Chapter 7

Relay PCB When '1', high-voltage output is ready.

24 VH 24 VH GND GND

J721

J510A 1 2 3 4 5
DC controller PCB

1 2 3 4 J723 0V 18 17 16 15 14
High-voltage PCB

J732 1 2 3 DC 285V

HVDC-REMOTE

6 7 8 9 10 When '1', the dust-collecting 11 roller bias goes on. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Dust-collecting roller

F-7-19

7.5.3 Pre-Transfer Charging Mechanism 7.5.3.1 Outline

The following items are associated with the pre-transfer charging control system: [1] DC bias constant current control [2] AC bias constant voltage control [3] output control suited to environment (fuzzy control) The following shows the components related to the pre-transfer charging control system:
0010-8054

7-14

Chapter 7

The current value of the pre-transfer bias varies as follows according to the potential of PTDC-CNT: 300 A

Relay PCB
24 VH 24 VH GND GND

When '1', high-voltage DC output is ready.

3V 11V 12V POST_DC_CNT Pre-transfer charging wire

J721

J510A 1 2 3 HVDC_REMOTE 4 5
DC controller PCB

J723 18 17 0V 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

1 2 3 4

High-voltage PCB

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

When '1', the high-voltage AC output is ready.

5 4 3 2 1

J734

HVAC_ON POST_DC_CNTR POST/SEP_ERR

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

High-Voltage AC transformer

1 1 HVAC_ON 2 2 24VP 3 3 GND 4 4 5 GND 5 J741 J722

High-Voltage AC PCB

AC+DC

J742

If the current is too high or too low, '1'.

When '1', high-voltage AC output is ON.

AC output: 7.0 to 9.0 kVpp

Voltage input of between 0 and 12 V. Uses this voltage to control the current value of the pre-transfer bias.
F-7-20

7.5.3.2 Controlling the Output to Suit the Environment (fuzzy control)

The pre-transfer charging current is optimized to suit the environment (as determined based on the readings of the environment sensor).
165 A
0010-8055

Low humidity
F-7-21

Pre-transfer current( A)

High humidity

Related Service Mode Item: - COPIER> OPTION> BODY> FUZZY (enabling/disabling fuzzy control) 0: enables fuzzy control (default) 1: low humidity environment mode (pre-transfer charging current is lower than standard)

7-15

Chapter 7 2: normal humidity environment mode 3: high humidity environment mode (pre-transfer charging current is higher than standard) If set to '1' through '3', the control will be free of the readings of the environment sensor.

7.5.3.3 Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism

0010-8056

When '1', the wire cleaner moves toward the front.

J504A 1 2 1

DC controller PCB

3 4 POST_W.C_FW POST_W.C_BK

9 10

14

When '1', the wire cleaner moves toward the rear.

rea

rd

ire

ctio

fro

nt

dir

ec

tio

Wire

Pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor(M7)

Wire cleaner

Pre-transfer charging assembly

F-7-22

Reference: Timing of Cleaning [1] if the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 100 deg C or less when the control panel power switch is turned on. [2] when wire cleaning is executed in user mode. [3] at the end of LSTR after making 2000 prints since previous wire cleaning

7.5.3.4 Others
0010-8058

SERVICE MODE: - COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> PRE-TR (pre-transfer charging current output adjustment value input) If the DC controller PCB has been replaced or the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been initialized, enter the value indicated on the service label. ERROR CODE: - E068 (pre-transfer charging output error) The presence of over-current has been detected (POST/SEP_ERR=1), possibly caused by leakage.

7.6 Drum Cleaner Unit

7.6.1 Outline
The following shows the components of the machine's drum cleaner unit:
0010-8059

7-16

Chapter 7

Blade vibration unit

Pre-exposure lamp

Cleaning Blade

Magnet roller

Waste toner feeding screw Separation claw

M1 Main motor
F-7-23

The presence of a cake of toner on the cleaning blade inside the cleaner unit is likely to prevent normal cleaning of the drum, and the machine uses 2 blade vibration units to prevent adhesion of toner. When these units vibrate, the entire blade will vibrate to shake off the toner, thereby eliminating cleaning faults otherwise caused by cakes of toner.
Cleaning Blade

Toner

Blade vibration unit Blade vibration unit

F-7-24

The blade vibration unit is driven for the following: - after initial multiple rotation imitated by turning on the main power (5 or 1 vibration) - at time of STOP sequence (1 vibration) - during wire cleaning associated with pre-transfer, transfer, and separation (1 vibration) 1 vibration: ON for 0.6 sec 5 vibrations: ON for 0.6 sec, OFF for 0.3 sec SERVICE MODE: You can check the activation of the blade vibration unit in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK>MTR.

7.6.2 Detecting the Waste Toner (case full condition)

The following shows the construction of the control system associated with the detection of the state of the waste toner bottle (full):
0010-8060

7-17

Chapter 7

1 J514B 2 0V 3 MAIN_MOTOR_FG 4 MAIN_MOTOR_ON 5 5V 6 0V 7

M1

Main motor

14 Waste toner lock sensor(MSW2)

(front)

DC controller PCB

WASTE_TONER_OVER_PS

1 2 3

J514A 0V 5V

14

Waste toner bottle The bottle grows heavier as more and more waste toner collect, causing the waste toner bottle full sensor to detect the flag. 1 J512B 0V Waste toner bottle full sensor(PS19)

14 15

WASTE_TONER_PACKED_DTC
F-7-25

ERROR CODE: - E013 (waste toner lock) The waste toner lock sensor (MSW2) remains ON for 4 sec or more. - E019 (waste toner bottle full) After the waste toner bottle has been identified as being full (by PS19), 50,000 prints or more have been made.

7.7 Developing Assembly

7.7.1 Outline
The following shows the components associated with the machine's developing assembly:
0010-8061

7-18

Chapter 7

Toner bottle

Toner bottle rotation motor Sub hopper toner sensor(TS4) M22 Sub hopper motor Sub hopper transport clutch CL23 Buffer unit Developing assembly toner sensor(TS3) Developing cylinder Developing cylinder clutch Buffer toner sensor(TS1) M23 Sub hopper

Buffer toner lower limit sensor(TS2) CL1

M1 Main motor

CL4 magnet roller

Magnet roller drive clutch

M18 Buffer motor

CL20 Developing cylinder deceleration clutch

Moves the toner from the buffer to the developing assembly

F-7-26

7.7.2 Controlling the Developing Assembly

The following shows the construction of the control system associated with the developing assembly drive mechanism:
0010-8062

7-19

Chapter 7

J516B

J302 Environment sensor PCB

When '0', the clutch goes on J504B 14 BUFFER_MOTOR(-) 13 BUFFER_MOTOR(+) M18 12 11 8 7 1 J512A 1 BUFFER_CL 24VU CL1

Buffer motor

Toner feedscrew Magnet roller drive clutch When '0', the clutch goes on

DC controller

Developing cylinder DEV1_SLEEVE_CL_Vcc 11 12 DEV1_SLEEVE_CL_ON 13 Developing 14 cylinder clutch 15 Main motor J514B 1 2 0V 3 MAIN_MOTOR_FG 4 MAIN_MOTOR_ON 5 5V 6 0V 7 14 J516B 1 2 3 4 DEV_SLEEVE2_CL_Vcc 11 DEV_SLEEVE2_CL_ON 12 M1 CL4

Magnet roller

Toner stirring screw

CL20 Developing cylinder deceleration clutch

F-7-27

7.7.3 Controlling the Toner Cartridge Drive Mechanism

The following shows the construction of the control system associated with the toner cartridge drive mechanism:
0010-8063

7-20

Chapter 7

Toner bottle

Sub hopper motor M22

Sub hopper toner sensor TS4

Toner bottle rotation motor M23 Toner bottle motor drive switch MSW8 The power to the motor is cut while the door remains open. Toner bottle sensor PS67

Sub hopper transport clutch CL23

Sub hopper

Toner bottle cover open/closed sensor PS59

BUFFER_MOTOR + BUFFER_MOTOR KAKUHAN_CL 24V

BOTTLE_MOTOR + BOTTLE_MOTOR 0V

When the toner bottle cover is closed, '1'.

0V

CARTRIDGE_DETECT

CARTRIDGE_OPEN

When the toner bottle is in place, '0'.

5V

J511A 1 2 3 4 5 17 DC controller PCB

F-7-28

5V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J512B 15

7.7.4 Controlling the Developing Bias

The following items are associated with the developing bias control system: [1] DC bias constant voltage control [2] AC bias constant voltage control
0010-8065

7-21

Chapter 7

Relay PCB

24 VH 24 VH GND GND

When '1', high-voltage output is ready.

AC output: 1200 Vpp

High-voltage DC PCB

DC controller PCB

1 2 3 4 J510A J723 J721 1 18 2 17 0V 3 16 HVDC_REMOTE 15 4 14 5 13 6 7 12 11 8 10 9 DEV_AC_ON 9 10 11 DEV_DC_CNTR 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J732

Developing cylinder

The developing DC bias varies as follows according to the potential of DEV_DC_CNTR:

Developing DC bias

500V Image area Non-image area 3V 11V 12V DEV_DC_CNTR

Voltage input between 0 and 12 V, used to control the voltage level of the developing DC bias.

When '1', the developing AC bias is generated.

F-7-29

7.7.5 Detecting the Toner Level and Controlling the Toner Supply Mechanism
The following shows the components associated with the machine's toner supply control system:
Toner bottle Sub hopper toner sensor (TS4) Purpose: to keep the toner inside the sub hopper to a specific level. Operation: upon detection of the absence of toner, the machine rotates the toner feedscrew inside the sub hopper to supply toner to the buffer.
0010-8067

Toner sensor

TS1;inside the buffer Sub hopper

Purpose: To keep the toner inside the hopper to a specific level. Operation: If the absence of toner is detected, the toner feeding screw inside the sub hopper is rotated to supply the buffer with toner.

Buffer toner lower limit sensor

TS2

Magnet roller Developing assembly toner sensor TS3 Purpose: to keep the toner inside the developing assembly to a specific level. Operation: upon detection of the absence of toner, the machine rotates the magnet roller to supply toner to the developing assembly.
F-7-30

Purpose: to detect the absence of toner inside the buffer. Operation: upon detection of the absence of toner, the machine stops the ongoing operation, and indicates a message to that effect.

7-22

Chapter 7

J511B 1 5V TS-SNS 0V

When the absence of toner is detected, '0'.

15 16 17

TS4

DC controller PCB

J504B 1 2

5V BUFFER_WARNING

3 4
5

0V
5V

TS1
2 TS

BUFFER_NG
0V
3 TS

6 9 10 11
15

5V
DEVELOP_TS 0V

F-7-31

The following is an outline of the sequence of operations used by the machine to supply toner:

As many as about 1000 prints may be made

At TS4 time-out, indicates a message to the effect that a new supply of toner must be made available. Printing may continue. The machine remains ready to operate.

At TS1 time-out, indicates a message to the effect that a new supply of toner must be added. The machine stops operation.

A new supply of toner has been added (i.e., the bottle has been replaced with a full bottle).

The machine resumes operation, supplying toner as it makes prints.

F-7-32

The following shows the sequence of operations used to supply toner from the buffer to the developing assembly:

7-23

Chapter 7

If the toner supply sequence is not finished at the end of machine operation, the sequence will be resumed during the next operation. If a toner absent condition is identified for 0.3 sec or more, the toner supply sequence is started.

If a toner present condition is detected for 0.7 sec or more, the toner supply sequence is ended.

Toner supply sequence started

Toner supply STBY

Developing assembly toner sensor

2 sec 0.3 sec

Magnet roller Supply Supply Supply

If continuously supplied, overflow will be a possibility with the stop not taking place in time.

If a toner absent condition is detected for 20 sec or more, indicates error code E020.
F-7-33

The following shows the sequence used to supply toner from the sub hopper to the buffer:
If the toner supply operation is not finished at the end of machine operation, the operation will be continued until the sequence is over. If a toner absent condition is detected for 0.5 sec or more, the toner supply sequence will be started. If a toner present condition is detected for 0.5 sec or more, the toner supply sequence will be ended. Toner supply sequence started
Toner supply STBY

90 sec

Buffer toner sensor

60 sec

Buffer toner lower limit sensor Sub hopper feedscrew

Supply

If a toner absent condition is detected for 60 sec or more with the sub hopper toner sensor detecting a toner absent condition for 90 sec or more in continuous printing mode, a message will appear on the touch panel to indicate the absence of toner, and the machine will stop operation.
F-7-34

If a toner absent condition is detected for 60 sec or more when image output is started immediately after replenishment of the toner bottle, a message will be indicated on the touch panel for a supply of toner, and the machine operation will be stopped.

The machine uses the following sequence of operations to move toner from the toner bottle to the sub hopper:

7-24

Chapter 7

If the toner supply sequence is not finished at the end of the machine operation, the sequence will be continued until its end. If a toner absent condition is detected for 0.5 sec or more, the motor supply sequence is started. If a toner present condition is detected for 1.5 sec or more, the toner supply sequence will be ended.

Toner supply sequence started Toner supply

STBY

90 sec Sub hopper toner sensor

Toner bottle Supply If the sub hopper toner sensor detects a toner absent condition for 90 sec while continuous printing is under way, a message will be indicated on the touch panel to encourage replacement of the toner bottle. The machine remains ready for operation.
F-7-35

ERROR CODE: - E020 0001 (Absence of toner in the developer) The developer toner sensor (TS3) detects the absence of toner for more than 120 seconds although toner has been supplied to the developer. 0002 (Failure in feeding toner from the sub hopper to the buffer) The buffer toner sensor (TS1) detects the absence of toner for more than 60 seconds and toner exists in the sub hopper although toner has been supplied to the buffer. 0003 (Failure in feeding toner from the sub hopper to the buffer) The buffer toner sensor (TS1) detects the absence of toner for more than 210 seconds and toner exists in the sub hopper although toner has been supplied to the buffer after the toner bottle was replaced. 0004 (Failure in feeding toner from the sub hopper to the buffer) The buffer toner sensor (TS2) detects the absence of toner for more than 150 seconds and toner exists in the sub hopper although toner has been supplied to the buffer after the toner bottle was replaced. 0005 (Absence of toner in the developer at installation) The developer toner sensor (TS3) detects the absence of toner for more than 600 seconds at installation. 0006 (Absence of toner in the developer at installation) The developer toner sensor (TS3) detects the absence of toner for more than 600 seconds after the sensor detected the presence of toner at installation. 0007 (Absence of toner in the buffer at installation) The buffer toner sensor (TS1) detects the absence of toner for more than 60 seconds at installation. 0008 (Failure in the toner feeder motor) When the toner feeder motor drives, a failure in the motor is detected for more than 3 seconds. 0009 (Failure in the buffer motor) When the buffer motor drives, a failure in the motor is detected for more than 3 seconds. 0010 (Required to clear the E020 error) The power was turned OFF/ON without the error being cleared.

7.8 Transfer Mechanism

7.8.1 Transfer Guide Bias 7.8.1.1 Overview
The machine applies a bias whose polarity is the same as that of the toner to the transfer guide to prevent soiling of the surface of the transfer guide with toner (if left alone, the toner will soil the back of paper). The following items are associated with the system used to control the charging of the transfer guide: [1] transfer guide bias constant voltage control [2] output control to suit the environment The following shows the components associated with the machine's transfer guide charging control system:
0010-8068

7-25

Chapter 7

Relay PCB
24 VH 24 VH GND GND

When '1', high-voltage output is ready.

J721

J510A
1 2 3 4 5 6
HVDC_REMOTE

J723
18 17
0V

1 2 3 4

16 15 14 13 12 11

7 8

10 9 10 When '1', the transfer 9 11 guide bias goes on. 12 13 14 15 16 17 FEEDER_GUIDE_ON 18 FEEDER_GUIDE_CNTR 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

High-voltage DC PCB

DC controller PCB

J733
1 2 3

DC 600V/200V

Transfer guide

"1": +200V "0": +600V

F-7-36

7.8.1.2 Controlling the Output to Suit the Environment

The transfer guide bias is optimized to suit the environment (identified with reference to the data from the environment sensor).
A bias of the same polarity as the toner is applied in sync with the rotation of the photosensitive drum. The photosensitive drum is rotating; yet, paper is not being fed. Normally, +600 V is applied to prevent adhesion of toner to the transfer guide. Transfer guide bias Paper passing Normal/low humidity High humidity +600 +200 Paper being fed +600 +600
0010-8069

In a high humidity environment, paper tends to absorb moisture (lower resistance), charging the paper in excess to affect transfer (faulty transfer); as such, the output is decreased.
F-7-37

SERVICE MODE: - COPIER> OPTION> BODY> TRNSG-SW (transfer guide bias control mode switchover) 0: switches to +200 V in a high-humidity environment (default) 1: fix the transfer guide bias to +600 V 2: fix the transfer guide bias to +200 V 3: switches to +200 V in a normal humidity condition 4: switches to +200 V in a low humidity condition Set it to '2' through '4' if a transfer fault is noted.

7.8.2 Transfer Charging Mechanism 7.8.2.1 Outline

The following items are associated with the machine's transfer charging control system: [1] DC bias constant current control [2] output control to suit the environment (fuzzy control) [3] output control at the trail edge of paper
0010-8070

7-26

Chapter 7 The following shows the components associated with the transfer charging control system:
Relay PCB When '1', high-voltage output is ready. J510A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
24 VH 24 VH GND GND

J721

J723
18 17

1 2 3 4

0V HVDC_REMOTE

16 15 14 12 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13

TRANSFER_CNTR

TRANSFER_ERR 10

High-voltage DC PCB

DC controller PCB

T701 Transfer charging wire

The transfer current varies according to the potential of TRANSFER_CNTR: TRANSFER_CNTR

3V 11V 12V

Voltage input between 0 and 12 V, used to control the transfer current output.

When the current is too high or too low, '1'.

F-7-38

-590 A

7.8.2.2 Controlling the Output to Suit the Environment (fuzzy control)

The transfer current output is optimized to suit the environment (data for the environment sensor).
0010-8071

590 A

Low humidity
F-7-39

Transfer current(

A)

High humidity

SERVICE MODE: - COPIER> OPTION> BODY> FUZZY (enabling/disabling fuzzy control) 0: enables fuzzy control (default) 1: low humidity environment mode (the transfer current is lower than standard) 2: normal humidity environment mode 3: humidity environment mode (the transfer current is higher than standard) If set to '1' through '3', the control will be independent of the environment sensor.

7.8.2.3 Correcting the Output at the Trailing Edge of Paper

When copy paper moves in contact with the transfer charging assembly, the resistance of the assembly drops abruptly as soon as the paper leaves, possibly permitting discharge current to flow momentarily, causing transfer faults or image smears along the trail edge of the image. The machine is designed to correct (decrease) the transfer current to prevent these faults.
0010-8072

Transfer current

7-27

Chapter 7

The output of the transfer current is varied over a width of 20 mm along the trailing edge of paper.

20 mm

Paper Feeding direction

F-7-40
When making a double-sided print, paper will absorb fixing oil and tend to collect less charges (low resistance); since the discharge current along the trailing edge of paper will be low, the output is not varied. In a low humidity environment, paper tends to dry up collecting excess charges (high resistance); to counter, the output is reduced. Transfer current correction (A) Single-sided printing Low humidity Normal humidity High humidity +220 +150 Double-sided printing

F-7-41

SERVICE MODE: - COPIER> OPTION> BODY> TRSW-P-B (enabling/disabling transfer current output correction control) 1: does not vary the transfer current value (default) (transfer faults occurring along the trail edge of paper) 0: corrects the transfer current value along the trail edge of paper

7-28

Chapter 7

7.8.2.4 Transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism

0010-8074

Wire Wire cleaner Transfer charging assembly

DC controller PCB

Separation charging assembly

rea

rd

ire

ctio

Transfer/separation charging wire cleaning motor(M9)

fro

nt

dir

ec

tio

1 J509B

4 5

T/S_W.C_OUT1 T/S_W.C_OUT2

13 When '1', the wire cleaner moves toward the front.

When '1', the wire cleaner moves toward the rear.

F-7-42

Reference: Timing of Cleaning [1] the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 100 deg C or lower when the control panel power switch is turned on [2] when wire cleaning is executed in user mode [3] at the end of LSTR after making 2000 prints since previous wire cleaning

7.8.2.5 Others
0010-8075

SERVICE MODE: - COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-N1 (output adjustment for plain paper simplexing or for 1st side of duplexing) If the DC controller PCB has been replaced or the RAM on the DC controller PCB has been initialized, enter the value indicated on the service label. - COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-N2 (output adjustment for 2nd side of plain paper duplexing) If the DC controller PCB has been replaced or the RAM to the DC controller PCB has been initialized, enter the value indicated on the service label. ERROR CODE: - E069 (transfer charging output error) The presence of over-current (TRERR=1) is detected, as caused by leakage.

7.9 Separation Mechanism

7.9.1 Separation Charging Mechanism 7.9.1.1 Outline
The following items are associated with the machine's separation charging control system: [1] DC bias constant current control [2] AC bias constant voltage control [3] output correction to suit the environment and deposit of toner (fuzzy control) [4] output correction after detection of leakage The following shows the components associated with the machine's separation charging control system:
0010-8076

7-29

Chapter 7

The current level of the DC bias varies as follows according to SEP_DC_CNTR:

520 A

Relay PCB
24 VH 24 VH GND GND
3V 11V 12V

When'1', high-voltage DC output is ready.

J723

SEP_DC_CNT
J721

1 2 3 4
J510A 1 2 3 4 5 18

0V
HVDC_REMOTE

17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Separation charging wire

High-voltage DC PCB

DC controller PCB

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 POST/SEP_ERR SEP_AC_CNTR When '1', high-voltage A C output is ready.

HVAC_ON
SEP_DC_CNTR

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

High-voltage AC transformer
3V

1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

J734

AC+DC

HVAC_ON 24VP GND GND J722

1 2 3 4 5

High-voltage AC PCB

HVAC_CNT

J742

J741

If the current is too high or too low, '1'.

When '1', high-voltage AC output goes on.

The voltage level of the AC bias varies as f ollows according to the potential of HVAC-CNT:
12KVPP

Voltage input between 0 and 12 V, used to control the current level of the separation bias.

8KVPP

11V 12V

HVAC-CNT
F-7-43

7.9.1.2 Correcting the Output to Suit the Environment and the Toner Deposit
The separation current output in optimized according to the environment (as identified based on the data from the environment sensor) and the deposit of toner (3 levels: low, standard, high).
In a low humidity environment, the paper tends to be dry, encouraging charges to collect (high resistance). The machine decreases the output.
Separation current ( A)
0010-8077

If the deposit of toner is limited, the machine increases the output to prevent separation faults.

toner deposit low toner deposit standard toner deposit high

Low humidity

High humidity If the deposit of toner is too great, the machine decreases the current level to prevent re-transfer.
F-7-44

SERVICE MODE:

7-30

Chapter 7 - COPIER> OPTION> BODY> FUZZY (enabling/disabling fuzzy control) 0: enables fuzzy control (default) 1: low humidity mode (the separation current is lower that standard) 2: normal humidity mode 3: high humidity environment mode (the separation current is higher than standard) If set to '1' thorough '3', the control will be independent of the environment sensor.

7.9.1.3 Correcting the Output upon Detection of Leakage

If leakage is detected, the separation output will be supplied at a lowered output level.
0010-8078

Low voltage mode E068 indication Main power switchOFF/ON 9.0 kvpp 8.5 kvpp

10.0 kvpp

8.5 kvpp

NG

Setting

If leakage current is detected, a retry is made with a lowered output level.

Leakage current is detected, and a retry is made with a lowered output level.

COPIER > OPTION > BODY > SP-MODE

F-7-45

SERVICE MODE: - COPIER> OPTION> BODY> SP-MODE (enabling/disabling separation current output correction control) 0: standard mode (AC output is 10.0 kVpp, default) 1: low voltage mode (AC output is 9.0 kVpp; if error is frequent because of leakage)

7.9.1.4 Others
0010-8079

SERVICE MODE: - CODIER> ADJUST> HV-SP> SP-N1 (output adjustment for plain paper simplexing or 1st side of duplexing) If the DC controller PCB has been replaced or the RAM on the DC controller has been initialized, enter the value indicated on the service label. - CODIER> ADJUST> HV-SP> SP-N2 (output adjustment for 2nd side of plain paper duplexing) If the DC controller PCB has been replaced or the RAM on the DC controller has been initialized, enter the value indicated on the service label.

7-31

Chapter 7

7.10 Parts Replacement Procedure

7.10.1 Process Unit 7.10.1.1 Before Starting the Work
1) Remove the manual feeder pull-off roller unit. 2) Remove the developing assembly. 3) Remove the primary charging assembly cover. 4) Remove the process unit cover. 5) Remove the upper inside cover. 6) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 7) Remove the waste toner cover (lower rear right); then, detach the drum protective sheet, and place it on the fixing/feeding unit. 8) If a double-feeding detection PCB (transmitting) [3] is found, disconnect the 2 connectors [1] and remove the screw [2], and open the PCB in the direction of the arrow.
[2] [3]
0011-7911

[5]

[4]

[6]

[4]

[4]

[1]

[2]
F-7-48

[3]

4) Slide out the process unit [1] fully; then, slide out the grip [2] on the right side. 5) Hold the grip [2] on the right and the grip [3] on the left, and detach the unit in upward direction.
[3] [1] [2]

[1]
F-7-46

9) Disconnect the connector [1], and release the stop lever [2] to detach the primary charging assembly [3]. 10) Disconnect the connector [4], and release the stopper lever [5] to detach the pre-transfer charging assembly [6].
[3] [1]

F-7-49

When placing the removed process unit, be sure to turn the kit support plate [1] in counterclockwise direction to create space between the drum surface and the floor.

[4]

[2]
F-7-47

[6]

[5]

7.10.1.2 Removing the Process Unit

1) While keeping the drum in place using the drum stop tool [1] found behind the compartment cover (front cover), remove the drum fixing roll [3]. 2) Remove the drum stop tool [1]. 3) Remove the 3 screws [4], and disconnect the connector [5]; then, slide out the process unit [6].
0010-8808

[1]
F-7-50

7.10.1.3 Mounting the Process Unit

Keep the following in mind when mounting the process unit [1] to the slide rail: 1) Be sure to match the notch [2] found at the tip of the left slide rail against the front plate [3] of the process unit. 2) Be sure to match the bend [4] at the front of the right slide rail against the front plate [3] of the process unit. 2) Be sure to match the bend [4] at the front of the right slide rail against the front plate [3] of the process unit.
0010-8812

7-32

Chapter 7

[2]

[1]

[1]

F-7-53

[5]
[3]
F-7-54

[2] [3]
F-7-51

[4]

7.10.3 Primary Charging Assembly 7.10.3.1 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly
1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the primary charging assembly over [1]. - 1 screw [2]
[1] [2]
0010-8821

Waste toner can drop on the duplex unit when the process unit is removed. After mounting the process unit. be sure to slide out the duplex unit and remove the waste toner.

7.10.2 Pre-Exposure Lamp 7.10.2.1 Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit

1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the process unit.
0010-8819

Cover the drum with A3 paper or the like when you have slid out the process unit. 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the two screws [2]; then, detach the preexposure unit [3].
F-7-55

[2]

3) Disconnect the connector [1]; then, while turning the stop lever [2] in the direction of the arrow, slide out the primary charging assembly [3].
[1]

[1]
F-7-52

[3]

4) Remove the three screws [1], and detach the pre-exposure holder [2]; then, detach the pre-exposure lamp [3].

[2]
F-7-56

[3]

7.10.4 Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly 7.10.4.1 Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly
1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the primary charging assembly cover [1]. - 1 screw [2]
0010-8823

7-33

Chapter 7

[1]

[2]

The foregoing rules equally apply to all types of photosensitive drums.

7.10.5.2 Removing the Photosensitive Drum

1) Remove the developing fan. 2) Slide out the process unit. 3) Remove the 3 screws [1], and disconnect the 2 connectors [2]; then, detach the sub plate assembly [3].
[1] [1]
0010-8826

[2]
F-7-57

3) Remove the process unit cover. 4) If a double-feeding detection PCB (transmitting) [3] is found, disconnect the 2 connectors [1] and remove the screw [2]; then, open the PCB in the direction of the arrow.
[2] [3]
F-7-60

[3]

[2]

4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the positioner holder [2].

[2]

[1]
F-7-58

[1]
F-7-61

5) Disconnect the connector [1]; then, while turning the stop lever [2] in the direction of the arrow, slide out the pre-transfer charging assembly [3].

5) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the drum fixing plate [2].
[1] [1]

[3]

[1]
F-7-59

[2]

[1]
F-7-62

[2]

6) Remove the screw [1], and detach the bearing stopper [2]; then, shift the photosensitive drum [3] to the front (in the direction of the arrow) to lift.

7.10.5 Photosensitive Drum 7.10.5.1 Points to Note About Handling the Photosensitive Drum
The machine's photosensitive drum is a high-sensitivity amorphous silicon drum, whose sensitivity tends to deteriorate if not handled properly. Be sure to observe the following whenever handling the process unit or the photosensitive drum: 1. If you have removed the process unit, be sure to protect the photosensitive drum against light by covering it with its protective sheet or wrapping it with 6 or more sheets of A3 paper. 2. Do not place the process unit or the photosensitive drum near a window or an area subject to direct rays of the sun. 3. Do not store the process unit or the photosensitive drum in a place subject to high/low temperature/humidity to a rapid change in these environmental conditions. 4. Do not store the process unit or the photosensitive drum in a place subject to dust, ammonium gas, or organic solvent gas.
0010-8824

7-34

Chapter 7

[3]

[2]

[1]

[1] [3]
F-7-66

[1]

[2]
F-7-63

4) Remove the E-ring [1], and detach the pressure plate [2] to detach the cleaning blade assembly [3].
[1] [2] [3]

7.10.6 Drum Cleaner Unit 7.10.6.1 Construction

0010-8829

Cleaning blade

F-7-67

Blade vibration unit Separation claw

F-7-64

The pressure plate looks like the one used for the GP600 Sires or iR8500 Series machines; however, it is a different part with a different parts number. Do not use the wrong part. 5) Remove the blade vibration unit from the cleaner blade unit. 6) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the blade retaining plate [2] to detach the cleaning blade [3].
0010-8830

7.10.6.2 Removing the Cleaning Blade

1) Slide out the process unit. 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the reciprocating arm [2].
[1]

[1]

[3]

[2]
F-7-68

7.10.6.3 Mounting the Cleaning Blade

See "Maintenance and Inspection".
0010-8832

7.10.6.4 Removing the Blade Vibrating Unit

1) Remove the blade unit. 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the blade vibrating unit [3]. (The rear and front blade vibrating units may be disassembled in the same way.)
0010-8833

[2]
F-7-65

3) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 5 screws [2]; then, lift the rear and push it in to detach the cleaning blade together with the mounting plate [3].

7-35

Chapter 7

[2]
[1]

([3]) [1]
F-7-69

[3]

7.10.7 Photosensitive Drum Heater 7.10.7.1 Replacing the Photosensitive Drum Heater
1) Remove the photosensitive drum from the main body. 2) Remove the two mounting screws [1], and detach the flange [2] at the front; then, disconnect the connector [3].
[1]
F-7-72
0010-8835

Points to Note When Mounting the Flange There is hardly a gap between the flange and the inner side of the drum, causing the flange to get stuck if pushed at an angle. When mounting the flange, push it in a parallel direction to the drum without applying excessive force.

7.10.8 Sub Hopper 7.10.8.1 Before Starting the Work

1) Open the manual feeder cover. 2) Remove the developing assembly locking plate. 3) Remove the original delivery tray [1]. (DADF-Q1 model only) - 2 screws [2]
[1]
0011-7452

[2]

[3]
F-7-70

3) Pull out the flange at the rear [1], and detach the power supply unit [2] from the photosensitive drum.
[1]

[2]

F-7-73

4) Remove the toner bottle.

[2]

7.10.8.2 Removing the Sub Hopper Unit

1) Remove the upper rear right cover [1]. - 3 screws [2]
[1]
0011-7550

F-7-71

4) Pull out the flat heater (drum heater) [1] from inside the drum cylinder.

[2] [2]
F-7-74

7-36

Chapter 7 2) Remove the hopper upper cover [1]. - 3 blocking rubber pieces [2] - 3 screws [3] 3) Remove the hopper right cover [4]. - 3 blocking rubber pieces [5] - 3 screws [6]
[1] [3] [2]

[1]

F-7-79

8) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]. (found on the inner side of the main power switch)
[6] [5] [4]
F-7-75

[1]

4) Remove the fixing plate [1]. - 3 screws [2]

[2] [1]

[2]
F-7-80

9) Slide the sub hopper unit [1] to the right to detach.

F-7-76

[1]

5) Remove the toner supply cover [1]. - 3 screws [2]

[1]

[2]

F-7-77

6) Remove the blocking cover [1]. - 1 screw [2]

F-7-81

7.10.9 Developing Assembly 7.10.9.1 Before Starting the Work

1) Open the manual feeder tray cover. 2) Remove the pull-off roller unit. 3) Removing the developing assembly stay.
0011-7937

7.10.9.2 Removing the Developing Assembly

1) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and slide out the developing assembly [2] to the front.
0010-8836

[1]
F-7-78

[2]

7) Remove the screw [1].

7-37

Chapter 7

[1]

[2]

[1]

F-7-82

7.10.9.3 Points to Note When the Developing Assembly

0011-8148

[1]
F-7-85

When mounting the developing assembly, take care not to hit against the developing cylinder [1].
[1]

RlN^Jo[tA|[1]Jo[O oB(oh[2]KJo[B)
[1] [1]

[2]
F-7-83

Check to be sure that the connector [1] will not become disconnected. Poor contact will lead to blank prints.

F-7-86

7.10.9.4 Removing the Hopper

1) Remove the developing assembly. 2) Remove the four mounting screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the hopper [3].
0010-8842

[3] [1]
[1]

F-7-84

[2]
Check to be sure that the developing assembly locking plate is free of a gap and displacement, which are likely to cause image faults. (Especially, it must not be riding over the bosses found below.) When mounting the developing assembly locking plate, take care not to trap the cable [1].
F-7-87

7-38

Chapter 7

[1]

[1]

[1]
[2]
F-7-91

7) Remove the E-ring [1], gear [2], pressure roll [3], washer [4], grip ring [5], seal [6], butting roll [7], washer [4], and bearing [8] in the order indicated.

F-7-88

7.10.10 Developing Cylinder 7.10.10.1 Removing the Developing Cylinder

1) Remove the developing assembly. 2) Remove the hopper assembly. 3) Remove the blade unit. 4) Remove the three mounting screws [1] from the rear, and detach the deceleration gear retainer [2].
[1] [2]
0010-8847

[8] [4] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

F-7-92

8) Remove the E-ring [1] and the pressure arm [2] at the front.

[1]
F-7-89

5) Remove the three gears [1].

[1]

[2]

[1]

F-7-93

9) Remove the C-ring [1], washer [2], pressure roll [3], seal [4], washer [2], butting roll [5], C-ring [1], and bearing [6]; the, remove the two screws [7], and detach the bushing [8] and then the developing sleeve [9].
[9]

[7]

[8]
F-7-90

[6] [1] [5] [2] [4] [3]

6) Remove the E-ring [1], and detach the pressure arm [2].

[2]

[1]

F-7-94

Do not leave fingerprints or oil on the surface of the developing cylinder. Wipe off any with lint-free paper. (Do not use solvent.)

7-39

Chapter 7

Points to Note When Mounting the Developing Cylinder Both front and rear sides of the developing assembly and the developing cylinder are equipped with a magnetic seal plate [1]. When mounting the developing cylinder, take care not to bring the magnetic seal plate into contact with the surface of the cylinder to avoid damage.
[1]

7.10.11.3 Mounting the Blade

Mount the blade by reversing the steps used to remove it. 1) Butt the blade mounting plate against the developing assembly, and secure it in place with five screws. Be sure to put paper over the developing cylinder for protection before starting to mount the blade. 2) Mount the polarity plate with a screw.
0010-8873

7.10.12 Developing Cylinder Deceleration Clutch 7.10.12.1 Before Starting the Work
1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the high-voltage assembly. 3) Remove the flywheel [1]. - 2 screws [2]
[2] [1]
0011-7627

F-7-95

7.10.11 Developing Blade 7.10.11.1 Before Starting the Work

1) Open the manual feeder tray cover. 2) Remove the pull-off roller unit. 3) Remove the developing assembly stay. 4) Remove the developing assembly. 5) Remove the hopper.
0011-7947

F-7-98

4) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 5 screws [2]; then, detach the clutch mounting plate [3].

7.10.11.2 Removing the Blade Unit

1) Remove the four mounting screws [1], and detach the sleeve cover [2].
0010-8872

[1] [2]

[2]

[3]

[1]

[1]

[2]
F-7-99

[2]
F-7-96

2) Remove the screw [3], and detach the polarity plate [4]; then, remove the five screws [5], and detach the blade [6] together with the mounting plate [7].
[3] [3] [3] [5] [3] [3]

7.10.12.2 Removing the Developing Cylinder Decelerating Clutch

1) Slide out the developing cylinder deceleration clutch [1].
[1]
0010-8874

[4]
F-7-100

[2]
F-7-97

[1]

2) Remove the 4 E-rings [1], 2 bearings [2], gear [3], and pin [4]; then, detach the clutch [5].

The blade must be adjusted to an extremely high accuracy. Do not remove it on its own in the field. (Detach it together with its mounting plate.)

7-40

Chapter 7

[1] [2] [1] [1] [3] [4]

[5]
F-7-104

[1]

[2] [1]
F-7-101

2) Remove the 6 E-rings [1], 2 bearings [2], 2 gears [3], and pin; then, detach the clutch [5].

[5] [1]
0011-7626

7.10.13 Developing Cylinder Clutch 7.10.13.1 Before Starting the Work

1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the high-voltage assembly. 3) Remove the flywheel [1]. - 2 screws [2]
[2] [1]

[2]

[1]

[2] [1] [1] [3] [1] [4]

F-7-105

[1]

7.10.14 Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly 7.10.14.1 Removing the Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly
F-7-102

4) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 5 screws [2]; then, detach the clutch mounting plate [3].

1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the charging cover [2].

0010-8876

[1] [2]

[2]

[3]

[2]
F-7-106

[1]

4) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing plate [2]; then, disconnect the connector [3], and detach the transfer/separation charging assembly [4].

[1]
F-7-103

[2]

7.10.13.2 Removing the Developing Cylinder Clutch

1) Remove the developing cylinder clutch [1].
0010-8875

7-41

Chapter 7

[1]

[4]

[1]

[2]
[2] [3]
F-7-107 F-7-110

3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the pre-transfer exposure LED [2].
[2]

Points to Note When Mounting - The transfer/separation charging assembly is equipped with a positioning boss on its front and rear. When mounting the assembly, be sure to hook the bosses on the cut-offs in the stay. - If the charging assembly cleaner is on the front side, the home position detecting microswitch can become damaged; be sure to set the charging cleaner at the center.
Boss

[1]

F-7-111

7.10.16 Separation Claw/Separation Claw Drive Assembly

Boss
F-7-108

7.10.16.1 Separation Claw/Separation Claw Drive Assembly

1) Open the front cover. 2) Take out the process unit. 3) Remove the E-ring [1], and slide out the separation claw holder shaft [2] to the front to detach the separation holder [3].
0010-8880

Boss

Boss

[3]
F-7-109

[2]

[1]
F-7-112

7.10.15 Pre-Transfer Exposure LED 7.10.15.1 Removing the Pre-Transfer Exposure LED
1) Slide out the pre-transfer charging assembly.
0010-8878

4) Remove the spring [1], and detach the separation claw [2].

When placing the removed pretransfer charging assembly, be sure to take care not to subject the LED to impact. 2) Turn over the pre-transfer charging assembly, and remove the 3 screws [1] found on the bottom; then, detach the LED cover [2].

7-42

Chapter 7

[1]

[2]
F-7-113

F-7-116

Points to Note When Mounting When mounting the separation claw holder, be sure that the separation claw holder spring is butted against the drum cleaner case. Further, check to make sure that the rack of the separation claw 3 drive assembly is engaged with the groove in the separation claw holder.

7) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the potential sensor cover [2]; then, detach the potential sensor [3].
[1]

Separation claw holder

[3] [2]
F-7-117

Be sure to replace the potential sensor at the same time as the potential controller PCB.

Rack
F-7-114

When mounting it, fit the protrusion on the rear of the potential sensor stay in the hole of the side plate found at the rear of the machine; then, match it on the side plate found at the front to screw it in place.

7.10.17 Potential Sensor 7.10.17.1 Removing the Potential Sensor Unit

1) Open the front cover. 2) Remove the process unit. 3) Push in the fixing/feeding assembly. 4) Remove the cable guide [1]. - 1 screw [2] 5) Slide out the dust-blocking glass [3] to detach. 6) Remove the potential sensor unit [4]. - 1 connector [5] - 1 screw [6]
0010-8881

7.10.17.2 Removing the Potential Control PCB

1) Remove the primary charging assembly cover. 2) Remove the process unit cover. 3) Remove the double-feed detection PCB (receiving) if found. 4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the 2 connectors [2]; then, detach the pre-transfer charging assembly fan [3].
[1] [2] [3]
0011-7609

[2]

[5]

[1]

[6]

[4] [3]

F-7-118

5) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the potential control PCB [3].

F-7-115

It is rather difficult to slide out the potential sensor unit in horizontal direction. As shown, push it down before sliding it out to facilitate the work.

7-43

Chapter 7

[3]

[2]

[1]

[1]
F-7-119

[2]

7.10.17.3 When Replacing the Potential Sensor/Potential Control PCB

0011-8746

[1]
F-7-123

The machine remains powered after the main power switch is turned off as long as the power plug is connected to the power outlet. Be sure to disconnect the power plug from the power outlet. 1) Turn off the power. 2) Remove the developing assembly, and slide out the process unit. 3) Disconnect the connector [1] of the potential sensor.
[1]

When fitting the checker electrode to the potential sensor, make sure that the magnet of the checker electrode will not come into contact with the potential sensor cover. 8) Connect the cable [1] of the potential sensor checker electrode to the frame assembly (GND) [2] of the machine.

Never bring the clip into contact with the sensor cover. Be sure to fit it fully away from the sensor window.
[2]

F-7-120

4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the potential sensor support plate [2].
[1]

[1]
F-7-124

[2]
F-7-121

5) Put back the developing assembly and the process unit. 6) Connect the connector [1] of the potential sensor.
[1]

9) Fit the door switch actuator to the door switch assembly [1] and the laser shutter assembly [2]. 10) Turn on the powor. 11) Execute the following service mode items: COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > OFST 12) Record the value of <OFST> on the service sheet. 13) Turn off the main power switch. 14) Detach the potential sensor checker electrode. 15) Put back the potential sensor support plate. 16) Turn on the power.

7.10.18 Dust-Collecting Roller 7.10.18.1 Removing the Dust-Collecting Roller

1) Remove the pre-transfer charging assembly. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the motor cover [2].
0010-8885

F-7-122

7) Fit the potential checker electrode (FY9-3041) [2] to the potential sensor [1].

7-44

Chapter 7

[1]

[2] [1]
F-7-125

F-7-128

7.10.19.3 Removing the Wire Cleaner of the Transfer Separation Charging Assembly
1) Remove the transfer/separation charging assembly. 2) Move the felt holder [1] to the front as far as it moves.
0010-8940

3) Remove the dust-collecting roller arm [1] and the twisted spring [2]; then, detach the dusts-collecting roller [3].

[2]

[1]

[3]

F-7-129

[1]
F-7-126

3) Remove the motor cover [1] together with the motor.

7.10.19 Charging Wire 7.10.19.1 Outline

As many as 3 charging wires are found around the photosensitive drum (primary, pre-transfer, transfer/separation); these wires are 0.06 mm in diameter.
0010-8934

7.10.19.2 Removing the Wire Cleaner for the Primary Charging Assembly
1) Remove the primary charging assembly. 2) Move the clip base [1] fully to the rear, and remove the screw [2]; then, remove the support plate [4] of the wire clean motor shaft [3], and detach the clip base [1] from the cut-off [6] of the shielding plate [5] together with the wire cleaner motor shaft [3].
[1]
[6] [3] [1] [2] [4]
F-7-130
0010-8935

4) Remove the E-ring [1]; then, pull the screw [2] to the front, and remove it upward.
[1] [2]

[6] [5]
F-7-127

3) Pick the wire cleaner with small pliers, and free the hook with your fingers.

F-7-131

7-45

Chapter 7 5) From the cut-off of the shielding plate [1], free the felt holder [2]. 6) Pick the wire cleaner with a pair of fine-tipped pliers, and free the hook with your finger.
[1] Cut off
F-7-136

assembly, hook the spring at the front.

[5]

Be sure of the following: - The charging wire is free of bends and twists. - The charging wire is in the bottom of the V-groove of the charging wire positioner.

Cut off
F-7-132

Grid side

7.10.19.4 Stringing the Charging Wire

As a rule, the charging wire (except the grid wire) may be strung in the same way for all charging assemblies. The following uses the primary charging assembly as an example: 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the shielding plate (left, right) [2] of the charging assembly. To prevent deformation (slack) of the primary charging assembly, be sure to work on the left and right shielding plates separately. (Do not loosen the screw for the left/right shielding plate.) 2) Remove the wire cleaner.
0010-8939

(correct)
F-7-137

(wrong)

9) Fit the cushion to the front of the charging wire. (except for primary charging assembly) 10) Mount the shielding plate (left, right).

For other charging assemblies, fit the lid (2 pc.).

[1]

[2]

[1]
After stringing the charging wire of each charging assembly, check to make sure that the length of the tension spring is as follows:
Primary charging assembly

A=12.01mm

F-7-133

For other charging assemblies, remove the lid (2 pc.) 3) Free a length of about 5 cm from a charging wire reel (wire dia. of 0.06 mm), and form a loop at the end about 2 mm in diameter.
Reel Charging terminal

Pre-transfer charging A=12.01mm assembly Transfer charging A=12.00.5mm assembly Separation charging A=12.00.5mm assembly
F-7-138

Stud

11) Mount the wire cleaner. At this time, pay attention to the orientation of the wire cleaner. 12) Wipe the charging wire with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

7.10.19.5 Stringing the Grid of the Primary Charging Assembly

Charging wire
F-7-134

(front)

(rear)

1) Check to make sure that the 4 screws used to keep the front/rear block and shielding plate are not loose. Then, hook the end of the charging wire on stud A, and then route it for 41 runs; then, hook it on B, C, and D; thereafter, fit it between the double washers [1], give a 1/2 turn around the screw [2], and secure it in place.

0010-8942

MEMO: To form a loop, wind the charging wire once around a hex key, and twist the key 3 to 4 times. 4) Cut the end (excess) for the twisted charging wire. 5) Hook the loop on the stud. 6) Hook the charging wire on the charging wire positioner at the rear, and hook the charging wire tension spring on the charging wire, and twist it.

F-7-135

7) Cut the excess of the charging wire with a nipper. 8) Pick the end of the charging wire tension spring with tweezers, and hook it on the charging wire terminal. In the case of the pre-transfer charging

7-46

Chapter 7 justed by turning the screw found at the rear of the charging assembly. A full turn of the screw changes the position of the charging wire by about 0.7 mm.

B C

[1]

[2]
F-7-139

2) Loosen the screws [1], [2], [3], [4]; then, tighten the screw [5] to a torque of 1.5 -/+0.2 kg-cm. thereafter, tighten the screws [1], [2], [3], [4] to a torque of 8 kg-cm in the order indicated.
[3] [4]

[2]

[1]
F-7-140

[5]

7.10.19.6 Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire

0010-8945

T-7-3 Height of charging wire Primary

- 0mm 7.5 +3mm

Pre-transfer

- 0mm 7.5 +3mm

No height adjusting mechanism 13.6 0.3mm

Separation

17.0 0.2mm

15.5 0.2mm

Transfer

9.0

0.2mm

MEMO: The height (position) of the primary and transfer charging wires may be ad-

7-47

Chapter 8 Pickup/Feeding System

Contents

Contents
8.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.1.1 Specifications and Construction .................................................................................................................................................. 8-1 8.1.2 Arrangement of Rollers and Sensors ........................................................................................................................................... 8-1 8.1.3 Control System............................................................................................................................................................................. 8-2 8.1.4 Controlling the Pickup Motor (M2) ............................................................................................................................................. 8-3 8.1.5 Index Paper Attachment............................................................................................................................................................... 8-3

8.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................8-4

8.2.1 Right Deck ................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-4 8.2.2 Pickup from the cassette 4 ........................................................................................................................................................... 8-4

8.3 Detecting Jams ...............................................................................................................................................................8-5

8.3.1 Jam Detection Outline.................................................................................................................................................................. 8-5
8.3.1.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................8-5

8.3.2 Delay Jams ................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-6

8.3.2.1 Cassette Pickup (Right deck, Left deck, cassette 3, 4)....................................................................................................................................8-6 8.3.2.2 Other Delay Jams ............................................................................................................................................................................................8-6

8.3.3 Stationary Jams ............................................................................................................................................................................ 8-7

8.3.3.1 Common Stationary Jams ...............................................................................................................................................................................8-7 8.3.3.2 Stationary Jam at Power-On............................................................................................................................................................................8-7

8.4 Cassette Pick-Up Unit ....................................................................................................................................................8-7

8.4.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-7 8.4.2 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper.................................................................................................................................... 8-9 8.4.3 Detecting the Level of Paper........................................................................................................................................................ 8-9 8.4.4 Cassette 3/4 ................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-11 8.4.5 Markings on the Width Guide Rail ............................................................................................................................................ 8-11 8.4.6 Paper Size................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-12

8.5 Manual Feed Pickup Unit ............................................................................................................................................8-14

8.5.1 Pickup Operation ....................................................................................................................................................................... 8-14 8.5.2 Detecting the Paper Size ............................................................................................................................................................ 8-15

8.6 Deck .............................................................................................................................................................................8-16

8.6.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-16 8.6.2 Lifter Limiter (deck right/left) ................................................................................................................................................... 8-17 8.6.3 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper.................................................................................................................................. 8-17 8.6.4 Detecting the Level of Paper...................................................................................................................................................... 8-18 8.6.5 Cassette Deck Right/Left ........................................................................................................................................................... 8-20

8.7 Registration Unit ..........................................................................................................................................................8-20

8.7.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................ 8-20 8.7.2 Sequence of Operations (registration brake).............................................................................................................................. 8-21

8.8 Duplex Feeding Unit ....................................................................................................................................................8-22

8.8.1 Copying on the First Side .......................................................................................................................................................... 8-22 8.8.2 Copying on the Second Side ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-22 8.8.3 Sequence of Operations ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-23 8.8.4 Controlling the reversal motor (M11)........................................................................................................................................ 8-23 8.8.5 Controlling the duplexing feeder motor (M12) ......................................................................................................................... 8-24 8.8.6 No-Stacking Operation .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-24 8.8.7 Detecting the Horizontal Registration Position ......................................................................................................................... 8-29 8.8.8 Controlling the Horizontal Registration Motor (M15) .............................................................................................................. 8-30

8.9 Delivery........................................................................................................................................................................8-31
8.9.1 Reversal Delivery....................................................................................................................................................................... 8-31

8.10 Detecting the Double-Feed ........................................................................................................................................8-32

8.10.1 Detecting Double Feeding ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-32

Contents

8.11 Parts Replacement Procedure.................................................................................................................................... 8-34

8.11.1 Cassette Pickup Assembly ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-34
8.11.1.1 Removing the Right Deck / Cassette Pickup Assembly ............................................................................................................................. 8-34 8.11.1.2 Removing the Vertical Path 3/4 Sensor and the Cassette 3/4 Pickup Sensor............................................................................................. 8-34

8.11.2 Cassette Lifter Motor ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-34

8.11.2.1 Removing the Lifter Motor (M16/M17) of the Cassette (3/4).................................................................................................................... 8-34

8.11.3 Right Deck Pickup Assembly .................................................................................................................................................. 8-34

8.11.3.1 Removing the Right Deck / Cassette Pickup Assembly ............................................................................................................................. 8-34

8.11.4 Left Deck Pickup Assembly .................................................................................................................................................... 8-34

8.11.4.1 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Assembly................................................................................................................................................ 8-34

8.11.5 Left Deck Pickup Sensor ......................................................................................................................................................... 8-35

8.11.5.1 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Sensor..................................................................................................................................................... 8-35

8.11.6 Right Deck Pickup Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-35

8.11.6.1 Removing the Right Deck Feed Sensor/Right Deck Pickup Sensor .......................................................................................................... 8-35

8.11.7 Manual Tray Assembly............................................................................................................................................................ 8-36

8.11.7.1 Removing the Manual Feeder Tray Unit .................................................................................................................................................... 8-36 8.11.7.2 Fitting the Side Guide Timing Belt for the Manual Feed Tray Assembly ................................................................................................. 8-36

8.11.8 Manual Feed Pull-Out Roller Unit........................................................................................................................................... 8-36

8.11.8.1 Removing the Manual Feeder Pull-Off Roller Unit ................................................................................................................................... 8-36

8.11.9 Manual Pickup Roller .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-37

8.11.9.1 Removing the Pickup Roller....................................................................................................................................................................... 8-37 8.11.9.2 Mounting the Pickup Roller........................................................................................................................................................................ 8-37

8.11.10 Manual Feed Roller................................................................................................................................................................ 8-37

8.11.10.1 Removing the Feeding Roller ................................................................................................................................................................... 8-37 8.11.10.2 Orientation of the Feeding Roller ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-37 8.11.10.3 Removing the multiple curling prevention roller ..................................................................................................................................... 8-38 8.11.10.4 Mounting the multiple curling prevention roller ...................................................................................................................................... 8-38

8.11.11 Manual Separation Roller ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-38

8.11.11.1 Removing the Separation Roller............................................................................................................................................................... 8-38

8.11.12 Manual Feed Tray paper sensor............................................................................................................................................. 8-39

8.11.12.1 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Paper Sensor ....................................................................................................................................... 8-39

8.11.13 Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid ............................................................................................................................................... 8-40

8.11.13.1 Position of the Pickup Roller Release Solenoid of the Manual Feed Tray............................................................................................... 8-40

8.11.14 Registration Roller ................................................................................................................................................................. 8-40

8.11.14.1 Removing the Pre-Registration Roller...................................................................................................................................................... 8-40

8.11.15 Registration Clutch ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-41

8.11.15.1 Removing the Registration Clutch............................................................................................................................................................ 8-41

8.11.16 Registration Brake Clutch...................................................................................................................................................... 8-41

8.11.16.1 Removing the Registration Brake Clutch ................................................................................................................................................. 8-41

8.11.17 Fixing/Feed Unit .................................................................................................................................................................... 8-41

8.11.17.1 Removing the Fixing/Feed Unit ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-41

8.11.18 Feeding Roller........................................................................................................................................................................ 8-42

8.11.18.1 Removing the Feeding Roller ................................................................................................................................................................... 8-42 8.11.18.2 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Deck/Cassette Pickup Assembly .............................................................................................. 8-42

8.11.19 Vertical Path Roller................................................................................................................................................................ 8-42

8.11.19.1 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 1/3/4.................................................................................................................................................. 8-42 8.11.19.2 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 2 ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-42

8.11.20 Fixing Feeding Unit Releasing Lever Sensor ........................................................................................................................ 8-43

8.11.20.1 Removing the Fixing Feeding Unit Releasing lever Sensor..................................................................................................................... 8-43

8.11.21 Feeding Belt ........................................................................................................................................................................... 8-43

8.11.21.1 Removing the Feeding Belt ...................................................................................................................................................................... 8-43

8.11.22 Duplexing Unit....................................................................................................................................................................... 8-44

8.11.22.1 Removing the Duplexing Unit .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-44 8.11.22.2 Removing the Reversal Motor .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-44 8.11.22.3 Removing the Front Cover of the Duplexing Unit ................................................................................................................................... 8-44 8.11.22.4 Removing the Duplex Left Feed Motor.................................................................................................................................................... 8-44 8.11.22.5 Removing the Duplex Right Feed Motor ................................................................................................................................................. 8-44 8.11.22.6 Removing the Reversing Flapper Solenoid .............................................................................................................................................. 8-44 8.11.22.7 Removing the Left Deck Feed Sensor ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-45

Contents

8.11.22.8 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor...........................................................................................................................................8-45 8.11.22.9 Removing the Deck (left) Draw- Out Clutch/Lower Feeder Middle Clutch ............................................................................................8-45 8.11.22.10 Removing the Lower Feeding Right Clutch ...........................................................................................................................................8-46 8.11.22.11 Removing the Pre-Confluence Sensor ....................................................................................................................................................8-46 8.11.22.12 Removing the Post-Confluence Sensor...................................................................................................................................................8-46 8.11.22.13 Removing the Front Deck (lifter) Draw-Out Sensor...............................................................................................................................8-46 8.11.22.14 Removing the Horizontal Registration Sensor........................................................................................................................................8-46

8.11.23 Separation Roller ................................................................................................................................................................... 8-47

8.11.23.1 Removing the Separation Roller ...............................................................................................................................................................8-47 8.11.23.2 Orientation of the Separation Roller .........................................................................................................................................................8-47

8.11.24 Double Feeding Detection Sensor ( Transmission ) .............................................................................................................. 8-47

8.11.24.1 Before Starting the Work ..........................................................................................................................................................................8-47 8.11.24.2 Removing the Double-Feed Sensor (transmitting) ...................................................................................................................................8-48

8.11.25 Double Feeding Detection Sensor ( Reception ).................................................................................................................... 8-49

8.11.25.1 Before Starting the Work ..........................................................................................................................................................................8-49 8.11.25.2 Removing the Double-Feed Sensor (receiving) ........................................................................................................................................8-49

Chapter 8

8.1 Construction
8.1.1 Specifications and Construction
Table shows the major functions of the pickup/feeding system.
T-8-1 Item Paper feeding reference Paper stacking capacity Description Center Paper deck (right, left): Cassette (3, 4): Multifeeder: 1,500 sheets (80 g/m2) 550 sheets (80 g/m2) 50 sheets (80 g/m2)
0010-8186

Paper size switch

Paper deck (right, left): Cassette (3, 4): Multifeeder:

by the service person by the user by the user

Duplexing system Related user mode

No-stacking Turning on and off the cassette selection mechanism Selecting paper icons

Related mechanical adjustment

Deck horizontal registration Cassette horizontal registration Manual feed tray horizontal registration

8.1.2 Arrangement of Rollers and Sensors

0010-8187

[10]

[9]
PS10 PS9 PS6 PS63

[8]
PS5

[7]

[6]

[11]
PS11 PS12

PS68

PS35

[12] [13] [14] [15] [16]

PS14 PS26 PS25 PS15

[18] [19]

PS60 PS47 PS61 PS27 PS20

[5]

[17]

[4]

PS49

[3]

PS41 PS37

[2]

PS46 PS42

[1]

F-8-1 T-8-2

- sensor
PS5: PS6: PS9: PS10: registration sensor claw jam sensor internal delivery sensor external delivery sensor PS35: PS37: PS41: PS42: multifeeder pickup sensor cassette 3 pickup sensor* vertical path 3 sensor* cassette 4 pickup sensor*

8-1

Chapter 8
PS11: PS12: PS14: PS15: PS20: PS25: PS26: PS27: fixing/feeding outlet sensor duplex reversal sensor pre-confluence reversal sensor post-confluence sensor right deck pickup sensor* left deck pickup sensor* left deck feed sensor* right deck feed sensor* PS46: PS47: PS49: PS60: PS61: PS63: PS68: vertical path 4 sensor * vertical path 1 sensor vertical path 2 sensor image write start sensor duplex outlet sensor fixing inlet sensor multiple curling prevention sensor

* Optical sensor.

- roller
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Vertical path 4 roller Vertical path 3 roller Vertical path 2 roller Vertical path 1 roller Pre-registration roller Multifeeder feeding roller multiple curling prevention roller Registration roller Internal delivery roller External delivery roller [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] Delivery auxiliary roller Reversal auxiliary roller Reversing roller U-turn roller 1 U-turn roller 2 Pre-confluence roller Left deck feeding roller Lower feeding middle roller Lower feeding right roller

8.1.3 Control System

0010-8188

Pickup motor M2

J511-B10 J502-B5 J509-A2 J509-A4 J513-A13 J519-B6 J519-B8 J519-B13 J519-B4 J519-A16 J518-B8 J518-A9 J518-B10 J518-A2 J518-A5 J511-A9 J511-B6 J511-A7 J511-A17 J511-A11 J511-A14 J516-B9 J514-A7 J515-A4 J515-B10 J515-B6 J515-A2 J515-B13 J515-A6 J515-A9 J517-A4 J517-B10 J517-B6 J517-A2 J517-B13 J517-A6 J517-A9

C1 feeding detection signal Vertical path 1 paper detection signal Registration assembly detection signal Registration clutch drive signal Registration front roller clutch drive signal Lower feeding right roller clutch drive signal Lower feeding middle roller clutch drive signal Post-confluence paper detection signal C2 feeding clutch drive signal C2 feeding detection signal C2 pickup clutch drive signal C2 pickup detection signal C2 pickup solenoid drive signal C2 lifter detection signal C2 paper detection signal Vertical path 1 clutch drive signal [1] C1 pickup detection signal [2] C1 pickup clutch drive signal [3] C1 pickup solenoid drive signal [4] PS31 C1 lifter detection signal [5] PS32 C1 paper detection signal [6] Vertical path 2 paper detection signal [7] Vertical path 2 clutch drive signal Vertical path 3 clutch drive signal Vertical path 3 paper detection signal C3 pickup detection signal C3 pickup clutch drive signal C3 pickup solenoid drive signal C3 lifter detection signal C3 paper detection signal Vertical path 4 clutch drive signal Vertical path 4 paper detection signal C4 pickup detection signal C4 pickup clutch drive signal C4 pickup solenoid drive signal C4 lifter detection signal C4 paper detection signal
SL8

CL2

CL17

PS5 CL5 PS47

CL16

CL19 CL11

PS15

DC controller PCB

[1] [2] PS26 [3] PS25 [4] [5] [6] [7] CL9 CL13 CL10 SL7

CL8 PS27 PS20 PS21 PS22 PS49

PS41 CL12 SL9 PS38 PS39 CL15 PS46 CL14 SL10 PS43 PS44 PS42 PS37

F-8-2

8-2

Chapter 8

8.1.4 Controlling the Pickup Motor (M2)

Table shows the functions of the pickup motor control circuit, and Figure is a block diagram of the circuit.
T-8-3 Item Power supply Drive signal Operating/driving assembly Control Error detection Description Supplies 38 V from the relay PCB. Signal (M2-ON) from the DC controller PCB. See Figure. On/off control Constant speed control Error code "E015"
0010-8189

Relay PCB

J1721 11 12

38V GND

J621 1 2 Drive circuit Pickup motor M2 Clock pulse generation circuit Control circuit Reference signal generation circuit

DC controller PCB

J513 J622 0V A5 1 5V A4 2 FEED_MOTOR_ON A3 3 FEED_MOTOR_FG A2 4 0V A1 5

When the M2 drive signal goes '1', the pickup motor starts to rotate. Ehen the pickup motor starts to rotate, the pulse signal goes '1'. Ehen the pulse signals goes '0', error code "E015" is indicated.
F-8-3

8.1.5 Index Paper Attachment

The machine allows the use of index paper as a transfer medium. Start user mode, and select index sheet mode and fit an Index Paper Attachment-A1 so that an index sheet may be inserted between sheets (index sheet insert mode) or print in the index area (index production mode). Index sheets are fed from the source of index sheets (cassette 3/4) selected from the control panel. (For details, see the User Guide.)
[1] [3]
0010-8190

[1] [4]

[2]
F-8-4 [1] [2] One-touch support Cassette holes [3] [4] Index paper attachment Backing sheet

8-3

Chapter 8

8.2 Basic Sequence

8.2.1 Right Deck
- A4, 2 Sheets, Continuous The copier's deck pickup assembly uses separation rollers to separate paper.
Copy Start key ON or print command received
0010-8191

1st sheet picked up 2nd sheet picked up

Pickup motor (M2) Right deck pickup clutch (CL10) Right deck pickup solenoid (SL7) Right deck pickup paper sensor (PS20) Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor (PS47) Registration roller paper sensor (PS5) Registration roller clutch (CL2) Stopped temporarily to create a sheet-to-sheet distance
F-8-5

8.2.2 Pickup from the cassette 4

- A4, 2 Sheets, Continuous The copier's cassette pickup assembly uses separation rollers.
Copy Start key ON or print command received
0010-8192

1st sheet picked up 2nd sheet picked up

Pickup motor (M2) Cassette 4 pickup clutch (CL14) Cassette 4 pickup solenoid (SL10) Cassette 4 pickup paper sensor (PS42) Vertical path roller 4 sensor (PS46) Vertical path roller 3 paper sensor (PS41) Vertical path roller 2 paper sensor (PS49) Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor (PS47) Registration roller paper sensor (PS5) Registration roller clutch (CL2) Stopped temporarily to create a sheet-to-sheet distance
F-8-6

8-4

Chapter 8

8.3 Detecting Jams

8.3.1 Jam Detection Outline 8.3.1.1 Outline
Arrangement of Jam Sensors
0010-8193

Type of Jams
T-8-4 Sensor Right deck pickup sensor Left deck pickup sensor Cassette 3 pickup sensor PS20 PS25 PS37 Delay jam Present Present Present Stationary jam Absent Absent Absent Stationary jam from power-on Absent Absent Absent

Cassette 4 pickup sensor

Right deck feed sensor

Left deck feed sensor

Manual feed sensor

Vertical path 1 sensor

Vertical path 2 sensor

Vertical path 3 sensor

Vertical path 4 sensor

Registration roll sensor

Claw jam sensor

Internal delivery sensor

External delivery sensor

image write start sensor

Fixing feeding outlet sensor

3
1
F-8-7 PS42 Present Absent Absent PS27 Present Present Present PS26 Present Present Present PS35 Present Absent Present PS47 Present Present Present PS49 Present Present Present PS41 Present Absent Present PS46 Present Absent Present PS5 Present Present Present PS6 Absent Present Present PS9 Present Present Present PS10 Present Present Present PS60 Present Present Present PS11 Absent Absent Present

8-5

Chapter 8
Sensor Duplexing reversal sensor PS12 Delay jam Present Stationary jam Present Stationary jam from power-on Present

Duplex outlet sensor

PS61

Present

Present

Present

Pre-confluence sensor

PS14

Present

Present

Present

Post-confluence sensor

PS15

Present

Present

Present

multiple curling prevention sensor Fixing inlet sensor

PS68 PS63

Present Absent

Present Absent

Present Present

8.3.2 Delay Jams 8.3.2.1 Cassette Pickup (Right deck, Left deck, cassette 3, 4)
0010-8194

Copy Start key ON or PRINT set INTR / PRINT

Pickup clutch (LC10, 11, 12, 13) Pickup solenoid (SL7, 8, 9, 10) 2 sec Jam check Pickup sensor (PS20, 25, 37, 42) Normal Error 2 sec

A check is made for about 2 to find out if paper has reached the pickup sensor; if paper is absent, a pickup delay jam is identified.
F-8-8

8.3.2.2 Other Delay Jams

Basically, the same principles are used to detect delay jams other than pickup sensor delay jams.
A specific time I after the leading edge of paper is detected by the sensor N-1, a jam check is started.
0010-8195

Copy Start key ON or PRINT set INTR

PRINT

I Sensor N-1 Jam check Sensor N A check is made for about 0.13 sec to find out if paper has reached the sensor N.
F-8-9

I 0.09 to 2.0 sec Normal 0.09 to 2.0 sec Error

A delay jam is identified if paper does not reach the sensor N during this period.

8-6

Chapter 8
T-8-5 Delay jam sensor N Sensor N-1

Right deck feed sensor (PS27) Left deck feed sensor (PS26) Vertical path 1 sensor (PS47) Vertical path 1 sensor (PS47) Vertical path 1 sensor (PS47) Vertical path 2 sensor (PS49) Vertical path 3 sensor (PS41) Vertical path 3 sensor (PS41) Vertical path 4 sensor (PS46) multiple curling prevention sensor (PS68) image write start sensor (PS60) Registration sensor (PS5) Registration sensor (PS5) Internal delivery sensor (PS9) External delivery sensor (PS10) Post-confluence sensor (PS15) Post-confluence sensor (PS15)

Right deck pickup sensor (PS20) Left deck pickup sensor (PS25) Right deck feed sensor (PS27) duplex outlet sensor (PS61) option deck sensor (side paper deck) Vertical path 3 sensor (PS41) Vertical path 4 sensor (PS46) Cassette 3 pickups sensor (PS37) Cassette 4 pickup sensor (PS42) Manual feed sensor (PS35) Vertical path 1 sensor (PS47) image write start sensor (PS60) multiple curling prevention sensor (PS68) Registration sensor (PS5) Internal delivery sensor (PS9) Pre-confluence sensor (PS14) Left deck feed sensor (PS26)

8.3.3 Stationary Jams 8.3.3.1 Common Stationary Jams

0010-8196

Copy Start key ON or PRINT set INTR

A jam check is started after feeding "regulation time" upon detection of the leading edge of paper.

PRINT

regulation time

regulation time

Jam check Normal Sensor N Error

If paper is detected here, a stationary jam is identified.

F-8-10

8.3.3.2 Stationary Jam at Power-On

A stationary jam at power-on is identified in relation to the presence/absence of paper over a specific sensor about 1 sec after the control panel power switch is turned on.
0010-8197

8.4 Cassette Pick-Up Unit

8.4.1 Outline
When the deck or the cassette is slid in, the cassette open/closed sensor turns on and, at the same time, the pickup roller starts to move down, causing the lightblocking plate to leave the lifter sensor, driving the cassette lifter motor and, ultimately, moving up the lifter. The lifter keeps moving up until the lifter sensor detects the surface of paper. (In the case of the deck right/left, a limiter is mounted to stop the lifter if it fails to stop moving up.) When the deck or cassette open button is pushed, the drive gear of the lifter becomes free to let the lifter move down on its own weight.
T-8-6 Right deck Cassette open/closed detection Deck right open/closed sensor (PS23) Left deck Deck left open/closed sensor (PS33) Cassette 3 Cassette 3 open/closed sensor (PS40) Cassette 4 Cassette 4 open/closed sensor (PS45)
0010-8199

8-7

Chapter 8
Right deck Lifter position detection Lifter sensor (PS21) Left deck Lifter sensor (PS31) Cassette 3 Lifter sensor (PS38) Cassette 4 Lifter sensor (PS43)

Paper presence/absence detection

Deck right paper sensor (PS22) Deck left paper sensor (PS32) Cassette 3 paper sensor (PS39) Cassette 4 paper sensor (PS44)

Paper level detection

Deck right paper level middle sensor (PS51) Deck right paper level upper sensor (PS52)

Deck lifter paper level middle Cassette 3 paper level detection Cassette 4 paper level PCB (variable resistor) detection PCB (variable sensor (PS54) resistor) Cassette 2 paper level upper sensor (PS55)

Lifter upper limiter

Deck right limit sensor (PS24) Deck left limit sensor (PS34)

---

---

Drive motor

Deck right lifter motor (M13)

Deck lifter motor (M14)

Cassette 3 lifter motor (M16)

Cassette 4 lifter motor (M17)

Paper Pickup roller Feeding roller Pickup sensor

Limit sensor Lifter position lever Pickup roller Lifter position sensor

Separation roller

Paper detecting lever Paper sensor Deck open/ closed sensor

F-8-11

Lifter

- cassette
Pickup roller Paper Feeding roller

Pickup sensor

Separation roller Pickup roller

Lifter position sensor Lifter Paper sensor Cassette open/ closed sensor
F-8-12

8-8

Chapter 8

8.4.2 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper

The presence/absent of paper inside the deck and the cassette is detected by the cassette paper sensor.
0010-8201

Paper sensor

Paper detecting lever

Paper

Lifter
F-8-13

Paper sensor Paper detecting lever

Lifter
F-8-14

8.4.3 Detecting the Level of Paper

The machine indicates the level of paper inside the deck and the cassette in four readings (including No Paper) on the control panel.
T-8-7 Level of paper Indication on control panel
0010-8202

100% to about 50% of capacity

about 50% to about 10% of capacity

about 10% of capacity or less

No paper

In the case of the deck right/left, two sensors are used to detect the position of the deck, and combinations of the states of the sensors (on/off) are used to find out the level of paper. For the absence of paper, an exclusive sensor is used.

8-9

Chapter 8

Main controller PCB

DC controller PCB

[2]

[2]

[2]

[1]

[1]

[1]

Paper level (100% to about 50%)

F-8-15 T-8-8 Deck right Paper level [1] Sensor (PS51) [2] Sensor (PS52) Sensor (PS22)

Paper level (about 10% or less)

Paper level (about 50% to about 10%)

Deck left [1] Sensor (PS54) [2] Sensor (PS55) Sensor (PS32)

100% to about 50%

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

About 50% to about 10

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

About 10% or less

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

None

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

In the case of cassette 3/4, the resistance of the variable resistor operating in conjunction with the movement of the lifter drive shaft is used to find out the level of paper.

8-10

Chapter 8

Main controller PCB

Variable resistor Paper level (much)

Paper level (little)

F-8-16

Variable resistor

SERVICE MODE: COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > C3-LVOL Use it to enter a stack height for the cassette 3. (50 sheets) Record the above readings on the service label. COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > C3-HVOL Use it to enter a stack height for the cassette 3. (275 sheets) Record the above readings on the service label. COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > C4-LVOL Use it to enter a stack height for the cassette 4. (50 sheets) Record the above readings on the service label. COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > C4-HVOL Use it to enter a stack height for the cassette 4. (275 sheets) Record the above readings on the service label.

8.4.4 Cassette 3/4

1. The length of paper is detected by two photointerrupers (each cassette). 2. The width of paper is detected by a slide volume.
0010-8203

Paper width detecting VR Paper length sensor unit

Width guide (rear) Width guide (front)

Length guide
F-8-17 T-8-9 Cassette 3

Cassette

Cassette 4

Length detection Width detection

SV1 (2 photointerrupers) SV2

SV2 (2 photointerrupers) SVR3

8.4.5 Markings on the Width Guide Rail

The width guide rail inside the cassette is equipped with paper size positioning holes, which are marked A through M as shown in Table. Refer to these markings if the user reports skew movement of paper, thereby deciding whether the paper width is set correctly. (Note that this information is not
0010-8204

8-11

Chapter 8 disclosed to the user.)

T-8-10 Marking A B C D E F G H I J K L M Paper size STMT-R A5-R B5-R KLGL-R GLTR-R G-LGL A4-R LGL/LTR-R FLSC B4/B5 G-LTR 279.4X431.8mm (11"X17")/LTR A3/A4 U1 U4 U2 U3 Remarks

8.4.6 Paper Size

The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB determines the size of paper based on the inputs on paper width and paper length. Table shows the paper size groupings selected in service mode. *Paper size selected at time of shipment.
Length sensor
Width sensor
0010-8205

PS102/ PS101/ PS102/ PS101/ PS102/ PS101/ PS102/ PS101/ PS104 PS103 SZ 1 0 A4 PS104 SZ 2 0 PS103 SZ 1 1 PS104 SZ 2 1 A3 279.4 431.8mm ( 11" 17") PS103 SZ 1 0 PS104 SZ 2 1 PS103 SZ 1 1

Signal SZ 2
ON/ OFF

(slice livel)

Unit:mm

288.5 (U4) 273.7 (U1) 261.8 B5 238.0 STMT 212.9 A5 206.6 G-LTRR 196.6 K-LGLR 186.0 B5R 165.2 A5R 144.1 STMTR A4R (U3) LTRR LGL (U2) B4

F-8-18 T-8-11 Group U1 U2 * * Size G-LTR K-LGL FOOLSCAP OFFICIO E-OFFI A-OFFI M-OFI U3 * G-LGL FOLIO AUS-FLS U4 * LTR A-LTR

SERVICE MODE: COPIER > OPTION > CST > CST-U1 31: G-LTR *, 22: K LGL COPIER > OPTION > CST > CST-U2 24: FLSC *, 26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 36: A-OFI, 37: M-OFI

8-12

Chapter 8 COPIER > OPTION > CST > CST-U3 34: G-LGL *, 35: FOLI, 25: A-FLS COPIER > OPTION > CST > CST-U4 18: LTR *, 29: A-LTR *: Factory setting. COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > C3-STMTR Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for STMTR in the cassette 3. COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > C3-A4R Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for A4R in the cassette 3. COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > C4-STMTR Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for STMTR in the cassette 4. COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > C4-A4R Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for A4R in the cassette 4. - Papers Supported by the Machine
T-8-12 Paper Notation Size (verticalxhorizontal; mm)

A3

A3

(297 -/+1)X(420 -/+1)

A4R

A4R

(210 -/+1)X(297 -/+1)

A4

A4

(297 -/+1)X(210 -/+1)

A5

A5

(210 -/+1)X(148.5 -/+1)

A5R

A5R

(148.5 -/+1)X(210 -/+1)

B4

B4

(257 -/+1)X(364 -/+1)

B5R

B5R

(182 -/+1)X(257 -/+1)

B5

B5

(257 -/+1)X(182 -/+1)

11X17

11x17

(279 -/+1)X(432 -/+1)

LTRR

LTRR

(216 -/+1)X(279 -/+1)

LTR

LTR

(279 -/+1)X(216 -/+1)

STMT

STMT

(216 -/+1)X(139.5 -/+1)

STMR

STMTR

(139.5 -/+1)X(216 -/+1)

LEGAL

LGL

(216 -/+1)X(356 -/+1)

Korean Government

K-LGL

(265 -/+1)X(190 -/+1)

Korean Government R

K-LGLR

(190 -/+1)X(265 -/+1)

FOOLSCAP

FLSC

(216 -/+1)X(330 -/+1)

Australian FOOLSCAP

A-FLS

(206 -/+1)X(337 -/+1)

OFICIO

OFI

(216 -/+1)X(317 -/+1)

Ecuadorian OFFICIO

E-OFI

(220 -/+1)X(320 -/+1)

8-13

Chapter 8
Paper Notation Size (verticalxhorizontal; mm)

Bolivian OFFICIO

B-OFI

(216 -/+1)X(355 -/+1)

Argentine LTR

A-LTR

(280 -/+1)X(220 -/+1)

Argentine LTRR

A-LTRR

(220 -/+1)X(280 -/+1)

Government LTR

G-LTR

(267 -/+1)X(203 -/+1)

Government LTRR

G-LTRR

(203 -/+1)X(267 -/+1)

Argentine LGL

A-LGL

(220 -/+1)X(340 -/+1)

Government LGL

G-LGL

(203 -/+1)X(330 -/+1)

FOLIO

FOLI

(210 -/+1)X(330 -/+1)

Argentine OFFICIO

A-OFI

(220 -/+1)X(340 -/+1)

Mexico OFFICIO

M-OFI

(216 -/+1)X(341 -/+1)

8.5 Manual Feed Pickup Unit

8.5.1 Pickup Operation
0010-8206

T-8-13 Pickup drive: Pickup roller contro: pickup motor (M2) manual feed tray pickup clutch (CL7) manual feed tray pickup solenoid (SL6) Paper feed detection: manual feed sensor (PS35) multiple curling prevention sensor (PS68)

8-14

Chapter 8

DC controller PCB

Multiple curling prevention paper detection signal J510-B14

Manual feed tray paper detection signal J510-B8

Multifeed paper detection signal J510-B2

M2 Pickup motor

CL18

SL6

Pulling roller

Feeding roller

Manual feed tray pickup solenoid Pickup roller Copy paper

To registration rollers

PS68

PS35 PS17 Separation roller

F-8-19

Manual feed tray pickup solenoid drive signal (in the pickup direction) J510-B11

Manual feed tray pickup solenoid drive signal (in the release direction) J510-B12

Manual feed tray pulling clutch drive signal J513-A7

Manual feed tray feeding clutch drive signal J513-A9

CL7

Tray

8.5.2 Detecting the Paper Size

0010-8207

Side guide (rear) Manual feed tray

Manual feed tray power width detection signal J510-B5

Variable registration(SVR1)

Side guide (front)

DC controller PCB
F-8-20

SERVICE MODE: COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > MF-A4R Use it to change the paper width basic value for A4R on the manual feed tray. COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > MF-A6R Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for A6R on the manual feed tray. COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > MF-A4 Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for A4 on the manual feed tray.

8-15

Chapter 8

8.6 Deck
8.6.1 Outline
When the deck or the cassette is slid in, the cassette open/closed sensor turns on and, at the same time, the pickup roller starts to move down, causing the lightblocking plate to leave the lifter sensor, driving the cassette lifter motor and, ultimately, moving up the lifter. The lifter keeps moving up until the lifter sensor detects the surface of paper. (In the case of the deck right/left, a limiter is mounted to stop the lifter if it fails to stop moving up.) When the deck or cassette open button is pushed, the drive gear of the lifter becomes free to let the lifter move down on its own weight.
T-8-14 Right deck Cassette open/closed detection Deck right open/closed sensor (PS23) Left deck Deck left open/closed sensor (PS33) Cassette 3 Cassette 3 open/closed sensor (PS40) Cassette 4 Cassette 4 open/closed sensor (PS45)
0010-8208

Lifter position detection

Lifter sensor (PS21)

Lifter sensor (PS31)

Lifter sensor (PS38)

Lifter sensor (PS43)

Paper presence/absence detection

Deck right paper sensor (PS22)

Deck left paper sensor (PS32)

Cassette 3 paper sensor (PS39) Cassette 4 paper sensor (PS44)

Paper level detection

Deck right paper level middle sensor (PS51) Deck right paper level upper sensor (PS52)

Deck lifter paper level middle sensor (PS54) Cassette 2 paper level upper sensor (PS55)

Cassette 3 paper level detection Cassette 4 paper level detection PCB (variable resistor) PCB (variable resistor)

Lifter upper limiter

Deck right limit sensor (PS24)

Deck left limit sensor (PS34)

---

---

Drive motor

Deck right lifter motor (M13) Deck lifter motor (M14)

Cassette 3 lifter motor (M16)

Cassette 4 lifter motor (M17)

- deck
Paper Pickup roller Feeding roller Pickup sensor

Limit sensor Lifter position lever Pickup roller Lifter position sensor

Separation roller

Paper detecting lever Paper sensor Deck open/ closed sensor

F-8-21

Lifter

8-16

Chapter 8 - cassette
Pickup roller Paper Feeding roller

Pickup sensor

Separation roller Pickup roller

Lifter position sensor Lifter Paper sensor Cassette open/ closed sensor
F-8-22

8.6.2 Lifter Limiter (deck right/left)

When the lifter moves up and the surface of paper reaches the cassette limit sensor, the drive to the lifter motor stops.
0010-8209

DC controller PCB

J514 Q62 CPU Motor drive circuit A4 M13 A5

J511 B13 (PS24) Deck right limit sensor Motor drive signal When the limit signal is received, the motor drive signal is stopped.

DC controller PCB J514 Motor drive circuit B1 M14 B2

Q53 CPU

J518 B5 (PS34) Deck left limit sensor

Motor drive signal

When the lift signal is received, the motor drive signal is stopped.
F-8-23

8.6.3 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper

The presence/absent of paper inside the deck and the cassette is detected by the cassette paper sensor.
0010-8210

8-17

Chapter 8

Paper sensor

Paper detecting lever

Paper

Lifter
F-8-24

Paper sensor Paper detecting lever

Lifter
F-8-25

8.6.4 Detecting the Level of Paper

The machine indicates the level of paper inside the deck and the cassette in four readings (including No Paper) on the control panel.
T-8-15 Level of paper Indication on control panel
0010-8211

100% to about 50% of capacity

about 50% to about 10% of capacity

about 10% of capacity or less

No paper

In the case of the deck right/left, two sensors are used to detect the position of the deck, and combinations of the states of the sensors (on/off) are used to find out the level of paper. For the absence of paper, an exclusive sensor is used.

8-18

Chapter 8

Main controller PCB

DC controller PCB

[2]

[2]

[2]

[1]

[1]

[1]

Paper level (100% to about 50%)

F-8-26 T-8-16 Deck right Paper level [1] Sensor (PS51) [2] Sensor (PS52) Sensor (PS22)

Paper level (about 10% or less)

Paper level (about 50% to about 10%)

Deck left [1] Sensor (PS54) [2] Sensor (PS55) Sensor (PS32)

100% to about 50%

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

About 50% to about 10

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

About 10% or less

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

None

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

In the case of cassette 3/4, the resistance of the variable resistor operating in conjunction with the movement of the lifter drive shaft is used to find out the level of paper.

8-19

Chapter 8

Main controller PCB

Variable resistor Paper level (much)

Paper level (little)

F-8-27

Variable resistor

SERVICE MODE: COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > C3-LVOL Use it to enter a stack height for the cassette 3. (50 sheets) Record the above readings on the service label. COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > C3-HVOL Use it to enter a stack height for the cassette 3. (275 sheets) Record the above readings on the service label. COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > C4-LVOL Use it to enter a stack height for the cassette 4. (50 sheets) Record the above readings on the service label. COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ > C4-HVOL Use it to enter a stack height for the cassette 4. (275 sheets) Record the above readings on the service label.

8.6.5 Cassette Deck Right/Left

The cassette deck right/left is not equipped with a paper detecting mechanism, and the paper size is switched as follows (A4, B5, and LTR): 1. By changing the paper size plate of the cassette. 2. By registering the new paper size in service mode. SERVICE MODE: COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C1 (Use it to specify paper size used in the right deck ) 6: A4[default], 15: B5, 18: LTR COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C2 (Use it to specify paper size used in the left deck ) 6: A4[default], 15: B5, 18: LTR
0010-8212

8.7 Registration Unit

8.7.1 Outline
0010-8213

T-8-17 Registration clutch Registration brake clutch Shift clutch activation timing CL2 CL3 service mode COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REGIST (-100 to 100)

8-20

Chapter 8

Registration roller Pickup motor CL2 M2

CL3

Registration drive signal J509-A5

Registration brake drive signal J509-B7

F-8-28

DC controller PCB

8.7.2 Sequence of Operations (registration brake)

0010-8215

Registration clutch (CL2)

ON OFF ON

Registration brake clutch (CL3) 50 msec (approx.)

OFF

Pre-registration clutch (CL5)

ON OFF ON

Pre-registration brake clutch (CL6) 146 msec (approx.) 146 msec (approx.)

OFF

Note: If paper stops for a long time before the registration roller, ADF original processing time Finisher delivery processing time
F-8-29

As soon as the registration drive signal turns off, the registration brake clutch is kept on depending on the way paper is being fed for a specific period of time to prevent idle rotation otherwise caused by inertia. SERVICE MODE: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REGIST (Adjustment of the timing the registration roller clutch is turned on.) -100 to 100 (unit: 0.1 mm)

8-21

8-22
Reversing flapper solenoid drive signal J519-B9
SL11
SL11

Chapter 8

Reversing flapper solenoid drive signal

PS10

8.8 Duplex Feeding Unit

8.8.1 Copying on the First Side

J519-B9
M12

8.8.2 Copying on the Second Side

Fixing/feeding outlet paper detection signal J508-A11 External delivery detection signal J508-A8
PS9
SL3

Double-sided reversing paper detection signal

Double-sided feeding motor (left)

PS11
M11

Delivery flapper solenoid drive signal

PS12

PS12

J508-B18 Internal delivery detection signal J508-A2 Fixing separation claw paper detection signal J508-A5 Fixing inlet paper detection signal J508-B1

PS6

J519-B10
PS63
PS14

M11 Reversing motor

M19

Reversing motor

Double-sided feeding motor (right)

DC controller PCB

DC controller PCB

F-8-31
PS15
CL16

F-8-30

Pre-confluence paper detection signal

J519-B12

Post-confluence paper detection signal

J519-B13

Lower feeding middle clutch drive signal

J519-B8

Double-sided outlet paper detection signal

PS5

Double-sided reversing paper detection signal J519-B10

PS5

J519-B11
CL17

M11

Registration paper detection signal J509-A2

PS61

J519-B6

Lower feeding right clutch drive signal

0010-8217

0010-8216

Chapter 8

8.8.3 Sequence of Operations

0010-8218

4 sheets of A4-size document

Double-sided printing

Load the documents on ADF. Press the Start key or settle the printer setting. Printing the front side of the first sheet Printing the front side of the second sheet Printing the backside Printing the backside of the first sheet of the second sheet

Pickup motor

M2

Internal delivery sensor (PS 9) Delivery flapper solenoid (SL 3) Double-sided reversing motor (M 11) Fixing/feeding outlet paper sensor (PS 11) Reversing flapper solenoid (SL 11) Double-sided reversing paper sensor (PS 12) Double-sided feeding left motor (M 12) Double-sided feeding right motor (M 19) Pre-confluence paper sensor (PS 14) Post-confluence paper sensor (PS 15) Lower feeding middle clutch (CL 16) Lower feeding right clutch (CL 17) Double-sided outlet sensor (PS 61)

Catching paper Delivering paper

F-8-32

8.8.4 Controlling the reversal motor (M11)

Table shows the function of the reversal motor control circuit, and Figure is a block diagram of the circuit.
T-8-18 Item Power supply Description Supplies 24 V from the no-stacking feeder driver PCB.
0010-8219

Drive signal

Signal (DUP_INV_ON) from the DC controller PCB.

Operating/drive assembly

See Figure.

Control

ON/OFF control Direction control

Error detection

No error code; however, if a fault in the drive of the motor, a jam will occur.

8-23

Chapter 8

DC controller PCB

Stackless feeding driver PCB +24V

J519 A10 CPU IC13 A9 A8 A7 DUP_INV_PWR DUP_INV_ON DUP_INV_B DUP_INV_A

J3602 A7 A8 A9 A10 Interface circuit Interface circuit Interface circuit Interface circuit Motor driver (IC1) A Vcc_A A* B Vcc_B B*

J3607 12 11 10 9 8 7 M11

Phase A excitation control signal

Phase B excitation control signal

F-8-33

8.8.5 Controlling the duplexing feeder motor (M12)

Table shows the functions of the duplexing feeder motor control circuit, and Figure is a block diagram of the circuit.
T-8-19 Item Power supply Description 24 V is supplied by the no-stacking feeding driver PCB.
0010-8220

Drive signal Operating/drive assembly

Signal (DUP_FEED_ON) from the DC controller PCB. See Figure.

Control

ON/OFF control Rotation control No error code; however, a fault in the motor drive will cause a jam.

Error detection

DC controller PCB

Stackless feeding driver PCB +24V

J519 A6 CPU IC13 A5 A4 A3 DUP_FEED_PWR DUP_FEED_ON DUP_FEED_B DUP_FEED_A

J3602 A11 A12 A13 A14 Interface circuit Interface circuit Interface circuit Interface circuit Motor driver (IC3) A Vcc_A A* B Vcc_B B*

J3607 6 5 4 3 2 1 M12

Phase A excitation control signal

Phase B excitation control signal

F-8-34

8.8.6 No-Stacking Operation

Outline of Operations
0010-8221

8-24

Chapter 8 For instance, no-stacking operation takes place as follows when making one set of doublesided copies of 10 originals. 1. The 1st sheet is picked up from the deck right.

F-8-35

2. The 1st side is printed on the 1st sheet. The 2nd sheet is picked up.

F-8-36

3. The 3rd side is printed on the 2nd sheet. The 1st sheet is moved to the holding tray assembly. The 3rd sheet is picked up.

F-8-37

4. The 1st sheet is moved to the reversing assembly.

8-25

Chapter 8

5. The 1st sheet is moved to the lower feeding assembly. The 5th side is printed on the 3rd sheet.

6. The 1st sheet is re-picked up from the lower feeding assembly.

7. The 2nd side is printed on the 1st sheet. The 2nd sheet is kept in wait, and the 4th sheet is picked up.

8-26

1
F-8-38

1
F-8-39

3
1
F-8-40

Chapter 8

2
1
8. The 7th side is printed on the 4th sheet, and the 1st sheet is discharged.

2
7

9. The 4th side is printed on the 2nd sheet, and the 3rd sheet is kept in wait in the lower feeding assembly. The 5th sheet is picked up.

2 1

F-8-43

10. The 2nd sheet is discharged. The 9th side is printed on the 5th sheet.

4
9

7
5
2 1

F-8-44

5
3
F-8-41

F-8-42

8-27

Chapter 8 11. The 6th side is printed on the 3rd sheet.

4 2 1 3

F-8-45

12. The 3rd sheet is discharged.

6

4 2 1 3

F-8-46

13. The 8th side is printed on the 4th sheet.

6 4 2 1 3 5

F-8-47

14. The 4th sheet is discharged, and the 10th side is printed on the 5th sheet.
8
10

6 4 2 1
F-8-48

15. The 5th sheet is discharged.

8-28

7
9

5 3

Chapter 8

10
9
8 6 4 2 1
F-8-49 T-8-20 Related Service Mode COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-REFE Use it to adjust the image write start position in main scanning direction for re-pickup. (-10 to 10 mm)

8.8.7 Detecting the Horizontal Registration Position

0010-8222

Paper position detection

By the horizontal registration sensor (PS18)

Detection start timing

By the post-confluence sensor (PS15)

Drive

By the horizontal registration motor (M15)

Position measurement

By controlling the horizontal registration motor pulses (1 pulse = about 0.16 mm)

Related service mode

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-REFE

Related error code

E051: The home position cannot be detected within a specific period of time.

7 5 3
T-8-21

8-29

Chapter 8

Horizontal registration motor (M15)

Horizontal registration sensor (PS18)

paper

Moves through the sensor.

F-8-50

The horizontal registration sensor moves to the start position (A4 detection position) when the main power switch is turned on or the front cover is closed, and moves to a detection position to suit the size of paper expected in the lower feeding assembly. Its position of etection is "paper width +2 mm." The paper detection mechanism starts when paper moved to the lower feeding assembly has moved past the confluence sensor (PI 15) and has been moved over a specific distance (about 10mm past the horizontal registration sensor). The position of paper is detected with reference to the start position and by finding out the difference between the start position and the actual paper position from the number of drive pulses (1 pulse = about 0.16 mm) of the motor.
The main power switch is turned on. The start position is detected. The paper position is detected.

Double-sided reversing motor (M11) Lower feeding middle clutch (CL16) Lower feeding rear clutch (CL17) Post-confluence sensor (PS15) Horizontal registration motor (M15) Horizontal registration sensor (PS18) Home position The position where the paper has moved about 10mm past the registration sensor The paper position is detected.

Start position Start position+2mm

The paper moves to the backside. The paper moves to the front side.
F-8-51

8.8.8 Controlling the Horizontal Registration Motor (M15)

Table shows the functions of the reversal motor control circuit, and the Figure is a block diagram of the circuit.
0010-8224

8-30

Chapter 8
T-8-22 Item Power supply Description 24 V is supplied by the no-stacking feeding driver PCB.

Drive signal

Signal (SIDE_REGI_M_ON) from the DC controller PCB.

Operating/drive assembly

See Figure.

Control

ON/OFF control Rotation control Stop position retention

Error detection

Error code "E051"

DC controller PCB

Stackless feeding driver PCB +24V

J519

J3602 SIDE_REGI_M_PWR A14 A7 A13 A12 A11 SIDE_REGI_M_ON SIDE_REGI_M_B SIDE_REGI_M_A A8 A9 A10

J3603 Interface circuit Interface circuit Interface circuit Interface circuit Motor driver (IC2) A Vcc_A A7 A8 A6 A5 A9 A4 M15

CPU IC13

A* B Vcc_B B*

Phase A excitation control signal

Phase B excitation control signal

F-8-52

8.9 Delivery
8.9.1 Reversal Delivery
The copier discharges paper either in face-up delivery or in face-down delivery mode.
T-8-23 Delivery Face-up Copying operation - Making copies on transparencies (However, the images will be mirror images.) - USER MODE Setting the face-up delivery mode by Printer Settings > Settings > Face Up/Down
0010-8225

Face-down

- Other than above

8-31

Chapter 8

One-way clutch Main motor

M1

SL3

Delivery flapper solenoid

CL21

SL11

M11

Reversing flapper solenoid Delivery speed switching clutch

Reversing assembly

Reversal motor
F-8-53 T-8-24

Parts (notation) Main motor (M1) Delivery flapper solenoid (SL3) Delivery speed switching clutch (CL21) Reversing flapper solenoid (SL11) Reversal motor (M11)

Description Drives the feeding roller. Turns on in face-up mode to lead paper to the delivery assembly. Turns on in reversal delivery mode to speed up the rotation of the external delivery roller. Turns off in reversal delivery mode to lead paper to the reversing assembly. Moves paper to the reversing assembly.

8.10 Detecting the Double-Feed

8.10.1 Detecting Double Feeding
The machine uses the ultra-sonic wave sensor (for transmission, reception) located downstream of the registration roller to check for double feeding, and stops the ongoing printing operation upon detection. Ultrasonic waves are often characterized as follows, and may be used for the detection of double feeding regardless of the type of medium used (plain paper, heavy paper, colored paper, transparency, etc.). - propagation is subject to significant attenuation between different densities (e.g., air and paper). - propagation is free of attenuation in regard to the color or thickness of the object being checked.
[3] [2]
0011-7360

[1]
F-8-54

[1] Double feeding sensor (transmission) [2] Double feeding sensor (reception) [3] Registration roller

MEMO: Some models (for sale in specific countries) may not come standard with this detection mechanism. Its use requires a Double Feeding Detection Kit (optional). <Timing of Detection> - interval extending several 100s of msec after the registration roller clutch goes on

8-32

Chapter 8

<Sequence of Operation> 1) The mechanism is started. 2) The machine identifies double feeding. 3) The machine turns off the fixing motor as soon as the paper reaches the fixing nip area. - The paper stops at the fixing nip area, with paper found downstream thereof discharged outside the machine. - The control panel screen indicates the presence of a jam (0C00).
1) [4] [1] [2]

[3] 2)

3)

F-8-55

[1] Registration roller [2] Double feeding sensor (transmission) [3] Double feeding sensor (reception) [4] Fixing roller Error code: E850-0000 (The double-feeding detection unit is faulty) The double feeding sensor (reception) cannot attain a specific ultrasonic signal level. Service Mode: COPIER > OPTION > BODY > OVLP-MD (Level 1) Use it to enable/disable the double feeding detection mechanism. 0: enabled; 1: disabled - To temporarily disable the mechanism (as for a fault or wrong detection), set it to '1'.

8-33

Chapter 8

8.11.2 Cassette Lifter Motor

8.11 Parts Replacement Procedure

8.11.1 Cassette Pickup Assembly 8.11.1.1 Removing the Right Deck / Cassette Pickup Assembly
The removal procedure of a right door and a left door is the same. An illustration makes a right door an example and explains it. 1) Slide out the right deck / cassette 3 / cassette 4. 2) Open the right upper cover and the right lower cover.
0011-0030

8.11.2.1 Removing the Lifter Motor (M16/M17) of the Cassette (3/4)

1) Slide out the front deck (right); then, slide out the cassette 3/4. 2) Remove the front lower right cover of the cassette assembly as instructed under "Removing the Vertical Path Roller 2." 3) Remove the two fixing screws [1] of the lifter motor (M16/M17), and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the lifter motor [3].
0010-8958

An attempt to remove the pickup assembly without removing the deck will cause the lifter to get trapped, not holding the pickup assembly from sliding out. 3) Remove the mounting screw [1], and detach the connector cover [2]; then, disconnect the connector [3]. 4) Remove the three mounting screws [4], and detach the pickup assembly [5].
[4]

[3]

[2]

[3]

[1]

[2]

[2] [4] [3]

F-8-59

8.11.3 Right Deck Pickup Assembly 8.11.3.1 Removing the Right Deck / Cassette Pickup Assembly
The removal procedure of a right door and a left door is the same. An illustration makes a right door an example and explains it. 1) Slide out the right deck / cassette 3 / cassette 4. 2) Open the right upper cover and the right lower cover.
0011-8492

[1] [5]
F-8-56

An attempt to remove the pickup assembly without removing the deck will cause the lifter to get trapped, not holding the pickup assembly from sliding out. 3) Remove the mounting screw [1], and detach the connector cover [2]; then, disconnect the connector [3]. 4) Remove the three mounting screws [4], and detach the pickup assembly [5].
[4]

8.11.1.2 Removing the Vertical Path 3/4 Sensor and the Cassette 3/4 Pickup Sensor
1) Remove the cassette 3/4 pickup assembly. 2) Remove the screw, and detach the static eliminator [2]. 3) Remove the screw [3], and detach the pickup assembly sensor base.
[2] [4] [3]
0011-0032

[2] [4] [3]

[1]

F-8-57

4) Disconnect the connector [1] (1 pc. each), and free the claw; then, detach the vertical path 3/4 sensor [2] and the cassette 3/4 pickup sensor [3].
[3] [1]

[1] [5]
F-8-60

8.11.4 Left Deck Pickup Assembly

[1] [2]
F-8-58

8.11.4.1 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Assembly

1) Slide out the left deck. 2) Remove the two screws [1] found on the left and right sides of the left deck[2]; then, detach the left deck[2].
0011-8491

8-34

Chapter 8

[2]

[1]

[1]
F-8-65

[2]

[1]
F-8-61

When removing the scanner sensor, be sure to remove the paint used to lock the claw in place in advance to prevent breaking the claw. When mounting it, be sure the claw is not displaced or the sensor is not disoriented.

3) Open the front cover. 4) Disconnect the connector [1] from inside the machine, and remove the locking support [2].

8.11.6 Right Deck Pickup Sensor 8.11.6.1 Removing the Right Deck Feed Sensor/Right Deck Pickup Sensor
1) Remove the front deck (right) pickup assembly. 2) Remove the guide plate [1].
0010-8987

[1]

[2]

[1]

F-8-62

5) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the two pickup fixing plates [2]; then, detach the left deck pickup assembly [3].

Keep supporting the pickup assembly; otherwise, the pickup assembly could drop when the fixing plate is removed.
[3] [2] [1] [1]

F-8-66

3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the stack eliminator [2]. 4) Remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the pickup assembly sensor base [4].

[3] [4]
[1]

[3]

[2] [1]
F-8-63 F-8-67

8.11.5 Left Deck Pickup Sensor 8.11.5.1 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Sensor
1) Remove the front deck (left) pickup assembly. 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the pickup sensor unit [2].
0010-8963

5) Disconnect the connector [1] (1 pc. each), and free the claw; then, detach the right deck feed sensor [2] and the right deck pickup sensor [3].

[1] [2]

[3]
F-8-68

[1]
F-8-64

[2]

When removing the scanner sensor, be sure to remove the paint used to lock the claw in place in advance to prevent breaking the claw. When mounting it, be sure the claw is not displaced or the sensor is not disoriented.

3) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the left deck pickup sensor [2].

8-35

Chapter 8

8.11.7 Manual Tray Assembly 8.11.7.1 Removing the Manual Feeder Tray Unit
1) Open the manual feeder tray cover. 2) Remove the door tape [1]. - 1 screw [2] 3) Remove the connector cover [3]. - 1 screw [4]
[2] [1]
0010-8989

8.11.7.2 Fitting the Side Guide Timing Belt for the Manual Feed Tray Assembly
Butt the rack plate [1] of the manual feed tray against section A (open state). Move the slide volume [2] in the direction of B, and fit the timing belt [3] to the pulley [4].
0010-8990

[3] [4] [1] [4] A

B [2]
F-8-73

8.11.8 Manual Feed Pull-Out Roller Unit 8.11.8.1 Removing the Manual Feeder Pull-Off Roller Unit
[4]
F-8-69
0011-8149

[3]

1) Open the manual feeder tray cover. 2) Remove the connector cover [1]. - 1 screw [2]

4) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the cable from the plate of the host machine (fixed in place using a cable clamp).

[1]

[1]
F-8-70

5) Remove the stopper plate [1]. - 1 screw [2]

[2]
[1]
F-8-74

3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the cable clamp fixed to the plate.

[1]
[2]
F-8-71

6) Remove the manual feeder tray unit [1] in the direction of the arrow.
[1]

F-8-75

4) Release the lever [1] in upward direction; then, slide out the pull-off roller unit [2], and remove the 2 screws [3].

F-8-72

8-36

Chapter 8

[3]

Direction of rotation

[2]

[1]

Collar (silver)
F-8-79

front of the machine

[2] [1]
F-8-76

- The rear pickup roller is identified by its gold collar. When mounting the pickup roller [3] to the pickup assembly, be sure that the round marking [4] on the side of the roller and the round marking [5] on its collar (gold) are toward the machine's rear.
[4] Direction of rotation [5]

5) Remove the pull-off roller unit [1] in the direction of the arrow.

[3]

Collar (gold)
F-8-80

rear of the machine

8.11.10 Manual Feed Roller 8.11.10.1 Removing the Feeding Roller

[1]
F-8-77
0010-8994

1) Remove the pickup roller, and remove the stop ring. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the manual feed tray guide [2].
[1] [2] [1]

8.11.9 Manual Pickup Roller 8.11.9.1 Removing the Pickup Roller

1) Open the manual tray paper guide. 2) Remove the left/right stop rings [1] (two each), shutters [2] (two each), spacers [3] (two each), and rolls [4] (two each).
0010-8992

[1] [2]

[3]

[4]

[4]

[3]

[2]

[1]

F-8-81

3) Remove the stop ring [3] from the front of the feeding roller assembly, and move the feeding roller assembly [5] together with the timing belt [4] to detach.

F-8-78

If the multifeeder is used during installation or if the multifeeder has not been used for a long time, pickup can fail. If such happens, detach the protective sheet from the sponge roller, and dry wipe the sponge roller.

8.11.9.2 Mounting the Pickup Roller

Mount the pickup roller by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in mind: - The front pickup roller and the rear pickup roller are not interchangeable. - The front pickup roller is identified by its silver- colored collar. When mounting the pickup roller [1] to the pickup assembly, be sure that the round marking [2] on the collar (silver) is toward the machine's front,
0010-8993

[5] [4] [3]

F-8-82

8.11.10.2 Orientation of the Feeding Roller

When mounting the feeding roller [6] to the manual feed tray pickup assembly, be sure that the belt pulley [7] and the round marking [8] are toward the machine's front.
0010-8998

8-37

Chapter 8

[8]

[4] [3] [2] [1]

5 5

[7] [6]
F-8-83

front of the machine

F-8-87
0010-8999

8.11.10.3 Removing the multiple curling prevention roller

1) Open the manual feeder tray cover and the upper right cover. 2) Remove the manual feeder tray unit. 3) Remove the manual feeder pull-off roller unit. 4) Remove the rear upper right cover. 5) Remove the hopper upper cover. 6) Remove the hopper right cover. 7) Remove the right inside front cover [1]. - 2 screws [2]

8.11.10.4 Mounting the multiple curling prevention roller

1) Set the multiple curling prevention roller assembly to the main body. 2) Mount the rear fixing plate 2 and the rear fixing plate 1 in the order indicated; then, secure them in place with the mounting screw [3].
0010-9007

[2] [1]

F-8-84

8) Remove the rail base (front) [1]. - 2 screws [2]

Rear fixing plate 2

F-8-88

When mounting the multiple curling prevention roller, hook the two claws of the rear fixing plate 2 on the three holes in the rear side plate; then, mount the rear fixing plate 1 to secure.

[2]

8.11.11 Manual Separation Roller

[1]

8.11.11.1 Removing the Separation Roller

0010-9031

[3]
F-8-85

9) Remove the screw [2], and detach the rear fixing plate [1]; then, detach the rear fixing plate [3].
[3]

[1]

[2]
F-8-89

[4]

[1]

[1]
F-8-86

[2]

When removing the separation roller, pay attention to the bushing at the front. It will slip off.

10) Remove the following at the front and the rear: E-ring [1], space [2], bearing [3]. Then, detach the multifeeder curl-removing roller [4]. Initially, the urethane sponge of the part is pink, and changes over time (accelerated if exposed to light). Its tone will change from pink to orange and to yellow; it is a general characteristic of urethane sponge, and no physical deterioration (in performance) exists because of changes in color, and the part is not identified by color.

8-38

Chapter 8

Urethane sponge pieces

[2] [1]

[3]

F-8-90

8.11.12 Manual Feed Tray paper sensor 8.11.12.1 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Paper Sensor
1) Open the manual feed tray unit, and remove the door tape from the machine side. 2) Remove the mounting screw [1], and detach the solenoid cover [3]. (A claw [2] is hooked on the L-shaped opening; pull it down lightly, and move it as if to open it.)
[1] [3]
0010-9032

F-8-93

6) Open the manual feed tray. 7) Remove the 11 mounting screws [1], and detach the manual feed tray pickup assembly [2].

[1] [1] [2]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

F-8-94

8) Remove the 2 mounting screws [1], and detach the upper guide plate [2].

[2]
[2]

[1]

F-8-91

3) Disconnect the connector [1]. 4) Remove heater mounting screw [2], and detach the pickup roller releasing solenoid [3] together with the support plate.

F-8-95

9) Remove the 2 mounting screws [1] found at the bottom, and detach the lower cover [2].
[1] [2] [1]

[2]

[1]

[3]
F-8-92 F-8-96

5) Remove the screw [1], and detach the connector cover [2]; then, disconnect the connector [3].

10) Remove the 2 mounting screws [1], and detach the middle guide plate [2].

8-39

Chapter 8

0.40.2mm

[1] [2]

[2]

F-8-97

F-8-101

11) Remove the 2 mounting screws [2] of the sensor unit [1].

8.11.14 Registration Roller 8.11.14.1 Removing the Pre-Registration Roller

1) Open the middle right cover, and remove the screw [1]; detach the connector cover [2], and remove the two screws [3]; then, detach the rear fixing plate [4].
0010-9050

[2]

[1]
F-8-98

[2]

12) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the sensor unit [2]. 13) Remove the sensor [3] from the sensor unit [2].
[3] [1]

[3]

0.40.2mm

[1]

[2]

[2]
F-8-99

8.11.13 Manual Feed Pickup Solenoid 8.11.13.1 Position of the Pickup Roller Release Solenoid of the Manual Feed Tray
To make fine adjustments, slide the solenoid in the direction of A so that the gap between the shutter [1] and the shutter plate [2] is 0.4 +/-0.2 mm while the solenoid is being pulled.
0010-9043

[1] [4] [3]

F-8-102

2) Remove the screw [5], and detach the front fixing plate [6]; then, detach the preregistration roller assembly [7].
[6] [7]

F-8-100

[5]
F-8-103

3) Remove the two springs [8], E-ring [9], and arm support shaft [10] at the front. 4) Remove the E-ring [11], spacer [12], and bearing [13].

8-40

Chapter 8

[8]

[A]

[B]
F-8-107

[10] [13] [12] [11] [9]

F-8-104

When mounting the registration clutch, be sure to hook the clutch stop [A] on the protrusion [B] of the clutch cover.

8.11.16 Registration Brake Clutch 8.11.16.1 Removing the Registration Brake Clutch
1) Remove the transfer separation charging assembly front cover. (1 screw) 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and loosen the 2 screws [2] (w/ hex hole); then, detach the registration brake clutch [3].
[2]
0010-9183

5) Perform steps 3) and 4) for the rear; then, detach the pre-registration roller assembly.

8.11.15 Registration Clutch 8.11.15.1 Removing the Registration Clutch

1) Remove the fixing/feed unit. 2) Shift up the releasing lever. 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the harness of the clutch from the clutch cover [2]. 4) Remove the screw [3], and detach the clutch cover [2] and the bearing [4].
[2]
0010-9136

[3]

[4]

[2]
F-8-108

[1]

[3]
F-8-105

[1]

8.11.17 Fixing/Feed Unit 8.11.17.1 Removing the Fixing/Feed Unit

1) Slide out the fixing/feed unit. 2) Remove the 2 stepped screws [1].
0010-9186

5) Loosen the 2 adjusting screws [1], and detach the registration clutch [2].
[2] [1]

[1]
[1]
F-8-106

[1]
F-8-109

3) Remove the fixing/feed unit [1] from the slide rail [2].

8-41

Chapter 8

[3]

[4] [5] [2] [1]

[1] [2]
F-8-110

F-8-113

3) Remove the E-ring [1] of the front and the rear of the roller shaft, and move the bearings [2] toward the inside; then, detach the guide plate [3].

Be sure to work as a group of two.

8.11.18 Feeding Roller 8.11.18.1 Removing the Feeding Roller

1) Remove the pickup assembly from the main body. 2) Remove the screw [2], and detach the feeding roller cover [1]. 3) Remove the stop ring [3] form the front of the fixing roller. 4) Remove the stop ring [4] and the pickup roller [5] at the font; then, detach the feeding roller [7] together with the timing belt [6].
[1] [2] [4] [5] [3] [7] [6]
0010-9187

[3]

[2] [1]

[2]

[1]

F-8-114

4) Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the bearing [2] to detach the vertical path roller [3].
[3]

F-8-111

8.11.18.2 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Deck/ Cassette Pickup Assembly
When mounting the feeding roller assembly to the deck/cassette pickup assembly, be sure that the belt pulley [2] is to the front of the machine. When mounting the feeding roller [3] to the feeding roller shaft [4], be sure that the round marking [5] is toward the front of the machine.
[3] [5]
0010-9188

[1]
F-8-115

[2]

8.11.19.2 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 2

1) Slide out the deck (right) and the caste 3/4. 2) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the right lower front cover [2].
[1] [1]
0010-9309

[4] [2] [1]

F-8-112
(front)

8.11.19 Vertical Path Roller 8.11.19.1 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 1/3/4
1) Remove the deck right/cassette pickup assembly. 2) Remove the E-ring [1] and the bearing [2] from the front, and remove the grip ring [3], clutch [4], and bearing [5] from the rear.
0010-9189

[1]
F-8-116

[2]

3) Disconnect the connector [1] and the screw [2]; then, detach the guide plate [3].

8-42

Chapter 8

[2]

[3]

[1]

[3] [1]
F-8-117

4) Remove the E-ring [1] at the front of the roller shaft, and move the bearing [2] toward the inside; then, detach the vertical path roller 2 [3].
[2] [1] [3]

[2] [1]
F-8-120

4) Remove the two screws [4], and detach the fixing feeding unit releasing lever support plate [5].

[5] [4] [4]

F-8-118

8.11.20 Fixing Feeding Unit Releasing Lever Sensor 8.11.20.1 Removing the Fixing Feeding Unit Releasing lever Sensor
1) Slide out the fixing feeding unit from the main body. 2) Detach the fixing feeding unit front cover. 3) Release the claw of the fixing feeding unit releasing lever sensor [1].
[1]
0010-9313

F-8-121

5) Remove the E-ring [6], bearing [7], and three screws [8].
[8] [6] [7]

F-8-119

F-8-122

8.11.21 Feeding Belt 8.11.21.1 Removing the Feeding Belt

1) Slide out the fixing feeding unit from the main body. 2) Remove the fixing feeding unit front cover. 3) Disconnect the three connectors [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the harness guide [3].
0010-9314

6) Remove the E-ring [9], gear [10], pin [11], three screws [12], E-ring [13], and bearing [14].
[13] [14]

[12] [11]
F-8-123

[9]

[10]

8-43

Chapter 8 7) Remove the feeding belt unit [15], and detach the feeding belt [16] and the postcard belt [17].

8.11.22.3 Removing the Front Cover of the Duplexing Unit

1) Remove the 4 screws [1] and the knob [2]; then, detach the front cover [3].
[3] [2] [1]
0010-9341

[17] [16]

[16]

[15]
F-8-124

[1]
F-8-127

8.11.22 Duplexing Unit 8.11.22.1 Removing the Duplexing Unit

1) Slide out the duplexing unit from the main body. 2) Holding the left and right grips of the duplexing unit, detach it from the main body.
0010-9323

8.11.22.4 Removing the Duplex Left Feed Motor

1) Remove the duplex feed fan unit. 2) Loosen the screw [1]; then, while pulling the tension support plate [2] in the direction of the arrow, tighten the screw [1] (to loosen the tension of the belt [3]). 3) Disconnect the connector [4], and remove the 2 screws [5]; then, detach the duplex left feed motor [6].
[3] [6] [1]
0010-9346

Duplexing unit

Grip

Grip
F-8-125

[5]

[2]
F-8-128

[4]

Take care not to trap your hand between the grip and the rail. Do not place the duplexing unit where it is subjected to damage.

8.11.22.5 Removing the Duplex Right Feed Motor

1) Remove the front cover of the duplex unit. (4 screws, 3 knobs) 2) Loosen the screw [1]; then, while pulling the tension support plate [2] in the direction of the arrow, tighten the screw [1] (to loosen the tension of the belt [3]). 3) Disconnect the connector [4], and remove the 2 screws [5]; then, detach the duplex right feed motor [6].
[3] [5] [6] [1]
0010-9349

8.11.22.2 Removing the Reversal Motor

1) Remove the duplex feed fan unit. 2) Loosen the screw [1]; then, while pulling the tension support plate [2] in the direction of the arrow, tighten the screw [1] (to loosen the tension of the belt [2]). 3) Disconnect the connector [4], and remove the 2 screws [5]; then, detach the reversal motor [6].
[1] [2] [3] [6] [5]
0010-9336

[5]
F-8-129

[2]

[4]

[5]
F-8-126

[4]

8.11.22.6 Removing the Reversing Flapper Solenoid

1) Remove the duplexing unit from the main body. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the reversing flapper solenoid [3].
0010-9355

8-44

Chapter 8

[1]

[1]

[1]

[2]
F-8-133

3) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the screw [4]; then, detach the horizontal registration motor [5].
[2]
F-8-130

[3]

[4]

[5]

[3]

8.11.22.7 Removing the Left Deck Feed Sensor

1) Slide out the duplex unit assembly. 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the sensor base [2].
[2]
0010-9360

F-8-134

[1]
F-8-131

8.11.22.9 Removing the Deck (left) Draw- Out Clutch/ Lower Feeder Middle Clutch
1) Remove the duplexing unit from the main body. 2) Remove the front cover. 3) Remove the two set screws [2] to detach the locking ring [1]; then, disconnect the connector [3], and detach the clutch [4]. (Be sure to perform this for each pair.)
[3]
0010-9366

3) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the claw to detach the left deck feed sensor [2].
[2]

[1]

[2]

F-8-132

When removing the scanner sensor, be sure to remove the paint used to lock the claw in place in advance to prevent breaking the claw. When mounting it, be sure the claw is not displaced or the sensor is not disoriented.
[1]

[2]

[4]

8.11.22.8 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor

1) Remove the duplexing unit from the main body. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the upper cover [2].
0010-9361

No gap.
F-8-135

When fixing the lock ring in place, be sure that it is perpendicular in relation to the D-cut face and one of the 2 set screws.

8-45

Chapter 8

8.11.22.10 Removing the Lower Feeding Right Clutch

1) Remove the duplexing unit from the main body. 2) Remove the front cover. 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the two screws [2]; then, detach the latch plate [3].
0010-9373

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]

[1]
F-8-136

[3]

[2]

F-8-139

4) Remove the bearing [4] and spacer [5]; then, detach the lower feeding right clutch [6].
[4] [5] [6]

2) Disconnect the connector [3]; then, remove the screw [4], and detach the postconfluence sensor [5].
[3]

[5]

[4]
F-8-137

8.11.22.11 Removing the Pre-Confluence Sensor

1) Disconnect the connector [1] from the bottom of the duplexing unit; then, remove the screw [2], and detach the preconfluence sensor [3].
0010-9374

F-8-140

8.11.22.13 Removing the Front Deck (lifter) Draw-Out Sensor

[1] [3] [2]
[1]

1) Disconnect the connector [1] from the bottom of the duplexing unit; then, remove the screw [2], and detach the front deck (left) feed sensor [3].

0010-9376

[2]
F-8-138

[3]
0010-9375

8.11.22.12 Removing the Post-Confluence Sensor

1) Remove the two screws [1] from the bottom of the duplexing unit; then, detach the left deck feeding roller assembly [2].

F-8-141

8.11.22.14 Removing the Horizontal Registration Sensor

1) Remove the duplexing unit from the main body. 2) Remove the front cover. 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the three screws [2].
0010-9377

8-46

Chapter 8

[2]

[4]

[5]
F-8-146

[4]

3) Detach the separation roller [6] from the separation roller shaft mount.
[6]

[1]
F-8-142

[2]

4) Remove the screw [3], and detach the duplexing unit right fixing assembly [4]; then, remove the two screws [5] at the rear, and detach the right grip plate [6].
F-8-147

[6] [5]

Initially, the urethane sponge of the part is pink, and changes over time (accelerated if exposed to light). Its tone will change from pink to orange and to yellow; it is a general characteristic of urethane sponge, and no physical deterioration (in performance) exists because of changes in color, and the part is not identified by color.
Urethane sponge pieces

[4]

[3]
F-8-143

When mounting the right grip plate, be sure that the boss on the grip plate is in the hole of the side plate. 5) Remove the screw [7], and detach the horizontal registration sensor [8].
F-8-148

8.11.23.2 Orientation of the Separation Roller

Keep the following in mind when replacing the separation roller.
Wider groove Narrower groove
0010-9380

rear of the machine

[8]

[7]
F-8-144

front of the machine

F-8-149

8.11.23 Separation Roller 8.11.23.1 Removing the Separation Roller

1) Remove the two mounting screws [1], and remove the feeding guide plate [2]; then, detach the open/close guide [3]. (Skip this step for the pickup assembly of the front deck left.)
0010-9378

If mounted in the wrong orientation, interference with the clamp washer can lead to faults. Take care.

8.11.24 Double Feeding Detection Sensor ( Transmission ) 8.11.24.1 Before Starting the Work
[1] [2]
F-8-145
0011-8281

[3]

[1]

2) Remove the two mounting screws [4], and remove the separation roller assembly [5] from the joint. (If for the pickup assembly of the front deck left, remove one screw.)

1) Slide to the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Remove the transfer/separation charging assembly cover. 3) Remove the transfer/separation charging assembly. 4) Remove the 2 knobs [1]. - 2 screws [2]

8-47

Chapter 8

[1]
[1]

[1]

[2]
F-8-150

5) Remove the fixing/feeding unit cover [1]. - 2 screws [2]

[1]
F-8-153

9) Remove the bushing [1] in the direction of the arrow, and remove the registration transfer unit [2]. - E-ring [3] - bushing [4]

[2]
F-8-151

[1]

6) Free the 2 cables [1] from the edge saddle [1]; then, disconnect the 2 connectors [3]. 7) Remove the registration roller [4]. - 2 screws [5] (using hex wrench)
[4] [5]
[2]

[2]

[4]

[3]

[3]
F-8-154

[1]

[1]

8.11.24.2 Removing the Double-Feed Sensor (transmitting)

1) Turn over the registration transfer unit, and detach the harness protective sheet [1].
0011-8283

[2] [3]
F-8-152

8) Remove the 3 screws [1].

[1]
F-8-155

2) Disconnect the cable [1]. - 1 edge saddle [2] - 1 clamp [3] - 1 connector [4]

8-48

Chapter 8

[1]

[2]

[4]

[1]

[3]

[2]

F-8-156

3) Remove the double-feed sensor assembly [1]. - 1 screws [2]

[2]
F-8-159

[2]

[1]

2) Remove the pre-transfer charging assembly fan duct [1]. - 3 screws [2]
[1]

F-8-157

[2]
F-8-160

4) Remove the double-feed sensor (transmitting) [1]. - 1 screw [2] - 1 sensor holder [3]
[2]

3) Remove the double-feed sensor (receiving) [1]. - 2 screws [2] - 1 connector [3]
[1]

[3]

[1]
[3]
F-8-161

[2]

F-8-158

8.11.25 Double Feeding Detection Sensor ( Reception ) 8.11.25.1 Before Starting the Work
1) Remove the developing assembly. 2) Remove the primary charging assembly. 3) Remove the pre-transfer charging assembly. 4) Remove the process unit.
0011-8282

8.11.25.2 Removing the Double-Feed Sensor (receiving)

1) Remove the pre-transfer charging assembly fan duct assembly [1]. - 4 screws [2]
0011-8284

8-49

Chapter 9 Fixing System

Contents

Contents
9.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................................................................9-1
9.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1 9.1.2 Major Components....................................................................................................................................................................... 9-1 9.1.3 Overview of the Fixing Drive System ......................................................................................................................................... 9-2 9.1.4 Controlling the Fixing Roller Drive............................................................................................................................................. 9-3 9.1.5 Controlling the Cleaning Web Drive ........................................................................................................................................... 9-3 9.1.6 Controlling the Thermistor Reciprocating Mechanism ............................................................................................................... 9-4 9.1.7 Controlling the Upper Separation Claw Reciprocating Mechanism............................................................................................ 9-4 9.1.8 Controlling the Fixing Inlet Sensor Drive ................................................................................................................................... 9-4

9.2 Basic Sequence ..............................................................................................................................................................9-6

9.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations ..................................................................................................................................................... 9-6

9.3 Various Control Mechanisms.........................................................................................................................................9-7

9.3.1 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature ................................................................................................................................. 9-7
9.3.1.1 Controlling the Down Sequence .....................................................................................................................................................................9-7 9.3.1.2 Transparency Mode.........................................................................................................................................................................................9-7 9.3.1.3 Heavy Paper Mode ..........................................................................................................................................................................................9-8 9.3.1.4 Power Save Mode ...........................................................................................................................................................................................9-8

9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Bias Temperature ......................................................................................................................... 9-9

9.3.2.1 Outline.............................................................................................................................................................................................................9-9

9.4 Protective Functions.....................................................................................................................................................9-10

9.4.1 Error Detection........................................................................................................................................................................... 9-10

9.5 Parts Replacement Procedure.......................................................................................................................................9-12

9.5.1 Fixing Unit ................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-12
9.5.1.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly....................................................................................................................................................................9-12

9.5.2 Upper Fixing Roller ................................................................................................................................................................... 9-13

9.5.2.1 Removing the Fixing Upper Roller...............................................................................................................................................................9-13 9.5.2.2 Mounting the Fixing Upper Roller................................................................................................................................................................9-14

9.5.3 Lower Fixing Roller................................................................................................................................................................... 9-14

9.5.3.1 Removing the Lower Fixing Roller ..............................................................................................................................................................9-14 9.5.3.2 Adjusting the Lower Roller Pressure (nip) ...................................................................................................................................................9-14

9.5.4 External Delivery Roller ............................................................................................................................................................ 9-14

9.5.4.1 Removing the External Delivery Roller........................................................................................................................................................9-14

9.5.5 Internal Delivery Roller ............................................................................................................................................................. 9-15

9.5.5.1 Removing the Internal Delivery Roller.........................................................................................................................................................9-15

9.5.6 Main Thermistor ........................................................................................................................................................................ 9-15

9.5.6.1 Removing the Main Thermistor ....................................................................................................................................................................9-15 9.5.6.2 Mounting the Main Thermistor .....................................................................................................................................................................9-16

9.5.7 Sub Thermistor........................................................................................................................................................................... 9-16

9.5.7.1 Removing the Sub Thermistor ......................................................................................................................................................................9-16

9.5.8 Thermal Switch .......................................................................................................................................................................... 9-16

9.5.8.1 Removing the Thermal Switch Unit .............................................................................................................................................................9-16 9.5.8.2 Mounting the Thermal Switch Unit ..............................................................................................................................................................9-16

9.5.9 Fixing Heater ............................................................................................................................................................................. 9-17

9.5.9.1 Removing the Main/Sub Heater....................................................................................................................................................................9-17 9.5.9.2 Mounting the Main/Sub Heater.....................................................................................................................................................................9-17 9.5.9.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Heater........................................................................................................................................9-17

9.5.10 Fixing Cleaning Belt ................................................................................................................................................................ 9-17

9.5.10.1 Removing the Fixing Cleaning Belt............................................................................................................................................................9-17 9.5.10.2 Mounting the Fixing Cleaning Belt.............................................................................................................................................................9-18

9.5.11 Claw Jam Sensor...................................................................................................................................................................... 9-18

9.5.11.1 Removing the Claw Jam Sensor .................................................................................................................................................................9-18

9.5.12 External Delivery Sensor ......................................................................................................................................................... 9-19

Contents

9.5.12.1 Remove the External Delivery Sensor........................................................................................................................................................ 9-19

9.5.13 Internal Delivery Sensor .......................................................................................................................................................... 9-19

9.5.13.1 Removing the Internal Delivery Sensor...................................................................................................................................................... 9-19

9.5.14 Reversal Sensor........................................................................................................................................................................ 9-19

9.5.14.1 Removing the Reversal Sensor ................................................................................................................................................................... 9-19

9.5.15 Fixing Inlet Sensor................................................................................................................................................................... 9-19

9.5.15.1 Before Starting the Work ............................................................................................................................................................................ 9-19 9.5.15.2 Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor/Fixing Inlet HP Sensor ........................................................................................................................ 9-20

9.5.16 Fixing/Feeding Outlet Sensor .................................................................................................................................................. 9-20

9.5.16.1 Remove the Fixing/Feeder Unit Outlet Sensor........................................................................................................................................... 9-20

9.5.17 Delivery Speed Switch Clutch ................................................................................................................................................. 9-20

9.5.17.1 Removing the Delivery Speed Switching Clutch ....................................................................................................................................... 9-20

9.5.18 Upper Separation Claw ............................................................................................................................................................ 9-21

9.5.18.1 Removing the Upper Separation Claw ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-21

9.5.19 Lower Separation Claw............................................................................................................................................................ 9-21

9.5.19.1 Removing the Lower Separation Claw ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-21

Chapter 9

9.1 Construction
9.1.1 Outline
The following shows the major functions of the machine's fixing system:
T-9-1 Component Fixing upper roller Fixing lower roller Fixing motor Fixing inlet sensor lifter motor main heater M3 M21 H1 Notation Description heat roller, 60mm dia. Pressure roller, 50mm dia. DC motor, 33 W Stepping motor 200V model: 1150 W (100V model: 1000 W) 208V model: 1120 W (208V model: 900 W) 230V model: 1185 W (230V model: 965 W) Sub heater H2 200V model: 565W (100V model: 400) 208V model: 600W (208V model: 600W) 230V model: 645W (230V model: 645W) The values in parentheses represent the iR7086. Main thermistor Sub thermistor Thermal switch Cleaning web TH1 TH2 TP1 temperature control, error detection (contact) temperature control (non-contact) operating temperature: 226 +/-5 deg C driven by the web drive solenoid (SL2) for large-size paper (B4 or larger), goes on twice for small-size paper (smaller that B4), goes on once Inlet guide fixed
0010-8226

9.1.2 Major Components

0010-8227

(TH1) (TH2) (TP1)

F-9-1

9-1

Chapter 9

Fixing upper roller

Sub thermistor (TH2)

Main thermistor (TH1)

Thermal switch (TP1)

F-9-2

9.1.3 Overview of the Fixing Drive System

The following items are associated with the machine's fixing drive system: [1] fixing roller drive control [2] cleaning web drive control [3] thermistor reciprocating mechanism drive control [4] upper separation claw reciprocating drive mechanism [5] fixing inlet sensor drive control
Upon detection, an error condition is identified J508B
Detection signal Detection signal
0010-8228

Upon detection, a message is indicated in the control panel (web running out)

SL2

Web drive solenoid

Drive signal Detection signal Detection signal Drive signal

PS8 PS7 No web alert sensor No web sensor

DC controller PCB

Thermistor M1 Main motor Upper separation claw J508A M21 Fixing inlet sensor lift motor
Drive signal

Fixing roller motor M3

Fixing inlet sensor Fixing inlet HP sensor

F-9-3

9-2

Chapter 9

9.1.4 Controlling the Fixing Roller Drive

0010-8229

When '1', the motor brake goes on When the motor rotation speed is as specified, '0'

Fixing upper roller

J508A 1

DC controller PCB

14 15 16 17 18 19 20

0V BRK FUSE_M_LOCK FUSE_M_ON 5V 0V

M3 Fixing drive motor

When '1', the motor goes on

F-9-4

The machine controls the braking mechanism to present paper from fully wrapping around the fixing roller. In response to detection of an inside delivery delay jam, the machine causes the motor brake to go on to stop the motor. This operation is executed exclusively in response to an inside delivery sensor delay jam. ERROR CODE: E014 (fixing motor speed error) When the motor is rotating (i.e., FUSE_M_ON=1), FUSE_M_LOCK=1 is true for 2 sec or more.

9.1.5 Controlling the Cleaning Web Drive

0010-8230

Checking the Remaining Length [1] When the web detecting flag comes into contact with the cut-off (300 mm from the end of the web), the web length warning sensor (PS8) detects the flag, causing the machine to indicate a message in the control panel (to the effect that the web is running out). The machine remains ready for making prints.

(front) Web length detecting flag Web length warning sensor (PS8)

No web sensor (PS7)

Length detection [2] If printing continues after PS8 goes on, the flag moves farther down to be detected by the web length sensor (PS7), causing the machine to indicate error code E005. Feed side web roller

J508B 1 2 3 4 5 6 WEB_LESS 5V WEB_WARNING 5V To PS7

DC controller PCB

To PS8

20

F-9-5

9-3

Chapter 9 MEMO: The machine can make about 100,000 prints (A4) after indicating the message (in the case of A3, 50,000 prints).

9.1.6 Controlling the Thermistor Reciprocating Mechanism

To prevent the thermistor (TH1) from scratching the fixing upper roller, the machine moves the thermistor back and forth 12 mm in the axial direction of the fixing upper roller. The drive used to move the thermistor is obtained from the web drive solenoid (SL2) by way of a one-way arm (to reach the reciprocating cam).
Cam (front)
0010-8231

Reciprocating width: 12 mm

One-way clutch

Upper fixing roller

Cleaning belt drive belt solenoid (SL2)

(rear)

Main thermistor
F-9-6

9.1.7 Controlling the Upper Separation Claw Reciprocating Mechanism

Figure shows the control system used to control the reciprocating mechanism of the uppers separation claw.
(rear) Reciprocating width: 3 mm
0010-8232

Upper separation claw unit

(front)

Cam

One-way clutches

M1
Eccentric cams
F-9-7

Main motor

9.1.8 Controlling the Fixing Inlet Sensor Drive

The machine is equipped with a fixing inlet sensor to prevent paper from remaining inside the fixing assembly. The output of the sensor is used to move a lift mechanism, thereby making sure paper movement will not be disrupted.
0011-0501

9-4

Chapter 9

DC connector PCB
20 16 15 14 13 12 11 6 5 4 3 2 1

J508B

FIX_HP

Fixing inlet lift motor

M21
Fixing inlet paper detection flag

Lifting timing - When the power is turned on - When a jam is detected Moving-down status - At stand-by - At operation

Fixing inlet sensor PS63 <Paper Detection> If paper is detected while the fixing inlet sensor is moving up, the machine will indicate the presence of a fixing inlet residual paper jam.

FIX_IN

24V 24V A A+ B B+

5V

Fixing inlet HP sensor <HP Detection>

PS66

If HP detection fails when the fixing inlet sensor is moved, the machine will indicate error code E840.
F-9-8

Reference: Sheets of paper detected by the fixing inlet sensor must be B5 or larger. ERROR CODE: E840 (fixing inlet sensor movement error) Indicates that a fault occurred while the wrap sensor is being moved up/down, thus causing HP detection to fail.

9-5

Chapter 9

9.2 Basic Sequence

9.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations
0010-8233

Main power switch ON

Control panel power switch ON

193

188 198

Start key ON

if 200V model, -10 deg C for all.

SLEEP

WMUP Red

WMUPR

STBY Green

INTR

PSTBY

PRINT Red

LSTR

STBY

Wait indication

Fixing motor (M3) Main heater (H1) Sub heater (H2)

Controlled to 198 deg C

200 198 195 190

Controlled to 198 deg C

Passage of paper causes the temperature to drop.

Causes both main and sub heaters to go on to enable return to 198 deg C in a short time.

* 100V model (no temperature control is performed for the sub heater while paper is passing).
F-9-9

9-6

Chapter 9

9.3 Various Control Mechanisms

9.3.1 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature 9.3.1.1 Controlling the Down Sequence
0010-8234

Start key ON

() represents iR7095; <> represents iR7086.

STBY PRINT STOP PRINT

Main heater (H1) Sub heater (H2) Copying speed

200V model: controlled to 188 deg C 100V/208V/230V model: controlled to 198 deg C
200 195 190 185 180 175 170 165 160 105cpm (95cpm) <86cpm> 86cpm (77.8cpm) <70cpm> 74cpm (67cpm) <60cpm> Suspend 105cpm (95cpm) <86cpm>

Also causes the sub heater to go on to recover lost temperature.

When 178 deg C, dropped to 86 cpm (77.8 cpm), <70 cpm>.

When 183 deg C, resumes printing automatically.

When 168 deg C, stops printing. When 173 deg C, dropped to 74 cpm (67 cpm), <60 cpm>.
F-9-10

SERVICE MODE: COPIER > OPTION > BODY > FIX-TMP (down sequence setting)
Setting iR7105 iR7095 iR7086 Setting 0 Setting 1 (default) Setting 2 86cpm 77.8cpm 70cpm 183 deg C 178 deg C 173 deg C 74cpm 67cpm 60cpm 178 deg C 173 deg C 168 deg C Suspend Suspend Suspend 173 deg C 168 deg C 163 deg C Resume Resume Resume 188 deg C 183 deg C 178 deg C

Set it to '0' to place priority on image quality; or, set it to '2' to place priority on speed.

9.3.1.2 Transparency Mode

In transparency mode, the machine decreases the fixing roller surface temperature to prevent wrapping of a transparency around the fixing roller (otherwise the heat of the roller could melt the film surface).
0010-8235

9-7

Chapter 9

Transparency mode selected STBY Green

Start key ON 195 INTR PRINT Red LSTR

for Jpn model, -10 deg C for all. STBY Green

Wait indication

Fixing motor (M3) Main heater (H1) Controlled to 198 deg C

Continues idle rotation until the surface temperature of the fixing roller drops to the transparency control temperature.

Controlled to 195 deg C Controlled to 198 deg C

Sub heater (H2)

*If the reading of the thermistor is lower that the transparency control temperature, printing is started as is.

205 200 198 193

Transparency control temperature

F-9-11

SERVICE MODE: COPIER > OPTION > BODY > OHP-TEMP (transparency mode temperature setting switchover) 0: 198 dg C (default) 1: 193 dg C 2: 188 dg C 3: 183 dg C

9.3.1.3 Heavy Paper Mode

To prevent a drop in the surface temperature of the fixing roller in heavy paper mode, the machine uses a higher down sequence shift temperature. The machine uses heavy paper down sequence mode when 'heavy paper' is selected for the following in user mode: common settings>paper type. SERVICE MODE: COPIER > OPTION > BODY > FIX-TEMP (heavy paper down sequence start temperature setting)
Setting iR7105 iR7095 iR7086 0 (default) 1 2 86 cpm 77.8 cpm 70 cpm 194 deg C 189 deg C 184 deg C 74 cpm 67 cpm 60 cpm 193 deg C 188 deg C 183 deg C Suspend Suspend Suspend 183 deg C 178 deg C 173 deg C Resume Resume Resume 198 deg C 193 deg C 188 deg C
0010-8236

COPIER > OPTION > BODY > TEMP-TBL (heavy paper mode copy temperature setting; Jpn model only) To prevent down sequence from starting with the 1st sheet in heavy paper mode, the machine uses heavy paper temperature control (in view of the fact that the Japanese model uses a control temperature of 188 deg C for printing).
Setting 0 1 to 4 Heavy paper copy temperature +10 deg C +0 deg C

9.3.1.4 Power Save Mode

A press on the Power Save key of the control panel causes the machine to decrease the STBY control temperature to reduce power consumption.
0010-8237

9-8

Chapter 9

WMUPR omitted.
for Jpn model, -10 deg C for all. 193 198

Power save mode set in user mode

Power Save key ON

Power Save key OFF

STBY

SLEEP

WMUP

STBY

Main heater (H1) Sub heater (H2)

Controlled to 198 deg C

Temperature suited to rate of saving

Controlled to 198 deg C

200 195

170 Rate of saving of 25% 105 Rate of saving of 50%

Returns to normal temperature control in response to turning off the Power Save key

F-9-12

9.3.2 Controlling the Fixing Roller Bias Temperature 9.3.2.1 Outline

The fixing roller bias is controlled for the following: [1] Fixing roller bias constant voltage Figure shows the construction of the control system used to control the fixing roller bias.
0010-8238

Relay PCB When '1', high-voltage output is ready.

24 VH 24 VH GND GND

1 2 3 4 J510A
1 2 3 4
HVDC-EN

J723
0V

Fixing roller
16 15 14 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13

DC controller PCB

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 FGD-ON 16

High-voltage DC PCB

J733 1 2 DC 600V

When '1', the fixing roller bias turns on.

F-9-13

9-9

Chapter 9

9.4 Protective Functions

9.4.1 Error Detection
The machine checks for the following types of errors in relation to its fixing temperature control mechanism: [1] temperature control error by main thermistor (tH1) [2] sensor error by sub thermistor (TH2) [3] current shut-down in response to overheating by thermal switch (TP1)
J508B 1 Voltage suited to reading of main thermistor Voltage suited to reading of sub thermistor
0010-8239

M-TEMP 7 0V 8 S-TEMP 9 0V 10 Fixing upper roller 20

Sub thermistor

DC controller PCB

Main heater J505A 1 Sub heater M-H-DTC 9 M-H-ON 10 0V 11 S-H-ON 12 AC driver S-H-DTC 13 ZEROCROSS 14 0V 15 100V/200V 16 When '1', main heater goes on J505A 1 When '0', AC relay goes off Thermal switch At 228 deg C, cuts off AC line

Main thermistor

RLY Relay

Front cover When sub heater is supplied with power, '0'

24V 10 Relay OFF* 11

Relay PCB

16
F-9-14

ERROR CODE: E000 (heating failure) 0000 After the power is turned on, the reading of the main thermistor fails to reach 70 deg C or more within 3.5 min. E001 (overheating) 0001 The reading of the main or sub thermistor is 230 deg C or more for 2 sec (detection by hardware). 0002 The reading of the main or sub thermistor is 230 deg C or more for 2 sec (detection by software). 0003 The difference between the readings of the main thermistor and the sub thermistor is 50 deg C for 1 sec or more (main > sub). 0004 The difference between the readings of the main and the sub thermistor is 50 deg C for 1 sec or more (main >/= sub ). E002 (heating failure) 0001 The reading of the main thermistor is 70 deg C or more but does not reach 100 deg C within 2.5 min. 0002 The reading of the main thermistor exceeds 100 deg C but does not reach 150 deg C within 2.5 min thereafter. E003 (low temperature) 0000 With the reading of the main thermistor in excess of 100 deg C, a temperature of 70 deg C or less is detected for 2 sec. E004 (SSR short circuit) 0000 The SSR is identified as having a short circuit for 5 sec or more while the sub heater is on. 0001 The SSR is identified as having a short circuit for 5 sec while the main heater is on.

Reference: If E000 through E004 is indicated, the code will not be reset even when the main power switch is turned off. To reset, use service mode (COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR).

9-10

Chapter 9

9-11

Chapter 9

9.5 Parts Replacement Procedure

9.5.1 Fixing Unit 9.5.1.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly
1) Slide the fixing/feeding unit halfway out the main body. 2) While pushing on the stopper [2] on both ends of the fixing/feeding unit rail [1], slide the fixing/feeding unit farther out.
[1]
[4]
0010-9381

[2]

[1]

[2]
[3]
F-9-17

[4] [5]

[1]

5) Remove the fixing motor [1]. - 2 connectors [2] - Free the cable from the edge saddle [3] - 3 screws [4] - 5 connectors [5]
[2] [1]

[1]

[2]
F-9-15

3) While pushing the releasing lever link [1] found at the rear of the fixing/ feeding unit, shift up the fixing/feeding unit releasing lever [2], and remove the screw [3] to detach.
[4]

[5]
[1]

[5]

[3]

[2]
F-9-16

F-9-18

[3]

6) Open the fixing/delivery assembly, and remove the screw [1]; then, holding the front [3] and the rear [4] of the fixing assembly [2], detach the fixing assembly from the main body.

When setting the fixing/feeding unit in the main body, be sure to mount the releasing lever, and shift the lever while pressing the releasing lever link. 4) Remove the two screws [1], pre-transfer charging assembly cover [2], and fixing roller knob [3]; then, remove the two screws [4], and detach the fixing/feeding unit cover [5].

9-12

Chapter 9

[1]

[4]

[2]

[1]

F-9-22

When opened, the fixing upper unit becomes unstable. Be sure to use a screwdriver as shown to support it. 7) Remove the stopper [1] from the front and the rear.
[1]

[3]
F-9-19

9.5.2 Upper Fixing Roller 9.5.2.1 Removing the Fixing Upper Roller
1) Remove the fixing assembly. 2) Remove the fixing web, and clean the oil pan. 3) Remove the 2 fixing heaters. 4) Remove the screw [1], and detach the pressure support plate [2] at the front.
0010-9389

F-9-23

[1]

F-9-24

[2]

[1]
F-9-20

8) While paying attention to the thermal switch and the thermistor, remove the upper roller assembly. 9) Remove the C-ring [1] at the front, and remove the gear [2], bushing [3], and bearing [4].

5) Remove the screw, and detach the pressure support plate [2] at the rear.

[4] [3] [2] [1]

F-9-25

10) Remove the C-ring [1] at the rear, and remove the electrode plate [2], spacer [3], bearing [4], and bushing [5].
[1]
F-9-21

[2]

6) Open the fixing upper unit [1].

9-13

Chapter 9 5) Remove the lower roller [3] from the fixing assembly, and remove the Erings [4] and the bearings [5] from both front and rear.
[4] [3] [2] [1]

[5]

F-9-26

9.5.2.2 Mounting the Fixing Upper Roller

Mount the upper roller by reversing the steps used to remove it.
0010-9390

[4] [3]

a. To prevent the surface of the roller from dirt or damage, wrap paper after removing it. b. Be sure that the longer cutoff A shown in the figure is toward the rear.
F-9-30

[5]

9.5.3.2 Adjusting the Lower Roller Pressure (nip)

A

The nip width must be as indicated in figure; if not, adjust it using the pressure adjusting nut.
c

0010-9395

A3 paper

Feed direction
F-9-27

b Middle of paper

c. When mounting, clean the electrode plate [1] and the electrode terminal [2].
[2] [1]

a
F-9-31

a and c are points 10 mm from both edges of paper.

T-9-2 Dimension Measure with upper and lower rollers fully heated

F-9-28

b | a-c |

200 V: 9.0 -/+ 0.5 mm, 208/230 V: 10.0 -/+ 0.5 mm 0.5 mm or less

9.5.3 Lower Fixing Roller 9.5.3.1 Removing the Lower Fixing Roller
1) Remove the fixing assembly from the main body. 2) Remove the fixing cleaning belt; then, clean and detach the oil pan. 3) Open the upper fixing unit. 4) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the lower separation claw support plate [2].
[1]
0010-9393

a. Generating Output for Nip Width Measurement Wait for 15 min after the copier ends its warm-up period; make 20 A4 copies, and measure the nip. 1) Place A3 copy paper in the manual feed tray. 2) Make the following selections in service mode to generate output: COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING > NIP-CHK. The A3 paper will be picked up, and a copy like the one shown in figure will be delivered.

9.5.4 External Delivery Roller 9.5.4.1 Removing the External Delivery Roller
1) Remove the fixing assembly. 2) Remove the 3 screws [1]; then, while opening the upper delivery assembly [2], remove the delivery roller guide [3].
0010-9397

[2]
F-9-29

[1]

9-14

Chapter 9

9.5.5 Internal Delivery Roller

[3] [2]

9.5.5.1 Removing the Internal Delivery Roller

1) Remove the fixing assembly. 2) Remove the internal delivery roller [1], bearing [2], 3 E-rings [3], and bushing holder [4]; then, detach the drive gear [5].
[1] [4] [2] [3] [5]
0010-9398

[1]
F-9-32

3) Remove the E-ring [1] at the front, slide the bearing [2] in the direction of the gear.
F-9-36

[3]

3) Remove the E-ring [1] and the bushing [2] at the rear of the shaft; then, detach the internal delivery roller [3].

[2]
F-9-33

[1]

[3] [2] [1]

F-9-37

4) Remove the E-ring [1], and slide the bearing [2] toward the rear; then, detach the external delivery roller assembly [3].
[3]

9.5.6 Main Thermistor 9.5.6.1 Removing the Main Thermistor

1) Remove the fixing assembly. 2) Remove the fixing web and the oil pan. 3) Remove the fixing harness cover. 4) Disconnect the connector [1] of the thermistor. Remove the screw [2], and shift the thermistor assembly [3] to the rear to detach.
[2]
0010-9399

[1]
F-9-34

[2]

5) Remove the E-ring [1], one-way gear [2], and bearing [3] at the rear of the external roller shaft; then, remove the 2 Erings [4] and the 2 rollers [5] of each roller.
[5] [4] [5] [4]
[1]
F-9-38

[3]

When shifting the thermistor assembly to the rear, take care not to damage the fixing roller with the thermistor.
[3] [2]
F-9-35

5) Remove the 2 thermistor retaining springs [1], and detach the main thermistor [2].
[1]

Take care not to lose the parallel pin used in each roller.

9-15

Chapter 9

9.5.8 Thermal Switch

[1] [2] [1]

9.5.8.1 Removing the Thermal Switch Unit

1) Remove the fixing assembly. 2) Remove the fixing web; then, remove the 2 screws [1] and the oil pan [2], and detach the fixing harness cover [3].
[1] [2] [3] [1]
0010-9450

F-9-39

9.5.6.2 Mounting the Main Thermistor

When mounting the main thermistor to the fixing assembly, be sure that the tie-wrap [1] is as shown. The tie-wrap serves as a stopper by butting against the claw [2]. Check also to be sure that the main thermistor and the fixing roller are not away from each other.
0010-9400

F-9-43

3) Remove the faston [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the electrode assembly [3] and the thermal switch holder [4].
[3]
[2] [1]

[2]

[1]

[4]

[2]

F-9-40

9.5.7 Sub Thermistor 9.5.7.1 Removing the Sub Thermistor

1) Slide out the fixing assembly. 2) Remove the fixing web and the oil pan. 3) Remove the fixing harness cover. 4) Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the sub thermistor assembly [3].
[2]
0010-9448

F-9-44

4) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the thermal switch unit [2].

[1]

[2]
F-9-45

[1]

[1]
F-9-41

[3]

9.5.8.2 Mounting the Thermal Switch Unit

0010-9451

5) Remove the screw [1], and detach the sub thermistor [2].

[2]

[1]
F-9-46

[1]
F-9-42

[2]
- When mounting the thermal switch [1], be sure that it is in contact with the fixing roller [2] as shown. - The thermal switch must be replaced as the thermal switch unit. - Do not use again the thermal switch wolse contact point become open.

9-16

Chapter 9

9.5.9 Fixing Heater 9.5.9.1 Removing the Main/Sub Heater

1) Remove the fixing assembly. 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing connector unit [2]; then, remove the screw [3] and the terminal plate [4] at the rear to pull out the faston [5]. (2 locations)
[2] [1] [3] [4] [5]
0010-9454

9.5.9.3 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Heater

1. Do not touch the heater surface. 2. For both heaters, mount so that the side with the longer heater harness is toward the front. 3. Viewing from the front of the fixing assembly, mount the main heater on the right (for 200V model, 1150 W; for 208V model, 1220 W; for 230V model, 1185 W) and the sub heater on the left (for 200V model, 565 W; for 208V model, 600 W; for 230V model, 645 W). 4. Viewing from the rear, connect the right side of the faston of the heater at the rear to the main heater, and connect the top side to the sub heater. Height of the Fixing Inlet Guide
0010-9533

[1] [3] [4]

[5]

F-9-47

3) Remove the 2 screw [1], and detach the heater positioning plate (rear) [2].
5.8mm (reference only) 5.8mm (reference only)

Fixing screw Fixing screw

F-9-51

[1] [1]
F-9-48

[2]

Do not loosen the fixing screw on the inlet guide, as you will have to adjust the position of the inlet guide if you remove the inlet guide base. If you must loosen it, be sure to adjust the position of the inlet guide afterward by referring to the index on the fixing assembly.

4) Remove the 2 fastons [1] at the front, and remove the screw [2] to detach the heater positioning plate (front) [3].
[3] [2] [1]

9.5.10 Fixing Cleaning Belt 9.5.10.1 Removing the Fixing Cleaning Belt
1) Slide the fixing/feeding unit halfway out; then, release the stoppers on both rails, and slide the unit farther out. 2) Remove the pre-transfer charging assembly cover, fixing feeding unit releasing lever, and fixing roller knob. 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the fixing assembly upper cover [2].
0010-9534

F-9-49

5) Remove the main/sub heater.

9.5.9.2 Mounting the Main/Sub Heater

To mount the fixing heater, reverse the steps used to remove it with the following in mind: a. Do not touch the surface of the heater. b. For both, mount the heater so that the side with the longer harness is to the front. c. Viewing from the front of the fixing assembly, mount the main heater [1] to the right and the sub heater [2] to the left.
[2] [1]
0010-9532

[1]
F-9-52

[2]

4) Remove the two screws [3] used to secure the fixing cleaning belt assembly, and open the top of the fixing cleaning belt assembly upward.

F-9-50

9-17

Chapter 9

9.5.10.2 Mounting the Fixing Cleaning Belt

[3]

Mount the fixing cleaning belt by reversing the steps used to remove it. 1) Wind the cleaning belt [2] around the cleaning belt take-up roller [1] two to three times, and mount it so that the arm guide plate [3] at the front is on the outside of the take-up roller. At this time, check to make sure that the area of contact with the roller is impregnated with oil.
[3] [1]

0010-9538

[3]
F-9-53

5) While pushing the cleaning belt feeding roller [4] and the take-up roller [5] toward the rear, detach the cleaning belt [6].
[6]
[2]
F-9-56

Check the fixing cleaning belt for skew, wrapping, and wrinkling. Further, be sure that the winding direction and the mounting orientation are as indicated.
Take up roller

Cleaning belt feeding roller

F-9-57

[5]
F-9-54

[4]

2) After mounting the fixing cleaning belt, move the plunger [4] of the cleaning belt feeding solenoid into the direction of the arrow.

When cleaning the silicone oil pan, be sure to remove the silicone oil collecting in the oil pan [7] found under the cleaning belt feeding roller.
[7]

[4]
F-9-58

If you have replaced the cleaning belt, be sure to return the setting under COPIER > COUNTER > MISC > FIX-WEB to '0' in service mode.

9.5.11 Claw Jam Sensor 9.5.11.1 Removing the Claw Jam Sensor
1) Remove the fixing assembly. 2) Remove the 2 screws, and detach the lower separation claw assembly. 3) Detach the claw jam sensor [1] from the right side of the lower delivery assembly.
0010-9540

F-9-55

9-18

Chapter 9

[2]

[1]

[1]
F-9-59

9.5.12 External Delivery Sensor 9.5.12.1 Remove the External Delivery Sensor
1) Remove the external delivery roller. 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the external sensor assembly [3].
0010-9543

F-9-63

9.5.14 Reversal Sensor 9.5.14.1 Removing the Reversal Sensor

1) Remove the fixing assembly from the machine. 2) Open the upper delivery assembly; then, remove the screw [1], and detach the reversal sensor [2].
0010-9548

[2] [1] [3]

F-9-60

[1]

3) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the external delivery sensor [2].

[2] [2] [1]

F-9-64

[1]

9.5.15 Fixing Inlet Sensor 9.5.15.1 Before Starting the Work

1) Remove the fixing assembly. 2) Remove the fixing web, and clean the oil pan. 3) Remove the 2 fixing heaters. 4) Remove the screw [1], and detach the locking support plate [2] found at the front.
F-9-61
0011-7951

9.5.13 Internal Delivery Sensor 9.5.13.1 Removing the Internal Delivery Sensor
1) Remove the fixing assembly. 2) Open the upper delivery assembly, and remove the 2 screws [1]; then, detach the internal delivery sensor assembly [2].
[1] [2]
[2] [1]
F-9-65
0010-9545

[1]

5) Remove the screw [1], and detach the locking support plate [2] found at the rear.

F-9-62

3) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the internal delivery senor [2].
[1]
F-9-66

[2]

6) Open the fixing upper unit [1].

9-19

Chapter 9

9.5.16 Fixing/Feeding Outlet Sensor

[1]

9.5.16.1 Remove the Fixing/Feeder Unit Outlet Sensor

1) Slide out the fixing/feed unit 2) Remove the screw [1] from the bottom face of the fixing/feeder unit; then, detach the fixing/feed outlet sensor [2].
0010-9549

F-9-67

When opened, the fixing upper unit is in an unstable state. Use the shift of the screwdriver as a support as shown. 7) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the lower separation claw support plate [2].
[1]
F-9-71

[2]

[1]

3) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the fixing/feed outlet sensor [2].

[1]

[2]
F-9-72

9.5.17 Delivery Speed Switch Clutch

[2]
F-9-68

[1]

9.5.17.1 Removing the Delivery Speed Switching Clutch

1) Slide out the fixing/feeder unit. 2) Remove the fixing motor. 3) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the fixing front support base [2].
0010-9550

8) Remove the fixing lower roller. 9) Remove the fixing inlet guide [1]. - 2 screws [2] 10) Remove the 2 screws [3].

[1]

[2]

[1]

[3]
F-9-69

[2]

9.5.15.2 Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor/Fixing Inlet HP Sensor

1) Remove the fixing inlet sensor [1] and the fixing inlet HP sensor [2]. - 1 connector [3] (1 pc. each)
[2] [3]
0011-7953

[2]
F-9-73

[1]

4) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the delivery speed switching clutch [3].

[1]
F-9-70

[3]

9-20

Chapter 9

[2] [1]

[2] [3] [2]

F-9-77

[2]

[3]
F-9-74

When detaching the delivery speed switching clutch, take care not to lose the bearings on both ends of the clutch shaft and the washer at the rear.

9.5.18 Upper Separation Claw 9.5.18.1 Removing the Upper Separation Claw
1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the main body. 2) Release the spring [1] used to open the fixing/delivery assembly; then, detach the upper separation claw [2].
0010-9551

[2] [1]

F-9-75

9.5.19 Lower Separation Claw 9.5.19.1 Removing the Lower Separation Claw
1) Remove the fixing assembly from the main body. 2) Remove the two screws, and detach the lower separation claw assembly together with the support plate. 3) Remove the spring [1] from the lower separation claw.
0010-9554

[1]
F-9-76

4) Remove the three screws [2], and detach the lower separation claw support plate [3]; then, detach the separation claw.

9-21

Chapter 10 External and Controls

Contents

Contents
10.1 Control Panel..............................................................................................................................................................10-1
10.1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-1

10.2 Counters .....................................................................................................................................................................10-1

10.2.1 Soft Counter ............................................................................................................................................................................. 10-1

10.3 Fans ............................................................................................................................................................................10-2

10.3.1 Fans .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-2 10.3.2 Sequence of Fan Operation ...................................................................................................................................................... 10-4

10.4 Power Supply System ................................................................................................................................................10-4

10.4.1 Power Supply ........................................................................................................................................................................... 10-4
10.4.1.1 Overview of the Power Supply System ......................................................................................................................................................10-4

10.4.2 Protection Function .................................................................................................................................................................. 10-5

10.4.2.1 Protective Functions....................................................................................................................................................................................10-5

10.4.3 Backup Battery......................................................................................................................................................................... 10-5

10.4.3.1 Back-Up Battery..........................................................................................................................................................................................10-5

10.4.4 Energy-Saving Function .......................................................................................................................................................... 10-6

10.4.4.1 Overview .....................................................................................................................................................................................................10-6 10.4.4.2 SNMP setup ................................................................................................................................................................................................10-7

10.5 Parts Replacement Procedure.....................................................................................................................................10-9

10.5.1 External Covers........................................................................................................................................................................ 10-9
10.5.1.1 Front Cover .................................................................................................................................................................................................10-9 10.5.1.1.1 Removing the Front Cover..................................................................................................................................................................10-9 10.5.1.2 Rear Cover ..................................................................................................................................................................................................10-9 10.5.1.2.1 Removing the Rear Cover ...................................................................................................................................................................10-9 10.5.1.3 Inside Upper Cover .....................................................................................................................................................................................10-9 10.5.1.3.1 Removing the Inside Upper Cover......................................................................................................................................................10-9 10.5.1.4 Fixing/Feeding Unit Cover .........................................................................................................................................................................10-9 10.5.1.4.1 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit Cover ............................................................................................................................................10-9 10.5.1.5 Upper Vertical Path Cover ........................................................................................................................................................................10-10 10.5.1.5.1 Removing the Upper Vertical Path Cover.........................................................................................................................................10-10 10.5.1.6 Upper Front Cover Unit ............................................................................................................................................................................10-10 10.5.1.6.1 Removing the Upper Front Cover Unit.............................................................................................................................................10-10 10.5.1.7 Upper Rear Cover .....................................................................................................................................................................................10-10 10.5.1.7.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover ......................................................................................................................................................10-10 10.5.1.8 Main Controller Box Cover ......................................................................................................................................................................10-10 10.5.1.8.1 Removing the Main Controller Box Cover .......................................................................................................................................10-10 10.5.1.9 System Connector Cover...........................................................................................................................................................................10-10 10.5.1.9.1 Removing the System Connector Cover ...........................................................................................................................................10-10 10.5.1.10 Reader Controller Cover .........................................................................................................................................................................10-11 10.5.1.10.1 Removing the Reader Controller Cover..........................................................................................................................................10-11

10.5.2 Left Pickup Drive Assembly.................................................................................................................................................. 10-11

10.5.2.1 Removing the Left Pickup Drive Assembly .............................................................................................................................................10-11

10.5.3 Pickup Drive Assembly ......................................................................................................................................................... 10-11

10.5.3.1 Removing the Pickup Drive Assembly .....................................................................................................................................................10-11

10.5.4 Developing Drive Assembly.................................................................................................................................................. 10-12

10.5.4.1 Removing the Developing Drive Assembly .............................................................................................................................................10-12

10.5.5 Vertical Path Drive Assembly ............................................................................................................................................... 10-12

10.5.5.1 Removing the Vertical Path Drive Assembly ...........................................................................................................................................10-12

10.5.6 Waste Toner Drive Assembly ................................................................................................................................................ 10-13

10.5.6.1 Removing the Waste Toner Drive Assembly............................................................................................................................................10-13

10.5.7 Multifeeder Pickup Drive Assembly ..................................................................................................................................... 10-13

10.5.7.1 Removing the Multifeeder Pickup Drive Assembly .................................................................................................................................10-13

10.5.8 Lifter Drive Assembly ........................................................................................................................................................... 10-13

10.5.8.1 Removing the Lifter Drive Assembly (right deck) ...................................................................................................................................10-13

Contents

10.5.8.2 Removing the Lifter Drive Assembly (left deck) ..................................................................................................................................... 10-14

10.5.9 Main Drive Assembly ............................................................................................................................................................ 10-14

10.5.9.1 Removing the Main Drive Assembly ....................................................................................................................................................... 10-14

10.5.10 Drum Drive Assembly ......................................................................................................................................................... 10-14

10.5.10.1 Removing the Drum Drive Assembly .................................................................................................................................................... 10-14

10.5.11 Cassette Pickup Drive Assembly ......................................................................................................................................... 10-15

10.5.11.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Drive Assembly .................................................................................................................................... 10-15

10.5.12 Power Supply Unit............................................................................................................................................................... 10-15

10.5.12.1 Removing the Power Supply Unit .......................................................................................................................................................... 10-15

10.5.13 Control Panel ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-16

10.5.13.1 Removing the Control Panel................................................................................................................................................................... 10-16 10.5.13.2 Removing the Control Panel Interface PCB ........................................................................................................................................... 10-17

10.5.14 Control Panel LCD Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 10-17

10.5.14.1 Before Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10-17 10.5.14.2 Removing the Control Panel LCD.......................................................................................................................................................... 10-17

10.5.15 Cover Switch Assembly....................................................................................................................................................... 10-17

10.5.15.1 Removing the Front Cover Switch Assembly ........................................................................................................................................ 10-17

10.5.16 Manual Feed Tray Switch Assembly................................................................................................................................... 10-18

10.5.16.1 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Switch Assembly .............................................................................................................................. 10-18

10.5.17 Drum Heater Switch Assembly ........................................................................................................................................... 10-18

10.5.17.1 Removing the Drum Heater Switch Assembly....................................................................................................................................... 10-18

10.5.18 DC Controller PCB .............................................................................................................................................................. 10-18

10.5.18.1 Removing the DC Controller PCB ......................................................................................................................................................... 10-18 10.5.18.2 After Replacing the DC Controller PCB ................................................................................................................................................ 10-18

10.5.19 Control Panel Inverter PCB ................................................................................................................................................. 10-19

10.5.19.1 Before Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10-19 10.5.19.2 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB............................................................................................................................................. 10-19

10.5.20 Control Panel Key Switch PCB ........................................................................................................................................... 10-19

10.5.20.1 Before Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10-19 10.5.20.2 Removing the Control Panel KEY PCB ................................................................................................................................................. 10-20

10.5.21 Control Panel Family PCB................................................................................................................................................... 10-20

10.5.21.1 Before Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10-20 10.5.21.2 Removing the Control Panel LED PCB ................................................................................................................................................. 10-20

10.5.22 Control Panel CPU PCB ...................................................................................................................................................... 10-20

10.5.22.1 Before Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10-20 10.5.22.2 Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB ................................................................................................................................................. 10-21

10.5.23 AC Driver PCB .................................................................................................................................................................... 10-21

10.5.23.1 Before Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10-21 10.5.23.2 Removing the AC Driver PCB ............................................................................................................................................................... 10-21

10.5.24 All Night Power Supply PCB .............................................................................................................................................. 10-21

10.5.24.1 Before Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10-21 10.5.24.2 Removing the All Night Power Supply PCB.......................................................................................................................................... 10-21

10.5.25 Relay PCB............................................................................................................................................................................ 10-21

10.5.25.1 Removing the Relay PCB ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10-21

10.5.26 High-Voltage Transformer (AC) ......................................................................................................................................... 10-22

10.5.26.1 Removing the High-Voltage Transformer Assembly (AC).................................................................................................................... 10-22

10.5.27 HV-AC PCB ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10-22

10.5.27.1 Removing the HV-AC PCB.................................................................................................................................................................... 10-22

10.5.28 HV-DC PCB ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10-22

10.5.28.1 Removing the HV-DC PCB.................................................................................................................................................................... 10-22 10.5.28.2 After Replacing the HV-DC PCB........................................................................................................................................................... 10-22

10.5.29 High-Voltage PCB ............................................................................................................................................................... 10-23

10.5.29.1 Removing the High-Voltage Assembly .................................................................................................................................................. 10-23

10.5.30 Motor Driver PCB................................................................................................................................................................ 10-23

10.5.30.1 Before Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10-23 10.5.30.2 Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor Lift Motor Driver PCB .................................................................................................................... 10-23

10.5.31 Transceiver PCB .................................................................................................................................................................. 10-23

10.5.31.1 Before Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10-23 10.5.31.2 Removing the Transceiver PCB ............................................................................................................................................................. 10-24

Contents

10.5.32 Double Feeding Detection PCB ( Transmission )................................................................................................................ 10-25

10.5.32.1 Before Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................................................................10-25 10.5.32.2 Removing the Double-Feed Detection Unit (transmitting).....................................................................................................................10-25

10.5.33 Double Feeding Detection PCB ( Reception ) ..................................................................................................................... 10-25

10.5.33.1 Before Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................................................................10-25 10.5.33.2 Removing the Double-Feed Detection Unit (reception) .........................................................................................................................10-25

10.5.34 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan .................................................................................................................................................. 10-25

10.5.34.1 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan (FM2)...................................................................................................................................10-25

10.5.35 Laser Cooling Fan................................................................................................................................................................ 10-25

10.5.35.1 Removing the Laser Motor Cooling Fan (FM1) .....................................................................................................................................10-25 10.5.35.2 Removing the Laser Cooling Fan 1 (FM3) .............................................................................................................................................10-26

10.5.36 De-Curling Fan .................................................................................................................................................................... 10-26

10.5.36.1 Removing the Curl-Removing Fan .........................................................................................................................................................10-26

10.5.37 Drum Fan ............................................................................................................................................................................. 10-26

10.5.37.1 Removing the Drum Fan (FM8) .............................................................................................................................................................10-26

10.5.38 Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly Fan ................................................................................................................................. 10-27

10.5.38.1 Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly Fan (FM10)................................................................................................................10-27

10.5.39 Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 ............................................................................................................................................... 10-27

10.5.39.1 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 (FM11) .............................................................................................................................10-27

10.5.40 Power Supply Cooling Fan 2 ............................................................................................................................................... 10-27

10.5.40.1 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan 2 (FM12) .............................................................................................................................10-27

10.5.41 Separation Fan ..................................................................................................................................................................... 10-28

10.5.41.1 Removing the Separation Fan (FM13)....................................................................................................................................................10-28

10.5.42 Developing Fan .................................................................................................................................................................... 10-28

10.5.42.1 Removing the Developing Fan (FM15) ..................................................................................................................................................10-28

10.5.43 Delivery Anti-Adhesion Fan................................................................................................................................................ 10-28

10.5.43.1 Removing the Delivery Anti-Adhesion Fan (FM17) ..............................................................................................................................10-28

10.5.44 Duplex Feed Fan .................................................................................................................................................................. 10-28

10.5.44.1 Removing the Duplex Feed Fan (FM19) ................................................................................................................................................10-28

10.5.45 Separation Heat Discharge Fan............................................................................................................................................ 10-29

10.5.45.1 Removing the Separation Heat Discharge Fan (FM20) ..........................................................................................................................10-29

10.5.46 Reader Heat Discharge Fan 2 .............................................................................................................................................. 10-29

10.5.46.1 Removing the Reader Heat Discharge Fan 2 ..........................................................................................................................................10-29

10.5.47 Fixing Inlet Sensor Motor .................................................................................................................................................... 10-29

10.5.47.1 Before Starting the Work ........................................................................................................................................................................10-29 10.5.47.2 Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor Lifter Motor .....................................................................................................................................10-29

Chapter 10

10.1 Control Panel

10.1.1 Overview
The machine's control panel consists of the following PCBs and a liquid crystal panel (LCD):
Control panel Control panel inverter PCB LCD panel Control panel key PCB
0011-2662

Control panel CPU PCB

CPU

CPU Main controller PCB

F-10-1

Related service mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL > LCD-CHK use it to check the LCD for missing dots

COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL > LED-CHK

use it to check the activation of the LEDs on the control panel

COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL > LED-OFF

use it to check the de-activation of the LEDs on the control panel

COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL > KEY-CHK

use it to start a check on key inputs

COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL > TOUCHCHK

use it to adjust coordinates of the touch panel

10.2 Counters
10.2.1 Soft Counter
The machine is equipped with soft counters to count the number of prints made, and the counter readings may be indicated by pressing the Check key on the control panel. The counter is controlled by the main controller PCB, and increases the count each time a copy/print is made (as identified by the following sensors):
T-10-1 Copying/printing operation Simplexing Duplexing Source of input finisher delivery sensor 1st side 2nd side PS14 finisher delivery sensor
0011-2684

The machine's counting mechanism consists of 8 modes, 2 each according to paper size (small-size, large-size; a total of 16 modes):
T-10-2 Copying/printing operation local copy PDL print Box print remote copy print fax reception print*2 Large-size A C E G I Small-size*1 B D F H J

10-1

Chapter 10
Copying/printing operation report print duplexing print scan Large-size K M O Small-size*1 L N P

*1: At time of shipment, B4 or smaller. To count B4 as a large-size sheet, use service mode. *2: The machine does not have a fax function, and will not count fax reception prints. The following table describes the counters according to model: - 100V/200V
T-10-3 Counter Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 Type*1 total (A through L) Default ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Default switchover*2 fixed variable variable variable variable variable

- 208/230V Non-European Model

T-10-4 Counter Type*1 Default indication Default switchover*2

Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6

total (A through L) total large (ACEGIK) copy 1 (ABGH) copy 1 large (AG) -

ON ON ON ON OFF OFF

fixed variable variable variable variable variable

- 230V European Model

T-10-5 Counter Type*1 Default indication Default switchover*2

Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6

total (A through L) total large (ACEGIK) total small (BDFHJ) scan total (OP) -

ON ON ON ON OFF OFF

fixed variable variable variable variable variable

*1: The description in parentheses represents the basic counter mode. *2: The counter indication may be enabled/disabled in service mode (except the counter 1 setting).

10.3 Fans
10.3.1 Fans
The following shows the arrangement of fans and the direction of air, followed by the names and functions of the parts:
0011-2835

10-2

Chapter 10

[13] [18]

[5] [15]

[16]

[17]

[2]

[9] [10] [1]

[6]

[3] [11] [7] [12] [4] [14]

[8]

F-10-2 T-10-6 Ref. [1] Notatio n FM1 Name polygon cooling fan Description cools the laser scanner motor; thermally insulates the unit from the fixing assembly; prevents soiling of the wire of the primary charging assembly discharges heat from around the fixing assembly Error code E111-1111 Alarm code

[2]

FM2

fixing heat discharge fan

E805-0001

[3]

FM3

laser cooling fan

cools the laser scanner unit

E121-0001

[4]

FM6

de-curling fan

cools paper

33-0001

[5]

FM8

drum fan

draws out ozone and stray toner from around the drum; cools E820-0000 the area discharges ozone from around the pre-transfer charging assembly cools the DC power supply PCB E823-0000

[6]

FM10

pre-transfer charging assembly fan power supply cooling fan 1

[7]

FM11

E804-0000

[8]

FM12

power supply cooling fan 2

cools the DC power supply PCB

E804-0000

[9]

FM13

separation fan

helps separation of paper from the drum

E830-0000

[10]

FM15

developing fan

cools the developing assembly

33-0006

[11]

FM16

system fan

cools the PCBs inside the system box

00-0804

10-3

Chapter 10
Ref. [12] Notatio n FM17 Name delivery anti-adhesion fan Description cools paper being delivered Error code Alarm code 33-0007

[13] [14]

FM18 FM19

scanner heat discharge fan 2 duplexing transport fan

discharges heat from around the laser scanner unit cools the duplexing transport motor

E121-0003 -

33-0009

[15]

FM20

separation heat discharge fan

discharges heat from around the separation assembly; improves separation discharges heat from around the laser scanner unit cools the reader assembly cools the reader assembly

E805-0002

[16] [17] [18]

FM21 FM501 FM502

scanner heat discharge fan 1 reader cooling fan 1 reader cooling fan 2

E121-0001 -

33-0003 33-0004

10.3.2 Sequence of Fan Operation

0011-2836

Main power switch ON

Initial Warm-up multiple rotation Standby after copying/printing Preheating E indication Door open

Standby

Copying/printing

In sleep

JAM

Polygon cooling fan (FM1) Fixing heat discharge fan (FM2) Laser cooling fan (FM3) De-curling fan (FM6) Drum suction fan (FM8) Pre-transfer charging assembly fan (FM10) Power supply cooling fan 1 (FM11) Power supply cooling fan 2 (FM12) Separation fan (FM13) Developing fan (FM15) Discharge anti-adhesion fan (FM17) Duplexing transport fan (FM19) Separation heat discharge fan (FM20) scanner heat discharge fan 2 (FM18) scanner heat discharge fan 1 (FM21)
*1: Full speed (t) OFF *2: Full speed (t) half-speed
*2

*1

*3

*4

*1

OFF
*3

OFF

*5
*3

*3

*4

*3

*1 *1

*3: Half-speed (t) OFF

F-10-3

*4: OFF/Half-speed
Full speed

*5: OFF/Full speed

Half-speed

10.4 Power Supply System

10.4.1 Power Supply 10.4.1.1 Overview of the Power Supply System
The machine's DC power supply is controlled by the DC power supply PCB and the relay PCB:
0011-3327

10-4

Chapter 10
T-10-7 PCB DC power supply PCB Description - generates DC power from AC power - protects against over-current - generates DC power from DC power (24 V to 18 V) - supplies DC power to loads - protects individual loads against over-current

Relay PCB

10.4.2 Protection Function 10.4.2.1 Protective Functions

The machine is designed to automatically stop the output of the DC power supply as soon as the overcurrent protective mechanism turns on. If an overcurrent is detected by the overcurrent detection circuit A, outputs [1] and [2] are stopped; this is to prevent malfunction of the machine, as output [1] is used by the logic system. If the overcurrent detection circuit B detects an overcurrent, output [2] is stopped.
0011-3329

DC power supply PCB

Output 5V 12V

Relay PCB
Overcurrent detection circuit A

Converter circuit 1 5V/12V

Overcurrent protection circuit 1

Output

2 Overcurrent detection circuit B

Output stop signal 2

Converter circuit 2 24V/38V

Overcurrent protection circuit 2

Output stop signal 1

38V 24V

Sequence control circuit

J1701 5 4

Overcurrent detection signal 2 Overcurrent detection signal 1

Outputs [1] and [2] are stopped. Output [2] is stopped.

F-10-4 T-10-8 Detection by Overcurrent detection circuit A Machine operation Stops outputs [1] and [2] from the DC power supply PCB. Resetting Turn off the main power switch, and remove the cause; then, leave the machine alone for about 3 min, and turn on the main power switch.

Overcurrent detection circuit B

Stops output [2] from the DC Remove the cause, and turn off and then on the control power supply PCB. panel power switch.

10.4.3 Backup Battery 10.4.3.1 Back-Up Battery

The machine's main controller PCB, DC controller PCB, and reader controller PCB are each equipped with a lithium battery for use in the event of power failure and power plug disconnection.
0011-3330

10-5

Chapter 10
T-10-9

Main controller PCB DC controller PCB Life of battery

dioxide manganese lithium battery (3 V, 1000 mAh) lithium battery (3 V, 600 mAh) main controller PCB: about 10 yr DC controller PCB: about 10 yr battery cannot be replaced on its own in the field

Replacement of battery

Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.

10.4.4 Energy-Saving Function 10.4.4.1 Overview

1. Standby Mode The machine is in operation or is ready to start operation, with all its loads supplied with power.
0011-3331

2. Power Save Mode The machine deceases the control temperature while the fixing assembly is in a standby state according to the selected power save rating (variable through 'change power save mode' in user mode; default: -10%), thus decreasing the power consumption. Conditions Initiating a Shift from Standby Mode (standby -> power save) - press on the Power Save key Conditions Initiating a Shift Back to Standby Mode (power save -> standby) - press on the Power Save key - press on the control panel power switch 3. Low Power Mode The machine keeps the temperature of the fixing assembly low (140 deg C), with the reader unit and the printer unit supplied with a reduced level of power. Conditions Initiating a Shift from Standby/Power Save Mode (standby -> low power) - after a specific period of time in standby/power save mode (variable through 'low power mode shift interval'; default: 15 min) Conditions Initiating a Shift Back to Standby Mode (low power -> standby) - press on Power Save key - press on control panel power switch

MEMO: If the same setting is used for both 'low power mode shift interval' and 'auto sleep time', a shift is made to sleep mode if a specific period of time passes from a standby state (i.e., no shift takes place to low power mode). 4. Sleep Mode The machine's sleep mode consists of 'sleep mode 1' (high rate of power saving in sleep) and 'sleep mode 3' (low rate of power saving in sleep), and the selection of one over the other depends on how the machine is set and the presence/absence of paper. Conditions Initiating a Shift (standby/power save/low power -> sleep) - The machine remains in a standby state for a specific period of time (variable through 'auto sleep time' in user mode; default: 60 min). - The control panel power switch is turned off while the machine is in a standby state. When a condition has occurred activating a shift to a sleep state, the machine drives the heat discharge fan for a specific period of time (6 min) to cool the inside of the machine and then enters sleep mode. Conditions Initiating Standby Mode (sleep -> standby) - press on the control panel power switch 5. Power-Off Mode The machine enters and remains in power-off mode when its main power switch is turned off. To return from power-off mode, the machine's main power switch must be turned on, in response to which it will automatically return to standby mode.

10-6

Chapter 10

10.4.4.2 SNMP setup

When the machine is used as a Windows printer, enabling 'Use SNMP' causes the operating system to collect machine status information at specific intervals, preventing the machine from starting a sleep state. To avoid the situation, disable the setting (Windows' printer properties). -Disabling 'Use SNMP' 1) Select 'Configure Port' on the Ports screen (printer properties).
0012-7167

F-10-5

2) Remove the check mark from 'SNMP Status Enabled'.

10-7

Chapter 10

F-10-6

10-8

Chapter 10

10.5 Parts Replacement Procedure

10.5.1 External Covers 10.5.1.1 Front Cover 10.5.1.1.1 Removing the Front Cover
1) Open the toner cartridge cover [1]. 2) Open the front cover, and remove the mounting screw [3] for the cover type [2]. 3) Push up the hinge pin [4] found on the front cover, an turn it to the front 90 deg C to pull it off downward. 4) Pull off the front cover at an angle.
[4]
0017-9835

[2]

[1]

[3]
F-10-9

[4]

5) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1]. 6) Remove the 5 mounting screws [2], and detach the inside upper cover [3].
[4] [1]

[2]

[3]

[2] [1]

[1]

[2]

[2]
[3]
F-10-7

[2]

F-10-10

10.5.1.4 Fixing/Feeding Unit Cover 10.5.1.4.1 Removing the Fixing/Feeder Unit Cover
0017-9836

10.5.1.2 Rear Cover 10.5.1.2.1 Removing the Rear Cover

1) Remove the 11 mounting screws [1], and detach the rear cover [2].
[2]

1) Open the front cover, and shift down the fixing/feeding lever to slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Remove the mounting screw [2] of the releasing lever [1]; then, pushing the releasing lever link [3] found at the rear of the fixing/feeder unit, remove the releasing lever while keeping it shifted up.
[3]

0017-9839

[1]

[1]
F-10-8

[1]
F-10-11

[2]

10.5.1.3 Inside Upper Cover 10.5.1.3.1 Removing the Inside Upper Cover
1) The toner cartridge cover. 2) Open the front cover. 3) Remove the mounting screw [1], and detach the primary charging assembly cover [2]. 4) Shift down the fixing/feeding lever [3], and slide out the fixing/feeder unit [4].
0017-9837

3) Remove the mounting screw [1], and detach the fixing knob [2]. 4) Remove the mounting screw [3], and detach the transfer separation charging assembly cover [4]. 5) Remove the 2 mounting screws [5], and detach the fixing/feeder unit cover [6].

10-9

Chapter 10

[4]

[3]

[1]

[5] [5] [2] [6]

F-10-12

[1]

F-10-15

10.5.1.7 Upper Rear Cover 10.5.1.7.1 Removing the Upper Rear Cover
1) Remove the ADF. 2) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the right pocket plate [2]. 3) Remove the 3 screws [3], and detach the left pocket plate [4].
[3] [4] [5] [2] [1]
0017-9842

10.5.1.5 Upper Vertical Path Cover 10.5.1.5.1 Removing the Upper Vertical Path Cover
1) Open the Manual feed tray unit. 2) Open the upper vertical path cover [2]. 3) Holding the Manual feed tray unit [1] slightly up, pull out the upper vertical path cover [2] upward.
[1]
0017-9840

[3]
F-10-16

[1]

[2]
F-10-13

Mark the position of the screw [3] so that the left pocket plate [4] may be mounted back to its original position. 4) Remove the upper rear cover [5].

10.5.1.6 Upper Front Cover Unit 10.5.1.6.1 Removing the Upper Front Cover Unit
1) Remove the inside upper cover. 2) Remove the flat-headed screw [1] (1 pc. each), and detach the 2 magnet catches [2]. 3) Remove the face plate [3], and remove the 3 screws [4]; then, detach the upper front cover unit [5].
[3] [4] [2] [1] [2]
0017-9841

10.5.1.8 Main Controller Box Cover 10.5.1.8.1 Removing the Main Controller Box Cover
1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the main controller box cover [2].
[1]
0017-9843

[2]

[4]

[5] [4]
F-10-14

[4]

[1]
F-10-17

10.5.1.9 System Connector Cover

If the card reader is mounted, be sure to disconnect the connector [1].

10.5.1.9.1 Removing the System Connector Cover

1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the system connector cover [2].
0017-9844

10-10

Chapter 10

[1]
F-10-18

[2]

F-10-21

10.5.1.10 Reader Controller Cover 10.5.1.10.1 Removing the Reader Controller Cover
1) Remove the original size sensor unit (rear). 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the flexible cable [2] together with the cover sheet [3]. 3) Disconnect the flexible cable [2] from the connector [4].
0017-9845

1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Open the main controller box assembly. 3) Remove the high-voltage PCB unit. 4) While detaching the belt [1], remove the three screws [2], and detach the left pickup drive assembly [3].
[1] [3] [2]

[2]

[3]

[1]

[2]

[2]
F-10-22

[4]
F-10-19

4) Remove the 6 screws [1], and detach the reader controller cover [2].
[1] [2] [1]

10.5.3 Pickup Drive Assembly 10.5.3.1 Removing the Pickup Drive Assembly
Construction
0010-9576

[1]

[1]
F-10-20

[1]

10.5.2 Left Pickup Drive Assembly 10.5.2.1 Removing the Left Pickup Drive Assembly
Construction
0010-9572

F-10-23

1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the high-voltage PCB unit. 3) Remove the flywheel. 4) Remove the drum gear. 5) Remove the waste toner pipe. 6) Remove the two screws [1], and loosen the harness guide [2]; disconnect the two connectors [3], and remove the six screws [4]; then, detach the pickup drive assembly [5].

10-11

Chapter 10

[4] [3] [4]

[5]

[6]

[5]

[4]

[5]

[4]
F-10-27

[1] [2] [4]

F-10-24

[5]

10.5.5 Vertical Path Drive Assembly 10.5.5.1 Removing the Vertical Path Drive Assembly
Construction
0010-9577 0010-9587

10.5.4 Developing Drive Assembly 10.5.4.1 Removing the Developing Drive Assembly
Construction

F-10-25

1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the high-voltage PCB unit. 3) Remove the flywheel. 4) Remove the drum gear. 5) Remove the waste toner pipe. 6) Remove the drum drive assembly. 7) Remove the waste toner drive assembly. 8) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the drum fan [3].
[3] [1]

F-10-28

1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the waste toner case. 3) Remove the two screws [1], and detach the harness guide [2].

[1]

[2]
F-10-29

4) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the two screws [4]; then, detach the vertical path drive assembly [5].
[2] [1]
F-10-26

9) Disconnect the two connectors [4], and remove the four screws [5]; then, detach the developing drive assembly [6].

10-12

Chapter 10

[5]

[4]

[4]
F-10-30

[3]

F-10-33

10.5.6 Waste Toner Drive Assembly 10.5.6.1 Removing the Waste Toner Drive Assembly
Construction
0010-9591

1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the high-voltage PCB unit. 3) Loosen the mounting screw on the rear fixing plate of the registration roller assembly. 4) Remove the four screws [1], and disconnect the four connectors [2]; then, detach the multifeeder pickup drive assembly [3].
[2] [1] [2] [3] [1]

[1]
F-10-31

1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the high-voltage PCB unit. 3) Remove the flywheel. 4) Remove the drum gear. 5) Remove the waste toner pipe. 6) Remove the drum drive assembly. 7) Remove the six screws [1], and detach the waste toner drive assembly [2].
[1] [2]

[2]
F-10-34

[1]

[2]

10.5.8 Lifter Drive Assembly 10.5.8.1 Removing the Lifter Drive Assembly (right deck)
Construction
0010-9594

[1]
F-10-32

[1]

F-10-35

10.5.7 Multifeeder Pickup Drive Assembly 10.5.7.1 Removing the Multifeeder Pickup Drive Assembly
Construction
0010-9593

1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the high-voltage PCB unit. 3) Remove the flywheel. 4) Remove the drum gear. 5) Remove the waste toner pipe. 6) Remove the screw, and loosen the harness guide [1]; disconnect the two connectors [2], and remove the four screws [3]; then, detach the lifter drive assembly (for the right deck) [4].

10-13

Chapter 10 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the high-voltage PCB unit. 3) Remove the flywheel. 4) Remove the drum gear. 5) Remove the waste toner pipe. 6) Remove the drum drive assembly. 7) Remove the waste toner drive assembly. 8) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and remove the nine screws [2]; then, detach the main drive assembly [3].
[2] [2] [1] [2]

[1]

[3]

[2]

[4]

[3]
F-10-36

[2]

[3]

10.5.8.2 Removing the Lifter Drive Assembly (left deck)

Construction
0010-9596

[2]

[2]
F-10-40

[3]

[2]

When mounting the main drive assembly, be sure to slide out the fixing/feeding assembly in advance. (A coupling and a spring are mounted to the back of the main drive assembly. If the fixing/feeding assembly is inside, the action of the spring will hinder mounting work.)

10.5.10 Drum Drive Assembly

F-10-37

1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Open the main controller box assembly. 3) Remove the DC controller assembly. 4) Disconnect the three connectors [1], and remove the four screws [2]; then, detach the lifter drive assembly (for the left deck) [3].
[1] [2] [1]

10.5.10.1 Removing the Drum Drive Assembly

1) Remove the HV-DC PCB. 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the flywheel [2].
[1] [2]
0010-9601

F-10-41

3) Loosen the 2 screws [1] (w/ hex hole), and remove the binding screw [2] (w/spring); then, detach the gear [3] of the drum shaft.
[1]
[2] [1]
F-10-38

[2]

[3]

[2]

10.5.9 Main Drive Assembly 10.5.9.1 Removing the Main Drive Assembly
Construction
0010-9599

[1]
F-10-42

[3]

When removing the screw from the drum shaft gear, be sure to pay attention to the direction of gear rotation, i.e., turn it counterclockwise.
F-10-39

4) Remove the water toner case; then, remove the 5 screws [1], and disconnect the 4 connectors [2] to detach the waste toner case base [3].

10-14

Chapter 10 the drum drive assembly [3].

[1] [2] [3] [1]
[1] [2] [1]

[1]

[2]
F-10-46

[3] [2]

10.5.11 Cassette Pickup Drive Assembly

[1]
F-10-43

[2]

[2]

10.5.11.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Drive Assembly

1) Remove the waste toner case base. 2) Remove the cassette pickup assembly (upper, lower). 3) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the cassette pickup drive assembly [2].
[1] [1] [1]
0010-9622

5) Remove the E-ring [2] at the tip of the waste toner pipe [1], and shift the bushing [3] up to remove the 2 screws [4]; then, detach the waste toner pipe [1].

[2]

[3]

[4]

[1]
F-10-47

[2]

10.5.12 Power Supply Unit 10.5.12.1 Removing the Power Supply Unit
1) Remove the lower left cover [1]. - Slide out the left deck/cassette 3/cassette 4 [2]. - 4 screws [3]
[1]
F-10-44
0010-9619

6) Remove the screw [1], and detach the drum cleaner pipe cover [2].
[1] [2]

[1] [3]
F-10-48 F-10-45

[2]

7) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1], and remove the 5 screws [2]; then, detach

2) Remove the upper left cover [1]. - Open the front cover [2].

10-15

Chapter 10 - 9 screws [2]

[3] [2]

- 2 screws [3]
[2] [1] [3] [3]

[3]

[1]
F-10-53

[3]
F-10-49

10.5.13 Control Panel 10.5.13.1 Removing the Control Panel

1) Remove the control panel rear cover [1]. - 2 blocking rubber pieces [2] - 2 screws [3]
[3] [1]
0011-8151

3) Remove the cover plate [1]. - 5 screws [2]

[1] [2]

[2]

[2]

[2]
F-10-50

4) Remove the delivery anti-adhesion fan mounting plate [1]. - 1 connector [2] - 6 screws [3]
[1]

F-10-54

2) Remove the locking hinge left cover [1]. - 1 screw [2]

[3]

[3]

[2]
F-10-51

[1]
F-10-55

[2]

5) Remove the AC driver PCB. 6) Remove the all-night power supply PCB. 7) Remove cover plate [1]. - 2 screws [2]
[2]

3) Remove the lock hinge right cover [1]. - 2 screws [2]

[2]

[1]

[1]

[3]

[2]
F-10-56 F-10-52

8) Remove the power supply unit [1]. - 1 connector [2] - all connectors of the relay PCB

4) Remove the control panel [1]. - 1 control panel cable [2] - 4 screws [3]

10-16

Chapter 10

10.5.14 Control Panel LCD Unit

[1] [2] [3]

10.5.14.1 Before Starting the Work

1) Remove the control panel. 2) Remove the 5 rubber pieces [1] from the back of the control panel.
0011-8158

[1]

[1]

F-10-57

10.5.13.2 Removing the Control Panel Interface PCB

1) Remove the upper rear right cover. 2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and free the cable from the edge saddle [2].
[2] [1]
0011-7567

F-10-61

3) Remove the control panel rear cover [1]. - 6 screws [2]

[2]

[2]

[2]
F-10-62

[1]

F-10-58

3) Remove the control panel interface cover [1]. - 2 screws [2] - 8 screws [3]
[3]

4) Remove the shielding plate assembly [1]. - 5 connectors [2] - 2 screws [3] - 8 screws [4]
[2] [4]

[1]

[3] [1]

[4]

[2] [4]

[3]

[4]

[3]
F-10-63

[3]
F-10-59

[2]

10.5.14.2 Removing the Control Panel LCD

1) Remove the control panel LCD [1]. - 2 screws [2]
0011-8161

4) Remove the control panel interface PCB [1]. - 6 connectors [2] - 4 screws [3]
[1] [2]

[1]

[3]

[3]
[2]
F-10-64

10.5.15 Cover Switch Assembly

[2]
F-10-60

10.5.15.1 Removing the Front Cover Switch Assembly

1) Remove the upper front cover unit. 2) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the cover switch assembly [2].
0010-9616

10-17

Chapter 10

[3]

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]
F-10-65

[1]

F-10-69

3) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and detach the cover switch assembly [2].
[2]

10.5.17 Drum Heater Switch Assembly 10.5.17.1 Removing the Drum Heater Switch Assembly
1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the left lower cover. (4 screws) 3) Remove the 3 screws [1], and disconnect the 7 connectors [2]; then, detached power cord base [3]. thereafter, free the fixing claw to detach the drum heat switch [4].
[2] [2]
0010-9614

[1]
F-10-66

[3]

10.5.16 Manual Feed Tray Switch Assembly 10.5.16.1 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Switch Assembly
1) Remove the process unit cover. (4 screws) 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the 2 connectors [2]; then, detach the pre-transfer charging assembly fan [3].
[1] [2] [3]
[1] [2]
F-10-70
0010-9615

[4]

[1]

[1]

10.5.18 DC Controller PCB 10.5.18.1 Removing the DC Controller PCB

1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Disconnect all connectors of the PCB, and remove the 4 screws [1]; then, detach the DC controller PCB [2].
F-10-67
0010-9613

[1]

3) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the potential sensor PCB [3].
[3]

[1]

[2]

[1]
F-10-71

10.5.18.2 After Replacing the DC Controller PCB

[1]
F-10-68

[2]

0010-9611

4) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the 2 connectors [2]; then, detach the manual feed tray switch assembly [3].

Before starting the work and checking - Be sure to print out the user mode/service mode data before replacing the DC controller PCB. - Be sure to adjust the on/off timing of the clutch in service mode (COPIER

10-18

Chapter 10 > FUNCTION > MISC-P > CL-ADJ) after replacing the DC controller PCB. Before adjusting, be sure to place two or more sheets of A4 or LTR in the following pick-up slots, otherwise you can't perform the adjustment. - Left deck - Cassette 4 - Paper deck (accessory)

10.5.19 Control Panel Inverter PCB 10.5.19.1 Before Starting the Work
1) Remove the control panel. 2) Remove the 5 rubber pieces [1] from the back of the control panel.
0011-8154

Points to note when turning the power off (Executing the shutdown sequence) Be sure to turn off the main power after executing the shutdown sequence to protect the hard disk.

[1]

[1]

Points to note when turning the power on (When Delivery accessory is mounted) When any delivery accessory (Finisher, Stacker, and/or Perfect binder) is mounted, be sure to turn the power on in the order of the delivery accessory to the host machine. If you turn on the power in reverse order, the delivery accessory cannot be correctly recognized. 1) Turn the power on. 2) Execute the followings in service mode. - COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > DC-CON (Clear the RAM of the DC controller PCB) - COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CNT-DCON (Clear the service counter of the DC controller PCB) 3) Turn the power off and back to on. (Turning the power off/on executes to clear the RAM.) 4) Input the order of connecting the delivery accessories in service mode below. - COPIER > OPTION > ACCPSD-D > ACC1 through ACC8 (Set the order of connecting the delivery accessories.) 5) Turn the power off and back to on. (Turning the power off/on enables the setting of the connection order of the delivery accessories and the delivery accessories can be recognized.) 6) Input "0" in the service mode below. - COPIER > OPTION > BODY > FIX-EXP (Fixing exp control mode) 7) Input the value on the service label in the appropriate item of service mode. 8) Turn the power off and back to on. (Turning the power off/on enables the value input in service mode.) 9) Execute the followings in service mode. - COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > CL-ADJ (Level 2) - COPEIR > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ > OP-SENS (Level2) 10) Input the value on the label of new DC controller PCB in the appropriate item of service mode.

F-10-73

3) Remove the control panel rear cover [1]. - 6 screws [2]

[2]

[2]

[2]
F-10-74

[1]

10.5.19.2 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB

1) Remove the control panel inverter PCB [1]. - 2 connectors [2] - 2 screws [3]
0010-9609

[1]

[2]

[3]
F-10-75

[2]

10.5.20 Control Panel Key Switch PCB 10.5.20.1 Before Starting the Work
1) Remove the control panel. 2) Remove the 5 rubber pieces [1] from the back of the control panel.
0011-8159

[1]

[1]

DC+09+28+24+09+25
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
F-10-76 F-10-72

[1] COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP > D-HV-DE [2] COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > D-HV-TR [3] COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > D-PRE-TR [4] COPIER > ADJUST > HV-SP > D-HV-SP [5] COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP > OFFSETDA 11) Turn the power off and back to on.

3) Remove the control panel rear cover [1]. - 6 screws [2]

10-19

Chapter 10

[2]

[2]

[2]

[2]

[2]
F-10-77

[1]

[2]
F-10-81

[1]

4) Remove the shielding plate assembly [1]. - 5 connectors [2] - 2 screws [3] - 8 screws [4]
[2] [4]

4) Remove the shielding plate assembly [1]. - 5 connectors [2] - 2 screws [3] - 8 screws [4]
[2] [4]

[1]

[1]

[4]

[2] [4]

[4]

[2] [4]

[4]

[3]
F-10-78

[4]

[3]
F-10-82

10.5.20.2 Removing the Control Panel KEY PCB

1) Remove the control panel KEY PCB [1]. - 4 screws [2]
[1]
0011-8160

5) Remove the control panel KEY PCB. 6) Remove the control panel LCD.

10.5.21.2 Removing the Control Panel LED PCB

1) Remove the control panel LED PCB [1]. - 3 screws [2]
[1]
0011-8163

[2]

[2]
F-10-79

[2]

10.5.21 Control Panel Family PCB 10.5.21.1 Before Starting the Work
1) Remove the control panel. 2) Remove the 5 blocking rubber pieces [1] from the back of the control panel.
0011-8162

F-10-83

10.5.22 Control Panel CPU PCB 10.5.22.1 Before Starting the Work
1) Remove the control panel. 2) Remove the 5 rubber pieces [1] from the back of the control panel.
0011-8155

[1]

[1] [1]
F-10-80

[1]

3) Remove the control panel rear cover [1]. - 6 screws [2]

F-10-84

3) Remove the control panel rear cover [1]. - 6 screws [2]

10-20

Chapter 10

[2]

[2]
[2] [2]

[2]
F-10-85

[1]
[1]
0011-8156

10.5.22.2 Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB

1) Remove the control panel CPU PCB [1]. - 5 connectors [2] - 6 screws [3]
[3] [2]

[3]
F-10-88

10.5.24 All Night Power Supply PCB 10.5.24.1 Before Starting the Work
1) Remove the lower left cover. 2) Remove the upper left cover. 3) Remove the cover plate. 4) Remove the delivery anti-adhesion fan mounting plate [1]. - 1 connector [2] - 6 screws [3]
[3]
[1]
0011-7620

[2]
[3] [3]

[1]

[2]

[3]
F-10-86

F-10-89

10.5.23 AC Driver PCB 10.5.23.1 Before Starting the Work

1) Remove the lower left cover. 2) Remove the upper left cover. 3) Remove the cover plate. 4) Remove the delivery anti-adhesion fan mounting plate [1]. - 1 connector [2] - 6 screws [3]
[1]
0010-9606

10.5.24.2 Removing the All Night Power Supply PCB

1) Remove the all night power supply PCB [1]. - all connectors of PCB - 4 screws [2]
[2]
0010-9605

[1]

[3]

[3]

[2]
F-10-90

[2]
F-10-87

10.5.25 Relay PCB 10.5.25.1 Removing the Relay PCB

0011-9303 0010-9604

10.5.23.2 Removing the AC Driver PCB

1) Remove the AC driver PCB [1]. - all connectors of PCB - 4 screws [2] - 1 screw [3] (w/ washer)

1) Remove the left lower cover. (4 screws) 2) Disconnect the connector from the PCB; then, remove the screw [1], and detach the relay PCB [1] from the four PCB holders [2].

10-21

Chapter 10

[2]

[1]

[2]

[2]

[3]

[3]

[1]

[2]
F-10-91

[2]

F-10-94

10.5.26 High-Voltage Transformer (AC) 10.5.26.1 Removing the High-Voltage Transformer Assembly (AC)
1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the HV-AC PCB together with its mounting base. - 2 connectors [2] - 2 screws [3]
[2]
0010-9603

10.5.28 HV-DC PCB 10.5.28.1 Removing the HV-DC PCB

1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the high-voltage contact [1]. - 3 connectors [2] - 2 screws [3]
[1] [3]
0010-9600

[3]

[1]
F-10-92

[3]

[2]
F-10-95

3) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the high-voltage transformer assembly (AC) [3].
[1] [1] [2]

3) Remove the HV-DC PCB [1]. - 5 connectors [2] - Free the cable from the wire saddle [3]. - 2 screws [4] - 1 screw [5]
[2] [1] [3]

[5]

[4]

[3]
F-10-93

[2]
F-10-96

10.5.27 HV-AC PCB 10.5.27.1 Removing the HV-AC PCB

1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the HV-AC PCB [1]. - 2 connectors [2] - 4 screws [3]
0010-9602

10.5.28.2 After Replacing the HV-DC PCB

1) Set the values (5 types) indicated on the label attached to the new HV-DC PCB for the respective service mode items:
0010-9598

10-22

Chapter 10

[1]

[2]

[2]

[2]

H+04+05+05+01+24
F-10-100

[2]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

F-10-97

2) Remove the rear cover [1]. - 1 reader power supply cable [2] - 8 screws [3]
[2] [3]

[1] COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > H-PRE-TR [2] COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > HVT-TR [3] COPIER > ADJUST > HV-SP > HVT-SP [4] COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP > HVT-DE [5] COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP > OFFSETAC 2) Turn off and then on the power.

10.5.29 High-Voltage PCB 10.5.29.1 Removing the High-Voltage Assembly

1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1], and remove the 3 screws [2]; then, free the cable from the wire saddle [3].
[2]
0011-7623

[3]

[3]
[2]

[1]
[1] [3]
F-10-101

[1]

10.5.30.2 Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor Lift Motor Driver PCB
1) Remove the fixing inlet sensor lift motor driver PCB [1]. - 2 connectors [2] - 4 screws [3]
[2]
0011-4919

[2]

[1]
F-10-98

[3]

3) Slide out the high-voltage assembly [1] along the rails on both sides to detach.
[3]

[3] [1]
F-10-102

10.5.31 Transceiver PCB 10.5.31.1 Before Starting the Work

F-10-99
0011-4913

10.5.30 Motor Driver PCB 10.5.30.1 Before Starting the Work

1) Remove the main controller box cover [1]. - 10 screws [2]
0011-4918

1) Remove the main controller box cover [1]. - 10 screws [2]

10-23

Chapter 10

[1]

[2]

[3]

[3]

[3]

[2]

[2]

[1]

[2]
F-10-103

2) Remove the rear cover [1]. - 1 reader power supply cable [2] - 8 crews [3]
[2] [3]

[2] [2]
F-10-106

10.5.31.2 Removing the Transceiver PCB

1) Remove the transceiver unit [1]. - 2 screws [2]
[3]
[2]
0011-4914

[2]

[3]
[1]

[1]
F-10-104

3) Remove the lower left cover [1]. - 4 screws [2]

F-10-107

2) Free the cable from the edge saddle [1]; then, remove the 4 screws [2] to detach the transceiver unit cover [3].

[1] [2]

[3]

[1] [2]
F-10-105

[2]
F-10-108

4) Remove the power code base [1]. - 4 screws [2] - 4 connectors [3]

3) Remove the transceiver PCB [1]. - nut [2] - washer [3] - 2 screws [4] - 2 locking supports [5]

10-24

Chapter 10

[4] [5] [2]

[2]

[3]

[1]
[1]
F-10-109

10.5.32 Double Feeding Detection PCB ( Transmission ) 10.5.32.1 Before Starting the Work
1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Remove the transfer/separation charging assembly cover. 3) Remove the 2 knobs [1]. - 2 screws [2]
0011-8279

[3]
F-10-112

10.5.33 Double Feeding Detection PCB ( Reception ) 10.5.33.1 Before Starting the Work
1) Remove the primary charging assembly cover. 2) Remove the process unit cover.
0011-8280

[1]

10.5.33.2 Removing the Double-Feed Detection Unit (reception)

1) Remove the double-Feed Detection PCB (reception) [1]. - 2 connectors [2] - 4 screws [3]
[2]
0011-8286

[2]
F-10-110

[3] [3]

4) Remove the fixing/feeding unit cover [1]. - 2 screws [2]

[1]
F-10-113

[2]

10.5.34 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan 10.5.34.1 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan (FM2)
1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the fixing heat discharge fan [3].
[2]
F-10-111
0010-9597

[1]

[2]

10.5.32.2 Removing the Double-Feed Detection Unit (transmitting)

1) Remove the double-feed Detection PCB (transmitting) [1]. - 2 connectors [2] - 4 screws [3]
0011-8285

[1]

[1]
F-10-114

[3]

When mounting the fan, be sure that the direction of air current is as indicated by the arrow.

10.5.35 Laser Cooling Fan 10.5.35.1 Removing the Laser Motor Cooling Fan (FM1)
1) Remove the inside upper cover.
0010-9590

10-25

Chapter 10 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness lock [2] from the plate. 3) Remove the 4 screws [3], and detach the laser motor cooling fan [4].
[3] [2] [1]

3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the 2 connectors [2]; then, detach the delivery speed switchover clutch [3].
[1] [2]

[3] [4]
F-10-115

[1]

[3]
F-10-118

[3]

10.5.35.2 Removing the Laser Cooling Fan 1 (FM3)

1) Remove the inside upper cover. 2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the laser cooling fan 1 [3].
[2] [1] [3]
0010-9589

When detaching the delivery speed switching clutch, take care not to lose the bearing and washer (rear only) on both sides of the clutch shaft. 4) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the curl-removing fan [3].
[2] [3]

[1]

[2]
F-10-116

[2]
F-10-119

10.5.37 Drum Fan

When mounting the fan, be sure that the direction of air current is as indicated by the arrow.

10.5.37.1 Removing the Drum Fan (FM8)

1) Remove the HV-DC PCB. 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect that connector [2]; then, detach the drum fan unit [3].
[3] [1]
0010-9585

10.5.36 De-Curling Fan 10.5.36.1 Removing the Curl-Removing Fan

1) Remove the fixing/feeding unit cover. 2) Remove the fixing motor base [1]. Free the cable from the edge saddle [2]. - 3 screws [3] - 1 screws [4]
0010-9586

[3]

[1]

[2]

[1]
F-10-120

[4]

3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 3 screws [2]; then, detach the drum fan [3].

[3] [2]
F-10-117

10-26

Chapter 10

[2]

[2]

[1]

[1]
F-10-121

[3]

[2]

[1]
F-10-124

10.5.38 Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly Fan 10.5.38.1 Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly Fan (FM10)
1) Remove the process unit cover. (4 screws) 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the 2 connectors [2]; then, detach the fan motor [3].
[1] [2] [3]
0010-9583

4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the power supply cooling fan [3].
[1] [3] [2] [1]

F-10-125

F-10-122

3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the pre-transfer charging assembly fan [3].
[1] [3]

When mounting the fan, be sure that the direction of air current is as indicated by the arrow.

10.5.40 Power Supply Cooling Fan 2 10.5.40.1 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan 2 (FM12)
1) Remove the fan mounting base. 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the power supply cooling fan 2 [3].
0010-9581

[2]
F-10-123

When mounting the fan, be sure that the direction of air current is as indicated by the arrow.

10.5.39 Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 10.5.39.1 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 (FM11)
1) Remove the left lower cover. (4 screw) 2) Remove the power supply unit. 3) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the fan mounting base [2].
0010-9582

[1]

[3]

[2]

[1]
F-10-126

When mounting the fan, be sure that the direction of air current is as indicat-

10-27

Chapter 10 ed by the arrow.

10.5.41 Separation Fan 10.5.41.1 Removing the Separation Fan (FM13)

1) Slide out the fixing/feeder unit. 2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the fixing/feeding lower cover (1) [2] and the fixing/feeding lower cover (2) [3].
0010-9580

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]

[1]

[3]

[1]
F-10-130

When mounting the fan, be sure that the direction of air current is as indicated by the arrow.

10.5.43 Delivery Anti-Adhesion Fan

[1]
F-10-127

10.5.43.1 Removing the Delivery Anti-Adhesion Fan (FM17)

1) Remove the left lower cover. (4 screws) 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the fan unit [3].
[2]
0010-9578

3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the heater 3 screws [2]; then, detach the separation fan [3].
[2] [1]

[2]

[3]
[3]
F-10-131 F-10-128

[1]

3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fan [2].

10.5.42 Developing Fan 10.5.42.1 Removing the Developing Fan (FM15)

1) Remove the primary charging assembly. 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the fan unit [3].
0010-9579

[1] [2]

[2]

[3]

[1]

F-10-132

10.5.44 Duplex Feed Fan 10.5.44.1 Removing the Duplex Feed Fan (FM19)
1) Remove the duplex unit cover. (4 screws, 3 knobs) 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 3 screws [2]; then, detect the duplex feed fan unit [3]. At this time, keep in mind that the shift assembly [4] will also come off.
F-10-129
0010-9575

3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the developing assembly fan [2].

10-28

Chapter 10

[2]

[4]

[2]

[3]

[2] [3]

[1]
[2] [1]
F-10-133

3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the duplex feed fan [2].

F-10-136

[1] [2]

3) Remove the reader heat discharge fan 2 [1] - 2 screws [2] - 1 connector [3]

[1]

[1]
F-10-134

[2] [3]
F-10-137

When mounting the fan, be sure that the direction of air current is as indicated by the arrow.

10.5.47 Fixing Inlet Sensor Motor 10.5.47.1 Before Starting the Work
0011-7957

10.5.45 Separation Heat Discharge Fan 10.5.45.1 Removing the Separation Heat Discharge Fan (FM20)
1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the separation heat discharge fan [3].
[2] [1]
0010-9574

1) Open the front cover, and slide out the fixing/feeding unit. 2) Remove the fixing assembly.

10.5.47.2 Removing the Fixing Inlet Sensor Lifter Motor

1) Remove the blocking cover [1]. - 2 screws [2]
[1]
0011-7958

[2]
[3]
F-10-135

[2]

F-10-138

10.5.46 Reader Heat Discharge Fan 2 10.5.46.1 Removing the Reader Heat Discharge Fan 2
1) Remove the upper rear cover. 2) Remove the reader heat discharge fan 2 unit [1]. - 1 connector [2] - 2 screws [3]
0011-7434

2) Remove the fixing inlet sensor lifter motor assembly [1]. - 1 connector [2] - 1 screw [3]
[2] [1]

[3]
F-10-139

10-29

Chapter 10 3) Remove the fixing inlet sensor lifter motor [1]. - 2 screws [2]

[1]

[2]
F-10-140

10-30

Chapter 11 MEAP

Contents

Contents
11.1 MEAP.........................................................................................................................................................................11-1
11.1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 11-1 11.1.2 MEAP Counter......................................................................................................................................................................... 11-1 11.1.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform........................................................................................................................................ 11-1 11.1.4 Checking the Operating Environment. .................................................................................................................................... 11-2 11.1.5 Setting Up the Network ........................................................................................................................................................... 11-5 11.1.6 Setting the method to login to SMS ......................................................................................................................................... 11-6 11.1.7 Login to SMS ........................................................................................................................................................................... 11-9 11.1.8 Checking Application List ..................................................................................................................................................... 11-11 11.1.9 Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application .......................................................................................................................... 11-12 11.1.10 Checking the Platform Information ..................................................................................................................................... 11-13 11.1.11 MEAP Specifications........................................................................................................................................................... 11-14 11.1.12 Checking the System Information of a MEAP Application with SMS ............................................................................... 11-15 11.1.13 Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application................................................................................................... 11-16 11.1.14 Reference (Application System Information) ...................................................................................................................... 11-17 11.1.15 Installing an Application...................................................................................................................................................... 11-18 11.1.16 MEAP Enterprise Service Manager..................................................................................................................................... 11-20 11.1.17 Adding a License File .......................................................................................................................................................... 11-21 11.1.18 Disabling a License File (suspending a license) .................................................................................................................. 11-23 11.1.19 Downloading/Removing an Invalidated License File.......................................................................................................... 11-25 11.1.20 Reusable license................................................................................................................................................................... 11-27 11.1.21 License for forwarding......................................................................................................................................................... 11-27 11.1.22 Uninstalling an Application ................................................................................................................................................. 11-30 11.1.23 Changing Login Services ..................................................................................................................................................... 11-31 11.1.24 Initializing the Password...................................................................................................................................................... 11-35 11.1.25 Creating a Backup for MEAP Application Area, Formatting the Hard Disk, Restoring the MEAP Application Area with the Backup, Using the SST (Service Support Tool)........................................................................................................................... 11-36 11.1.26 Replacing the Hard Disk Drive............................................................................................................................................ 11-38 11.1.27 MEAP Safe Mode ................................................................................................................................................................ 11-38 11.1.28 Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2)............................................................................................................. 11-39 11.1.29 Reference material ............................................................................................................................................................... 11-42 11.1.30 Option for exclusive individual measure ............................................................................................................................. 11-43

Chapter 11

11.1 MEAP
11.1.1 Overview
The term MEAP stands for Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform, and is used to generically refer to a platform for software built into MFPs and peripheral equipment. The architecture is based on Java (J2ME, i.e., Java 2 Platform Micro Edition), and is designed to enable the execution of Java applications. A MEAP application behaves independently from its host printer's system software, and may be installed or uninstalled using SMS (Service Management Service), which is an interface that runs as part of the browser on a PC. As long as the device supports MEAP, most MEAP applications may be added to the device in the field.
0011-9562

11.1.2 MEAP Counter

In addition to the commonly found print counters, a device that supports MEAP is equipped with a counter mechanism used to keep track of which functions are used as well as how often they are used for individual MEAP applications that are installed. The MEAP counter readings may be checked by making the following selections on the device control panel: Counter Check Key>MEAP Counter Check. A device may possess the following MEAP counters, and which counter to use and, therefore, to display all depend on the application in question. A counter reading may be of a type that is forced to increase as a job is expected or of a type that is increased when the application sends instructions; or, it may be of a type that increases independently of the host device, thus increasing solely in response to the application being run; specifics are as follows:
T-11-1 Type forced Count item total 1 total (black-and-white small) total (black-and-while large) total (black-and-white 1) scan (total 1) black-and-white scan (total 1) in response to instructions from application black-and-white scan 1
0011-9564

black-and-white scan 2 black-and-white scan 3 black-and-white scan 4 application-independent free 1 free 2 free 3 free 4 free 5 free 6 free 7 free 8 free 9 free 10 free 11 free 12

MEMO: forced: the device forces the counter to increase its reading in response to execution of a job. in response to instructions from application: the counter increases its reading only in response to instructions from the application. application independent: the counter operates according to the specifications of the application.

11.1.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform

In addition to the installation of the system software, language file, and RUI, a printer equipped with MEAP functions calls for the installation of MEAP content, which offers functions (system services) needed to run MEAP applications and class libraries needed by the MEAP applications to control the device. It is important that the version of the system software be fully compatible with the version of the MEAP content, calling for special care. (In the case of a mismatch, the device will not be able to run the MEAP application.) For version information, refer to the Service Information bulletin that is released in conjunction with the system software. The following shows the components of a MEAP application:
0011-9565

11-1

Chapter 11

[5] [1] [6] [2] [3]

F-11-1

[7] [8]

[4]

[1] User Interface Control Bock installed as part of the system software [2] Device Control Block installed as part of the system software [3] Operating System installed as part of the system software [4] Java VM installed as part of the system software [5] MEAP System Services (includes SDL/SSO) installed as part of MEAP content [6] Device Control Class Library installed as part of MEAP content [7] internally developed application [8] externally developed application

11.1.4 Checking the Operating Environment.

This section lists the requirements on the operating environment for the maintenance.
0017-9690

Memo: Java Script must be enabled in every environment. Important: For the following operations in the combined environment of Windows XP and Internet Explorer6, Java2 Runtime Environment Standard Edition 1.3.1 or later is required. - User registration / edit in SDL - User registration / edit in SSO local device - Use of SSO remote login in SSO

Remote Login of Default Authentication or Simple Device Login (SDL), Remote UI, and Portal Services Remote Login of Default Authentication or Simple Device Login (SDL), Remote UI, and Portal Services guarantee operation under the following system environment.
T-11-2 Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 SE Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 SP6a Microsoft Windows ME Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional SP3 Supported browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 Gold Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 - 5.1.6 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.2.2

Microsoft Windows XP Professional / Home Mac OS 8.6 - 9.x Mac OS X 10 - 10.2.4

Remote UI (RUI) RUI guarantees operation under the following system environment.
T-11-3 Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 SE Microsoft Windows ME Microsoft Windows NT Workstartion 4.0 Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Microsoft Windows XP MacOS 8.6 or later Supported browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP2 or later Netscape Communicator 4.6 or later

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or later

11-2

Chapter 11

SMS SMS guarantees operation under the following system environment.

T-11-4 Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 SE Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Microsoft Windows XP Supported browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

SDL and SSO with Local Devoce Authentication (user registration/edit functions) For user registration / edit in SDL and SSO(with Local Authentication), following system requirements must be satisfied. System environment for administrator
T-11-5 Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 SE Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional SP3 Microsoft Windows XP Supported browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

System environment for end user

T-11-6 Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 SE Microsoft Windows NT Workstation4.0 Microsoft Windows ME Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Supported browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0.1 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0.1 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Microsoft Windows XP Professional

SSO domain authentication environment Windows server for Security Agent to be installed Security Agent (hereinafter SA) guarantees operation in the following system environment.

T-11-7 Memory Hardware Hard disk CPU 256MB or more Empty capacity of 15MB or more Processor more than Intel Celeron 800 MHz corresponding Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional SP4 Microsoft Windows 2000 Server SP4 Software OS Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP2 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP1 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2

11-3

Chapter 11
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server SP4 Corresponding Active Directory Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP1 * Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 *

* Construction of SSO domain environment by using Active Directory of Microsoft Windows Server 2003 needs SA of version 2.0.1 or newer, SSO Login application of version 3.0.0 or newer.

Combination list of the versions of SSO Login application of MEAP device and SA
T-11-8 Product Nameof MEAP Device US EU AO Version Version of SA of SSO V1.1.0 V1.2.0 Login Applicati on V1.1.0 A A

V1.3.0

V1.3.1

V2.0.0

V2.0.1

V3.0.1

iR5020/ iR5020i/ iR6020/ iR6020i iR2220i/ iR2220N/ iR3320i/ iR3320N iR C3220/ iR C2620

iR5020N/ iR5020i/ iR6020N/ iR6020i iR2220i/ iR2220N/ iR3320i/ iR3320N iR C3220/ iR C2620

iR5020i/ iR6020i

iR2220i/ iR3320i

V1.1.0

iR C3220/ iR C2620

V1.1.1

iR 2270/ iR 2870/ iR 3035/ iR 2270 / iR 2870/ iR 3035/ iR 2270 /2870/3035/3045 iR 3045 iR 3045 iR85+/ iR8070/ iR105+/ iR9070 iR 5570/ iR 6570 iR C3170U/ iR C3170i iR85+/ iR8070/ iR105+/ iR9070 iR 5570 / 6570 iR 3170C/ iR 3170Ci/ iR C2570/ iR C2570i iR 5870C/ iR 5870Ci/ iR 6870C/ iR 6870Ci iR85+/ iR8070/ iR105+/ iR9070 iR 5570 / 6570 iR C3170/ iR C3170i/ iR C2570/ iR C2570i iR C5870/ iR C5870i/ iR C6870/ iR C6870i

V1.1.2 V2.2.7 V1.1.3 V2.2.7 V2.0.0, V2.2.9 V2.2.6

A A A A A A

A A A A A A

A A A A A A

A A A A A A

A B A B B B

A B A B B B

A B A B B B

iR C5870U/ iR C6870U iR7086/ iR7095/ iR7095 Printer/ iR7105 iR C5180i/ iR C4580i/ iR C4080i

V2.4.0 V2.5.0 V3.9.0 V3.0.0

A A A A

A A A A

A A A A

A A A A

B B B B

B B C C

B B C C

iR7086/ iR7095/ iR7095 P/ iR7086/ iR7095/ iR7095P/ iR7105 iR7105 iR C4080/ iR C4080N/ iR C4580/ iR C4580N/ iR C5180/ iR C5180N iR C4080/ iR C4080N/ iR C4580/ iR C4580N/ iR C5180/ iR C5180N

imagePRESS C1 iR C2880/ iR C3380 iR3025/ iR3030/ iR3035/ iR3045 iR 5055/ iR 5065/ iR 5075 iR C5185 imagePRESS C7000VP iR 5050

imagePRESS C1 iR C2880 / C3380 iR3025/ iR3030/ iR3035/ iR3045 iR 5055/ iR 5065/ iR 5075 iR C5185 imagePRESS C7000VP iR 3180C/ iR3180Ci -

imagePRESS C1 iR C2880 / C3380 iR3025/ iR3030/ iR3035/ iR3045 iR 5055/ iR 5065/ iR 5075 iR C5185 imagePRESS C7000VP iR C3180i / iR C2580i -

V3.1.0 V3.2.0 V3.4.1 V3.5.0 V3.6.0 V3.8.0 V3.9.0 V3.9.0

A A A A A A A A

A A A A A A A A

A A A A A A A A

A A A A A A A A

B B B B B B B B

C C C C C C C C

C C C C C C C C

A = SSO basic function support B = SSO basic function + Multi domain function + LLS cache function support C = SSO basic function + Multi domain function + LLS cache function support + Server 2003 Active Directory support Memo: -It must improve in the version of SSO Login application and version of SA when you want to use the function B or C. -The right of access to the domain controller and the right of access to the Windows 2003 DNS are necessary, when the domain authentication is used with SSO. Important: -The device using SSO authentication and the Windows server on which Security Agent is installed must exists in the same domain. -In the case that Security Agent has been installed in Windows XP Professional SP2, Windows Server 2003 SP1/Server 2003 R2 and Windows Firewall is set enabled, Security Agent (SA.exe) needs to be added as an exceptional program of Windows Firewall. If not being designated a directory of installation, SA.exe is stored in the following directory. C:\Program Files\Canon\SSOPackage\SecurityAgent -In the case that Active Directory has been constructed in Windows Server 2003 SP1/Server 2003 R2 and Windows Firewall is set enabled, TCP port '5678' used by Security Agent needs to be added in Windows Firewall.

Browser

11-4

Chapter 11 The following combinations of operations are guaranteed for the access from Web browser to MEAP device.
T-11-9 OS Microsoft Windows 98SE Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 SP6a Microsoft Windows ME Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional SP3 Supported Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP2, Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2, Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2, Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP3, Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2, Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1, Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1,

Microsoft Windows XP Professional

11.1.5 Setting Up the Network

To allow a MEAP device to accept accesses through the network, for example you operate a device with SMS, the On option must be selected on Use HTTP screen. The option is selected by default. The setting can be changed on the control panel of the MEAP device. 1) Make the following selections: Ad Func button > System Settings button> Down-arrow button. Memo: If the System manager ID and system password have already been assigned, ID Entry dialog appears after System Settings button is pressed. Enter the system manager ID and the password, and click ID key to go into System Management Mode.
0017-9691

F-11-2

2) Make the following selections: MEAP Settings button > Use HTTP button> On button > OK button .

F-11-3

Memo: When using SSL, set [Use SSL] ON. (This setting is also applied to the SSL setting of RUI. Same is true in the case of setting SSL ON on the side of RUI.) Setting [Use SSL] ON displays the message dialogue 'Changes effective after the main power switch is turned OFF and ON' . Press [OK].

11-5

Chapter 11

F-11-4

3) Press Done button as many times as necessary until the Basic screen appears. 4) Turn off the device's main power; wait for 10 sec, and then turn the power back on.

- The setting [Use HTTP] is not actually enabled/disabled until you have turned off and then on the device's main power switch. - You cannot make a connection through a proxy server. If a proxy server is in use, enter the IP address of the MEAP device in the Exceptions field for the browser. Open Internet Options dialog of Internet Explorer and select Connections tab, LAN Settings button, Use a proxy server option, and Advanced button of Proxy server group. Proxy Settings dialog will opens. The Exceptions field is in the dialog. As network settings vary among environments, consult the network administrator. - If Cookie and JavaScript are not enabled in the Web browser, you will not be able to use SMS. - To type text using the Web browser, use the characters compatible with the MEAP device's touch panel display. The MEAP device may not properly recognize some characters. - When [se SSL] is made available, it is necessary to set the key and the certificate necessary for the SSL communication. Set the key and the certificate by SSL with [Certificate Settings] that exists in [System Settings] > [Network Settings] > [TCP/IP Settings] on the iR device.

11.1.6 Setting the method to login to SMS

SMS Installer Service, which is used to login SMS includes Password Authentication and Remote Login Service Authentication (henceforce: RLS Authentication). Password Authentication is an authentication method only by password. RLS Authentication is an authentication method using SDL / SSO by ID and password. Either or both of the authentication methods can be enabled by changing the setting. Memo: If Default Authentication is selected as the device authentication method, 'RLS Authentication' is not selectable as SMS Login method. Also, if 'RLS Authentication' is selected, the device authentication method (Default Authentication, SDL, SSO) cannot be changed. Setting of login method to SMS (Start/Stop) must be made after logging-in by the other login method. In other words, setting for Start/Stop of Password Authentication is made after logging-in with RLS Authentication, and setting for Start/Stop of RLS Authentication is made after logging-in with Password Authentication. The table below shows the setting methods for each combination of login method and Start/Stop.
T-11-10 Start RLS Authentication Start Password Authentication Stop Password Authentication Login available with either method Login available only with RLS Authentication Stop RLS Authentication Login available only with Password Authentication Setting unavailable
0017-9692

When only RLS Authentication is enabled, there may be a case you cannot login to device for the following reasons. - Authentication server down - Disconnection with authentication server due to network failure In these cases, boot the device as MEAP SAFE mode from device service mode. By booting the device as MEAP SAFE mode, login to SMS becomes available as Default Authentication is enabled. After login to SMS, set RLS Authentication as Started, return the device to normal mode, and then login by RLS Authentication.

Setting for login by Password Authentication 1) In order to make a setting for login by Password Authentication, you need to login by RLS Authentication. Therefore, login by RLS Authentication. Login screen (In case authentication method is SSO)

11-6

Chapter 11

F-11-5

2) Select 'System Management' tab > 'Utility' tab > 'Application Management Function' tab.

F-11-6

3) In order to enable login by Password Authentication, tick SMS Installer Service (Password Authentication) radio button and then click [Start]. On the other hand, in order to disable login by Password Authentication, clear the tick of SMS Installer Service (Password Authentication) radio button and click [Stop].

F-11-7

4) Logout once and login again to check to see that the setting is applied properly. In case the setting is changed from 'Stop' to 'Start', login screen that was not seen before is displayed. In case the setting is changed from 'Start' to 'Stop', access to login screen leads to the screen below and login becomes unavailable. Login error screen

11-7

Chapter 11

F-11-8

Setting for login by RLS Authentication 1) In order to make a setting for Login by RLS Authentication, you need to Login by Password Authentication. Login screen by Password Authentication

F-11-9

2) Select 'System Management' tab > 'Utility' tab > 'Application Management Function' tab.

F-11-10

3) In order to enable Login by RLS Authentication, tick SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service Authentication) radio button and then click [Start]. On the other hand, in order to disable login by RLS Authentication, clear the tick of SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service Authentication) radio button and click [Stop].

11-8

Chapter 11

F-11-11

4) Logout once and login again to check to see that the setting is applied properly. In case the setting is changed from 'Stop' to 'Start', login screen that was not seen before is displayed. In case the setting is changed from 'Start' to 'Stop', access to login screen leads to the screen below and Login becomes unavailable. Login error screen

F-11-12

11.1.7 Login to SMS

Login by Password Authentication 1) Access SMS from the browser of the PC connected to the network on which the MEAP device operates. URL: http://<MEAP Device IP address>:8000/sms/ Ex.) http://172.16.188.240:8000/sms/
0017-9693

Memo: - The default password is "MeapSmsLogin." (The password is case-sensitive.) - When you want to change the display original language, change in the box in the right of the screen. This setting is not affect by the setting of the language of the device.

11-9

Chapter 11

F-11-13

2) The following screen appears if the password has been changed by the user's system administrator. If so, check with the system administrator for the new password. Keep in mind that there is no special password offered for service work.

F-11-14

Login by RLS Authentication 1) Access SMS by RLS Authentication from the PC browser on the same network as the MEAP device. URL: http://<IP address of MEAP device>:8000/sms/rls/ Ex.) http://172.16.188.240:8000/sms/rls

Memo: - In case the device authentication method is SSO and login to domain, enter User Name, Password, and Login Destination registered in Active Directory, and click 'Log in'. - In case the device authentication method is SDL or SSO and login to 'this device', enter User Name and Password registered in the device and click 'Log in'.

In the case the device authentication method is SSO

11-10

Chapter 11

F-11-15

In the case the device authentication method is SDL

F-11-16

11.1.8 Checking Application List

The page of Application List is designed to show resources arranged according to applications. The page gives you a good idea of how much of the device's memory is being used by the applications (both in absolute and relative terms) as well as how much memory still remains. Check this page before adding an application. The information is collected from the manifest (headers) - in other words, the size of a resource represents the size as it is declared by the application in question, not necessarily the size of resources actually used by the application. The items of information include the following: - hard disk - memory - thread - socket - file descriptor You will not be able to install an application if the size of the remaining memory falls short of the size declared by the application. Moreover, the specifications have been designed so that an application will not be able to start up if there is a shortage of memory for any of the foregoing items (i.e., memory, thread, socket, file descriptor). To find out if there is enough memory, go through the following steps: 1) Log in to SMS. 2) Click Application List tab. 3) Check the displayed information: a. Information on Applications - Name (of the application) - Installation (date) - Application ID - Status - License - Resources Used b. Resource Information - Amount Used - Remaining - Percent Used
0017-9694

11-11

Chapter 11

F-11-17

11.1.9 Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application

1) Log in to the SMS. 2) Click 'Application List'. 3) Click the radio button of the MEAP application in question, and click 'Start' or 'Stop'.
0017-9695

F-11-18

4) Check to see that the status of the MEAP application in question is either "Started" or "Stopped."

11-12

Chapter 11

F-11-19

11.1.10 Checking the Platform Information

You can check the versions of MEAP Contents, MEAP Specifications, and Java Virtual Machine of the device.
0017-9696

Some applications may not be installed to some MEAP devices of specific specifications. (See 'MEAP Specifications'). 1) Log in to SMS. 2) Click System Management tab.

F-11-20

3) Click System Info tab.

11-13

Chapter 11

F-11-21

11.1.11 MEAP Specifications

What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)? MEAP Specifications is one of the information required to judge whether MEAP applications can be operated or not. With MEAP Specifications, you can prevent an application that uses a specific function of device from being installed onto the device that does not have the function.
0017-9697

About Name MEAP Specification is shown as 'MEAP Specifications' in the screen to check the version on the side of device that supports MEAP (counter confirmation button) and MEAP platform (SMS). On the other hand, in the manifest file of MEAP application, it is shown as 'MeapSpecVersion' (described in the same way in the SDK document) (Note) 'MEAP Specifications' hereafter in this document.

Mechanism MEAP platform judges whether MEAP applications can be operated on it using on the 2 information below: - Device Specification ID - MEAP Specifications Device Specification ID shows information such as the original functions of MFP (including print, scan, and copy), and one that differs by model such as maximum copy number, thus each model has a different ID. (It is easy to determine the IDs for this reason.) MEAP application declares 1 or more Device Specification ID required for its execution. Declaration of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable in all the models declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in (using) SMS or MEAP Enterprise Service Manager, matching of Device Specification ID is executed on the side of MEAP platform machine. The machine which doesn't support the ID declared by the application rejects installation of such an application. Meanwhile, MEAP Specifications shows other information than defined by Device Specification ID above, including network and security. Thus each model does not always have the same version. MEAP application declares 1 or more MEAP Specifications required for its execution. Declaration of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable in all the environments declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in SMS or MEAP Enterprise Service Manager, matching of MEAP Specifications is executed on the side of MEAP platform machine. The machine which doesn't support the version declared by the application rejects installation of such an application.

MEAP Spec Version for each model

T-11-11 Product Name iR 6020 iR 5020 iR 3320 iR 2220 iR C3220 iR C2620 iR 4570 iR 2870 iR 2270 iR 3570 iR85+ iR 8070 iR 105+ iR 9070 USA Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y EUR Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y OCE Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y SPL Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y KOR Y Y Y 5 5 5 5, 6, 7 (System v10.xx later) 5, 6, 7 (System v10.xx later) 5, 6, 7 (System v10.xx later) 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 5 5 5 5 5, 6, 7 (System v30.xx later) 5, 6, 7 (System v30.xx later) 5, 6, 7 (System v30.xx later) 5, 6, 7 (System v30.xx later) Initial MEAPSpecVer Change information

11-14

Chapter 11
Product Name iR 6570 iR 5570 iR C3170 iR C2570 iR C3180 iR C2580 iR 7105 iR 7095 iR 7086 iR 7095P iR 7095Printer iR C6870 iR C5870 iR C5180 CLC5151 iR C4580 CLC4040 iR C4080 iR C5185 imagePRESS C1 iR C3380 iR C2880 iR 3025 iR 3045 iR 3035 iR 3030 iR 5050 iR 5055 iR 5065 iR 5075 imagePRESS C7000VP USA Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y EUR Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y OCE Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y SPL Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y KOR Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13 5,6,7,9,10,11,13,14,15, 17,18 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11 Initial MEAPSpecVer Change information 5, 6 5, 6 5, 6, 7 5, 6, 7 5,6,7,9,10,11,13,14,15, 17,18 5,6,7,9,10,11,13,14,15, 17,18 5, 6, 7 5, 6, 7 5, 6, 7 5, 6, 7 5, 6, 7 5, 6, 7 5, 6, 7 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15 (System v50.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15 (System v50.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15 (System v50.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15 (System v50.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15 (System v50.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18 (System v50.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18 (System v50.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18 (System v50.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18 (System v50.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18 (System v50.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9 (System v20.xx later) 5, 6, 7, 9 (System v20.xx later)

* Due to the change in I/F specifications, these models support '5' only.

T-11-12

MEAP Spec Version

MEAP Spec Version 1 2 3 5 6 7 9 10 11 13 14 15 17 18 Description MEAP basic function MEAP Spec Version 1 function and SSL/TSL + Proxy [Reserved] MEAP Spec Version 1 function and CPCA V2 + ERS (Error Recovery Service) + New SSL/TSL [Reserved] MEAP Spec Version 5 function and Compact PDF + OCR PDF(Text Searchable) + USB-Host(Buffering of Interrupt Transfer) [Reserved] MEAP Spec Version 5 function and USB-Host(Exception + ClearFeature + SetFeature + HotPlug) + WINS address acquisition using MIBAgent + TimerService + SSL client authentication MEAP Spec Version 5 function and AMS MEAP Spec Version 5 function and J2ME1.1 Support + Encrypted PDF + Trace and smooth PDF + CTK2.0 Device signature PDF IMI + ERS (API addition for IMI) Acquiring images of JBIG format Parsing XML documents (XML parser)

11.1.12 Checking the System Information of a MEAP Application with SMS

1) Log in to SMS. 2) Click System Management tab. 3) On System Management screen, click System Info tab.
0017-9698

11-15

Chapter 11 4) Click Details button.

F-11-22

5) When the following status information of MEAP applications (including the system application) appears in a different window, copy and paste all information to create an attachment (text information) for preparing a problem report. You can also use this function whenever you want to check the status of any particular application.

F-11-23

11.1.13 Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application

1) Make the following selections: Additional Functions button > System Settings button> the down-arrow button.
0017-9699

Memo: If the System manager ID and system password have already been assigned, ID Entry dialog appears after System Settings button is pressed. Enter the system manager ID and the password, and click ID key.

11-16

Chapter 11

F-11-24

2) Make the following selections: MEAP Settings button > Print System Information button >Yes button.

F-11-25

3) Press Done button as many times as necessary until the Basic screen appears. 4) Turn off the MEAP device's main power; wait for 10 sec, and then turn the power back on. Important: The previous version of printing function for MEAP application status information (system information) was depended on PDL. However, current version of function is not dependent on PDL. So even device for which PDL is not available can print it. (Since iRC3220)

11.1.14 Reference (Application System Information)

You can check all applications installed to the device at a glance with the MEAP application status information and, thus, it is important for you to provide it when you are reporting a problem. The following items of information will be indicated or printed for individual applications: Memo: The system information shown on the screen and the system information printed in the MEAP device's user mode are exactly the same.
0017-9700

T-11-13

Application System Information

Application Name: C-Cabinet Gateway for MEAP Application ID/System Application Name: 03a46668-63e4-4636-9cbb-492b6cef05d5 Application Version: 1.0.0 Status: Resolved Installed on: Tue Oct 21 14:00:11 GMT+09:00 2003 Vendor : Canon Inc. License Status : Installed Maximum Memory Usage : 1024 Registered Service :

11-17

Chapter 11 Application Name It is the name (bundle-name) declared in a statement within the application program. It may not necessarily be identical to the name of the program. Application ID/System Application Name In the case of a system application, it will be the file name. If a general application, it is the application ID (application-ID) declared in a statement within the application program. Within the device, the applications are set apart by means of their application IDs. Application Version It is the version of the application (bundle-version) declared in a statement within the application program. Status It indicates the status of the application in question; specifically, Installed: the application has been installed. Active: the application is being in use. Resolved: the application is at rest. Installed On It indicates the date on which the application was installed. Vendor It is the name of the vendor that developed the application, and is the name (bundle-vendor) declared in a statement within the application program. License Status It indicates the status of the license; specifically, None: no license is needed. Not Installed: no license has been installed. Installed: the appropriate license has been installed. Invalid: the license has been invalidated. Overlimt: the license has been used beyond its permitted limit. License Expires After It indicates the date after which the license expires. If the status of the license is 'none', this item will not be printed. License Upper Limit It indicates the limit imposed on individual counter readings. If the status of the license is 'none', this item will not be printed. Counter Value It is the current counter reading of a specific counter. If the status of the license is 'none', this item will not be printed. Maximum Memory Usage It indicates the maximum amount of memory that the application uses. It is the amount (maximum memory usage) declared in a statement within the application program, and is expressed in kilobytes. Registered Service It is a list of services that have been registered by the application with the MEAP framework. Some services may not have printable data.

11.1.15 Installing an Application

0017-9701

Important: - To install an application, the user needs to use the following URL when accessing the license control system to obtain a license file. In doing so, he/she needs to register the license access number of the application and the serial number of the device. http://www.canon.com/meap/ -Maximum 20 applications can be installed (In iR5160/iR6060/iR2250/iR2850/iR3350, one is the portal service already installed at the time of shipment from the factory) -The following are the resource amounts assured for each device in the operation of one MEAP application. These values are for reference purpose only, therefore the unused resource of SMS needs to be checked at the time of installation of MEAP application. The displayed values of SMS resource may be larger than the followings since the actual values vary according to the log-in service (authentication function) selected by users and the configuration (future models).
T-11-14 Product Name iR5020/iR6020/iR2220/iR3320 iRC2620/iRC3220 iR2270/iR2870/iR3570/iR4570/iR85/iR8070/iR6570/iR5570 iRC3170/iRC2570 iRC3180/iRC2580 iR7086/iR7095/iR7095P/iR7095Printer/iR7105 iRC4080/iRC4580/iRC5180 imagePRESS C1 iRC2880/iRC3380 iR3025/iR3030/iR3035/iR3045 iR5050 iR5055/iR5065/iR5075 iRC5185 imagePRESS C7000VP Initial MEAP Spec Ver Change Information Initial MEAP Spec Ver Change Information HDD 300MB 400MB 400MB 400MB 1024MB 400MB 1024MB 1024MB 1024MB 1024MB 1024MB 400MB 1024MB 1024MB 1024MB 1024MB Memory 20MB 20MB 20MB 20MB 30MB 20MB 30MB 20MB 30MB 20MB 20MB 20/30MB* 30MB 20MB 30MB 20MB Thread 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 128 Socket 48 48 48 48 128 48 128 48 128 48 48 48 128 48 128 48 File Description 42 42 42 42 128 42 128 42 128 42 42 42 128 42 42 42

11-18

Chapter 11 *20MB for 512MB model, 30MB for 768MB model. - As for memory, check the available resource when starting up the application. For other resources other than memory, check them when installing. - Some applications call for a specific set of conditions for installation. For details, see the User's Guide that comes with the individual applications.

1) Long on to SMS. 2) Click Install tab.

F-11-26

3) Check that Install Application/License page appears. 4) Click Browse button, and select the application file and the license file of the application; then, click OK button. Memo: Application File: identified by the extension "jar". License File: identified by the extension "lic".

F-11-27

5) See the message "Installing...Please wait a moment."

11-19

Chapter 11

F-11-28

Important: - You cannot install only the license. - You will not be able to install the application without using the appropriate license. Be sure to select its license file. - If you are adding a license to an existing application, see 1.3.10 Adding a License File. - If you are updating an existing application, stop the application; then, install the new application or its license file. You will not be able to update an application while it is running.

6) Check the contents of the Confirm page; then, click OK button.

F-11-29

7) Some applications show a screen to indicate the terms of agreement. Read the terms, and click OK. 8) Check the message "Installing...Please wait a moment." appears, beginning the installation. 9) Check Application List page appears when the installation is completed. Important: To use the application that you have just installed, you must make sure that the application status is Started.

11.1.16 MEAP Enterprise Service Manager

Outline MEAP Enterprise Service Manager is the PC application utility to perform batch installation, unistallation and management of MEAP application and license files required for installation of applications, on several MEAP-available devices on network. The main targets are system administrators in big companies and CANON service engineers (end users of devices do not use). It is used when customized applications delivered to a certain company needs to be managed collectively. Previous SMS can manage only one device at a time. This utility reduces the management cost of devices and TCO.
0017-9702

11-20

Chapter 11 Major functions Discovery of devices available for MEAP Discovery of devices available for MEAP on network Storage of the serial number list of discovered device Installation of application and license file Management of application (starting / stopping) Uninstallation of application Others

System configuration MEAP Enterprise Service Manager (MEAP ESM) functions in combination with DIS (DSL Installer Service) installed on the MEAP platform side of the device. This system can be used only for MEAP-available device with appropriate DIS installed. (*) When using this system on the firmware for version upgrading on October 2003 or older, version upgrading of the system software on the field device is necessary. The versions available for ESM are as follows: iR5160 / iR6020: System v54.02 or newer, MEAP Contents v53.07 or newer iR2220 / iR3320: System v33.01 or newer, MEAP Contents v33.02 or newer Other products: Available from the initial version

When installing MEAP Enterprise Service Manager (MEAP ESM) of master CD on PC, Microsoft '.NET Framework' v1.0 or v1.1 is necessary. The user should download it from the Web site of Microsoft.

11.1.17 Adding a License File

1) Log on to SMS. 2) On Application List, click the name of the application to which you want to add a license file.
0017-9703

F-11-30

3) Check appears. 4) On Application/License Information page, click License Management button.

11-21

Chapter 11

F-11-31

5) Click Browse button, and select the license file you want to install.

F-11-32

6) Click Install button.

11-22

Chapter 11

F-11-33

7) Check the content of the confirmation page, and click OK button.

11.1.18 Disabling a License File (suspending a license)

0017-9704

Important: - To invalidate (or suspend) a license, you must first stop the application in question. - Once suspended, the status of the license will be 'Not Installed', and its application will no longer be available for use. - You can later restore a suspended license file as long as you are doing so on the same iR, the device with the same device serial number. - When replacing the device due to lease up or trouble, use the license for forwarding (See 'License for forwarding'). 1) Stop the application you want to uninstall on Application List page.

F-11-34

2) Click the name of the application that you want to disable.

11-23

Chapter 11

F-11-35

3) License File Management page appears. On Application/License Information page, click License Management button.

F-11-36

4) Click Disable button.

11-24

Chapter 11

F-11-37

5) Click OK.

11.1.19 Downloading/Removing an Invalidated License File

You must remove the invalidated license file before uninstalling an application. If re-installation is a possibility, you may download the license file to a PC for storage. To download or delete a license file, first disable it. Important: - Once you have removed an invalidated license file, you will no longer be able to download it form the MEAP device.
0017-9705

1) Login to SMS. 2) Application List page appears. 3) On Application List page, click the name of the application you want.

F-11-38

4) Check Application/License Information page appears. 5) On Application/License Information page, click License Management button.

11-25

Chapter 11

F-11-39

6) License File Management page appears. To download, click Download button.

F-11-40

7) When you have selected Download button, specify where you want to store the file by following the instructions on the screen. 8) To delete, click Delete button.

11-26

Chapter 11

F-11-41

9) Check the confirmation page appears. 10) Click OK button. Important: - Without the license file, an application cannot be reinstalled even to the MEAP device that the application had been installed last time. Download and save the license file before deleting the application.

11.1.20 Reusable license

Reinstallation was not able to perform for all license files. When reinstalling, Disable License file should be downloaded (see 'Disabling a License File' and 'Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File' in this manual) or a license for reinstallation should be obtained from LMS, before reinstallation. This specification aims to prevent misuse of applications. To increase convenience of users, only application with unlimited validity date and application counter (e.g. Portal Service, SDL, SSO) has been made to be able to install as many times as needed by the same license file. This kind of license is called 'Reusable license'.
0017-9706

Memo: For devices for System version of 33.01, 54.02 (iR 2220 series / iR5020 series) or older, version upgrading is required. It is already installed in the model with iR C3220 or newer.

11.1.21 License for forwarding

When the device is replaced due to lease up or trouble, it is possible to continue using the current license information of MEAP application by forwarding it to a new device. The license is forwarded by CE because the hidden page of SMS is used. 1) Log in to SMS, stop the application to be forwarded (see 'Starting and Stopping a MEAP Application' in this manual).
0017-9707

11-27

Chapter 11

F-11-42

2) Move to the download page of license forwarded for the device as sender (http:// IP address of device: 8000/sms/ForwardLicense).

F-11-43

3) Specify the application to be forwarded.

F-11-44

4) Click 'Disable' at Create Transfer License File.

11-28

Chapter 11

F-11-45

5) The screen to check invalidation of the license is displayed. Click 'OK',

F-11-46

6) Icon of license file for forwarding is displayed in the box of license file downloading. Click 'Download'.

F-11-47

7) The dialogue 'File Download' is displayed. Click 'Save'.

11-29

Chapter 11

F-11-48

8) Specify the download destination, click 'Save'.

F-11-49

9) After downloading the license file for forwarding, click 'Delete' to display the confirmation screen and click 'OK' to delete the file (in consideration of breakage of license for forwarding, deleting disabled license can be executed after all steps have been completed).

F-11-50

10) Log out of SMS. 11) Ask the sales company to issue a license for forwarding.

Memo: When requesting issuance of license for forwarding, inform the sales company of the name of product name and serial No. of the device as sender, and of the name of product name and serial No. of the forwarding destination.

12) Install application using the license for forwarding issued by the sales company.

11.1.22 Uninstalling an Application

1) Log on to SMS, and click 'Application List' tab.
0017-9708

11-30

Chapter 11 2) Check 'Application List' page appears. 3) On the application list, select the radio button of the application you want to uninstall, and click 'Uninstall' button. Memo: Dimmed Uninstall button shows that the selected application cannot be removed.

F-11-51

4) Check the screen to make sure that what is shown is the application you want to uninstall; then, click OK button. In response, the system runs an uninstall sessions. Important: - The status of the license must be 'Not Installed' or 'Unnecessary' for its application to be uninstalled. As necessary, go to License File Management page, and disable the license file before starting to remove it. - A license file may be invalidated only when its application is not active. - If the application you are uninstalling is associated with another application, a message will appear to indicate that the package exported by the application will no loner be available. Uninstalling such an application may also disable its associated applications.

11.1.23 Changing Login Services

Login Service Overview The login service is used to authenticate users who logs in to a MEAP device. You can change login services or uninstall them using System Management site. At time of shipment, the login service offers the following 3 modes of authentication: - Default authentication - SDL (Simple Device Login) - SSO (Single Sign-On)
0017-9709

Important: - To set SDL, the registered information in SDL and the registered user data (Department ID and Password) in Department ID Management of the machine have to match. - To set up SDL or SSO, Department ID Management must be set to Off in advance. To use SDL and Department ID Management simultaneously, set Department ID Management to On after switching the login service to SDL. - If SSO is set as the login service, NetSpot Accountant is necessary for using Department ID Management. - If SSO is set, you cannot use an optional card reader. - To set to SSO, first adjust the current time for the PC where Active Directory is running, the iR, and the PC where users log on. If there is more than a 30minute difference among them, an error occurs at logon. - If SSO or SDL is set as login service, it takes time until the iR is ready to start up. - When the SEND function is used in the environment of SDL and SSO, it is necessary to set each user's mail address to transmit E-mail. When the mail address is not set, E-mail cannot be transmitted. However, when i-Fax is transmitted, the mail address set to the device is used.

Outline of Default Authentication In this mode of authentication, you will be using Department ID Management or you will not be using any authentication mechanism. If you enable the Department ID Management in the MEAP device's Additional Functions mode, the user can use the device only when he/she enters an ID number (a 7-character ID and password) that has been registered from the device's touch panel display or through Remote UI.

11-31

Chapter 11 Outline of SDL (Simple Device Login) In this mode of authentication, you will be operating on a MEAP device on its own. You will store user information to the MEAP device's memory by accessing the device through a Web browser. SDL offers the following functions: a. it brings up the Login screen on the MEAP device's touch panel display for user authentication. b. it brings up the Login page when you access the MEAP device from Web browser to manage the numbers of printed and scanned sheets for each department ID working with the department ID management function. it operates in conjunction with the group ID control mechanisms to keep track of the number of print pages or scan pages according to group IDs. c. it enables register/editing of user authentication information through a Web browser.

F-11-52

Outline of SSO (Single Sign-On) This is the log-in service that can be operated on the domain of Active Directory environment network or at iR device. The following are the user authentication systems. - Domain Authentication - Local Device Authentication - Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication

- The three user authentication systems can be changed at Web browser (See 'Setting the User Authentication System' on MEAP Administrator Guide). - The default setting is 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication'. To increase security, set 'Domain Authentication' as user authentication system or change the user name and password of the administrator of Local Device Authentication from the default ones, just after starting to use SSO. Domain Anthentication This is the authentication of the domains on network simultaneously with log-in to iR device, in combination with the domain controller on Active Directory environment network. It authenticates up to four domain users (multi domain) with trusts as well as the domain with iR device installed. Users select the domain name of log-in destination when they log in. Optional NetSpot Accountant or imageWARE Accounting Manager enables analysis / management of the usage of iR device.

Local Device Anthentication This is the user authentication used for only iR device itself. The users to be authenticated is registered / managed by the database of iR device. The method of registration / management is the same as the one for SDL. The log-in destination is [this device].

Domain Authentication + Local Device Anthentication This is the user authentication system with the functions of both 'Domain Authentication' and 'Local Device Authentication'. Domain Authentication is useful to authenticate the users registered / managed by Active Directory, and Local Device Authentication is for authentication of the temporary users being not able to be added to Active Directory. In the case that any trouble of domain controller or Security Agent occurs, using Local Device Authentication enables emergency action until recovery. In the following example, Domain A user with iR installed and Domain B having trusts with Domain A, and also the users registered in iR device itself can be authenticated. Users select the login destination (domain name or [This Device]) when they log in.

11-32

Chapter 11

Domain A
NetSpot Security Agent Accountant Domain Controller (Active Directory)

Domain B
Domain Controller (Active Directory)

Domain A User

iR
F-11-53

Domain B User

- Optional NetSpot Accountant or imageWARE Accounting Manager is necessary to use Domain Authentication and department ID management simultaneously. When Domain Authentication is set without combination with NetSpot Accountant or imageWARE Accounting Manager, log-in is impossible. Therefore, department ID management should not be 'ON'. If department ID management is set to 'ON' while using Domain Authentication and log-in becomes impossible, change the log-in service to Default Authentication and turn department ID management to [OFF]. - For combination with NSA / iWAM, it is necessary to set the user with administrative privilege of the domain on the SA service account. - When the print count and scan count for each department ID needs to be managed in conjunction with Local Device Authentication and department ID management, turn department ID management to [ON]. To use simultaneously Local Device Authentication and department ID management, the information registered with Local Device Authentication should be matched with the user information of department ID management (department ID and password). - The user information registered by SDL and the one by Local Device Authentication are managed separately in the iR device. The user information registered in one system is not reflected to the other. - The card reader for optional control card cannot be used for Local Device Authentication. When using the card reader for control card, set SDL. - Security Agent is necessary only for Domain Authentication. - Security Agent should be installed on the computer in the domain with iR device installed. - Installation of Security Agent is included in MEAP Administrator CD-ROM.

Operating Environment The operation is guaranteed for SDL or SSO if the system environment is in keeping with the following requirements: SDL (registering/editing user information) a. Operating System and Supported Browsers
T-11-15 Operating System Windows 98 SE Windows 2000 Professional SP3 Windows XP Supported browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Important: - If you use Internet Explorer 6 on Windows XP, you will need Java 2 Runtime Environment Standard Edition 1.3.1.

SSO To use SSO, you must have a Widows server to which Active Directory has been installed as well as Security Agent. 1) PC for hosting Security Agent a. Supported OS
T-11-16 Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Microsoft Windows XP Professional Microsoft Windows Server 2003

11-33

Chapter 11

When using SA on WindowXP SP2, it is necessary to exclude Security Agent from the targets of firewall at the setting of the firewall. b. Others Access right to Windows 2000 domain Name System (DNS)Access right to domain controller

For combination with NetSpot Accountant / iW Accounting Manager, and department ID management is turned on to use it, it is necessary to set the user with administrative privilege of the domain on the SA service account. 2) Client PC (if access from Web browser to MEAP device is desired) a. Operating System and Supported Browsers
T-11-17 Operating System Windows 98 SE Windows NT Workstation 4.0 SP6a Windows ME Windows 2000 Professional SP3 Supported Browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 SP3 Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 SP2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1 Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1

Windows XP Professional

b. Others Access right to Windows 2000 Domain Name System (DNS) Access right to Domain Controller Client Steps to Change Login Services 1) Make the following selections: System Management > Enhanced Sys. App.

F-11-54

2) A page will appear showing the various selections you can make for the login service. Select the radio button of the login service mode you want to use; then, click Select button.

11-34

Chapter 11

F-11-55

3) When login service application you have selected turns to Start after Restart, turn off the device's main power, and turn it back on after 10 seconds.

F-11-56

11.1.24 Initializing the Password

1) Get the switch license for initializing the password. Request the support of the regional headquarters of the Canon for switch license for initializing the password presenting the device serial number.
0017-9710

2) Click Login button leaving Password field blank or entering incorrect password. The Return to install Password Settings area appears. Click Browse button and select the switch license file prepared in advance.

11-35

Chapter 11

F-11-57

3) When you click Initialize button, the confirmation message appears. Click OK button. Then Login page opens. Enter the default password 'MeapSmsLogin' to log in. The password is case-sensitive. If you click Cancel button, the Login page opens without initializing the password.

11.1.25 Creating a Backup for MEAP Application Area, Formatting the Hard Disk, Restoring the MEAP Application Area with the Backup, Using the SST (Service Support Tool)
You can back up the area of the HDD where MEAP applications reside to a PC, as when you want to format the HDD. MEAP devices use a license-based mechanism to control applications so that formatting the HDD will necessarily delete the jar files and application data, requiring you to not only reinstall them but also make necessary settings. (Doing so consists in obtaining special license files for reinstallation and downloading user data/settings, increasing your work load.) If you use the SST's backup function, you will be able to temporarily put aside the area of MEAP applications, thus being free of the foregoing extra work. This function, however, is limited to a specific MEAP device (serial number), and cannot be used for illegal copying of applications.
0017-9711

You must not perform any other work (including checking operation) until the HDD has been backed up. This arrangement is to prevent a mismatch of MEAP counter readings and the HDD contents, and any fault in operation arising as the result of failure to observe this will not be covered by the guarantee of operation. Memo: The application that is installed with a reusable license can be reinstalled by using the same license.

The following list shows the details of area that SST backs up; Jar files of MEAP applications Settings set with MEAP applications. Note that SST does not back up images in Mailboxes that MEAP applications use. User information data registered with SDL Requirements for Backup Using the SST The following conditions must be met for use of the function: 1) Device Firmware Version
T-11-18 Boot ROM iR2220 Series iR2250 Series iR5020 Series iR5160 Series 24.42 later 24.42 later System 33.01 later 54.02 later SST Since Ver 1.81 Since Ver 1.81

Devices ither than those listed the above. Already supported since the 1st version. Already supported since the 1st version. The version supporting the corresponding devices.

2) SST Version Version 1.81 or later. An earlier version will not permit the use of the function. If needed, upgrade the SST. 3) Space for backup To back up the HDD of the iR, the PC must have approx 300 MB of free space at maximum. Making a Backup and Formatting Hard Disk Drive with Service Support Tool

11-36

Chapter 11 1) If SDL or SSO is used for the login service, switch to default authentication before backing up the user information. Although SST will back up SDL user information, it is recommended to export the user information just in case. For SDL user information backup, go to User Management page of Simple Device Login site and export the data. (The SDL login page opens with the URL "http://<device IP address>:8000/sdl/").

If a hard disk of a system that uses SDL or SSO is formatted without changing the login service to the default authentication, the error message "The login service must be set again with SMS" appears and the system cannot start up when you attempt to restart the system after formatting. If this problem occurs, change the login service to SDL or SSO with SMS. If you cannot access to SMS since you do not have the IP address of the device, start the system with FIXIP mode hold down the numeric keys 1 and 7 and turn the power switch on. The IP address "172.16.1.100" will be automatically assigned for the device. Then log in to SMS specifying the address. 2) While holding down the 2 and 8 buttons, start up the device in download mode. As in the case of Sramimg.bin, the function is available only when the device is in Download Mode. 3) Connect the PC to the device and start the Service Support Tool. 4) In Download/Upload session of SST, select the appropriate device model, System in the tree view, and take necessary steps to connect to the device. 5) Click Upload the Backup Data button. 6) Click the option "Meapback.bin" from Name list of Backup Data Available for Selection, and click Start Storing button. Selecting Meapback.bin

F-11-58

7) When the data has been generated, enter an appropriate name in File name field and click Save button; then, click OK button to end the backup session. 8) In Selecting Model/Unit screen, select HDFormat and start formatting. All the partitions in the hard disk drive will be formatted. Restoring the Backup Data 1) After formatting the hard disk drive with SST, install the System, MEAP Contents, Language, and Remote UI files. 2) To restore the backup "Meapback.bin," click Download the Backup Data button. 3) Select the backup data file and click Start Writing button to download the backup data. Note that SST cannot restore backup data created with a different version. Selecting Backup Data

F-11-59

4) When the screen with OK button appears, the restoration of backup data finishes. Click OK button.

11-37

Chapter 11 5) Reboot the main power and access the device with SMS and check that the MEAP applications are restored. 6) Restore non-MEAP backup data and settings that are saved before formatting the hard disk drive. The SDL user information is included in the backup data. You do not have to restore it.

11.1.26 Replacing the Hard Disk Drive

If you must replace the hard disk drive because of a fault, all MEAP application files stored on it will also be lost, requiring you to re-install the applications and their license files in addition to performing the normal work associated with the replacement of the hard disk. Like other counter information, MEAP counter information will remain after replacement. Reinstallation of MEAP applications calls for special license files designed to continue with the current counter readings, thus enabling the use of the applications until the date of their expiration. These special licenses are service tools, and are not offered to general users. If you cannot make a backup of the license files as hard disk suffers a fault, contact the support staff of the regional headquarters of Canon telling the device serial number and the names of MEAP applications installed to the device to obtain the necessary special license files. In the support departments of regional headquarters of Canon, all license files of the applications that have been issued are filed according to device serial numbers, enabling you to obtain a series of license files through a single screen as long as you can identify the serial number of the device in question. The following shows the steps to follow after you have obtained a special license from the support staff of the regional headquarters of Canon. 1) Copy the set of special license files on the PC you are using for service work. Register the following with the Service Support Tool (SST): system file, language file, remote UI file, hard disk drive format file, MEAP contents file. (Be sure to pay attention to the version compatibility of individual files.) 2) Have the new hard disk drive at hand and replace it on site. While holding down the 2 and 8 keys at the same time, turn on the main power so that the machine will start up in download mode. The IP address 172.16.1.100 will automatically be used, which enables you to download files in high speed through a network.) 3) Using the SST, format the new HDD, and install the System, MEAP Contents, Language, and Remote UI files. 4) When the device has started normally, obtain the jar files of the MEAP applications from the user, and install them using the license files of the applications in the same way as you would when installing them for the first time. 5) As necessary, make login service selections and import user information. Memo: If you format the hard disk without uninstalling MEAP applications, always reinstall the applications previously installed. Unless reinstalling them, lots for the MEAP counters the applications use will not be released. The message "The number of applications that can be installed has exceeded the limit. Try to install this application after uninstalling other applications." may appear and the device does not accept to install new application. To install new applications, once reinstall the applications installed before formatting and uninstall unnecessary applications.
0017-9712

11.1.27 MEAP Safe Mode

Use safe mode if you need to start up the system without worrying about extra applications. It will start up only those system software files (including SMS) that normally start up as default files while preventing MEAP applications and the like from starting up. When you have made changes and turned off and then on the device, the control panel will indicate 'MPSF' in its lower right corner. The MEAP applications that may have been active before you shut down the equipment will not start up on their own. Make use of safe mode when restoring the system software as when MEAP applications or services cause a fault as the result of a conflict or wrong sequence of registration/use. You can access to SMS in this condition so that you can take necessary measures, for example, you can stop application that may cause the trouble. If default authentication has been selected, the mode of authentication remains valid; otherwise, the message "The login service must be set again with SMS" appears. Change the login service as necessary. Starting in Safe Mode 1) Start the device in service mode: click Ad Func key, press 2 and 8 buttons at the same time, and then click Ad Func key once again so that the service mode screen appears. 2) Press COPIER button. 3) Press OPTION button. 4) Press USER. 5) Press the right-arrow button. 6) Press MEAPSAFE.
0017-9713

11-38

Chapter 11

F-11-60

7) Press the 1 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '1'; then, click OK button.

F-11-61

8) Check that the notation 'MPSF' has appeared in the lower right corner of the screen; then, turn off and then on the main power.

F-11-62

If you want to end safe mode, repeat the steps but change '1' to '0' in step -7 and turn off and then on the main power.

11.1.28 Setting HTTP port for MEAP application (level 2)

For the ports in which the MEAP application uses, the default is 8000 for the port on HTTP server, and 8443 for the port on HTTPS server. In the case that these ports have already used by the customer who is to introduce this application, the MEAP application cannot use the HTTP (or HTTPS) server(s). By changing the following ports to use, however, the MEAP application can be used as well as the existing system. HTTP server Setting value is 0 through 65535 [the value at factory shipment/after clearing RAM: 8000] HTTPS server Setting value is 0 through 65535 [the value at factory shipment/after clearing RAM: 8443] Memo: -As for port on HTTPS server, it only applies to the device that supports SSL function. -Make sure not to use 1 through 1023 other than 80 (HTTP) as a port for MEAP. Because the ports in this range are used by general servers, there is a possibility that the ports in this range will be duplicated in the future.
0017-9714

11-39

Chapter 11

<Setting Procedure of Port on HTTP server> 1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed). 2) Startup level 2 of [SERVICE MODE] (After starting up [SERVICE MODE] in step 1, press [USER MODE] button again. Then, by pressing [2] button on control panel, the screen is displayed. 3) Press [COPIER] button. 4) Press [Option] button. 5) Press [BODY] button. 6) Press [<-] button. 7) Press [MEAP-PN] button.

F-11-63

8) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button.

F-11-64

9) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power.

F-11-65

<Setting Procedure of port on HTTPS server> 1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed).

11-40

Chapter 11 2) Startup level 2 of [SERVICE MODE] (After starting up [SERVICE MODE] in step 1, press [USER MODE] button again. Then, by pressing [2] button on control panel, the screen is displayed. 3) Press [COPIER] button. 4) Press [Option] button. 5) Press [BODY] button. 6) Press [<-] button. 7) Press [MEAP-SSL] button.

F-11-66

8) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button.

F-11-67

9) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power.

F-11-68

11-41

Chapter 11

11.1.29 Reference material

Glossary
T-11-19 Terms & Acronyms Applet Application Application ID ASP AVS Code Sign CPCA CPCA Java CL Default Authentication Department ID Management Device Specification ID DIS DSL Esplet File descriptor iR Native Application ISV J2ME Java Definitions and Explanations Applet Type Application. A Type of MEAP application that is designed to display user interface on device control panel. A software unit that provides a solution to users. A unique identifier assigned to each application. Used for indicating memory usage of the application in the MEAP system. Application Service Provider. A business to provide the application service on Internet. Applet Viewer Service. One of the MEAP system services that shows the user interface of the current applet type service on the console. To attach Digital Signature to software code. MEAP has the mechanism to reject MEAP application without Code Sign for security reason. Common Peripheral Controlling Architecture. CPCA defines an object model of peripheral deices. A client can control a device by creating or modifying objects in the device. CPCA Java Class Library. A Java class library, which is used to control a device. The login service used when the department ID control is used but other authentication controls are not used. When the Department ID control is turned on, the login dialog prompts the users to enter the department ID and password. The dialog appears the initial screen of both the control panel on the MEAP device and Remote UI ID assigned for each device model. It shows the usage of functions that are equipped by MFP, as well as CPCA API specification and version numbers that is necessary for acquiring the values such as maximum number of copies, etc. Dynamic Service Loading Installer Service. Receives data from the DSL on the MEAP platform. Enables an application to install to two or more devices. Dynamic Service Loading. While the SMS installs a license file and application to one device, the DSL can install them to two or more devices. It consists of MEAP ESM and the DIS. Esplet Type Application. A type of MEAP application that does not have a user interface on the device console or on the web browser. The term of "Esplet" is a coinage by Canon inspired from Applet, Servlet, and "Espresso". With a file descriptor, an OS identifies the files that a program accesses. The file descriptor includes information such as file name and size as well as the identifier. An OS determines files to operate with the identifier. The functionalities that existing imageRUNNER has such as Copy, Universal Send and Mailbox. Independent Software Vender. Software manufacturer who develops and/or sells applications and tools but does not entire computer systems. Refers application developer in this document. Java 2 Platform Micro Edition. One of Java Platforms licensed by Sun Microsystems, Inc. It is applied for MEAP. Other devices such as cellular phones and PDA. A programming language developed by Sun Microsystems, in the U. S. A. Low dependent on models and OSes and runs on various platforms. Taking advantage of this feature, many applications that runs on web servers uses Java. The MEAP platform uses J2ME - a type of Java. A script language developed by Netscape Communications, in the U.S. A., runs on web browsers such as Netscape Navigator and Internet Explorer. Allows web designers to create interactive pages with HTML files such as animated buttons and display of timetables. JAVA Virtual Machine. The Java byte code interpreter. The Virtual Machine acts as an interpreter for processing the byte code using the native instruction set. A number issued for accessing license file. The Licensing server requires entries of application ID, expiration date/times information, and the number of access numbers, to issue license access numbers. A software manufacture of a MEAP application provides the users with the license files. Specifies the terms of agreement that a user concludes with the manufacturer. Required for installing a MEAP application. Manages user information of MEAP device. Authenticates users with user names and passwords. Three login services are available for MEAP device - Default Authentication, which provides department ID control, SDL (Simple Device Login) and SSO (Single Sign-On). Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform. Provides an environment for executing application programs on a peripheral device. Uses the Java platform (J2ME - Java 2 platform Micro Edition) to run Java application for MEAP. MEAP Application Management System. The license issuing server that issues "License File" necessary for MEAP applications to be installed onto MEAP device. Also used for issuing the "License Access Number". Runs on MEAP platform. Consists of application files (*.jar) and the license file (*.lic). Required to install an MEAP application to a MEAP device. MEAP Enterprise Service Manager. One of software programs composing the DSL, to be installed on a PC in a Windows environment. Works as the interface with the DSL. MEAP Spec Version, the term used for the SDK. The version number that shows the APIs of the MEAP platform other than CPCA, such as network and security. The version number is not assigned for each device model. imageRUNNER (iR) device that has MEAP Platform incorporated. Multi Function Peripheral. Peripheral device that supports more than one function, such as digital copier, printer, scanner, and fax. Open Service Gateway Initiative. See "http://www.osgi.org/". The service displayed on a Web browser by inputting the address "http://<device IP address>:8000/" or "http://<device IP address>/" A portal to access a MEAP device from a Web browser. Provides functions to store data fetched from remote servers. When a user request to display a web page that has been displayed and stored in the proxy, the proxy server read the stored data but does not access the remote server where the original page is present, for efficient access services. When a proxy server receives a URL from a PC, it searches the file in the cache and sends it to the PC if the requested file is found. If the requested file is not stored in the cache, it accesses the remote server of the URL to acquire the file and, at the same time, stores the acquired file in the cache so that the proxy server can quickly send the file at the next request.
0017-9715

Java Script

Java VM License Access Number License File Login Service

MEAP MEAP AMS MEAP Application MEAP Contents MEAP ESM MEAP Specifications MEAP device MFP OSGi Portal Service

Proxy Server

11-42

Chapter 11

Detail of License File

LicenseFile-Version: 1 LicenseFile-Id: f6489a8c-8c7e-4d74-bd12-b031ea6a62a5 Application-Id: e92b0b91-7c42-45b1-96b3-295d5d1b5877 Serial-No: XYZ00123 Validated-Period: 100 MaximumBWScan1: 1000, stop MaximumBWScan2: 900, stop MaximumBWScan3: 800, stop

License File ID Application ID Serial No Validated Period

MaximumBWScan4: 700, stop

MaximumPrintedImpressions: 1000, stop MaximumPrintedImpressions-BW: 800, stop MaximumPrintedImpressions-BW-Large: 200, stop MaximumPrintedImpressions-BW-Small: 600, stop MaximumScannedImpressions: 2000, stop MaximumScannedImpressions-BW: 1200, stop IxQvZ/A8O0aDsUBdMeu5XrxqIsqLzq7JAjHAD/ZMnNxVMsR7RGcuI2c6RRdU7mlW ht2VF8LA3SH6n4kxvZYmEQZ8pBhu67wliysAJ0gHS0l6WsMqX6WI5ZAQeD8TZnnf 344VXYG4

Counter information

F-11-69

11.1.30 Option for exclusive individual measure

-Display Setting of Copy Tab Make a setting as to whether to display/hide the copy screen (copy tab) on the control panel. This is the specification for users who want to customize hiding it on control panel. Default value 1: display Setting range, item 0: hide 1: display
0017-9716

Setting Procedure 1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed). 2) Press [COPIER] button. 3) Press [Option] button. 4) Press [BODY] button. 5) Press [<-]or[->] (arrow) button. 6) Press [UI-COPY] button. 7) Press either 0 (hide) or 1 (display) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button. 8) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power.

-Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM screen (level 2) In the case that operation is restricted by MEAP application, hide the warning screen of error/JAM (such as JAM screen, door opening, no-toner). In the case that these errors occur, there will be a display indicating 'call the service personnel' etc.

Memo: Part of the warning screens is displayed if shifting to the device screen. - As for the screens for jam and no-toner, the warning screen (animation) can be displayed by pressing the followings: [Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure] - As for the screen for door opening, the warning screen cannot be displayed because there is no display for [[Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]

Default value 1: No activation of warning display Setting range, item 0: display warning screen 1: hide warning screen

11-43

Chapter 11

Setting Procedure 1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed). 2) Startup level 2 of [SERVICE MODE] (After starting up [SERVICE MODE] in step 1, press [USER MODE] button again. Then, by pressing [2] button on control panel, the screen is displayed. 3) Press [COPIER] button. 4) Press [Option] button. 5) Press [BODY] button. 6) Press [<-]or[->] button. 7) Press [ANIM-SW] button. 8) Press either 0 (display warning screen) or 1 (hide warning screen) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button. 9) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power.

-Setting of Screen Transition from MEAP Screen to the Standard Screen In the case that the operation is restricted by MEAP application, make a setting to hide Native applications such as Copy/Send/Box. With this setting, disable screen transition with => key. Default value 0: OFF (transit to Native screen) Setting range, item 0: OFF (transit to Native screen) 1: ON (No-transition to Native screen)

Setting Procedure 1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] (After pressing [USER MODE] button of MEAP device, press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel. Then, by pressing [USER MODE] button again, [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed). 2) Startup level 2 of [SERVICE MODE] (After starting up [SERVICE MODE] in step 1, press [USER MODE] button again. Then, by pressing [2] button on control panel, the screen is displayed. 3) Press [COPIER] button. 4) Press [Option] button. 5) Press [BODY] button. 6) Press [<-] (arrow) button. 7) Press [ANIM-DSP] button. 8) Press either 0 (transit to Native screen) or 1 (no-transition to Native screen) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button. 9) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then, turn on the main power.

11-44

Chapter 12 e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote

Contents

Contents
12.1 e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote........................................................................................................................12-1
12.1.1 Application operation mode..................................................................................................................................................... 12-1 12.1.2 Service Center URL and Port Specification ............................................................................................................................ 12-1 12.1.3 Communication test ................................................................................................................................................................. 12-1 12.1.4 Communication log.................................................................................................................................................................. 12-1 12.1.5 Detailed Communication log ................................................................................................................................................... 12-1 12.1.6 SOAP communication function ............................................................................................................................................... 12-1 12.1.7 Resend at SOAP transmission error......................................................................................................................................... 12-2 12.1.8 e-RDS setting screen................................................................................................................................................................ 12-2 12.1.9 Sleep operation......................................................................................................................................................................... 12-4 12.1.10 Network Setting (Maintenance) ............................................................................................................................................. 12-4 12.1.11 e-RDS Setting (Maintenance) ................................................................................................................................................ 12-4 12.1.12 Trouble shoot ......................................................................................................................................................................... 12-5 12.1.13 Error message......................................................................................................................................................................... 12-5

Chapter 12

12.1 e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote

12.1.1 Application operation mode
Serviceman selects the operation mode of OFF/ON by the setting in e-RDS setting screen of the service mode. (Menu Screen: E-RDS) - OFF (default): e-RDS doesn't operate. - ON: e-RDS operates every function.
0011-6831

12.1.2 Service Center URL and Port Specification

The URL and the port number of the equipment information destination can be specified as follows. - Default (specified beforehand) - Specified by the service mode. (Menu Screen: RGW-ADR, RGW-PORT)
0011-6832

12.1.3 Communication test

Serviceman can distinguish the communication status with the UGW by executing the communication test in the service mode (Menu Screen: COM-TEST), and referring to the communication log Error information is displayed in the latest communication log at communication error.
0011-6833

12.1.4 Communication log

The list of the log of the communication error (proxy server error etc.)(For 30) can be displayed in display panel in the service mode. (Menu Screen: COM-LOG)
0011-6834

12.1.5 Detailed Communication log

Detailed information of the error in the communication log can be displayed in display panel. (Log List Screen: Each error)
0011-6835

12.1.6 SOAP communication function

The following processing is achieved by the SOAP communication (SSL client communication). e-RDS does the host authentication by using the CA*1 certificate of the VeriSign Co.. When the host certificate or the CA certificate is expired, e-RDS doesn't connect to UGW. *1: CA: Certificate Authority: Organization that issues electronic certificate used by electronic commerce etc
0011-6836

(1) Communication test: - Do the communication test (2) Regularly collect the following data, and transmit it. - Copy Counter - Service mode counter - Parts counter - Mode Counter - ROM version - Scheduling information - Application log (3) When jam or alarm/service call error is detected from the device, e-RDS transmits to UGW. - Transmission of alert code(Counter information is transmitted at the same time. ) When the state of the device changes, e-RDS sends the alert code list. The main alert codes used are Toner LOW/OUT, Jam, and Door open. When recovering from an error, e-RDS transmits data that shows the recovering from an error again. - Transmission of Jam log (Counter information is transmitted at the same time.) - Transmission of Alarm log (Counter information is transmitted at the same time.) - Transmission of Service Call (Error code) log (Counter information is transmitted at the same time.) (4) Change of the device scheduling information - Scheduling information can be changed by the instruction from UGW. List of Transmissions:
Content of transmission Communication test Copy counter collection/transmission Service mode counter collection/transmission Transmission timing When Service mode of device is executed Every 6 hours Every 6 hours

12-1

Chapter 12
Content of transmission Mode counter collection/transmission Parts counter collection/transmission ROM version transmission Application log Transmission of alert code Jam Alarm Error Confirmation whether there is processing that eRDS executes Transmission timing Every 6 hours Every 6 hours Every 6 hours When the log file size exceeds 10kbytes When the state of the device is changed. When Jam occurs When Alarm occurs When Error occurs Every 6 hours

12.1.7 Resend at SOAP transmission error

When SOAP send error is generated by the trouble on UGW side etc. at the transmission of an alert code, the latest three batches of data that failed in the transmission are stored in HDD, and e-RDS resends it at prescribed intervals.
0011-6837

12.1.8 e-RDS setting screen

The e-RDS setting screen is in the service mode screen. When the tab above is selected on any e-RDS setting screen, it changes to the mid item screen. Moreover, it returns to previous screen when reset key is pressed. Menu Screen
0011-6838

F-12-1

Setting screen of e-RDS. The form and the initial value of each setting item are as follows.

12-2

Chapter 12

Item(meaning) E-RDS (Embedded-RDS)

Explanation Turning OFF/ON e-RDS. 0:OFF / 1:ON Counter information and error information are transmitted to the host at ON. Initial value: 0: OFF URL of the host (When the input area is selected (touched), shift to the keyboard screen) Initial value: URL of an actual host. Length: 129 characters (NULL is contained) Port Number of the host Initial value: 443 Range of available number: 1-65535 Execution of Communication test Communication test starts when you select (touch) this and press the [OK] key. e-RDS tries the connection with the host, and displays the result by "OK!" or "NG!". (NG: No Good, the communication test is failed)

RGW-ADR (RDS-Gateway ADDRESS)

RGW-PORT (RDS-Gateway PORT) COM-TEST (Communication Test)

COM-LOG (Communication Log)

The result of communication test When this is selected (touched), and the blank rectangle on right side is selected, it switches to "Log list screen".

Log list screen

F-12-2

History list of communication test error (error generation date, error code and error information) is displayed. When the each line is selected (touched), it shifts to "Log detailed screen". It shifts to "Menu screen" by the [Function] > [INSTALL]. The list screen changes by a right arrow or a left arrow. Maximum log number: 30 Notes: Only the first part of error information is displayed.

12-3

Chapter 12 Log detailed screen

F-12-3

Detailed information of individual communication test error is displayed. Refer to the displayed message to "Error message list". It shifts to "Log list screen" by the [OK] button pressing. Maximum length of error information: 128 characters (not include NULL)

12.1.9 Sleep operation

When there is a method that should be transmitted while e-RDS is operating (ON), e-RDS wakes from the state of sleep and begins transmitting.
0011-6839

12.1.10 Network Setting (Maintenance)

You should do the network setting of Device appropriately before the e-RDS setting. A. Display the Additional Functions screen. - Press [Additional Functions (*)] key. - Input ID code. B. Display the TCP/IP Settings screen. - Select (touch) [System Settings] > [Network Settings] > [TCP/IP Settings] on the Touch Panel Display. C. Setting of items related to IP address - Select (touch) [IP Address Settings] => IP Address Settings screen is displayed. - Set each items such as IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway Addresses, and DHCP, etc. - Return to the TCP/IP Settings screen by pushing the [OK] button after the setting ends. D. DNS Settings - Select (touch) [DNS Settings] => DNS Settings screen is displayed. - Set necessary items. - Return to the TCP/IP Settings screen by pushing the [OK] button after the setting ends. E. Proxy Settings - Select (touch) [Proxy Settings] (Press Down arrow button until [Proxy Settings] is displayed on the TCP/IP Settings screen.) => Proxy Settings screen is displayed. - Set necessary items. - Return to the TCP/IP Settings screen by pushing the [OK] button after the setting ends. F. Display the normal screen. - Press [Additional Functions (*)] key pressing or press [Done] button to a necessary frequency.
0011-6840

12.1.11 e-RDS Setting (Maintenance)

A. Display the Menu screen of e-RDS from the service mode. A-1. Shift to the service mode - Press [Additional Functions (*)] key. - Press 2 and 8 of the numeric keys at the same time. - Press [Additional Functions (*)] key. => SERVICE MODE LEVEL1 A-2. Initialize e-RDS - Select (touch) [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] on the Touch Panel Display. A-3. Display Menu screen of e-RDS
0011-6841

12-4

Chapter 12 - Select (touch) [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] => Menu screen

F-12-4

B. Set 1 in [E-RDS]. C. Input the URL of UGW in [RGW-ADR]. (Select the input area to shift to the keyboard screen, and Input URL.) D. Input the port number of UGW in [RGW-PORT]. E. Select [COM-TEST] and push [OK] button to start the communication test with UGW. F. While the result is "NG!", repeat to correct the setting and try [COM-TEST] until the result becomes "OK!". You need checking the setting of the network of the device and the connection of the network if necessary. Notes: In the environment with the proxy server, you should set the proxy server. Refer to the proxy setting in the network guide of the device for details.

12.1.12 Trouble shoot

1-1 Q. There is no setting item. A. Confirm the network setting. Confirm the model 1-2 Q. The communication test fails. A. Confirm the firmware version. Confirm the network setting. Confirm the communication test result.
0011-6842

12.1.13 Error message

Error information displayed in "Log list screen" or "Log detailed screen" is as follows.
0011-6843

Notes: Only the first part of error information is displayed in "Log list screen". Maximum length of error information in "Log detailed screen": 128 characters (not include NULL) When the communication test is not completed end e-RDS is 1 (ON), following string is displayed: "SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed."

Moreover, when it fails in the event waiting in the device and either of a Jam notification, an Alarm notification, and a Service call notification or an Alert notification is specified, following string is displayed.

"Event Registration is Failed."

12-5

Chapter 12 In other cases error information is displayed in the form of the following. "[*] [Error string]: [Method name] [Server side detailed error]" The enclosed character string by [] is replaced as follows. [*]: *(asterisk) is added to the head of the string only at the communication test. [Error string]: As for number 1 and 2 of the following Error string lists, only the Error string is displayed. Besides, it is displayed as "[*] [Error string]: [Method name] [Server side detailed error]". ([Server side detailed error] might not go out.)
Error string 1 SUSPEND: Communication test is not performed Cause Counter Measure

The e-RDS is started (the device is rebooted) when e-RDS is ON Complete the communication test. and communication test isn't done.

Event Registration is Failed.

The device failed event processing.

Turn OFF/ON of the device main switch. Or, replace the system software of the device (upgrade).

3 4 5 6 7

URL Scheme error (not https) The header of registered URL of UGW is not https. Server connection error Communication failure of TCP/IP occurred. Or IP address of the device isn't set.

Change the header on URL of UGW to https Check the network connection. Correct URL. Check and correct the proxy server address etc. Check and correct username and password to log in proxy.

URL server specified is illegal Illegal URL (other than UGW) is specified. Proxy connection error Proxy authentication error The e-RDS cannot connect it with the proxy server. The e-RDS fails the authentication to proxy.

Server certificate error

- The certificate is not installed in The device. - The certificate that The user is using is not registered in The device or The server.

Register the root certificate in the device or register the VeriSign certificate in the server.

Server certificate expired

- Expired certificate is registered in the device or the server. - Register the root certificate in expiration date in the - The date of the device is outside the time limit of the certificate. device or register the VeriSign certificate in the server. - Set an accurate date to the device.

10 11

Unknown error

Other communication error occurs.

After waiting for a while, try again.

Server response error (NULL) UGW returns the error but communication to UGW is succeeded. After waiting for a while, try again. If (NULL) is displayed after the message, the error occurs in the HTTPS communication. Server response error (Hexadecimal) UGW returns the error but communication to UGW is succeeded. After waiting for a while, try again. (Hexadecimal) displayed after the message is error code that UGW returns. [server side detailed error] is added at the end of error information only at this error. Device internal error such as the memory cannot be taken occurs. Turn OFF/ON of the device main switch. Or, replace the system software of the device (upgrade).

12

13

Device internal error

14

Server schedule is invalid

Illegal schedule transmission information is set in UGW. (Ex: Every 30 minutes were set to UGW but the right interval in eRDS is 1 hour.) There was no reply from UGW in predetermined time. (The congestion of the network etc.) It is the timeout at HTTPS level. The URL of UGW is illegal, and UGW is inaccessible.

Correct the schedule transmission information setting in UGW. (Ex: every 1 hour)

15

Server response time out

After waiting for a while, try again.

16 17

Service not found E-RDS switch is set OFF

Check and correct the URL of UGW.

You execute the communication test while the E-RDS switch is Turn ON E-RDS switch, and execute the communication OFF. test. The e-RDS receives empty schedule data from UGW. Check setting file. (Call the help desk of UGW.)

18

Server schedule is not exist

12-6

Chapter 12
Error string 19 Cause Counter Measure

Network is not ready, try later You execute the communication when the connection to the Confirm that the network connection has been established. network has not been established. Moreover, execute again after enough waiting. (The network connection might not be established from the startup of the device for 60 seconds.) URL error Illegal URL (Syntax error etc.) Correct URL.

20

T-12-1

[Method name]:
Method name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 postServiceModeCount postModeCount postPartsCount postFirmwareInfo getOperationList postOperationOutcome postConfiguration postGlobalClickCount postJamLog postServiceCallLog postAlert postDebugLog getConfiguration communicationTest Meaning Account counter acquisition phase Mode counter acquisition phase Parts counter acquisition phase ROM version acquisition phase Check/acquisition phase whether the information file for me is in UGW. Phase in which E-RDS configuration is transmitted to UGW Counter acquisition phase Jam notification acquisition phase Error notification acquisition phase Alert notification acquisition phase Log acquisition phase Information acquisition phase (Schedule transmission etc.) Communication test phase

[Server side detailed error]: Detailed error information returned from UGW is displayed for "Server response error". However, only the first 128 characters are displayed by the entire error information. Nothing is displayed here at other errors.

12-7

Chapter 13 Maintenance and Inspection

Contents

Contents
13.1 Periodically Replaced Parts .......................................................................................................................................13-1
13.1.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 13-1 13.1.2 Machine Proper ........................................................................................................................................................................ 13-1

13.2 Durables and Consumables ........................................................................................................................................13-1

13.2.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................................. 13-1 13.2.2 Machine Proper ........................................................................................................................................................................ 13-1

13.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure........................................................................................................................13-3

13.3.1 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure ..................................................................................................................................... 13-3 13.3.2 Scheduled Servicing Chart....................................................................................................................................................... 13-5 13.3.3 Scheduled Maintenance Work Procedure ................................................................................................................................ 13-7 13.3.4 Points to Note About Schedule Servicing.............................................................................................................................. 13-11

Chapter 13

13.1 Periodically Replaced Parts

13.1.1 Overview
Some parts of the machine must be replaced on a periodical basis to ensure a specific level of machine performance. (They are likely to affect the performance once they fail even in the absence of external change or damage.) Whenever possible, plan their replacement so that it will coincide with a scheduled service visit.
0010-9503

The values indicated are estimates only and are subject to change according to the site environment and usage habit. - Checking the Timing of Replacement You can check the timing of replacement in service mode: COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1

13.1.2 Machine Proper

0010-9504

T-13-1 As of Nov 2005 No. 1 Parts name Pre-transfer/transfer/separation charging wire Parts No. FB4-3687-000 Q'ty AR Life (pages) 500,000* Remarks if high temperature/humidity, 250,000 prints

Primary charging wire

FB4-3687-000

AR

500,000*

if high temperature/humidity, 250,000 prints if normal temperature/low humidity, 400,000

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Primary grid wire Main thermistor Sub thermistor Thermal switch unit Ozone filter (drum) Ozone filter (separation) Ozone filter (fixing) Side seal (front) Side seal (rear)

FY1-0883-000 FG6-7748-020 FH7-7464-000 FG6-7745-000 FB6-0776-000 FB6-0397-000 FC7-3082-000 FL2-5152-000 FL2-5153-000

AR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

500,000* 500,000 500,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 500,000 500,000

The values above are estimates only, and are subject to change based on future data.

* Old type (full plated type) may not be used. After replacing the charging wire, be sure to execute wire cleaning in service mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-CLN. * After the work, be sure to move the cleaning holder manually toward the front before putting the charging assembly back into the machine.

13.2 Durables and Consumables

13.2.1 Overview
Some parts of the machine may have to be replaced once or more over the warranty period of the product because of deterioration or damage. Replace them when they have failed. - Checking the Timing of Replacement You can check the timing of replacement in service mode: - Main Machine COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 - Accessory COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2
0010-9506

13.2.2 Machine Proper

0010-9507

T-13-2 As of Nov 2005 No. 1 Parts name Developing cylinder Parts No. FB6-2370-020 Q'ty 1 Life (pages) 1,000,000 Remarks

Developing assembly roll

FS5-6579-000

1,000,000

13-1

Chapter 13
As of Nov 2005 No. 3 4 Parts name Cleaner separation claw Cleaning blade Parts No. FB4-8018-000 FB6-2720-000 Q'ty 3 1 Life (pages) 500,000 1,000,000 Remarks if high temperature/humidity, 250,000 prints use both edges, each for 500,000 prints; upon replacement, apply toner

5 6 7 8 9 10

Primary charging assembly Transfer/separation charging assembly Pre-transfer charging assembly Primary charging wire cleaner 1 Primary charging wire cleaner 2 Transfer charging wire cleaner 1

FG6-7313-000 FG6-8733-020 FG6-8740-000 FF5-6883-000 FF5-6884-000 FF5-6883-000

1 1 1 2 2 1

1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 500,000 500,000 500,000 if high temperature/humidity, 250,000 prints if high temperature/humidity, 250,000 prints if high temperature/humidity, 250,000 prints

11 12 13

Transfer charging wire cleaner 2 Separation charging wire cleaner Pre-transfer charging wire cleaner

FF5-6884-000 FF5-7891-020 FF5-9552-000

1 1 1

500,000 500,000 500,000

if high temperature/humidity, 250,000 prints if high temperature/humidity, 250,000 prints if high temperature/humidity, 250,000 prints

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Pre-transfer charging assembly scraper Fixing upper roller Fixing lower roller Fixing web Insulating bush (front/rear) Fixing roller bearing Fixing pressure roller bearing Delivery upper separation claw Delivery lower separation claw Pickup roller (deck, cassette)

FF6-1031-000 FB5-6930-000 FB6-2374-000 FY1-1157-000 FB5-6934-000 XG9-0421-000 XG9-0447-000 FB5-3625-000 FA2-9037-000 FF5-7829-000 (front) FF5-7830-000 (rear)

1 1 1 1 2 2 2 6 2 8

1,000,000 500,000 500,000 500,000 500,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 500,000 1,000,000 500,000 actual number of prints (2 pc. for each paper source) actual number may be checked in service mode* left deck: LD-PU-RL right deck: RD-PU-RL cassette 3: C3-PU-RL cassette 4: C4-PU-RL actual number of prints (2 pc. for each paper source) actual number may be checked in service mode* left deck: LD-FD-RL right deck: RD-FD-RL cassette 3: C3-FD-RL cassette 4: C4-FD-RL simultaneously with fixing upper roller

24

Feeding roller (deck, cassette)

FB6-0615-000

500,000

25

Separation rolle (deck, cassette)

FB5-6586-000

500,000

actual number of prints (1 pc. for each paper source) actual number may be checked in service mode* left deck: LD-SP-RL right deck: RD-SP-RL cassette 3: C3-SP-RL cassette 4: C4-SP-RL

13-2

Chapter 13
As of Nov 2005 No. 26 Parts name Pickup roller (manual feed tray) Parts No. FF5-7829-030 (front) FF5-7830-000 (rear) FB4-2035-000 Q'ty 2 Life (pages) 120,000 Remarks actual number of prints actual number may be checked in service mode* M-PU-RL

27

Feeding roller (manual feed tray)

120,000

actual number of prints actual number may be checked in service mode* M-FD-RL

28

Separation roller (manual feed tray)

FB2-7545-000

120,000

actual number of prints actual number may be checked in service mode* M-SP-RL

29 30 31 32

Cleaner side scraper (font) Cleaner side scarper (rear) Developing Cylinder Clutch Developing Cylinder Decelerating Clutch

FB5-6868-000 FB5-6869-000 FH6-5015-020 FH6-5017-020

1 1 1 1

1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000

*: Use the following service mode item: COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1.

13.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure

13.3.1 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure
0010-9511

1. As a rule, perform schedule servicing every 500,000 prints. 2. Before setting out for a visit, check the service book, and take parts for which replacement is expected. 3. If cleaned with alcohol, each charging wire must be checked to make sure that it is fully dry (solvent) before putting it back in the machine. 4. If left alone for a long time in an area subject to dust, humidity, or oil smoke, the power plug can collect dust, which will absorb moisture to suffer an insulation fault, turning into a possible source of fire. Be sure to disconnect it on a periodical basis, and clean it and the area around the power outlet using a dry cloth.
T-13-3 As of Nov 2005 No. 1 2 3 Step Report to the person in charge. Record the counter reading. Make test prints. Work Check the general condition. Check the faulty output. a. image density b. soiling of white background c. character clarity d. lead edge margin e. fixing, registration (for displacement), back (for soiling) Standard (simplexing) lead edge: 4.0+1.5/-1.0mm left/right: 2.51.5mm trail edge: 2.51.5mm Remarks

Clean the charging assemblies: - charging wire (primary, pre-transfer, transfer/ separation) - grid wire (primary charging assembly) - charging assembly shielding plate - roller electrode

Dry wipe with lint-free paper, and clean with alcohol.

Points to Note When Cleaning/Replacing the Charging Wire or Replacing the Charging Wire Cleaner After the following, check to make sure that the charging wire is in the middle of the charging wire cleaner; failure to observe this is likely to cause image faults: a. cleaning the charging wire b. replacing the charging wire c. moving the charging wire cleaner by hand d. replacing the charging wire cleaner

13-3

Chapter 13

F-13-1 Correct

F-13-2 Wrong

T-13-4 No. 5 Step Clean the optical assembly: - No. 1/2/3 mirror - dust-blocking glass - scanning lamp reflecting plate - standard white plate Check the optical system: - scanner cable - scanner rail Check the area around the cable. Clean the sliding area, and apply silicone oil (FY96011). Work Remarks Use a blower brush. If dirt resists removal, use alcohol.

Check the scanner cable only at the first 250,000 prints.

Dispose of the waste toner, and check the case.

If the case is half full with waste toner, dispose of the waste toner in a vinyl bag. Or, replace the case itself.

Clean the filters. - ozone filter - dust filter Clean the developing assembly. - developing assembly roll Clean the pickup /transport assembly. - transfer guide (upper, lower) plate - registration roller (upper, lower) - transport belt - transport rollers - scanner sensor (prism) Clean the developing assembly roll.

Remove the dust from the filter surface.

10

Use an air blower, or dry wipe. (Do not use solvent.)

11

Clean the fixing/delivery assembly. - separation claw (upper, lower) - transport rollers - inlet guide - web (check) - web oil receptacle - thermistor - sub thermistor - thermal switch

12

Clean the cleaner assembly. - side scraper Clean the duplexing assembly. - duplexing horizontal registration sensor

13

13-4

Chapter 13
No. 14 Step Clean the copyboard glass. Work Remarks

15

Make test prints.

16

Make sample prints.

17

Press the leakage breaker test switch to see the breaker operates normally. Thereafter, turn off the power switch, and shift the lever to ON position; then, turn the power switch back on.

Press the test switch while the power switch is in ON position and, in addition, the lever [1] of the leakage breaker is also in ON position. If normal, the breaker will go off to cut the power. (If you are replacing it, pay attention to its orientation.) If you have replaced the leakage breaker, be sure to check the breaker after replacement.

[1]

Check to see that the grounding is proper. Otherwise, the leakage breaker may fail to go on in the event of a leak. 18 Put sample prints in order, and clean up the area around the machine.

19 20

Record the most recent counter reading. Update the service book, and report to the person in charge. Record the history of checks made on the leakage breaker.

13.3.2 Scheduled Servicing Chart

0010-9512

Do not use solvents other than those indicated.

T-13-5 Unit name Location Maintenance intervals upon installation every 500,000 prints every 1,000,000 prints Remarks

Externals/controls

copyboard glass ozone filter (FM2, FM8, FM20) dust filter (FM1, FM3, FM10, FM501, FM502 (other than iR7086); front cover)

clean clean replace Remove the dust from the filter surface.

clean

Remove the dust from the filter surface.

Scanner

scanner cable scanner rail

inspect adjust clean lubricate clean clean clean clean clean replace If high temperature/humidity, every 250,000 prints. silicone oil S-20 (FY9-6011)

Optical assembly

No. 1 to No. 3 mirrors Dust-proof glass Reflecting plate Standard white plate

Charging assembly

charging wire (primary)

13-5

Chapter 13
Unit name Location Maintenance intervals upon installation every 500,000 prints every 1,000,000 prints Remarks

charging wire (transfer/ separation) charging wire (pre-transfer)

clean

replace

If high temperature/humidity, every 250,000 prints. If high temperature/humidity, every 250,000 prints. If normal temperature/low humidity, every 400,000 prints.

clean

replace

grid wire (primary) charging assembly shielding plates roller electrode pre-transfer exposure LED Photosensitive drum photosensitive drum

clean clean clean clean

replace clean clean clean clean If high temperature/humidity, every 250,000 prints. If high temperature/humidity, every 250,000 prints. 200 V machine only Use alcohol and drum cleaning powder (CK-0429). clean lubricate Clean the following using alcohol, and apply FY9-6008 on the charge collecting brush: - electrode of slip ring - wall surface of protrusion on electrode - charge colleting brush

electrode of stop ring for drum heater

Developing assembly

developing cylinder developing roll

inspect clean clean

Cleaner

side scraper

toner receptacle (rear, front) toner supply mouth magnet roller plate Fixing assembly inlet guide web oil receptacle thermistor sub thermistor thermal switch Optical sensor sensor reflecting prism Waste toner Waste case Pickup/transfer assembly waste toner case Transfer guide registration roller (upper, lower) transport belt delivery upper separation claw delivery lower separation claw inspect

clean clean clean clean Take up at time of installation. clean replace replace replace clean clean inspect clean clean clean replace replace If high temperature/humidity, every 250,000 prints. If high temperature/humidity, every 250,000 prints. Inspect/remove.

13-6

Chapter 13
Unit name Location Maintenance intervals upon installation every 500,000 prints every 1,000,000 prints Remarks

transport rollers Duplexing assembly duplexing horizontal registration sensor duplexing rubber roller

clean clean clean

Other than the iR7086

Ozone filter for FM8 Dust filter for FM502 Dust filter for FM501 Dust filter for FM1

iR7086
Ozone fil ter for FM20 Ozone filter for FM8

Ozone filer for FM20 Ozone filter for FM2

Dust filter for FM501 Ozone filter for FM2

Dust filter for FM1

Dust filter f or FM10 Dust filter for front cover Dust filter for FM3

Dust filter for FM10 Dust filter for front cover Dust filter for FM3

F-13-3

13.3.3 Scheduled Maintenance Work Procedure

Perform the following to service the area around the drum as part of scheduled maintenance: Work 1 a. cleaning the side scraper assembly b. cleaning the toner receptacle
0010-9514

Do not rotate the magnet roller drive assembly during the work. Doing so could cause waste toner to drop from the cleaner assembly. 1) Slide out the process unit.

Be sure to place paper over the fixing/transport unit. 2) Take out the photosensitive drum. 3) Remove the cleaning blade assembly. 4) Move the waste toner collecting in front of the magnet roller [1] and the scraper [2] using a piece of paper [3] in the direction of the feedscrew (rear).
[3] [2]

[1]
F-13-4

5) Release the 2 locks [1] of the slide rail, and slide the fixing/transport unit [2] farther toward the front.

13-7

Chapter 13

[1]

[2]

[1]
F-13-5

6) With the cleaner assembly [1] slid halfway out, remove the screw [2] (1 pc. each), and detach the 2 toner receptacle fixing plates [3]. 7) Remove the front toner receptacle [4], and remove the toner from the front toner receptacle.
[1]

[3] [2]

[2]
F-13-6

[4]

8) Slide the cleaner assembly [1] fully out, and remote the screw [2] (1 pc. each); then, detach the 2 toner receptacle fixing plates [3]. 9) Remove the rear toner receptacle [4], and remove the toner from the rear toner receptacle.

[1]

[3]

[3] [4]
F-13-7

[2]

Work 2 a. cleaning the photosensitive drum b. removing the toner from the magnet roller assembly c. turning over/replacing the cleaning blade

Do not rotate the magnet during the work. Otherwise, waste toner could drop from the cleaner assembly.

13-8

Chapter 13 1) Slide out the process unit.

Be sure to place paper over the fixing/transport unit. 2) Remove the photosensitive drum. 3) Moisten lint-free paper [1] with 5 to 10 cc of alcohol [2]; then, collect 0.2 to 0.3 g of drum cleaning powder (CK-0429) [3] with the lint-free paper.

[3] CK-0429

[2]

[1]
F-13-8

4) While forcing the lint-free paper against the photosensitive drum, wipe it as if to rub it from the front to the rear and then from the rear to the front.

5 10cm
F-13-9

- Rub it over a width of 5 to 10 cm in drum peripheral direction. - The drum life is not likely to be affected if the back-and-forth strokes of the lint-free paper over a single area is limited to 15 to 20 times. 5) When alcohol has evaporated, dry wipe the surface with lint-free paper. If the surface cleaned with the lint-free paper is uneven, go back to step 4), and repeat the work by increasing the number of back-and-forth stokes. 6) Rotate the drum an equivalent of the width over which its surface has been cleaned, and repeat steps 3) through 5) until the entire surface of the drum has been cleaned. 7) Remove the cleaning blade assembly. 8) Insert a ruler [3] between the magnet roller [1] and the scraper [2]; then, move it back and forth from the rear to the front and then from the front to the rear to break any cakes of waste toner. 9) Rotate the magnet roller [1] to see that the coating of waste toner is even. If the following is noted, repeat step 8): - the surface of the magnet roller is a clearly recognizable lined coating of toner. - there are dents in parts of the surface. - there is a cake of toner.

13-9

Chapter 13

[2]

[3]

[1] [2]

[3] [1]

F-13-10

10) Remove the cleaning blade from the cleaning blade assembly. 11) Turn over or replace the cleaning blade [7]; then, match and butt it against the rear of the blade retaining plate [8].
Match and butt the edge.

[7]

[8]
F-13-11

When butting the blade, force it down with your fingers, making sure there is no gap. 12) Tighten the following screws temporarily in the order indicated: - temporarily tighten screws from 1 through 5
10 5

8 3

6 2

7 4

9 1

F-13-12

Keep the blade using the plate, and tighten the screws. - fully tighten screws 6 through 10. 13) Apply toner to the edge of the cleaning blade where the blade comes into contact with the photosensitive drum, and mount the blade:

13-10

Chapter 13

Blade reinforcing plate Blade support plate Blade retainer

Blade vibration unit Blade back plate

F-13-13

When mounting the cleaning blade, be sure to put the blade reinforcing plate between the blade support plate and the blade back plate.

After mounting the cleaning blade, turn the drum. If the cleaning blade fails to catch the toner, repeat the foregoing steps. If tightening the screws for a second time fails to correct the fault, replace the cleaning blade.

13.3.4 Points to Note About Schedule Servicing

0010-9515

- Make a thorough check to see that there is no melting, thermal deformation, cracking, or discoloration (yellowish) caused by leakage in the block (front, rear). If any abnormal condition is noted, replace it with a new one as soon as possible. - Be sure to check and clean all the way, including the inner side of the block (front, rear). - Never use a cloth with any metal particles. - Do not use a moist cloth for areas other than those for which doing so is specifically mentioned. If alcohol has been used, be sure it has dried completely before putting the part back into the machine. - Whenever possible, perform scheduled servicing and replacement at the indicated intervals.

13-11

Chapter 13

[13]

[14] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [18] [19] [15] [16] [17]

[7] [8] [9]

[20]

[10] [11] [12]

[21] [22]
F-13-14 T-13-6 Item [1] [2] [3] pre-exposure lamp copyboard glass scanning lamp Tool/solvent alcohol alcohol lint-free paper Remarks cleaning cleaning dry wiping

[4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]

standard white plate reflecting plate No. 1 through No. 3 mirrors separation claw upper roller lower roller paper guide transport assembly re-pickup assembly reversing roller re-pickup assembly pickup roller registration roller - primary charging assembly - transfer/separation charging assembly - pre-transfer charging assembly dust-blocking glass

lint-free paper blower brush blower brush or lint-free paper solvent (#160) and lint-free paper Cleaning oil lint-free paper solvent (#160) and lint-free paper moist cloth*1 alcohol and lint-free paper alcohol and lint-free paper

dry wiping cleaning cleaning or blowing; if dirt persists, dry wiping with lintfree paper cleaning cleaning cleaning cleaning cleaning cleaning

[13]

alcohol and lint-free paper

dry wiping; then, cleaning with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol

[14]

lint-free paper

cleaning

13-12

Chapter 13
Item [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] developing assembly base dust-collecting roller transfer guide (upper/lower) pre-transfer exposure lamp registration roller manual feeder tray pickup roller transport roller prints (pickup sensor) (transport sensor) (vertical path sensor) vertical path roller alcohol and lint-free paper alcohol and lint-free paper alcohol and lint-free paper alcohol and lint-free paper Tool/solvent moist cloth*1 Remarks cleaning dispose of toner from dust-collecting roller dry wiping; then, cleaning with lint-free paper with alcohol dry wiping; then, cleaning with lint-free paper with alcohol cleaning cleaning

[21]

blower brush or lint-free paper

- cleaning or blowing - if dirt persists, dry wiping with lint-free paper - do not use solvent (alcohol) cleaning

[22]

alcohol and lint-free paper

*1 Be sure that no droplets of water remain.

13-13

Chapter 14 Standards and Adjustments

Contents

Contents
14.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure ...........................................................................................................................14-1
14.1.1 Making Pre-Checks.................................................................................................................................................................. 14-1 14.1.2 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking the Images) .................................................................................................... 14-1 14.1.3 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking the Density Slope) ......................................................................................... 14-2 14.1.4 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking the Solid Black Density) ............................................................................... 14-3 14.1.5 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking for fogging) ................................................................................................... 14-4 14.1.6 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking Halftone Density) .......................................................................................... 14-4 14.1.7 Making Checks on the Reader Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 14-5 14.1.8 Potential Control System Conversion Table............................................................................................................................ 14-7

14.2 Image Adjustments ..................................................................................................................................................14-11

14.2.1 Standards of Image Position .................................................................................................................................................. 14-11 14.2.2 Checking the Image Position ................................................................................................................................................. 14-11 14.2.3 Adjusting Side Registration ................................................................................................................................................... 14-11 14.2.4 Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Margin........................................................................................................................... 14-13 14.2.5 Adjusting the Left/Right Non-Image Width .......................................................................................................................... 14-13 14.2.6 Adjusting the Leading Edge Non-Image Width .................................................................................................................... 14-13

14.3 Scanning System ......................................................................................................................................................14-13

14.3.1 When Replacing Components of the Scanning System......................................................................................................... 14-13 14.3.2 Adjusting the Position of the No. 1/No. 2 Mirror Base ......................................................................................................... 14-13

14.4 Laser Exposure System ............................................................................................................................................14-14

14.4.1 When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit ............................................................................................................................... 14-14

14.5 Image Formation System .........................................................................................................................................14-14

14.5.1 Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire ........................................................................................................................... 14-14

14.6 Fixing System ..........................................................................................................................................................14-14

14.6.1 Adjusting the Lower Roller Pressure (nip) ............................................................................................................................ 14-14 14.6.2 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Heater ................................................................................................................ 14-15

14.7 Electrical Components .............................................................................................................................................14-15

14.7.1 After Replacing the Hard Disk .............................................................................................................................................. 14-15 14.7.2 After Replacing the Main Controller ..................................................................................................................................... 14-15 14.7.3 After Replacing the DC Controller PCB ............................................................................................................................... 14-16 14.7.4 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB.......................................................................................................................... 14-17 14.7.5 After Replacing the HV-DC PCB.......................................................................................................................................... 14-17 14.7.6 When Replacing the Potential Sensor/Potential Control PCB............................................................................................... 14-17 14.7.7 Checking the Surface Potential Control System .................................................................................................................... 14-18 14.7.8 Checking the Environment Sensor......................................................................................................................................... 14-19

14.8 Pickup/Feeding System............................................................................................................................................14-19

14.8.1 Orientation of the Deck/Cassette Pickup Roller .................................................................................................................... 14-19 14.8.2 Orientation of the Deck/Cassette Separation Roller .............................................................................................................. 14-19 14.8.3 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Deck/Cassette Pickup Assembly ........................................................................... 14-20 14.8.4 Orientation of the Manual Feed Tray/Side Paper Deck Pickup Roller.................................................................................. 14-20 14.8.5 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Manual Feed Tray ................................................................................................. 14-20 14.8.6 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Side Paper Deck .................................................................................................... 14-20 14.8.7 Adjusting the Pressure of the Deck/Cassette Separation Roller ............................................................................................ 14-20 14.8.8 Adjusting the Pressure of the Pickup/Feeding Roller of the Manual..................................................................................... 14-21 14.8.9 Location of the solenoids ....................................................................................................................................................... 14-21 14.8.10 Position of the Fixing Web Solenoid (SL2)......................................................................................................................... 14-21 14.8.11 Position of the Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL3) ................................................................................................................ 14-22 14.8.12 Position the Fixing/Feeder Unit Locking Solenoid (SL4) ................................................................................................... 14-22 14.8.13 Position of the Multifeeder Latch Solenoid (SL6)............................................................................................................... 14-22 14.8.14 Position of the Deck (right) Pickup Solenoid (SL7) ............................................................................................................ 14-22

Contents

14.8.15 Position of the Deck (Left) Pickup Solenoid (SL8)............................................................................................................. 14-22 14.8.16 Position of the Cassette 3/4 Pickup Solenoid (SL9/10) ....................................................................................................... 14-23 14.8.17 Position of the Side Paper Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid ................................................................................... 14-23 14.8.18 Fitting the Side Guide Timing Belt of the Manual Feed Tray Assembly............................................................................ 14-23 14.8.19 Fitting the Drive Belt ........................................................................................................................................................... 14-23 14.8.20 Cleaning the Double-Feed Sensor (transmission)................................................................................................................ 14-23

Chapter 14

14.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure

14.1.1 Making Pre-Checks
0010-9293

Clean the following: 1. Grid wire 2. Primary charging wire 3. Pre-transfer charging wire 4. Transfer charging wire

Check the following: 1. Charging wire for height

Make 2 copies each of the NA3 Chart for the following: 1. Auto mode 2. Text mode 3. Text/photo mode Make several test prints of the following: 1. PG4 (blank) 2. PG6 (halftone) 3. PG7 (solid black) Output Conditions - F value at 5 - potential control at ON If the test prints have a fault,

Go to make checks on the printer side.

If only copy images have a fault,

Go to make checks on the scanner side.

F-14-1

14.1.2 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking the Images)

- Use PG4, PG6, PG7
Does the image have a vertical line?
0010-9294

NO

Go to "Checking the Density Slope"

YES

Clean the following and look for adhesion of foreign matter: 1. Dust-proofing glass 2. Charging assembly 3. Developing cylinder

Does the image have a vertical line?

NO

YES

F-14-2

14-1

Chapter 14

14.1.3 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking the Density Slope)
0010-9296

Check the image using PG6.

Is there difference in density between front and rear? YES

NO

Go to "Checking the Solid Black Density"

Is it lighter at the rear?

NO

YES Turn the adjusting screw at the front of the primary charging assembly counterclockwise. (2 turns max.) Execute potential control. Turn off and then on the power switch, and generate PG1 or PG4 (test print). Turn the adjusting screw at the rear of the primary charging assembly counterclockwise. (2 turns max.)

F-14-3

1) If the difference in density still exists after giving the adjusting screw 2 turns (one side; a full turn causes a change of about 0.7 mm), check the charging assembly, scanning lamp, and scanner for dirt. 2) When giving it a counterclockwise turn, be sure that the distance between wire and grid will not be 7.5 mm or less. MEMO: Moving the wire from the photosensitive drum causes the images to be darker; while moving it closer causes the images to be lighter.

14-2

Chapter 14

14.1.4 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking the Solid Black Density)
0010-9297

Check PG7 (solid black).

Is the output free of fuzziness and the density correct? NO

YES

Go to "Checking for fogging"

Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VDM.

Is the reading of <VDM> between 390 and 460? YES

NO

Check the primary charging system and the potential control system; if normal, replace the photosensitive drum.

Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VL1M.

Is the reading of <VL1M> between 50 and 90? YES

NO

Check the following; if faulty, replace it: 1. Laser output 2. Potential control system

Is the test print of PG4 (blank) foggy?

YES

Check the following of the developing system: 1. Developing bias 2. Toner coating on sleeve

NO

Execute service mode as follows: 1. Vary the values of the following as indicated in the table: ADJUST>V-CONT>VD-OFST, ADJUST>V-CONT>VL-OFST:
Lighter images Default Darker images

VD-OFST VL-OFST

-4 +4

-3 +3

-2 +2

0 0

+2 -2

+3 -3

+4 -4

2. Turn off and then on the power (to start potential control).

F-14-4

14-3

Chapter 14

14.1.5 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking for fogging)

0010-9298

Check PG4 (blank)

NO Is the output foggy?

Go to "Checking Halftone Density"

YES Make the following in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VDM.

Is the reading of <VDM> between 390 and 460? YES

NO

Check the potential control system; if normal, replace the photosensitive drum.

Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VL1M.

Is the reading of <VL1M> between 50 and 90? YES

NO

Check the following; if faulty, replace it: 1. Laser output 2. Potential control system

Decrease the value of the following in service mode: ADJUST>DEVELOP>DE-OFST. - A lower value makes images lighter.

F-14-5

14.1.6 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking Halftone Density)

0010-9299

Check PG6 (halftone)

Compared with No. 6 and No. 7 (halftone), is the density about the same? NO

YES

End.

Set the following in service mode to between 1 and 9: ADJUST>DENS>DENS-ADJ - A higher value makes images darker.

F-14-6

14-4

Chapter 14

14.1.7 Making Checks on the Reader Unit

0011-8646

*: model w/ DADF-Q1 (non-Japanese model: iR7105/7095; Japanese model: iR7105/7095/7086N) **: model w/ DADF-M1 (non-Japanese model: iR7086) <Making Image Initial Checks> <Checking the Density Slope>

Are there vertical lines in the images?

NO

Is there a difference in density between front and rear? YES

NO

YES Clean the following: 1. Mirrors 2. Lens 3. Standard white plate (mounted to back of copyboard glass**) 4. Copyboard glass

Clean the mirrors.

Check to see if the standard white plate is mounted correctly. As necessary, correct its mounting.

Execute the following service mode item: 1) COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ 2) COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>LUT-ADJ**

Execute the following service mode item: 1) COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ 2) COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>LUT-ADJ**

Is there a difference in density between front and rear? YES

NO

Perform the instructions under for the printer unit. F-14-7

*: model w/ DADF-Q1 (non-Japanese model: iR7105/7095; Japanese model: iR7105/7095/7086N) **: model w/ DADF-M1 (non-Japanese model: iR7086)
<Checking the Solid Black Density> Make a copy of the NA3 Chart in text mode. Is gray scale No. 1 (solid black) too light? YES <Checking for Fogging> Make a copy of the NA3 Chart in text mode. Is the white background foggy? NO

NO

YES

Check the life of the scanning lamp; if it has reached the end of its life, replace it.

Clean the following: 1. Mirrors 2. Lens 3. Standard white plate 4. Scanning lamp 5. Reflecting plate

Execute potential control Turn off and then on the power switch, and make a copy.

Make a copy of the NA3 Chart in AE mode. Is the output foggy? NO

YES

Execute the following service mode item: 1) COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ 2) COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>LUT-ADJ**

J K

Is the density of gray scale No. 1 (solid black) too low (light)?

NO

YES Perform the instructions under Checking the Solid Black Density for the printer unit.

F-14-8

14-5

Chapter 14

*: model w/ DADF-Q1 (non-Japanese model: iR7105/7095; Japanese model: iR7105/7095/7086N) **: model w/ DADF-M1 (non-Japanese model: iR7086)

YES

Execute the following service mode item: 1) COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ 2) COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>LUT-ADJ**

Perform the instructions NO under Checking for Fogging on the printer side.

Is the white background foggy? YES

Increase the white level target value for shading correction in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>SH-TRGT (40 max.)**.

YES

Execute the following service mode item: 1) COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ 2) COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>LUT-ADJ**

NO

Is the white background foggy? YES

Decrease the value of AE density adjustment in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>AE>AE-TBL.

F-14-9

14-6

Chapter 14

*: model w/ DADF-Q1 (non-Japanese model: iR7105/7095; Japanese model: iR7105/7095/7086N) **: model w/ DADF-M1 (non-Japanese model: iR7086) <Checking Halftone Density> K

When the A3 Chart is copied in text/photo mode, is the density of No.8 optimum when compared with Nos.7 through 9? NO If it is too light, Increase the setting of the following in service mode: COPIER > ADJUST > DENS >DENS-ADJ Decrease the setting of the following in service mode: COPIER > ADJUST > DENS >DENS-ADJ If it is too dark, YES

End.

Make one copy of the A3 Chart in text/photo mode.

YES

Is the density of gray scale No.8 (halftone) different? NO

Go to Checking the Solid Black Density for the printer unit.

F-14-10

14.1.8 Potential Control System Conversion Table

0010-9305

T-14-1 Control [V] Primary [uA] Developing bias [V] Pre-transfer [uA] Transfer [uA] Separation [uA]

3.00 3.05 3.10 3.15 3.20 3.25 3.30 3.35 3.40 3.45 3.50 3.55 3.60 3.65 3.70 3.75 3.80 3.85

1600 1590 1580 1570 1560 1550 1540 1530 1520 1510 1500 1490 1480 1470 1460 1450 1440 1430

0 3 7 11 15 18 22 26 30 33 37 41 45 48 52 56 60 63

0 +2 +4 +6 +8 +10 +12 +14 +15 +17 +19 +21 +23 +25 +27 +29 +30 +32

0 -4 -8 -12 -16 -20 -24 -28 -32 -36 -40 -44 -48 -52 -56 -60 -65 -69

0 +5 +10 +15 +20 +25 +30 +35 +40 +45 +50 +55 +60 +65 +70 +75 +80 +85

14-7

Chapter 14
Control [V] Primary [uA] Developing bias [V] Pre-transfer [uA] Transfer [uA] Separation [uA]

3.90 3.95 4.00 4.05 4.10 4.15 4.20 4.25 4.30 4.35 4.40 4.45 4.50 4.55 4.60 4.65 4.70 4.75 4.80 4.85 4.90 4.95 5.00 5.05 5.10 5.15 5.20 5.25 5.30 5.35 5.40 5.45 5.50 5.55 5.60 5.65 5.70 5.75 5.80 5.85 5.90 5.95 6.00 6.05 6.10 6.15 6.20 6.25 6.30 6.35 6.40 6.45 6.50 6.55 6.60 6.65 6.70 6.75 6.80 6.85 6.90 6.95 7.00

1420 1410 1400 1390 1380 1370 1360 1350 1340 1330 1320 1310 1300 1290 1280 1270 1260 1250 1240 1230 1220 1210 1200 1190 1180 1170 1160 1150 1140 1130 1120 1110 1100 1090 1080 1070 1060 1050 1040 1030 1020 1010 1000 990 980 970 960 950 940 930 920 910 900 890 880 870 860 850 840 830 820 810 800

67 71 75 78 82 86 90 93 97 101 105 108 112 116 119 123 127 131 134 138 142 146 150 153 157 161 165 168 172 176 180 183 187 191 195 198 202 206 210 213 217 221 225 228 232 236 240 243 247 251 255 258 262 266 269 273 277 281 285 288 292 296 300

+34 +36 +38 +40 +42 +44 +45 +47 +49 +51 +53 +55 +57 +59 +60 +62 +64 +66 +68 +70 +72 +74 +75 +77 +79 +81 +83 +85 +87 +89 +90 +92 +94 +96 +98 +100 +102 +104 +105 +107 +109 +111 +113 +115 +117 +119 +120 +122 +124 +126 +128 +130 +132 +134 +135 +137 +139 +141 +143 +145 +147 +149 +150

-73 -77 -81 -85 -89 -93 -97 -101 -105 -109 -113 -117 -121 -125 -129 -134 -138 -142 -146 -150 -154 -158 -162 -166 -170 -174 -178 -182 -186 -190 -195 -199 -203 -207 -211 -215 -219 -223 -227 -231 -235 -239 -243 -247 -251 -255 -260 -264 -268 -272 -276 -280 -284 -288 -292 -29 -300 -304 -308 -312 -316 -320 -325

+90 +95 +100 +105 +110 +115 +120 +125 +130 +135 +140 +145 +150 +155 +160 +165 +170 +175 +180 +185 +190 +195 +200 +205 +210 +215 +220 +225 +230 +235 +240 +245 +250 +255 +260 +265 +270 +275 +280 +285 +290 +295 +300 +305 +310 +315 +320 +325 +330 +335 +340 +345 +350 +355 +360 +365 +370 +375 +380 +385 +390 +395 +400

14-8

Chapter 14
Control [V] Primary [uA] Developing bias [V] Pre-transfer [uA] Transfer [uA] Separation [uA]

7.05 7.10 7.15 7.20 7.25 7.30 7.35 7.40 7.45 7.50 7.55 7.60 7.65 7.70 7.75 7.80 7.85 7.90 7.95 8.00 8.05 8.10 8.15 8.20 8.25 8.30 8.35 8.40 8.45 8.50 8.55 8.60 8.65 8.70 8.75 8.80 8.85 8.90 8.95 9.00 9.05 9.10 9.15 9.20 9.25 9.30 9.35 9.40 9.45 9.50 9.55 9.60 9.65 9.70 9.75 9.80 9.85 9.90 9.95 10.00 10.05 10.10 10.15

790 780 770 760 750 740 730 720 710 700 690 680 670 660 650 640 630 620 610 600 590 580 570 560 550 540 530 520 510 500 490 480 470 460 450 440 430 420 410 400 390 380 370 360 350 340 330 320 310 300 290 280 270 260 250 240 230 220 210 200 190 180 170

303 307 311 315 318 322 326 330 333 337 341 345 348 352 356 360 363 367 371 375 378 382 386 390 393 397 401 405 408 412 416 419 423 427 431 434 438 442 446 450 453 457 461 465 468 472 476 480 483 487 491 495 498 502 506 510 513 517 521 525 528 532 536

+152 +154 +156 +158 +160 +162 +164 +165 +167 +169 +171 +173 +175 +177 +179 +180 +182 +184 +186 +188 +190 +192 +194 +195 +197 +199 +201 +203 +205 +207 +209 +210 +212 +214 +216 +218 +220 +222 +224 +225 +227 +229 +231 +233 +235 +237 +239 +240 +242 +244 +246 +248 +250 +252 +254 +255 +257 +259 +261 +263 +265 +267 +269

-329 -333 -337 -341 -345 -349 -353 -357 -361 -365 -369 -373 -377 -381 -385 -390 -394 -398 -402 -406 -410 -414 -418 -422 -426 -430 -434 -438 -442 -446 -450 -454 -459 -463 -467 -471 -475 -479 -483 -487 -491 -495 -499 -503 -507 -511 -515 -520 -524 -528 -532 -536 -540 -544 -548 -552 -556 -560 -564 -568 -572 -576 -580

+405 +410 +415 +420 +425 +430 +435 +440 +445 +450 +455 +460 +465 +470 +475 +480 +485 +490 +495 +500 +505 +510 +515 +520 +525 +530 +535 +540 +545 +550 +555 +560 +565 +570 +575 +580 +585 +590 +595 +600 +605 +610 +615 +620 +625 +630 +635 +640 +645 +650 +655 +660 +665 +670 +675 +680 +685 +690 +695 +700 +705 +710 +715

14-9

Chapter 14
Control [V] Primary [uA] Developing bias [V] Pre-transfer [uA] Transfer [uA] Separation [uA]

10.20 10.25 10.30 10.35 10.40 10.45 10.50 10.55 10.60 10.65 10.70 10.75 10.80 10.85 10.90 10.95 11.00

160 150 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0

540 543 547 551 555 558 562 566 570 573 577 581 585 588 592 596 600

+270 +272 +274 +276 +278 +280 +282 +284 +285 +287 +289 +291 +293 +295 +297 +299 +300

-585 -589 -593 -597 -601 -605 -609 -613 -617 -621 -625 -629 -633 -637 -641 -645 -650

+720 +725 +730 +735 +740 +745 +750 +755 +760 +765 +770 +775 +780 +785 +790 +795 +800

14-10

Chapter 14 4. Leading edge non-image width (scanner image leading edge position)

14.2 Image Adjustments

14.2.1 Standards of Image Position
The image margin/non-image width of a print made in direct must be as follows: [Image Leading Edge Margin] Single-Sided/Double-Sided Lf= 4.0 +1.5/-1.0 mm [4.0 +1.5/-1.0 mm]
0010-9306

14.2.3 Adjusting Side Registration

<Cassette 3/4> 1) Press the release button of cassette 3/4, and slide out the cassette. 2) Shift down the cassette front cover [1] in the direction of the arrow. - 2 screws [2]
[2]
0010-9310

Lf
F-14-11

[Left/Right Image Margin] Single-Sided/Double-Sided Wl= 2.5 +/-1.5 mm [2.5 +1.5/-1.0 mm]
F-14-15

[1]

Wl

3) Loosen the 2 fixing screws [1] found on the right/left of the cassette. 4) Move the cassette case [2] to the front or the rear to make adjustments. - move it to the rear to decrease the horizontal registration (left margin). - move it to the front to increase the horizontal registration (left margin).

0 2 4 6 8 10

F-14-12

[Leading Edge Non-Image Width] Single-Sided Lf= 4.0 +1.5/-1.0 mm [4.0 +1.8/-1.4 mm] Double-Sided Lf= 4.0 +1.5/-1.0 mm [4.0 +/-1.8 mm]

[2] [2]

Lf
F-14-13

[Left/Right Non-Image Width] Single-Sided/Double-Sided Wl= 2.5 +/-1.5 mm [2.5 +1.5/-1.8 mm]
Wl

[1] [1]
F-14-16

5) Check to make sure that the horizontal registration value (L; left margin) of the image made on paper from cassette 3/4 is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.
0 2 4 6 8 10

[1]

image

F-14-14

The information in brackets represents standards for the integrated configuration.

L1
F-14-17
0010-9307

14.2.2 Checking the Image Position

Make prints using the following as the source of paper (10 prints each), and check to see that the image margin and the non-image width are as indicated: - Each cassette - Front deck (left, right) - Manual feed tray - Duplex feeding unit - Side paper deck If not as indicated, adjust the image position in the following order: 1. Adjusting the left/right image margin (registration) 2. Adjusting the image leading edge margin (registration) 3. Adjusting the left/right non-image width (CCD read start position)

[1] Paper movement 6) When done, tighten the 2 fixing screws loosened in step 3). 7) Shift up the cassette front cover [1] in the direction of the arrow, and secure it in place using 2 screws [2].

14-11

Chapter 14

[2]

[1]

[1]
F-14-18

F-14-20

4) Check to see that the horizontal registration (L; left/right margin) of the images made on paper from the front deck (left/right) is 2.5 +/-1.5 mm.

8) Put cassette 3/4 back inside the machine. 9) When done, execute the following service mode items: Cassette 3 COPIER > FUNCTION > CST > C3-STMTR COPIER > FUNCTION > CST > C3-A4R Register the paper width basic value for cassette 3. 9-1) Place STMTR paper in the cassette 3, and move the side guide plate to suit the STMTR width. 9-2) Select C3-STMTR in service mode to highlight, and press the OK key so that adjustment will be executed and the value will be registered automatically. 9-3) Likewise, repeat steps 9.1) and 9.2) for A4R. Cassette 4 COPIER > FUNCTION > CST > C4-STMTR COPIER > FUNCTION > CST > C4-A4R Perform the work you performed for cassette 3. <Front Deck Left/Right> 1) Press the release button of the front deck (left/right), and slide out the deck. 2) Loosen the 4 screws [1].
[1]

image

L1
F-14-21

[1] Paper movement 5) Tighten the 4 screws you loosened in step 2). 6) Put the front deck (left/right) back in place. <Manual Feeder Tray> 1) Move the side guide plate [1] to the center, and loosen the 2 manual feeder tray mounting screws [2]; then, adjust the position of the manual feeder tray.
[2]

[1]

[1]

F-14-22

[1]

<Duplexing Transport Unit> 1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-REFER so that the image margin on the 2nd side will be as indicated. - if the margin is too large, decrease the setting of ADJ-REFER (a change of 10 will decrease the margin by 1 mm). - if the margin is too small, increase the setting of DJ-REFER (a change of 10 will increase the margin by 1 mm). W1=2.5 +/-2.0 mm
F-14-19

3) Move the cassette guide assembly (front) [1] to the front or the rear to make adjustments. - move the guide plate to the rear to decrease the horizontal registration (left margin). - move the guide plate to the front to increase the horizontal registration (left margin).

14-12

Chapter 14

[1]

Wl
F-14-26

0 2 4 6 8 10
F-14-23

14.3 Scanning System

14.3.1 When Replacing Components of the Scanning System
<Components> CCD unit, copyboard glass, scanning lamp, standard white plate, inverter PCB <Procedure> Execute the following service mode item: 1) COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CCD-ADJ (shading correction based on the standard white plate)
0010-9311 0011-8722

14.2.4 Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Margin

1) Make the following selections in service mode so that the image margin will be as indicated: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REGIST. - if the margin is too large, increase the setting of REGIST (a change of 10 will decrease the margin by 1 mm). - if the margin is too small, decrease the setting of REGIST (a change of 10 will increase the margin by 1 mm). Lf=4.0+1.5/-1.0

14.3.2 Adjusting the Position of the No. 1/No. 2 Mirror Base

1) Arrange the mirror positioning tool (FY9-3009-040) so that it is ready for use in the machine (by changing the pin position; REAR).
0011-9468

[C] [B] [A]

0 2 4 6 8 10
F-14-24

Lf

[A] [B]

14.2.5 Adjusting the Left/Right Non-Image Width

1) Adjust the non-image width in service mode so that it is as indicated: COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y. [1] Edge of image - Decreasing the ADJ-Y setting: A decrease by '10' will decrease the margin by 1 mm. - Increasing the ADJ-Y setting: An increase by '10' will increase the nonimage width by 1 mm.
[1]
0011-8648

F-14-27

2) Arrange the mirror positioning tool so that it is ready for use in the machine (by changing the pin position; FRONT).

[C] [B] [A]

Wl

0 2 4 6 8 10

[A] [B]

F-14-25

14.2.6 Adjusting the Leading Edge Non-Image Width

1) Adjust the non-image width in service mode so that it is as indicated: COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X. [1] Image leading edge - Decreasing the ADJ-X setting: A decrease by '10' will decrease the width by 1 mm. - Increasing the ADJ-X setting: An increase by '10' will increase the width by 1 mm.
0011-8649

F-14-28

3) Fit the pins of the mirror positioning tool (front [2]; rear [3]) into the appropriate holes of the No. 1/No. 2 mirror base).

14-13

Chapter 14

14.5 Image Formation System

14.5.1 Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire
0010-9325

T-14-2 Height of charging wire Primary

- 0mm 7.5 +3mm

- 0mm 7.5 +3mm

[1]
Pre-transfer

No height adjusting mechanism 13.6 0.3mm

F-14-29

Separation

[3]
17.0 0.2mm 15.5 0.2mm

Transfer

9.0

0.2mm

MEMO: The height (position) of the primary and transfer charging wires may be adjusted by turning the screw found at the rear of the charging assembly. A full turn of the screw changes the position of the charging wire by about 0.7 mm.

14.6 Fixing System

14.6.1 Adjusting the Lower Roller Pressure (nip)
[2]
F-14-30

The nip width must be as indicated in figure; if not, adjust it using the pressure adjusting nut.
c

0010-9324

A3 paper

4) Secure the end of the cable that has temporarily been fixed in place on the hook of the reader unit frame. 5) Fully tighten the screws on the cable fixing plate both at the front and the rear. 6) Detach the mirror positioning tool (FRONT, REAR). 7) Put the detached parts back on by reversing the foregoing steps.

Feed direction

b Middle of paper

14.4 Laser Exposure System

14.4.1 When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit
There is no special work in conjunction with the replacement of the laser scanner unit.
0010-9320

a
F-14-31

a and c are points 10 mm from both edges of paper.

14-14

Chapter 14
T-14-3 Dimension Measure with upper and lower rollers fully heated

shipment from the factory may be brought back by executing the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>CA-KEY. If doing so has failed, use the SST to install the key/certificate/CA certificate, and execute CA-KEY once again.

b | a-c |

200 V: 9.0 -/+ 0.5 mm, 208/230 V: 10.0 -/+ 0.5 mm 0.5 mm or less

a. Generating Output for Nip Width Measurement Wait for 15 min after the copier ends its warm-up period; make 20 A4 copies, and measure the nip. 1) Place A3 copy paper in the manual feed tray. 2) Make the following selections in service mode to generate output: COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING > NIP-CHK. The A3 paper will be picked up, and a copy like the one shown in figure will be delivered.

Points to Note When Executing Service Mode Item CA-KEY If the user has generated/added a key/certificate/CA certificate on his/her own, executing CA-KEY will also delete these files. Inform the user of this, and ask him/her to re-install them as necessary after the execution of CAKEY.

Points to Note About a HDD to Which System Software Has Been Installed If you must use a HDD to which the system software for a different machine (thus a different serial number) has been installed, be sure to format it after mounting it. Otherwise, the machine operation cannot be guaranteed.

14.6.2 Points to Note When Mounting the Fixing Heater

1. Do not touch the heater surface. 2. For both heaters, mount so that the side with the longer heater harness is toward the front. 3. Viewing from the front of the fixing assembly, mount the main heater on the right (for 200V model, 1150 W; for 208V model, 1220 W; for 230V model, 1185 W) and the sub heater on the left (for 200V model, 565 W; for 208V model, 600 W; for 230V model, 645 W). 4. Viewing from the rear, connect the right side of the faston of the heater at the rear to the main heater, and connect the top side to the sub heater. Height of the Fixing Inlet Guide
0010-9623

14.7.2 After Replacing the Main Controller

0010-9328

Before Starting the Work (backing up the data) If possible, perform the following: - Using the SST, download the data stored in the RAM of the main controller. - Print out the user mode/service mode data. - If you are replacing the main controller PCB, be sure to physically transfer the following from the existing to the new PCB: [1] BootROM [2] HDD [3] image memory (DDR-SDRAM) [4] counter memory PCB
[3]

[1]

5.8mm (reference only)

5.8mm (reference only)

Fixing screw Fixing screw

F-14-32

[4]

[2]
F-14-33

Do not loosen the fixing screw on the inlet guide, as you will have to adjust the position of the inlet guide if you remove the inlet guide base. If you must loosen it, be sure to adjust the position of the inlet guide afterward by referring to the index on the fixing assembly.

14.7 Electrical Components

14.7.1 After Replacing the Hard Disk
1) Formatting the HDD Start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., turn on the main power while holding down the 2 and 8 keys). Using the HD formatting function of the SST, execute full partition formatting. (For details, see the chapter on upgrading.) 2) Downloading the System Software Using the SST, download the following: System, LANG, RUI, PSFONT, OCR dictionary, SSL encryption key, SSL CA certificate, MEAP content. 3) Execute the following service mode item: COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CA-KEY (Level 2) 4) Turn off and then on the power. MEMO: Execution of the following may delete the keys/certificates used for encrypted communications and the CA certificates used for authentication of external server certificates: - replacement/formatting of the HDD - replacement of the main controller PCB/initialization of the RAM If a key/certificate for encrypted communications has been deleted, the control panel screen will indicate a message to the effect that the key has been corrupted: however, the key/certificate/CA certificate installed at time of
0010-9327

MEMO: Image memory (DDR-SDRAM) The machine is equipped with the following image memory: capacity: 1 GB quantity: 1 pc. Use one of the 2 slots. There is no optional memory for expansion.

1) Turn on the power. If there is a backup of the SRAM data (i.e., if downloaded using the SST), upload it. 2) Execute the following service mode item: COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CA-KEY (Level 2) 3) Turn off and then on the power. MEMO: Execution of the following may delete the keys/certificates used for encrypted communications and the CA certificates used for authentication of external server certificates: - replacement/formatting of the HDD - replacement of the main controller PCB/initialization of the RAM If a key/certificate for encrypted communications has been deleted, the control panel screen will indicate a message to the effect that the key has been corrupted: however, the key/certificate/CA certificate installed at time of shipment from the factory may be brought back by executing the following: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>CA-KEY. If doing so has failed, use the SST to install the key/certificate/CA certificate, and execute CA-KEY once again.

Points to Note When Executing Service Mode Item CA-KEY

14-15

Chapter 14 If the user has generated/added a key/certificate/CA certificate on his/her own, executing CA-KEY will also delete these files. Inform the user of this, and ask him/her to re-install them as necessary after the execution of CAKEY. Points to Note When Fitting the Security Expansion Board Whenever possible, do not replace the main controller PCB as part of the troubleshooting work conducted in relation to the installation of the security expansion board (option). The machine checks the compatibility between the HDD and the main controller PCB when a security expansion board is installed. Replacement with a new board will cause the formatting of the HDD to start automatically, thus deleting all user data.
T-14-4 Data item deleted address data registered in the address book settings made in user mode settings stored in memory license file for MEAP application user authentication information stored using SDL (simple device login) data stored using MEAP application mode memory stored using copy function or Box function data in Box read mode settings stored using transmission function files yet to be read (those selected for timer transmission or reserved for transmission) forms stored for image synthesis MEAP application password for MEAP SMS (service management services); returns to factory default job history information user authentication information stored in relation to SSO (local device authentication) key pairs and server certificates stored in conjunction with system control settings Backup possibility Yes Yes *1 Yes Yes Yes Yes *2 No Yes *3 No No No No No No Yes No

Before starting the work and checking - Be sure to print out the user mode/service mode data before replacing the DC controller PCB. - Be sure to adjust the on/off timing of the clutch in service mode (COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > CL-ADJ) after replacing the DC controller PCB. Before adjusting, be sure to place two or more sheets of A4 or LTR in the following pick-up slots, otherwise you can't perform the adjustment. - Left deck - Cassette 4 - Paper deck (accessory)

Points to note when turning the power off (Executing the shutdown sequence) Be sure to turn off the main power after executing the shutdown sequence to protect the hard disk.

Points to note when turning the power on (When Delivery accessory is mounted) When any delivery accessory (Finisher, Stacker, and/or Perfect binder) is mounted, be sure to turn the power on in the order of the delivery accessory to the host machine. If you turn on the power in reverse order, the delivery accessory cannot be correctly recognized. 1) Turn the power on. 2) Execute the followings in service mode. - COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > DC-CON (Clear the RAM of the DC controller PCB) - COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CNT-DCON (Clear the service counter of the DC controller PCB) 3) Turn the power off and back to on. (Turning the power off/on executes to clear the RAM.) 4) Input the order of connecting the delivery accessories in service mode below. - COPIER > OPTION > ACCPSD-D > ACC1 through ACC8 (Set the order of connecting the delivery accessories.) 5) Turn the power off and back to on. (Turning the power off/on enables the setting of the connection order of the delivery accessories and the delivery accessories can be recognized.) 6) Input "0" in the service mode below. - COPIER > OPTION > BODY > FIX-EXP (Fixing exp control mode) 7) Input the value on the service label in the appropriate item of service mode. 8) Turn the power off and back to on. (Turning the power off/on enables the value input in service mode.) 9) Execute the followings in service mode. - COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > CL-ADJ (Level 2) - COPEIR > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ > OP-SENS (Level2) 10) Input the value on the label of new DC controller PCB in the appropriate item of service mode.

*1: limited to those settings that may be exported using a remote UI or transmitted as part of machine information. *2: limited to when the MEAP application in question offers a backup function. *3: limited to data within the User Box. When Replacing the Main Controller PCB - Explain to the user that all user data will be deleted. - As necessary, ask the user to make a backup of those data items that permit making of a backup. - Explain to the user that the following data items do not permit making of a backup, and require remedial action: <Suggestions for Remedial Action> - for mode settings stored using the copy/Box function, ask the user to newly enter the settings. - for read mode settings stored using the transmission function, ask the user to newly enter the settings. - for files that are yet to be transmitted (i.e., files for selected timer transmission or reserved for transmission), ask the user to newly transmit them. - for registered forms used in image synthesis, ask the user to newly enter them. - for MEAP applications, ask the user to newly install them. - for MEAP SMS (service management services) passwords, access the following: http://<iR IP address>:8000/SMS. (Use the factory password "MeapSmsLogin" (case-sensitive) to log in and change the password. - for job histories, if a record is needed, ask the user to store away the history using a remote UI. (However, there is no way of returning the history to the HDD.) - for key pairs and server certificates, if the user has added any, ask for reinstallation.

DC+09+28+24+09+25
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
F-14-34

14.7.3 After Replacing the DC Controller PCB

0010-9329

[1] COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP > D-HV-DE [2] COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > D-HV-TR [3] COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > D-PRE-TR

14-16

Chapter 14 [4] COPIER > ADJUST > HV-SP > D-HV-SP [5] COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP > OFFSETDA 11) Turn the power off and back to on. 2) Remove the developing assembly, and slide out the process unit. 3) Disconnect the connector [1] of the potential sensor.
[1]

14.7.4 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB

0011-8214

Before Starting the Work (backing up the data) If possible, perform the following: - Using the SST, download the data stored in the RAM of the reader controller PCB. - Print out the user mode/service mode data.

1) Turn on the power, and execute the following service mode item: COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > R-CON 2) If the data has successfully been downloaded using the SST before the replacement, upload the data. 3) Set the values indicated on the service label for their respective service mode items. COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X (adjustment of image read start position in sub scanning direction; image lead edge) COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y (adjustment of image read start position in main scanning direction; horizontal registration) COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-S (adjustment of shading correction data measurement position) COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-DF (adjustment of main scanning position for ADF stream reading) COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-Y-FX (adjustment of main scanning position for ADF fixed reading) COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY > ADJ-X-MG (fine-adjustment of magnification in sub scanning direction for copyboard reading) 4) Execute the following service mode item: COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> CCD-ADJ (shading correction based on standard white plate) 5) Turn off and then on the power.

F-14-36

4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the potential sensor support plate [2].
[1]

[2]
F-14-37

5) Put back the developing assembly and the process unit. 6) Connect the connector [1] of the potential sensor.
[1]

14.7.5 After Replacing the HV-DC PCB

1) Set the values (5 types) indicated on the label attached to the new HV-DC PCB for the respective service mode items:
0010-9330

F-14-38

7) Fit the potential checker electrode (FY9-3041) [2] to the potential sensor [1].
[2]

H+04+05+05+01+24
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
F-14-35

[1] COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > H-PRE-TR [2] COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > HVT-TR [3] COPIER > ADJUST > HV-SP > HVT-SP [4] COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP > HVT-DE [5] COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP > OFFSETAC 2) Turn off and then on the power.

[1]
F-14-39

14.7.6 When Replacing the Potential Sensor/Potential Control PCB

0010-9331

When fitting the checker electrode to the potential sensor, make sure that the magnet of the checker electrode will not come into contact with the potential sensor cover. 8) Connect the cable [1] of the potential sensor checker electrode to the frame assembly (GND) [2] of the machine.

The machine remains powered after the main power switch is turned off as long as the power plug is connected to the power outlet. Be sure to disconnect the power plug from the power outlet. 1) Turn off the power.

14-17

Chapter 14 Never bring the clip into contact with the sensor cover. Be sure to fit it fully away from the sensor window.
[2]

Connector

J3

[1]
F-14-40

J522

F-14-41

9) Fit the door switch actuator to the door switch assembly [1] and the laser shutter assembly [2]. 10) Turn on the powor. 11) Execute the following service mode items: COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > OFST 12) Record the value of <OFST> on the service sheet. 13) Turn off the main power switch. 14) Detach the potential sensor checker electrode. 15) Put back the potential sensor support plate. 16) Turn on the power.

3) Fit the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly, and turn on the power switch. 4) Make the following selections in service mode, and check to see if the reading is between 0 and 30 during initial rotation: COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> DPOT-K. MEMO: If the reading is not as indicated, you may suspect a fault in the DC controller PCB. 5) Turn off the power switch, and detach the door switch actuator. 6) Detach the jumper wire from the DC controller PCB. 7) Connect the connector to J3 of the potential control PCB. 8) Turn on the power switch. 2. Method 2 1) Turn off the power switch. 2) Remove the developing assembly, and slide out the process unit. 3) Disconnect the connector [1] of the potential sensor.
[1]

14.7.7 Checking the Surface Potential Control System

a. Outline If image faults occur, it is important to find out whether the cause is in the latent static image formation block (including the photosensitive drum and the potential control system) or it is in the developing/transfer system, requiring a check on the surface potential. (You can check the surface potential in service mode.) b. Disabling the Auto Control Mechanisms As a way of checking the mechanisms used for corona current control, lamp intensity control, or developing bias control, you may disable the auto control mechanisms (hereafter, non-auto control mode). As a first-aid measure when a fault exists in the auto control mechanism, you may use non-auto control mode; keep in mind that all outputs in non-auto control mode are fixed to standard values. 1. Procedure 1) Make the following selections in service mode, and enter '0': COPIER > OPTION > BODY > PO-CNT. 2) Press the Reset key twice.
0010-9332

In non-auto control mode, all settings used for coronal current control, intensity control, developing bias control will be set to standard settings stored in ROM. 2. Making Use of Non-Auto Control Mode If a fault occurs in images, use the mode to find out if the cause is on the input side or output side of the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB. In non-auto control mode, if the fault is corrected somewhat, you may suspect the potential measurement unit or the DC controller PCB. c. Zero-Level Check One way of finding out if the surface potential control circuit is good or not is to use a zero-level check. MEMO: A zero-level check is made to see if the microprocessor registers 0 V when the surface potential of the drum is 0 V. Using the result of the check, you can find out if the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB or the measurement unit is good or not; a zero-level check may take either of the following two methods: 1. Method 1 1) Turn off the power switch. 2) Short the connectors J522-1 and -2 on the DC controller PCB with a jumper wire, and disconnect the connector J3 of the potential control PCB.

F-14-42

4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the potential sensor support plate [2].
[1]

[2]
F-14-43

5) Put back the developing assembly and the process unit. 6) Connect the connector [1] of the potential sensor.
[1]

F-14-44

7) Fit the potential sensor checker electrode (FY9-3041) [2] to the potential

14-18

Chapter 14 sensor [1]. 4) Turn on the power switch, and leave the machine alone for 5 min. 5) Make the following selections in service mode, and check and record the temperature/ humidity indicated on the screen in the control panel: COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG: Data B 'TEMP' deg C ........... data B1 'HUM' % ........... data B2 6) Compare data A and data B. - difference between data A 1 and data B1 is 0 -/+ 5 - difference between data A2 and data B2 is 0 -/+ 20 If the difference between data A and data B is outside the range, replace the environment sensor. 7) Press the Reset key twice, and turn off the power switch. 8) Detach the environment sensor jig, and fit the environment sensor. 9) Put back all covers.

When fitting the checker electrode to the potential sensor, be sure that the magnet of the checker electrode will not come into contact with the potential sensor cover.
[2]

The environment sensor jig (FY9-3014) is precisely adjusted at the factory. Be sure to keep it in an air-tight case with a drying agent.

14.8 Pickup/Feeding System

[1]
F-14-45

14.8.1 Orientation of the Deck/Cassette Pickup Roller

Mount the pickup roller using the steps used to remove it but in reverse while keeping the following in mind: - The pickup roller used in the front of the machine and the one used in the rear are not compatible with each other. - The pickup roller [1] used at the front of the machine is identified by 8 markings [2] on its collar.
0010-9337

8) Connect the cable [1] of the potential sensor checker electrode to the frame (GND) [2] of the machine.

Never bring the clip into contact with the sensor cover. Be sure to keep it fully away from the sensor window.

[2]

[1]
F-14-47

[2]

Pickup Roller at the Front Mount the pickup roller [1] so that the marking [2] on the side and the cutoff [3] in the collar are toward the front of the machine.
[2]

[1]
F-14-46

[3]

9) Fit the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly. 10) Turn on the power switch.

Once you have turned on the power switch, do not touch the potential sensor assembly. 11) Make the following selections in service mode, and check to make sure that the reading is between 0 and 30 during initial rotation: COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> DPOT-K. MEMO: 1. If the reading is as indicated in Method 1 but is not in Method 2, suspect dirt on the sensor or a fault in the potential measurement unit. 2. If the reading is as indicated in both Method 1 and Method 2, assume that the signal path and the operation from the potential sensor unit to the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB are normal. 12) Turn off the power switch. 13) Remove the potential sensor checker electrode. 14) Mount the potential sensor support plate. 15) Turn on the power switch.

Fr

on

[1]
F-14-48

Pickup Roller at the Rear Mount the pickup roller [1] so that the round marking [2] on its side is toward the front of the machine while the cut-off [2] in the collar is toward the rear.

[3]

14.7.8 Checking the Environment Sensor

1) Checking the Environment Sensor Make the following selections in service mode, and check and record the temperature/ humidity indicated on the screen in the control panel: COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG. Data A 'TEMP' deg C ........... data A1 'HUM' % ........... data A2 2) Press the Rest key twice to turn off the power switch. 3) Remove the environment sensor, and fit the environment sensor jig (FY9-3014) in its place.
0010-9333

[2]
R e a r

[1]
F-14-49

14.8.2 Orientation of the Deck/Cassette Separation Roller

When replacing the separation roller, be sure that it is oriented as shown
0010-9338

14-19

Chapter 14

Wider notch

Narrower notch

[2] [3]

Re
(front of machine)

ar

F-14-50

14.8.3 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Deck/ Cassette Pickup Assembly
When mounting the feeding roller assembly to the deck/cassette pickup assembly, be sure that the belt pulley [2] is to the front of the machine. When mounting the feeding roller [3] to the feeding roller shaft [4], be sure that the round marking [5] is toward the front of the machine.
[3] [5]
0010-9339

[1]
F-14-54

14.8.5 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Manual Feed Tray

When mounting the feeding roller assembly [1] to the manual feed tray pickup assembly, be sure that the belt pulley [2] is toward the front of the machine. When mounting the feeding roller [3] to the feeding roller shaft [4], be sure that the round marking [5] is toward the front of the machine.
[5] [3]
0010-9342

[4] [2] [1]

F-14-51
(front)

14.8.4 Orientation of the Manual Feed Tray/Side Paper Deck Pickup Roller
Mount the roller using the steps used to remove it but in reverse while keeping the following in mind: - The pickup roller used in the front of the machine and the one used in the rear are not compatible with each other. - The pickup roller [1] used at the rear of the machine is identified by 8 markings [2] on its collar.
0010-9340

[4] [2] [1]

F-14-55

(front)

14.8.6 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Side Paper Deck

When mounting the feeding roller assembly [1] to the side paper deck pickup assembly, be sure that the belt pulley [2] is toward the front of the machine. When mounting the feeding roller [3] to the feeding roller shaft [4], be sure that the round marking [5] is toward the rear of the machine.
[5] [3]
0010-9343

[1]
F-14-52

[2]

Pickup Roller at the Front Mount the pickup roller [1] so that the round marking [2] on its side is toward the rear of the machine while the cut-off [3] in the collar is toward the front of the machine.

[4]

[2]

[1]
F-14-56

(front of machine)

[3]

14.8.7 Adjusting the Pressure of the Deck/Cassette Separation Roller

If double feeding or pickup failure occurs during pickup, adjust the position of the pressure spring of the separation roller. - If double feeding occurs, move the hook of the spring in the direction of arrow B. - If pickup failure occurs, move the hook of the spring in the direction of A.
0010-9344

[2]
F ro n t

[1]
F-14-53

Pickup Roller at the Rear Mount the pickup roller [1] so that the round marking [2] on its side and the cut-off [3] in the collar are toward the rear of the machine.

14-20

Chapter 14

14.8.9 Location of the solenoids

0011-8945

[1]

[2]
SL6

A [3]
SL4

B [4]
F-14-57 T-14-5
SL11 SL3 SL7 SL8 SL2 SL9

[1] [3]

Feeding roller Locking lever

[2] [4]

Separation roller Pressure spring

SL10

14.8.8 Adjusting the Pressure of the Pickup/Feeding Roller of the Manual

If double feeding or pickup failure occurs during pickup, adjust the position of the pressure spring of the separation roller. - If double feeding occurs, move the hook of the spring in the direction of arrow A. - If pickup failure occurs, move the hook of the spring in the direction of B.
0010-9345

F-14-59 SL2 : Fixing web solenoid SL3 : Delivery flapper solenoid SL4 : Fixing/feeder unit locking solenoid SL6 : Manual feed pickup latch solenoid

B A

SL7 : Deck (right) pickup solenoid SL8 : Deck (left) pickup solenoid SL9 : Cassette 3 pickup solenoid F-14-58 SL10: Cassette 4 pickup solenoid SL11: Reversing flapper solenoid

14.8.10 Position of the Fixing Web Solenoid (SL2)

a. If the Fixing Web Is New Use the position of the solenoid [1] using the screw [2] so that the travel of the drive lever is 8.2 mm.
[1]
0010-9348

[2]

8.2mm

F-14-60

b. If the Fixing Web Is Not New Before removing the solenoid, check the position [A] of the drive lever when the solenoid [1] is ON. After replacing the solenoid, make adjustments using the screw [2] so that the position of the drive lever is the same (when the solenoid is ON).

14-21

Chapter 14

0.40.2mm

[1]

[1]

[2]

[2]

A
F-14-65 F-14-61

14.8.14 Position of the Deck (right) Pickup Solenoid (SL7)

0010-9350

14.8.11 Position of the Delivery Flapper Solenoid (SL3)

Use the screw [2] to adjust the position of the solenoid [1] so that the drive lever is fully pushed when the solenoid is ON (i.e., when the steel core is drawn).
[1]

0.40.2mm

Use the screw [3] so that the distance from the pickup unit bottom of each cassette holder and the bushing bottom edge of the A roller support plate is 34.0 -/+ 0.5 mm when the plunger of the pickup roller releasing solenoid is drawn (as occurring when [1] and [2] are operated as shown). (After adjustment, make sure that the distance between the paper face and the A roller is 2.5 -/+ 0.5 mm when the A roller is in UP position.)
[2] [1]

0010-9353

Fully pushed.

[2]

[1]

[2]

14.8.12 Position the Fixing/Feeder Unit Locking Solenoid (SL4)

Use the screw [3] to adjust the position of the solenoid [1] so that the locking lever [2] is 10.5 -/+ 0.5 mm away from the frame when the solenoid is ON (i.e., when the steel core is drawn).
0010-9351

View from A
F-14-66
10.50.5mm

[3]

14.8.15 Position of the Deck (Left) Pickup Solenoid (SL8)

Use the screw [3] so that the distance from the pickup unit bottom face to the bushing bottom edge of the A roller support plate is 49.5 -/+ 0.5 mm when the plunger of the pickup releasing solenoid is drawn (as occurring when [1] and [2] are operated as shown). (After adjustment, make sure that the distance between the paper face and the A roller is 2.5 -/+ 0.5 mm when the A roller is in UP position.)
[1] [2]
0010-9354

[3]

[1] [2]
F-14-63

14.8.13 Position of the Multifeeder Latch Solenoid (SL6)

Slide the solenoid in the direction of A so that the gap between the shutter [1] and the shutter plate [2] is 0.4 -/+ 0.2 mm when the solenoid is drawn.
0010-9352

34.00.5mm

F-14-62

[1] [2]
A

F-14-64

[3] View from A

F-14-67

14-22

49.50.5mm

Chapter 14

14.8.16 Position of the Cassette 3/4 Pickup Solenoid (SL9/ 10)

Use the screw [3] so that the distance from the pickup unit bottom face of each cassette holder and the bushing bottom edge of the A roller support plate is 35.5 -/+ 0.5 mm when the plunger of the pickup roller releasing solenoid is drawn (as occurring when [1] and [2] are operated as shown). (After adjustment, make sure that the distance between the paper face and the A roller is 2.5 -/+ 0.5 mm when the A roller is in UP position.)
[2] [1]
0010-9356

14.8.19 Fitting the Drive Belt

Fit the drive belt to the pulleys and rollers as follows:
Developing/waste toner drive belt Main motor
0010-9363

Pickup motor

Main drive belt

[1] [2]

Pickup drive belt

A [3]

35.50.5mm

F-14-71

14.8.20 Cleaning the Double-Feed Sensor (transmission)

If the surface of the double-feed sensor (transmission) [1] is soiled or shows a build-up of paper lint, clean it to avoid incorrect operation of the doublefeed detection mechanism. Keep in mind, however, that the fine print [2] on the sensor surface is a notation used for production control, and is not the result of soiling.
0012-2953

View from A
F-14-68

14.8.17 Position of the Side Paper Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid
Before removing the deck pickup roller releasing solenoid [1] from the support plate, make mental notes of the positions of the 2 fixing screws [2] of the solenoid with reference to the index on the support plate. (Or, mark the position of the solenoid on the support plate with a scriber.) If you are replacing the solenoid on its own, you must secure it in its initial position.
[2] [1]
0010-9357

[1]

:F
[2]

F-14-72

F-14-69

14.8.18 Fitting the Side Guide Timing Belt of the Manual Feed Tray Assembly
Butt the rack plate [1] of the manual feed tray against section A (open state). Move the slide volume [2] in the direction of B, and fit the timing belt [3] to the pulley [4].
0010-9358

[3] [4] [1] [4] A

B [2]
F-14-70

14-23

Chapter 15 Correcting Faulty Images

Contents

Contents
15.1 Making Initial Checks ................................................................................................................................................15-1
15.1.1 Checking the Side of Installation............................................................................................................................................. 15-1 15.1.2 Checking the Originals ............................................................................................................................................................ 15-1 15.1.3 Checking the Copyboard Cover, Copyboard Glass, and Standard White Plate ...................................................................... 15-1 15.1.4 Checking the Charging Assemblies ......................................................................................................................................... 15-1 15.1.5 Cheiking the Develop Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 15-1 15.1.6 Checking the Paper .................................................................................................................................................................. 15-1 15.1.7 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts ............................................................................................................................... 15-1 15.1.8 Others ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-1

15.2 Troubleshooting .........................................................................................................................................................15-1

15.2.1 Image Faults............................................................................................................................................................................. 15-1
15.2.1.1 Light Image/Weak Density .........................................................................................................................................................................15-1 15.2.1.1.1 Light image:Because J510 connector on DC controller PCB has poor contact..................................................................................15-1 15.2.1.2 Uneven Density ...........................................................................................................................................................................................15-2 15.2.1.2.1 White spots (dots or stars form) appearing on solid black image .......................................................................................................15-2 15.2.1.3 Image Displacement/Out of Focus..............................................................................................................................................................15-2 15.2.1.3.1 When copying LTR-R size heavy paper, 1st page causes wider lead edge margin (approx. 2mm) or blurred image around 205mm away from image trail edge ......................................................................................................................................................................................15-2 15.2.1.3.2 Between normal copy image and image from In-box, image position displacement occurs in sub scanning direction.....................15-3 15.2.1.4 Partially Blank/Streaked..............................................................................................................................................................................15-3 15.2.1.4.1 Black line appears in sub scanning direction: Because of soiling on cleaning Blade.........................................................................15-3 15.2.1.4.2 Image Lead Edge Blank Spot and Re-Retransfer................................................................................................................................15-4 15.2.1.5 Smudged/Streaked.......................................................................................................................................................................................15-5 15.2.1.5.1 Black line appears (at intervals of separation claw holder) in sub scanning direction up to approx. 80mm away from lead edge of paper: J734 connector on HVT PCB (DC) has poor contact .....................................................................................................................................15-5 15.2.1.5.2 Banding appears in main scanning direction at position about 336mm away from lead edge of A3-size paper on which halftone or solid black image is printed .....................................................................................................................................................................................15-6

15.2.2 Faulty Feeding ......................................................................................................................................................................... 15-7

15.2.2.1 Double-Feed/ Multiple Feed .......................................................................................................................................................................15-7 15.2.2.1.1 When performing A5-size saddle booklet job with Saddle Finsher-V2 in use, poor alignment of pages occurs only with odd-numbered pages................................................................................................................................................................................................................15-7 15.2.2.1.2 Double Feeding is not detected by Double Feeding Detection Kit (optional) ....................................................................................15-8 15.2.2.2 Skew Feed ...................................................................................................................................................................................................15-8 15.2.2.2.1 Punch hole position varies (is unsteady) between output sheets/skew feeding occurs because paper stop position is adjusted incorrectly: Punch Unit-U1.................................................................................................................................................................................................15-8 15.2.2.2.2 Saddle Finisher-V2/V2L causes problem with stack folding position: Staple guide sheet warps......................................................15-8 15.2.2.2.3 Cover skews for book-block when making booklet in no-trimming mode with Perfect Binder-A1 in use: How to adjust skew alignment 15-8 15.2.2.3 Fold/Rip.......................................................................................................................................................................................................15-9 15.2.2.3.1 When using Tab-paper, tab area is folded, causing jam......................................................................................................................15-9 15.2.2.4 Ripple/Curl ..................................................................................................................................................................................................15-9 15.2.2.4.1 When printing on backside of B4-size paper and then outputting it, buckling occurs at one end of paper........................................15-9 15.2.2.5 Wrap ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................15-10 15.2.2.5.1 When stacking large number of booklets, covers of booklets are soiled/booklets fall down from delivery tray of Booklet Trimmer-B1 15-10

15.2.3 Malfunction............................................................................................................................................................................ 15-10

15.2.3.1 Control Panel-Related ...............................................................................................................................................................................15-10 15.2.3.1.1 Blank display occurs after mounting NetWorkMulti-PDL Printer Unit-S1/ImagePASS-S1: Open I/F PCB is connected to wrong connector on Main Controller PCB (iR7105/7095/7086) .............................................................................................................................15-10 15.2.3.1.2 How to clear Finisher cannot be used massage displayed in the touch panel display of the machine equipped with Finisher ....15-11 15.2.3.2 Malfunction/Faulty Detection ...................................................................................................................................................................15-11 15.2.3.2.1 Machine cannot recognize such delivery options as Finisher and so on: Because delivery options are turned on in wrong order .15-11 15.2.3.2.2 Tray B causes malfunction (repeats up-and-down movement)/E542-8001: Finisher Controller PCB of Saddle Finisher-V2L is faulty. 15-12 15.2.3.2.3 In 1-point top-left corner stapling mode, stapling position (rear) of 1st copy set is displaced after performing stapling position

Contents adjustment (rear 1-point stapling) on Finisher.............................................................................................................................................. 15-12 15.2.3.2.4 Finisher-V1/V2 and Saddle Finisher-V2/V2L fails to staple when performing many staple jobs................................................... 15-12 15.2.3.2.5 Misalignment of paper edges occurs with iR7095i equipped with Finisher-V1: At time of paper delivery, Tray B stays at bottom position, and thus output papers slip down that tray..................................................................................................................................... 15-13 15.2.3.2.6 At remote copying (cascade copying), remote copy printer is not displayed/remote copying cannot be performed....................... 15-13 15.2.3.2.7 Hole Punch menu is unavailable : Because DIP SW381 is not set on Optional Switch PCB .......................................................... 15-13 15.2.3.2.8 The machine doesnt activate with the progress bar progresses 1/5, or system can't be installed after HDD replacement due to riser board PCB assembly failure (Expansion Bus-D1/D2).................................................................................................................................. 15-13 15.2.3.2.9 Finisher isnt recognized, after DC controller PCB assembly is replaced (Finisher-V1L) .............................................................. 15-14 15.2.3.3 Noise ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-14 15.2.3.3.1 Abnormal noise, because rubber in press roller comes off (Finisher-V1/V1L/Saddle Finisher-V2/V2L)....................................... 15-14 15.2.3.4 User Warning Message ............................................................................................................................................................................. 15-14 15.2.3.4.1 Message "Check covers are closed." does not disappear: Because J1723 connector on Relay PCB has poor contact.................... 15-14 15.2.3.4.2 Message "Check: Punch tray waste" appears frequently .................................................................................................................. 15-14 15.2.3.4.3 Messages "Load paper." and "Check the side paper deck." are displayed: Deck set sensor (PS105) on Side Paper Deck-X1 causes false detection........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-15 15.2.3.4.4 Message "Load paper." is displayed/040027 Alarm Code: Deck pickup sensor (PS101) on Side Paper Deck-X1 detects lack of intensity 15-15 15.2.3.4.5 Message "Load paper." is displayed/040008 Alarm Code: Connector of deck lifter motor (M102) on Side Paper Deck-X1 has poor contact ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-15 15.2.3.4.6 Message "Load paper." is displayed/040028 Alarm Code: Deck feed sensor (PS106) on Side Paper Deck-X1 detects lack of intensity 15-16 15.2.3.4.7 Message "Load paper." is displayed: Deck paper sensor (PS102) or deck lifter position sensor (PS104) on Side Paper Deck-X1 cause false detection ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-17 15.2.3.4.8 Message "Check: Punch waste tray" is displayed because Punch Dust Box (upper) of Punch Unit-U1/V1/W1/X1 is in incorrect position 15-17 15.2.3.4.9 Message "The Default Key is corrupted or invalid." appears after updating software..................................................................... 15-18 15.2.3.5 Other Defect.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-18 15.2.3.5.1 Description on type of DC voltages output from Relay PCB........................................................................................................... 15-18 15.2.3.5.2 Paper cannot be picked up from Cassette 1: Because J511 connector of DC controller PCB has poor contact .............................. 15-18 15.2.3.5.3 Stapler hangs up while clinching, preventing its cartridge from being pulling out.......................................................................... 15-18 15.2.3.5.4 Stapler hangs up which clinching/E57A-8003 Error Code/Staple cartridge cannot be removed..................................................... 15-19 15.2.3.5.5 Message "The Default Key is corrupted or invalid." is displayed after executing MN-CONT CLEAR ......................................... 15-19 15.2.3.5.6 When adjusting punch hole in "Y" direction, positions of punch holes vary in rear-to-front direction ........................................... 15-19 15.2.3.5.7 Book-block is in uneven condition when making booklet in no-trimming mode with Perfect Binder-A1 in use: How to adjust press amount of alignment plate (front) ................................................................................................................................................................. 15-21 15.2.3.5.8 Cover shifts to top or bottom side for book-block when making booklet in no-trimming mode with Perfect Binder-A1 in use: How to adjust cover horizontal registration position................................................................................................................................................. 15-22 15.2.3.5.9 Cover shifts to left or right side for book-block when making booklet in no-trimming mode with Perfect Binder-A1 in use: How to adjust center position .................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-23 15.2.3.5.10 Book-block is in uneven condition for cover when making booklet with Perfect Binder-A1 in use: How to adjust switch-back amount of book-block (contact time of switch-back rollers)..................................................................................................................................... 15-23 15.2.3.5.11 Amount of glue becomes excessive (insufficiency) at head (tail) edge: How to adjust gluing edge processing (head and tail) of Perfect Binder-A1 ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-24 15.2.3.5.12 Glue area shifts to head side (or tail side): How to adjust gluing start position of Perfect Binder-A1 .......................................... 15-24 15.2.3.5.13 When using Perfect Binder-A1, amount of glue becomes excessive or insufficiency in each thickness of book-block: How to adjust spread glue amount ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-25 15.2.3.5.14 Perfect Binder-A1 causes stack trimming error: How to adjust trimming position ....................................................................... 15-25 15.2.3.5.15 Perfect Binder-A1 causes trimming error: How to change trimming position of trimming blade plate ........................................ 15-26 15.2.3.5.16 Trimming error/alarm "The Perfect Binder's blade needs to be replaced." is not displayed: How to set trimming blade replacement alarm count.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-26 15.2.3.5.17 Trimming error occurs before Perfect Binder displays alarm "The P. Binder's blade receptor needs to be replaced." ................. 15-27 15.2.3.5.18 Perfect Binder-A1 causes trimming perpendicularity error: How to adjust trimming perpendicularity ........................................ 15-27 15.2.3.5.19 Book stacking assembly of Perfect Binder-A1 cannot be pulled out: Waste paper buffer locks in its limit position.................... 15-28 15.2.3.5.20 Machine with main controller software of version earlier than Ver. 41.03 fails to obtain certain MIB object information through SNMP............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-28 15.2.3.5.21 Hard disc (HDD) cannot be formatted: Version of selected Format file is not suitable for HDD ................................................. 15-28 15.2.3.5.22 This machine cannot select paper automatically: Sensor Lever breaks.......................................................................................... 15-29 15.2.3.5.23 Too small amount of glue was applied (Perfect Binder-A1) .......................................................................................................... 15-29 15.2.3.6 Part Breakage/Detachment ....................................................................................................................................................................... 15-29 15.2.3.6.1 When updating the Professional Puncher-A1, FU414 on AC Fuse Box PCB on Finisher-V1/V1L/V2/V2L blows....................... 15-29 15.2.3.6.2 Punch holes are misaligned (in paper feed direction): There is no gap between Back End Stopper and Support Shaft.................. 15-30

15.2.4 Network.................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-32

Contents

15.2.4.1 Ping Failure ...............................................................................................................................................................................................15-32 15.2.4.1.1 Ping Failure: When executing Ping command, message "No response from the host" appears due to WINS configuration error, 15-32 15.2.4.1.2 Ping Failure: When executing Ping command, message "No response from the host" appears due to Ethernet driver configuration error 15-33 15.2.4.2 Connection Problem..................................................................................................................................................................................15-33 15.2.4.2.1 Machine cannot connect to Network: Because [IMG-CONT] has incorrect setting value...............................................................15-33 15.2.4.2.2 RUI becomes unavailable even though the IP address was specified after replacing an old machine with a new one....................15-33

15.2.5 Transmission/fax-related........................................................................................................................................................ 15-34

15.2.5.1 Transmission Problem...............................................................................................................................................................................15-34 15.2.5.1.1 #703 Transmission Error Code is indicated infrequency/Machine hangs up during transmission to PC with SEND function .......15-34 15.2.5.1.2 #755 error code : TCP/IP error causes SMB transmission failure ....................................................................................................15-34 15.2.5.2 Other Operational Defect ..........................................................................................................................................................................15-34 15.2.5.2.1 Method to disable Activity Report/TX Report settings ....................................................................................................................15-34 15.2.5.3 Setting/Registration Defect .......................................................................................................................................................................15-34 15.2.5.3.1 Directory server name does not appear as SMB directory under browse .........................................................................................15-34

15.2.6 Jam (Main Unit) ..................................................................................................................................................................... 15-34

15.2.6.1 Numeral number "51" is indicated on "L (location)" column of Jam History of machine: High Capacity Stacker-A1...........................15-34 15.2.6.2 0101/0114 Jam Code: Right Lock Plate has moved out of place .............................................................................................................15-34 15.2.6.3 0105 Jam Code: Deck Feed Clutch of Side Paper Deck-X1 slips ............................................................................................................15-35 15.2.6.4 0119 Jam Code/Abnormal sound occurs upon installation: Friction between separation (sponge) roller and feed roller found in Manual Feeder is high .....................................................................................................................................................................................................15-35 15.2.6.5 020C Jam Code: Due to malfunction of external delivery sensor flag .....................................................................................................15-35 15.2.6.6 0216 Jam Code: Because spring of Multiple curling prevention sensor lever comes off.........................................................................15-36

15.2.7 Jam (Document Feeder) ......................................................................................................................................................... 15-36

15.2.7.1 0064 Jam Code appears after leaving this machine for long period of time: Pre-reversal flapper of DADF-Q1causes malfunction......15-36 15.2.7.2 0094 Jam Code: Separation sensor (S4) of DADF-Q1 is faulty ...............................................................................................................15-37

15.2.8 Jam (FIN) ............................................................................................................................................................................... 15-37

15.2.8.1 1422 Jam code Saddle Finisher-V2 indicates : Front cover open sensor (PS1) makes false detection ....................................................15-37 15.2.8.2 1004 Jam Code: Because tape that fixes Shift Assembly inside Finisher is not removed........................................................................15-38 15.2.8.3 1004/1103/1721 Jam Code occurs, then 1320 Jam Code occurs when turning Finisher off/ on: Guide rotation shaft of Finisher-V1/V2 is deformed.............................................................................................................................................................................................................15-38 15.2.8.4 1004 Jam Code: Mylar sheet of Finisher-V1/V1L and Saddle Finisher- V2/V2L breaks........................................................................15-39 15.2.8.5 1006 Jam Code: Because transparency is not selected as paper type for Stack Bypass ...........................................................................15-39 15.2.8.6 1109 Jam Code: Paper curled downward comes into contact with surface of paper waiting in Buffer area of Finisher-V1/V1L/V2/V2L 1539 15.2.8.7 1143/114B Jam Code occurs when using LTR-R size paper with Finisher-V2/V2L causes Aligning plate malfunctions .....................15-40 15.2.8.8 1143 Jam Code: Flapper of Finisher-V2/V2l comes off ...........................................................................................................................15-40 15.2.8.9 1145 Jam Code occurs when using A4R-size paper: Timing Belt of Saddle Assembly in Saddle Finisher-V2 slips off ........................15-41 15.2.8.10 1185 Jam Code: Solenoid (SL74) of Paper Folding Unit-D1 is mounted incorrectly ............................................................................15-41 15.2.8.11 11C7 Jam Code: E0005a7-11C7 Drive belt of Trimer-B1 has low tension (Trimmer-B1)....................................................................15-42 15.2.8.12 1320 Jam Code does not disappear upon installation of Saddle Finisher-V2: Connector of Finisher Controller PCB has poor contact ..1543 15.2.8.13 17DE Jam Code (Saddle Finishr-V2 + Booklet Trimmer-B1) ...............................................................................................................15-43 15.2.8.14 17DE Jam Code occurs when performing saddle-stitch jobs continuously (Saddle Finishr-V2 + Booklet Trimmer-B1).....................15-43 15.2.8.15 1F25 Jam Code/ 110D Jam Code occurs when switching job mode from two-sided to one-sided (iR7095i + Perfect Binder-A1 + Saddle Finisher-V2) .......................................................................................................................................................................................................15-44

15.2.9 Error Code.............................................................................................................................................................................. 15-44

15.2.9.1 E003-0000 Error Code: J508 on DC controller PCB has poor contact.....................................................................................................15-44 15.2.9.2 E003-0000 is displayed upon recovery from sleep mode: Noise affects thermistor line..........................................................................15-44 15.2.9.3 E004-0001 Error Code: Main heater has short-circuit ..............................................................................................................................15-44 15.2.9.4 E010-0000 Error Code: Because J1702 connector of Relay PCB has poor contact .................................................................................15-44 15.2.9.5 E012 Error Code: J1721 connector on Relay PCB has poor contact ........................................................................................................15-44 15.2.9.6 E013-0000 Error Code: Because J512 connector on DC controller PCB has poor contact .....................................................................15-45 15.2.9.7 E013-0010 Error Code: Because Error Clear is not executed in service mode ........................................................................................15-45 15.2.9.8 E014-0000 Error Code: Because J1720 connector of Relay PCB has poor contact .................................................................................15-45 15.2.9.9 E020-0009 : Hopper Assembly causes malfunction .................................................................................................................................15-45 15.2.9.10 E025 Error Code: Because Connector on Relay PCB has poor contact .................................................................................................15-45 15.2.9.11 E110-0000 Error Code occurs when progress bar runs its entire length: Because In primary cover is mounted improperly................15-45 15.2.9.12 E110 Error Code: Because J507/J506 of DC controller PCB has poor contact......................................................................................15-46 15.2.9.13 E110-0000 Error Code: Because Relay PCB is faulty............................................................................................................................15-46 15.2.9.14 E110 Error Code occurs because primary corona assembly cover is removed with machine remained supplied with power ..............15-46 15.2.9.15 E121-0002 Error Code: Because J512 on DC controller PCB has poor contact ....................................................................................15-46

Contents

15.2.9.16 E197 Error Code: Because Transfer/Separation Corona Assembly is mounted incorrectly .................................................................. 15-46 15.2.9.17 E197 Error Code: Due to noise of bias applied to Transfer Guide......................................................................................................... 15-47 15.2.9.18 E202 Error Code: Scanner lamp fixing screw is not removed during installation (iR7095).................................................................. 15-47 15.2.9.19 E220 Scanning lamp fails to come on (iR8570N) .................................................................................................................................. 15-48 15.2.9.20 E225-0001 light image: ADJ-S (shading correction data measurement position) setting is incorrect................................................... 15-48 15.2.9.21 E227-0004/E500-0001/E711-0001/E732-0001 Error Code: Due to lack of power capacity (iR7086N equipped with Finisher-V1L) 15-48 15.2.9.22 E500 Error Code: Because procedure taht should be performed after replacement of DC controller PCB is not carried out completely 1549 15.2.9.23 E500-0001/E711-0001 Error Code: Terminator is not connected to signal cable.................................................................................. 15-49 15.2.9.24 E503-0003 Communication error occurs between Professional-A1 and Finisher-V1/V2 ..................................................................... 15-50 15.2.9.25 E505-0001 is shared between Finisher-V1/V2 and Perfect Binder-A1.................................................................................................. 15-51 15.2.9.26 E509-0003 occurs when replacing the master controller on Perfect Binder-A1 .................................................................................... 15-51 15.2.9.27 E532-8001/E566-8002 J805 connector on Upper Door Switch (MSW71) found in Paper Folding Unit-D1 is disconnected .............. 15-51 15.2.9.28 E532-8002/E531-8001 As jammed paper is pulled out, upper part of stapler unit of Finisher-V1/V2 gets stuck................................. 15-52 15.2.9.29 E540-8002 Description on position of Tray A Area Sensor................................................................................................................... 15-52 15.2.9.30 E567-8001 Error Code is indicated upon startup: FU274 of Feeder Motor Driver PCB on Saddle Finisher-V2 blows ....................... 15-52 15.2.9.31 E567-8001 : Due to faulty horizontal shift motor (M7) of Saddle Finisher-V2, fuse (FU274) on Feeder Motor Driver PCB blows... 15-52 15.2.9.32 E578-8001 Error Code/110D Jam Code: Meshing failure occurs between rack and gear of variable lever found in Finisher-V1/V1L/V2/ V2L .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-53 15.2.9.33 E583-8001 is displayed when this machine starts: FU274 on Feeder Motor Driver PCB of Finisher-V1/V2 blows ............................ 15-53 15.2.9.34 E5A4 : caused by locked press ball screw in trimming assembly, Perfect Binder-A1........................................................................... 15-53 15.2.9.35 E5AD-8001 Wire saddle is mounted onto hole for unlocking Book Stacking Assembly of Perfect Binder-A1 ................................... 15-54 15.2.9.36 E5B5-8002/E5AB-8003 occurs because spread glue amount is excessive: How to perform glue amount adjustment (adjustment by stack thickness) on Perfect Binder-A1........................................................................................................................................................................ 15-55 15.2.9.37 E5B5-8013 Registration sensors of Perfect Binder-A1 have poor sensitivity........................................................................................ 15-55 15.2.9.38 E5B5-8017 : due to damage of glew roller cable, Perfect Binder-A1 .................................................................................................... 15-55 15.2.9.39 E5BB-0005 : Spine Plate Closed Sensor (S69) of Perfect Binder-A1 has broken cable wire ............................................................... 15-55 15.2.9.40 E5D4-8007 Error in gluing: Packing tape is not removed during installation of Perfect Binder-A1..................................................... 15-55 15.2.9.41 E5F1-8001 Error code with 104A/114B/147 Jam Code when performing saddle-stitch job using out-of-spec heavy paper on Saddle Finisher-V2 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-56 15.2.9.42 E711-0001 Message "Check the finisher." is displayed: FU414 on AC Fuse Box PCB on Finisher-V1/V1L/V2/V2L blows............. 15-56 15.2.9.43 E721-0061 occurs upon power-on after installing iR7105s V2 and Perfect Binder-A1 ........................................................................ 15-57 15.2.9.44 E730/E503 Error Code occurs with machine equipped with such delivery options as Finisher and so on: Because delivery options are shut down in wrong order.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-57 15.2.9.45 E732 Error Code: Occurs at irregular-size original stream-reading with DADF-Q1 in use .................................................................. 15-57 15.2.9.46 E732-0001 Error Code: Because J1702 connector of Relay PCB has poor contact............................................................................... 15-58 15.2.9.47 E732-0001 Error Code occurs upon installation: Left reader power supply cable has poor contact ..................................................... 15-58 15.2.9.48 E733-0001 Error Code: Poor contact between Main Controller PCB and Video Controller PCB ........................................................ 15-58 15.2.9.49 E748-4910 Error Code: Different Main Controller PCB is mounted ..................................................................................................... 15-58 15.2.9.50 E840 Error Code: J553 connector on DC controller PCB has poor contact........................................................................................... 15-58

15.2.10 Alarm Code.......................................................................................................................................................................... 15-59

15.2.10.1 300003 Alarm Code: Due to foreign substance under charging wire of Transfer/separation Charging Assembly ............................... 15-59

15.2.11 FAX # Code ......................................................................................................................................................................... 15-59

15.2.11.1 #857 FAX Error Code is displayed when printing ................................................................................................................................. 15-59

15.2.12 Specifications-related FAQ.................................................................................................................................................. 15-59

15.2.12.1 FAQ on Main Unit Specifications .......................................................................................................................................................... 15-59 15.2.12.1.1 Assist roller1, 2 and 3 stand off: Finisher/Saddle Finisher............................................................................................................. 15-59 15.2.12.1.2 Description on installation order of optional equipment (for iR7105i/ iR7095i/ iR7086N) .......................................................... 15-59 15.2.12.1.3 Description on installation order of optional equipment ( for iR7086B/ iR7105B) ....................................................................... 15-60 15.2.12.1.4 Description on image centering function in Image Repeat mode................................................................................................... 15-60 15.2.12.1.5 When installing, front side of Main body and Saddle Finisher-V2 do not line up: Because rear and front latch supports are attached in other way round ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 15-60 15.2.12.1.6 When setting Double Staple, Offset function does not work.......................................................................................................... 15-60 15.2.12.1.7 When using tab paper, machine cannot perform Face Up (Reverse) delivery ............................................................................... 15-60 15.2.12.1.8 Punch hole position cannot be adjusted: Punch Unit-U1 ............................................................................................................... 15-60 15.2.12.1.9 How to temporarily disable Punch unit .......................................................................................................................................... 15-61 15.2.12.1.10 Procedure to be performed when punch hole position is moved in horizontal registration direction: Punch Unit-U1................ 15-61 15.2.12.1.11 In ADF copying, copy speed (productivity) varies between manual paper selection mode and auto paper selection mode....... 15-61 15.2.12.1.12 "J20" is indicated on LED display on Finisher Controller PCB, and 1420 Jam Code is recorded as jam history in service mode. 1561 15.2.12.1.13 Description on actual dimension of Machine (including power code) ......................................................................................... 15-61 15.2.12.1.14 Description on service mode item used to switch between stream reading and fized reading..................................................... 15-62

Contents

15.2.12.1.15 Procedure performed after replacing EEPROM (IC107) on Finisher Controller PCB.................................................................15-62 15.2.12.1.16 How to initialize EEPROM (IC107) on Finisher Controller PCB found in Finisher-V1/V2 .......................................................15-63 15.2.12.1.17 Description on settings that are cleared when upgrading System Software .................................................................................15-64 15.2.12.1.18 Counter values of Perfect Binder-A1 (PB-A1) do not appear on P-PRINT printouts generated from this machine ...................15-64 15.2.12.1.19 In Transparency (OHT) Interleaving mode, plain paper is not inserted between transparencies: High Volume Stack Mode is set to ON .................................................................................................................................................................................................................15-65 15.2.12.1.20 Perfect Binder-A1 fails to perform simplex-printing booklet job sent from printer driver ..........................................................15-65 15.2.12.1.21 Necessary step upon changing paper size in side paper deck-X1 .................................................................................................15-65 15.2.12.1.22 Settings to accept print job and remote scan job with unknown IDs ............................................................................................15-65 15.2.12.1.23 Function of LED of main controller PCB assembly .....................................................................................................................15-65 15.2.12.2 FAQ on LIPS Specifications...................................................................................................................................................................15-66 15.2.12.2.1 How to transfer License Option (LMS) ..........................................................................................................................................15-66

15.3 Outline of Electrical Components............................................................................................................................15-66

15.3.1 Clutch/Solenoid...................................................................................................................................................................... 15-66
15.3.1.1 Clutches.....................................................................................................................................................................................................15-66 15.3.1.2 Solenoids ...................................................................................................................................................................................................15-68

15.3.2 Motor...................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-68

15.3.2.1 Motors .......................................................................................................................................................................................................15-68

15.3.3 Fan.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-70

15.3.3.1 Fans ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................15-70

15.3.4 Sensor..................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-72

15.3.4.1 Sensor (reader) ..........................................................................................................................................................................................15-72 15.3.4.2 Sensor 1 .....................................................................................................................................................................................................15-73 15.3.4.3 Sensor 2 .....................................................................................................................................................................................................15-76

15.3.5 Switch .................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-76

15.3.5.1 Switches ....................................................................................................................................................................................................15-76

15.3.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others ................................................................................................................................................... 15-77

15.3.6.1 Heaters, Lamps, and Others ......................................................................................................................................................................15-77

15.3.7 PCBs ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-78

15.3.7.1 PCBs..........................................................................................................................................................................................................15-78

15.3.8 Connectors ............................................................................................................................................................................. 15-81

15.3.8.1 Connectors.................................................................................................................................................................................................15-81

15.3.9 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB............................................................... 15-88
15.3.9.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB ..................................................................................15-88 15.3.9.2 Main controller PCB .................................................................................................................................................................................15-88 15.3.9.3 Main controller PCB (up graded version) .................................................................................................................................................15-89 15.3.9.4 DC controller PCB ....................................................................................................................................................................................15-89

Chapter 15

15.1 Making Initial Checks

15.1.1 Checking the Side of Installation
Check the site of installation against the following requirements: a. The voltage of the power supply must be as rated (-/+ 10%). The power plug must remain connected day and night. b. The site must not be subject to high temperature/humidity (near a water faucet, water boiler, humidifier). The machine must not be installed in a cold place or in an area near a source of fire or subject to dust. c. The site must not be subject to ammonium gas. d. The site must not be subject to direct rays of the sun. As necessary, curtains must be provided. e. The site must be well ventilated. f. The machine must be kept level. g. The machine must remain powered throughout the night.
0010-9364

15.1.2 Checking the Originals

Check the originals to find out whether the problem is caused by the originals used or is in the machine: a. The copy density setting is optimum at 5 -/+ 1. b. If the original has a reddish background, copies can suffer poor contrast. MEMO: Red sheets, slips, and the like. c. The density of the original can have the following effects: MEMO: if the original is a diazo copy or is rather transparent, copies can be mistaken as being "foggy." if the original is prepared in pencil, copies can be mistaken as being "too light."
0010-9365

15.1.3 Checking the Copyboard Cover, Copyboard Glass, and Standard White Plate
Check the copyboard cover, copyboard glass, and standard white plate for dirt or scratches. If dirt is found, clean it with a solution of mild detergent or alcohol; if a scratch is found, on the other hand, replace it.
0010-9367

15.1.4 Checking the Charging Assemblies

a. Check the charging assemblies for dirt and a faulty charging wire. b. Clean the charging wire and the shielding plate of the charging assemblies. (If dirt cannot be removed, replace it.) c. Check the type and height of the charging wire. d. Check to make sure that the changing assemblies are firmly fitted. e. Check the charging wire spring for rusting. f. Check the charging wire cleaning pad (of each charging assembly) for displacement.
0010-9368

15.1.5 Cheiking the Develop Unit

a. Check to make sure that the rolls on both ends of the developing assembly are in contact with the drum. b. Check to make user that the surface of the developing cylinder is coated with an even layer of toner. c. Check the connectors between the developing assembly and the machine for connection. d. Check to make sure that <DEV-SLOW> of the following in service mode in '2': COPIER > OPTION > BODY.
0010-9369

15.1.6 Checking the Paper

a. Check to see if the paper is a type recommended by Canon. b. Check to see if the paper is moist. Try paper fresh out of package.
0010-9370

15.1.7 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts

Check with the Periodical Servicing Chart and the Periodically Replaced Parts Table, and replace those parts that have reached the end of their lives.
0010-9371

15.1.8 Others
In winter, bringing a machine from a cold to warm place can cause the inside of the machine to develop condensation, leading to various problems. MEMO: a. Condensation in the scanning system (glass, mirrors, lenses) will produce darker images. b. Condensation in the charging system will cause electrical leakage. c. Condensation on the pickup/feeding guide will cause feeding faults. If condensation is found, dry wipe the part or leave the machine alone and powered for 60 min.
0010-9372

If the density is uneven (different between front and rear) or the image is too light or is foggy, perform the "Image Adjustment Basic Procedure" in advance.

15.2 Troubleshooting
15.2.1 Image Faults 15.2.1.1 Light Image/Weak Density 15.2.1.1.1 Light image:Because J510 connector on DC controller PCB has poor contact
[ Case in the field ] Description In the field, light image occurred because J510 connector on the DC controller PCB had poor contact. Field Remedy When light image occurred after re-fitting connectors on the DC controller PCB for a service work, check J510 connector for bad connection.
0013-2006

15-1

Chapter 15

15.2.1.2 Uneven Density 15.2.1.2.1 White spots (dots or stars form) appearing on solid black image
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the field, approx. 0.5 mm white spots (dots or stars form) [A] appeared on a solid black image . When the same symptom occurs, follow the steps below.
0022-3504

Cause When the main power switch is turned OFF or ON, or when the host machine wakes up from the sleep mode (low rate of power saving in sleep), the laser control signal becomes unstable, which causes the laser to be emitted and radiated to the surface of photosensitive drum altough the drum and the polygon mirror are in the stop condition. Field Remedy 1. Check the DC Controller version, if it is before Ver.34.01, follow the steps below. 2. During version upgrade, to intercept the light path outputted by the laser caused by instabillity of the laser controller signal, remove the primary charging assembly front cover [1] by removing the screw [2].

3. Upgrade the DC Controller Software to Ver.34.01 or later. 4. Install the primary charging assembly front cover removed on the step 2. 5. Check the image, if the symptom still occurs, replace the photosensitive drum with a new one.

15.2.1.3 Image Displacement/Out of Focus 15.2.1.3.1 When copying LTR-R size heavy paper, 1st page causes wider lead edge margin (approx. 2mm) or blurred image around 205mm away from image trail edge
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description When making copies continuously using LTR-R-size heavy paper, the following symptom occurred with the 1st page: lead edge margin became approx. 2mm wider than usual, or blurred image occurred approx. 205mm away from the image trail edge. In this inspection case, these symptoms were solved by feeding about 100 sheets of paper, and since then it did not reappear. Cause When paper reached the registration roller, it failed to stop to form an arch because of its hardness, making its way under the roller a little. Additionally, shock was caused when the paper went out of the roller. Field Remedy As for the machines with the following serial numbers, the bushing [2] and tension roller [3] were changed to improve the breaking force in paper feed direction of the registration roller [1].
0016-3762

15-2

Chapter 15

F-15-1

When the same symptom occurs with a machine having a serial number earlier than below, perform the procedure a. or b. below. a. Feed approx. 100 sheets of paper, and then check to see if the symptom is solved; if solved, use the machine as it is. b. Replace the bushing and tension spring with the new type at the same time. After mounting a new tension spring, fix it with a bonding material to prevent it from coming off. FC7-7265 Registration Collar (Lower) FC7-7266 Tension Spring - Serial number information iR7086 (208V UL): SJD11030 and later / iR7086 (230V AU): SJF00053 and later iR7095 (208V UL): SHX11745 and later / iR7095 (230V A/B): SHY00093 and later / iR7095 (230V AU): SHZ00021 and later / iR7095 (220V CN): SJB00013 and later / iR7095P (230V AU): SJJ00008 and later / iR7095 Printer (208V UL): SJG10042 and later iR7105 (208V UL): SHS10868 and later / iR7105 (230V EUR): SXK00629 and later / iR7105 (230V GB): SXL00192 and later / iR7105 (230V A/B): SHT00081 and later / iR7105 (230V AU): SHU00052 and later / iR7105 (220V CN): SHV00017 and later

15.2.1.3.2 Between normal copy image and image from In-box, image position displacement occurs in sub scanning direction
[ Case in the field ] Description When comparing the position of image copied in a normal manner with an A3-size original in use to that of image generated after the same original was scanned to an In-box, approx. 2mm-displacement was seen in the sub scanning direction. When a customer points out a similar symptom, refer to the field remedy below and make adjustments to the position of normal copy image with reference to the position of image from the In-box. Field Remedy Make adjustments by means of the service mode items [BLANK-T] and [BLANK-B] under Service Mode > COPIER > Adjustment > BLANK, and [RESIST] under Service Mode > COPIER > Adjust > FEED-ADJ. - BLANK-T: used for the image lead edge non-image width adjustment. The adjustable range is between '0' to '2362'. Increasing the value will increase the non-image width. - BLANK-B: used for the image trail edge non-image width adjustment. The adjustable range is between '0' to '2362'. Increasing the value will increase the non-image width. - RESIST: used for the registration roller clutch activation timing adjustment. The adjustable range is between '-100' and '100' (unit: 0.1mm). Increasing the value will delay the registration roller activation timing and decrease the non-image width at the lead edge.
0018-4978

15.2.1.4 Partially Blank/Streaked 15.2.1.4.1 Black line appears in sub scanning direction: Because of soiling on cleaning Blade
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since toner had existed on the photosensitive drum [2] because of the soiling on the edge of the cleaning blade [1], the black line [4] appeared in the sub scanning direction (in the paper traveling direction [3]).
0013-5115

F-15-2

15-3

Chapter 15

F-15-3

Field Remedy 1. Make a reduction copy, and check to see if the black line shifts in relation to the output image (so as to find out whether or not this symptom is attributed to the scanning systems). Or perform a test printing in service mode. 2. If the black line remains in the same position even on the output image, check to see if a soling is on the cleaning blade; if any,remove it. A scratch on the photosensitive drum or a soiling on the primary corona assembly is also conceivable as a cause event of test printing. 3. If the black line shifts on the output image, suspect a fault of the scanning system, and check to see if a soiling is on the optical system.

15.2.1.4.2 Image Lead Edge Blank Spot and Re-Retransfer

Symptom Explanation The fault is an image lead edge white spot associated with re-transfer. It occurs when paper is not of a recommended type. Symptom Cause Paper not of a recommended type tends to have appreciable variation in regard to thickness and surface resistance. Combined with the changes occurring in the site environment, it can adversely affect the separation current, leading to re-transfer. Spot Disposal Go through the following flow chart to correct the fault:
Start
0011-8875

What is the type of paper used?

In the case of tracing paper

In the case of plain paper Perform remedy 1.

Perform remedy 3.

Is re-transfer noted? No Yes End

No

Is re-transfer noted?

End

Yes Perform remedy 2.

Perform remedy 4.

End
F-15-4

Remedy 1 1) Increase the setting in negative direction by '1' for the following service mode item (developing AC bias frequency setting): COPIER > OPTION > BODY > ACFRQNY. 2) Make prints. If the fault is not corrected, increase the setting in negative direction by another '1'. 3) Repeat steps 1) and 2) until the fault (re-transfer) is corrected. range of settings: +5 to -5 (default: 0) change by '1' : 0.1 kHz

15-4

Chapter 15 Reference: Using this service mode item, you can decrease the developing AC bias frequency, thereby decreasing the amount of toner deposit and, consequently, correcting re-transfer.

If the foregoing remedy fails to correct re-transfer on a Japanese model, go through the following: 1) Increase the setting of the following in service mode by 5 steps in positive direction (post-exposure output adjustment): COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED > PRETR. 2) Make prints. If no improvement is noted, increase the setting by another 5 steps in positive direction. 3) Repeat steps 1) and 2) until improvement is noted. range of settings: 20 to 80 (default: 50) change by '1': 1% Reference: Using this service mode item, you can increase the post-exposure level, thereby decreasing the drum surface potential and, consequently, correcting re-transfer. Remedy 2 1) Set '2' to the following in service mode (switchover of fixing temperature control level): COPIER > OPTION > BODY > TEMP-TBL. 2) Make prints. If no improvement is noted, set '3'. 3) Make prints. If no improvement is noted, set '4'. range of settings: 0 to 4 (default: 0) change by '1': -5 deg C Reference: Using this service mode item, you can decrease the fixing temperature level, thereby reducing curl for the 1st side for a print and, consequently, correcting re-transfer for the 2nd side.

Do not set '1' for this service mode item. Doing so will change the fixing temperature level in positive direction, worsening the re-transfer. Remedy 3 1) Change the setting of the following in service mode by 1 step in negative direction (tracing paper/recycled paper developing AC bias frequency setting): COPIER > OPTION > BODY > ACFRQ-R. 2) Make prints. If improvement is not noted, change the setting by 1 step once again in negative direction. 3) Repeat steps 1) and 2) until improvement is noted. range of settings: +5 to -5 (default: 0) change by '1' : 0.1 kHz Reference: Using this service mode item, you can decrease the AC bias frequency, thereby reducing the toner deposit and, consequently, correcting re-transfer. Remedy 4 1) The degree of re-transfer may vary between the face and the back of tracing paper. Try turning over the paper. 2) If the foregoing step fails, try changing the feed direction (to cross-feed direction), thus changing the grain direction and, possibly, eliminating re-transfer.

15.2.1.5 Smudged/Streaked 15.2.1.5.1 Black line appears (at intervals of separation claw holder) in sub scanning direction up to approx. 80mm away from lead edge of paper: J734 connector on HVT PCB (DC) has poor contact
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since J734 connector of the HVT PCB had poor contact, a black line appeared (at intervals of the separation claw holder) in the sub scanning direction up to approx. 80mm away from the lead edge of paper. When the same symptom occurs, perform the following field remedy.
0015-8674

F-15-5

15-5

Chapter 15 Cause Because of the poor contact of J734 connector, paper failed to separate from the drum, and was transported while being rubbed against the rib of the separation claw holder [A].

F-15-6

Field Remedy 1. Check to see the mounting condition of the transfer/separation corona assembly. 1-1. Slide out the fixing/feeder assembly, and then check if the transfer/separation corona assembly [1] moves up and down smoothly within its movable range [2].

F-15-7

1-2. If the transfer/separation corona assembly does not move smoothly, loose the screw [4] of the fixing bracket [3] and move the bracket to the position where the corona assembly can move smoothly; then tighten the screw again. 2. Re-ft J734 connector on the HVT PCB. 3. If the symptom still occurs, suspect an output failure of the HVT PCB and replace the PCB by a new one. Note: After replacing the HVT PCB, enter the values (5 values) in the label on the PCB into the following service mode: - COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > H-PRE-TR - COPIER > Adjust > HV-TR > HVT-TR - COPIER > Adjust > HV-SP > HVT-SP - COPIER > Adjust > DEVELOP > HVT-DE - COPIER > Adjust > DEVELOP > OFFSETAC FM2-4351 HVT PCB Assembly

15.2.1.5.2 Banding appears in main scanning direction at position about 336mm away from lead edge of A3-size paper on which halftone or solid black image is printed
[ Case in the field ] Description When outputting a halftone image or a solid black image with A3-size paper, banding [1] appeared at the position about 336mm away from the lead edge of the paper.
0019-8263

15-6

Chapter 15

F-15-8

Cause Depending of the type of used paper, a physical shock is caused when the paper enters the fixing roller. This shock affects the image formed on the drum during transfer, causing the symptom. Field Remedy So that paper can enter into the fixing nip portion smoothly, make an adjustment in accordance with the following steps. 2. Draw a mark-off line [4] along the top edge of respective height adjustment plate [3] before making an adjustment. 3. Loosen the screw [5] in each side of the height adjustment plate, and adjust the height of the entrance guide [6] by moving it up (within 2mm) or down (within 1mm); then re-tighten the screw [5]. 4. Insert the fixing assembly back into this machine. 5. Run a test printing to check to see if the banding in question disappears; if not, repeat the steps above to fix the entrance guide at the position where the banding disappears.

F-15-9

15.2.2 Faulty Feeding 15.2.2.1 Double-Feed/ Multiple Feed 15.2.2.1.1 When performing A5-size saddle booklet job with Saddle Finsher-V2 in use, poor alignment of pages occurs only with odd-numbered pages
[ Case in the field ]
0016-9910

15-7

Chapter 15 Description Since poor alignment of pages occurred in an A5-size saddle booklet job, the following field remedy was performed for solution. In this field case, the symptom occurred only with the odd-numbered pages. (i.e., the symptom does not occur with the even-numbered pages.) Cause When sheets were fed into the buffer unit, the edges were shifted. Field Remedy 1. In service mode > SORTER > Option > BUFF-SW, change the setting to '1' (default: '0') to deactivate the buffer control. 2. Check to see if the symptom is solved. 3. Although the productivity of this machine is somewhat decreased, if the user does not complain, see how things go for a while. If the user does not permit the decrease in the productivity, reset the setting for [BUFF-SW] to '0', and then adjust the degree of misalignment of paper stack. Reference: As for adjustment of paper stack, refer to the service manual of the Saddle Finisher-V2 [Maintenance > Adjustment > Adjustment at Time of Parts Replacement > Adjusting the Delivery of Stapled Stacks (saddle delivery)].

15.2.2.1.2 Double Feeding is not detected by Double Feeding Detection Kit (optional)
[ Case in the field ] Description In the field, double feed was not detected in the machine equipped with Double Feeding Detection Kit (Optional). When the similar symptom occurs, follow the steps below. [Reference] The machine uses the ultra-sonic wave sensor (for transmission, reception) located in the front of the registration roller to check for double feeding, and stops the ongoing printing operation upon detection. Ultrasonic waves are often characterized as follows, and may be used for the detection of double feeding regardless of the type of medium used (plain paper, heavy paper, colored paper, transparency, etc.). - propagation is subject to significant attenuation between different densities (e.g., air and paper). -propagation is free of attenuation in regard to the color or thickness of the object being checked. Field Remedy Check in Service Mode > COPIER > Option > BODY > OVLP-MD, if it is set as 1 : enabledA set is as 0 : disabled.
0023-1959

15.2.2.2 Skew Feed 15.2.2.2.1 Punch hole position varies (is unsteady) between output sheets/skew feeding occurs because paper stop position is adjusted incorrectly: Punch Unit-U1
[ Case in the field ] Description Since the period of time during which paper was fed through the paper path was set longer at the paper stop position adjustment, the paper was fed far away from the stopper and its trailing edge failed to reach the stopper at time of switchback operation (i.e., the paper arch was not created), causing variation in punch hole position between output sheets. Field Remedy Referring "Adjusting the Paper Stop Position", adjust the paper stop position so that the sufficient amount of paper arch can be created at time of switchback operation. Note: Too small amount of paper arch will not allow the edges of output sheets to be flush while too large amount of paper arch will cause a paper jam.
0013-4916

15.2.2.2.2 Saddle Finisher-V2/V2L causes problem with stack folding position: Staple guide sheet warps
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since the staple guide sheet on the saddle staple unit of the Saddle Finisher warped, the stack folding position misaligned when selecting the saddle stitch mode. In some cases, changing the height of the edge stopper assembly of the paper positioning plate solved the symptom. When the symptom occurs, perform the following field remedy. To prevent this symptom, the factory determined to adopt a warp-less staple guide sheet. In addition, it decreased the length of the sheet by 0.9mm. Starting the Finisher units with the following serial numbers, the factory is using this new type guide sheet. - Saddle Finisher-V2 (200V): TG00037 - Saddle Finisher-V2L (100V): TG00041 Field Remedy 1. Special Features > Booklet > select 'A4' as the original size > Book-opening Direction > select 'A3' as the paper size > Do not saddle stitch > set '1' as the number of copy > make a booklet without saddle stitch binding (i.e., no stapling). 2. Check to see how the front and rear edges of the folded paper misaligns.
0014-1505

F-15-10

3. If the edges misalign widely, go through the procedure described in the attached "Procedure For Correcting Misaligned Stack Folding Position of Saddle Finisher." FC6-6610 Staple Guide Sheet

15.2.2.2.3 Cover skews for book-block when making booklet in no-trimming mode with Perfect Binder-A1 in use: How to adjust skew alignment
[ Manual-related ]
0015-8162

15-8

Chapter 15 Description In case that a cover skews for a book-block, adjust the positioning plate of the cover horizontal registration unit by referring to the following field remedy. The procedure below is for correcting skew alignment, and is performed when the cover horizontal registration unit is replaced or the cover skews for the book-block.

F-15-11

Field Remedy 1. Remove the inner cover (lower). 2. Loosen the screw [1], and adjust the position of the positioning plate [2] of the cover horizontal registration unit. Fig. [C] is a top view of the cover transport unit.

F-15-12

- To adjust the cover in the direction of [A], adjust the positioning plate in the direction of [a]. - To adjust the cover in the direction of [B], adjust the positioning plate in the direction of [b]. 3. After adjustment, tighten the screw [1] to secure the positioning plate [2] in place; then attach the inner cover.

15.2.2.3 Fold/Rip 15.2.2.3.1 When using Tab-paper, tab area is folded, causing jam
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description When using a Tab-paper, its tab area caught on the edge of the back end stopper holes (and the area was folded), causing a jam. To prevent this, the edge sheets (paper guides) are attached to the back end stopper hole (front/rear) of the Punch Units with the following serial numbers. - Punch Unit-U1: TGZ00375 and later - Punch Unit-V1: THB01214 and later - Punch Unit-W1: THC00080 and later - Punch Unit-X1: THD00015 and later
0014-5674

Field Remedy When the symptom occurs with a Punch Unit having a serial number earlier than the above, attach the edge sheet (front/rear) to the back end stopper holes of the Punch Unit by referring to the attached "Prevention of Folded Tab: Procedure for Attaching Edge Sheet." The workflow is as follows: 1. Detach the Punch Unit from the Finisher. 2. Remove all the parts mounted above the back end stopper holes. 3. Affix the edge sheet (front/rear) to the back end stopper holes. 4. Mount all the parts removed in Step2, and then return the Punch Unit to the Finisher. FC6-6212 Sheet, Front FC6-6221 Sheet, Rear

15.2.2.4 Ripple/Curl 15.2.2.4.1 When printing on backside of B4-size paper and then outputting it, buckling occurs at one end of paper
[ Case in the field ] Description Since (heavy) buckling occurred on rare occasions at one end of B4-size paper when printing an image on the backside of the paper and then outputting it, the white roller with a collar (FB5-3410) was replaced by the black inside delivery roller with no collar (FB5-8729), which is found in the inner delivery upper assembly, to reduce the symptom.
0020-2441

15-9

Chapter 15 Field Remedy When the user complains about a similar symptom, replace the white roller with a collar by the black inside delivery roller without a collar. Note: This remedy will reduce the buckling but affect the decurling capability of this machine. FB5-8729 Inside Delivery Roller

15.2.2.5 Wrap 15.2.2.5.1 When stacking large number of booklets, covers of booklets are soiled/booklets fall down from delivery tray of Booklet Trimmer-B1
[ Case in the field ] Description When a large number of finished booklets [A] were stacked on the conveyer section at the time of printing 40 booklets consisting of A4-size paper continuously, the finished booklets had a soiling on their covers or fell down from the delivery tray [B].
0018-1262

F-15-13

Reference: According to the specifications of the Booklet Trimmer-B1, the capacity of delivery tray is 30 booklets (A4-size, 40 sheets, 80g/square meter). However, the conveyer full detection is based on the detection result of the sensor (PI13) mounted on the conveyer section, not the number of booklets delivered: that is, depending on the number of pages or the type of paper used for one booklet, more than 30 booklets can be delivered to the delivery tray. Cause Since a large number of finished booklets were delivered to the conveyer section as a result of printing many booklets continuously, the pressure applied to the finished booklets by the delivery transport roller [C] and the transport belt [D] was increased, causing a soiling to the covers of finished books. Field Remedy When the same symptom occurs, introduce any of the following procedures a. and b. to the user. a. Set the number of booklets to be printed to 30 books or less. b. Remove the delivery tray [B] from the conveyer section. This will prevent a large number of the finished booklets from being stacked on the conveyer section. Note: Negative effects caused by removal of delivery tray - The performance of stacking/aligning the finished booklets cannot be guaranteed. - The finished booklets fall down at time of continuous printing. To prevent this, it is recommended to set a container or a box [E] on a table like [F] so that the finished booklets will be collected.

F-15-14

15.2.3 Malfunction 15.2.3.1 Control Panel-Related 15.2.3.1.1 Blank display occurs after mounting NetWorkMulti-PDL Printer Unit-S1/ImagePASS-S1: Open I/F PCB is connected to wrong connector on Main Controller PCB (iR7105/7095/7086)
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ]
0014-5371

15-10

Chapter 15 Description Blank display occurred because, in the process of mounting the NetWorkMulti-PDL Printer Unit-S1/imagePASS-S1, the Open I/F PCB was mounted as shown in [3] after the Expansion Bus-D1 [2] was connected to the Main Controller PCB [1]; then the main power switch of this machine was turned ON.

F-15-15

Cause When mounting the Open I/F PCB, the upper side connector of the Expansion Bus-D1 was used instead of the lower side connector, causing the 5V line of the Main Controller PCB to have a short-circuit. Field Remedy 1. Check to see if the Open I/F PCB is connected to the lower side connector of the Expansion Bus as shown in [4].

F-15-16

2. If the PCB is connected to the upper connector, re-connect it to the lower connector. 3. If the symptom still occurs, suspect a short-circuit on the Main Controller PCB, and replace the PCB by a new one. FM2-7517 Main Controller PCB (for iR7105) FM2-5423 Main Controller PCB (for iR7079/7086 FM2-5424 Main Controller PCB Assembly (for iR7095P)

15.2.3.1.2 How to clear Finisher cannot be used massage displayed in the touch panel display of the machine equipped with Finisher
[ Case in the field ] Description To clear Finisher cannot be used massage in the touch panel display in the machine equipped with Finisher, go through the following steps. [Reference] Finisher limited function is a mode set so that the function is not used temporarily, e.g. when the finisher is broken. And [Limited Functions Mode] is displayed only if an optional finisher is attached. Field Remedy Additional Functions > Common Settings > Limited Functions Mode, change to OFF, and turn the main power switch OFF/ON.
0022-9051

15.2.3.2 Malfunction/Faulty Detection 15.2.3.2.1 Machine cannot recognize such delivery options as Finisher and so on: Because delivery options are turned on in wrong order
[ Manual-related ] Description Depending on the power-on order of delivery options such as the Finisher and so on, the main body cannot communicate with them, consequently, failing to recognize them. Field Remedy
0012-9484

15-11

Chapter 15 When turning ON the main body and delivery options, follow the order below: 1. High-capacity Stacker and Finisher (in random order) 2. Professional Puncher (non-Japanede model only) 3. Main body

15.2.3.2.2 Tray B causes malfunction (repeats up-and-down movement)/E542-8001: Finisher Controller PCB of Saddle Finisher-V2L is faulty
[ Case in the field ] Description Since the following symptom a. or b. occurred, the Finisher Controller PCB was replaced by a new one for solution. a. In case that an error is not indicated When the main power switch of the main body is turned ON, tray B of the finisher moves near the home position, repeats up-and-down movement for 30 sec. while looking for the home position, goes down to the bottom position; and then, the main body starts up normally, and go into ready state. If copies are made in this situation, output papers fall down because tray B stays at the bottom position. b. In case that an error is indicated The error code "E542-8001" is indicated after tray B repeats up-and-down movement for about 30 sec. as in the same manner mentioned in a. above. - E542-8001 can be displayed when the tray B rotation sensor does not go on within 300 msec after the start-up of the tray B lift motor. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, perform the following procedure. 1. Re-fit all the connectors of the Finisher Controller PCB. 2. Re-fit the connector of the tray B lift motor rotation sensor (PS35). 3. Clean the tray B paper surface sensors (UN17: light-emitting, and UN18: light-receiving), and then re-fit the connectors of these sensors. 4. If the symptom still occurs, replace the Finisher Controller PCB by a new one. FM2-5695 Finisher Controller PCB Assembly
0015-3072

15.2.3.2.3 In 1-point top-left corner stapling mode, stapling position (rear) of 1st copy set is displaced after performing stapling position adjustment (rear 1-point stapling) on Finisher
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description When making multiple copy sets in 1-point top-left corner stapling mode after performing the stapling position adjustment (rear 1-point), the stapling position of the first copy set was displaced widely to the rear side compared to the second and third copy sets. (The distance between the stapling position and the edge of the copy set was changed from [A] to [B].) In this field case, the adjustment value was set to '+18'.
0015-9279

F-15-17

Cause Since the adjustment value was too big, a malfunction occurred when the stapler unit moved to the rear stapling position. Field Remedy 1. When the stapling position varies depending on copy sets after the stapling position adjustment (rear 1-point), check to see the adjustment value. 2. If the adjustment value is over the range between '-5' and '+5', set at a value within the range between '-5' and '+ 5' so that the stapling position will be within 5mm +/- 2mm (specified value). Cause Since the adjustment value was too big, a malfunction occurred when the stapler unit moved to the rear stapling position.

15.2.3.2.4 Finisher-V1/V2 and Saddle Finisher-V2/V2L fails to staple when performing many staple jobs
[ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Description A Finisher unit that was performing many staple jobs failed to staple the printed pages although the staple mode was selected. In this field case, no error code was displayed when this symptom occurred. Cause Since many staple jobs were performed, the arm inside the stapler assembly wore out and broke. To prevent this, the strength of the arm was increased. Field Remedy Check the arm shown in the attached image for breakage; if it has been broken, replace the stapler assembly with the one of which arm is strengthened.
0016-5484

15-12

Chapter 15

F-15-18

FM2-6541 Stapler Assembly

15.2.3.2.5 Misalignment of paper edges occurs with iR7095i equipped with Finisher-V1: At time of paper delivery, Tray B stays at bottom position, and thus output papers slip down that tray
[ Case in the field ] Description Since Tray B of a Finisher unit descended more than required at the start of paper delivery operation and therefore output paper slipped down that tray, a sensor of the Finisher unit was adjusted for solution. Cause A paper face sensor adjusted for any reason with electric noise always detected that papers were present on Tray B. Field Remedy 1. Adjust the sensor intensity with reference to the "Adjusting the Sensor Intensity", and then make copies. 2. If the symptom reappeared immediately after Step 1, adjust the sensor intensity again.
0019-7603

15.2.3.2.6 At remote copying (cascade copying), remote copy printer is not displayed/remote copying cannot be performed
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the field, remote copying was not performed in the environment where 3 units of iR7105s were connected to a network because the version of those 3 units differed. Reference: If a remote copy printer (iR7105i/iR7095i/iR7086N/iR7105B/iR7086B) is connected to a network, the original scanned by this machine can be printed by the remote printer (remote copying) or simultaneously by this machine and the remote printer (cascade copying). In order to register a remote printer, register the IP address of the printer in the remote copy printer registration screen under Additional Functions > Copy Settings. Cause Because of a specification constraint on cascade copying, an iR7105s V1 unit cannot be registered as a remote copy printer to an iR7105s V2 unit (local printer). Field Remedy In order to perform remote (or cascade) copying in the combination use of V2 unit and V1 unit, upgrade the software of all the associated units as follows: - SYSTEM (MN-CONT): Ver. 50.00 or later - DCCONT (DC-CON): Ver. 30.00 or later Note: Some job modes cannot be used in remote or cascade copying. For more detail, please refer to [Copying and Mail Box Guide > Introduction to the Copy Function > Flow of Copy Operations].
0020-1289

15.2.3.2.7 Hole Punch menu is unavailable : Because DIP SW381 is not set on Optional Switch PCB
[ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the Hole Punch menu was not available in Additional Functions on the Punch Unit-U1 equipped machine. When the same symptom occurs, go through the following steps : Field Remedy 1. Check the type of connected punch unit. 2. If the connected punch unit is Punch Unit-U1, turn on bit1 of DIP SW 381 on the Optional Switch PCB on the finisher. Reference: Regarding the other punch units, set the appropriate bit(s) of DIP SW381 as follows: - Punch Unit-U1 (2-hole): turn bit1 ON - Punch Unit-V1 (2/3-hole): turn bit2 ON - Punch Unit-W1 (4-hole: FRANCE): turn bit3 ON - Punch Unit-X1 (4-hole: SWEDEN): turn bit 1 and 2 ON
0022-3497

15.2.3.2.8 The machine doesnt activate with the progress bar progresses 1/5, or system can't be installed after HDD replacement due to riser board PCB assembly failure (Expansion Bus-D1/D2)
[ Case in the field ] Description In the field, in the machine equipped with Expansion Bus-D1/D2, the machine didnt activate with the progress bar progressed to 1/5, or the system couldnt be installed after HDD was replaced. The symptom persisted although BootROM was replaced. When the similar symptom occurs, follow the steps below.
0023-1966

15-13

Chapter 15 Field Remedy Replace the riser board PCB assembly of Expansion Bus-D1/D2 with a new one. FM2-5430 RISER BOARD PCB ASS'Y

15.2.3.2.9 Finisher isnt recognized, after DC controller PCB assembly is replaced (Finisher-V1L)
[ Case in the field ] Description In the field, after DC controller PCB assembly was replaced in the machine equipped with finisher, the finisher wasnt recognized. When the similar symptom occurs, follow the steps below. Field Remedy 1. Service Mode > COPIER > Option > ACCPST-D > ACC, between 1 to 8, select the item where intended option is indicated. 2. Check to find out the position of the accessory with reference to the host machine, and type in the number indicating its order. 3. Press the OK key. 4. Turn OFF the main power switch of the machine and the options. 5. Turn ON first the power switch of the options, then the main power switch of the machine.
0023-0902

15.2.3.3 Noise 15.2.3.3.1 Abnormal noise, because rubber in press roller comes off (Finisher-V1/V1L/Saddle Finisher-V2/V2L)
[ Case in the field ] Description In the field, because the rubber in the press roller (FU5-6515) had come off, the squeaky voice occurred during operation. When the symptom occurs, follow the steps below. Field Remedy 1. Check the press roller of the press roller movement assembly. 2. If the rubber in the press roller comes off, replace the press roller with a new one. Please note that the parts number for the press roller has changed from FU56515 to FC9-3043. FC9-3043 PRESS ROLLER
0022-3502

15.2.3.4 User Warning Message 15.2.3.4.1 Message "Check covers are closed." does not disappear: Because J1723 connector on Relay PCB has poor contact
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since a connector on the relay PCB had poor contact, the message "Check covers are closed." did not disappear. Field Remedy When the symptom has occurred, refit J1723 connector on the relay PCB. FM2-4350 Relay PCB Assembly
0013-3989

15.2.3.4.2 Message "Check: Punch tray waste" appears frequently

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description The message "Check: Punch tray waste." appeared frequently although the punch tray was not full.
0014-1030

F-15-19

Cause The clearance made when the punch tray was mounted to the puncher unit caused a false detection of the punch waste detection sensor. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, adjust the intensity of the punch waste detection sensor by referring to the attached "Procedure for Adjusting the Intensity of the Punch Waste Detection Sensor". When performing this procedure, it is important to pull over the punch waste tray to the right side viewed from the front side of the machine (i.e., the main body side) to remove the clearance on this side. This is the temporary remedy (as of May 1, 2006), and modifications will be made to remove the clearance around the punch waste tray as the permanent remedy. FM2-6422: Paper Dust Sensor Unit

15-14

Chapter 15

15.2.3.4.3 Messages "Load paper." and "Check the side paper deck." are displayed: Deck set sensor (PS105) on Side Paper Deck-X1 causes false detection
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since the deck set sensor (PS105) caused a false detection, the message "Load paper." was displayed although paper was placed on the paper deck. In the status line on the LCD control panel, the message "Check the side paper deck." was displayed. When this symptom occurs, perform the following field remedy. Reference: Sensor layout drawing Field Remedy 1. Service mode > COPIER > I/O > DC-CON > P027 > check if the value of bit10 changes between '1' and '0' depending on the connection/disconnection of the paper deck. (1: connection, 0: disconnection) 2. If the value does not change, check the sensor flag of PS105, and re-fit the connectors. If the symptom still occurs, replace the sensor by a new one. FH7-7312 Photointerrupter
0015-2591

15.2.3.4.4 Message "Load paper." is displayed/040027 Alarm Code: Deck pickup sensor (PS101) on Side Paper Deck-X1 detects lack of intensity
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since the deck pickup sensor (PS101) detected lack of intensity, a code "040027" was recorded as an alarm history in service mode, and the message "Load paper." was displayed although paper was placed on the paper deck. When this symptom occurs, perform the following field remedy. - 040027 Alarm Code can be recorded when lack of intensity of the side paper deck pickup sensor is detected. Field Remedy 1. Make the following selections in sequence and check to see if the alarm code "040027" is recorded: [Service mode > COPIER > Display > ALARM-2]. 2. If the code is recorded, refit the connector of PS101.
0015-2763

F-15-20

3. Check to see if the prism [1] or the emission and reception parts of the sensor [2] of PS101 are soiled or displaced; if soiled or displaced, clean or reposition them.

F-15-21

4. If the symptom still occurs, replace PS101 by a new one. FG6-8605 Optical Sensor PCB Assembly

15.2.3.4.5 Message "Load paper." is displayed/040008 Alarm Code: Connector of deck lifter motor (M102) on Side Paper Deck-X1 has poor contact
[ Case in the field ] Description Since the lifter of the side paper deck caused a malfunction, a code "040008" was recorded as an alarm history in service mode, and the message "Load paper." was displayed although paper was placed on the paper deck. When this symptom occurs, perform the following field remedy. - 040008 Alarm Code can be recorded when the side paper deck lifter does not work. Field Remedy 1. Make the following selections in sequence and check to see if the alarm code "040008" is recorded: [Service mode > COPIER > Display > ALARM-2].
0015-3243

15-15

Chapter 15 2. If the code is recorded, check to see if the drive wire [1] of the deck lifter runs off; if so, re-fit it.

F-15-22

3. Re-fit J22 connector of the deck lifter motor (M102) [2] . 4. If no problem was found in Step 2 and 3, re-fit all the connectors of the large deck driver PCB. 5. If the symptom still occurs, replace the deck lifter motor (M102) and the large deck driver PCB by new ones in this order. FH6-1241 DC Motor FM1-0131 Large Deck Driver PCB Assembly

15.2.3.4.6 Message "Load paper." is displayed/040028 Alarm Code: Deck feed sensor (PS106) on Side Paper Deck-X1 detects lack of intensity
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since the deck feed sensor (PS106) detected lack of intensity, a code "040028" was recorded as an alarm history in service mode, and the message "Load paper." was displayed although paper was placed on the paper deck. When this symptom occurs, perform the following field remedy. Reference: When lack of intensity is detected at time of opening/closing the front cover of the main body or turning OFF/ON the main power switch in a state in which the deck set sensor (PS105) is set to '1', the alarm code "040028" is recorded. If this code is solved, the machine displays a message meaning "no paper." Field Remedy 1. Make the following selections in sequence and check to see if the alarm code "040028" is recorded: [Service mode > COPIER > Display > ALARM-2]. 2. If the code is recorded, make the following selections, and check to make sure that the value of bit10 does not change from '1' regardless of attachment/ detachment of the paper deck: [Service mode > COPIER > I/O > DC-CON > P027]. 3. If the value of the bit does not change from '1', check the sensor flag of PS105, and re-fit the collector. If the symptom still occurs, replace the sensor by a new one.
0015-3301

F-15-23

4. Re-fit the connector of PS106. 5. Check to see if the prism [1] of PS106 or the emission and reception parts of the sensor [2] are soiled or displaced; if soiled or displaced, clean or reposition them.

15-16

Chapter 15

F-15-24

Reference: The prism is on the guide plate (location of the white rollers) lower left of the deck. Therefore, the position of the prism varies between when the deck is connected to the main body and when it is disconnected. 6. If the symptom still occurs, replace PS106 by a new one. FH7-7312 Photointerrupter FG6-8605 Optical Sensor PCB Assembly

15.2.3.4.7 Message "Load paper." is displayed: Deck paper sensor (PS102) or deck lifter position sensor (PS104) on Side Paper Deck-X1 cause false detection
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since the deck paper sensor (PS102) or the deck lifter position sensor (PS104) caused a false detection, the message "Load paper." was displayed although paper was placed on the paper deck. When this symptom occurs, perform the following field remedy. Reference: In cases that PS102 is off and PS104 is on, a message meaning "no paper" is indicated. Field Remedy 1. Service mode > COPIER > I/O > DC-CON > P027 > check if the value of bit1 changes from '0' to '1' when the lifter ascends and stops. (1: absent of paper, 0: present of paper) 2. Service mode > COPIER > I/O > DC-CON > P027 > check if the value of bit2 changes from '0' to '1' when the lifter ascends and stops. (1: pickup position, 0: out of pickup position) 3. If the values of the bits do not change in Step 1 and 2, check the sensor flags of PS102 and PS104, and then re-fit all the connectors. If the symptom still occurs, replace the sensors by new ones.
0015-3309

F-15-25

FK2-0149 Photointerrupter

15.2.3.4.8 Message "Check: Punch waste tray" is displayed because Punch Dust Box (upper) of Punch Unit-U1/V1/W1/X1 is in incorrect position
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description There was a case where the message "Check: Punch waste tray" persisted in the status line on the LCD control panel even though the punch dust box was not filled with punch wastes.
0020-1911

15-17

Chapter 15

Cause When mounting the punch chip case, the flag [2] of the punch dust box (upper) [1] failed to be in the normal position, and thus, the punch chip case sensor (PS40) [3] failed to detect it. Field Remedy When the above-mentioned symptom occurs, loosen the 6 screws that fix the punch dust box (upper) [1], and move the box in the direction of the arrow [A] by the distance of the screw hole play; then tighten the screw to fix the box so that the flag [2] can be detected by the punch chip case sensor (PS40) [3].

F-15-26

FC6-6337 Punch Dust Box (Upper)

15.2.3.4.9 Message "The Default Key is corrupted or invalid." appears after updating software
[ Case in the field ] Description Since the message "The Default Key is corrupted or invalid." appeared after updating software, the setting of a service mode item was changed for solution. When the same symptom occurs, perform the following field remedy. Field Remedy Service Mode (Level 2) > COPIER > Function > CLEAR > CA-KEY > OK > turn the main power switch OFF/ON.
0022-1205

15.2.3.5 Other Defect 15.2.3.5.1 Description on type of DC voltages output from Relay PCB
[ Manual-related ] Description The relay PCB outputs the following voltages: 5V, 24V, and 38V. When the machine causes malfunctions related to these voltages, check the connectors on the relay PCB for poor contact before replacing parts.
0013-3960

15.2.3.5.2 Paper cannot be picked up from Cassette 1: Because J511 connector of DC controller PCB has poor contact
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since J511 connector (for the pick-up solenoid) of the DC controller PCB had poor contact, paper was not picked up from the cassette 1. Field Remedy When a pick-up failure occurs after re-fitting connectors of the relay PCB during a service work, check J511 connector of the PCB for poor contact.
0013-4911

15.2.3.5.3 Stapler hangs up while clinching, preventing its cartridge from being pulling out
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the field, a technician tried to remove the cartridge from the stapler unit on account of idle stapling. However this attempt failed because the stapler hung up while clinching.
0014-0169

15-18

Chapter 15 Cause When a stapler-related error occurs, the stapler hangs up while clinching, possibly preventing the cartridge from being removed from the stapler unit even when the staple unit is detached from the Finisher successfully. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, turn the main power switch OFF and then ON before removing the stapler unit. This will initialize the stapler unit, and thus releasing the stapler from the clinching condition.

15.2.3.5.4 Stapler hangs up which clinching/E57A-8003 Error Code/Staple cartridge cannot be removed
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description When the error code E57A-8003 was indicated due to a malfunction in the stapler, a technician tried to remove the stapler unit from the Finisher for examination, but failed because the stapler hung up while clinching, preventing the cartridge from being removed from the staper unit. - E57A-8003 can be displayed when the paper end stopper comes into cantact with the stapler, and thus fails to operate at intiation of movement. Cause When a stapler-related error occurs, the stapler hangs up while clinching, possibility preventing the cartridge from being removed from the stapler unit even when the stapler unit is detached from the Finisher successufully. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, turn the main power switch OFF and then ON before removingthe stapler unit. This will initialize the stapler unit, and thus releasing the stapler from the clinching condition.
0014-0171

15.2.3.5.5 Message "The Default Key is corrupted or invalid." is displayed after executing MN-CONT CLEAR
[ Manual-related ] Description When MN-CONT CLEAR is executed, the default key and certificate will be corrupted, and the message "The Default Key is corrupted or invalid." is displayed. When this message appears, perform the following field remedy. Field Remedy Service mode (Level 2) > COPIER > Function > CLEAR > CAKEY > OK. Note: Executing [CAKEY] will reset the default keys and certificates to the settings at time of factory shipment. If the user added any keys and certificates, set them again.
0014-4428

15.2.3.5.6 When adjusting punch hole in "Y" direction, positions of punch holes vary in rear-to-front direction
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description When adjusting the punch holes in the "Y" direction, the positions of punch holes varied in the rear-to-front direction. When the symptom occurs, perform the following field remedies according to occurrence conditions.
0015-2785

F-15-27

Cause When the edge of paper extends off the area where the Finisher can cover in the horizontal registration detection, the Finisher falsely detects the position of the paper edge, and changes the offset value at the shift assembly. In this field case, the symptom might be caused in this mechanism. Field Remedy a. When the position of punch holes varies depending on paper sources, adjust the horizontal registration of a paper source that causes variation of punch hole positions. b. When the position of punch holes varies with [PUNC-Y] set at '-2' b-1. Disconnect the Finisher from the main body. b-2. Loosen the 2 screws [2] of the positioning plate [1] on the right side, move the plate in the direction of [A] by 1 or 2 scales, and then, tighten the screws [2].

15-19

Chapter 15

F-15-28

b-3. If the Paper Folding Unit is connected, remove the front and rear covers from the Unit, and then disconnect the Unit from the main body. b-4. Loosen the 2 screws [2] of the positioning plate [1] on the right side, move the plate in the direction of [A] by 1 or 2 scales, and then tighten the screws [2].

F-15-29

b-5. Loosen the 2 screws [2] of the positioning pin [1] on the right side, move the plate in the same direction by the same scales as in Step 4, and then tighten the screws [2].

F-15-30

b-6. Connect the Finisher to the main body and check the position of the punch holes. (If the Paper Folding Unit was connected, mount the covers removed in Step b-3 to the original positions.) c. When the position of punch holes varies with [PUNC-Y] set at '-5' c-1. Disconnect the Finisher from the main body c-2. Loosen the 2 screws [2] of the positioning plate [1] on the right side, move the plate in the direction of [A] by 3 scales, and then tighten the screws [2].

15-20

Chapter 15

F-15-31

c-3. If the Paper Folding Unit has been connected, remove the front and rear covers from the Unit, and then disconnect the Unit from the main body. c-4. Loosen the 2 screws [2] of the positioning plate [1] on the right side, move the plate in the direction of [A] by 3 scales, and then tighten the screws [2].

F-15-32

c-5. Loosen the 2 screws [2] of the positioning pin [1] on the right side, move the plate in the same direction by the same scales as in Step c-4, and then, tighten the screws [2].

F-15-33

c-6. Connect the Finisher to the main body, and check the position of the punch holes. (If the Paper Folding Unit was connected, mount the covers removed in Step c-3 to the original positions).

15.2.3.5.7 Book-block is in uneven condition when making booklet in no-trimming mode with Perfect Binder-A1 in use: How to adjust press amount of alignment plate (front)
[ Manual-related ] Description In case that the book-block is in an uneven condition [A] for the cover, either the service mode items [ALG-F-A4/L] in this machine side or the Dip SW on the Service PCB in the Perfect Binder can be used to solve the symptom.
0015-8326

15-21

Chapter 15

F-15-34

Field Remedy As for adjustments a. and b. below, increasing the setting value increases the press amount of the alignment plate, and decreasing it decreases the amount. The adjustment a. or b., whichever is performed later, takes effects. a. Adjustments by means of service mode items of this machine (recommended) - Adjustment range: -3 to 3mm, Display value: -30 to 30 (1= 0.1mm) a-1. For the small size (The width of paper is less than 298mm) Adjust the following mode: [Service mode > SORTER > Adjust > ALG-F-A4]. a-2. For the large size (she width of paper is 298mm or more) Adjust the following mode: [Service mode > SORTER > Adjust > ALG-F-L]. b. Adjustment by means of Dip SW on the Service PCB found in the Perfect Binder (refer to "Alignment Plate Shift Adjustment." Reference: This is the mode to adjust the press amount of the alignment plate when the book-block is stacked on the stacking tray, and is performed when the following parts are replaced or the book-block is in an uneven condition on the tray for any reason. - Master Controller PCB Note: When the old EEP-ROM (IC9) is transferred to a new Master Controller PCB, it's not necessary to perform the field remedy above. - EEP-ROM (IC9) on the Master Controller PCB.

15.2.3.5.8 Cover shifts to top or bottom side for book-block when making booklet in no-trimming mode with Perfect Binder-A1 in use: How to adjust cover horizontal registration position
[ Manual-related ]
0015-8585

F-15-35

Description In case that a cover shifts to the top or bottom for a book-block, either the service mode items [SV-REG-L/S] in this machine side or the Dip SW on the Service PCB in the Perfect Binder@can be used to solve the symptom. The above-mentioned 2 items are used to adjust the cover horizontal registration position. When the following parts are replaced, or the horizontal registration of a cover is shifted for any reason, perform an adjustment by referring to the field remedy below. - Master Controller PCB Note: When the old EEP-ROM (IC9) is transferred to a new Master Controller PCB, it is not necessary to perform the following adjustments. - EEP-ROM (IC9) on the Master Controller PCB Field Remedy As for adjustments a. and b. below, increasing the setting value moves the cover to the front side, and decreasing it moves the cover to the rear side. The adjustment a. or b., whichever is performed later, takes effects.

15-22

Chapter 15

F-15-36

a. Adjustments by means of service mode items of this machine (recommended) - Adjustment range: -5 to 5mm, Display value: -50 to 50 (1= 0.1mm) a-1. For the large size Adjust the following mode: [Service mode > SORTER > Adjust > CV-REG-L]. a-2. For the small size Adjust the following mode: [Service mode > SORTER > Adjust > CV-REG-S]. b. Adjustment by means of Dip SW on the Service PCB found in the Perfect Binder (refer to "Cover Horizontal Registration Position Adjustment."

15.2.3.5.9 Cover shifts to left or right side for book-block when making booklet in no-trimming mode with Perfect BinderA1 in use: How to adjust center position
[ Manual-related ] Description In case that a cover shifts to the left or right side for a book-block (i.e., in case that the cover stop position shifts to the left or right side before gluing), either the service mode item [CV-CENT] in this machine side or the Dip SW on the Service PCB in the Perfect Binder@can be used to solve the symptom.
0015-8682

F-15-37

Field Remedy As for adjustments a. and b. below, increasing the setting value moves the cover to the succeeding equipment side, and decreasing it moves the cover to the host machine side. The adjustment a. or b., whichever is performed later, takes effects. a. Adjustments by means of the service mode item of this machine (recommended) a-1. Service mode > SORTER > Adjust > CV-CENT. - Adjustment range: -5 to 5mm, display value: -50 to 50 (1=0.1mm) b. Adjustment by means of Dip SW on the Service PCB of the Perfect Binder (refer to "Cover Center Position Adjustment." Reference: This is the mode to adjust the center position of the cover. When the following parts are replaced, or the center position of the cover is shifted for any reason, perform the above-mentioned field remedy. - Master Controller PCB Note: When the old EEP-ROM (IC9) is transferred to a new Master Controller PCB, it's not necessary to perform the field remedy above. - EEP-ROM (IC9) on the Master Controller PCB.

15.2.3.5.10 Book-block is in uneven condition for cover when making booklet with Perfect Binder-A1 in use: How to adjust switch-back amount of book-block (contact time of switch-back rollers)
[ Manual-related ] Description In case that the book-block is in an uneven condition [A] for the cover, either the service mode item [CLCT-SB] in this machine side or the Dip SW on the Service PCB in the Perfect Binder can be used to solve the symptom.
0015-8689

15-23

Chapter 15

F-15-38

Field Remedy As for adjustments a. and b. below, increasing the setting value increases the switch-back amount for the book-block, and decreasing it decreases the amount. The adjustment a. or b., whichever is performed later, takes effects. a. Adjustment by means of the service mode item of this machine (recommended) a-1. Service mode > SORTER > Adjust > CLCT-SB. - Adjustment range: -5 to 5mm, Display value: -50 to 50 (1=0.1mm) b. Adjustment by means of Dip SW on the Service PCB of the Perfect Binder (refer to "Stacking Switchback Shift Adjustment." Reference: This is the mode to adjust the switch-back amount for the book-block when it is stacked on the stacking tray. When the following parts are replaced or the book-block is in an uneven condition for any reason, go through the procedure above. - Master Controller PCB Note: When the old EEP-ROM (IC9) is transferred to a new Master Controller PCB, it's not necessary to perform the field remedy above. - EEP-ROM (IC9) on the Master Controller PCB.

15.2.3.5.11 Amount of glue becomes excessive (insufficiency) at head (tail) edge: How to adjust gluing edge processing (head and tail) of Perfect Binder-A1
[ Manual-related] Description In case the amount of glue applied to the head (tail) edge [A] is insufficiency or excessive, adjust the area excluded from glue spread at the head and tail edge.
0015-9912

F-15-39

- The gluding edge processing (head and tail) is performed to adjust the area excluded from glue spread at the front side (tail edge) or the rear side (head edge). Field Remedy The area excluded from glue spread can be set for the head and tail separately in both the trimming and no-trimming modes. When adjusting, refer to the attached procedure. - Incresing the setting value will increase the area excluded from glue spread. - Decreasing the setting value will decrease the area excluded from glue spread.

15.2.3.5.12 Glue area shifts to head side (or tail side): How to adjust gluing start position of Perfect Binder-A1
[ Manual-related ] Description In case that the glue area has been shifted to the head side (or the tail side) [A], adjust the gluding start position.
0015-9918

15-24

Chapter 15

F-15-40

- The gluing start position adjustment is performed to move the whole glue area to the front side or the rear side. Field Remedy Referring the attached procedure, adjust the start position for spreading glue. - Increasing the setting value will move the gluing start position to the front side. - Decreasing the setting value will move the gluing start position to the rear side. - The adjustment range is '-8' to '8', and the display value is '-80' to '80' (Display value1 = 0.1mm). Reference: It becomes easy to confirm by making the sample with the no trimming mode.

15.2.3.5.13 When using Perfect Binder-A1, amount of glue becomes excessive or insufficiency in each thickness of bookblock: How to adjust spread glue amount
[ Manual-related ] Description When the spread glue amount is improper at the thick coating operation (when the glue vat moves from the front side to the rear side), adjust the distance between the spine of the block and the drop stick of the glue vat. - The thickness of the book-block is divided into six groups. It is possible to adjust the spread glue amount for each group with the following procedure. (The thickness of the book-block doesn't contain the cover.) Reference: The thickness of the book-block is judged by the value that is detected by the stack thickness volume sensor in the man gripper assembly. Field Remedy Go through the procedure described in the attachment. - Increasing the setting value will increase the spread glue amount. (The distance between the spine and the drop stick becomes long.) - Decreasing the setting value will decrease the spread glue amount. (The distance between the spine and the drop stick becomes short.) - The adjustment range is '-1' to '1' (unit: mm) and the display value is '-20' to '20' (1= 0.05mm) Note: If the glue amount is excessive, the overflowed glue may cause a failure at the gluing process of the trimming process. Keep to the glue amount within the abovementioned. - E5B5-8002 can be displayed when the book-block adheres to the main gripper. - E5AB-8003 can be displayed when the cut waste adheres to the trimming blade.
0016-0225

15.2.3.5.14 Perfect Binder-A1 causes stack trimming error: How to adjust trimming position
[ Manual-related ] Description In case of a stack trimming error, the trimming position can be adjusted with the service modes SIZE-H, SIZE-W, and CV-LNG in the copier side, or DIP SW on the Service PCB of the Perfect Binder, as well as user mode. Any setting configured at the last will take effect. - There are the following 3 types of stack trimming errors. 1. Trimmed size in the spine-to-fore edge direction (feed direction) is incorrect [1]. 2. Trimmed size in the top-to-bottom direction (width direction) is incorrect [2]. 3. Trimming position is shifted to the top or tail edge direction [3].
0016-3731

F-15-41

Note: The settings of service modes and DIP SW link with the use mode setting. Be sure not to change any setting without consent of the user. The minimum trimming width is 6mm. If the trimming width is set to less than 6mm in this procedure, the trimming width will be 6mm. Field Remedy a. Adjustment by means of service modes of the copier - Adjust range is 5 to 5mm, display value is 50 to 50 (1=0.1mm). a-1. In case the aforementioned symptom "1" has occurred, change the setting value in Service Mode > SORTER > Adjust > SIZE-H. a-2. In case the aforementioned symptom "2" has occurred, change the setting in Service Mode > SORTER > Adjust > SIZE-W. In Step a-1. and a-2. above, increasing the setting will increase the trimmed size, and decreasing the setting will decrease the trimmed size.

15-25

Chapter 15

F-15-42

a-3. In case the aforementioned symptom "3" has occurred, change the setting in Service Mode > SORTER > Adjust > CV-LNG. Increasing the setting will move the trimming position to the bottom side, and decreasing it will move to the top side.

F-15-43

b. Adjustment by means of DIP SW on the Service PCB of the Perfect Binder (Refer to "Trimming Position Adjustment.") Reference: This adjustment is to correct stack trimming errors by changing the trimming position. Perform this adjustment after any of the following parts has been replaced or when stacks are trimmed at positions different for their settings. - Master Controller PCB Note: There is no need to make this adjustment if the old EEPROM (IC9) has been moved to the new Master Controller PCB. - EEPROM (IC9) mounted on the Master Controller PCB.

15.2.3.5.15 Perfect Binder-A1 causes trimming error: How to change trimming position of trimming blade plate
[ Manual-related ] Description When the active trimming position of the trimming blade plate reachs the end of life before the trimming blade plate usage count setting is satisfied for reasons of an accident or the type of paper used by user, changing the trimming position to the next position forcedly may solve the symptom. When changing the trimming position, perform the following field remedy. Field Remedy Referring to "Trimming Blade Plate Usage Position Setting", change the trimming position. (Setting range: 0 to 5; default: 0) - Increasing the setting will bring an unused trimming position. - Decreasing the setting will bring a used trimming position. (Normally, not used.) Note: When changing the trimming position, pay attention to the following: - If the setting is changed, the usage count of the trimming blade plate is reset. - Be sure to increase the setting only by 1 (e.g., if the current setting is '2', change it to '3'.) - Be sure not to decrease the setting. Decreasing the setting will bring a used position, possibly causing a trimming error.
0016-3740

15.2.3.5.16 Trimming error/alarm "The Perfect Binder's blade needs to be replaced." is not displayed: How to set trimming blade replacement alarm count
[ Manual-related ] Description In case of the following a. b. or c, change the trimming blade replacement alarm timing by referring to the attached "Trimming Blade Replacement Alarm Count Setting."
0016-3756

15-26

Chapter 15 a. In case the Master Controller PCB or EEP-ROM (IC9) on the PCB is replaced with a new one. Note: There is no need to adjust the trimming blade replacement alarm count when the old EEP-ROM (IC9) is moved to the new Master Controller PCB. b. In case a trimming error occurs even after replacement of the trimming blade plate (the trimming blade replacement alarm is no displayed although the trimming blade seems to reach the end of life). c. In case the trimming blade replacement alarm is displayed earlier than the life of the trimming blade. Field Remedy The display timing of the alarm in question can be changed with DIP SW on the Service PCB of the Perfect Binder. - If the setting is increased, the timing of alarm is postponed. - If the setting is decreased, the timing of alarm is advanced.

15.2.3.5.17 Trimming error occurs before Perfect Binder displays alarm "The P. Binder's blade receptor needs to be replaced."
[ Manual-related ] Description When a trimming error has occurred before the trimming blade replacement alarm "The P. Binder's blade receptor needs to be replaced." is displayed, perform the following field remedy. Field Remedy 1. Referring to "Trimming Blade Plate Usage Position Setting", adjust the trimming blade plate position. - Increasing the setting will bring an unused position. - Decreasing the setting will bring a used position. (Normally, not used) 2. When a trimming error occurs prior to the trimming blade replacement alarm although the trimming blade plate position has been changed, suspect mismatch of the trimming blade plate usage count setting, and change the setting by referring to "Trimming Blade Plate Usage count Setting." (Setting range: 100 to 1000; setting interval: 10; default: 550) - Increasing the setting will increase the usage count. - Decreasing the setting will decrease the usage count.
0016-3759

15.2.3.5.18 Perfect Binder-A1 causes trimming perpendicularity error: How to adjust trimming perpendicularity
[ Manual-related ] Description In case perpendicularity is not established in trimmed bindings, adjust the amount of trimming rotation by means of service modes 10RGT-1, 10RGT-2, 10RGT-3, 200RGT-1, 200RGT-2, and 200RGT-3 of the copier, or DIP SW on the Service PCB of the Perfect Binder. Because the amount of trimming rotation required varies depending on the stack volume and weight, make this adjustment to suit each trimming position in a mix of two different stacks (10sheet stack and 20-sheet stack). The perpendicularity of trimmed bindings can also be adjusted in user mode. And any setting configured at the last takes effect. Note: The setting of aforementioned service modes and DIP SW link with the user mode setting. Be sure not to change any setting without consent of the user.
0016-3760

F-15-44

Field Remedy a. Adjustment by means of service modes of the copier Increasing the setting will increase the amount of trimming rotation, and decreasing it will decrease the amount. Adjustment range is 10 to 10mm, and display value is 100 to 100 (1=0.1mm).

F-15-45

a-1. 10-sheet stack perpendicularity adjustment data 1 (L1) Change the setting in Service Mode > SORTER > Adjust > 10RGT-1. a-2. 10-sheet stack perpendicularity adjustment data 2 (L1) Change the setting in Service Mode > SORTER > Adjust > 10RGT-2. a-3. 10-sheet stack perpendicularity adjustment data 3 (L3) Change the setting in Service Mode > SORTER > Adjust > 10RGT-3.

15-27

Chapter 15 a-4. 200-sheet stack perpendicularity adjustment data 1 (L1) Change the setting in Service Mode > SORTER > Adjust > 200RGT-1. a-5. 200-sheet stack perpendicularity adjustment data 2 (L2) Change the setting in Service Mode > SORTER > Adjust > 200RGT-2. a-6. 200-sheet stack perpendicularity adjustment data 3 (L3) Change the setting in Service Mode > SORTER > Adjust > 200RGT-3. b. Adjustment by means of DIP SW on the Service PCB of the Perfect Binder (Refer to "Trimming Perpendicularity Adjustment.") Reference: Perform this adjustment after any of the following parts has been replaced or when perpendicularity is not established in bindings for some reason. - Master Controller PCB Note: There is no need to make this adjustment if the old EEPROM (IC9) has been moved to the new Master Controller PCB. - EPROM (IC9) mounted on the Master Controller PCB

15.2.3.5.19 Book stacking assembly of Perfect Binder-A1 cannot be pulled out: Waste paper buffer locks in its limit position
[ Manual-related ] Description When the waste paper buffer locks in its limit position, and preventing the book stacking assembly from being pulled out for an accidental reason, for example, waste paper adheres to the trimming blade, and then gets into the space between the trimming assembly and the waste paper buffer, slide out the book stacking assembly in the way mentioned below. Field Remedy 1. Turn off the power switch of both copier and the Perfect Binder, and then unplug the power cords of both units. 2. Slide out the waste paper unit, and then take out the waste paper case. 3. Insert a screwdriver into a hole of 5.5mm in diameter on the inner cover (lower), and then turn the waste buffer drive pulley [2] anti-clockwise to move the waste paper buffer to the right. - Movement of the waste paper buffer can be confirmed from movement of the waste paper full detection lever [3] that operates together with the buffer. The waste paper buffer has to be moved until the lever [3] moves behind the hole [1]. Reference: When waste paper blocks off movement of the waste paper buffer, move the waste paper buffer to the left once to drop the stuck waste paper, and then move it to the right.
0016-3761

F-15-46

4. Insert a small screwdriver into the hole on the rear cover, and turn it in the direction of the arrow to unlock the book stacking assembly lock; then draw out the book stacking assembly.

F-15-47

15.2.3.5.20 Machine with main controller software of version earlier than Ver. 41.03 fails to obtain certain MIB object information through SNMP
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the field, an iR7086 unit (with the main controller software of Ver. 40.06) failed to obtain the following two pieces of MIB object information through SNMP. -MIB object infomration ifInOctets .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1 ifOutOctets .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16.1 Field Remedy Check the version of the main controller software. If it is earlier than Ver. 41.03, upgrade the software to Ver. 41.03 or later.
0019-6623

15.2.3.5.21 Hard disc (HDD) cannot be formatted: Version of selected Format file is not suitable for HDD
[ Case in the field ]
0019-8260

15-28

Chapter 15 Description When installing a new hard disc drive and then formatting its hard disc with SST, an error occurred (in the SST side) and formatting ended in failure. Cause The version of selected Format file was not suitable for that hard disc drive.
T-15-1 Format File Ver.0007 Ver.0006 Ver.0005 HDD HTS542580K9SA00 HTS541640J9AT00 WD400VE-00KWT0 WD400VE-00HDT0 MP0402H MHV2040AH MK4032GAX HTS541040G9AT00 MK4025GAS HTS424040M9AT00

Field Remedy 1. Check the version number of the Format file that has been loaded in SST; if it is earlier than Ver. 0007, load a Format file of Ver. 0007 or later. Reference: This Format file is shared with iR5075/5065/5505 series. 2. Using SST, format the hard disc drive again.

15.2.3.5.22 This machine cannot select paper automatically: Sensor Lever breaks
[ Case in the field ] Description In a machine equipped with an ADF unit, the paper feeder flame cover [A] allowed the sensor lever [B] to escape out of its slanted, sensor lever-sliding area to the rear side of the ADF unit, and thereby giving load to the lever. This caused the lever to break, ultimately leading to auto paper selection failure. When the same symptom occurs, follow the procedure below.
0021-0768

Field Remedy Check if the sensor lever has been broken; if so, replace it with a new one. At the same time, replace the paper feeder flame cover with a new type one. Reference: The new type paper feeder frame cover has a wider sensor-lever sliding area to prevent the lever escaping. FC5-2882 Sensor Lever FC5-3218 Paper Feeder Flame Cover

15.2.3.5.23 Too small amount of glue was applied (Perfect Binder-A1)

[ Case in the field ] Description In the field, too small amount of glue was applied during binding in the host machine equipped with Perfect Binder-A1. When the same symptom occurs, go through the following steps : Field remedy 1. Visually check the stack registration guide, clean the glue waste if necessary. 2. After cleaning, recheck the condition.
0022-3499

15.2.3.6 Part Breakage/Detachment 15.2.3.6.1 When updating the Professional Puncher-A1, FU414 on AC Fuse Box PCB on Finisher-V1/V1L/V2/V2L blows
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description When updating the Professional Puncher-A1 that is connected to the iR7105 together with the Saddle Finisher-V2, FU414 (rating: 2.5A) [1] on the AC Fuse Box PCB of the Finisher blew. When the symptom occurs, perform the following field remedy.
0014-9736

15-29

Chapter 15

F-15-48

Cause Since the Puncher side connector [2] of the communication cable (D-SUB) connecting the Puncher and the Finisher was re-fit or disconnected with the power switch of the Finisher being ON, a short-circuit was caused between 5V pin and GND. Note: When turning ON the Finisher, be sure not to disconnect or re-fit the communication cable. Also, be sure that the connectors of the cable are fixed securely with the setscrews [3]. Reference: [4] is the connector for downloading software.

F-15-49

Field Remedy 1. Turn the Finisher OFF. 2. Replace the AC Fuse Box PCB of the Finisher by a new one. 3. Lock the connection connectors (anti-loosening measure) so that the communication cable is connected firmly. 4. Turn the Finisher ON. If it is necessary to update the Professional Puncher, update it in this state. FM2-5700 AC Fuse Box PCB Assembly

15.2.3.6.2 Punch holes are misaligned (in paper feed direction): There is no gap between Back End Stopper and Support Shaft
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description The position of the front and rear punch holes were misaligned by about 2 to 3mm like [B] in relation to the paper feed direction [A]. (This symptom especially tends to occur in the following combination of job modes: different size original mode, Z-hold mode, and two-point staple mode.)
0022-5281

Cause Because of burrs on the back end stopper [1] or peeled plating, the gap between the stopper and the support shaft [2] was eliminated, preventing the area [5] of the stopper from contacting the die [4] flatly when the stopper pivoted on the axis [3] to return by the force of the spring. (The absence of the gap prevented the phase difference between the front and rear stoppers from being eliminated.)

15-30

Chapter 15

Starting the units with the following serial numbers, the factory is checking the gap between the back end stopper and the support shaft when assembling the back end stopper. - Punch Unit-U1: TGZ00375/ Punch Unit-V1: THB01229/Punch Unit-W1: THC00080/ Punch Unit-X1: THD00015 Field Remedy a. When the symptom occurs with a unit having a serial number earlier than the above, and it is not solved by performing the punch hole position adjustment, go through the following procedure to check the gap between the back end stopper and the support shaft. a-1. With the turn arm [1] turned in the direction of the arrow [A] a little, move the back end stopper [2] in the directions of the arrow [B], and check to see if there is a gap between the stopper and the support shaft [3].

a-2. If there is no gap, remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the stopper plates [2] (front/ rear) together with the mounts.

a-3. Remove the screw [1] on both sides, and then detach the back end stoppers together with the mounts [2].

15-31

Chapter 15

a-4. Hold the back end stopper that had no gap, pull it off the support shaft [2].

a-5. Clean the area [1] of the support shaft to which the back end stopper is fitted with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol; then, check to see if there is burr or peeled plating on the area [2] of the back end stopper to which the support shaft is fitted. If any, rub it off delicately with a lateral surface [3] of a Jewlers' screwdriver, and fit the back end stopper to the support shaft; then fit the resulting back end stopper to the Punch Unit.

b. If the symptom still occurs, follow the instructions described in the attached " Procedure to Check and Solve Misalignment of Punch Holes."

15.2.4 Network 15.2.4.1 Ping Failure 15.2.4.1.1 Ping Failure: When executing Ping command, message "No response from the host" appears due to WINS configuration error,
[ Case in the field ] Description Since the scope ID had been set under Additional Functions > System Settings > Network Settings > TCP/IP Settings > WINS Configuration, Ping failure occurred. In the typical network setting, the scope ID is not entered. If it is entered, communication between nodes with the same ID alone is available. Field Remedy
0020-9687

15-32

Chapter 15 1. In Additional Functions > System Settings > Network Settings > TCP/IP Settings > WINS Configuration, press [Scope ID]. When the keypad appears, delete the scope ID with the backspace key, and press [OK].

2. When the WINS Configuration screen reappears, make sure that the Scope ID field is empty, and then press [OK]. 3. Turn the main power switch OFF and then ON to restart this machine. 4. Execute the Ping command 60 sec after power-on to check if the host responds it.

15.2.4.1.2 Ping Failure: When executing Ping command, message "No response from the host" appears due to Ethernet driver configuration error
[ Case in the field ] Description In the field, there was a case where this machine failed to detect the Ethernet driver automatically, and therefore, did not execute the Ping command.
0021-1089

Field Remedy 1. Obtain the following 2 pieces of information from a system manager of the user. - Communication Mode: full duplex/half duplex - Ethernet Type: 10 BASE-T/100BASE-TX 2. Additional Functions > System Settings > Network Settings > Ethernet Driver Settings > Auto Detect > OFF > make a selection to "Communication Mode" and "Ethernet Type" > OK. 3. Turn the main power switch OFF/ON to restart this machine. 4. Execute the Ping command 60 sec after power-on to check if the host responds it.

15.2.4.2 Connection Problem 15.2.4.2.1 Machine cannot connect to Network: Because [IMG-CONT] has incorrect setting value
[ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the machine could not be connected to the Network because the service mode item [IMG-CONT] was set to a value other than "0". When the same symptom has occurred, change the setting value of this service mode item to "0". Field Remedy 1. Service mode > COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE > change the setting value of [IMG-CONT] to "0". 2. Turn the control panel switch OFF > Turn the main power switch OFF and then ON.
0012-7488

15.2.4.2.2 RUI becomes unavailable even though the IP address was specified after replacing an old machine with a new one
[ Case in the field ] Description In the field, RUI became unavailable after replacement with a new machine, even though the same IP address was specified. This symptom was resolved by changing the SSL setting to "On". Field Remedy Additional Functions > System Settings > Remote UI > "On" > Use SSL > "On", and then turn the main power switch OFF/ON. [Reference] When SSL is used, "key" mark is displayed on the left side of touch panel display.
0022-3495

15-33

Chapter 15

15.2.5 Transmission/fax-related 15.2.5.1 Transmission Problem 15.2.5.1.1 #703 Transmission Error Code is indicated infrequency/Machine hangs up during transmission to PC with SEND function
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description This machine hung up during transmission followed by scanning many documents with the SEND function. And in rear cases, the transmission error code "#703" was indicated. As the result of inspection, it was found that upgrading the Main Controller software to Ver. 30.08 solve this symptom. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, check the version of the Main Controller software; if it is earlier than Ver. 30.08, upgrade it to Ver. 30.08 or later.
0014-5683

15.2.5.1.2 #755 error code : TCP/IP error causes SMB transmission failure
[ Case in the field ] Description In the field, although a fix IP address was set in this machine, because the dynamic IP Address (either DHCP, RARP, or BOOT) was turned ON, the transmission failure occurred in SMB, and caused #755 error code.
0022-9405

Field Remedy 1. Additional Functions > Network Settings > TCP/IP Settings > (IPv4 Settings) > IP Address Settings, and press the green area in the DHCP,RARP,BOOT button in the left side of the screen, and it will turn grey. 2. Turn the host machine main power switch OFF/ON. [Reference] Some system doesnt have IPv4 setting, depending on the version.

15.2.5.2 Other Operational Defect 15.2.5.2.1 Method to disable Activity Report/TX Report settings
[ Case in the field ] Description If you do not want to print Activity Report/TX Report, conduct the following Field Remedy. Field Remedy Set the following: Additional Functions > Report Settings > (Settings) Send > Activity Report and TX Report > Off
0021-8926

15.2.5.3 Setting/Registration Defect 15.2.5.3.1 Directory server name does not appear as SMB directory under browse
[ Case in the field ] Description In the field, since "File and Printer Sharing" was not active for the Windows firewall exceptions setting of the directory server, the server name did not appear as a SMB directory under "Browse" on the machine. Field Remedy Check with user's system administrator whether "File and Printer Sharing" can be active for the server as an exception for the Windows Firewall. If the exception can be allowed, follow the steps described in the attached document "Windows Firewall Exceptions Setting Procedure". If it cannot be allowed due to the security policy, propose "FTP" or "WebDav" as a substitution.
0022-6883

15.2.6 Jam (Main Unit) 15.2.6.1 Numeral number "51" is indicated on "L (location)" column of Jam History of machine: High Capacity Stacker-A1
[ Manual-related ] Description The numeral number "51" indicated in the jam history screen of the machine means that a paper jam has occurred at the High capacity Stacker-A1. In order to check the description of the jam, check the message displayed on the LCD of the Stacker. In this field case, that LCD showed the message "REMOVE JAMMED PAPER D13" suggesting the possibility of a dely jam at PL10 of the stacker. When checking the details of an indicated numeral number, refer to the attached jam code table.
0013-2012

15.2.6.2 0101/0114 Jam Code: Right Lock Plate has moved out of place
[ Case in the field ] Description Since the right lock plate moved to a higher position than usual due to opening/closing of the right deck, the pressure between the right deck separation roller and the left deck feed roller was decreased, causing the jam code "0101" or "0114." When the same symptom occurs, perform the following field remedy. - 0101 Jam Code: Delay jam at the right deck pick-up sensor (PS20). - 0114 Jam Code: Delay jam at the right deck feed sensor (PS27). Field Remedy 1. Remove the feeding guide plate (FF6-1533) and the open/close guide (FB4-1982). 2. Insert the right deck. 3. Push the plate [1] in the direction of the arrow (toward the rear) and check to see if a space is created between the plate and the counter shaft [2] (FB4-6227).
0020-7143

15-34

Chapter 15

F-15-50

4. If no space was created in Step 3, re-fit the right lock plate [3] white pushing it down.

F-15-51

At that time, check the type of screw that fixes the right lock plate. If the screw is RS tightening screw, replace it with a RS tightening screw having a serrated washer (this screw is hard to be loosened). XA9-0899 RS Screw, M4x10

15.2.6.3 0105 Jam Code: Deck Feed Clutch of Side Paper Deck-X1 slips
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Because of a problem in feeding paper, the jam code "0105" was indicated when feeding A3-size paper from the Side Paper Deck. - 0105 Jam Code: Delay jam at the vertical path sensor (PS17). Cause The electromagnetic clutch (CL101) found at the paper pick-up assembly slipped, causing a failure in feeding paper. Field Remedy 1. Service mode > COPIER > Function > PART-CHK > CL > enter '20' (deck feed clutch [CL101] of the Side Paper Deck) > OK. 2. Select [CL-ON], and press OK. This will make the clutch repeat the following operation: [ON for 0.5 sec > OFF for 10 sec > ON for 0.5 sec > OFF for 10 sec > ON for 0.5 sec > OFF]. 3. If an operating noise does not occur during the operation mentioned Step 2, re-fit all the connector of CL101 clutch, and then re-fit all the connectors of the Large Deck Drive PCB. 4. If the symptom still occurs, replace CL101 and the Large Deck Drive PCB by new ones in this order. Reference: If a load is applied to the clutch even where an operating noise occurs in Step2, the clutch slips, and possibly suffering the same trouble. FH6-5043 Electromagnetic Clutch FM1-0131 Large Deck Drive PCB Assembly
0014-7777

15.2.6.4 0119 Jam Code/Abnormal sound occurs upon installation: Friction between separation (sponge) roller and feed roller found in Manual Feeder is high
[ Case in the field ] Description When paper was fed from the Manual Feeder during the paper feeding check upon installation, abnormal sound or a jam occurred. As for the jam, it occurred when the paper was fed into the machine by approx. 20mm (i.e., when the lead edge of the paper was about to reach the pull-off roller). To solve this symptom, the separation roller was cleaned, and then approx. 10 sheets of paper were fed. When the same symptom occurs upon installation, perform the following field remedy. Cause The surface of the bland-new separation (sponge) roller had a great friction. This let the roller stick to the surface of the feed roller. Field Remedy 1. Clean the separation roller with lint-free paper impregnated with alcohol. 2. Place about 10 sheets of A4-size (LTR-size) paper on the Manual Feeder, and then make copies.
0014-6643

15.2.6.5 020C Jam Code: Due to malfunction of external delivery sensor flag
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since the metal plate on which the external delivery sensor [1] is mounted was deformed, the sensor flag did not return to the home position smoothly [2], causing 020C Jam Code.
0013-4918

15-35

Chapter 15

F-15-52

F-15-53

- 020C Jam Code: Delay jam at the external delivery sensor (PS10) Field Remedy When the symptom has occurred, move the external delivery sensor flag to check if it returns to the home position [3] smoothly; if it does not, check the metal plate and the torsion spring for deformation and incorrect attachment, respectively.

15.2.6.6 0216 Jam Code: Because spring of Multiple curling prevention sensor lever comes off
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since the spring of the multiple curling prevention sensor lever came off, 0216 Jam Code occurred. - 0216 Jam Code: Stationary jam at the multiple curling prevention sensor (PS68). Field Remedy When the symptom has occurred, check the spring of the multiple curling prevention sensor lever for detachment; if detached, refit it.
0013-3943

15.2.7 Jam (Document Feeder) 15.2.7.1 0064 Jam Code appears after leaving this machine for long period of time: Pre-reversal flapper of DADF-Q1causes malfunction
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since the pre-reversal flapper caused a malfunction at DADF pickup, the original was detected by the reversal sensor (S1) before it passed by the preregistration sensor (S2), causing the jam code "0064." - 0064: A pickup NG 1 condition (0024) has occurred on the 1st sheet. - 0024: At time of pickup, the reversal sensor detects an original before it moves past the pre-registration roller sensor. Cause Since foreign substances adhered to the contact surfaces of the dumper [2] and guide [3] of the pre-reverse flapper [1], the flapper did not work although the pre-reversal solenoid (SL3) operated.
0016-4205

15-36

Chapter 15

F-15-54

Field Remedy 1. Move the plunger of the solenoid (SL3) manually, and check to see if the pre-reversal flapper operates.

F-15-55

2. If the flapper does not operate, clean the surface of the dumper and guide plate connecting with lint-free paper impregnated with alcohol.

15.2.7.2 0094 Jam Code: Separation sensor (S4) of DADF-Q1 is faulty

[ Case in the field ] Description Although the jam code "0094" was indicated due to continuous detection of presence of paper by the separation sensor (S4) of the feeder, opening/closing operation of the feeder's upper cover did not initiate the initial operation. When the same symptom occurs, perform the following field remedy. - 0094 Jam Code (initial stationary jam) can be displayed when sensors disposed in the paper feeding path detects the presence of paper at start of operation. The sensors relevant to this symptom are PI4, PI12, PI13, S1, S2, S3, S4, S5 and S9. Field Remedy 1. Turn the main power switch OFF/ON. 2. Check the activation/deactivation of respective sensors in service mode > COPIER > I/O > FEEDER, or adjust respective sensors by means of a DIP switch on the ADF controller PCB. 3. If a faulty sensor was found in Step 2, clean it and then adjust it again by the I/O mode under service mode or the DIP switch on the ADF controller PCB. 4. If the symptom still occurs, replace the sensor with a new one. In the above-described field case, the separation sensor PCB assembly was replaced with a new one.
0020-2992

15.2.8 Jam (FIN) 15.2.8.1 1422 Jam code Saddle Finisher-V2 indicates : Front cover open sensor (PS1) makes false detection
[ Case in the field ] Description Since the front cover open sensor made a false detection, the front cover switch (MSW1) identified the front cover as being opened during operation, causing the jam code "1422". - 1422 Jam Code can be displayed when the front cover open sensor identifies the front cover as being opened during operation. Cause Since the magnet catch that catches the front cover when the cover is closed stuck out a little, the sensor arm failed to interrupt the sensor. Field Remedy 1. Loosen the 2 screws fixing the magnet catch, and move the magnet catch by 0.5mm to the rear (i.e., in the direction of increasing the distance by which the front cover is pulled rearward); then fix it there. 2. Move the top and bottom hinges connecting the front cover to the Finisher by 0.5mm in the left direction viewed from the front side of the machine, and fix them there. Note: Be sure not to move the hinges too much. Otherwise, the front cover open sensor will come into contact with the sensor lever.
0014-1773

15-37

Chapter 15

15.2.8.2 1004 Jam Code: Because tape that fixes Shift Assembly inside Finisher is not removed
[ Case in the field ] Description When installing the Finisher, the machine was turned ON with the filament tape left in the rear side of the shift assembly of the Finisher, causeing 1004 Jam Code. Field Remedy When the symptom has occurred, check if the filament tape is removed from the rear side of the shift assembly of the finisher; if it is still there, remove it.
0012-9849

15.2.8.3 1004/1103/1721 Jam Code occurs, then 1320 Jam Code occurs when turning Finisher off/ on: Guide rotation shaft of Finisher-V1/V2 is deformed
[ Case in the field ] Description Since the guide rotation shaft [1] supporting the entrance guide assembly [2] was deformed, the assembly was set incorrectly, causing any of the following jam codes after paper reached PS3: "1004" (when the paper failed to reach PS4), or "1103" (when the paper failed to pass PS3).
0014-2992

F-15-56

When the Finisher was started again after opening the paper feed left guide assembly (label indication "A2") [3] and then removing the jammed paper, the guide plate that happened to be set in the wrong position interrupted PS3, causing the jam code "1721". Since the power switch of the Finisher was turned OFF and then ON in this state, the jam code "1320" was indicated.

F-15-57

- 1103 can be indicated when the paper does not leave the inlet sensor (PS3) within a specified period of time after PS3 has detected paper. - 1004 san be indicated when the paper does not leave the shift unit sensor (PS4) within aspecified period of time after the inlet sensor (PS3) has detected paper. - 1721 can be indicated when paper exists in the path during initial rotation of the host machine. - 1320 can be indicated when paper exists within the transport path at power-on jam. Cause Since the front door of the Finisher was closed after jam handling with the paper feed left guide assembly set in the wrong position, the assembly was pushed rearward and applied a load to the guide rotation shaft, causing deformation of the shaft. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, perform the following procedure. 1. When the jam code "1004" appears with the paper feed left guide assembly set rearward, and no jam with the assembly set frontward, the guide rotation shaft is deformed, and possibly increasing the play (in the horizontal registration direction) of the assembly. In the case, replace the guide rotation shaft by a new one. 2. After replacing the guide rotation shaft check to make sure the Finisher starts without the jam code "1320", and neither "1004" nor "1103" appears even when making a copy with the paper feed left guide assembly set rearward as described in Step 1. FL2-3565 Guide Rotation Shaft FM2-4259 Paper Feed Left Guide Assembly

15-38

Chapter 15

15.2.8.4 1004 Jam Code: Mylar sheet of Finisher-V1/V1L and Saddle Finisher- V2/V2L breaks
[ Case in the field ] Description When installing the Punch Unit-U1/V1/W1/X1, the mylar sheet [2] that was affixed to the guide plate [1] of the shift roller unit broke because of degradation over a period of time, which caused the epidemic jam code "1004" in the field. - 1004 Jam Code (shift unit sensor delay) can be displayed when the shift unit sensor (PS4) does not detect paper within a specific period of time.
0020-2313

Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, remove the broken mylar sheet [2], and then attach a new mylar sheet in accordance with Step 14 thought Step 19 in the Installation Guide. FC6-6209 Loop Sheet

15.2.8.5 1006 Jam Code: Because transparency is not selected as paper type for Stack Bypass
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the field, 1006 Jam Code occurred because a copy job was performed without selecting transparency as the type for the stackbypass. - 1006 Jam Code can be displayed when the buffer path 1 sensor (UN13) does not detect paper within a specific period of time (distance) after the shift unit sensor (PS4) has detected paper. Cause In a copy job with a transparency in use, a transmissive sensor is not used for detecting paper-feed timing; however, if the transparency is used without selecting as the type of used paper, this sensor is used. In such a case, its light goes through the transparency and makes the machine fail to detect the presence of the transparency, causing a paper jam. Field Remedy In a copy job with a transparency in use, make the following selections in sequence on the Copy screen: [Paper Select > Stack Bypass > select the paper size > Next > Special Paper Types > Transparency > OK]. Note: When "Free Size" or "Irreg. Size" is selected as the paper size for the stack bypass under "Paper Select", "Transparency" is not displayed as a selectable item in "Special Paper Types."
0012-9476

15.2.8.6 1109 Jam Code: Paper curled downward comes into contact with surface of paper waiting in Buffer area of Finisher-V1/V1L/V2/V2L
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description The edge of paper curled downward hit against paper waiting at the buffer area of the Finisher and was folded or buckled, causing the (stationary) jam code "1109." To prevent this, the guide sheets (front [1]/ rear [2]) are attached to the feeder guide of the Finisher units with the following serial numbers: - Finisher-V1(208V UL): TFW02747 and later - Finisher-V1(230V EUR): TFX00502 and later - Saddle Finisher-V2(208V UL): TGE01757 and later - Saddle Finisher-V2(230V EUR): TGF00818 and later
0014-9768

F-15-58

- 1109 Jam Code can be displayed when the paper does not leave the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) within a specific period of time (distance) after the shift unit sensor (PS4) has detected paper. Field Remedy

15-39

Chapter 15 When the symptom occurs with Finisher units without the abovementioned serial numbers, attach the guide sheets (front [1]/ rear [2]) to feeder guide [3] so that they are not ridden on the convex part [4]. Note: When attaching the sheets, be sure to take care not to cover the paper passage [5].

F-15-59

FC6-5766 Guide Sheet (Front) FC6-5767 Guide Sheet (Rear)

15.2.8.7 1143/114B Jam Code occurs when using LTR-R size paper with Finisher-V2/V2L causes Aligning plate malfunctions
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Because of a shock during transport, the saddle stapler assembly moved down and the aligning plate malfunctioned, consequently causing the jam code "1143/ 14B" when feeding LTR-R paper. When the symptom occurs, perform the following field remedy. - 1143 can be displayed when paper does not leave the saddle inlet sensor (PS101) within a specified period of time after the lower path sensor (UN24) has detected the paper. - 114B can be displayed when paper does not leave the saddle pre-pressing sensor (PS111) within a specified period of time after the end of saddle stop plate operation. Cause Because of a shock during transport, the location [2] of the saddle stapler assembly [1] got under the slit on the lower right of the connector cover [3], and pushed the saddle stapler assembly downward, causing a malfunction of the aligning plate.
0014-2995

F-15-60

Field Remedy 1. Check to see if the location [2] of the saddle stapler assembly runs off the slit at the lower right of the connector cover [3] and pushes the saddle stapler assembly downward. 2. If the assembly is pushed downward, loosen the 1 screw [4], and then re-fit the connector cover [3].

15.2.8.8 1143 Jam Code: Flapper of Finisher-V2/V2l comes off

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since the flapper [1] of the saddle assembly found in the Finisher came off, the jam code "1143" was indicated. - 1143 can be displayed when paper does not leave the saddle inlet sensor (PS101) within a specified period of time (distance) after the lower path sensor (UN24) has detected the paper.
0014-2999

15-40

Chapter 15

F-15-61

Cause Because of a shock during transport, the flapper shaft warped at the rear side and ran off the groove. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, check the flapper; if it comes off, re-fit it. FC6-6415 Upper Flapper FC6-6416 Lower Flapper

15.2.8.9 1145 Jam Code occurs when using A4R-size paper: Timing Belt of Saddle Assembly in Saddle Finisher-V2 slips off
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since the shaft roller (FC6-6442) in the saddle assembly did not rotate when saddle-stitching A4R-size paper, the jam code "1145" was indicated. In this field case, this jam code was not indicated with A3-size paper. - 1145 Jam Code can be displayed when the paper does not leave the saddle small sensor (PS103) within a specific period of time (distance) after the saddle inlet sensor (PS101) has detected paper. Cause Since the timing belt [A] slipped off the 23T pulley that drives the shaft of shaft roller, the shaft roller failed to rotate. Reference: The reason why this jam code does not appear with A3-size paper is that the paper can separate under its own weight with no help of the shaft roller. In order to prevent the timing belt from slipping off the 23T pulley, the shaft of roller shaft [E] was extended so that the pulley guide [C] can be attached outside the 23T pulley (The pulley guide is fixed with a resin ring [E]). When the same symptom occurs, perform the following field remedy.
0020-7233

F-15-62

Field Remedy 1. Check to see if the timing belt has slipped off the 23T pulley. 2. If the belt has slipped off, replace the shaft of shaft roller. Reference: For the replacement procedure, refer to "Removing the Shaft Roller" in the Service Manual. 3. Fit the pulley guide outside the 23T pulley guide and fix it with an E-ring (resin type). FU6-2931 Estrangement Roller Shaft FA4-1159 Retaining Ring (resin type) FC6-6361 Pulley Guide

15.2.8.10 1185 Jam Code: Solenoid (SL74) of Paper Folding Unit-D1 is mounted incorrectly
[ Case in the field ] Description Since SL74 of the Paper Folding Unit-D1was mounted incorrectly, paper delayed in passing by the transport path paper sensor 3 (S8), causing the jam code "1185." - 1185 Jam Code can be displayed when paper does not pass by the transport path paper sensor 3 (S8) within the specified period of time.
0015-8583

15-41

Chapter 15

F-15-63

Field Remedy Check to see the mounting condition of SL74 on the left inner guide assembly (FM2-6498); if the setscrew is removed or loosened, tighten it again.

15.2.8.11 11C7 Jam Code: E0005a7-11C7 Drive belt of Trimer-B1 has low tension (Trimmer-B1)
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description The following case was sometimes noticed: when performing a booklet job consisting of 20 sheets of A3-size paper with a Trimmer unit in use, the printed 20 sheets of paper are folded into a book, and then, stop on the feed belt at the inlet of the trim section. Which causes this machine to display the jam code "E0005a7-11C7."
0017-9127

F-15-64

- E0005a7-11C7 can be displayed when a book stays at the booklet sensor (PI07) at the inlet of the trim section for a specified period of time. Cause The drive belt [1] in the rear side of the trim section had low tension. This makes the belt slip, causing a paper feeding failure that leads to the jam code. Field Remedy 1. Loosen the nut in the far side of the tension pulley [2], and move the pulley in the direction of [A] to adjust the tension of the belt.

15-42

Chapter 15

F-15-65

As for the adjustment procedure, refer to the attached "Trim Section Drive Belt Tension Adjustment." 2. If E000597-11C7 is displayed even after the adjustment, replace the drive belt with a new one. FC3-2915 Belt

15.2.8.12 1320 Jam Code does not disappear upon installation of Saddle Finisher-V2: Connector of Finisher Controller PCB has poor contact
[ Case in the field ] Description When the main power switch was turned ON after installing the Saddle Finisher-V2 at time of installation, the jam code "1320" appeared and persisted. For solution, all the connectors of the Finisher Controller PCB were re-fitted (because the causal connector was not identified). - The jam code "1320" can be displayed when paper exists within the transport path at power-on. Field Remedy When the symptom occurs, check to see the position of the jammed paper, and perform any of the following procedure below. a. If the jammed paper exists in the Saddle unit, re-fit J129 and J130 connectors. b. If the jammed paper exists in a location other than the Saddle unit, re-fit the following connectors: J116, J117, J119, J124, and J127.
0014-1426

15.2.8.13 17DE Jam Code (Saddle Finishr-V2 + Booklet Trimmer-B1)

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description When instructing this machine first to make 16 booklets from A4-size of 56 originals in the combination of saddle-stitch and trim modes, and then to make 2 booklets from A4-size of 6 originals in the same modes in a single operation, the jam code "17DE" was displayed. (This code also occurred in case B5-size originals were used.) - 17DE Jam Code can be displayed when a sensor at the downstream path detects the next booklet while the previous booklet is being transported in the trimmer unit after completion of a series of trimming operation, or when a sensor detects a booklet after completion of a series of trimming operation. The relevant sensors are as follows: PI01/PI02/PI07/PI07/PI10/PI11/PI12/PI13. Field Remedy When the same symptom occurs, check the version of finisher software (Stacker); if it is earlier than Ver. 20.08, update the software to Ver. 20.08 or later and perform the same booklet jobs. Cause When the paper information (paper size/ presence or absence of trimming operation/ finished size/number of signatures in the booklet) is changed during continuous saddle-stitch jobs, the finisher unit notifies the new paper information to the trimmer unit. However, there is a restriction that this notification has to be provided after all the booklets have gone out of the trimmer unit. In order to satisfy this restriction, a certain time interval is provided between the start of processing of the previous booklet and that of the next booklet. However, if there is difference in the number of signatures between the previous and next booklets, the above-mentioned restriction, depending on conditions, will not be satisfied, ultimately causing the error code in question. - The jam code is displayed in case there is great difference in the process time between the previous and next booklets (i.e., in case the time for folding the previous paper stack is long and that of the next paper stack is short), while it is not displayed in case there is difference in the trimming setting or the size of used papers between the previous and next booklets.
0018-7088

15.2.8.14 17DE Jam Code occurs when performing saddle-stitch jobs continuously (Saddle Finishr-V2 + Booklet TrimmerB1)
[ Case in the field ] Description When running continuous saddle-stitch jobs by reading out data from 5 different User Inboxes in sequence, the jam code "17DE" was indicated. In this field case, the following data were read from respective User Inboxes below and saddle-stitch jobs were performed with A3-size paper in use. - User Inbox0: 20 sheets of A4-size data - User Inbox3: 22 sheets of A4-size data - User Inbox4: 18 sheets of A4-size data - User Inbox6: 30 sheets of A4-size data - User Inbox8: 40 sheets of A4-size data Reference: The jam code in question was not indicated when performing booklet jobs by reading out data from 4 User Inboxes. - 17DE Jam Code can be displayed when a sensor at the downstream path detects the next booklet while the previous booklet is being transported in the trimmer unit after completion of a series of trimming operation, or when a sensor detects a booklet after completion of a series of trimming operation. The relevant sensors are as follows: PI01/PI02/PI07/PI07/PI10/PI11/PI12/PI13. Field Remedy When the same symptom occurs, check the version of finisher software (Stacker); if it is earlier than Ver. 20.08, update the software to Ver. 20.08 or later and perform the same booklet jobs. Cause When the paper information (paper size/ presence or absence of trimming operation/ finished size/number of signatures in the booklet) is changed during continuous saddle-stitch jobs, the finisher unit notifies the new paper information to the trimmer unit. However, there is a restriction that this notification has to be provided after all the booklets have gone out of the trimmer unit. In order to satisfy this restriction, a certain time interval is provided between the start
0018-7092

15-43

Chapter 15 of processing of the previous booklet and that of the next booklet. However, if there is difference in the number of signatures between the previous and next booklets, the above-mentioned restriction, depending on conditions, will not be satisfied, ultimately causing the error code in question. - The jam code is displayed in case there is great difference in the process time between the previous and next booklets (i.e., in case the time for folding the previous paper stack is long and that of the next paper stack is short), while it is not displayed in case there is difference in the trimming setting or the size of used papers between the previous and next booklets.

15.2.8.15 1F25 Jam Code/ 110D Jam Code occurs when switching job mode from two-sided to one-sided (iR7095i + Perfect Binder-A1 + Saddle Finisher-V2)
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the combination use of iR7095i, Perfect Binder-A1, and Saddle Finisher-V2, the jam code "1F25" or "110D" was indicated at the time when a job was run after the job mode was switched from Two-sided to One-sided. - 1F25 Jam Code can be displayed when a processing tray load timing error (software control timing fault) occurs. - 110D Jam Code can be displayed when the paper does not leave the lower path sensor (UN24) within a specific period of time (distance) after the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) has detected paper. Cause In the above-mentioned inspection case, this machine properly changed its paper feed speed when the job mode was changed from Two-sided to One-sided. However, Perfect Binder-A1 failed to change its paper feed speed in keeping with this machine, and thus caused a paper feed speed error when it received the 1st paper after the switchover of the job mode. This caused a delay of paper flow, followed by a short paper interval, and rendered the finisher unit unable to handle papers coming from upstream, ultimately causing 1F25/110D Jam Code. Field Remedy In order to prevent Perfect Binder-A1 from causing a paper feed speed control error, the master controller software was updated to Ver. 20.10. When the same symptom occurs, check the version of the master controller software; if it is earlier than Ver. 20.10, update the software to Ver. 20.10 or later.
0019-6677

15.2.9 Error Code 15.2.9.1 E003-0000 Error Code: J508 on DC controller PCB has poor contact
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the field, E003-0000 Error Code was displayed because J508 on the DC controller PCB had poor contact. - E003-0000 Error Code can be displayed when the reading of the main thermistor is below 70 deg. C for 2 sec. after it has exceeded 100 deg. C.
0013-3993

Field Remedy 1. Although the fixing heater or the temperature-detecting thermistor may be faulty, before replacing these parts, check J508 on the DC controller PCB for poor contact and refit it if necessary. 2. Make the following selections to clear the error code: [Service mode > COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERR > OK].

15.2.9.2 E003-0000 is displayed upon recovery from sleep mode: Noise affects thermistor line
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description When a machine spent a night in sleep mode and recovered from the mode next morning, the error code "E003-0000" was displayed. When the machine spent a night with its main power switch OFF and started by switching ON next morning, this error code did not appear. - E003-0000 can be displayed when the reading of the main thermistor is detected as being 70 deg C or lower for 2 sec after it has exceeded 100 deg C. Cause During the fixing temperature control at recovery from sleep mode, electrical noise affected the thermistor. Field Remedy In order to increase the length of time for idle rotation of the drum (by 30 sec) at start-up and prevent electrical noise from affecting the thermistor, make the following selections in sequence: [Service mode (Level 2) > COPIER > Option > BODY > DRM-IDL > change the setting to '3']. Note: The length of time for idle rotation being increased by 30 sec, this mode will delay start of the machine by 30 sec.
0014-9329

15.2.9.3 E004-0001 Error Code: Main heater has short-circuit

[ Case in the field ] Description Since the main heater found in the fixing assembly had a short-circuit, the error code "E004-0001" was indicated. When the symptom occurs, perform the following field remedy. - E004-0001 can be displayed when the SSR for the heater drive has a short-circuit for 5 sec or more while the main heater is on.
0014-1516

Field Remedy 1. Although a fault of the AC Drive PCB or the DC Controller PCB may be the main cause of the error code, check the blackening/ deformation of the main heater or the breakage of the filament before replacing the foregoing PCBs; if any symptom is found, replace the main heater by a new one. 2. After replacing the main heater, make the following selections in sequence: [Service mode > COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERR > OK]. 3. Turn the control panel switch OFF, and then turn the main power switch OFF and then ON. FH7-4719 Main Heater (iR7105 208V UL/iR7095 208V UL/iR7095P 208V UL) FH7-4708 Main Heater (iR7086 208V UL) FH7-4720 Main Heater (iR7105 230V A/B/iR7095 230V A/B/iR7095 220V CN/iR7105 230V GB/iR7095 230V GB/iR7105 220V CN/iR7105 230V AU/ iR7095 230V AU/iR7105 230V EUR/iR7095 230V EUR/iR7095P 230V GB/iR7095P 230V AU/iR7095P 230V EUR) FH7-4709 Main Heater (iR7086 230V GB/iR7086 230V AU/iR7086 230V EUR)

15.2.9.4 E010-0000 Error Code: Because J1702 connector of Relay PCB has poor contact
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the field, E010-0000 Error Code occurred because J1702 connector on the relay PCB had poor contact. - E010-0000 Error Code can be displayed when the FG signal of the main motor cannot be detected for 2 sec. or more after the main motor has gone on.
0013-3946

Field Remedy 1. When the symptom has occurred after re-fitting connectors of the relay PCB, check J1702 connector of the PCB for poor contact and refit it if necessary. 2. If the symptom still occurs, refit J514 connector of the DC controller PCB and J611 and J612 connectors of the main motor.

15.2.9.5 E012 Error Code: J1721 connector on Relay PCB has poor contact
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since J1721 connector on the Relay PCB had poor contact, E012 error Code occurred. When this error code is displayed after re-fitting the Relay PCB or its connector during a service work, perform the following field remedy.
0013-5113

15-44

Chapter 15 - E012 Error Code can be displayed when the PLL Lock signal of the drum motor cannot be detected for 2 sec. Or more after the drom motor has gone ON. Field Remedy 1. Re-fit J1721 connector on the Relay PCB. 2. Re-fit J512 connector on the DC Controller PCB. 3. Re-fit J601 and J602 connectors of the drum motor. 4. If the symptom still occurs, suspect a fault of the drum motor (M0) or the DC Controller PCB.

15.2.9.6 E013-0000 Error Code: Because J512 connector on DC controller PCB has poor contact
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since B15 pin of J512 connector on the DC controller PCB was deformed, the machine falsely recognized that the waste toner feed-screw was stuck, and thus indicated E013-0000. - E013-0000 Error Code can be displayed when the waste toner feed-screw is stuck for 4 sec. or more. Field Remedy 1. When the symptom has occurred, check pins of J512 connector on the DC controller PCB for deformation; if a pin is deformed, modify it, and refit the connector. 2. Service mode > COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERR > OK > turn the main power switch OFF/ON. Note: After performing a remedy against the halted waste toner feedscrew in response to E013-0000, be sure to clear the error before turning the main power switch OFF and then ON. Otherwise, E013-0010 will be displayed.
0013-4873

15.2.9.7 E013-0010 Error Code: Because Error Clear is not executed in service mode
[ Manual-related ] Description In the field, E013-0010 Error Code was displayed because the main power switch was turned OFF and then ON without executing an error clear in service mode after a remedy against the halted waste toner feedscrew in response to E013-0000. - E013-0010 Error Code can be displayed when the main power switch is turned OFF and then ON without executing an error clear. Field Remedy 1. When a cause of E013-0000 has been solved, make the following selections in sequence: [Service mode > COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERR > OK]. 2, Turn the main power switch OFF and then ON.
0013-4876

15.2.9.8 E014-0000 Error Code: Because J1720 connector of Relay PCB has poor contact
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since J1720 connector of the relay PCB had poor contact, E014-0000 Error Code was displayed. - E014-0000 Error Code can be displayed when the PLL lock signal of the fixing motor is not detected for 2 sec. or more after the fixing motor has gone on. Field Remedy 1. When the symptom occurs after re-fitting connectors of the reply PCB during a service work, check if J1720 connector of the PCB is fit securely. 2. If the symptom still occurs, re-fit J651 and J652 connectors of the fixing motor.
0013-4913

15.2.9.9 E020-0009 : Hopper Assembly causes malfunction

[ Case in the field ] Description Since error code E020-0009 was displayed, the hopper assembly was replaced with a new one for solution. When the same symptom occurs, go through the following steps in sequence. - E020-0009 is displayed when the buffer motor rotation is abnormal. Field remedy 1. Refit J504 connector on the controller PCB. 2. If the symptom still occurs, replace the buffer motor (M18). 3. If the symptom still occurs, replace the hopper assembly. FH6-1543 DC MOTOR FM2-4063 HOPPER ASSEMBLY
0022-1208

15.2.9.10 E025 Error Code: Because Connector on Relay PCB has poor contact
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since a connector on the relay PCB had poor contact, E025 Error Code was displayed. - E025 Error Code can be displayed when the toner bottle motor rotation is faulty. Field Remedy 1. Refit J512 connector on the DC controller PCB. 2. If the symptom still occurs, refit all the connectors on the relay PCB. FM2-4350 Relay PCB Assembly
0013-3981

15.2.9.11 E110-0000 Error Code occurs when progress bar runs its entire length: Because In primary cover is mounted improperly
[ Case in the field ] Description In the field, E110-0000 Error Code occurred when the progress bar run its entire length after power-on. This was because the in primary cover was mounted improperly. - E110-0000 Error Code can be displayed when the PPL lock signal of the motor cannot be detected for 15 sec, or more after the laser scanner motor has gone ON. Field Remedy 1. Check the in primary cover or the inner post cover (the primary corona assembly cover) for improper fitting and re-fit it if necessary; if the symptom still occurs, go through Step2 and later. 2. Re-insert the following connectors in the order in which they are listed: J764 connector of the laser scanner motor driver PCB (inside the laser scanner assembly), J1401 connector of the video PCB, and J506 connector of the DC controller PCB. 3. Replace the following parts with new ones in the order in which they are listed: the laser scanner assembly, the video PCB, and DC controller PCB. FC6-5644 In Primary Cover FL2-3507 Inner Post Cover
0012-9478

15-45

Chapter 15

15.2.9.12 E110 Error Code: Because J507/J506 of DC controller PCB has poor contact
[ Case in the field ] Description In the field, E110 Error Code occurred because J507 or J506 on the DC controller PCB had poor contact. - E110 Error Code can be displayed when the PLL lock signal of the motor cannot be detected for 15 sec, or more after the laser scanner motor have gone ON. Field Remedy When the symptom has occurred after refitting the DC controller PCB itself or its connectors during a service work, check J570 and J506 for bad connection and re-connect them if necessary.
0013-2459

15.2.9.13 E110-0000 Error Code: Because Relay PCB is faulty

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since E110-0000 Error Code was displayed, the relay PCB of the DC power Supply PCB was replaced with a new one for solution. - E110 Error Code can be displayed when the PLL lock signal of the motor is not detected for 15 sec or more after the laser scanner motor has gone on. Field Remedy 1. Check to make sure that the cover of the primary corona assembly is mounted. 2. Refit J764 connector of the driver PCB (found in the laser scanner assembly). 3. Refit J1401 connector of the video PCB. 4. Refit J506 connector of the DC controller PCB. 5. Based on the action taken to solve this field case, replace the relay PCB with a new one. 6. If the symptom still occurs, replace the following parts in the following order: Laser scanner unit, Video PCB, and DC controller PCB. FM2-4350 Relay PCB Assembly FM2-5449 Laser Scanner Assembly FM2-4354 Video PCB Assembly FM2-4355 DC Controller PCB Assembly
0013-5308

15.2.9.14 E110 Error Code occurs because primary corona assembly cover is removed with machine remained supplied with power
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since the primary corona assembly cover was removed for cleaning or replacement with the machine remained with power, the error code E110 was indicated. - E110-0000 can be displayed when the PLL lock signal of the motor cannot be detected for 15 sec or more after the laser scanner motor has gone ON. Cause With the main power switch ON, the laser scanner motor always rotate (at full- or half-speed). However, the removal of the primary corona assembly cover closed the shutter, preventing the machine from detecting the synchronizing signal (BD signal) for stable rotation of the motor. Field Remedy When detaching the primary corona assembly for service work, be sure to perform the following procedure a or b to prevent the error code "E110." a. In case E110 has already resulted from the removal of the corona assembly cover performed with the main power switch ON a-1. Clean or replace the primary corona assembly and mount the corona assembly cover; then turn the main power switch OFF and then ON for clearing the error. b. The primary corona assembly replacement procedure to prevent E110 from being indicated. b-1. Wait until the machine goes into the standby (ready) state. b-2. Press the energy saver button to let the machine go into energy saver mode. b-3. Open the front cover, and remove the primary corona assembly cover; then slide out the corona assembly to clean or replace it. b-4. Mount the primary corona assembly cover, and then close the front cover. b-5. Press the energy saver button to let the machine recover from energy saver mode. As for this step, it is important to press the energy saver button before opening the front cover. Reference: During sleep mode, energy saver mode, and shutdown, the laser scanner motor stays OFF.
0014-1430

15.2.9.15 E121-0002 Error Code: Because J512 on DC controller PCB has poor contact
[ Case in the field ] Description In the field, E121-0002 Error Code occurred because J512 on the DC controller PCB had poor contact. - E121-0002 Error Code can be displayed when the fan stop signal is detected for 5 sec, or more after the reader heat discharge fan 1 has gone ON.
0013-2460

Field remedy When the symptom occurs after refitting the DC controller itself or its connectors during a service work, check J512 for bad connection and refit it if necessary.

15.2.9.16 E197 Error Code: Because Transfer/Separation Corona Assembly is mounted incorrectly
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since the metal plate (positioning plate) that fixes the transfer/separation corona assembly to the fixing/feeder assembly was attached in the wrong position, E197 Error Code occurred. - E197 Error Code can be displayed when the laser scanner motor causes a communication error. Cause Since the transfer/separation corona assembly had poor contact with the high voltage contact point, electrical noise occurred, consequently causing the error code. Field Remedy 1. Slide out the fixing/feeder assembly, and then check if the transfer/separation corona assembly [1] moves up and down smoothly within its movable range [2].
0013-4923

15-46

Chapter 15

F-15-66

2. If the transfer/separation corona assembly does not move smoothly, loosen the screw [4] for the fixing plate [3], and tighten it again in the position in which the assembly can move smoothly.

15.2.9.17 E197 Error Code: Due to noise of bias applied to Transfer Guide
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since the crimp terminal on the end [1] of the cable that is used to apply bias to the transfer guide had a displaced protection tube, it came into contact with the screw as shown in [2], causing electrical noise that resulted in E197 Error Code.
0013-4924

F-15-67

- E197 Error Code can be displayed when the communication with the laser control IC is not normal. Field Remedy 1. Remove the regist. transfer assembly from the fixing/feeder frame assembly. 2. On the rear side of the regist. transfer assembly, check if the crimp terminal (metal portion) of the bias cable for the transfer guide is covered with the protection tube securely; if it isn't, move the tube as shown in [3]. 3. If the terminal is covered securely with the tube, remove the high-voltage output connectors on the H.V.T. PCB one by one to identify the high-voltage line that causes the error code. In a case, the incorrectly mounted transfer corona assembly led to poor contact between the high-voltage terminal in the rear side of the assembly and the terminal on the main body side, causing electrical noise that resulted in the error code. Therefore, considering this possibility, check those terminals for poor contact as well. Reference: The reason why bias is applied to the transfer guide is to make the surface of the guide have the same polarity as toner for preventing the surface from being soiled with toner (i.e., prevention of soiled back).

15.2.9.18 E202 Error Code: Scanner lamp fixing screw is not removed during installation (iR7095)
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since the scanner lamp fixing screw was not removed during installation, E202 Error Code occurred. - E202 Error Code can be displayed when the scanner home position is not detected.
0013-7132

Field Remedy a. When the symptom occurs during installation a-1. Referring to the installation manual, remove the scanner lamp fixing screw. b. When the symptom occurs during a work other than installation b-1. Service mode > COPIER > I/O > R-CON > check to see if bit5 of [P006] indicates "0" and "1" when the scanner is in and not in the home position, respectively. b-2. If no change is made to the bit value, re-fit the connector of the scanner HP sensor (PS502). b-3. Re-fit J305 and J303 connectors on the Interface PCB. b-4. Re-fit J202 connector on the Reader Controller PCB. b-5. If the Steps b-2 through b-5 do not solve the symptom, replace the scanner HP sensor with a new one. b-6. A fault of the scanner motor or the Reader Controller PCB is also conceivable as the cause of this symptom. FK2-0149 Photointerrupter

15-47

Chapter 15

15.2.9.19 E220 Scanning lamp fails to come on (iR8570N)

[ Case in the field ] Description Since the scanning lamp failed to come on, the error code "E220" was indicated. -E220 can be displayed when the scanning lamp fails to come on. Field Remedy 1. Check if the scanning lamp is connected correctly to the Inverter PCB. 2. Re-fit J203 connector of the reader controller and J601 connector of the Inverter PCB.
0014-9746

F-15-68

Ref.: The machine turns on or off the scanning lamp using the drive signal (XE-ON) generated by the CPU on the Reader Controller PCB. In response to the signal, the Inverter PCB generates high-frequency high voltage in the activation motor circuit using the drive voltage (+24 V) supplied by the Reader Controller PCB, thus turning on the scanning lamp. 3. If the symptom still occurs, replace the xenon lamp assembly by a new one. Note: After replacement of the xenon lamp assembly, make the following selections in sequence and perform shading correction based on the standard white plate: [Service mode Copier > Function > CCD > CCD-ADJ]. FM2-4759 Xenon Lamp Assembly

15.2.9.20 E225-0001 light image: ADJ-S (shading correction data measurement position) setting is incorrect
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description The error code "E225-0001" was indicated because the following service mode item was set to '225': [Service mode > COPIER > Adjust > ADJ-S]. When turning the main power switch OFF and then ON in this situation, and making some copies, light image occurred.
0015-3070

F-15-69

- E225-0001 can be displayed when the intnsity of light is below the standard level at time of shading. Cause Since the setting value of [ADJ-S] was changed from the default '325' to '225' for any reaseon, the shading correction data measurement position was displaced, and as a result, an image reading error such as lack of intensity, it increased the gain value, cuasing light image. Field Remedy When the error code is indicated, a fault in the scanner lamp, the Inverter PCB, the Reader Controller PCB, or other is conceivable. However, before replacing these parts, following the procedure below. 1. Check the setting vaule of [ADJ-S]. If the value is near '225', reset it to the default value (325) and execute the following service mode item:[Service mode > COPIER > Function > CCD > CCD-ADJ]; and then, turn the main power switch OFF and then ON. 2. Check to see if the scanner lamp comes on. If it does, suspect that the standard white plate is soiled, and there by causing an error or light image; then clean the lamp/ 3. If the scanner lamp does not come on, re-fit all the connectors of the scanner lamp, the Inverter PCB, and the Reader Controller PCB.

15.2.9.21 E227-0004/E500-0001/E711-0001/E732-0001 Error Code: Due to lack of power capacity (iR7086N equipped with Finisher-V1L)
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since E227/E500/E711/E732 occurred frequently after installation, the machine was connected to an independent power line (a dedicated power line) for solution.
0012-9411

15-48

Chapter 15 Cause In a case caused in a 100V area, the main body (normal ampere of 20A) and the Finisher-V1L (normal ampere of 6A) were connected to the identical outlet (100V. 20A), to which other devices were also connected. This caused the power supply voltage of this outlet to be below the lower limit of tolerance (-10%), resulting in various error codes. Field Remedy 1. When the symptom has occurred, check if the power supply voltage of the outlet is out of tolerance. 2. If the power supply voltage is out of tolerance, connect the machine to an independent (or a dedicated) power line. Note: When connecting the machine to another power line, check to make sure that the power line is independent. Because there is a possibility that the power line shares the same circuit breaker with the previous power line. - E227-0004 Error Code can be displayed when the 24V port is off while a load is driven. - E500-0001 Error Code can be displayed when a communication error occurs between the main body and the Finisher. (This error is detected on the Finisher side.). - E711-0001 Error Code can be displayed when a communication error occurs between the main body and the Finisher. (This error is detected on the main body side.). - E732-0001 Error Code can be displayed when a communication error occurs between the reader and the main controller PCB.

15.2.9.22 E500 Error Code: Because procedure taht should be performed after replacement of DC controller PCB is not carried out completely
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since the procedure that should be performed after replacement of the DC controller PCB was not carried out completely, E500 error code was displayed. When this error code has occurred, perform the following field remedies a, and b. Field Remedy a. Preparatory work a-1. Prepare the P-PRINT printouts and the USE-PRT printouts that were generated before the symptom occurred (i.e., before the DC controller PCB was replaced). - How to generate P-PRINT/UDER-PRT printouts: Service mode > COPIER > Function > MISC-P > P-PRINT/USER-PRT. a-2. Put 2 sheets or more of A4-size or LTR-size papers on either of the cassette 4 (the lowest casette), left deck, or optional paper deck (so as to execute [CLADJ] in Step b-10). a-3. Take notes of the values described in the label in the center of the replaced DC controller PCB (so as to input these values for the service mode items specified in Step b-12).
0013-5206

F-15-70

b. Procedure performed after replacing the DC controller PCB b-1. Turn the main power switch ON. Note: If delivery options are connected, turn OFF those options before the machine. b-2. Service mode > COPIER > Function > CLEAR > DC-CON > OK. b-3. Service mode > COPIER > Function > CLEAR > CNT-DCON > OK. b-4. Hold down the control panel switch for 3 sec. or more > run the shutdown sequence > turn the main power switch OFF/ON. (The RAM will be cleared.) Note: In order to protect the HDD, be sure to run the shutdown sequence when turning the main power switch OFF. b-5. Service mode > COPIER > Option > ACCPSD-D > using [ACC1] through [ACC8], input the connection order of the delivery options. b-6. In the same manner as Step b-4, turn the main power switch OFF/ON (The delivery options will be recognized.) b-7. Service mode > COPIER > Option > BODY > set [FIX-EXP] to "0" (the control mode for trailing smear associated with fixing). b-8. Input the values described in the service label for applicable service mode items. b-9. In the same manner as Step b-4, turn the main power switch OFF/ON. (The input values will become effective.) b-10. Service mode (Level 2) > COPIER > Function > MISC-P > CL-ADJ. b-11. Service mode (Level 2) > COPIER > Function > SENS-ADJ > OP-SENS. b-12. Input the values that were got down in Step a-3 for applicable service mode items. b-13. In the same manner as Step b-4, turn the main power switch OFF/ON. (All the values input in Step b-12 will become effective.)

15.2.9.23 E500-0001/E711-0001 Error Code: Terminator is not connected to signal cable

[ Case in the field ] Description Since a terminator was not connected to a T-connector of the signal cable (ARCNET) between the main body and the Finisher, E500/E711 (comminication error) was displayed. - E500 can be displayed when an ARCNET communication error occurs. - E711 can be displayed when the communication controller has detected a fault.
0013-7747

Field Remedy 1. There were cases where E227/E500/E732 was displayed due to low power voltage. Considering this, be sure to check if the supplied power voltage is within the allowable range, first. 2. Check to see if a terminator [1] is connected to the T-connector on the both sides of the signal cable between the main body (origin) and the Finisher (terminal); if not, connect the terminator to the connectors. If the terminator has been present, go though Step3 and Step4 below.

15-49

Chapter 15

F-15-71

3. Check to see if the cable between J551 of the DC controller PCB found in the main body and J107 of the ARCNET Interface is connected securely. 4. Check to see if the cable between J107 of the Finisher controller PCB and J4500 of the ARCNET Interface PCB is connected securely.

15.2.9.24 E503-0003 Communication error occurs between Professional-A1 and Finisher-V1/V2

[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description When performing a continuous punch job consisitng of 2000 to 4000 sheets of paper, the error code "E503-0003" was indicated. - E503-0003 can be displayed when a communication error occurs between the Finisher and the Professional Puncher.
0015-2577

Cause Because of a continuous punch job, the Punch Controller PCB increased in temperature adn changed the characteristics of its electrical part (photocoupler), causing an error in communicating with the Finisher Controller PCB. Field Remedy a. Preparatory work a-1. Check to see the connection of connectors between the Professional Puncher-A1 and the Finisher-V1 (Saddle Finisher-V2). a-2. Check to see the version number of the Punch Controller PCB and the Finisher Controller PCB. a-3. Check to see the type of the electrical part [1] on the Punch Controller PCB by referring to the printed notation [A]. The fifth alphabetic character from the right shows the type of the part.

F-15-72

b. In case the electrical part is "K" type b-1. If the Punch Controller PCB software is earlier than Ver. 6.01, update the software to Ver. 6.01 or later. b-2. If the Finisher Controller PCB software is earlier than earlier than Ver. 12.02, update the software to Ver. 12.02 or later. b-3. Turn OFF the 5th switch of DIPSW381 on the Finisher Controller PCB, and turn the main power switch OFF and then ON. (The communication speed will be changed.) c. In case the electrical part is other than "K" or "L" type c-1. Replace the Puncher Controller PCB by the one having a K type photo coupler. c-2. If the Punch Controller software is earlier than Ver. 6.01, update the software to Ver. 6.01 or later. c-3. If the Finisher Controller software is earlier than Ver. 12.02, update the software to Ver. 12.02 or later. c-4. Turn OFF the 5th switch of DIPSW381 on the Finisher Controller PCB, and then turn the main power switch OFF and then ON. (The communication speed will be changed.)
Setting of DIPSW (5th switch of SW381) PUNCH CONTROLLER PCB ASSY Ver. Ver.5.01 or earlier Ver.6.01 or later

15-50

Chapter 15

Ver.11.02 or earlier FINISHER CONTROLLER PCB ASSY Ver.12.02 or later

No impact when turning the switch ON/OFF

E503-0003 occurs

Turn ON the switch. * If the switch is turned OFF, E503-0003 occurs.

Turn OFF the switch. * If the switch is turned ON, E503-0003 occurs

Reference: When updating the Puncher Controller PCB software, connect a PC to this machine with RS232 cable (if there is no port, use RS232C conversion connector instead of the USB cable), and then perform the update procedure with the Hyper Terminal software. The Finisher Controller PCB software can be updated with SST. d. In case the electrical part is "L" type, the symptom described above does not occur.

15.2.9.25 E505-0001 is shared between Finisher-V1/V2 and Perfect Binder-A1

[ Manual-related ] Description The error code "E505-0001" (EEPROM error code) is used by both Finisher-V1/V2 and Perfect Binder-A1. On the first error indication screen, it is impossible to determine which option causes this code. To identify the trouble option, check to see the information displayed in the column "L" (location) in Service Mode > COPIER > Display > ERR. - Finisher error code"E505-0001": A fault exits in the data stored in the EEPROM on the Finisher Controller PCB. - Perfect Binder error code "E505-0001": The value written to EEPROM and the value read from it do not match.
0016-4103

15.2.9.26 E509-0003 occurs when replacing the master controller on Perfect Binder-A1
[ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the error code "E509-0003" was indicated when the master controller on a Perfect Binder-A1 was replaced with a new one. - E509-0003 can be displayed when the version of system software of this machine does not match with the version of optional controller of Perfect Binder; when software version mismatch occurs within Perfect Binder; or when the product number stored in the optional controller does not match with the product number noticed by Perfect Binder-A1. Field Remedy 1. Check the version of software of respective pieces of equipment with reference to "Software combination table."
T-15-2 Perfect Binder iR7105/7095/7086 Old model (Main controller older than Ver.50.00) Old model (Main controller older than Ver.50.00) New model (Main controller Ver.50.00 or later) Old OP-CNT (Older than Ver.10.00) Perfect Binder-A1 Old model (MASTER: Older than Ver.20.00) SLAVE: Older than Ver.20.00 CUTTER: Older than Ver.20.00)
0019-7347

Old DCNT (Older than Ver.30.00)

New model New DCNT (Ver.30.00 or later) New OP-CNT (Older than Ver.10.00) Same Firm (MASTER: Ver20.00 or later SLAVE: Ver20.00 or later CUTTER: Ver20.00 or later)

Old model Upgrade compliant

2. If a software mismatch was found, upgrade software in accordance with the "Software combination table."

15.2.9.27 E532-8001/E566-8002 J805 connector on Upper Door Switch (MSW71) found in Paper Folding Unit-D1 is disconnected
[ Case in the field ] Description Since J805 connector on the upper door switch (MSW71) found in the Paper Folding Unit-D1 was disconnected, the error code "E532" or "E566" was indicated just after the progress bar, which appeared upon power-on, ran the whole length. The displayed error code varied depending on the position of the stapler unit: if the unit was in the home position, "E532-8001" was indicated, and if it was out of the home position, "E566-8002" appeared.
0015-6721

15-51

Chapter 15

F-15-73

- E532-8002 can be displayed when the stapler HP sensor does not go off within 500 msec after the start-up of the staple shift motor. - E566-8002 can be displayed when the horizontal registration sensor does not go off within 5 sec after the start-up of the horizontal registration detection unit shift motor. Field Remedy When the foregoing error codes are indicated on a machine equipped with the Paper Holding Unit, check to see if J805 connector of the upper door switch (MSW71) is disconnected; if so, connect the connector again. WC4-5251 Microswitch

15.2.9.28 E532-8002/E531-8001 As jammed paper is pulled out, upper part of stapler unit of Finisher-V1/V2 gets stuck
[ Case in the field ] Description Since a jammed paper that was stuck in a stapler unit was pulled out forcedly, the upper part of the stapler unit got stuck, ultimately causing the error code "E532-8002" or "E531-8001." This symptom was not solved by turning the main power switch of this machine off/on because the stapler did not go back to the home position. - E532-8002 can be displayed when the stapler HP sensor does not go off within 500 msc after the start-up of the stapler shift motor. - E531-8001 can be displayed when the stapler HP sensor does not go on within 500 msec after the start-up of the stapler motor. Field Remedy When the error code mentioned above appears after a paper jam occurred at the stapler unit, turn the main power switch of this machine off/on twice. Reference: The first switch-off/on operation will awake the stapler, and the second operation will move it back to the home position (waste staple discharging position).
0019-8549

15.2.9.29 E540-8002 Description on position of Tray A Area Sensor

[ Manual-related ] Description As the solutions for the error code "E540-8002", the Service Manual of this machine describes the way of checking the connector of Tray A area sensor, the way of replacing that sensor, the way of replacing the finisher controller PCB, and others. But it does not have the description about the position of the sensor. When the error code appears, refer to the attached document to know the position of the sensor. The sensor can be referred to as UN19 in the document. Inside this machine, it exists in the form of printed circuit board.
0020-9948

15.2.9.30 E567-8001 Error Code is indicated upon startup: FU274 of Feeder Motor Driver PCB on Saddle Finisher-V2 blows
[ Case in the field ] Description Since FU274 on the Feeder Motor Driver PCB blew, M4 (buffer motor) and M7 (horizontal shift motor) failed to rotate, causing the error code "E567-8001." - E567-8001 can be displayed when the shift roller unit HP sensor does not go on within 5 sec after the start-up of the horizontal shift motor. Field Remedy 1. Check to see if FU274 on the Feeder Motor Driver PCB has continuity; if there is no continuity, replace the Feeder Motor Driver PCB by a new one. If there is continuity, go to Step 2 below. 2. Re-fit the connectors of the horizontal registration HP sensor (PS7) and the shift roller unit HP sensor (PS8). 3. Replace either the horizontal registration HP sensor or the Shift roller unit HP sensor by a new one. 4. Re-fit all the connectors of the Finisher Controller PCB; if the symptom still occurs, replace the Finisher Controller PCB by a new one. FM2-5698 Feeder Motor Driver PCB Assembly FK2-0149 Horizontal Registration HP Sensor (PS7)/Shift Roller Unit HP Sensor (PS8) FM2-5695 Finisher Controller PCB Assembly
0014-4087

15.2.9.31 E567-8001 : Due to faulty horizontal shift motor (M7) of Saddle Finisher-V2, fuse (FU274) on Feeder Motor Driver PCB blows
[ Case in the field ] Description Since the horizontal shift motor (M7) was faulty, the fuse (FU274) on the feeder motor driver PCB blew, consequently causing the error code "E567-8001." - E567-8001 can be displayed when the shift roller unit HP sensor does not go on within 5 sec after the start-up of the horizontal registration shift motor.
0022-1204

Field Remedy 1. Check if FU274 on the feeder motor drive PCB has electrical continuity; if it doesn't, replace the feeder motor driver PCB and the horizontal shift motor (M7) with new ones at the same time. If it has, go to step 2. Note: If the feeder motor driver PCB is replaced without replacing M7, FU274 may blow again. When replacing it, do not forget to replace M7 at the same time. 2. Re-fit the connector of the horizontal registration HP sensor (PS7) and the shift roller unit HP sensor (PS8). 3. Replace the horizontal registration HP sensor or the shift roller unit HP sensor with a new one. 4. If the symptom still occurs even after re-fitting of the connectors of the finisher controller PCB, replace the finisher controller PCB with a new one. FM2-5698 Feeder Motor Driver PCB Assembly FK2-1710 DC Stepping Motor

15-52

Chapter 15 FK2-0149 Horizontal Registration HP Sensor (PS7)/Shift Roller Unit HP Sensor (PS8) FM2-6428 Finisher Controller PCB Assembly

15.2.9.32 E578-8001 Error Code/110D Jam Code: Meshing failure occurs between rack and gear of variable lever found in Finisher-V1/V1L/V2/V2L
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since the variable lever did not move to push back the paper delivered toward the tray during the paper stack operation, the error code "E578-8001" was indicated. In this inspection case, the jam code "110D" was recorded as a jam history in service mode. - E578 can be displayed when the transport belt HP sensor does not go on within 5 sec after the start-up of the transport belt shift motor (M17). - 110D can be displayed when the paper does not leave the lower path sensor (UN24) within a specified period of time (distance) after the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) has detected paper. Cause In the Belt Control unit, the gear [1] meshed firmly with the rack [2]. This prevented the variable lever [3] from reaching the transport belt HP sensor even though the transport belt shift motor rotated.
0014-7780

F-15-74

Field Remedy Starting the Finisher units with the following serial numbers, the factory are making shipment after checking the engagement between the gear and the rack. When the symptom occurs with a Finisher unit having a serial number earlier than below, perform the procedure described in "Adjustment Procedure for the Mesh of the Rack and gear of the Variable Lever." (Serial numbers of the Finisher units) Finisher-V1 (280V UL): TFW01962 and later Finisher-V1 (230V EUR): TFX00426 and later Finisher-V2 (208V UL): TGE01521 and later Finisher-V2 (230V EUR): TGF00748 and later

15.2.9.33 E583-8001 is displayed when this machine starts: FU274 on Feeder Motor Driver PCB of Finisher-V1/V2 blows
[ Case in the field ] Description Since FU274 on the feeder motor driver PCB blew, the stack delivery auxiliary motor failed to operate, causing the error code "E583-8001." - E583-8001 can be displayed when the stack delivery auxiliary tray HP sensor does not go ON within 5 sec after the start-up of the stack delivery auxiliary motor. Field Remedy 1. Check FU274 on the feeder motor driver PCB for electrical continuity; if there is no electrical continuity, replace the feeder motor driver PCB with a new one. If there is electrical continuity, perform Step 2 and later. 2. Re-fit J629L connector of the stack delivery auxiliary motor (M13) and J617 connector of the stack delivery auxiliary tray HP sensor (PS14). 3. Replace the stack delivery auxiliary motor or the stack delivery auxiliary tray HP sensor with a new one. 4. Re-fit all the connectors of the Finisher Controller PCB; if the symptom still occurs, replace the PCB with a new one. FM2-5698 Feeder Motor Driver PCB Assembly FK2-0149 Photo-interrupter (Stack Delivery Auxiliary Tray HP Sensor) FK2-1716 Stepping DC Motor (Stack Delivery Auxiliary Motor) FM2-5695 Finisher Controller PCB Assembly
0020-5632

15.2.9.34 E5A4 : caused by locked press ball screw in trimming assembly, Perfect Binder-A1
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the field, E5A4 occurred in the machine equipped with Perfect Binder-A1. When the symptom occurs, follow the steps below. - E5A4 is displayed when the press motor (M36) rotation is abnormal. Cause Assumed cause is the inside of the screw nut [A] for the press ball screw at the trimming assembly is deformed, causing the screw nut to lock.
0023-1955

15-53

Chapter 15

Field Remedy If the affected machine is older than MVN00023(EU/O), MVM00049(US), follow the below "Replacing the Press Ball Screw", and replace the press ball screw with a new one. And at the same time, replace also fixing plate [1], sliding mount [2], guide shaft [3] and tension spring [4].

[Reference] If the press ball screw is changed into a new one, screw nut inside will not be easily deformed. 4A3-2483 SCREW, CUTTER BORE 4A3-2484 FIXING PLATE 4A3-2485 SLIDING MOUNT 4A3-2486 SHAFT, GUIDE 4S3-2155 SPRING, TENSION

15.2.9.35 E5AD-8001 Wire saddle is mounted onto hole for unlocking Book Stacking Assembly of Perfect Binder-A1
[ Case in the field ] Description Since a wire saddle was mistakenly mounted on to the hole used to unlock the lock of the Book Stacking Assembly of the Perfect Binder-A1, the tip of the wire saddle unlocked the lock of the assembly, causing the error code "E5AD-8001."
0016-4210

F-15-75

- E5AE-8001 can be displayed when the stack door open sensor (S98) has detected a door open state while the stack door is locked. Field Remedy Check to see if something that pushes the unlock arm is mounted onto the hole for unlocking the lock of the Book Stacking Assembly; if so, remove it. Note: This hole is used to unlock the lock of the book stacking assembly manually.

15-54

Chapter 15

15.2.9.36 E5B5-8002/E5AB-8003 occurs because spread glue amount is excessive: How to perform glue amount adjustment (adjustment by stack thickness) on Perfect Binder-A1
[ Manual-related ] Description Since the spread glue amount was excessive, this machine indicated the error code "E5B5-8002" due to adhesion of the book-block to the main gripper at the gluing process, and "E5AB-8003" due to adhesion of cut waste to the trimming blade at the trimming process. - E5B5-8002 can be displayed when the inlet path sensor (S92T/S92L) fails to detect the presence of paper. - E5AB-8003 can be displayed when the binding lift tray lock sensor (S102) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after motor rotation. Cause The spread glue amount seemed to be improper at the thick coating operation (when the glue vat moved from the front side to the rear side.) Field Remedy When the symptom has occurred, go through the procedure described in the attachment. - Increasing the setting value will increase the spread glue amount. (The distance between the spine and the drop stick becomes long.) - Decreasing the setting value will decrease the spread glue amount. (The distance between the spine and the drop stick becomes short.) - The adjustment range is '-1' to '1' (unit: mm), and the display value is '-20' to '20' (1=0.05mm). Reference: The spread glue amount adjustment (by stack thickness) is performed to adjust the distance between the spine and the drop stick for the thick coating operation.
0016-0226

15.2.9.37 E5B5-8013 Registration sensors of Perfect Binder-A1 have poor sensitivity

[ Case in the field ] Description Since the error code "E5B5-8013" was displayed, the optical sensors adjustment was performed for solution. - E5B5-8013 can be displayed when the registration sensors (S88T/S88L) failed to detect the absence of paper. Field Remedy 1. Check if there are foreign substances at the registration area or on the transmission sensors of cutter block; if any, remove them. 2. If the symptom still occurs, perform the "Sensor Adjustments." 3. If the symptom still occurs, replace the sensors, and then perform the "Sensor Adjustments" again. 4H3-0152 LED Receive Sensor PCB Assembly 4H3-0151 LED Sensor
0020-4679

15.2.9.38 E5B5-8017 : due to damage of glew roller cable, Perfect Binder-A1

[ Case in the field ] Description In the field, E5B5-8017 occurred in the machine equipped with Perfect Binder-A1. When the similar symptom occurs, follow the steps below. - E5B5-8017 : The sub gripper paper sensor (S39) has not detected the absence of paper. Field Remedy Check the glew roller cable of the sub grip assembly, if it is damaged, replace it with a new one. 4H3-0317 CABLE, GLEW ROLLER
0023-1952

15.2.9.39 E5BB-0005 : Spine Plate Closed Sensor (S69) of Perfect Binder-A1 has broken cable wire
[ Case in the field ] Description Since the spine plate closed sensor (S69) had a broken cable wire, the error code "E5BB-0005" was displayed. - E5BB-0005 can be displayed when the spine bending home position sensor (right) (S66) and the spine plate closed sensor (S69) are on at the same moment. Field Remedy 1. Re-fit the connectors of the spine plate closed sensor (S69) and the spine bending home position sensor (S66) to check to see if the error code disappears. 2. If the error code still persists, check if the cable wires of those sensors have been broken; if so, replace the sensor cables. - Cable of the spine plate closed sensor (S69): 4H3-0362 - Cable of the spine bending home position sensor (S66): 4H3-0361 4H3-0362 Spine Bending Sensor Cable 4H3-0361 Sensor Cable
0020-9950

15.2.9.40 E5D4-8007 Error in gluing: Packing tape is not removed during installation of Perfect Binder-A1
[ Case in the field ] Description Since the strips of packing tape [A] and [B] were not removed from the gripper assembly during installation of the Perfect Binder-A1, the error code "E5D48007" or an error in gluing occurred.
0016-4207

F-15-76

- E5D4-8007 can be displayed when the stack delivery sensor (S64T/S64L) does not turn on even after driving the main gripper motor for a specified period of time to deliver a stack to and from the stack delivery roller. Field Remedy When the same symptom occurs during installation, referring to the installation procedure again, check to see if all the packing tape and fixing members are removed.

15-55

Chapter 15

15.2.9.41 E5F1-8001 Error code with 104A/114B/147 Jam Code when performing saddle-stitch job using out-of-spec heavy paper on Saddle Finisher-V2
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since a saddle-stitch job was performed using out-of-spec heavy paper, the stopper on the inner diameter of the 17T gear mounted on the folding roller found in the saddle assembly broke, causing the error code "E5F1-8001." In this inspection case, the jam code 104A/114B/1147 was also displayed frequently depending on timing. - E5F1-8001 can be displayed when the folding/transport motor rotation sensor does not go on for 1 sec after the start-up of the folding/transport motor. - 104A: Saddle pre-pressing sensor delay. - 114B: Saddle pre-pressing sensor stationary - 1147: Saddle vertical path sensor stationary Cause Since out-of-spec heavy paper was used, heavy load was applied to the 17T gear when feeding the paper, the stopper on the inner diameter of the gear broke. Field Remedy 1. Check to see if the stopper on the inner diameter of the 17T gear [1] breaks.
0020-5640

F-15-77

2. If the stopper is broken, replace the gear with a new one. Reference: The 17T gear with thicker stopper is used for the following machines: - Saddle Finisher-V2 (208V): TGC00130 and later - Saddle Finisher-V2 (230V): TGF01303 and later FU6-0987 17T gear

15.2.9.42 E711-0001 Message "Check the finisher." is displayed: FU414 on AC Fuse Box PCB on Finisher-V1/V1L/V2/V2L blows
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description When updating the Professional Puncher-A1 that is connected to the iR7105 together with the Saddle Finisher-V2, FU414 (rating: 2.5A) [1] on the AC Fuse Box PCB of the Finisher blew, causing the error code "E711-0001." When the power switch of the Finisher was turned OFF and then ON, the message "Check the finisher." was displayed. When the symptom occurs, perform the following field remedy.
0015-2773

F-15-78

Cause Since the Puncher side connector [2] of the communication cable (D-SUB) connecting the Puncher and the Finisher was re-fit or disconnected with the power switch of the Finisher being ON, a short-circuit was caused between 5V pin and GND. Note: When turning ON the Finisher, be sure not to disconnect or re-fit the communication cable. Also, be sure that the connectors of the cable are fixed securely with the setscrews [3]. Reference: [4] is the connector for downloading software.

15-56

Chapter 15

F-15-79

Field Remedy 1. Turn the Finisher OFF. 2. Disconnect all the connectors of the AC Fuse Box PCB o the Finisher, and then check the electrical continuity of FU414. 3. If no electrical continuity is confirmed, replace the AC Fuse Box PCB of the Finisher by a new one. 4. Lock the connection connectors (anti-loosening measure) so that the communication cable is connected firmly. 5. Turn the Finisher ON. If it is necessary to update the Professional Puncher, update it in this state. FM2-5700 AC Fuse Box PCB Assembly

15.2.9.43 E721-0061 occurs upon power-on after installing iR7105s V2 and Perfect Binder-A1
[ Case in the field ] Description In the field, the error code "E721-0061" was indicated upon power-on after installing an iR7105s V2 unit and a Perfect Binder-A1 unit. - E721-0061 can be displayed when the combination of the engine controller of Ver. 50.00 or later and the Perfect Binder optional controller of earlier than Ver. 10.00 is detected. Cause The version of system software on this machine did not match with that of optional controller on Perfect Binder-A1. In the above-mentioned field case, this machine had system software of version 53.01, and Perfect Binder had the optional controller software of version 1.27, and thus, the optional controller software was upgraded to Ver. 10.07. Field Remedy 1. Check the software version of respective pieces of equipment with reference to "Software combination table."
T-15-3 Perfect Binder iR7105/7095/7086 Old model (Main controller older than Ver.50.00) Old model (Main controller older than Ver.50.00) New model (Main controller Ver.50.00 or later) Old OP-CNT (Older than Ver.10.00) Perfect Binder-A1 Old model (MASTER: Older than Ver.20.00) SLAVE: Older than Ver.20.00 CUTTER: Older than Ver.20.00)
0019-7343

Old DCNT (Older than Ver.30.00)

New model New DCNT (Ver.30.00 or later) New OP-CNT (Older than Ver.10.00) Same Firm (MASTER: Ver20.00 or later SLAVE: Ver20.00 or later CUTTER: Ver20.00 or later)

Old model Upgrade compliant

2. If a version mismatch was found, upgrade software of the optional equipment in accordance with information in the software combination table.

15.2.9.44 E730/E503 Error Code occurs with machine equipped with such delivery options as Finisher and so on: Because delivery options are shut down in wrong order
[ Manual-related ] Description When shutting down a machine equipped with delivery options, such an communication error as E730 or E503 may occurs depending on the order of the delivery options turned off. - E730 Error Code: Communication error with the external controller. - E503 Error Code: Communication error between the Finisher and the Professional Puncher. Field Remedy When turning OFF the power of the main body and delivery options, follow the order below: 1. Main body 2. High-capacity Stacker and Finisher (in random order) 3. Professional Puncher (non-Japanese nodel only)
0012-9482

15.2.9.45 E732 Error Code: Occurs at irregular-size original stream-reading with DADF-Q1 in use
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description When making a copy of an irregular-size original (specifically, 210mm210mm) with the stream reading function in use, E732 Error Code was displayed; however, this symptom was solved by upgrading the ROM of the DADF to Ver. 02.03.
0013-1631

15-57

Chapter 15 - E732 Error Code can be displayed when a communication error occurs between the reader unit and the Main controller PCB. Cause The machine causes a false detection of the irregular size original, and fails to output the image leading edge signal at the correct time. Field Remedy When the symptom has occurred, check the version of the DADF ROM; if it is earlier than Ver. 02.03, upgrade it.

15.2.9.46 E732-0001 Error Code: Because J1702 connector of Relay PCB has poor contact
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description In the field, E732-0001 Error Code occurred because J1702 connector of the relay PCB had poor contact. - E732-0001 Error Code can be displayed when a communication error occurs between the reader and the main controller PCB.
0013-3944

Field Remedy 1. When E732-0001 Error Code has occurred after re-fitting connectors of the relay PCB during a service work, check J1702 connector of the PCB for poor contact; if it is not connected securely, refit it. 2. If the symptom still occurs, refit the connectors of the reader communication cable.

15.2.9.47 E732-0001 Error Code occurs upon installation: Left reader power supply cable has poor contact
[ Case in the field ] Description When the main power switch was turned ON to check the operation of the machine upon installation, E732-0001 was displayed. This was because the reader power supply cable (left) had poor contact. - E732-0001 can be displayed when a communication error occcurs between the reader and the Main Controller PCB. Field Remedy Although a fault of the Reader Controller PCB in the reader side, the Reader I/F PCB, or the Main Controller PCB in the main body side is conceviable as the cause, before replacing these PCB's check the reader power supply cable (left) between the reader and the main body for poor contact. FM2-5642 Reader Power Supply Cable, L
0013-7751

15.2.9.48 E733-0001 Error Code: Poor contact between Main Controller PCB and Video Controller PCB
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since there was poor contact between the Main Controller PCB and the Video Controller PCB, the error code "E733" was indicated. When the symptom occurs, perform the following field remedy. - E733 can be displayed when a communication error occurs between the DC controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB. Field Remedy 1. Re-fit the Vide Controller PCB on the Main Controller PCB. 2. Re-fit J1401 (28 pins) of the Video Controller PCB. 3. Re-fit the connector (28 pins) on the lower left of the Main Controller PCB.
0014-4434

15.2.9.49 E748-4910 Error Code: Different Main Controller PCB is mounted

[ Manual-related ] Description In this series, the Main Controller PCB varies depending on the model and, thus, when a different Main Controller PCB was mounted on a machine in the field, the error code "E748" was indicated. When replacing the Main Controller PCB, be sure to use the PCB that has compatibility with the machine. - E748-4910 can be displayed when the machine detects an unsuitable Main Controller PCB. Field Remedy When replacing the Main Controller PCB in the field, be sure to select the suitable one by referring to the following information. FM2-7517: Main Controller PCB Assembly (for iR7105) FM2-5423: Main Controller PCB Assembly (for iR7079/7086) FM2-5424: Main Controller PCB Assembly (for iR7095P)
0014-1422

15.2.9.50 E840 Error Code: J553 connector on DC controller PCB has poor contact
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since J553 connector on the DC controller PCB has poor contact, E840 Error code occurred. When this error code appears after re-fitting the DC controller PCB or its connect during a service work, perform the following field remedy.
0013-5114

F-15-80

- E840 Error Code can be displayed when an HP detection error has occurred in relation to the fixing inlet sensor (fixing wrap jam detection).

15-58

Chapter 15 Field Remedy 1. On the DC controller PCB, re-fit J553 connector. At the same time, re-fit J552 and J508 connectors that are associated with this error code. 2. On the fixing inlet sensor ascent/decent motor driver PCB, re-fit J4001, and J4002 connectors. 3. If the symptom still occurs, suspect a fault of the fixing inlet sensor ascent/descent motor (M21) or the fixing inlet sensor ascent/descent motor driver PCB.

15.2.10 Alarm Code 15.2.10.1 300003 Alarm Code: Due to foreign substance under charging wire of Transfer/separation Charging Assembly
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since foreign substance existed under the charging wire on the separation side of the transfer/separation charging assembly, electrical leakage occurred between the charging wire and the foreign substance, resulting in 300003 Alarm Code. - 300003 Alarm Code is kept as an alarm history when separation charging assembly leakage occurs. Field Remedy 1. Check the transfer/separation charging assembly for foreign substance; if foreign substance exists, remove it. 2. If there is no foreign substance, check if there is a trace of electrical leakage between the charging wire and the charging assembly; if there is the trace, either replace the charging wire or clean the shield plate. FG6-8733 Transfer/separation Corona Assembly
0013-4921

15.2.11 FAX # Code 15.2.11.1 #857 FAX Error Code is displayed when printing
[ Manual-related ] Description Since a print job was not completed normally, the FAX error code "#857" was displayed in System Monitor > Log > Details. - #857 can be displayed when data reception times out or the job is canceled at the host. Field Remedy Check the network condition, and then run the print job again.
0016-4313

15.2.12 Specifications-related FAQ 15.2.12.1 FAQ on Main Unit Specifications 15.2.12.1.1 Assist roller1, 2 and 3 stand off: Finisher/Saddle Finisher
[ Manual-related ] Description The assist roller 1, 2 and 3 are exclusively used for feeding the postcard. In a postcard job, the assist roller shift solenoids (SL4, 5, and 6) are turned ON in response to a postcard feed signal from the main body, and then shift the assist rollers for application of pressure. Therefore, the assist rollers always stand off except when they are feeding a postcard.
0012-9416

15.2.12.1.2 Description on installation order of optional equipment (for iR7105i/ iR7095i/ iR7086N)
[ Manual-related ] Field Remedy When installing this machine and optional equipment at the same time, first, install this machine, and then install optional equipment in accordance with the order below.
0012-9417

F-15-81

1. Side paper Deck [1] (For installation procedure, refer to the Installation Manual of this equipment.). 2. High-capacity Stacker [2] (For installation procedure, refer to the Installation Manual of this equipment.). 3. Finisher [3] and Saddle Finisher [4] (For installation procedure, refer to the Installation Manual of each equipment.). 4. Finisher Accesories Power Supply Unit [5] (For installation procedure, refer to the Installation Manual of this equipment.). 5. Inner Puncher Unit [6] (For installation procedure, refer to the Installation Manual of this equipment.). 6. Paper Folding Unit [7] (For installation procedure, refer to the Installation Manual of this equipment.). 7. Professional Puncher (Non-Japanese model only. For installation procedure, refer to the Installation Manual of this equipment.). 8. Inserter [9] (For installation procedure, refer to the Installation Manual of this equipment.). 9. Trimmer [10] (For installation procedure, refer to the Installation Manual of this equipment.). Note: The inner Puncher Unit [6] and the Professional Puncher [8] (for non-Japanese model only) are not installed at the same time.

15-59

Chapter 15

15.2.12.1.3 Description on installation order of optional equipment ( for iR7086B/ iR7105B)

[ Manual-related ] Field Remedy When installing this machine and optional equipment at the same time, first, install this machine, and then install optional equipment in accordance with the order below.
0012-9419

F-15-82

1. Side Paper Deck [1] ( For installation procedure, refer to the Installation Manual of this equipment.). 2. High-capacity Stacker [2] (For installation peocedure, refer to the Insatalltion Manual of this equipmnet.). 3. Finisher [3] and Saddle Finisher [4] (For installation procedure, refer to the Installation Manual of each equipment.). 4. Finisher Accessories Power Supply Unit [5] (For installation procedure, refer to the Installation Manual of this equipment.). 5. Inner puncher Unit [6] (For installation procedure, refer to the Installation Manual of this equipment.). 6. Paper Folding Unit [7] (For installation procedure, refer to the Installation Manual of this equipment.). 7. Professsional Puncher (Non-Japanese model only. For installation procedure, refer to the Installation Manual of this equipment.). 8. Inserter [9] (For installation procedure, refer to the Installation Manual of this equipment.). 9. Trimmmer [10] (For installation procedure, refer to the Installation Manual of this equipment.). Note: The Inner Puncher Unit [6] and the Professional Puncher [8] (for non-Japanese model only) are not installed at the same time.

15.2.12.1.4 Description on image centering function in Image Repeat mode

[ Manual-related ] Description This machine offers the image-centering function in Image Repeat mode. To use this function, make the following selections in sequence on the Copy screen, and then set margins of the image: [Special Features > Image Creation > Image Repeat > Margin Settings]. When selecting [Independent Adjustment] mode, all 4 margins can be set independently to any value as well as "0".
0012-9477

15.2.12.1.5 When installing, front side of Main body and Saddle Finisher-V2 do not line up: Because rear and front latch supports are attached in other way round
[ Manual-related ] Description When connecting the Finisher to the main body, the front and rear latch supports were attached in the other way round. This prevented the front side of the Finisher and the main body from lining up. Field Remedy When the symptom has occurred, re-fit the latch supports to the correct position.
0012-9852

15.2.12.1.6 When setting Double Staple, Offset function does not work
[ Manual-related ] Description Because of a specification constraint of this machine, the offset function does not work when selecting [Double] as the staple position under [Finishing > Offset > Staple]. In order to enable this function, select [Corner] as the staple position.
0013-1626

15.2.12.1.7 When using tab paper, machine cannot perform Face Up (Reverse) delivery
[ Manual-related ] Description Even when Face Up (Reverse) delivery is selected under User mode > Common Setting > Standard Local Print Settings > Face Up > Face Down, if tab paper is selected as the type of used paper, the printed tab paper is delivered in its face down (i.e., in normal delivery). This is because if the tab papers are output in their face up, their edges are not flush due to their tab. To ensure the edge alignment of tab papers to some extent, this machine was designed to deliver the tab paper in its face down (i.e., in normal delivery).
0013-1995

15.2.12.1.8 Punch hole position cannot be adjusted: Punch Unit-U1

[ Case in the field ] Description Since the punch hole position was adjusted referring to the procedure for adjusting the paper stop position, the hole position varied about 3mm between output sheets. The foregoing procedure is used not to adjust the punch hole position but to adjust the amount of arch that a sheet of paper creates when it is hit on the stopper inside the punch unit for prevention of skew feeding. Field Remedy 1. When adjusting the punch hole position, referring to "Adjusting the Punch Hole Position (in the direction of paper movement)", relocate the rear stopper. Note: Normally, the center of punch hole is 12mm+/-1mm away from the paper edge; however, this distance can be increased up to 14mm (i.e., the adjustable range is 12mm to 14mm). 2. If the position of rear stopper is adjusted in Step 1, referring to "Adjusting the Paper Stop Position", move the paper stop position by just the same distance
0013-4915

15-60

Chapter 15 that the rear stopper was moved by. Note: Too small amount of arch does not allow the edges of output sheets to be flush; however, too large amount of arch will cause a paper jam.

15.2.12.1.9 How to temporarily disable Punch unit

[ Manual-related ] Description The following field remedy temporarily disables the machine for recognizing the Punch unit inside the Finisher for problem identification. Field Remedy 1. Open the front cover of the Finisher, remove the 1 screw, and then detach the option switch cover. 2. Turn OFF all 3 switches to the left of the Dipswitch (SW381) on the option switch PCB assembly (i.e., set all those switches in the bottom position).
0013-4920

15.2.12.1.10 Procedure to be performed when punch hole position is moved in horizontal registration direction: Punch Unit-U1
[ Manual-related ] Description When adjusting the punch hole postion in the horizontal registration direction, use the service mode item of this machine "PNCH-T". Field Remedy 1. Measure the position of punched hole. - In case of 2-hole punch: Measure how far the center of the 2 holed is from the paper center in the front-to-rear direstion.. - In case of 3-hole punch: Measure how far the center of the middle hole is from the paper cneter in the front-to-rear direction.
0013-5212

F-15-83

2. Based on the result of measurement performed in Step 1, change the value of the following service mode item: Service mode > SORTER > Adjust > PNCHY. The adjustable range of this mode is between -5 and +5 (unit: 0.45mm).

15.2.12.1.11 In ADF copying, copy speed (productivity) varies between manual paper selection mode and auto paper selection mode
[ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description Since the service mode item [SCANSLCT] was set to '1', the copy speed (i.e., productivity) in manual paper selection mode got slower than that in auto paper selection mode. Cause When the foregoing service mode item is set to '1', the machine stops the original on the copyboard glass for scanning in manual paper selection mode, while it uses the stream reading method in auto paper selection mode. This difference in the scanning method may result in the difference of copy speed. Field Remedy When the user complains about this symptom, check the setting of [SCANSLCT]. 1. Service mode (Level 2) > COPIER > Option > BODY > SCANSLCT 2. If [SCANSLCT] is set to '1', change it to '0'. Reference: [SCANSLCT] is used to switch ON or OFF the function to compute the scan area on the basis of the size of the selected paper. Depending on the setting of this mode, the function is switched as follows: - '0': OFF (determine the scan area based on the original detection; default) - '1': ON (determine the scan area based on the paper size)
0014-1438

15.2.12.1.12 "J20" is indicated on LED display on Finisher Controller PCB, and 1420 Jam Code is recorded as jam history in service mode
[ Manual-related ] Description When a jam or an error occurs at the Finisher, the machine indicates the jam or the error using the LED display on the Finisher Controller PCB. At the same time, it shows such the jam or the error under [Display] in service mode as a jam or error history; however, the indication differs between the LED displays and the service mode screen. (This is for your information, but "J20" displayed in this field case means the power-on jam.) On the LED display, a jam or an error is indicated as follows: a. Jam Code (Take the jam code "1420" (power-on jam) as an example.) The LED display indicates it as "J20" by taking the last 2 figures of the indication in service mode "1420." b. Error Code (take the error code "E0505-0007" (a fault in the Finisher Controller PCB) as an example) The LED display indicates it as "E0507" by taking the last 2 figures of the error code "E0505" and the sub code "0007" shown in service mode.
0014-1439

15.2.12.1.13 Description on actual dimension of Machine (including power code)

[ Manual-related ] Description When installing this machine, be sure to perform dimensional measurement on the entrance of the user's office in advance. In the field, this dimensional measurement was not performed, and thus a machine could not pass through the entrance of the user's office on the very day of installation. The following are the dimension of this machine and the Finisher.
0014-1506

15-61

Chapter 15 - This machine: 1163mm (W) 831mm (D; the distance from the surface of the emblem on the front cover to the power code which is rolled up with its base folded reasonably) 1180mm (H) - Finisher: 801mm (W) 830mm (D) 1180mm (H); If the tray is removed, the width is decreased to 678mm.

15.2.12.1.14 Description on service mode item used to switch between stream reading and fized reading
[ Manual-related ] Description In order to switch between stream reading and fixed reading, use the following service mode item: [Service mode > FEEDER > Option > DOC-F-SW]. Depending on the setting of this item, the scanning method varies as follows: 0: Stream reading (default) 1: Stream reading for small size only (i.e., fixed reading is used fo large size) 2: Fixed reading Note: The following service mode item is used to enable/ disable the dust detection function for stream reading: [Service mode > COPIER >Option > BODY > DF-BLINE].
0014-1507

15.2.12.1.15 Procedure performed after replacing EEPROM (IC107) on Finisher Controller PCB
[ Manual-related ] Description After replacing the EEPROM on the Finisher Controller PCB, perform the following adjustments referring to the field remedy below. Field Remedy 1. Turn the power switch of the Finisher ON, and then turn the main power switch of this machine ON to let the machine go into the standby state. 2. Open the front door of the Finisher, and insert the door switch tool into the door switch [1].
0014-2097

F-15-84

3. Remove the 1 screw [2] to detach the switch cover [1].

F-15-85

4. Set the DIP SW382 [1] on the Switch PCB as shown in the figure.

15-62

Chapter 15

F-15-86

Pressing the following switches once in the order of the following will initialize the EEPROM: [SW385 > SW384 > SW383]. 5. Perform the following adjustments. - Sensor intensity adjustment - Swing guide speed adjustment - Aligning plate width adjustment - Stapling position (rear 1-point) adjustment - Stapling position (front 1-point) adjustment - Stapling position (2-point) adjustment - Stapled stacks delivery (lower delivery) adjustment - Stapled stacks delivery (saddle delivery) adjustment - Transfer belt position adjustment - Saddle lead edge stopper position adjustment - Saddle binding position adjustment - Saddle holding position adjustment - Punch hole position (horizontal registration direction) adjustment - Punch hole position (paper movement direction) adjustment

15.2.12.1.16 How to initialize EEPROM (IC107) on Finisher Controller PCB found in Finisher-V1/V2
[ Manual-related ] Description The EEPROM on the Finisher Controller PCB can be initialized by turning on (i.e., set at the top position) No. 1 through No.7 of DIP SW382 on the Switch PCB, and then pushing the following switches once in the following order: [SW385 > SW384 > SW383]. After initializing, be sure to perform the following adjustments. Field Remedy 1. Turn the power switch of the Finisher ON, and then turn the main power switch of this machine ON to let the machine go into the standby state. 2. Open the front door of the Finisher, and insert the door switch tool into the door switch [1].
0014-4093

F-15-87

3. Remove the 1 screw [2] to detach the switch cover [1].

15-63

Chapter 15

F-15-88

4. Set the DIP SW382 [1] on the Switch PCB as shown in the figure.

F-15-89

Pressing the following switches once in the order of the following will initialize the EEPROM: [SW385 > SW384 > SW383]. 5. After initializing, perform the following adjustments. - Sensor intensity adjustment - Swing guide speed adjustment - Aligning plate width adjustment - Stapling position (rear 1-point) adjustment - Stapling position (front 1-point) adjustment - Stapling position (2-point) adjustment - Stapled stacks delivery (lower delivery) adjustment - Stapled stacks delivery (saddle delivery) adjustment - Transfer belt position adjustment - Saddle lead edge stopper position adjustment - Saddle binding position adjustment - Saddle holding position adjustment - Punch hole position (horizontal registration direction) adjustment - Punch hole position (paper movement direction) adjustment

15.2.12.1.17 Description on settings that are cleared when upgrading System Software
[ Manual-related ] Description The settings to be cleared vary depending on the relation of the versions of system software between before and after upgrading. a. When System Software is upgraded from earlier than Ver. 2.XX to Ver. 10.XX or later, or from earlier than Ver. 13.XX to Ver. 20.XX or later, the following settings will be cleared: - Copy > Special Features > Recall - Copy > Special Features > Mode Memory - Add.Func > Copy Settings > Standard Settings - Mail Box > Print > Change Pr. Settings > Special Features > Mode Memory - Mail Box > Scan > Change Pr. Settings > Mode Memory - Add.Func > Mail Box Settings > Standard Scan Settings - Scan> Recall - Add.Func > Communication Settings > Register Favorites Button Reference: This data can be restored by setting from RUI (Add.Func. > Import/Export > Forwarding Settings). b. When upgrading from Ver. 2.XX to Ver. 10.XX, System Software is overwritten. Therefore, all the settings for user mode and service mode are maintained.
0014-6675

15.2.12.1.18 Counter values of Perfect Binder-A1 (PB-A1) do not appear on P-PRINT printouts generated from this machine
[ Manual-related ] Description
0015-8334

15-64

Chapter 15 When generating P-PRINT printouts after upgrading system software, all the counter values of PB-A1 were '0.' In this field case, the applicable counter items were "ST-DT-VR (stack thickness detection count)", "BND-CUT (trimming count)", and "CUT-HLDR (trimming blade usage count)." Cause Since the main power switch of PB-A1 was not turned OFF/On after software upgrade, this machine failed to obtain the information of the equipment correctly. Field Remedy When upgrading software or performing counter clear, turn OFF/ON the power switch of optional equipment as well as this machine. Reference: In the initial state, this machine resets all the counter values of PB-A1 stored in the DC Controller PCB to '0' and corrects the information of the counter values in the initial communication with this equipment (this is true of other optional equipment).

15.2.12.1.19 In Transparency (OHT) Interleaving mode, plain paper is not inserted between transparencies: High Volume Stack Mode is set to ON
[ Manual-related ] Description - In case High Volume Stack Mode is set to OFF Regardless of Tray Designation setting, in Transparency Interleaving mode, all sheets of paper are output to Tray A (upper tray). - In case High Volume Stack Mode is set to ON This machine is so designed that it outputs all sheets of paper on Tray B (lower tray) first: because of a specification constraint, however, transparency cannot go into the process tray of the Finisher. Therefore, the Finisher forcedly outputs transparency to Tray A and plain paper to Tray B. Reference: - Tray Designation setting: Additional Functions > Common Settings > Tray Designation - High Volume Stack mode: Additional Functions > Common settings > High Volume Stack Mode
0016-4102

15.2.12.1.20 Perfect Binder-A1 fails to perform simplex-printing booklet job sent from printer driver
[ Manual-related ] Description Direct operation on this machine enables the Perfect Binder-A1 to run a booklet job in both simplex and duplex printing modes; however, this optional equipment, because of a specification constraint, performs a booklet job only in duplex printing mode in case the job is sent from the printer driver in a PC. In order to make the equipment perform a simplex-printing booklet job via the printer driver, store the data into an In-Box of this machine and then create a booklet in simplex-printing mode. Field Remedy 1. Send the data to an In-Box of this machine via the printer driver. 1-1. Printer Driver > Properties > Page Setup > Output Method > select "Store" > "Store Destination" > specify the document name for the data > specify a BOX number > OK > OK > OK. 2. Select the data from the In-Box, and then create a booklet in simplex printing mode.
0017-9124

15.2.12.1.21 Necessary step upon changing paper size in side paper deck-X1
[ Manual-related ] Description In the host machine equipped with Side Paper Deck-X1, the machine can not automatically recognize the paper size loaded in Side Paper Deck-X1 even by adjusting the size switch plates (Back Size Switch Plate A, the Front Size Switch Plate, and the Back Size Switch Plate B). When changing the paper to different size, perform the following. Field Remedy Additional Functions > Common Settings > Register Sizes for Side Paper Deck, select the paper size, and press OK.
0022-3506

15.2.12.1.22 Settings to accept print job and remote scan job with unknown IDs
[ Case in the field ] Description To allow printing job from the printer driver or remote scan job from PC that does not correspond with a registered Dept. ID, perform the following settings. [Note] Earn verification from the system manager first before changing the settings.
0022-5280

Field Remedy 1. Additional Functions > System Settings > Dept. ID Management > ON, to receive print job, set ON for "Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown Ids", and to receive remote scan job, set ON for "Allow Remote Scan Jobs with Unknown Ids". 2. Remove check mark from Printer Driver Property > Device Settings > Job Accounting.

15.2.12.1.23 Function of LED of main controller PCB assembly

[ Manual-related ] Description There are 3 LED in the main controller PCB assembly. Each function is described in the following. But since there are various patterns, if the description below does not meet your condition, please use them as reference only. And, depending on the model, there is also case when LED is not mounted. a. LED2: an LED to ON/OFF software LED is turned ON: bootROM normally activates LED is blinking: there is some trouble in bootROM LED is turned OFF: bootROM is not activated a-1. If LED blinks or OFF, the problem might be that DIMM doesnt contact well, hence refit the DIMM. b. LED8: check the interruptive 5V supply LED is turned ON: interruptive 5V is supplied from the machine LED is turned OFF: interruptive 5V isn't supplied from the machine b-1. If LED is turned OFF, the problem might be that there is problem in the remote signal (harness) of the DC power supply assembly or the main controller PCB assembly, hence replace the DC power supply assembly with a new one. b-2. If the symptom still occurs, replace the main controller PCB assembly with a new one. c. LED9: Check the un-interruptive 3.3 V supply LED is turned ON: un-interruptive 3.3V is supplied from the machine LED is turned OFF: un-interruptive 3.3V isn't supplied from the machine c-1. If LED is turned OFF, the problem might be in the DC power supply assembly, hence replace the DC power supply assembly with a new one. WA7-3617 DIMM (Old type) FK2-2311 DIMM (New type) FM2-5084 DC POWER SUPPLY PCB ASSEMBLY(iR7105 208V UL/iR7095 208V UL/iR7086 208V UL/iR7095P 208V UL) FG6-7238 DC POWER SUPPLY PCB ASSEMBLY(iR7105 EXCEPT 208V UL/iR7095 XCEPT 208V UL/iR7086 EXCEPT 208V UL/iR7095P EXCEPT 208V UL)
0023-1962

15-65

Chapter 15 FM2-5423 MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y(Old type iR7095 208V UL/230V ASIA/220V CN/230V GB/230V EUR/230V AU/iR7086 208V UL/230V GB/ 230V AU/230V EUR) FM2-5424 MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y(Old type iR7095P 208V UL/230V GB/230V AU/230V EUR) FM2-7517 MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y(Old type iR7105 208V UL/230V ASIA/230V GB/220V CN/230V AU/230V EUR ) FM3-3851 MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y(New type iR7095 208V UL/230V ASIA/220V CN/230V GB/230V AU/iR7086 208V UL/ 230V GB/230V AU/230V EUR) FM3-3852 MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y(New type iR7105 208V UL/ 230V ASIA/230V GB/220V CN/230V AU/230V EUR) FM3-3853 MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS'Y(New type iR7095P 208V UL/ 230V GB/230V AU/230V EUR )

15.2.12.2 FAQ on LIPS Specifications 15.2.12.2.1 How to transfer License Option (LMS)
[ Case in the field ] Description In order to use license options such as SEND, Print and others in a new machine after because of replacement of the original machine, licenses of such options have to be transferred to the new machine. Field Remedy 1. Invalidate the license of an option that are used with the original machine and obtain an invalidation certificate key. 2. Obtain a new license key for the new machine. 3. Install the new license key in the new machine. For more details, refer to the attached "How to Invalidate and Transfer A License."
0021-2113

15.3 Outline of Electrical Components

15.3.1 Clutch/Solenoid 15.3.1.1 Clutches
1. Reader Unit The reader unit does not use clutches. 2. Printer Unit
T-15-4 Connector No. Notation CL1 CL2 CL3 CL4 CL5 CL6 CL7 CL8 CL9 CL10 CL11 CL12 CL13 CL14 CL15 CL16 CL17 CL18 CL19 CL20 Parts Name. Magnet roller drive cluch Registration clutch Registration brake clutch Development 1 clutch Pre-registration clutch Pre-registration brake clutch Manual feed tray pickup roller clutch Vertical path 1 clutch Vertical path 2 clutch Deck (right) pickup clutch Deck (left) pickup clutch Cassette 3 pickup clutch Vertical path 3 clutch Cassette 4 pickup clutch Vertical path 4 clutch Lower feeder middle clutch Lower feeder right clutch Manual feed tray pulling clutch Deck (left) feeding clutch Developing cylinder deceleration clutch Parts No. FH7-5840 FH6-5013 FH6-5014 FH6-5015 FH6-5016 FH6-5014 FH6-5043 FH6-5014 FH6-5043 FH6-5043 FH6-5043 FH6-5043 FH6-5014 FH6-5043 FH6-5014 FH6-5014 FH6-5014 FH6-5043 FH6-5014 FH6-5017 PART-CHK CL>1 CL>2 CL>3 CL>4 CL>5 CL>6 CL>7 CL>8 CL>9 CL>10 CL>11 CL>12 CL>13 CL>14 CL>15 CL>16 CL>17 CL>18 CL>19 CL>20 J3603 J3603 J3603 no-stacking driver PCB DC controller PCB J504 J509 J509 J512 J513 J513 J513 J511 J514 J511 J518 J515 J515 J517 J517 J519 J519 J513 J519 J516
0010-9282

15-66

Chapter 15
Connector No. Notation CL21 CL22 CL23 Parts Name. Delivery speed switching clutch Manual feed tray feeding roller clutch Sub hopper transport cluch Parts No. FH7-5844 FH6-5043 FH7-5840 PART-CHK CL>21 CL>22 CL>23 no-stacking driver PCB DC controller PCB J508 J510 J511

CL20 CL4 CL22 CL2

CL23 CL1

CL7 CL5 CL6 CL8 CL10 CL12 CL17 CL16 CL19 CL14 CL15 CL18 CL3

CL11 CL9 CL13

CL21

F-15-90

15-67

Chapter 15

15.3.1.2 Solenoids
1. Reader Unit The reader unit does not use solenoids. 2. Printer Unit
T-15-5 Connector No. Notation SL2 SL3 SL4 SL6 SL7 SL8 SL9 SL10 SL11 Fixing web solenoid Delivery flapper solenoid Fixing/feeder unit locking solenoid Manual feed pickup solenoid Deck (right) pickup solenoid Deck (left) pickup solenoid Cassette 3 pickup solenoid Cassette 4 pickup solenoid Reversing flapper solenoid Parts Name Parts No. FK2-0034 FH7-5837 FH7-5845 FH7-5838 FK2-0126 FK2-0126 FH7-5702 FH7-5702 FH7-5837 PART-CHK SL>2 SL>3 SL>4 SL>6 SL>7 SL>8 SL>9 SL>10 SL>11 J3604 no-stacking driver PCB DC controller PCB J508 J508 J509 J510 J511 J518 J515 J517 J519
0010-9283

SL6

SL4

SL3 SL7 SL8 SL11 SL2 SL9

SL10

F-15-91

15.3.2 Motor 15.3.2.1 Motors

1. Reader Unit
T-15-6 Notation M501 Scanner motor Parts Name Description drives the No. 1/No. 2 mirror base Parts No. FK2-1182 E202 E code
0010-9284

15-68

Chapter 15
T-15-7 Connector No. Notation M501 J306 I/F PCB J205 Reader controller PCB

F-15-92

2. Printer Unit
Notation M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 Drum motor Main motor Pickup motor Fixing motor Polygon motor Parts Name Description drives components associated with the photosensitive drum drives major components of the printer unit drives the pickup assembly drives the fixing assembly drives the laser scanner Parts No. FH6-1934 FH6-1935 FH6-1936 FH6-1937 PART-CHK MTR>0 MTR>1 MTR>2 MTR>3 E code E012 E010 E015 E014 E110

FM2-5449 MTR>4 (Laser scanner unit) FH5-1138 FH5-1138 FH5-1138 FH5-1141 FH6-1939 FH6-1940 FK2-0017 FK2-0017 FH6-1542 FH6-1960 FH6-1960 FH6-1543 FH6-1940 FH6-1542 FH6-1543 FK2-0015 MTR>7 MTR>8 MTR>9 MTR>10/20 MTR>11 MTR>12 MTR>13 MTR>14 MTR>15 MTR>16 MTR>17 MTR>18 MTR>19 MTR>21 MTR>22 MTR>23

M7 M8 M9 M10/20 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M21 M22 M23

Pre-transfer charging wire cleaner motor Primary charging wire cleaner motor

drives the pre-transfer wire cleaner drives the primary wire cleaner

Transfer/separation charging wire cleaner motor drives the transfer separation charging wire cleaner Vibration motor Duplex reversal motor Duplex feeder motor (left) Deck (right) lifter motor Deck (left) lifter motor Horizontal registration motor Cassette 3 lifter motor Cassette 4 lifter motor Buffer motor Duplex feeder motor (right) Fixing inlet sensor lift motor Sub hopper motor Toner bottle rotaion motor drives the cleaning blade drivers the reversing roller, lower feeding middle roller, lower feeding right motor drivers the U-turn roller 1, 2 drives the Lifter of the deck (right) drives the Lifter of the deck (left) drives the horizontal registration sensor drives the lifter of the cassette 3 drives the lifter of the cassette 4 supplies toner to the developing assembly drivers the Pre-confluence roller drives ascent/descent of the fixing inlet sensor supplies toner to the buffer unit supplies toner to the sub hopper

E051

Connector No. Notation no-stacking feeding driver PCB M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 M7 M8 M9 M10/20 Interface PCB DC controller PCB J512 J514 J513 J508 J506 J504 J502 J509 J529

15-69

Chapter 15
Connector No. Notation no-stacking feeding driver PCB M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M21 M22 M23 M501 J306 J3608 J3603 J3607 J3607 Interface PCB DC controller PCB J519 J519 J514 J514 J519 J516 J516 J504 J519 J508 J511 J512

M23 M22 M18 M0 M20 M4 M10 M1 M2 M8 M13 M21 M14 M3 M19 M11 M12 M17 M16 M15 M9 M7

F-15-93

15.3.3 Fan 15.3.3.1 Fans

1. Reader Unit
T-15-8 Connector No. Notation Parts Name Description Parts No. Interface PCB J311 J311 Reader controller PCB J205 J205 E/Alarm code 33-0003 33-0004
0010-9285

FM501 FM502

Reader cooling fan1 Reader cooling fan2

cools the reader assembly cools the reader assembly

FK2-1188 FK2-1189

15-70

Chapter 15

FM502

FM501

F-15-94

2. Printer Unit
T-15-9 Notation FM1 Parts Name polygon mirror cooling fan Description Parts No. E code E111-1111 Alarm code -

cools the laser scanner motor; thermally insulates the FH6-1941 unit from the fixing assembly; prevents soiling of the wire of the primary charging assembly discharges heat from around the fixing assembly FH6-1545

FM2

fixing heat discharge fan

E805-0001

FM3

laser cooling fan

cools the laser scanner unit

FH6-1546

E121-0001

FM6

de-curling fan

cools paper

FH6-1548

33-0001

FM8

drum fan

draws out the ozone and stray toner from around the drum; cools the area discharges the ozone from around the pre-transfer charging assembly cools the DC power supply PCB

FH6-1550

E820-0000

FM10

pre-transfer charging assembly fan power supply cooling fan 1

FH6-1547

E823-0000

FM11

FH6-1546

E804-0000

FM12

power supply cooling fan 2

cools the DC power supply PCB

FH6-1546

E804-0000

FM13

separation fan

helps separate paper from the drum

FH6-1942

E830-0000

FM15

developing fan

cools the developing assembly

FH6-1547

33-0006

FM16

system fan

cools the PCBs inside the system box

FH6-1878

00-0804

FM17

delivery anti-adhesion fan

cools paper being delivered

FH6-1877

33-0007

FM18 FM19

scanner heat discharge fan 2 duplexing transport fan

discharges heat from around the laser scanner unit cools the duplexing transport motor

FH6-1740 FH6-1878

E121-0003 -

33-0009

FM20

separation heat discharge fan discharges heat from around the separation assembly; FH6-1545 improves separation scanner heat discharge fan 1 discharges heat from around the laser scanner unit FH6-1547

E805-0002

FM21

E121-0001

15-71

Chapter 15

FM18

FM8 FM20

FM21

FM2

FM13 FM1

FM15 FM10

FM3 FM16 FM11 FM6 FM17 FM19

FM12

F-15-95

15.3.4 Sensor 15.3.4.1 Sensor (reader)

0011-9668

PS501 SIZE2 SIZE1

PS502

F-15-96 T-15-10 Connector No. Notation PS501 PS502 SIZE1 Name Description Parts No. P006-7 P006-5 I/O (RCON) 0:ADF close 0:HP Interface PCB J301/302 J305/303 Reader controller PCB J205 J202 J206

ADF open/closed 1 sensor detects the state (open/closed) FK2-0149 of the ADF Scanner HP sensor Original size sensor 1 detects scanner home position FK2-0149 detects the original size (A/B, FK2-0238 sub scanning direction)

15-72

Chapter 15
Connector No. Notation SIZE2 Name Original size sensor 2 Description Parts No. I/O (RCON) Interface PCB Reader controller PCB J207

detects the original size (inch, FK2-0238 sub scanning direction)

15.3.4.2 Sensor 1
0010-9286

PS65 PS6 PS66 PS67 PS9 PS59 PS17 PS10 PS56 PS61 PS35 PS47 PS49 PS19 PS52 PS51 PS41 PS55 PS54 PS20 PS24 PS21 PS22 PS23 PS37 PS48 PS12 PS58 PS26 PS14 PS15 PS18 PS61 PS11 PS28 PS64 PS8 PS7 PS63 PS5

PS27

PS38 PS39 PS40

PS25 PS34 PS31 PS32 PS33

PS46 PS42 PS43 PS44 PS45

F-15-97 T-15-11 Notation PS5 PS6 PS7 PS8 PS9 PS10 PS11 PS12 PS14 PS15 PS17 PS18 PS19 PS20 PS21 PS22 PS23 PS24 PS25 PS26 PS27 PS28 PS31 PS32 Name Registration sensor Claw jam sensor No web sensor Web length warning sensor Internal delivery sensor External delivery sensor Fixing/feeding outlet sensor Duplex reversal sensor Pre-confluence reversal sensor Post-confluence sensor Multi tray paper sensor Horizontal registration sensor Waste toner full sensor Right deck pickup sensor Right deck lifter sensor Deck right paper sensor Deck right open/closed sensor Deck right limit sensor Left deck pickup sensor Left deck feed sensor Right deck feed sensor Fixing transport unit release lever sensor Left deck lifter sensor Deck left paper sensor Description detects the registration paper detects fixing claw jam detects fixing web length detects no web alert detects the internal delivery detects the external delivery detects the fixing/feeding outlet paper detects the duplex reversal paper detects pre-confluence reversal paper detects post-confluence paper detects paper on the multi tray detects HP of the horizontal registration guide detects the waste toner full detects the right deck paper pick up detects the right deck lifter detects the paper in the right deck detects the right deck open/closed detects the right deck limit detects the left deck paper pick up detects the left deck re-try detects the right deck re-try detects fixing transport unit release detects the left deck lifter detects the left deck lifter Parts No. FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FH7-7196020 FK2-0149 FG6-8605 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FG6-8605 FG6-8605 FG6-8605 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 P002-11 P002-15 P003-3 P003-4 P002-12 P002-13 P002-14 P002-1 P002-3 P002-4 P004-12 P003-7 P003-8 P004-0 P004-8 P005-4 P004-14 P003-9 P003-15 P003-14 P005-14 P004-1 I/O (DCON) 1:paper present 1:presence 1:no web 1:alert 1:paper present 1:paper present 1:paper present 1:paper present 1:paper present 1:paper present 1:paper present 1:full 1:paper present 1:detects lifter 1:paper present 1:closed 1:limit 1:paper present 1:paper present 1:paper present 1:release 1:detects lifter -

15-73

Chapter 15
Notation PS33 PS34 PS35 PS37 PS38 PS39 PS40 PS41 PS42 PS43 PS44 PS45 PS46 PS47 PS48 PS49 PS51 PS52 PS54 PS55 PS56 PS58 PS59 PS60 PS61 PS63 PS64 PS65 PS66 PS67 PS68 Name Deck left open/closed sensor Deck left limit sensor Multifeeder pickup sensor Cassette 3 pickup sensor Cassette 3 open/closed sensor Cassette 3 paper sensor Cassette 3 open/closed sensor Vertical path 3 sensor Cassette 4 pickup sensor Cassette 3 lifter sensor Cassette 4 paper sensor Cassette 4 open/closed sensor Vertical path 4 sensor Vertical path 1 sensor Lower right cover open/closed sensor Vertical path 2 sensor Right deck paper level middle sensor Description detects the left deck open/closed detects the left deck limit detects the multifeeder re-try detects paper in the cassette 3 detects the cassette 3 lifter detects paper in the cassette 3 detects the cassette 3 open/closed detects the vertical path 3 paper detects the cassette 4 paper pick up detects the cassette 4 lifter detects the paper in the cassette 4 detects the cassette 4 open/closed detects the vertical path 4 paper detects the vertical path 1 paper detects the lower right cover open/closed detects the vertical path 2 paper detects the right deck level (middle) Parts No. FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FG6-8605 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FG6-8605 FG6-8605 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FG6-8605 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0999 FK2-0999 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 FK2-0149 P005-5 P004-15 P002-10 P003-10 P004-2 P004-10 P005-6 P003-12 P003-11 P004-3 P004-11 P005-7 P003-13 P002-8 P005-9 P002-9 P004-4 P004-5 P004-6 P004-7 P005-10 P005-8 P005-12 P002-5 P002-2 P002-7 P002-6 P003-5 P002-0 I/O (DCON) 1:closed 1:limit 1:paper present 1:paper present 1:detects lifter 1:paper present 1:closed 1:paper present 1:paper present 1:detects lifter 1:paper present 1:closed 1:paper present 1:paper present 1:closed 1:paper present 1:paper present 1:paper present 1:paper present 1:paper present 1:closed 1:closed 1:closed 1:paper present 1:paper present 1:paper present 1:HP 1:detects bottle 1:paper present

Right deck paper level upper sensor detects the right deck level (upper) Left deck paper level middle sensor detects the left deck level (middle) Left deck paper level upper sensor Manual feeder tray cover open/ closed sensor Upper right cover open/closed sensor Bottle cover open/closed sensor Image write start sensor Duplex outlet sensor Fixing inlet sensor Double feeding sensor (transmission) Double feeding sensor (reception) Fixing inlet HP sensor Toner bottle sensor Multiple curling prevention sensor detects the left deck level (upper) detects manual feeder tray cover open/closed detects the upper right cover open/closed detects the toner bottle cover open/closed detects the laser write start detects the duplex outlet detects the fixing inlet detects double feeding (transmission) detects double feeding (reception) detects remaining paper on fixing inlet guide detects the toner bottle detects paper at multiple curling roller T-15-12 Connector No. Notation Name Double feeding detection PCB (transmission) Double feeding detection PCB (reception)

No-stacking DC controller feeder driver PCB PCB J509 J508 J508 J508 J508 J508 J508 J3605/J3602 J3602/J3602 J3603/J3602 J519 J519 J519 J510 J3603/J3602 J519 J513

JAM

PS5 PS6 PS7 PS8 PS9 PS10 PS11 PS12 PS14 PS15 PS17 PS18 PS19

Registration sensor Claw jam sensor No web sensor Web length warning sensor Internal delivery sensor External delivery sensor Fixing/feeding outlet sensor Duplex reversal sensor Pre-confluence reversal sensor Post-confluence sensor Multi tray paper sensor Horizontal registration sensor Waste toner full sensor

xx09

xx0B xx0C xx0D xx0F xx11 xx12

15-74

Chapter 15
Connector No. Notation Name Double feeding detection PCB (transmission) Double feeding detection PCB (reception) No-stacking DC controller feeder driver PCB PCB J511 J511 J511 J511 J511 J518 J3602/J3602 J519 J511 J509 J518 J518 J518 J518 J510 J515 J515 J515 J515 J515 J517 J517 J517 J517 J517 J502 J516 J516 J513 J513 J514 J514 J502 J502 J512 J503 J3605/J3602 J519 J508 J2703/J2702 J2704/J2706 J509 J550 J508 J512 J510 xx16 xx0A xx18 xx10 xx1A xx06 xx08 xx05 xx07 xx04 xx19 xx03 xx02 xx13 xx14 JAM

PS20 PS21 PS22 PS23 PS24 PS25 PS26 PS27 PS28 PS31 PS32 PS33 PS34 PS35 PS37 PS38 PS39 PS40 PS41 PS42 PS43 PS44 PS45 PS46 PS47 PS48 PS49 PS51 PS52 PS54 PS55 PS56 PS58 PS59 PS60 PS61 PS63 PS64 PS65 PS66 PS67 PS68

Right deck pickup sensor Right deck lifter sensor Deck right paper sensor Deck right open/closed sensor Deck right limit sensor Left deck pickup sensor Left deck feed sensor Right deck feed sensor Fixing transport unit release lever sensor Left deck lifter sensor Deck left paper sensor Deck left open/closed sensor Deck left limit sensor Multifeeder pickup sensor Cassette 3 pickup sensor Cassette 3 open/closed sensor Cassette 3 paper sensor Cassette 3 open/closed sensor Vertical path 3 sensor Cassette 4 pickup sensor Cassette 3 lifter sensor Cassette 4 paper sensor Cassette 4 open/closed sensor Vertical path 4 sensor Vertical path 1 sensor Lower right cover open/closed sensor Vertical path 2 sensor Right deck paper level middle sensor Right deck paper level upper sensor Left deck paper level middle sensor Left deck paper level upper sensor Manual feeder tray cover open/closed sensor Upper right cover open/closed sensor Bottle cover open/closed sensor Image write start sensor Duplex outlet sensor Fixing inlet sensor Double feeding sensor (transmission) Double feeding sensor (reception) Fixing inlet HP sensor Toner bottle sensor Multiple curling prevention sensor

xx01

15-75

Chapter 15

15.3.4.3 Sensor 2
0010-9288

TS4

DP1

SVR1

TS2 TS1 TS3

SVR2 SV1 SVR3 SV2

F-15-98 T-15-13 Connector No. Notation Name Description Parts No. Potential measurement PCB DC controller PCB J513 J514 J510 J513 J514

SV1 SV2 SVR1 SVR2 SVR3

Cassette 3 paper length sensor Cassette 4 paper length sensor Manual feed tray paper width detecting volume Cassette 3 paper width detecting volume Cassette 4 paper width detecting volume hopper toner level sensor hopper toner lower limit sensor developing assembly toner sensor sub hopper toner level sensor

detects cassette 3 paper length detects cassette 4 paper length detects manual feed tray paper width detects cassette 3 paper width detects cassette 4 paper width

FG5-8221 FG5-8221 FG5-1958 FG5-1957 FG5-1957

TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4

detects the level of toner remaining inside the hopper FK2-0158 detects the lower limit of toner remaining inside the FK2-0158 hopper detects the level of toner remaining inside the developing assembly detects the level of toner remaining inside the sub hopper measures potential voltage of Photosensitive drum FK2-0158 FK2-0158

J504 J504 J504 J511

DP1

Potential sensor

FG3-4067

J1,J2/J3

J502

15.3.5 Switch 15.3.5.1 Switches

1. Reader Unit The reader unit does not have any switch. 2. Printer Unit
T-15-14 Notation SW1 SW2 SW3 Main switch Front cover switch Drum heater switch Parts Name Description turns on/off the main power detects the front cover turns on/off the drum heater Parts No. FK2-0140 FH7-6253 WC1-5179 E code
0010-9289

15-76

Chapter 15
Notation MSW2 MSW5 MSW7 MSW8 Parts Name Waste toner lock detection switch Manual feed tray cover open/closed detecting switch Front cover open/closed detecting switch Cartridge motor drive switch Description Parts No. E code E013-0000

detects the state (locked/unlocked) of the waste WC4-5029 toner screw detects the state (open/closed) of the manual feed tray detects the front cover detects drive of the cartridge motor WC4-5153 WC4-0153 WC4-0241

SW1 MSW8

MSW2

MSW5

SW2 MSW7

SW3

F-15-99

15.3.6 Lamps, Heaters, and Others 15.3.6.1 Heaters, Lamps, and Others
0010-9290

FL1 LED1 H502 TH2 TH1 H2

H3

H501 LED2

TP1 H1

HD1 H4 ELCB1

F-15-100

15-77

Chapter 15

T-15-15 Notation H1 Parts Name Fixing main heater Description main heater (controls the fixing roller temperature) Parts No. FH7-4707(100V)*1 FH7-4719(200V)*2 FH7-4708(208V)*3 FH7-4720(230V)*4 FH7-4709(230V)*5 H2 Fixing sub heater sub heater (controls the fixing roller temperature) FH7-4710(100V)*1 FH7-4723(200V)*2 FH7-4711(208V)*3 FH7-4724(230V)*4 F14-4712(230V)*5 H3 Drum heater prevents condensation on the drum FH7-4713(100V)*1 FH7-4714(200/208V) FH7-4715(230V) H4 Cassette heater prevents absorption of moisture by FH7-4584(100V) paper inside the cassette FH7-4585(230V) prevents condensation on the lens FK2-0226(100V) FK2-0228(230V) H502 Mirror heater prevents condensation on the mirror performs fixing temperature control, detects error performs fixing temperature control, detects error serves as a safety mechanism for the fixing assembly Leakage breaker FK2-0227(100V) FK2-0229(230V) FH7-7553 FH7-7464 FH7-6333 FK2-0014(100V) FH7-7626(200V) HD1 LED1 LED2 LA1 Hard disk pre-exposure lamp (LED) holds programs, images WM2-5225 E602, E609, E610 E000, E001, E002, E003 E000, E001, E002, E003 PART-CHK E code E000, E001, E002, E003, E004

H501

Lens heater

TH1 TH2 TP1 ELCB1

fixing main thermistor fixing sub thermistor fixing thermal switch Leakage breaker

removes residual charges from the FK2-1003 surface of the photosensitive drum

Pre-transfer exposure lamp (LED) removes residual charges from the FK2-1004 surface of the photosensitive drum scanning lamp illuminates originals FK2-1250 MISCR>SCANLAMP E225

T-15-16 Notation H1 H2 H3 H4 H501 H502 TH1 TH2 TP1 ELCB1 HD1 LED1 LED2 LA1 J602/601 J203 J1003/J1004 J504 J504 J6 J1 J1733 J1733 Main controller PCB Inverter PCB Reader controller PCB Relay PCB AC driver PCB J6 J6 J5 J5 J5 J5 J508 J508 J505 DC controller PCB J505 J505 J505 J505

15.3.7 PCBs 15.3.7.1 PCBs

1. Reader Unit
0010-9291

15-78

Chapter 15
T-15-17 Notation [1] [2] [3] [4] Interface PCB Reader controller PCB CCD/AP PCB Inverter PCB Parts Name Parts No. FM2-4820 FM2-4819 FM2-4742 (CCD unit) FK2-1251 Description communicates with the printer unit, ADF controls the reader unit performs analog image processing drives the scanning lamp

[2] [1]

[3] [4]

F-15-101

2. Printer Unit
T-15-18 Notation [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Parts Name Fixing assembly inlet sensor (up/down) driver PCB ARCNET PCB Video PCB Reader I/F PCB Main controller PCB DC controller PCB Laser driver PCB 1 Laser driver PCB 2 DC power supply PCB Parts No. FM2-5065 FM2-4884 FM2-4354 FM2-3796 FM2-5423 FM2-4355 FM2-5449 (Laser scanner unit) FM2-4394 FK2-0967 (100V), FG68608 (200V), FG6-8600 (208V), FG6-7238 (230V) FM2-4351 FG6-7249 FK2-0968 (100V), FM24366 (200V) FM2-4350 Description Controls the fixing inlet sensor ascent/descent Controls network communications Executes pixel/line conversion Converts communication signals Controls the system Controls the printer unit Drives the laser diode Controls the laser intensity Supplies DC power

[10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23]

HV-DC PCB HV-AC PCB All-day power supply PCB Relay PCB Double feeding detection PCB (reception) Double feeding detection PCB (transmission) Drum heater control PCB BD PCB Potential control PCB AC driver PCB Environment sensor PCB No-stacking feeding driver PCB Cassette 3 paper level detection PCB Cassette 4 paper level detection PCB

Generates high-voltage DC components Generates high-voltage AC components Supplies DC power Distributes DC power supply

FK2-0959 (standard if US) Detects double-feeding of paper (receiving) FK2-0960 (standard if US) Detects double-feeding of paper (transmitting) FM2-4360 (100V), FM24359 (200V) FM2-5449 (Laser scanner unit) Drives the drum heater Detects the laser beam

FG3-4067 (potential sensor Controls the drum surface potential unit) FM2-5063 (100V), FM25064 (200V) FH7-7426 FG6-8585 FG6-1941 FG6-1941 Drive the fixing heater Detects the machine outside temperature/humidity Drives the duplex/feeder unit Detects the level of paper in the cassette 3 Detects the level of paper in the cassette 4

15-79

Chapter 15
Notation [24] [25] [26] [27] Controls panel LED PCB Controls panel CPU PCB Control panel key PCB Control panel inverter PCB Parts Name Parts No. FM2-5463 FM2-5461 FM2-5462 FK2-1646 Description Controls the LED indications Controls the control panel Controls panel key inputs and LED indications controls the back-light activation of the LCD

[24] [26] [27] [8] [25]

[7]

[18] [17] [16] [21] [15]

[14] [20] [22]

[19] [12] [9] [13]

[23]

[10]

[11]

[3] [5] [4]

[1] [6]

[2]

F-15-102

15-80

Chapter 15

15.3.8 Connectors 15.3.8.1 Connectors

0012-8533

J224

J227 J225 J226

J2210 J243 J1223 J223 J2231 J1480 J247 J245 J148 J248 J2440 J244 J2541 J2460 J2540

J238 J229 J231 J230 J234 J221 J314 J320 J235 J278

J276 J237 J232 J233 J316 J236 J317 J318 J355

J321

J319 J315

J1131 J42 J249 J250 J242 J43 J601 J217 J602 J251 J611 J612 J512 J268 J511 J255 J621 J622 J258 J322 J314 J267 J513 J514 J515 J516 J521 J517

J1132J24

J216

J348 J243 J223 J1480 J282 J283 J362 J289

J281

J241 J2240 J2210 J224 J253 J252 J222 J254 J274 J271 J264

J286

J298

J280 J284 J285 J287 J305

J229 J303 J293 J302 J363 J294 J291 J306 J307 J365 J313

J510

J263 J281 J260 J304 J259 J305 J256 J257 J295 J265 J290 J266 J301 J296

J350 J351

J308 J359 J309 J311

J518 J270 J501 J519 J51 J40 J41 J269

J292 J364 J342

J338 J340 J3605

J330 J336 J322 J366 J3607 J323 J3608 J381 J3609 J380 J339

J329 J326 J335

J327 J337 J328

J334 J341 J331 J3602 J332 J3601 J333 J3603 J382 J3604 J325 J324 J383

F-15-103

15-81

Chapter 15

1
J550

J1550 J2706 J13 J16 J12

J2804 J2704 J2803 J198 J2198

J198 J1198 J2703 J2702 J11 J14 J15 J17

J20 J5 J24 J25 J1 J2 J26 J3 J18 J4 J19 J6

J782 J781 J28 J701

J1706 J1704 J1701 J1702 J1703

J15

J201 J193 J188

J206 J200 J199 J189 J211

J2270 J114 J194 J122 J197 J115 J520 J509 J550 J505 J156 J157 J155 J180 J508 J40 J21 J41 J197 J180

J198 J192 J181 J187 J190 J191 J205 J2031 J2030 J204 J206 J182 J184 J652 J651 J202 J207 J198 J208 J202 J1192 J192 J187 J183 J181 J196

J195 J185 J210 J186 J209

J1721 J1720 J1723

F-15-104

15-82

Chapter 15

J141 J143 J139 J140 J104

J142

J138

J105 J17 J272

J5029 J124 J149 J130 J129

J5032 J5031 J150 J5030 J902 J901 J109 J104 J124 J5029 J138 J133 J47 J145 J108 J1A J2A J3A J46 J102 J101 J144 J4001 J4002 J529 J502 J503 J504 J118 J1728 J147 J146 J127 J133 J149 J125 J128

J127 J112 J551 J107 J501 J111 J552 J553

J132

J505

J1718

J1723

F-15-105

15-83

Chapter 15

J409 J4003 J410

J1006 J1027 J1043 J1041 J1042 J1405 CP1000 J1402 J1403 J1401 J121 J1530 J1 J404 J123

J52 J50 J401 J1032 J1021 J1015 J1023

J411

J1034 J1022 J783 J785 J1024 J1060 J784 J1062 J1014 J2 J1727 J1731

J507 J506 J526 J525

J1732

J737 J271 J732 J272 J733

J721 J722 J723 J741 J742 J262 J228 J41

J731 J734 J45 J239 J512 J510 J791 J514

J792 J1722 J1723

J261

J505

J48

F-15-106

15-84

Chapter 15

J1 J9

J5

Copier
J4 J3 J6 J8

J2 CN1 CN2

J1040

Printer
J6803 CN2 CN3 CN1 J9802 J6804 J6801 J6802 J6805 CN901 CN902

J7001 J7002 J405 J1018

F-15-107

15-85

Chapter 15

J1318 J1314 J1317 J1312 J1313 J1307 J1308 J1319 J1311

J54 J1316 J1315 J1302 J1303 J1304 J1301 J1305 J764 J1306

J1028

J215 J1452 J1406 J3701

Copier
J1730

J30 J53 J70 J2 J36

J27

J5

J1733

F-15-108

15-86

Chapter 15

Reader(iR7086)
J310 J308 J303 J301 J307 J313 J310 J7 J6 J8 J305 J306 J203

J2 J505 J202 J204 J101 J102

CN1 J5100 J309 J5101 J201 J5102 J206 CN2 J205 J207

Reader(iR7105/iR7095/iR7086N)
J2 J10 J301 J202 J310 J306 J302 J307 J505 J11 J12 J210 J208 J101 J205 J5 J7 J102 J6 J8

J313 J308 J313 J305 J9 J303

CN1 J207 J5100 J304 J5101 J201 J5102 J203 J204 J206 CN2

F-15-109

15-87

Chapter 15

15.3.9 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB 15.3.9.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB
Of the variable VRs, LEDs, and switches used in the machine, those needed when servicing in the field are discussed.
0010-9886

1. Some LEDs emit dim light even when OFF because of leakage current; this is a normal condition, and must be kept in mind. 2. VRs that may be used in the field : VRs that must not be used in the field :

Do not touch the VRs and check pins not discussed herein. They are exclusively for use at the factory, and require special tools and high precision.

15.3.9.2 Main controller PCB

0010-9887

J1027 J1006 J1004 J1003

LED8

J1043

J1017 J1016 J1010

J1041 J1042
LED9 LED2

J1028

J1021

J1013

BAT1001 J1026 J1015 J1023 J1024 J1060 J1014 J1040

J1061

J1022 J1062

F-15-110 Notation LED2 LED6 LED7 LED8 LED9 LED10 Condition of activation after booting while +3.3 V (non-all night) is being supplied while +3.3 V (non-all night) is being supplied while +5 V (non-all night) is being supplied while +3.3 V (all night) is being supplied while in sleep mode (sleep 3)

15-88

Chapter 15

15.3.9.3 Main controller PCB (up graded version)

0018-0391

J1027 J1006 J1004 J1003

LED8

J1043

J1017 J1016 J1010

J1041 J1042
LED9 LED2

J1028

J1021

J1013

BAT1001 J1026 J1015 J1023 J1024 J1060 J1014 J1040

J1061

J1022 J1062

F-15-111 Notation LED2 LED8 LED9 Condition of activation after booting while +5 V (non-all night) is being supplied while +3.3 V (all night) is being supplied

15.3.9.4 DC controller PCB

0010-9890

J511

J510

J509

J508 J520

J512

J507

J513 J506 J514 J551 J515

J516 J528 J521 J517 J552 BAT101

J527

J550

J526 J525

J518 J553

VR101

J505

J522 J519 J501 J502 J529 J503 J504

F-15-112

15-89

Chapter 16 Self Diagnosis

Contents

Contents
16.1 Error Code Table........................................................................................................................................................16-1
16.1.1 Error Code Table...................................................................................................................................................................... 16-1

16.2 Error Code Details .....................................................................................................................................................16-3

16.2.1 Error Code Details ................................................................................................................................................................... 16-3 16.2.2 E602 Detail ............................................................................................................................................................................ 16-10

16.3 Jam Code..................................................................................................................................................................16-12

16.3.1 Jam Code (printer) ................................................................................................................................................................. 16-12 16.3.2 Jam Code (DADF-Q1) ........................................................................................................................................................... 16-12 16.3.3 Jam Code (Delivery Accessories) .......................................................................................................................................... 16-14

16.4 Alarm Code ..............................................................................................................................................................16-17

16.4.1 Alarm Code ............................................................................................................................................................................ 16-17

Chapter 16

16.1 Error Code Table

16.1.1 Error Code Table
0011-6724

T-16-1 Code Description

*: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan, iR7105/7095; inside Japan: iR7105/7095/7086). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). E000 E001 E002 E003 E004 E005 E010 E012 E013 E014 E015 E019 E020 The fixing unit has overheated. After correcting the fault, be sure to reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) The fixing unit has overheated. After correcting the fault, be sure to reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) The fixing unit has overheated. After correcting the error, be sure to reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) The fixing unit temperature is abnormally low. After correcting the fault, be sure to reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) The fixing unit has a fault. (protective circuit ON) After correcting the fault, be sure to reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) The fixing web has run out. After correcting the fault, be sure to reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) The main motor rotation is faulty. The drum motor rotation is faulty. The waste toner feedscrew is stuck. (clogged with waste toner) After correcting the fault, be sure to reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) The fixing motor rotation is faulty. The pickup motor rotation is faulty. The waste toner case is full. The developing assembly is out of toner. The buffer motor rotation is faulty. The toner feed motor (sub hopper) rotation is faulty. After correcting the fault, be sure to reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) The toner bottle motor rotation is faulty. The copy data controller/NE controller counter fails to operate. The rotation of the pickup motor of the side paper deck is faulty. The horizontal registration HP detection has an error. The high-voltage output has a fault. (primary charging assembly) The high-voltage output has a fault. The high-voltage output has a fault. (separation charging assembly) The transfer high voltage has an error. A read error has occurred in relation to the laser scanner unit EEPROM data. The laser scanner motor rotation has a fault. The laser scanner motor cooling fan rotation has a fault. A fault exists in the rotation of the following: laser scanner unit cooling fan, reader heat discharge fan 1, reader heat discharge fan 2. Video PCB initialization error The laser scanner motor communication has a fault. The scanner HP detection mechanism has a fault. The intensity of the scanning lamp is inadequate. (The lamp is exhausted.) The reader unit power supply (24 V) has a fault. A fault exists in the communication between the main controller and the DC controller. A fault exists in the following: main controller SRAM, reader controller EEPROM. The inverter cooling fan rotation is faulty. Shading operation is faulty. The image data codec has a fault. An error has occurred in the main controller communication. An ADF communication error has occurred. The ADF belt motor rotation is faulty. The ADF delivery motor rotation is faulty. The ADF separation motor rotation is faulty. The ADF pickup motor rotation is faulty. The ADF shift motor rotation is faulty. An ADF EEPROM read error has occurred. The ADF is of the wrong type. An Finisher communication error has occurred. The HDD has an error. The time memory (DDR-SDRAM) is faulty or inadequate. The HDD temperature is abnormally low. The HDD encryption key is faulty. Error in external controller

E025 E032 E043 E051 E065 E067 E068 E069 E102 E110 E111 E121 E193 E197 E202 E225 E227 E240 ** E248 E251 E302 E315 E351 E400 ** E402 * E404 * E405 * E410 * E413 ** E420 * E490 E500 E602 E604 E609 E610 E677

16-1

Chapter 16
Code Description

*: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan, iR7105/7095; inside Japan: iR7105/7095/7086). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). E711 E712 E717 E719 E720 E721 E730 E732 E733 E740 E743 E744 E746 E748 E749 E800 E804 E805 E820 E823 E840 E850 An error has occurred in the communication between the pickup/delivery accessory and the printer unit. An error exists in the communication between the ADF and the reader unit. An error exists in the communication with the NE controller. After correcting the fault, be sure to reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) An error has occurred in the communication with the coin vendor/card reader. After correcting the fault, be sure to reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) Error in connection with non-supported options Error in mismatch combination between the system software and the old type perfect binder A PDL-related error has occurred. An error has occurred in the communication between the reader unit and the main controller. An error has occurred in the communication between the reader unit and the main controller. An error exists in the LAN controller. A fault exists in the communication between the main controller and the reader controller. An error exists in the language file/boot ROM. An unsupported optional board has been detected. Main controller PCB error Restart in accordance with a change of the product configuration The auto power-off circuit has an error. The rotation of the following is faulty: power supply cooling fan 1, power supply cooling fan 2, controller cooling fan. The fixing heat discharge fan rotation is faulty. The drum fan rotation is faulty. The pre-transfer charging assembly fan rotation is faulty. An HP detection error has occurred in relation to the fixing inlet sensor (fixing wrap jam detection). There is a fault in the double-feeding detection unit.

16-2

Chapter 16

16.2 Error Code Details

16.2.1 Error Code Details
0011-6725

T-16-2 Code Description Remedial action

*: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan, iR7105/7095; inside Japan: iR7105/7095/7086). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: Applied to upgraded machine E000 The fixing unit has overheated. After correcting the fault, be sure to reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) 0000 The reading of the main thermistor is less than 70 deg C 3.5 min after power- Check the mounting/soiling of the main thermistor. Replace on. the fixing heater. Replace the main thermistor. Replace the AC driver PCB. Replace the DC controller PCB. 0010 The power has been turned off and then on without resetting the error. E001 Reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) The fixing unit has overheated. After correcting the fault, be sure to reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) 0001 The reading of the main thermistor or the sub thermistor is 230 deg C or more Replace the AC driver PCB. Replace the DC controller PCB. for 2 sec. (hardware detection) 0002 The reading of the main thermistor or the sub thermistor is 230 deg C or more Check the mounting/soiling of the main thermistor. Replace for 2 sec or the main thermistor. Replace more. (software detection) the sub thermistor. Replace the AC driver PCB. Replace the DC controller PCB. 0003 The difference in the readings of the main thermistor and the sub thermistor is Check the mounting/soiling of the main thermistor. Replace 50 deg C for the main thermistor. Replace 1 sec. (main thermistor reading>sub thermistor reading) the AC driver PCB. Replace the DC controller PCB. 0004 The difference in the readings of the main thermistor and the sub thermistor is 50 deg C for 1 sec or more. (main thermistor reading>/=sub thermistor reading) 0010 The power has been turned off and then on without resetting the error. E002 Reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR)

The fixing unit has overheated. After correcting the error, be sure to reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) 0000 The reading of the main thermistor has exceeded 70 deg C, but does not reach Disconnect and then connect J508 of the DC controller PCB. 100 deg C Disconnect and then connect within 2.5 sec thereafter. the connectors of the fixing unit. Check the wiring between 0001 The reading of the main thermistor has exceeded 100 deg C, but does not reach the main/sub thermistor and the DC controller. Check the mounting/soiling of the main 150 deg C thermistor. Replace the fixing within 2.5 min thereafter. heater. Replace the AC driver PCB. Replace the DC controller PCB. 0010 The power has been turned on without resetting the error. Reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR)

E003

The fixing unit temperature is abnormally low. After correcting the fault, be sure to reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) 0000 The reading of the main thermistor has exceeded 100 deg C, but is 70 deg C or less for 2 sec thereafter. Disconnect and then connect J508 of the DC controller PCB. Disconnect and then connect the connectors of the fixing unit. Check the wiring between the main/sub thermistor and the DC controller PCB. Check the mounting/soiling of the main thermistor. Replace the fixing heater. Replace the AC driver PCB. Replace the DC controller PCB.

E004

The fixing unit has a fault. (protective circuit ON) After correcting the fault, be sure to reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) 0000 While the sub heater is on, the SSR for the heater drive has a short-circuit for Replace the AC driver PCB. Replace the DC controller PCB. 5 sec or more. 0001 While the main heater is on, the SSR for the heater drive has a short-circuit for 5 sec or more.

E005

The fixing web has run out. After correcting the fault, be sure to reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) 0000 The absence of the fixing web has been detected for 5 sec or more. Check the position of the fixing web detecting lever. Replace the fixing web. Replace the fixing web length sensor. Replace the DC controller PCB. If you have replaced the fixing web, be sure to reset the counter: - COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>FIX-WEB - COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>FX-WEB 0010 The power has been turned off and then on without resetting the error. Reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR)

E010

The main motor rotation is faulty.

16-3

Chapter 16
Code Description Remedial action

*: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan, iR7105/7095; inside Japan: iR7105/7095/7086). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: Applied to upgraded machine 0000 After the main motor has gone on, the FG signal of the motor is not detected Disconnect and then connect J611 and J612 of the main motor. Disconnect and then connect for 2 sec or J514 of the DC controller PCB. Disconnect and then connect more. J1720 of the relay PCB. Replace the main motor. Replace the relay PCB. Replace the DC controller PCB. E012 The drum motor rotation is faulty. 0000 After the drum motor has gone on, the PLL lock signal of the motor is not detected for 2 sec or more. Disconnect and then connect J1721 of the relay PCB. Disconnect and then connect J512 of the DC controller PCB. Disconnect and then connect J601 and J602 of the drum motor. Replace the drum motor. Replace the DC controller PCB.

E013

The waste toner feedscrew is stuck. (clogged with waste toner) After correcting the fault, be sure to reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) 0000 The waste toner feedscrew is stuck for 4 sec or more. Detach and then attach the waste toner pipe. Replace the waste toner pipe. Replace the waste toner feedscrew detecting switch. Replace the DC controller PCB. Reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR)

0010 The power has been turned off and then on without resetting the error. E014 The fixing motor rotation is faulty.

0000 After the fixing motor has gone on, the PLL signal of the motor is not detected Disconnect and then connect J651 and J652 of the fixing for 2 sec or motor. Replace the fixing motor. more. Replace the relay PCB. Replace the DC controller PCB. E015 The pickup motor rotation is faulty. 0000 The pickup motor has gone on, but the FG signal of the motor is not detected Disconnect and then connect J621 and J622 of the pickup for 2 sec or motor. Replace the pickup motor. more. Replace the relay PCB. Replace the DC controller PCB. E019 The waste toner case is full. 0000 After the waste toner case has become full, 50,000 prints (A4) or more have been made without disposing of the waste toner. Dispose of the waste toner. Check the operation of the waste toner bottle base. Disconnect and then connect J514 of the DC controller PCB. Replace the waste toner case full sensor. Replace the DC controller PCB.

E020

The developing assembly is out of toner. The buffer motor rotation is faulty. The toner feed motor (sub hopper) rotation is faulty. After correcting the fault, be sure to reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) 0001 The absence of toner inside the developing assembly is detected of 120 sec or Disconnect and then connect the connector (J504, J512) of the more even DC controller PCB. when toner supply operation has been executed for the assembly. Replace the developing cylinder clutch (CL4). Replace the buffer motor (M18). Replace the magnet roller drive clutch (CL1). 0002 The absence of toner in the buffer is detected for 60 sec even after toner supply Disconnect and connect the connector (J504, J511) of the DC operation for the buffer has been executed and when there is toner inside the controller PCB. Replace hopper. the buffer motor (M18). Replace the following: magenta roller drive clutch (CL1), toner 0003 The absence of toner inside the buffer is detected for 210 sec or more even transport motor (sub hopper; M22), toner transport clutch when there is (sub hopper; CL23), buffer toner inside the sub hopper and after toner supply operation of that buffer inside toner sensor (TS1), buffer inside toner lower limit following the sensor (TS2). replacement of the toner bottle. 0004 The absence of toner inside he buffer is detected for 150 sec or more even when there is toner inside the buffer and after toner supply operation has been executed for the buffer following the replacement of the toner bottle. 0005 When installation mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>TONER-S) is Disconnect and then connect the connector (J504) of the DC executed, the controller PCB. Replace developing assembly inside toner sensor does not detect the presence of toner. the developing assembly inside toner sensor (TS3). 0006 When installation mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>TONER-S) is executed, the developing assembly inside toner sensor detects the presence of toner, but it does not detect the presence for 600 sec or more thereafter. 0007 When installing mode (COVER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>TONER-S) is executed, the buffer inside toner sensor does not detect the presence of toner for 60 sec or more. Disconnect and connect the connector (J504, J511) of the DC controller PCB. Replace thetoner transport motor (sub hopper; M22), toner transport clutch (sub hopper; CL23), buffer inside toner sensor (TS1).

0008 When the toner feed motor (sub hopper) is driven, a fault is detected for 3 sec Disconnect and connect the connector (J511) of the DC or more controller PCB. Replace the for the motor. toner feed motor (sub hopper; M22). 0009 There is a fault in the rotation of the buffer motor. Disconnect and then connect the connector (J504) of the DC controller PCB. Replace the buffer motor (M18).

16-4

Chapter 16
Code Description Remedial action

*: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan, iR7105/7095; inside Japan: iR7105/7095/7086). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: Applied to upgraded machine 0010 The power has been turned off and then on without resetting the error. E025 The toner bottle motor rotation is faulty. 0000 A toner bottle motor error (over-current) is detected for 10 sec for a second Disconnect and then connect J512 of the DC controller PCB. time. MEMO: The 1st detection of the error will cause the machine to indicate the message "Shake and Replace the Toner Container." 0001 The toner bottle motor is not connected. E032 The copy data controller/NE controller counter fails to operate. 0001 An open circuit of the counter signal has been detected. Disconnect and then connect J1022 of the main controller PCB. Replace the copy data controller/NE controller. Replace the main controller PCB. Reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR)

E043

The rotation of the pickup motor of the side paper deck is faulty. 0000 The side paper deck pickup motor has gone on, but the PLL lock signal is not detected for 2 sec or more (1st detection). MEMO: For the 2nd and subsequent detection, the machine will indicate "E043" on the screen offering a choice of sources of paper. Disconnect and then connect J101 and J106 of the side paper deck driver PCB. Replace the pickup motor. Replace the side paper deck driver PCB. Replace the DC controller PCB.

E051

The horizontal registration HP detection has an error. 0001 After the start of horizontal registration HP detection, the HP sensor is not off within 5 sec (i.e., not leaving home position). MEMO: If an error is detected in the course of horizontal registration HP detection at power-on, the machine will indicate the presence of a jam. 0002 After the start of horizontal registration HP detection, the home position is not detected within 5 sec. MEMO: If an error is detected in the course of horizontal registration HP detection at power-on, the machine will indicate the presence of a jam. 0003 Replace the horizontal registration HP sensor. Replace the horizontal registration motor. Replace the stackless transport driver PCB. Replace the DC controller PCB. At the start of horizontal registration detection in the course of printing, the horizontal registration detection operation for downstream paper does not end within 5 sec.

E065

The high-voltage output has a fault. (primary charging assembly) 0000 A fault (leak) is detected when high voltage is supplied to the primary charging assembly. Remove and then mount the primary charging assembly. Check for soiling. Disconnect and then connect T601, J723, and J731 of the HV-DC PCB. Replace the HV-DC PCB.

E067

The high-voltage output has a fault. 0000 A fault is detected at the same time in 2 of the following: primary high voltage, Remove and mount the primary charging assembly. Remove pre-transfer and mount the pre-transfer high voltage, transfer high voltage, separation high voltage. charging assembly. Remove and mount the transfer/ separation charging assembly. Disconnect and then connect J721, J723, J731, and J734 of the HV-DC PCB. Replace the HV-DC PCB. Replace the HV-AC PCB.

E068

The high-voltage output has a fault. (separation charging assembly) 0000 A fault (leak) has been detected while the separation charging assembly is being supplied with high voltage. Remove and mount the transfer/separation charging assembly. Disconnect and then connect J7233 and J734 of the HV-DC PCB. Disconnect and then connect J741 and J742 of the HV-AC PCB. Replace the HV-AC PCB. Replace the transfer/ separation charging assembly. Replace the pre-transfer charging assembly.

E069

The transfer high voltage has an error. 0000 A fault (leak) has been detected while the transfer charging assembly is being Remove and mount the transfer/separation charging supplied with assembly. Check for soiling. high voltage. Disconnect and then connect T701 and J723 of the HV-DC PCB. Replace the HV-DC PCB. Replace the pre-transfer charging assembly.

E102

A read error has occurred in relation to the laser scanner unit EEPROM data. 0001 The correction data cannot be read from the EEPROM of the laser scanner unit. Disconnect and then connect the connector of the video PCB. Disconnect and then connect the DC controller PCB. Replace the laser scanner unit.

E110

The laser scanner motor rotation has a fault.

16-5

Chapter 16
Code Description Remedial action

*: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan, iR7105/7095; inside Japan: iR7105/7095/7086). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: Applied to upgraded machine 0000 After the laser scanner motor has gone on, the PLL lock signal of the motor is Check to see if all covers have been attached to the primary charging assembly. Disconnect not detected and then connect J764 of the laser scanner motor drive PCB for 15 sec or more. (in the laser scanner unit). Disconnect and then connect J1401 of the video PCB. Disconnect and then connect J506 of the DC controller PCB. Replace the laser scanner unit. Replace the video PCB. Replace the DC controller PCB. E111 The laser scanner motor cooling fan rotation has a fault. 0000 After the laser scanner motor cooling fan has gone on, the fan stop signal is detected for 5 sec or more. E121 Disconnect and then connect J503 of the DC controller PCB. Replace the laser scanner motor cooling fan. Replace the DC controller PCB.

A fault exists in the rotation of the following: laser scanner unit cooling fan, reader heat discharge fan 1, reader heat discharge fan 2. 0001 The laser scanner unit cooling fan has a fault. After the laser scanner unit cooling fan has gone on, the fan stop signal is detected for 5 sec or more. 0002 The reader heat discharge fan 1 has a fault. After the reader heat discharge fan 1 has gone on, the fan stop signal is detected for 5 sec or more. 0003 The reader heat discharge fan 2 has a fault. After the reader heat discharge fan 2 has gone on, the fan stop signal is detected for 5 sec or more. Disconnect and then connect J503 of the DC controller PCB. Replace the laser scanner unit cooling fan. Replace the DC controller PCB. Connect and then disconnect J512 of the DC controller PCB. Replace the reader heat discharge fan 1. Replace the DC controller PCB. Disconnect and then connect J521 of the DC controller PCB. Replace the reader heat discharge fan 2. Replace the DC controller PCB.

E193

Video PCB initialization error 0001 Initialization of the video PCB has failed. Unplug and plug the connector to the video PCB, unplug and plug the connectors of the cable between the DC controller and the main controller, replace the video PCB, or replace the DC controller PCB. Replace the laser scanner unit. Replace the video PCB. Disconnect and then connect the connector of the scanner HP sensor. Replace the scanner HP sensor. Replace the scanner motor. Replace the reader controller PCB.

E197 E202

The laser scanner motor communication has a fault. 0000 The communication with the laser control IC is not normal. The scanner HP detection mechanism has a fault. 0001 While HP positioning is under way, the forward trip fails. 0002 While HP positioning is under way, the reverse trip fails.

E225

The intensity of the scanning lamp is inadequate. (The lamp is exhausted.) Disconnect and then connect the connector of the scanning ** 0002 In ADF mode, the intensity of light is below the standard level between sheets. lamp. Replace the scanning lamp. Replace the inverter PCB. Replace the reader controller PCB. 0001 At time of shading, the intensity of light is below the standard level.

E227

The reader unit power supply (24 V) has a fault. 0001 At power-on, the 24V port is off. 0002 At the start of a job, the 24V port is off. 0003 At the end of a job, the 24V port is off. 0004 While a load is driven, the 24V port is off. Disconnect and then connect the reader power supply connector. Replace the power supply.

E240 **

A fault exists in the communication between the main controller and the DC controller. 0000 A fault has occurred in the communication between the CPUs of the main controller and the DC controller. Disconnect and then connect the connector. Replace the DC controller PCB. Replace the main controller PCB. Replace the main controller PCB. Replace the reader controller PCB.

E248

A fault exists in the following: main controller SRAM, reader controller EEPROM. 0000 At start-up, an SRAM check error has occurred. 0001 An error has occurred at time of power-on (EEPROM). 0002 An error has occurred during write operation (EEPROM). 0003 A read error has occurred after write operation (EEPROM).

E251

The inverter cooling fan rotation is faulty. 0000 After the inverter cooling fan has gone on, the fan stop signal is detected for 5 Disconnect and then connect J1110 of the reader controller sec or more. PCB. Replace the inverter cooling fan. Replace the reader controller PCB.

E302

Shading operation is faulty. 0000 In the course of shading operation, the processing doses not end within the reader controller. Disconnect and then connect J1107 and J1108 of the reader controller PCB. Replace the reader controller PCB. Replace the main controller PCB. Replace the DDR-SDRAM. Replace the HDD. Replace the main controller PCB. Replace the main controller PCB.

E315

The image data codec has a fault. 0007 A JBIG encoder error has occurred. 000d A JBIG decoding error has occurred. 000e An error has occurred in the course of software decoding. 0100 An overrun error has occurred.

16-6

Chapter 16
Code Description Remedial action

*: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan, iR7105/7095; inside Japan: iR7105/7095/7086). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: Applied to upgraded machine 0200 the open I/F relay PCB has detected an error (no recovery after a retry). Replace the open I/F relay PCB (relay PCB between the main controller and PS controller). Check cable connection. Replace the outer controller PCB. Turn off and then back on he power. Replace the main controller PCB.

0201 Error detection when image is transferred from the outer controller. 0300 Cubic time-out 0400 Shift Device A time-out 0401 Shift Device B time-out E351 E400 ** An error has occurred in the main controller communication. 0000 At start-up, a main controller communication error has occurred. An ADF communication error has occurred. 0001 A check sum error has occurred. 0002 A reception status error has occurred. 0003 A reception interrupt error has occurred. E402 * The ADF belt motor rotation is faulty. 0000 While the belt motor drive signal is on, no lock signal occurs for 100 msec.

Replace the main controller PCB. Disconnect and then connect the connector. Replace the reader controller PCB. Replace the ADF controller PCB.

Disconnect and then connect the cable between the belt motor driver PCB and the ADF controller PCB. Replace the belt motor clock sensor. Replace the belt motor clock sensor. Replace the belt motor. Replace the belt motor driver PCB. Replace the ADF controller PCB. Replace the delivery motor. Replace the delivery motor clock sensor. Replace the ADF controller PCB.

E404 *

The ADF delivery motor rotation is faulty. 0000 When the delivery motor drive signal is on, no clock signal occurs for 200 msec.

E405 *

The ADF separation motor rotation is faulty. 0000 When the separation motor drive signal is on, no clock signal occurs for 200 Replace the separation motor. Replace the separation motor msec. clock sensor. Replace the ADF controller PCB.

E410 *

The ADF pickup motor rotation is faulty. 0000 No signal occurs from the following sensors within 2 sec after the pickup motor is driven: - pickup roller height sensor 1 (PI8), pickup roller height sensor 2 (PI9) - pickup roller HP sensor (PI7) Replace the pickup motor. Replace the pickup roller height sensor (PI8). Replace the pickup roller height sensor 2 (PI9). Replace the pickup roller HP sensor (PI7). Replace the ADF controller PCB. Disconnect and then connect the connector. Replace the shift motor HP sensor. Replace the shift motor.

E413 **

The ADF shift motor rotation is faulty. 0001 The shift motor HP sensor is open. 0002 Shift motor HP sensor is closed.

E420 *

An ADF EEPROM read error has occurred. 0000 At power-on, an attempt to read the EEPROM backup data fails. Or, data that Replace the ADF controller PCB. has been read has a fault.

E490 E500

The ADF is of the wrong type. 0001 The ADF is of the wrong type. Finisher communication failure 0001 Indicates ARCNET network communication failure Power OFF/ON, reconnect the communication cable / terminal resistance, replace the transceiver PCB See the description under E602. Replace the DDR-SDRAM. Replace the HDD. Replace the ADF.

E602 E604 E609

The HDD has an error. The time memory (DDR-SDRAM) is faulty or inadequate. 0000 A DDR-SDRAM (1 GB) of adequate capacity is not detected. The HDD temperature is abnormally low. 0008 At start-up, the HDD does not reach a specific temperature within a specific time. 0009 When returning from sleep mode, the HDD does not reach a specific temperature within a specific time.

E610

The HDD encryption key is faulty. 0001 The memory is missing. 0002 The memory is inadequate. 0101 An attempt to initialize the key storage area of the memory has failed. Install the security board. Replace the DDR-SDRAM with one for the model in question (1 GB). Turn off and then on the power. Replace the main controller PCB.

0102 An error has occurred while the encryption processing area is being initialized. Turn off and then on the power. Replace the security board. 0201 An error has occurred in the encryption processing area. 0202 An error has occurred in the encryption processing area. 0301 An attempt to create an encryption key has failed. 0302 A fault exists in the encryption key. 0303 A fault exists in the encryption key. Turn off and then on the power. Replace the main controller PCB.

16-7

Chapter 16
Code Description Remedial action

*: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan, iR7105/7095; inside Japan: iR7105/7095/7086). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: Applied to upgraded machine 0401 An error has been detected during coding. 0402 A fault has been detected in decoding. 0501 An error exists in the file management information in the image storage area. E677 There is an external controller error. 0003 An error has been detected by a check on the configuration when the external Turn off the main power, and check the cable; then, turn on controller is being started up. the main power. If the machine fails to reset, re-install the system software of the external controller. 0010 A controller for a non-Canon machine is connected. Turn off the main power, and check the controller is an appropriate type, and check the cable; then turn on the main power. If the machine fails to reset, re-install the system software of the external controller. Turn off the main power, and check the cable; then, turn on the main power. If the machine fails to start up, re-install the system software of the external controller. Turn off and then on the power. Replace the security board.

0080 There is an error in the communication with the printer after the external controller has started up normally.

E711

An error has occurred in the communication between the pickup/delivery accessory and the printer unit. 0001 Indicates the recognition failure of the delivery options on ARCNET network. Turn off and then back on the power. (Turn off the machine and its delivery accessories; then, turn back on all accessories and then the machine.) 0002 Indicates the optional communication control failure. Connect the communication cables and terminals between the machine and the delivery 0003 Indicates no response from the delivery options. accessories once again. Replace the accessories controller PCB. Replace the transceiver PCB.

E712

An error exists in the communication between the ADF and the reader unit. 0001 As much as 5 sec or more has passed without recovery after communication stopped between the reader controller and the ADF controller. Disconnect and then connect the connectors between the reader unit and the ADF. Replace the reader controller PCB. Replace the ADF controller PCB.

E717

An error exists in the communication with the NE controller. After correcting the fault, be sure to reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) 0001 The NE controller that has been connected before power-off is not recognized Disconnect and then connect the main controller PCB. Install at power-on. the NE controller. Replace the NE controller. 0002 An error that cannot be reset (e.g., cable break) has been detected in the communication.

E719

An error has occurred in the communication with the coin vendor/card reader. After correcting the fault, be sure to reset the error. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR) 0001 The coin vendor that was connected before power-off is not recognized at power-on. Disconnect and then connect the connector of the main controller PCB. Install the coin 0002 In the communication with the coin vendor, an error that cannot be reset has vendor. Replace the coin vendor. occurred (e.g., cable break).

0003 In the communication with the coin vendor, a communication error has occurred during acquisition of unit price information. 0011 The card reader that was connected before power-off is not recognized at power-on. 0012 In the communication with the card reader, an error that cannot be reset has occurred (e.g., cable break). E720*** Error in connection with non-supported options 0102 At the time of initial communication after the power is turned ON, connection Because both equipments cannot be connected at the same between the perfect binder and the professional puncher is recognized time, remove the unnecessary option if required. although its combination is out of specifications. E721*** Error in mismatch combination between the system software and the old type perfect binder 0061 Error in detecting the combination between the controller with V50.00 or later Upgrade to OP-CNT: V10.00 or later and the old type perfect binder (OP-CNT: before V10.00) E730 A PDL-related error has occurred. 1001 An initialization error has occurred at the start of a job. 100A An error has occurred in the communication with an external controller. 9004 A fault has been detected in the cable connection with an external controller. Turn off and then on the power. Replace the external 9005 A fault has been detected in the cable connection with an external controller. controller relay PCB. Replace the external controller. A006 The PDL mechanism does not respond. Reset the PDL mechanism. Turn off and then on the power. Reinstall the system software. Replace the main controller. Reset the PDL mechanism. Turn off and then on the power. Execute full formatting of the HDD, and reinstall the system software. Turn off and then on the power. Reinstall the system software. Execute full formatting of the HDD, and reinstall the system software. Reset the PDL mechanism. Turn off and then on the power. Disconnect and then connect the connector of the main controller PCB. Install the card reader. Replace the card reader.

A007 At start-up, the version of the machine control software and that of the PDL control software do not match. B013 The font data is corrupted at start-up.

E732

An error has occurred in the communication between the reader unit and the main controller.

16-8

Chapter 16
Code Description Remedial action

*: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan, iR7105/7095; inside Japan: iR7105/7095/7086). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: Applied to upgraded machine 0001 An error has occurred in the communication between the reader unit and the Disconnect and connect the connectors of the read communication cable. Check the main power supply of the reader unit (to see if initialization occurs controller. at power-on). Replace the 0010 A fault has been detected in the reader sync signal detection mechanism. reader controller PCB. Reap the reader I/F PCB. Replace the main controller PCB. E733 An error has occurred in the communication between the reader unit and the main controller. 0000 An error has occurred in the communication between the reader unit and the Disconnect and then connect the connector. Check the power main supply of the DC controller (to controller. see if initialization occurs at time of start-up). Replace the DC controller PCB. Replace the 0001 An attempt to communicate with the DC controller fails. main controller PCB. 0010 A fault has occurred in the printer engine sync signal detection mechanism. E740 E743 An error exists in the LAN controller. 0002 An illegal MAC address has been detected at start-up. Replace the main controller PCB. A fault exists in the communication between the main controller and the reader controller. 0000 The reader controller has detected an error in the communication between the Disconnect and then connect the connectors of the reader main communications cable. Replace controller and the reader controller. the reader controller PCB. Replace the main controller PCB. E744 An error exists in the language file/boot ROM. 0001 The version of the language file on the HDD and that of bootable do not match. 0002 The language file on the HDD is too large. 0003 There is no language to which a switchover is made as described in the Config file on the HDD. 0004 An attempt to switch over to the language described in the Config file on the HDD fails. 1000 The connected boot ROM is not one designed for the model in question. 2000 An illegal engine ID has been detected. E746 E748 An unsupported optional board has been detected. 0003 The option board that has been detected is one deigned for a different model. Replace it with one for the model in question. Main controller PCB error 4910 Indicates that a different model of the main controller PCB is detected. Replace to the appropriate main controller PCB (The main controller PCB differs for 105-sheet model (iR7105) and 95-sheet model/86-sheet model (iR7095 / iR7086).) E749 Restart in accordance with a change of the product configuration 0001 A boot ROM designed for a different model has been fitted in place (as when There is no need for remedial action. Nevertheless, the fact installing will remain as part of the an PDL option). error history. E800 The auto power-off circuit has an error. An open circuit has been detected for 3 sec or more in the auto power-off circuit. Turn off and then on the power. Disconnect and then connect J505 of the DC controller PCB. Disconnect and then connect J1719 of the relay PCB. Replace the relay PCB. Replace the DC controller PCB. Replace the boot ROM. Reinstall the system software. Update the version of the language file (Language), or install the appropriate file.

E804

The rotation of the following is faulty: power supply cooling fan 1, power supply cooling fan 2, controller cooling fan. 0001 The fan stop signal has been detected for 5 sec or more after the power supply Disconnect and then connect J505 of the DC controller PCB. cooling fan 1 Replace the power supply has gone on. cooling fan 1. Replace the DC controller PCB. 0002 The fan stop signal has been detected for 5 sec or more after the power supply Disconnect and then connect J505 of the DC controller PCB. cooling fan 2 Replace the power supply has gone on. cooling fan 2. Replace the DC controller PCB. 0004 The fan stop signal of the controller cooling fan has been detected continuously for 16 sec. Disconnect and then connect J1028 of the main controller PCB. Replace the controller cooling fan. Replace the main controller PCB. Disconnect and then connect J503 of the DC controller PCB. Replace the fixing heat discharge fan. Replace the DC controller PCB.

E805

The fixing heat discharge fan rotation is faulty. 0002 The fan stop signal has been detected for 5 sec or more after the fixing heat discharge fan has gone on.

E820

The drum fan rotation is faulty. 0000 The fan stop signal has been detected for 5 sec or more after the drum fan has Disconnect and then connect J512 of the DC controller PCB. gone on. Replace the drum fan. Replace the DC controller PCB.

E823

The pre-transfer charging assembly fan rotation is faulty. 0000 The fan stop signal has been detected for 5 sec or more after the pre-transfer Disconnect and then connect J504 of the DC controller PCB. charging Replace the pre-transfer assembly fan has gone on. charging assembly fan. Replace the DC controller PCB.

E840

An HP detection error has occurred in relation to the fixing inlet sensor (fixing wrap jam detection).

16-9

Chapter 16
Code Description Remedial action

*: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan, iR7105/7095; inside Japan: iR7105/7095/7086). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: Applied to upgraded machine 0000 The home position is not detected when he sensor is moved up/down (i.e., the Disconnect and then connect J508, J552, and J553 of the DC controller PCB. Disconnect sensor and then connect J4001 and J4002 of the fixing inlet sensor has not gone on). 0001 The home position is not detected when the sensor is moved up/down (i.e., the ascent/descent motor driver PCB; as necessary, replace the fixing inlet sensor ascent/ sensor descent motor. Replace the fixing has not gone off). inlet sensor ascent/descent motor driver PCB. E850 There is a fault in the double-feeding detection unit. 0000 The double-feeding sensor (reception) fails to attain an ultrasonic signal of a Remove paper lint form the surface of the double-feeding specific sensor (reception). Remount the level. double-feeding sensor (transmission, reception). Disconnect and then connect J509 and J550 of the DC controller PCB. Replace the double-feeding sensor (transmission, reception). Replace the double-feeding sensor PCB (transmission, reception).

16.2.2 E602 Detail

<E602-XXYY> XX= "00"
T-16-3 XX YY 01 There is no system software for the main CPU. At time of start-up, no start-up partition (BOOTDEV) is found. Description The HDD cannot be recognized. Action to take - Turn off the power, and check the HDD cable. Thereafter, turn off the power. - Turn on the power, and listen for a sound from the HDD or touch the HDD, to see if the HDD is rotating. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software. - Replace the main controller PCB. - Start up in safe mode, and perform full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software; then, turn off and then on the power. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software.
0011-1102

02

00 03

An interrupt has been detected while Take action according to the type of error code screen: <error code screen is black-and-white> data is being written to the boot - Turn off the power, and turn on the power while holding down the 1 and 9 keys. device. In response, the machine will automatically start to repair the sector in which the write operation has been interrupted. (The screen changes to solid black.) While repairs are being made, the progress of processing will be indicated on the screen, turning white at its end. When done, turn off and then back on the power. - Start up in safe mode, and perform full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software; then, turn off and the back on the power. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software. <error core screen is normal (spanner mark)> - Set CHK-TYPE=0, and execute HD-CHECK; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software; then, turn off and back on the power. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software. No system software is found for the - Start up in safe mode, and perform full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software; then, turn sub CPU. off and then back on the power. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software. A file used by the Web browser to make references is damaged, or has been deleted. - Reinstall the content of the Web browser. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software.

06

12

16-10

Chapter 16 XX= "01" to "FF"

T-16-4 XX Occurrence at time of start-up Partition Description 03 05 Action 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 FF 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 2 1 FSTDEV IMG_MNG FSTCDEV APL_GEN TMP_GEN TMP_FAX TMP_PSS PDLDEV BOOTDEV APL_MEAP APL_SEND APL_KEEP APL_LOG not specified compressed image data (e.g., Box) file management table, profile job archiving (changing) general-purpose data general-purpose data (temporary file) not used for PDL spool (temporary file) PDL-related file firmware (system, MEAP, key, certificate, PDF dictionary, RUI, content, voice dictionary) MEAP application address book, filter for non-initialization data storage system log check for and recovery of HDD full-fault sectors *3 *1 *2 *3 *1 *4 *8 *5 *6 *8 *5 *7 *9 *10 *11 *12 *1 *5 YY Occurrence during normal execution 13,25 Action 10,12,14, 22,23,24

XX

CHKTYPE

00,01,0 11,21 2,04

YY *1

Description

Action - Set the partition number in question for CHK-TYPE, and execute HD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Enter CHK-TYPE in question (for the partition), and execute HD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Ask the user to download the address book data using a remote UI. - Set the partition number in question for CHK-TYPE, and execute HD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Start download mode, and perform full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software; then turn off and then back on the power. The recovery operation for the boot partition is not possible without the use of the SST in save mode. - Set CHK-TYPE=0, and execute HD-CHECK; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Start download mode, and perform full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Set CHK-TYPE=0, and execute HD-CHECK; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Set CHK-TYPE=1, 2, 3, 5, and execute HD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Enter CHK-TYPE in question (for the partition), and execute HD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software.

*2 03

The ongoing write operation is interrupted (at start-up).

*3

*4 *5

*6 05 *7

The machine is designed so that execution of HD-CLEAR is not possible in service mode (so as to prevent loss of information, e.g., address book, filter information). - Ask the user to download the address book data using a remote UI. - In service mode, start download mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system A file system error has occurred. software; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Set CHK-TYPE=1, 2, 3, 5, and execute HD-CLEAR; then, turn off and then back on the power. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software. The recovery operation for the boot partition is not possible without the use of the SST in save mode. - Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software; then, turn off and back on the power. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software.

*8 00 01 02 04 11 21

*9

The HDD has poor contact, or a system error has occurred. The HDD has poor contact.

- Check the cable and the power cord. - Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software; then, turn off and back on the power. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software. - Check the cable and the power cord. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software.

*10

*11

13 25

There is a strong possibility of damage in the file data (e.g., Box) stored on the HDD. - Set the partition number in question for CHK-TYPE, and execute HD-CHECK; then, turn off and back on the power. The ongoing write operation has - Set the partition number in question for CHK-TYPE, and execute HD-CLEAR; then, turn off and back on been interrupted. the power. (In the case of BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 or APL_SEND, execute reformatting using the SST, and reinstall the system software.) - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software. - Start up in safe mode, and perform full formatting using the SST and reinstall the system software; then, turn off and back on the power. - Replace the HDD, and reinstall the system software.

*12

10 12 14 22 23 24

A system error or a packet error has been detected.

16-11

Chapter 16

16.3 Jam Code

16.3.1 Jam Code (printer)
0011-5508

T-16-5 Code 01xx 02xx 0Axx 0Bxx 0C00 Jam type delay jam stationary jam power-on residual jam door open jam double-feeding double-feeding sensor (reception) PS65 Sensor type See the table Sensor No.

Code xx01 xx02 xx03 xx04 xx05 xx06 xx07 xx08 xx09 xx0A xx0B xx0C xx0D

Sensor type right deck pickup sensor left deck pickup sensor cassette 3 pickup sensor cassette 4 pickup sensor vertical path 1 paper sensor vertical path 2 paper sensor vertical path 3 paper sensor vertical path 4 paper sensor registration roller sensor fixing claw jam sensor inside delivery sensor outside delivery sensor fixing feed unit outlet sensor

Sensor No. PS20 PS25 PS37 PS42 PS47 PS49 PS41 PS46 PS5 PS65 PS9 PS10 PS11

Code xx0F xx10 xx11 xx12 xx13 xx14 xx15 xx16 xx17 xx18 xx19 xx1A

Sensor type duplexing reversal sensor duplexing outlet sensor pre-confluence sensor post-confluence sensor left deck feed sensor right deck feed sensor side paper deck feed sensor multifeeder curl-removal sensor side paper deck pickup sensor image write start sensor manual feeder feed sensor fixing inlet sensor

Sensor No. PS12 PS61 PS14 PS15 PS26 PS27 PS106 PS68 PS101 PS60 PS35 PS63

16.3.2 Jam Code (DADF-Q1)

0011-5512

T-16-6 Code 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 Sensor type separation delay pickup delay pickup stationary 1 pickup stationary 2 reversal delay reversal stationary delivery delay delivery stationary 1 delivery stationary 2 pre-reversal delay 1 pre-reversal delay 2 pre-reversal delay 3 pre-reversal stationary 1 pre-reversal stationary 2 pre-reversal stationary 3 Sensor No. S4 S4,S2 S3 S2 S1 S1 PI13 PI13,S9 PI13,S9 S3 S1,S3 PI4 S1,S4 S2,S4 S2,S3 Description At time of separation, the separation sensor does not detect the original after it has been moved a specific distance (221 mm) following the start of the separation motor. At time of separation, the pre-registration roller sensor does not detect the original after it has been moved a specific distance (93 mm) following the detection of its lead edge by the separation sensor. At time of pickup, the post-registration sensor does not detect the original after it has been moved a specific distance (40 mm) following the start of the reversal motor. At time of pickup, the pre-registration roller sensor detects the original after it has been moved a specific distance (330 mm if small; 660 mm if large) following the start of the reversal motor. At time of reversal, the reversal sensor does not detect the original after it has been moved a specific distance (104 mm) from the platen roller. At time of reversal, the reversal sensor detects the original after it has been moved a specific distance (original length x 1.5 mm) following arching operation. At time of delivery, the delivery sensor does not detect the original after it has been moved a specific distance (631 mm - original length) following the start of the belt motor. At time of delivery, the manual feeder registration roller sensor detects the original after it has been moved a specific distance (original length + 100 mm) following the activation of the delivery sensor. At time of delivery, the delivery sensor detects the original after it has been moved a specific distance (original length + 100 mm) following the deactivation of the manual feeder registration roller sensor. At time of pre-reversal, the post-registration roller sensor does not detect the original after it has been moved a specific distance (50 mm) following the activation of the reversal motor. At time of pre-reversal, the reversal sensor does not detect the original after it has been moved a specific distance (100 mm) after the post-registration roller sensor has gone on. At time of pre-reversal, the reversal sensor does not detect the original when it has been moved over a specific distance (100 mm) after the reversal motor has stopped. At time of reversal, the separation sensor has detected the original when it has been moved over a specific distance (169 mm) after the reversal sensor has gone on. At time of pre-reversal, the pre-registration sensor has detected the original when it has been moved over a specific distance (120 mm) after its trail edge has moved past the separation pull-off roller. At time of pre-reversal, the post-registration roller sensor detects the original after it has been moved a specific distance (50 mm) following the passage of the trail edge of the original for the pre-registration roller sensor. At time of pre-reversal, the reversal sensor detects the original after it has been moved a specific distance (100 mm) following the passage of the trail edge of the original from the pre-registration roller sensor. At time of pre-reversal pickup, the reversal sensor does not detect the original after it has been moved a specific distance (100 mm) following the start of the reversal sensor. At time of pre-reveal, the pre-reversal sensor has detected the original when it has been moved over a specific distance after the reversal sensor has detected its lead edge.

0016 0017 0018

pre-reversal stationary 4 pre-reversal pickup delay pre-reversal pickup stationary 1

S1,S3 S1 S1,PI4

16-12

Chapter 16
Code 0019 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 0025 Sensor type pre-reversal pickup stationary 2 reversal pickup delay reversal pickup stationary pickup lead edge skew pickup trail edge skew pickup fault 1 pickup fault 2 Sensor No. S1,PI4 S2 S2 S4,S5 S4,S5 S1 S3,S2 Description At time of pre-reversal pickup, the reversal sensor detects the original after it has been moved a specific distance following the detection of its trail edge by the pre-reversal sensor. At time of reversal, the pre-registration roller sensor does not detect the original after it has been moved a specific distance (197 mm) following the end of arching operation. At time of reversal, the pre-registration roller sensor detects the original after it has been moved a specific distance (original length X 1.5 mm) following the start of the pre-registration roller sensor. At time of separation, there is a discrepancy of an equivalent of 10 mm in the timing of detecting the lead edge between the separation sensor and the skew sensor. At time of pickup, there is a discrepancy of an equivalent of 10 mm in the timing of detecting the trail edge between the separation sensor and the skew sensor. At time of pickup, the reversal sensor detects an original before it moves past the pre-registration roller sensor. At time of pickup, the post-registration sensor detects an original before the start of the reversal motor. At time of pickup, the pre-registration roller sensor does not detect the original after it has been moved a specific distance. At time of pre-reversal, the pre-registration roller sensor detects an original before the start of the reversal motor. At time of reversal, the pre-registration roller sensor does not detect the original while its trail edge is moving past the reversal sensor. At time of pre-reversal, there is a discrepancy of an equivalent of 10 mm in the timing of detecting the trail edge between the separation sensor and the skew sensor. At time of reversal, the pre-reversal sensor detects the original during a wait for the activation of the preregistration roller sensor. At time of arching operation in manual feed mode, the manual feeder registration roller sensor does not detect an original within a specific period of time (1 sec) from the start of the delivery motor. At time of pickup from the manual feeder, the reversal sensor does not detect the original after it has been moved a specific distance (638 mm) following the start of the belt motor. At time of pickup from the manual feeder (platen roller), the reversal sensor does not detect the original after it has been moved a specific distance (50 mm) following the start of the belt motor. At time of manual feed delivery, the delivery sensor does not detect the original after it has been moved a specific distance (621 mm - original length). At time of manual feed delivery, the delivery sensor detects the original after it has been moved a specific distance (original length x 1.5) following the activation of the delivery sensor. The 1st sheet is identified as a pickup delivery 1 jam (0003). The 1st sheet is identified as a pickup stationary 2 jam (0004). The 1st sheet is identified as a reversal delay jam (0005). The 1st sheet is identified as a reversal stationary jam (0006). The 1st sheet is identified as a delivery delay jam (0007). The 1st sheet is identified as a delivery delay jam (0008). The 1st sheet is identified as a delivery stationary 2 jam (0009). The 1st sheet is identified as a pre-reversal delay 1 jam (0010). The 1st sheet is identified as a pre-reversal delay 2 jam (0011). The 1st sheet is identified as a pre-reversal delay 3 jam (0012). The 1st sheet is identified as a pre-reversal stationary 1 jam (0013). The 1st sheet is identified as a pre-reversal stationary 2 jam (0014). The 1st sheet is identified as a pre-reversal stationary 3 jam (0015). The 1st sheet is identified as a pre-reversal stationary 4 jam (0016). The 1st sheet is identified as a pre-reversal pickup delay jam (0017). The 1st sheet is identified as a pre-reversal pickup stationary 1 jam (0018). The 1st sheet is identified as a pre-reversal pickup stationary 2 jam (0019). The 1st sheet is identified as a reversal pickup delay (0020). The 1st sheet is identified as a reversal pickup stationary jam (0021). The 1st sheet is identified as a pickup lead edge skew jam (0022). The 1st sheet is identified as a pickup trail edge skew jam (0023). A pickup NG1 condition (0024) has occurred on the 1st sheet. A pickup NG1 condition (0025) has occurred on the 1st sheet. A reversal pickup trail edge skew condition (0026) has occurred on the 1st sheet. The 1st sheet is identified as a reversal pickup fault 1 jam (0027). The software control mechanism has failed.

0026 0027 0030 0031 0032 0033 0034 0043 0044 0045 0046 0047 0048 0049 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 0065 0066 0067 0071

reversal pickup trail edge skew reversal pickup fault 1 manual feed registration delay manual feed registration delay manual feeder reversal stationary manual feed delivery delay manual feed delivery stationary

S4,S5 PI4 S9 S1 S1 PI13 PI13

1st sheet pickup stationary 1 S3 1st sheet pickup stationary 2 S2 1st sheet reversal delay 1st sheet reversal stationary 1st sheet delivery delay 1st sheet delivery stationary 1 1st sheet delivery stationary 2 S1 S1 PI13 PI13,S9 PI13,S9

1st sheet pre-reversal delay 1 S3 1st sheet pre-reversal delay 2 S1,S3 1st sheet pre-reversal delay 3 PI4 1st sheet pre-reversal stationary 1 1st sheet pre-reversal stationary 2 1st sheet pre-reversal stationary 3 1st sheet pre-reversal stationary 4 S1,S4 S2,S4 S2,S3 S1,S3

1st sheet pre-reversal pickup S1 delay 1st sheet pre-reversal pickup S1,PI4 stationary 1 1st sheet pre-reversal pickup S1,PI4 stationary 2 1st sheet reversal pickup delay 1st sheet reversal pickup stationary 1st sheet pickup lead edge skew 1st sheet pickup trail edge skew 1st sheet pickup fault 1 1st sheet pickup fault 2 S2 S2 S4,S5 S4,S5 S1 S3,S2

1st sheet reversal pickup trail S4,S5 edge skew 1st sheet reversal pickup NG1 timing fault 1 PI4 -

16-13

Chapter 16
Code 0072 0073 0074 0075 0076 0077 0078 0079 0080 0081 0082 0083 0084 0085 0090 0091 0092 0093 0094 Sensor type timing fault 2 illegal size manual feed original size error image lead edge position error 1st sheet image lead edge position error belt speed setting error belt speed switch-over error belt status error image lead edge output timing error reversal speed setting error reversal speed switch-over error reversal status error last original error error ADF open user DF open cover open user cover open initial stationary Sensor No. S3 S9,S1 S7 S7 PI1 PI1 PI1 S2,S3,SW301 PI5 PI5 PI5 PI1 PI1,PI2,PI11 PI10 PI10 PI3,PI6 PI3,PI6 Description In copyboard mode, an original has been read and moved to and stopped at the right side of the platen roller; however, the preceding original has not been delayed. At time of LDR stream reading, the post-registration sensor detects the original after it has been moved a specific distance (30 mm) from the wait position. At time of manual feed, the reversal sensor detects an original while the manual registration roller sensor also detects an original. At time of stream reading, no change has occurred in the read position in response to a request for a change. The 1st sheet is identified as having an image lead edge position error (0075). The speed setting of the belt motor is below the minimum speed (100 mm/sec) or above the maximum speed (700 mm/sec). When the belt motor speed is switched over, the belt motor is not moving at a constant speed. At time of switch-over, the state is not any of the following: acceleration, constant speed rotation, deceleration. At time of stream reading, the image lead edge signal is generated in the course of acceleration while a move is made from the wait position to the image lead edge position. The speed setting of the reversal motor is below the minimum speed (100 mm/sec) or above the maximum speed (700 mm/sec). At time of switching over the reversal motor speed, the reversal motor is not rotating at a constant speed. At time of switch-over, the state of the reversal motor is not any of the following: acceleration, constant speed, deceleration. A belt motor error occurs while the last original is being discharged by the platen roller or being moved. A motor error other than an IPC communication or pickup error has occurred. (less than 3 times) The ADF is identified as being open. The ADF is identified as being open while the machine is operating. The cover is identified as being open. The cover (front or rear) is identified as being open while the machine is operating.

PI4,PI12,PI13,S At the start of operation, a sensor inside the paper path detects an original. 1,S2,S3,S4,S5,S 9 S6 S1 S1,S9 The pickup signal has been received for a specific period of time (2 sec) in the absence of a detected original. The reversal sensor detects an original while the belt motor is moved for a specific distance before the start of a left pickup job. At time of manual feed pickup, the reversal sensor detects an original while the manual feeder registration roller sensor also detects an original. A drop occurs in the voltage supplied by the host machine while the machine is operating.

0095 0096 0097 0098

cycle fault residual original manual feeder residual original power-down

16.3.3 Jam Code (Delivery Accessories)

0012-1381

T-16-7 Jam Code 1002 1004 1006 1008 100A 100C 100E 1042 1044 1046 104A 1054 1062 1064 Type Inlet sensor delay Shift unit sensor delay Buffer path 1 sensor delay Buffer path 2 sensor delay Upper delivery sensor delay Lower path sensor delay Lower delivery sensor delay Saddle inlet sensor delay Saddle small sensor delay Saddle vertical path sensor delay Saddle pre-pressing sensor delay Saddle pressing home position sensor delay Sensor PS3 PS4 UN13 UN14 PS5 UN24 PS6 PS101 PS103 PS105 PS111 PS113 Description The inlet sensor (PS3) does not detect paper within a specific period of time (distance) after the delivery signal from the host machine has been received. The shift unit sensor (PS4) does not detect paper within a specific period of time (distance) after the inlet sensor (PS3) has detected paper. The buffer path 1 sensor (UN13) does not detect paper within a specific period of time (distance) after the shift unit sensor (PS4) has detected paper. The buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) does not detect paper within a specific period of time (distance) after the shift unit sensor (PS4) has detected paper. The upper delivery sensor (PS5) does not detect paper within a specific period of time (distance) after the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) has detected paper. The lower path sensor (UN24) does not detect paper within a specific period of time (distance) after the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) has detected paper. The lower delivery sensor (PS6) does not detect paper within a specific period of time after the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) has detected paper. The saddle inlet sensor (PS101) does not detect paper within a specific period of time (distance) after the lower path sensor (UN24) has detected paper. The saddle small sensor (PS103) does not detect paper within a specific period of time (distance) after the saddle inlet sensor (PS101) has detected paper. The paper does not detect the saddle vertical path sensor (PS105) within a specific period of time after the saddle stop plate operation has been ended. The saddle pre-pressing sensor (PS111) does not detect paper within a specific period of time after the saddle stop plate operation has been ended. The saddle pressing home position sensor (PS113) does not detect the home position within a specific period of time after the start of saddle stack delivery operation. Indicates that the tray A registration sensor fails to detect paper when a specific period of time passes after start of pick up. Indicates that the tray B registration sensor fails to detect paper when a specific period of time passes after start of pick up.

Tray A registration sensor delay (inserter) S5 Tray B registration sensor delay (inserter) S13

16-14

Chapter 16
Jam Code 1066 1068 106A 1082 1084 1086 1088 1103 1105 1107 1109 110B 110D 110F 1143 1145 1147 114B 1155 1163 Type Feeding path sensor 1 delay (inserter) Feeding path sensor 2 delay (inserter; for perfect binder only) Pre-confluence sensor delay (inserter; for finisher only) Sensor S14 S18 S18 Description Indicates that the feeding path sensor 1 fails to detect paper when a specific period of time passes after passing the registration sensor. Indicates that the feeding path sensor 2 fails to detect paper when a specific period of time passes after passing the feeding path sensor 1. Indicates that the pre-confluence sensor fails to detect paper when a specific period of time passes after passing the feeding path sensor 2. Indicates that paper does not reach the feeding path paper sensor 1 (PI76) within a specific period of time. Indicates that paper does not reach the feeding path paper sensor 2 (S7) within a specific period of time after reaching the feeding path paper sensor 1 (PI76). Indicates that paper does not reach the feeding path paper sensor 3 (S8) within a specific period of time after reaching the feeding path paper sensor 2 (S7) Indicates that paper does not reach the feeding path paper sensor 4 (PI75) within a specific period of time after reaching the feeding path paper sensor 3 (S8) The paper does not leave the inlet sensor (PS3) within a specific period of time after it has detected paper. The paper does not leave the shift unit sensor (PS4) within a specific period of time (distance) after the inlet sensor (PS3) has detected paper. The paper does not leave the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) within a specific period of time (distance) after the shift unit sensor (PS4) has detected paper. The paper does not leave the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) within a specific period of time (distance) after the shift unit sensor (PS4) has detected paper. The paper does not leave the upper delivery sensor (PS5) within a specific period of time (distance) after the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) has detected paper. The paper does not leave the lower path sensor (UN24) within a specific period of time (distance) after the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) has detected paper. The paper does not leave the lower delivery sensor (PS6) within a specific period of time (distance) after the buffer path 2 sensor (UN14) has detected paper. The paper does not leave the saddle inlet sensor (PS101) within a specific period of time (distance) after the lower path sensor (UN24) has detected paper. The paper does not leave the saddle small sensor (PS103) within a specific period of time (distance) after the saddle inlet sensor (PS101) has detected paper. The paper does not leave the saddle vertical path sensor (PS105) within a specific period of time after the saddle stop plate operation has been started. The paper does not leave the saddle pre-pressing sensor (PS111) within a specific period of time after the end of saddle stop plate operation. The saddle home position sensor (PS113) remains on (detects the home position) at the start of saddle pressing operation. Indicates that during paper-feeding, the tray A registration sensor fails to detect the absence of paper when a specific period of time passes after detecting the presence of paper at the tray A registration sensor. Indicates that during paper-feeding, the tray B registration sensor fails to detect the absence of paper when a specific period of time passes after detecting the presence of paper at the tray B registration sensor. Indicates that during paper-feeding, the feeding sensor fails to detect the absence of paper when a specific period of time passes after detecting the presence of paper at the feeding sensor. Indicates that during paper-feeding, the feeding sensor 2 fails to detect the absence of paper when a specified period of time passes after detecting the presence of paper at the feeding sensor 2. Indicates that during paper-feeding, the confluence sensor fails to detect the absence of paper when a specified period of time passes after detecting the presence of paper at the confluence sensor. Indicates that paper does not pass the feeding path paper sensor 1 (PI76) within a specified period of time. Indicates that paper does not pass the feeding path paper sensor 3 (S8) within a specified period of time. Indicates that paper does not pass the feeding path paper sensor 3 (S8) within a specified period of time. Indicates that paper does not pass the feeding path paper sensor 4 (PI75) within a specified period of time. Indicates that paper does not pass the sensors within a specified period of time. Indicates that paper does not pass the sensors within a specified period of time. Indicates the delivery signal failure from the puncher. Indicates the presence of residual paper in the feeding assembly at power-on.

Feeding path paper sensor 1 delay (paper- PI76 folding unit) Feeding path paper sensor 2 delay (paper- PI76, S7 folding unit) Feeding path paper sensor 3 delay (paper- S8 folding unit) Feeding path paper sensor 4 delay (paper- PI75 folding unit) Inlet sensor stationary Shift unit sensor stationary Buffer path 1 sensor stationary Buffer path 2 sensor stationary Upper delivery sensor stationary Lower path sensor stationary Lower delivery sensor stationary Saddle inlet sensor stationary Saddle small sensor stationary Saddle vertical path sensor stationary Saddle pre-pressing sensor stationary Saddle pressing home position sensor stationary Tray A registration sensor stationary (inserter) Tray B registration sensor stationary (inserter) PS3 PS4 UN13 UN14 PS5 UN24 PS6 PS101 PS103 PS105 PS111 PS113 S5

1165

S13

1167

Feeding path sensor 1 stationary (inserter) S14

1169

Feeding path sensor 2 stationary (inserter; S18 for perfect binder only) Pre-confluence sensor stationary (inserter; S18 for finisher only) Feeding path paper sensor 1 stationary (paper-folding unit) Feeding path paper sensor 2 stationary (paper-folding unit) Feeding path paper sensor 3 stationary (paper-folding unit) Feeding path paper sensor 4 stationary (paper-folding unit) Bypass stationary (professional puncher) Punch path stationary (professional puncher) Finisher reception fault (professional puncher) Residual (at power-on) PI76 S8 S8 PI75 S1, S8 S2, S3, S4, S5, S6 S7 All sensors within delivery optional devices (*) S5,S13,S14,S18 S1, ,S7, S8 MSW1 S15,S17

116B

1183 1185 1187 1189 11A2 11A3 11A4 1320

1374 13A2 13A3 1422 1475

Power-on (inserter) Bypass residual (professional puncher) Door open Door open (inserter)

Indicates the detection of presence of residual paper on the feeding path of the inserter at power-on. Indicates the presence of residual paper in the bypass assembly at power-on. Indicates the presence of residual paper in the punch path assembly at power-on. The front cover switch (MSW1) has identified the front cover as being open during machine operation. Indicates that cover is opened during the operation of the inserter.

Punch path residual (professional puncher) S2, S3, S4, S5, S6

16-15

Chapter 16
Jam Code 1524 1550 1721 Type Staple jam (finisher stacker assembly) Staple jam (saddle assembly) Residual (at initial rotation) Sensor SU SU All sensors within delivery optional devices PS6 PS110 S1 S6 S7 Description Indicates the machine fails to detect the start of the staple motor (M25) a specific period of time after the start of the motor. Indicates the machine fails to detect the start of the stitcher motor (M110) a specific period of time after the start of the motor. Indicates the presence of residual paper in the feeding assembly during initial rotation. Software control timing fault The saddle stop plate sensor (PS110) does not detect the start-up of the saddle motor stop plate motor (M106) within a specific period of time. Indicates that the machine receives the pickup request signal while paper is absent on the Tray A. Indicates that the machine receives the pickup request signal while paper is absent on the Tray B. Indicates that the paper size detected during feeding and the paper size notified to the machine are different. Indicates that after the pickup request for the inserter, pickup cancellation is unavailable despite the inability of the machine to feed paper from the inserter due to causes including jam occurrence. Indicates that paper does not reach the finisher within a specific period of time.

1F25 1F52 1F70 1F71 1F72 1F73

processing tray load timing fault Saddle stop plate Tray A paper absence (inserter) Tray B paper absence (inserter) Paper size mismatch (inserter) Pickup cancel NG (inserter)

1FA4

Reach-to-finisher delay (professional puncher)

S7

*: In the event of '1320' jam (stationary jam at power-on), following sensors are capable of checking the paper level from Service Mode (I/O Display)
Sensor name Sensor No. COPIER > I/O Display > SORTER Port No. Plain finisher (Finisher-V1) Lower delivery sensor Buffer path 2 sensor Buffer path 1 sensor Shift unit sensor Inlet sensor Upper delivery sensor Lower path sensor Saddle finisher (FinisherV2) Saddle leading edge path sensor Saddle vertical path sensor Saddle press front sensor Saddle small sensor Saddle inlet sensor When mounting the paperfolding unit Folding residual sensor 1 Folding residual sensor 2 Folding residual sensor 3 Feeding path paper sensor 1 Feeding path paper sensor 2 Feeding path paper sensor 3 Feeding path paper sensor 4 PS6 UN14 UN13 PS4 PS3 PS5 UN24 PS106 PS105 PS111 PS103 PS101 PI73 PI77 PI74 PI76 S7 S8 PI75 P024 P024 P024 P024 P024 P024 P024 P013 P021 P021 P021 P021 P024 P024 P024 P024 P024 P024 P024 Bit No. Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Bit 4 Bit 1 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 0: paper absent 1: paper present 1: paper absent 0: paper present 1: paper absent 0: paper present 0: paper absent 1: paper present 0: paper absent 1: paper present 0: paper absent 1: paper present 1: paper absent 0: paper present 0: paper absent 1: paper present 0: paper absent 1: paper present 1: paper absent 0: paper present 1: paper absent 0: paper present 0: paper absent 1: paper present 0: paper absent 1: paper present 0: paper absent 1: paper present 0: paper absent 1: paper present 0: paper absent 1: paper present 0: paper absent 1: paper present 0: paper absent 1: paper present 0: paper absent 1: paper present Presence/absence of paper

16-16

Chapter 16

16.4 Alarm Code

16.4.1 Alarm Code
0011-5558

T-16-8 EE 00 02 Location error code indication reader unit (scanner system) ffff 0804 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 04 pickup/transport system 0001 0002 0003 0004 0007 0008 0011 0012 0013 0014 0017 0018 0019 0020 0021 0022 0023 0024 0025 0026 0027 0028 30 high-voltage system 0001 0002 0003 32 33 potential control system fan system 0001 0002 0001 0006 0007 61 62 65 stapler system (sorter/finisher) saddle stitcher system puncher system (sorter/finisher) 0001 0001 0001 Alarm system fan alarm (detail code: 0004) dust detection small 1 dust detection small 2 dust detection small 3 dust detection small 4 dust detection small 5 dust detection small 6 dust detection small 7 dust detection large 1 dust detection large 2 dust detection large 3 dust detection large 4 dust detection large 5 dust detection large 6 dust detection large 7 small position stream read disable large position stream read disable scanner lamp intensity too low right deck lifter left deck lifter alarm cassette 3 lifter alarm cassette 4 lifter alarm manual feeder tray lifter alarm side paper deck lifter alarm right deck retry alarm left deck retry alarm cassette 3 retry alarm cassette 4 retry alarm manual feeder retry alarm side paper deck retry alarm right deck pickup sensor low intensity alarm left deck pickup sensor low intensity alarm cassette 3 pickup sensor low intensity alarm cassette 4 pickup sensor low intensity alarm right deck pull-off sensor low intensity alarm left deck pull-off sensor low intensity alarm cassette 3 pull-off sensor low intensity alarm cassette 4 pull-off sensor low intensity alarm side paper deck pickup sensor low intensity alarm side paper deck pull-off sensor low intensity alarm primary charging assembly leakage transfer charging assembly leakage separation charging assembly leakage potential control VD alarm potential control VL alarm delivery assembly curl-removing fan alarm developing assembly fan alarm delivery anti-adhesion fan alarm no staple no switch punch case full

16-17

Chapter 17 Service Mode

Contents

Contents
17.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................17-1
17.1.1 Service mode screen configuration .......................................................................................................................................... 17-1 17.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes ........................................................................................................................................ 17-2 17.1.3 Exiting service modes .............................................................................................................................................................. 17-2 17.1.4 Backing Up Service Mode ....................................................................................................................................................... 17-2 17.1.5 Initial screen............................................................................................................................................................................. 17-3 17.1.6 Main/intermediate item screen................................................................................................................................................. 17-3 17.1.7 Sub-item screen........................................................................................................................................................................ 17-4

17.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode)..............................................................................................................................17-5

17.2.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-5
17.2.1.1 COPIER Items.............................................................................................................................................................................................17-5

17.2.2 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 17-11

17.2.2.1 FEEDER Items..........................................................................................................................................................................................17-11

17.3 I/O (I/O Display Mode)............................................................................................................................................17-13

17.3.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................................................ 17-13 17.3.2 <DC-CON>............................................................................................................................................................................ 17-13 17.3.3 <R-CON>............................................................................................................................................................................... 17-18 17.3.4 <FEEDER> ............................................................................................................................................................................ 17-19 17.3.5 <SORTER> (P001-P067) ...................................................................................................................................................... 17-21 17.3.6 <SORTER> (P068-P100) ...................................................................................................................................................... 17-29 17.3.7 <SORTER> (P101-P171) ...................................................................................................................................................... 17-37 17.3.8 <MN-CONT> ........................................................................................................................................................................ 17-42

17.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode) ..................................................................................................................................17-43

17.4.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-43
17.4.1.1 COPIER Items...........................................................................................................................................................................................17-43

17.4.2 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 17-49

17.4.2.1 FEEDER Items..........................................................................................................................................................................................17-49

17.4.3 SORTER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 17-50

17.4.3.1 SORTER Items..........................................................................................................................................................................................17-50

17.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode)..............................................................................................................17-54

17.5.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-54
17.5.1.1 COPIER Items...........................................................................................................................................................................................17-54

17.5.2 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 17-61

17.5.2.1 FEEDER Items..........................................................................................................................................................................................17-61

17.5.3 SORTER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 17-63

17.5.3.1 SORTER Items..........................................................................................................................................................................................17-63

17.6 OPTION (Machine Settings Mode) .........................................................................................................................17-64

17.6.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-64
17.6.1.1 COPIER Items...........................................................................................................................................................................................17-64 17.6.1.2 Soft Counter Specifications.......................................................................................................................................................................17-85

17.6.2 FEEDER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 17-92

17.6.2.1 FEEDER Items..........................................................................................................................................................................................17-92

17.6.3 SORTER ................................................................................................................................................................................ 17-93

17.6.3.1 SORTER Items..........................................................................................................................................................................................17-93

17.6.4 BOARD.................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-94

17.6.4.1 BOARD Items...........................................................................................................................................................................................17-94

17.7 TEST (Test Print Mode) ..........................................................................................................................................17-94

17.7.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-94
17.7.1.1 COPIER Items...........................................................................................................................................................................................17-94

17.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode) ....................................................................................................................................17-96

17.8.1 COPIER ................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-96

Contents

17.8.1.1 COPIER Items .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-96

Chapter 17

17.1 Outline
17.1.1 Service mode screen configuration
As shown below, the service modes use three screen levels: initial screen -> main/intermediate item screen -> sub-item screen. One set of modes are used for normal maintenance (Level 1 modes), and another set are used for troubleshooting (Level 2 modes).
User screen
0011-5845

)(2,8)(

Reset key

Initial screen (Level 1) Initial screen (Level 2)

(
(Select an item.)

)(2)

Main/intermediate item screen (Level 1)

(Select an item.)

(Select a main item from the top of screen.) (The corresponding intermediate items are then displayed and can be selected.)

Main/intermediate item screen (Level 2)

Sub-item screen (Level 1)

Sub-item screen (Level 1)

(Select a main item from the top of screen.) (The corresponding intermediate items are then displayed and can be selected.)

Previous/next page

Sub-item screen (Level 2)

Sub-item screen (Level 2)

Previous/next page

F-17-1

The copier has the 7 service modes listed below.

COPIER FEEDER DISPLAY SORTER BOARD I/O ADJUST FUNCTION OPTION TEST COUNTER
F-17-2

Status display mode I/O display mode Adjustment mode Operation/inspection mode Specifications setting mode Test print mode Counter mode

17-1

Chapter 17

17.1.2 Entering or selecting service modes

0011-5846

To execute a copier operation using a service mode, remove the cable from the external controller or the cable from the network before entering the desired mode. Take care when using the FUNCTION (operation/inspection mode) mode, as the copier may malfunction and be damaged if a print job is received from outside while an operation is executing with this mode in effect. 1) Press the asterisk key ( ) on the operation panel. 2) Press 2 and 8 simultaneously on the numeric keypad. 3) Press the asterisk key ( )on the operation panel. The initial screen (see below) now appears.

Copier service modes

COPIER FEEDER SORTER

ADF service modes

Displayed only when the ADF is attached.

Sorter/finisher service modes

Displayed only when the finisher is attached. (There are no modes for the sorter, so SORTER isnt displayed even when the sorter is attached.)

Option board service modes

Displayed only when an option board is attached.

BOARD

F-17-3

17.1.3 Exiting service modes

When the reset key is pressed once, the display returns to the service mode initial screen. When the reset key is pressed twice, the service modes are exited, and the display returns to the user screen (standard screen).
0011-5847

When using the ADJUST, FUNCTION or OPTION service mode, be sure to turn the main power switch ON/OFF after exiting the mode.

17.1.4 Backing Up Service Mode

At time of shipment from the factory, each machine is adjusted, and the adjustment values are recorded on the Service sheet [1] (attached to the cover of the Service Book case behind the front cover). If you have replaced the reader controller PCB, DC controller PCB (or if you have cleared the RAM of these), the ADJUST and OPTION settings will be replaced by default settings. If you have made adjustments in the field and changed service mode settings, be sure to print out the Service sheet and store it away (COPIER>FUNCTION>MISCP>LBL-PRNT). If the label lacks items, use its margin. You can also print out a complete list of service mode settings: COPIER>ADJUST/OPTION/COUNTER; COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT.
0011-5848

[1]
F-17-4

17-2

Chapter 17

17.1.5 Initial screen

0011-5849

COPIER
Initial items Touch an item to select it.

FEEDER

SORTER

BOARD

F-17-5

17.1.6 Main/intermediate item screen

0011-5850

Display

I/O

Adjust

Function

Option

Test

Counter

Main items Touch an item to select it.

VERSION USER ACC-STS

Intermediate items Touch an item to select it.

ANALOG CST-STS JAM ERR

F-17-6

17-3

Chapter 17

17.1.7 Sub-item screen

0011-5851

Number of pages

Display
Selected intermediate item

I/O

Adjust Function Option

Test

Counter

<VERSION> DC-CON IP PANEL ANAPRO POWER

Sub-items

< 1/3 >

< READY > Copier status display

Ready to receive service/copy operation. Paper jam Executing service mode. Performing warmup or similar operation. Cover open DOOR: COPYING: Copying Error ERROR: NO-TONER: No toner WTNR-FUL: Waste toner full NO-PAPER: No paper ALERM: Alarm READY: JAM: SERVICE: WAITING:

PREV

NEXT

+/-

OK

Returns to previous page. Advances to next page.

F-17-7

Display

I/O

Adjust Function Option

Test

Counter

<ADJ-XY> ADJ-X
xxxxx

< 1/3 >

< READY >

(yyyyy) {aaaaa to bbbbb}

Pressing an item displays it in reverse. ADJ-X

Value before change Entered value

Range of values that can be entered

PREV

NEXT

+/-

OK
Sets entered value.

Toggles values sign (). Stop Clear Start key: Stops running operations. key: Clears value. key: Starts copying without exiting service mode.
F-17-8

17-4

Chapter 17

17.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode)

17.2.1 COPIER 17.2.1.1 COPIER Items
<VERSION>
T-17-1 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION ***: up graded version Sub item Description Level Use it to indicate the ROM version of a specific PCB (host machine, accessory). - EX: <R-CON XX.YY>XX, where XX indicates a version number while YY indicates an R&D control No. - In the absence of a PCB, the indication will be <-,->. DC-CON R-CON PANEL FEEDER SORTER NIB MN-CONT RIP1 DIAG-DVC RUI PUNCH LANG-EN LANG-FR LANG-DE LANG-IT LANG-JP TRIM-VER MEAP OCR-CN OCR-JP OCR-KR OCR-TW BOOTROM TTS-JA TTS-EN WEB-BRWS FN-INS STK-IF STACK BND-IF BND-MSTR BND-SLAV BND-TRIM BND-INS HELP *** WEBDAV *** TIMESTMP *** LANG-CS LANG-DA LANG-EL LANG-ES LANG-ET LANG-FI LANG-HU LANG-KO LANG-NL LANG-NO LANG-PL LANG-PT LANG-RU LANG-SL LANG-SV indicates the ROM version of the DC controller PCB indicates the ROM version of the reader controller PCB indicates the ROM version of the control panel CPU PCB indicates the ROM version of the ADF controller PCB indicates the ROM version of the finisher controller PCB (master CPU) indicates the version of the network software indicates the ROM version of the main controller PCB not used indicates the ROM version of the self-diagnostic device indicates the version of the remote user interface indicates the version of the punch unit (inside the finisher) indicates the version of the English language file indicates the version of the French language file indicates the version of the German language file indicates the version of the Italian language file indicates the version of the Japanese language file indicates the version of the trimmer indicates the version of the MEAP content indicates the OCR version of the Chinese language (simplified) indicates the OCR version of the Japanese language indicates the OCR version of the Korean language file indicates the OCR version of the Chinese language (classical) indicates the version of the boot ROM format: xx.yy_z, where z indicates the type of boot ROM indicates the version of the audio dictionary of the Japanese language indicates the version of the audio dictionary of the English language indicates the version of the Web browser indicates the ROM version of the cover inserter for the finisher indicates the version of the ROM of the relay PCB for the stacker indicates the version of the ROM for the stacker Version of relay PCB ROM for perfect binder Version of master ROM for perfect binder Version of slave ROM for perfect binder Version of trimmer ROM for perfect binder Version of inserter ROM for perfect binder Easy NAVI version WebDAV version Time stamp version indicates the version of the Zech language file indicates the version of the Danish language file indicates the version of the Greek language file indicates the version of the Spanish language file indicates the version of the Estonian language file indicates the version of the Finnish language file indicates the version of the Hungarian language file indicates the version of the Korean language file indicates the version of the Dutch language file indicates the version of the Norwegian language file indicates the version of the Polish language file indicates the version of the Portuguese language file indicates the version of the Russian language file indicates the version of the Slovenian language file indicates the version of the Swedish language file 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
0011-5821

17-5

Chapter 17
COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION ***: up graded version Sub item Description Level Use it to indicate the ROM version of a specific PCB (host machine, accessory). - EX: <R-CON XX.YY>XX, where XX indicates a version number while YY indicates an R&D control No. - In the absence of a PCB, the indication will be <-,->. LANG-TW LANG-ZH LANG-BU LANG-CR LANG-RM LANG-SK LANG-TK LANG-CA *** MEDIA-JA *** MEDIA-EN *** MEDIA-DE *** MEDIA-IT *** MEDIA-FR *** MEDIA-ZH *** MEDIA-SK *** MEDIA-TK *** MEDIA-CS *** MEDIA-EL *** MEDIA-ES *** MEDIA-ET *** MEDIA-FI *** MEDIA-HU *** MEDIA-KO *** MEDIA-NL *** MEDIA-NO *** MEDIA-PL *** MEDIA-PT *** MEDIA-RU *** MEDIA-SL *** MEDIA-SV *** MEDIA-TW *** MEDIA-BU *** MEDIA-CR *** MEDIA-RM *** MEDIA-CA *** indicates the version of the Chinese language file (simplified) indicates the version of the Chinese language file (classical) indicates the version of the Bulgarian language file indicates the version of the Croatian language file indicates the version of the Romanian language file indicates the version of the Slovakian language file indicates the version of the Turkish language file Catalan language file version Display of paper brand information version in Japanese Display of paper brand information version in English Display of paper brand information version in German Display of paper brand information version in Italian Display of paper brand information version in French Display of paper brand information version in Chinese (simplified) Display of paper brand information version in Slovak Display of paper brand information version in Turkish Display of paper brand information version in Czech Display of paper brand information version in Greek Display of paper brand information version in Spanish Display of paper brand information version in Estonian Display of paper brand information version in Finnish Display of paper brand information version in Hungarian Display of paper brand information version in Korean Display of paper brand information version in Dutch Display of paper brand information version in Norwegian Display of paper brand information version in Polish Display of paper brand information version in Portuguese Display of paper brand information version in Russian Display of paper brand information version in Slovenian Display of paper brand information version in Swedish Display of paper brand information version in Chinese (traditional) Display of paper brand information version in Bulgarian Display of paper brand information version in Croatian Display of paper brand information version in Romanian Display of paper brand information version in Catalan 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

<ACC-STS>
T-17-2 COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS Sub item FEEDER SORTER Use it to indicate the connection of the ADF. 0: not connected; 1: connected Use it to indicate the connection of a finisher and the puncher. <sorter type> 0: none 1: finisher 2: saddle finisher 3: saddle finisher + inserter 4: saddle finisher + paper folding unit 5: saddle finisher + inserter + paper folding unit 6: stacker <punch type> 0: none; 1: 2-hole; 2: 2-hole/3-hole; 3: 4-hole (FRN); 4: 4-hole (SWE) DECK CARD Use it to indicate the connection of a paper deck. 0: not connected; 1: connected (small); 2: connected (large) Use it indicates the connection of a card reader. 0: card reader connected, but card not inserted 1: card reader not connected, or card reader connected and card inserted ('1' if ready for copying; '0' if not ready for copying) Use it to indicate the connection of a copy data controller. 0: not connected; 1: connected Use it to indicate the capacity of the memory mounted on the main controller PCB. 1024 MB 1 Description Level 1

DATA-CON RAM

1 1

17-6

Chapter 17
COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS Sub item COINROBO NIB Use it to indicate the connection of a coin vendor. 0: not connected; 1: connected Use it to indicate the connection of a network board. 0: no board connected 1: Ethernet board connected 2: TokenRing board connected 3: Ethernet board and TokenRing board connected not used not used Use it to indicate installation of NetWare. 0: not installed; 1: installed Use it to indicate addition of the SEND function. 0: SEND function not added; 1: SEND function added Use it to indicate the connection of a trimmer. 0: not connected; 1: connected PDL-FNC1/2 Use it to indicate the state (enabled/disabled) of the PDL function: 0000 0000 0000 0000 - 1111 1111 1111 1111 (0: OFF, 1: ON) for PDL-FNC1, b31 thorough b16 for PDL-FNC2, b15 thorough b0 b31: BDL, b30: PS, b29: PCL, b28: PDF, b27: LIPS, b26: N201, b25: I5577, b24: ESC/P, b23: HPGL, b22: HPGL2, b21: IMAGING, b20: KS, b19 through b0: for future use Use it to indicate the model name of the HDD. Use it to indicate the connection of a double-feeding detection unit. 0: not connected; 1: connected Use it to indicate the board name of PC1/2/3. if not connected: - (hyphen) if connected: board name <board name> Voice Board: voice guidance board 3DES Board: security expansion board Use it to indicate the connection of the USB device. Description Level 1

PS/PCL RIP1 NETWARE SEND TRIM-CN

1 1 1 1 1

HDD OVLP-UNT PCI1/2/3

1 1

USBH-SPD

<ANALOG>
T-17-3 COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG Sub item TEMP HUM ABS-HUM FIX-C FIX-E Description machine inside temperature (environment sensor); unit: deg C machine inside humidity (environment sensor); unit: %RH water content (environment sensor); unit: g fixing roller surface temperature (main thermistor): unit: deg C fixing roller edge surface temperature (sub thermistor); unit: deg C Level 1 1 1 1 1

<CST-STS>
T-17-4 COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS Sub item WIDTH-C3 WIDTH-C4 WIDTH-MF Description indicates the paper width of cassette3 in terms of paper size; unit: mm indicates the paper width of cassette 4 in terms of paper size; unit: mm indicates the paper width size of the manual feeder tray; unit: mm Level 2 2 2

17-7

Chapter 17

<JAM>

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]
F-17-9

A touch on any Jam Indication screen will bring up the Detail screen of the jam in question. [1] to previous page [2] to next page [3] number indicating order of jam occurrence [4] type of jam [5] sensor in question [6] to previous jam screen [7] to next jam screen No.: number indicating the order of jam occurrence; 1 through 50 (the higher the number, the older the jam) DATE: date of jam occurrence TIEM1: time of jam occurrence TIEM1: time of jam recovery L: location of jam
Code 00 01 02 51 61 Location host machine feeder finisher / paper folding unit / insertion unit / panch unit / trimmer stacker for future use

CODE: jam code P: source of paper

Code 01 02 03 04 07 right deck left deck cassette 3 cassette 4 side paper deck Description

17-8

Chapter 17
Code 08 09 0A 0B 60 61 Description manual feeder tray duplexing assembly inserter for finisher (upper) inserter for finisher (lower) for future use for future use

CNTR: reading of soft counter for source of paper SIZE: paper size

The jam detail screen can only display jam codes that occur in the units shown below. - Main unit - ADF - Paper deck - Finisher When a jam occurs in other units, the jam detail screen is not displayed, but you can specify a jam occurrence location (unit) using the jam-processing screen (in animation) displayed in the user screen. Measures for a jam (when both of a finisher and stacker are installed) A finisher and stacker share some jam codes. For such jam codes, the jam detail screen always displays finisher information (illustrations, sensor numbers), but the jam might be actually occurring in the stacker. Be sure to check the display of "location, category" ( "L" ) in the jam history screen to specify the unit where the jam occurs.

<ERR>

F-17-10

No.: number indicating order of error occurrence (the higher the number, the older the error) DATE: date of error occurrence TIME1: time of error occurrence TIME2: time of error recovery CODE: error code DTL: detail code (if none, '0000') L: location grouping
Code 00 01 02 04 05 06 51 61 main controller DADF finisher / paper folding unit / insertion unit / panch unit / trimmer reader unit Printer unit PDL board stacker for future use Location grouping

P: not used

17-9

Chapter 17 <HV-STS> Displaying Voltage/Current Settings after Photosensitive Drum Surface Potential Control
T-17-5 COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS Sub item PRIMARY PRI-GRID PRE-TR TR SP BIAS Current setting of the primary charging (uA) Grid voltage setting of the primary charging (V) Current setting of the pre-transfer charging (uA) Current setting of the transfer charging (uA) Current setting of the separation charging (uA) Developing DC bias setting (V) Description Level 1 1 1 1 1 1

<CCD>
T-17-6 COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). Sub item TARGET-G GAIN GAIN-OG GAIN-OR * GAIN-EG GAIN-ER * shading target value of green for the CCD gain level adjustment value for the CCD gain level adjustment value for green of the odd-number bits of the CCD gain level adjustment value for red of the odd-number bits of the CCD gain level adjustment value for green of the even-number bits of the CCD gain level adjustment value for red of the even-number bits of the CCD Description Level 2 2 2 2 2 2

<DPOT> Displaying Photosensitive Drum Surface Potential Control Data

T-17-7 COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT MEMO: For items other than DPOT-K, displaying value at the time of the latest potential control. Sub item DPOT-K VL1T VL1M VDT VDM VG-K VL1M-P VL1T-P BIAS-P BIAS-C LPOWER-P LPOWER-C VDM-P VDT-P VDT-S VDM-S VLT-S VLM-S Description photopositive drum surface potential (real-time indication) rage: 0 to 600 light area potential target value (for copier) range: 0 to 600 light area potential measurement value (for copier) range: 0 to 600; approx. optimum: VL1T +/-6 V dark area potential target value (for copier) range: 0 to 600 dark area potential measurement value (for copier) range: 0 to 600; approx. optimum: VDT +/-6 V primary charging grid voltage (for copier) range: 0 to 900 light area potential measurement level (for printer) range: 0 to 600; approx. optimum: VL1T-P +/-6 V light area potential target value (for printer) range: 0 to 600 developing bias voltage (for printer) range: 0 to 600 developing bias voltage (for copier) range: 0 to 600 laser power value (for printer) range: 0 to 255 laser power value (for copier) range: 0 to 255 dark area potential measurement (for printer) range: 0 to 600; approx. optimum: VDT-P +/-6 V dark area potential target value (for printer) range: 0 to 600 dark area potential target value (OHT, heavy paper, tracing paper) range: 0 to 600 dark area potential measurement value (OHT, heavy paper, tracing paper) range: 0 to 600; approx. optimum: VDT-S +/-6 V light area potential target value (OHT, heavy paper, tracing paper) range: 0 to 600 light are potential measurement value (OHT, heavy paper, tracing paper) approx. optimum: VLT-S +/-6 V Level 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

17-10

Chapter 17
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT MEMO: For items other than DPOT-K, displaying value at the time of the latest potential control. Sub item VG-K-P VG-K-S LPOWER-S BIAS-S primary charging grid voltage (for printer) range: 0 to 900 primary charging grid voltage (OHT, heavy paper, tracing paper) range: 0 to 900 laser power level (OHT, heavy paper, tracing paper) range: 0 to 255 developing bias voltage (OHT, heavy paper, tracing paper) range: 0 to 600 Description Level 2 2 2 2

<SENSOR>
T-17-8 COPIER > DISPLAY > SENSOR Sub item DOC-SZ Description indicates the size of the original detected by the original size sensor Level 2

<ALARM-2>

No.: number indicating order of alarm occurrence (the higher the number, the older the alarm) DATE: date of alarm occurrence TIME1: time of alarm occurrence TIME2: time of alarm recovery CODE: code of alarm location DTL: detail code of alarm CNTR: total counter reading at time of alarm occurrence <ENVRNT> Indicates the history of changes with reference to the monitor output of the environment sensor and the fixing thermistor (main); machine inside temperature (deg C), humidity (%), fixing roller surface (middle portion) temperature (deg C). The intervals at which data is collected may be changed in service mode: COPIER > OPTION > BODY > ENVP-INT.

F-17-11 Item No. DATE TIME D+deg C E+% F+deg C Description number indicating data collection (the higher the number, the older the data) date of data collection time of data collection machine inside temperature machine inside humidity fixing roller surface (middle portion) temperature

17-11

Chapter 17

17.2.2 FEEDER 17.2.2.1 FEEDER Items

0011-6093

T-17-9 FEEDER > DISPLAY *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). Sub item FEEDSIZE TRY-WIDE ** SPSN-LMN ** Description indicates the size of the original detected by the ADF indicates the distance moved by the original width detecting slider (for detection of the width of paper; 0.1 mm) post-separation sensor light intensity indicates the manual adjustment value (light voltage) of the post-separation sensor Appropriate target value Around 113 Level 1 1

SPSN-RCV ** post-separation sensor light reception amount indicates the light reception voltage of the post-separation sensor after manual adjustment optimum range paper present: 123 or less paper absent: 179 or more RDSN-LMN ** read sensor light emission amount indicates the manual adjustment value (light emission voltage) of the reader sensor Appropriate target value Around 113 read sensor light reception amount indicates the light reception voltage of the read sensor after manual adjustment optimum range paper present: 123 or less paper absent: 179 or more delivery reversal sensor light intensity indicates the manual adjustment value (light emission voltage) of the delivery reversal sensor Appropriate target value Around 570 delivery reversal sensor light reception amount indicates the light reception voltage of the delivery reversal sensor after manual adjustment optimum range paper present: 123 or less paper absent: 179 or more

RDSN-RCV **

DRSN-LMN **

DRSN-RCV **

17-12

Chapter 17

17.3 I/O (I/O Display Mode)

17.3.1 Overview
The following screen appears in response to: COPIER>I/O DISPLAY.
0011-6141

DC-CON R-CON

FEEDER SORTER

MN-CON

F-17-12

<Guide to Screen>
P001 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

F-17-13

17.3.2 <DC-CON>
0011-6142

T-17-10 Address P001 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P002 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Description laser scanner motor cooling fan stop detection signal fixing heat discharge fan stop detection signal laser scanner fan stop detection signal not used curl-removing fan stop detection signal bottle motor error detection signal drum suction fan stop detection signal pre-transfer charging assembly fan stop signal power supply cooling fan 1 stop detection signal power supply cooling fan 2 stop detection signal separation fan stop detection signal laser scanner motor lock detection signal delivery anti-adhesion fan stop detection signal developing fan stop detection signal reader heat discharge fan 1 stop detection signal reader heat discharge fan 2 stop detection signal manual feed curl-removal sensor duplexing reversal sensor duplexing outlet sensor pre-confluence sensor post-confluence sensor image write start sensor fixing inlet HP sensor fixing inlet sensor vertical path 1 paper sensor vertical path 2 paper sensor manual feeder transport sensor registration roller sensor inside delivery sensor outside delivery sensor fixing transport outlet sensor claw jam sensor Notation FM1 FM2 FM3 FM6 M23 FM8 FM10 FM11 FM12 FM13 M4 FM17 FM15 FM21 FM18 PS68 PS12 PS61 PS14 PS15 PS60 PS66 PS63 PS47 PS49 PS35 PS5 PS9 PS10 PS11 PS6 1: off 1: error 1: off 1: off 1: off 1: off 1: off 0: constant speed 1: off 1: off 1: off 1: off 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: HP 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: off 1: off Remarks

17-13

Chapter 17
Address P003 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P004 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P005 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P006 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 buffer inside toner sensor buffer inside toner lower limit sensor developing assembly inside toner sensor fixing web length sensor fixing web length warning sensor toner bottle sensor waste toner feedscrew lock detecting switch waste toner full sensor right deck pickup sensor left deck pickup sensor cassette 3 pickup sensor cassette 4 pickup sensor vertical path 3 paper sensor vertical path 4 paper sensor right deck pull-off sensor left deck pull-off sensor right deck lifter sensor left deck lifter sensor cassette 3 lifter sensor cassette 4 lifter sensor right deck paper level middle sensor right deck paper level upper sensor left deck paper level middle sensor left deck paper level upper sensor right deck paper sensor left deck paper sensor cassette 3 paper sensor cassette 4 paper sensor manual feeder tray paper sensor fixing inlet sensor lift motor driver PCB connection detection right deck limit sensor left deck limit sensor cassette 3 paper length sensor cassette 3 paper length sensor cassette 4 paper length sensor cassette 4 paper length sensor right deck open/closed sensor left deck open/closed sensor cassette 3 open/closed sensor cassette 4 open/closed sensor upper right cover open/closed sensor lower right cover open/closed sensor manual feeder tray cover open/closed sensor front cover open/closed detection bottle cover open/closed sensor through path tray detection fixing transport unit release lever sensor not used drum motor lock detection laser scanner motor lock detection fixing motor lock detection primary charging error detection transfer charging error detection transfer charging error detection buffer motor error detection bottle motor error detection sub hopper motor error detection separation heat discharge fan stop detection right door fan stop detection duplexing transport fan stop detection sub hopper inside toner sensor AC relay shut-off open circuit detection overcurrent notification (24 V) overcurrent notification (38 V) PCB14 PCB14 M0 M4 M3 PCB11 PCB11 PCB11 M18 M23 M22 FM20 FM23 FM19 TS4 PS28 Description Notation TS1 TS2 TS3 PS7 PS8 PS67 MSW2 PS19 PS20 PS25 PS37 PS42 PS41 PS46 PS27 PS26 PS21 PS31 PS38 PS43 PS51 PS52 PS54 PS55 PS22 PS32 PS39 PS44 PS17 PCB34 PS24 PS34 SV1 SV1 SV2 SV2 PS23 PS33 PS40 PS45 PS58 PS48 PS56 MSW7 PS59 1: closed 1: closed 1: closed 1: closed 1: closed 1: closed 1: closed 1: closed 1: closed 0: present 1: released 1: error 0: constant speed 0: constant speed 0: constant speed 1: error 1: error 1: error 1: error 1: error 1: error 1: off 1: off 1: off 0: toner absent 1: normal 1: overcurrent 1: overcurrent Remarks 0: toner absent 0: toner absent 0: toner absent 1: no web 1: no web alert 1: present 0: waste toner clog 1: waste toner case full 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: connected 1: limit 1: limit

17-14

Chapter 17
Address P007 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P008 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P009 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P010 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P011 0 1 2-5 6 7 Description primary charging wire cleanser drive primary charging wire cleaner drive pre-transfer charging wire cleaner drive pre-transfer charging wire cleaner drive transfer/separation charging wire cleaner drive transfer/separation charging wire cleaner drive fixing motor brake signal sub hopper motor drive drum motor drive main motor drive pickup motor drive fixing motor drive laser scanner motor drive bottle motor drive buffer motor drive laser scanner motor speed switchover fixing main heater drive fixing sub heater drive cassette heater drive drum heater drive drum heater half-wave/full-wave separation heat discharge fan full speed bottle motor drive separation heat discharge fan half speed laser scanner motor cooling fan full speed laser scanner motor cooling fan half speed laser scanner cooling fan full speed laser scanner cooling fan half speed pre-transfer charging assembly fan full speed pre-transfer charging assembly fan half speed not used duplexing transport fan full speed vibration motor 1 vibration motor 2 separation fan full speed not used curl-removing fan full speed developing fan full speed developing fan half speed not used fixing heat discharge fan full speed fixing heat discharge fan half speed not used delivery anti-adhesion fan full speed drum suction fan full speed drum suction fan half speed power supply cooling fan 1/2 full speed power supply cooling fan 1/2 half speed left deck transport clutch lower transport right clutch lower transport middle clutch developing cylinder clutch developing cylinder deceleration clutch left deck pickup solenoid cassette 3 pickup solenoid cassette 4 pickup solenoid delivery flapper solenoid reversal flapper solenoid not used for R&D for R&D FM17 FM8 FM8 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON FM2 FM2 1: ON 1: ON FM6 FM15 FM15 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON FM19 M10 M20 FM13 0: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON Notation M8 M8 M7 M7 M9 M9 M3 M22 M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 M23 M18 M4 H1 H2 H4 H3 H3 FM20 M23 FM20 FM1 FM1 FM3 FM3 FM10 FM10 1: to rear 1: to front 1: to front 1: to rear 1: to rear 1: to front 1: brake 1: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 1: ON 1: ON 0: high-speed 1: ON 1: ON 0: ON 1: ON 0: half-wave 0: ON 0: ON 0: off 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON Remarks

FM11/12 1: ON FM11/12 1: ON CL19 CL17 CL16 CL4 CL20 SL8 SL9 SL10 SL3 SL11 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON

17-15

Chapter 17
Address P012 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P013 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P014 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P015 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P016 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P017 0-5 6 7 P018 0-2 3 4 5 6 7 P019 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P020 0 1 2-7 P021 0 1 2 3 4-7 not used right deck pickup clutch left deck pickup clutch cassette 3 pickup clutch cassette 4 pickup clutch vertical path 1 clutch vertical path 2 clutch vertical path 3 clutch vertical path 4 clutch manual feeder tray pickup clutch manual feeder tray transport clutch pre-registration clutch speed switchover delivery clutch multifeeder transport clutch DDI command DDI command buffer inside magnet roller drive clutch sub hopper inside toner feed clutch right deck pickup solenoid manual feed pickup latch solenoid (return) manual feed latch solenoid (pull) double-feeding detection PCB (reception) power supply reader heat discharge fan 1 full speed reader heat discharge fan 1 half speed video PCB manual reset reader heat discharge fan 2 full speed reader heat discharge fan 2 half speed fixing web solenoid fixing transport unit lock solenoid (return) fixing transport unit lock solenoid (pull) pre-exposure lamp for factory check potential sensor high-voltage DC output developing AC output pre-transfer charging AC bias/separation AC bias paper transport guide bias paper transport guide bias switchover waste toner case full reset main power shut-off DDI command double-feeding detection PCB (reception) connection detection bottle motor connection detection DDI command not used right deck lifter motor drive left deck lifter motor drive cassette 3 lifter motor drive cassette 4 lifter motor drive DDI command DDI command not used not used relay ON not used not used PTOP output LED2 LED1 not used for check download control (reserved) horizontal registration sensor clock signal not used M13 M14 M16 M17 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON PCB33 PCB23 1: connected 0: connected PCB19 HVT HVT HVT PCB11 PCB11 MSW2 SW1 1: ON 0: high-voltage output on 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: 200V 1: 600V 0: reset 1: shut-off CL1 CL23 SL7 SL6 SL6 PCB33 FM21 FM21 PCB3 FM18 FM18 SL2 SL4 SL4 LED1 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 0: power supplied 1: ON 1: ON 0: reset 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 0: ON 1: ON 1: ON CL10 CL11 CL12 CL14 CL8 CL9 CL13 CL15 CL7 CL18 CL5 CL21 CL22 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: reversal; 0: straight 1: ON Description Notation Remarks

17-16

Chapter 17
Address P022 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P023 P024 0-7 0-5 6 7 P025 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P026 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P027 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P028-P029 model switchover 1 model switchover 0 registration clutch brake registration roller clutch model switchover 2 relay SNS not used not used factory mode factory mode not used not used optical sensor off 7 optical sensor off 6 optical sensor off 5 optical sensor off 4 optical sensor off 3 optical sensor off 2 optical sensor off 1 optical sensor off 0 side paper deck LED side paper deck pickup roller release solenoid side paper deck pull-off clutch side paper deck pickup clutch side paper deck pickup motor side paper deck lifter motor side paper deck lifter up/down side paper deck open solenoid side paper deck chip select side paper deck latch IC control side paper deck sensor switchover side paper deck sensor LED side paper deck speed switchover 1 side paper deck speed switchover 2 not used not used side paper deck open switch side paper deck paper present side paper deck pickup position sensor side paper deck pickup sensor on side paper deck pull-off sensor on side paper deck pickup solenoid side paper deck motor clock detection side paper deck paper supply position sensor side paper deck paper level detection side paper deck lifter lower limit detection side paper deck installation detection side paper deck state detection side paper deck lifter motor overcurrent detection not used side paper deck connection detection side paper deck connection detection not used H: detected L: detected L: OPEN H: prevented H: ON H: ON H: ON H: ON H: detected H: ON H: detected H: detected H: installed H: closed H: detected (H: CL, etc.; L: SNR) (on only at power-on) (L: pickup; H: pull-out) (H: force off; L: on) Description Notation Remarks

17-17

Chapter 17
Address P030 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 sub SSR error main SSR error fixing thermistor 2 error detection fixing thermistor 1 error detection fixing thermistor 2 open circuit detection fixing thermistor 1 open circuit detection fixing motor zero-cross error not used released by sub SSR released by main SSR released by error in fixing thermistor 2 released by error in fixing thermistor 1 released by open circuit fixing thermistor 2 released by open circuit in fixing thermistor 1 not used not used H: released H: released H: released H: released H: released H: released E001 E004 Description Notation H: shorted H: shorted H: error H: error H: released H: released H: error Remarks

17.3.3 <R-CON>
0011-6143

T-17-11

shading RAM chip select

Address P001 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P002 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P003 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P004 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P005 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 reader heat discharge fan 1 reader heat discharge fan 2 stop detection reader heat discharge fan 2 not used DDI-S command signal DDI-S command signal DDI-S command signal xenon lamp control signal power supply monitor (24V system) power supply monitor (13V system) not used scanner motor control signal sub scanning detection signal sub scanning detection signal main scanning detection signal DDI-S command signal ADF serial communication (TxD) DDI-S command signal ADF serial communication (RxD) start-up check LED DDI-S command signal not used not used DDI-S command signal DDI-S command signal reader start-up signal CPU operation mode setup not used not used scanner motor reference voltage not used PC I/F PC I/F DDI-S command signal DDI-S command signal not used not used not used not used 1: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 1: 24V 1: 13V Description reader heat discharge fan 1 stop detection 1: off 1: ON 1: off 1: ON Remarks

17-18

Chapter 17
Address P006 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P007 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P008 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P009 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 not used for factory mode original size detection control signal main scanning detection signal image lead edge signal scanner home position signal not used copyboard closed detection signal address bus address bus address bus not used download start ADF reset signal ADF mode setup DDI-S command signal not used CCD on/off control signal wait signal write signal (Low) write signal (High) read signal not used CPU clock not used shading RAM chip select work RAM chip select ASIC RAM chip select Flash ROM chip select not used not used not used 1: ON 0: closed 1: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: HPdetected Description Remarks

17.3.4 <FEEDER>
0011-6144

T-17-12 Address P001 bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P002 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P003 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 image lead edge signal pre-registration sensor OSC not used not used delivery motor clock delivery motor PWM signal not used belt motor phase A belt motor phase B belt motor phase A* belt motor phase B* separation motor PWM signal reversal motor phase A separation motor reference Ref reversal motor phase B TxD0 not used RxD0 not used SCK0 EEPROM chip select not used not used 1: EEPROM selected during output, alternately between '0' and '1' M4 during output, alternately between '0' and '1' during output, alternately between '0' and '1' during output, alternately between '0' and '1' during output, alternately between '0' and '1' 0: output present during output, alternately between '0' and '1' PI11 M5 during output, alternately between '0' and '1' 0: output present S2 Description Notation 1: image lead edge 1: original present Remarks

17-19

Chapter 17
Address P004 bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P005 0-2 3 4-7 P006 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P007 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P008 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P009 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P010 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P011 0 1 2 3 4-7 P012 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 not used not used original sensor original trail edge sensor 24VP down detection 24VL down detection 13V down detection manual feeder registration roller sensor not used A/D conversion trigger not used DA load signal PICK1 PICK0 PICKSTBY separation sensor sheet-to-sheet sensor belt motor clock post-registration roller sensor ADF open/closed detection pre-reversal sensor left cover rear sensor (rear) not used skew sensor separation clock reversal sensor reversal slave clock pickup roller HP sensor pickup roller height position sensor 1 pickup roller height position sensor 2 left cover front sensor (front side) not used not used delivery sensor manual feeder original sensor tray LED reversal flapper solenoid shutter solenoid shutter solenoid belt motor fan ON signal pre-reversal flapper solenoid separation clutch solenoid timer pickup motor phase A pickup motor phase B pickup motor phase A* pickup motor phase B* not used not used not used not used delivery flapper solenoid delivery flapper solenoid not used sensor power supply (+5R) ON/OFF not used 7-segment LED (D) 7-segment LED (E) 7-segment LED (C ) 7-segment LED (G) 7-segment LED (B) 7-segment LED (F) 7-segment LED (A) not used 1: 5V ON SL4 SL4 0: plunger pulled 0: plunger returned FM1 SL3 CL1 SL1 SL2 PI13 PI12 1: original present 1: original present 1: ON 1: ON 0: plunger pulled 0: plunger returned 0: ON 1: ON 1: ON 0: 100msec PI7 PI8 PI9 PI6 S1 S5 1: original present during output, alternately '0' and '1' 1: original present during output, alternately '0' and '1' 1: HP 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: closed S3 PI10 PI4 PI3 1: original present 1: closed 1: original present 1: closed S4 0: original present 1: transmit S9 S6 S7 0: original present 1: original present 1: 17 V or less 1: 17 V or less 1: 10 V or less 1: original present Description Notation Remarks

17-20

Chapter 17
Address P013 bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P014 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 P015 P016 P017 P018 P019 P020 P021 P022 P023 P024 P025 P026 P027 P028 P029 P030 Description original width detecting switch (SW1) original width detecting switch (SW2) original width detecting switch (SW3) original width detecting switch (SW4) original width detecting switch (SW5) push switch (SW2) push switch (SW3) push switch (SW4) DIP switch (DIPSW1) DIP switch (DIPSW2) DIP switch (DIPSW3) DIP switch (DIPSW4) DIP switch (DIPSW5) DIP switch (DIPSW6) DIP switch (DIPSW7) DIP switch (DIPSW8) separation clock F/V delivery clock F/V original sensor AD original sensor AD reversal motor current adjustment belt motor power supply adjustment original sensor adjustment original trail edge sensor adjustment separation sensor adjustment skew senor adjustment pre-registration roller sensor adjustment post-registration roller sensor adjustment reversal sensor adjustment manual feeder registration roller sensor adjustment sensor Ref voltage adjustment separation motor current limit adjustment 0: pressed 0: pressed 0: pressed 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON hereafter, analog port Notation Remarks

17.3.5 <SORTER> (P001-P067)

0011-6145

T-17-13 Address P001 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 stack delivery clock pre-buffer transport motor FG not used folding motor FG saddle press motor encoder clock saddle feed motor FG saddle butting motor encoder clock saddle folding encoder clock shift transport motor FG buffer motor FG punch motor FG inlet motor FG punch RX interrupt punch TX interrupt trimmer RX interrupt trimmer TX interrupt Description Remarks

17-21

Chapter 17
Address P002 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P003 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12-15 P004 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-11 12 13 14 15 P005 0-10 11 12 13 14 15 P006 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 buffer No. 2 sensor buffer sensor dust sensor not used lower path sensor sample tray ISA/paper surface stack tray ISA/paper surface inserter output download output inserter input download input inserter reset inserter mode not used not used ASIC0 chip select ASIC1 chip select ASIC reset output SST download mode ASIC0 interrupt 1 ASIC1 interrupt sample tray idle movement detection ASIC0 interrupt 2 paper folding unit output paper folding unit input not used power supply remote output not used download hard latch command download hard latch input download latch release light signal (lower order) light signal (upper order) read signal not used clock output address bus not used delivery motor FG ARCNET-INT stack tray idle movement detection not used check LED SRAM chip select not used ROM chip select ARCNET chip select upper guide motor phase A upper guide motor phase B upper guide motor current switchover not used assist motor clock assist motor CW assist motor current switchover 1 assist motor current switchover 2 swing motor speed setting (High) swing motor speed setting (Middle) swing motor speed setting (Low) swing motor on* knurled belt shift motor phase A knurled belt shift motor phase B knurled belt shift motor current switchover not used 0: ON 1: CCW 0: selected 0: selected 1: on 0: selected 1: ON 0: Reset Description horizontal registration sensor Remarks

17-22

Chapter 17
Address P007 Bit 0-8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P008 P009 0-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7-15 P010 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P011 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P012 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 not used stack delivery motor clock stack delivery motor CW stack delivery motor current switchover 1 stack delivery motor current switchover 2 conveyer motor phase A conveyer motor phase B conveyor motor current switchover not used upper guide HP sensor knurled belt shift HP sensor stack delivery motor 8FG assist motor 8FG saddle sub tray sensor conveyer paper sensor 2 conveyer paper sensor 1 not used saddle alignment motor phase A saddle alignment motor phase B saddle alignment motor current saddle press motor PWM saddle alignment motor phase A* saddle alignment motor phase B* not used not used LED4 (for indication of presence of paper) not used saddle butting motor CCW saddle butting motor CW saddle butting transport motor PWM saddle folding transport motor PWM saddle folding transport motor CCW saddle folding transport motor CW not used not used not used not used not used LED1 not used not used saddle press motor CCW saddle press motor CW not used not used saddle stapler motor CCW saddle stapler motor CW not used not used not used not used not used not used saddle press motor clock sensor saddle transport motor FG SDL butting motor lock sensor saddle folding motor clock sensor not used 1: CCW 1: CW 1: CW 1: CCW 1: ON 1: CW 1: CCW 0: ON 0: ON 1: CW 1: CCW 1: ON 1: retained 0: ON 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: HP 1: HP 1: CCW Description Remarks

17-23

Chapter 17
Address P013 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 P014 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P015 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P016 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 P017 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Description saddle press HP sensor saddle press intermediate sensor saddle lead edge stopper HP sensor saddle alignment HP sensor saddle lead edge path sensor saddle staple detection 2 saddle staple detection 2 saddle stapler HP sensor not used front bin shift motor phase A front bin shift motor phase B front bin shift motor current switchover not used trail edge motor phase A trail edge motor phase B trail edge motor alignment switchover handling tray solenoid rear alignment motor clock rear alignment motor CW rear alignment motor current switchover not used front alignment motor clock front alignment motor CW front alignment motor current switchover IH not used paddle rotation motor clock paddle rotation motor CW paddle rotation motor current switchover not used tray motor A tray motor B tray motor ON check LED paddle lift motor phase A paddle lift motor phase B paddle lift motor current switchover power-down (host standby mode) not used not used not used not used check SW8 check SW7 check SW6 check SW5 check SW4 check SW3 check SW2 check SW1 not used paddle rotation HP sensor swing motor clock sensor rear alignment motor HP sensor bin $ sensor 2 handling tray paper sensor assist HP sensor bin sensor 1 front alignment HP sensor not used not used not used paddle lift HP sensor shutter HP sensor swing guide closed detection swing guide open detention tray HP sensor 1: HP 0: HP 0: Close 1: HP 1: HP 0: paper present 1: HP 0: HP (bin HP) 1: HP 1: HP 1: HP 1: on 1: HP 1: HP 1: paper present 1: staple present 1: staple present 1: HP 1: HP Remarks

17-24

Chapter 17
Address P018 Bit 0 1 2-7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P019 0 1 2 3 4 5-7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P020 P021 0-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8-15 P022 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Description saddle flapper solenoid 1 saddle flapper solenoid 2 not used not used not used not used not used saddle lead edge stopper motor phase A saddle lead edge stopper motor phase B saddle lead edge stopper current not used saddle transport motor clock saddle transport motor CW saddle transport motor current saddle transport motor current motor off signal not used saddle pull-in roller shift motor phase A saddle pull-in roller shift motor phase B saddle pull-in roller shift motor current switchover not used saddle roller guide motor phase A saddle roller guide motor phase B saddle roller guide motor current switchover not used not used saddle butting HP sensor saddle vertical path sensor saddle pull-in roller HP sensor saddle roller guide HP sensor saddle stack delivery sensor saddle small sensor saddle inlet sensor saddle roller guide HP sensor passage detection not used pre-buffer transport motor clock pre-buffer transport motor CW pre-buffer transport motor current switchover 1 pre-buffer transport motor current switchover 2 inserter detachment paper folding unit detachment saddle detachment not used buffer motor clock buffer motor CW buffer motor current switchover 1 buffer motor current switchover 2 trimmer remote signal trimmer output spare Z-fold roller drive motor clock Z-fold drive motor ON 1: ON 0: ON 1: CCW 0: detached 0: detached 1: detached 1: CCW 1: HP 1: paper present 1: HP 1: HP 0: paper present 0: paper present 1: paper present 1: HP passed 1: retained 1: retained 1: ON 1: retained 1: ON 1: ON Remarks

17-25

Chapter 17
Address P023 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P024 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P025 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P026 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Description Z-fold inlet flapper solenoid Z-fold B4 No. 1 solenoid A-fold B4 No. 2 solenoid motor standby inlet transport motor clock inlet transport motor CW inlet transport motor ON signal inlet transport motor current switchover shift transport motor clock shift transport motor CW shift transport motor current switchover 1 shift transport motor current switchover 2 not used fan on signal Z-fold release solenoid Z-fold lock solenoid Z-fold path residual paper sensor 1 Z-fold path residual paper sensor 2 Z-fold path residual paper sensor 3 Z-fold transport path paper sensor 1 Z-fold transport path paper sensor 2 Z-fold transport path paper sensor 3 Z-fold transport path paper sensor 4 horizontal registration HP sensor lower delivery sensor buffer No. 2 sensor horizontal registration sensor buffer path sensor shift unit trail edge sensor inlet sensor upper delivery sensor lower path sensor professional puncher PAERCOMACK signal professional puncher PAPEREXIT signal professional puncher door open professional puncher connection detection professional puncher connection detection trimmer connection detection not used not used stapler HP sensor punch motor HP detection punch front detection shift roller unit HP sensor transport roller HP sensor trail edge HP professional puncher standby professional puncher PUNCHENABLE signal upper tray motor clock (sample tray) upper tray motor CW (sample tray) upper tray motor current switchover 1 upper tray motor current switchover 2 sub tray lifter solenoid not used stapler motor ON stapler motor direction switchover paper surface sensor A/D input selector 1 paper surface sensor A/D input selector 2 paper surface sensor A/D input selector 3 not used lower tray motor clock lower tray motor CW lower tray motor current switchover 1 lower tray motor current switchover 2 1: CW 0: ON 1: CW 0: HP 1: HP 1: rear; 0: front 1: HP 1: HP 1: HP 0: connected 0: connected 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: HP 1: paper present 0: paper present 0: paper present 0: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: paper present 0: paper present 1: CCW 1: CCW 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: operating Remarks

17-26

Chapter 17
Address P027 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P028 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P029 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P030 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 7-segment DOT 7-segment G 7-segment F 7-segment e 7-segment d 7-segment c 7-segment b 7-segment a stapler shift motor clock stapler shift motor CW stapler shift motor current switchover stapler shift motor current switchover lower tray detachment not used inserter CONFIGSET inserter FEEDREQ lower tray sensor lower tray paper surface sensor lower tray ISA sensor upper tray sensor upper tray paper surface sensor upper tray ISA sensor rib guide safety detection tray approach switch upper tray area sensor 1 upper tray area sensor 2 upper tray area sensor 3 upper tray area sensor 4 lower tray position sensor 1 lower tray position sensor 2 lower tray position sensor 3 lower tray position sensor 4 stapler slide HP stapler 24V down detection READY detection staple absent detection inserter SENSON inserter serial error inserter connector detection not used upper tray paper sensor lower tray paper sensor waste staple case full detection 1 puncher unit detection stapling position 1 stapling position 2 stapling position 3 stapling position 4 horizontal registration shift motor clock (1-2 phase) horizontal registration motor CW/CCW horizontal registration shift motor current switchover 1 horizontal registration shift motor current switchover 2 transport roller shift motor phase A transport roller shift motor phase B transport roller shift motor current switchover 1 transport roller shift motor current switchover 2 assist roller shift solenoid 1 upper path switchover solenoid punch PWM saddle path switching solenoid delivery motor clock delivery motor CW/CCW delivery motor current switchover 1 delivery motor current switchover 2 1: CCW 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: CCW 1: paper present 1: paper present 1: not set/full 0: present 1: OK 1: OK 1: OK 1: OK 1: connected 1: 24V OFF 1: Ready 0: staple absent 0: paper present 0: paper present 0: paper present 0: paper present 0: paper present 0: paper present 1: detected 0: detected 1: light blocked 1: light blocked 1: light blocked 1: light blocked 1: light blocked 1: light blocked 1: light blocked 1: light blocked 0: detached 1: CW Description 1: on 1: on 1: on 1: on 1: on 1: on 1: on 1: on Remarks

17-27

Chapter 17
Address P031 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P032 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P033 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Description punch motor on signal punch motor direction switchover 5V power-down not used professional puncher MACHINEON professional puncher PAPERLATCH professional puncher PAPERENTRY professional puncher PAPEREXITACK horizontal registration detection motor phase A horizontal registration detection motor phase B horizontal registration detection motor current switchover 1 horizontal registration detection motor current switchover 2 horizontal registration detection motor phase A* horizontal registration detection motor phase B* buffer path switchover solenoid not used puncher check 2 puncher check 1 puncher check 0 for adjustment 0 for adjustment 1 for adjustment 2 for adjustment 3 for adjustment 4 check SW8 check SW7 check SW6 check SW5 check SW4 check SW3 check SW2 check SW1 front door open detection punch fan error upper cover open detection power supply fan error Z-fold path set detection Z-fold unit upper cover open detection folding unit connection detection saddle unit connection detection push switch (for ENTER) push switch (for +) push switch (for -) fold transport motor FG pre-buffer transport FG door 24V power-down detection punch 2-hole/3-hole detection punch waste case set detection 1: power-down 1: 3-hole; 0: 2-hole 1: set 0: open 1: error 0: open 1: error 1: present 0: open 0: connected 0: connected not used 0: pushed 0: pushed 1: ON Remarks PCH-M-CW PCH-M-CCW 0: power-down

17-28

Chapter 17
Address P045 P046 P047 P048 P049 P050 P051 P052 P053 P054 P055 P056 P057 P058 P059 P060 P061P063 P064 P065P067 Bit buffer No. 2 sensor buffer sensor waste sensor not used lower path sensor sample tray ISA/paper surface stack tray ISA/paper surface not used punch waste case full sensor adjustment sample tray ISA sensor adjustment buffer path 2 adjustment horizontal registration sensor adjustment buffer path sensor adjustment swing guide adjustment lower path sensor adjustment not used stack tray ISA sensor adjustment not used Description horizontal registration sensor Remarks analog output

17.3.6 <SORTER> (P068-P100)

0014-8408

T-17-14 Address P068 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P069 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Stacking roller motor phase-A Stacking roller motor phase-B Stacking roller motor *phase-A Stacking roller motor *phase-B Inlet, signature motor clock ON/OFF switch of signature motor Cover sheet L, R motor clock PM driver standby Delivery motor phase-A Delivery motor phase-B Delivery motor *phase-A Delivery motor *phase-B Trail edge retaining lever motor clock Stacking tray up/down motor clock Alignment F-R motor/stacking tray shift-stacking weight shift motor switch Cover sheet registration sensor AD Timing sensor AD Analog multiplexer AD Download select Slave CPU control signal line input 1 Slave CPU control signal line input 2 Replenish unit sensor DA Inserter communication TxD Inserter communication RxD Inlet sensor Slave communication TxD Slave communication RxD Timing sensor 1: Presence of paper 0: Presence of paper 0: Select 0: Alignment, 1: Stacking 0: STANDBY, 1: Active 1: Enable Description Remarks

17-29

Chapter 17
Address P070 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P071 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P072 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P073 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 IPC CS GA CS EERPM DO EEPROM CLK EEPROM CS Simulator communication (RDP) RxD Simulator communication (RDP) TxD Flash (SST) data write TxD Flash (SST) data write RxD Master download enable Alignment FHP sensor Alignment RHP sensor Alignment F large HP sensor Alignment R large HP sensor Cover paper path 1 sensor Cover paper path 2 sensor Signature paper path 1 sensor Signature paper path 2 sensor LED on PCB DAC_DI DAC_CLK DAC_LD Slave CPU control signal line output EEPROM DI Switch back roller up/down motor A Switch back roller up/down motor B Switch back roller up/down motor *phase-A Switch back roller up/down motor *phase-B Switch back flapper motor EA Switch back flapper motor EB Switch back flapper motor PA Switch back flapper motor PB Alignment F motor EA/stacking tray shift motor EA Alignment F motor EB/stacking tray shift motor EB Alignment F motor PA/stacking tray shift motor PA Alignment F motor PB/stacking tray shift motor PB Inserter communication control-serial communication fault Inserter communication control-stacker pre-merge sensor Inserter communication control-setting on device configuration Inserter communication control-delivery start request Unused Switch back flapper HP sensor Switch back roller up/down HP sensor Cover sheet registration sensor Prevention of flash (SST) miswriting Alignment R motor EA/stacking weight shift motor EA Alignment R motor EB/stacking weight shift motor EB Alignment R motor PA/stacking weight shift motor PA Alignment R motor PB/stacking weight shift motor PA Cover sheet L, R motor excitation switch Cover sheet L motor rotating direction Cover sheet R motor rotating direction Cover sheet L, R motor enable 0: 1-2 phase, 1: W1-2 phase 0: Feeding direction 0: Feeding direction 1: Enable Fix to "1" 1: Upper position 1: Upper position 1: Presence of paper 0: Communication error 0: Presence of paper 1: Home position 1: Home position 1: Home position 1: Home position 1: Presence of paper 1: Presence of paper 1: Presence of paper 1: Presence of paper 0: Write permitted 1: Select Description 0: Select 0: Select Remarks

17-30

Chapter 17
Address P074 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P075 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P076 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P077 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Description Disengage R middle (registration) position sensor Disengage L middle (registration) position sensor Paper surface F sensor Paper surface R sensor Disengage RHP sensor Disengage LHP sensor Disengage R open sensor Disengage L open sensor Through delivery sensor Trail edge retaining lever HP sensor Overstacking sensor Tray lower limit sensor Analog multiplexer C Analog multiplexer B Analog multiplexer A Front cover lock OFF signal Front cover lock ON signal Disengage L motor 1 Disengage L motor 2 Disengage R motor 1 Disengage R motor 2 Unused Stacking weight shift HP sensor Stacking tray shift HP sensor Analog multiplexer DATA input Front cover SW Upper cover sensor Upper cover SW Replenish cover open sensor Stacking tray up/down motor clock Stacking tray up/down motor phase-A Stacking tray up/down motor *phase-A Stacking tray up/down motor phase-B Stacking tray up/down motor *phase-B Inlet, Signature motor clock Inlet, signature motor phase-A Inlet, signature motor *phase-A Inlet, signature motor phase-B Inlet, signature motor *phase-B Trail edge retaining lever motor clock Trail edge retaining lever motor phase-A Trail edge retaining lever motor *phase-A Trail edge retaining lever motor phase-B Trail edge retaining lever motor *phase-B 1: Open 0: Open 1: Open 0: Open 1: Home position 1: Home position 1: Power distribution 1: Power distribution 1: Rotation, 0: Blake 0: Close direction 1: Rotation, 0: Blake 0: Close direction Remarks 1: Middle position 1: Middle position 0: Paper surface detection 0: Paper surface detection 1: Home position 1: Home position 1: Open position 1: Open position 0: Presence of paper 0: Nip 1: Stackable position 1: Lower limit position

17-31

Chapter 17
Address P078 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P079 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P080 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P081 P082 P083 0-15 0-15 0-15 Service PCB dip switch 1 Service PCB dip switch 2 Service PCB dip switch 3 Service PCB dip switch 4 Service PCB dip switch 5 Service PCB dip switch 6 Service PCB dip switch 7 Service PCB dip switch 8 Power supply cooling fan STANDBY THROUGH Power supply 2 Remote +5V 1 control +24V 1 control +24V 2 control Service PCB push switch 1 Service PCB push switch 2 Service PCB push switch 3 Energy savor key Service PCB dip switch upper 1 Service PCB dip switch upper 2 Service PCB dip switch upper 3 Service PCB dip switch upper 4 Front cover lock LED Energy savor LED Service PCB LED1 Service PCB LED2 Service PCB LED3 Stacking tray empty sensor Front cover lock sensor Power supply cooling fan L lock detection Power supply cooling fan lock detection 2 Power supply cooling fan lock detection 1 Inserter connection signal Replenish glue empty sensor AD Replenish assembly pullout sensor AD Replenish assembly full level sensor AD 24V 1 monitoring 24V 2 monitoring 5V 1 monitoring 0: Normal (when +24V 1 control is "0") 0: Normal (when +24V 2 control is "0") 1: Normal 0: Connection 0: At lock state 1: Locked 1: Locked 1: Locked 0: Activate 0: Activate 0: Activate 1: Presence of paper 1: Activate 1: Activate 0: Cut of almost all power distributions 0: Cut of power distribution other than through path area 1: Power supply ON 0: Sensor power supply ON 0: At operation JOB 0: At stacking operation JOB 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON Description 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 1: Power distribution Remarks

17-32

Chapter 17
Address P084 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P085 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P086 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P087 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 MG up/down motor clock SG upper HP sensor Unused Stack delivery sensor Glue vat shift motor clock Size shift HP sensor Glue vat motor clock Registration unit HP sensor Stack delivery roller motor phase-A Stack delivery roller motor phase-B Stack delivery roller motor *phase-A Stack delivery roller motor *phase-B SG up/down motor phase-A SG up/down motor phase-B SG up/down motor *phase-A SG up/down motor *phase-B Cover sheet side registration S sensor AD Cover sheet side registration L sensor AD Lead edge sensor AD Stack delivery sensor AD Stack thickness detection VRAD Temperature sensor AD Abnormal temperature sensor AD Inside temperature sensor AD Cutter communication TxD Cutter communication RxD G/A interruption MGR encoder sensor Simulator communication (RDP) RxD Simulator communication (RDP) TxD Flash (SST) download select G/A chip select PIO chip select Replenish motor phase-EA Replenish motor phase-EB Replenish motor phase-PA Replenish motor phase-PB Flash (SST)-master communication TxD Flash (SST)-master communication RxD Slave download enable Level 2 sensor AD Level 1 sensor AD 24V 2 check signal DAC_DI DAC_CLK DAC_LD 0: Normal (backup port, currently unused) 0: Write permitted 0: Select 0: Flag ON 1: Home position 1: Home position 1: Presence of paper (paper exists due to no light emission at standby) 1: Home position Description Remarks

17-33

Chapter 17
Address P088 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P089 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P090 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P091 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Spine folding R pressure sensor Cutter communication control output 1 Cutter communication control output 2 Master CPU communication control input 1 Master CPU communication control input 2 Master CPU communication control output 1 Master CPU communication control output 2 Cover sheet side registration motor phase-A/spine plate shift motor phase-EA Cover sheet side registration motor phase-B/spine plate shift motor phase-EB Cover sheet side registration motor *phase-A/spine plate shift motor phase-PA Cover sheet side registration motor *phase-B/spine plate shift motor phase-PB Size shift motor *phase-B Size shift motor *phase-A Size shift motor phase-B Size shift motor phase-A MGHHP sensor Cover sheet side registration S sensor Cover sheet side registration L sensor Glue vat shift HP sensor Prevention of FLASH miswriting Spine folding L motor phase-A Spine folding L motor phase-B Spine folding L motor *phase-A Spine folding L motor *phase-B Spine folding R motor phase-A Spine folding R motor phase-B Spine folding R motor *phase-A Spine folding R motor *phase-B SG paper sensor SG open sensor SG close sensor Spine folding L close sensor Spine plate open sensor Spine plate close sensor Spine folding LHP sensor Spine folding RHP sensor MGHP sensor MGF encoder sensor 24V 3 check signal MG pressure L sensor MG pressure S sensor SG motor REV SG motor ENB SG motor FWD Replenish motor driver standby signal Cover sheet side registration/spine plate shift motor switch Spine plate shift motor driver standby signal G/A interruption Lead edge sensor (cutter side) 1: Presence of paper (paper exists due to no light-emission at standby) 0: STANDBY, 1: Active 0: Cover sheet side registration motor 0: STANDBY, 1: Active 0: Presence of paper 1: Open 1: Close 1: Close 0: Open 1: Close 1: Home position 1: Home position 0: Home position 0:Flag ON 0: Normal 1: Pressure detection 0: Pressure detection Fixed to "0" 0: Home position 1: Presence of paper (paper exists due to no light emission at standby) 1: Presence of paper (paper exists due to no light emission at standby) 0: Home position Description 1: Close Remarks

17-34

Chapter 17
Address P092 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P093 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P094 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P095 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Glue vat roller motor clock Glue vat roller motor phase-A Glue vat roller motor *phase-A Glue vat roller motor phase-B Glue vat roller motor *phase-B MG rotation motor FWD MG rotation motor ENB MG rotation motor REV MGR motor FWD MGR motor ENB MGR motor REV MG up/down motor clock MG up/down motor phase-A MG up/down motor *phase-A MG up/down motor phase-B MG up/down motor *phase-B Glue vat shift motor clock Glue vat shift motor phase-A Glue vat shift motor *phase-A Glue vat shift motor phase-B Glue vat shift motor *phase-B MGF motor REV MGF motor ENB MGF motor FWD LED on PCB LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 MG rotation enable sensor MG rotation booklet position sensor MG rotation HP sensor MGR open sensor MGR close sensor MGF open sensor MGF close sensor MG paper sensor Dip switch 1 Dip switch 2 Dip switch 3 Dip switch 4 Dip switch 5 Dip switch 6 Dip switch 7 Dip switch 8 Push switch 1 Push switch 2 Push switch 3 0: Activate 0: Activate 0: Activate 0: Activate 1: Enable 1: Booklet position 1: Home position 1: Open 1: Close 1: Open 1: Close 1: Presence of paper 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON Description Remarks

17-35

Chapter 17
Address P096 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P097 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P098 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P099 P100 0-15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Faulty thermostat Faulty temperature sensor Replenish HP sensor Stack delivery path HP sensor Stack delivery path sensor Stack shift HP sensor Stack shift MG position sensor Power supply cooling fan Replenish cooling fan Signature cooling fan Spine plate cooling fan Spine plate upper cooling fan F lock detection Spine plate lower cooling fan R lock detection Spine plate lower cooling fan F lock detection Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Signature cooling 2 fan R lock detection Signature cooling 2 fan F lock detection Signature cooling 1 fan R lock detection Signature cooling 1 fan F lock detection Power supply cooling fan C lock detection Power supply cooling fan R lock detection Spine plate upper cooling fan R lock detection Stack shift motor REV Stack shift motor ENB Stack shift motor FWD Stack delivery path shift motor REV Stack delivery path shift motor ENB Stack delivery path shift motor FWD Glue vat roller rotation sensor Glue vat shift FHP sensor Replenish cooling fan H lock detection 1 Replenish cooling fan L lock detection 2 Slide motor phase-A Slide motor *phase-A Slide motor phase-B Slide motor *phase-B Grip motor phase-A Grip motor *phase-A Grip motor phase-B Grip motor *phase-B Press motor phase-A Press motor *phase-A Press motor phase-B Press motor *phase-B Cutter motor phase-A Cutter motor *phase-A Cutter motor phase-B Cutter motor *phase-B 1: Flag ON 1: Home position 1: When locked 1: When locked 1: When locked 1: When locked 1: When locked 1: When locked 1: When locked 1: When locked 1: When locked 1: When locked 1: When locked 1: When locked 1: Power distribution 1: Home position 1: Pressure is applied 1: Home position 1: MG position 1: Power distribution 1: Power distribution 1: Power distribution Description 1: Normal 0: Normal 0: Home position Remarks

17-36

Chapter 17

17.3.7 <SORTER> (P101-P171)

0014-8426

T-17-15 Address P101 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P102 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P103 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Inlet path sensor AD Stack registration correction sensor AD Dust buffer full sensor Flash (SST), slave communication TxD Flash (SST), slave communication RxD Trimmer download enable Booklet lifter tray HP sensor Stacking door open sensor Stacking door open LED Stacking door open SW Stacking buffer tray HP sensor Dust buffer right HP sensor Dust buffer clock sensor Lifter tray clock sensor Simulator TxD Simulator RxD Slide motor interruption Grip finish sensor Stack rotation HP sensor 1 (R) Press finish sensor Slide HP sensor Grip HP sensor Stack rotation HP sensor 2 (L) Press limit sensor Press HP sensor Blade holder HP sensor Cutter limit sensor Cutter area sensor 1 Inlet path sensor stack registration correction sensor Cutter area sensor 2 Leading edge sensor 1: Home position 1: Home position 0: Reach limit 0: Cutter released position 1: Blade holder side 1: Paper present 2: Paper present 0: Front side 1: Back side 2: Paper present 0: Finish 1: Home position 0: Finish 1: Home position 1: Home position 1: Home position 0: Reach limit 0: Home position 0: Open 1: Light 1: ON 1: Home position 1: Home position 0: Enable writing Description Remarks

17-37

Chapter 17
Address P104 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P105 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P106 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P107 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Data bus 0 Data bus 1 Data bus 2 Data bus 3 Data bus 4 Data bus 5 Data bus 6 Data bus 7 Address path 0 Address path 1 Address path 2 Address path 3 Download select Slave communication reception port Slave communication reception port Bulk rotation motor 2 (L), bulk rotation motor 1 (R) REF Writing enable Read Dust box sensor Paper stack reach sensor Stacking tray paper sensor Stacking tray HP sensor Dust buffer left HP sensor Dust box full sensor Dip switch 1 Dip switch 2 Dip switch 3 Dip switch 4 Dip switch 5 Dip switch 6 Dip switch 7 Dip switch 8 EEPROM_CS EEPROM_SK EEPROM_DO EEPROM_DI Chip select LED1 LED2 LED3 Stacking tray full LED Push switch 1 Push switch 2 Front cover SW C Front cover SW 36V Push plate sensor 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 1: ON 0: Light 0: Light 0: Light 1: Light 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: Paper present 0: Paper present 0: Home position 1: Home position 0: Full detection Stable as "1" Stable as "1" 0: Dust box present 0: Trimmer select Description Remarks

17-38

Chapter 17
Address P108 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P109 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P110 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P111 P112 P113 P114 P115 0-15 0-15 0-15 0-15 0-15 Stacking buffer tray motor A phase Stacking buffer tray motor *A phase Stacking buffer tray motor B phase Stacking buffer tray motor *B phase Dust buffer shift motor CW Dust buffer shift motor CCW Dust buffer shift motor enable Booklet lifter tray motor CW Booklet lifter tray motor CCW Booklet lifter tray motor enable Dust push solenoid Stacking door lock solenoid Blade holder motor A phase Blade holder motor *A phase Blade holder motor B phase Blade holder motor *B phase Stacking belt motor A phase Stacking belt motor *A phase Stacking belt motor B phase Stacking belt motor *B phase D/A resister writing D/A clock D/A data output Blade holder motor stand-by Stacking buffer tray motor stand-by Stacking belt motor stand-by Stack rotation motor 2 (L), stack rotation motor 1 (R) A facet Stack rotation motor 2 (L), stack rotation motor 1 (R) B facet 1: ON 1: ON 1: ON 1: Writing 0: Enable 1: ON 1: ON 0: Enable Description Remarks

17-39

Chapter 17
Address P116 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P117 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P118 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P119 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Drive shift motor phase output Drive shift motor phase output Drive shift motor phase output Drive shift motor phase output 1 BIN document empty sensor 2 BIN document empty sensor 1 BIN_PICK sensor 2 BIN_PICK sensor Pickup motor A phase output Pickup motor *A phase output Pickup motor B phase output Pickup motor *B phase output Feed motor A phase output Feed motor *A phase output Feed motor B phase output Feed motor *B phase output Dip switch 1 Dip switch 2 Dip switch 3 Dip switch 4 2 BIN tray width sensor 1 BIN tray width sensor Serial data transmission Serial data reception Pre-confluence sensor signal Serial communication abnormal signal 2 BIN lifter motor phase output 2 BIN lifter motor phase output 2 BIN lifter motor phase output 2 BIN lifter motor phase output Config request Feed start request Upper cover open sensor (DF cover switch) 1 BIN paper sensor 2 BIN lower limit sensor Intermediate feed sensor Unit open sensor (DF open sensor) LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 2 BIN registration sensor 1 BIN registration sensor 2 BIN paper sensor 2 2 BIN paper sensor 1 1: Paper present 1: Paper present 0: Paper present 0: Paper present 0: Lower limit 0: Paper present 1: Open 0: Light 0: Light 0: Light 0: ON 0: ON 1: Open 0: Paper present 0: Paper present 0: Error 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON 0: ON Analog input Analog input 0: Paper present 0: Paper present 1: ON 1: ON Description Remarks

17-40

Chapter 17
Address P120 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P121 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P122 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P123 P124 P125 P126 P127 P128 P129 P130 P131 P132 P133 P134 P135 P136 P137 P138 P139 P140 AD09 0-15 AD01 AD02 AD03 AD04 AD05 AD06 AD07 AD08 DA01 DA02 DA03 1 BIN lifter motor phase output 1 BIN lifter motor phase output 1 BIN lifter motor phase output 1 BIN lifter motor phase output Feed sensor 1 Feed sensor 2 Push switch Reset output (for download) Select inlet (for download) 1 BIN lower limit sensor Drive shift sensor DC+24V detection input DC+5V power save output Serial clock output E2P chip select output E2P_D/A serial input D/A load output EEPROM serial data output 1 BIN_paper set LED output 2 BIN_paper set LED output Motor stand-by output 1 BIN registration clutch 2 BIN registration clutch Inserter connection signal AD Replenishment glue empty sensor AD Replenishment aseembly full sensor AD 24V1 monitor AD 24V2 monitor AD 5V1 monitor AD Cover sheet registration sensor AD Timing sensor AD Replenishment glue empty/full sensor DA Cover sheet registration sensor DA Timing sensor DA Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Cover sheet side registration S sensor AD 0: Stand-by 1: ON 1: ON 0: Light 0: Light 0: ON 1: Output 0: Lower limit 1:2 bin 1: ON 0: Writing 0: Writing 0: Paper present 1: Paper present Description Remarks

17-41

Chapter 17
Address P141 P142 P143 P144 P145 P146 P147 P148 P149 P150 P151 P152 P153 P154 P155 P156 P157 P158 P159 P160 P161 P162 P163 P164 P165 P166 P167 P168 P169 P170 P171 AD22 AD23 DA11 DA12 DA13 DA14 DA15 AD19 AD20 AD21 DA08 DA09 DA10 Bit AD10 AD11 AD12 AD13 AD14 AD15 AD16 AD17 AD18 DA04 DA05 DA06 DA07 Leading edge sensor AD Stack delivery sensor AD Stack thickness detection VRAD Temperature detection sensor AD Abnormal temperature detection sensor AD Machine temperature sensor AD Level sensor (spare) AD Level sensor AD Cover sheet side registration S sensor DA Cover sheet side registration L sensor DA Stack delivery sensor DA Leading edge sensor DA Spare Spare Inlet path sensor AD Stack registration elimination sensor AD Dust buffer full sensor AD Inlet path sensor DA Stack registration elimination sensor DA Dust buffer full sensor DA Spare Spare Lower tray width sensor AD Upper tray width sensor AD Upper tray lifter motor DA Lower tray lifter motor DA Tray shift motor DA Feed motor DA Pickup motor DA Spare Description Cover sheet side registration L sensor AD Remarks

17.3.8 <MN-CONT>
0011-6149

Address P001 P002

Bit 0-15 0-3 3 4 5-7 8 9 10-15 for R&D

Description reader multi-purpose signal reader power signal printer start-up signal printer multi-purpose signal reader start-up signal printer power signal for R&D for R&D not used for R&D for R&D for R&D control panel connection (for MFP model) control panel connection (for printer model) for R&D not used

Remarks

P003

0-5 6 7-15

P004 P005

0-15 0-9 10 11 12-15

0: connected 0: connected

P006-P016

17-42

Chapter 17

17.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode)

17.4.1 COPIER 17.4.1.1 COPIER Items
<AE>
T-17-16 COPIER > ADJUST > AE Sub item AE-TBL range: 1 to 9 A higher setting will increase the density of characters. A lower setting will decrease the density of characters. Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the reader controller PCB. Description Use it to adjust the character density for image density adjustment. Level
0011-5822

<ADJ-XY> Image Reading Start Position Adjustment

T-17-17 COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). Sub item Use it to adjust the image read start position. Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have replaced the reader controller PCB or initialized the RAM. ADJ-X Use it to adjust the image read start position (image lead edge) in sub scanning direction. range: 1 to 423 * / 1 to 2970 ** An increase by '1' will shift the image read start position by 0.1 mm toward the trail edge. ADJ-Y range: 1 to 423 * / 0 to 1000 ** An increase by '1' will shift the image read start position by 0.1 mm toward the front. ADJ-S Use it to adjust the shading correction data measurement position. range: 20 to 500 * / 0 to 4 ** A change by '1' will increase the image read start position by 0.1 toward the front. ADJ-Y-DF main scanning position adjustment or ADF stream reading range: 1 to 423 * / 0 to 1000 ** A change by '1' will increase the image read start position by 0.1 toward the front. STRD-POS ** Use it to adjust the CCD read position for ADF stream reading mode. range: 1 to 200 The image reading position shifts to 1mm to the left with each 1 setting value larger. ADJ-Y-FX * Use it to adjust the main scanning position for ADF fixed reading mode. range: 1 to 423 A change by '1' will shift the image read start position by 0.1 mm toward the front. ADJ-X-MG Use it to fine-adjust the sub scanning magnification for copyboard mode. range: -50 to +50 (unit: 0.01%) 1 1 1 1 Use it to adjust the image read start position (horizontal registration) in main scanning direction. 1 1 Description Level

17-43

Chapter 17

<CCD>
T-17-18 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). Sub item CCD, shading-related adjustment SH-TRGT Use it to enter the white level target value for shading correction. Procedure Execute the following: COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > CCD-ADJ, LUT-ADJ (LUT-ADJ2). Thereafter, if an image fault occurs, enter the value indicated on the service label. range: 1 to 2043 DFTAR-G ** Use it to enter the shading target value for green for ADF mode. Procedure Execute the following: COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > DF-WLVL1/DF-WLVL2. Thereafter, if an image fault occurs, enter the value indicated on the service label. range: 0 to 2047 1 1 Description Level

<LASER> Laser Output Adjustment

T-17-19 COPIER > ADJUST > LASER Sub item Laser output adjustment PVE-OFST Use it to adjust the laser A/C emission position. range: -300 to 300 Usage: By setting the value larger, the exposure point shift toward the rear. On the other hand, it shifts toward the front by setting the value smaller. MEMO: - Do not use with the normal service. - The laser B emission position moves in keeping with laser A, while the laser D emission position moves in keeping with laser C. LA-PWR-A Use it to enter the laser A power adjustment value. range: 0 to 255 [Default: 128] MEMO: - Do not use with the normal service. - The item is enabled only when PO-CNT is '0' (COPIER > OPTION > BODY > PO-CNT). LA-PWR-B Use it to enter the laser B power adjustment value. range: 0 to 255 [Default: 128] MEMO: - Do not use with the normal service. - The item is enabled only when PO-CNT is '0' (COPIER > OPTION > BODY > PO-CNT). LA-PWR-C Use it to enter the laser C power adjustment value. range: 0 to 255 [Default: 128] MEMO: - Do not use with the normal service. - The item is enabled only when PO-CNT is '0' (COPIER > OPTION > BODY > PO-CNT). LA-PWR-D Use it to enter the laser D power adjustment value. range: 0 to 255 [Default: 128] MEMO: - Do not use with the normal service. - The item is enabled only when PO-CNT is '0' (COPIER > OPTION > BODY > PO-CNT). 1 1 1 1 Description Level

17-44

Chapter 17

<DEVELOP> Developing Bias Output Adjustment

T-17-20 COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP MEMO: At times, the value indicated for the following items may differ before and after input (maximum of +/-3). The fact has to do with how the indication values are computed, and will not affect the operation of the machine. Sub item DE-DC range: 0 to 600 (V) Do not use with the normal service. MEMO: The item is enabled only when PO-CNT is '0' (COPIER > OPTION > BODY > PO-CNT). DE-NO-DC Use it to enter the developing DC bias output value for when no image is being formed. range: 0 to 600 (V) Do not use with the normal service. MEMO: The item is enabled only when PO-CNT is '0' (COPIER > OPTION > BODY > PO-CNT). HVT-DE Use it to enter the offset value for the developing high-voltage output of the high-voltage unit. range: -50 to 50 - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new unit if you have replace the high-voltage unit. - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. Do not use with the normal service. D-HV-DE Use it to enter the offset value for the developing high-voltage of the DC controller PCB. range: -100 to 100 - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new PCB if you have replaced the DC controller PCB. - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. Do not use with the normal service. OFFSETDA Use it to enter the high-voltage D/A output offset value for the developing AC bias. range: -100 to 100 - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new PCB if you have replaced the DC controller PCB. - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. Do not use with the normal service. OFFSETAC Use it to adjust the offset value of the developing AC bias. range: -120 to 120 - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new unit if you have replace the high-voltage unit. - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. Do not use with the normal service. 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Use it to enter the developing DC bias output value for when an image is being formed. Level

<DENS> Minor Adjustment of Copy Density

T-17-21 COPIER > ADJUST > DENS Sub item DENS-ADJ Copy density correction Correct the F-value table if fogging occurs or a faint image occurs in a high-density area. A higher setting will reduce faint images. A lower setting will reduce fogging. range: 1 to 9 [Default: 5] Usage: By setting the value larger, the degree of distinct image decreases. By setting the value smaller, the degree of foggy decreases. Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM. MEMO: - Density of the printer output image cannot be corrected with this item. - Because of this item, the F-value table (the relationship between the document density and the image density) has been changed. Description Level

17-45

Chapter 17

<BLANK>
T-17-22 COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK Sub item Description Level

Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM. BLANK-T Use it to enter the image lead edge non-image width adjustment value. range: 0 to 2362 A higher setting will increase the non-image width. BLANK-B Use it to enter the image trail edge non-image width adjustment value. range: 0 to 2362 A higher setting will increase the non-image width. Notes: If you have changed BLANK-B and BLANK-TE, the higher setting will be given priority. BLANK-TE Use it to enter a value of the non-image width in image main scanning direction (left, right). range: 10 to 50 Notes: If you have changed BLANK-B and BLANK-TE, the higher setting will be given priority. 1 1 1

<V-CONT> Potential Control System Adjustment

T-17-23 COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT Sub item Description Level

- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB, initialized the RAM, or replaced the potential sensor (EPOTOFST only). - After changing the setting, opening/closing the front cover or turning the power OFF/ON in order to activate the potential control. EPOTOFST Use it to enter the offset value of the potential sensor. range: 0 to 30 - Input the value written in the service label when replacing the DC Controller PCB, clearing RAM, or replacing the potential sensor. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. Do not use with the normal service. VL-OFST Use it to enter the offset value of the potential control light area target potential. range: -50 to 50 (V) [Default: 0V] Usage: - By setting the value larger, the image density becomes light. By setting the value smaller, it becomes dark. - Input the value written in the service label when replacing the DC Controller PCB or clearing RAM. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. Do not use with the normal service. VD-OFST Use it to enter the offset value of the potential control dark area target potential. range: -50 to 50 (V) [Default: 0V] Usage: - By setting the value larger, the image density becomes dark. By setting the value smaller, it becomes light. - When toner smearing image occurs, set a smaller value. - Input the value written in the service label when replacing the DC Controller PCB or clearing RAM. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. DO not use with the normal service. DE-OFST Use it to enter the offset value for potential control VDC. range: -50 to 50 (V) [Default: 0V] Usage: - By setting the value larger, the degree of foggy increases. By setting the value smaller, the degree of foggy decreases. - Input the value written in the service label when replacing the DC Controller PCB or clearing RAM. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. Do not use with the normal service. - Select COPIER > OPTION > BODY > ACFRQNY/ACFRQ-R/ACFRQ-T to adjust the degree of foggy. Execution of adjustment with this item involves the change in density; thus, do not use this item. OHP-OFST Input Developing Bias Offset Value for OHP/Tracing Paper/Postcard range: -50 to 50 (V) [Default: 0V] Usage: By setting the value larger, the degree of foggy increases. By setting the value smaller, the degree of foggy decreases. -Input the value written in the service label when replacing the DC Controller PCB or clearing RAM. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. Do not use with the normal service. - Select COPIER > OPTION > BODY > ACFRQ-R/ACFRQ-T to adjust the degree of foggy. Execution of adjustment with this item involves the change in density; thus, do not use this item. 1 1 1

17-46

Chapter 17
COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT Sub item Description Level

- Enter the value indicated on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB, initialized the RAM, or replaced the potential sensor (EPOTOFST only). - After changing the setting, opening/closing the front cover or turning the power OFF/ON in order to activate the potential control. VD-OFS-O Input Potential Control Dark Target Potential Offset Value for OHP/Tracing Paper/Postcard range: -50 to 50 (V) [Default: 0V] Usage: - By setting the value larger, the image density becomes dark. By setting the value smaller, it becomes light. - When toner scattering image occurs, set a smaller value. - Input the value written in the service label when replacing the DC Controller PCB or clearing RAM. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. Do not use with the normal service.

<HV-PRI> Primary Charging Assembly Output Adjustment

T-17-24 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI Sub item GRID range: 400 to 900 (V) Do not use with the normal service. MEMO: The item is enabled only when PO-CNT is '0' (COPIER > OPTION > BODY > PO-CNT). 1 Description Use it to enter the adjustment value for the primary charging assembly grid voltage. Level

<HV-TR> Transfer Charging Assembly / Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly Output Adjustment

T-17-25 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR Sub item Description Level MEMO: At times, the indicated value for the fogging items may differ before and after input (maximum of +/-3). The fact has to do with the way indicated values are computed, and will not affect the operation of the machine. TR-N1 Use it to enter the output adjustment value of the transfer charging current. (simplex mode, plain paper; or 1st side of double-sided print) range: -650 to 0 (uA) [Default: -590 uA] - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. Do not use with the normal service. TR-N2 Use it to enter the output adjustment value of the transfer charging current. (plain paper, 2nd side of double-sided print) range: -650 to 0 (uA) [Default: -590 uA] - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. Do not use with the normal service. PRE-TR Use it to enter the output adjustment value of the pre-transfer charging current. range: 0 to 300 (uA) [Default: 165 uA] - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. Do not use with the normal service. When lowering the value for adjusting the degree of foggy, the degree of toner scattering image increases. Select COPIER > OPTION > BODY > ACFRQNY/ ACFRQ-R/ACFRQ-T to adjust the degree of foggy. HVT-TR Use it to enter the offset value of the transfer high-voltage output for the high-voltage unit. range: -100 to 100 - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new unit if you have replace the high-voltage unit. - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. Do not use with the normal service. H-PRE-TR Use it to enter the offset voltage of the pre-transfer output for the high-voltage unit. range: -100 to 100 - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new unit if you have replace the high-voltage unit. - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. Do not use with the normal service. 1 1 1 1 1

17-47

Chapter 17
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR Sub item Description Level MEMO: At times, the indicated value for the fogging items may differ before and after input (maximum of +/-3). The fact has to do with the way indicated values are computed, and will not affect the operation of the machine. D-PRE-TR Use it to enter the offset value of the pre-transfer high-voltage output or the DC controller PCB. range: -100 to 100 - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new PCB if you have replaced the DC controller PCB. - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. Do not use with the normal service. D-HV-TR Use it to enter the offset value of the transfer high-voltage output for the DC controller PCB. range: -100 to 100 - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new PCB if you have replaced the DC controller PCB. - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. Do not use with the normal service. 1 1

<HV-SP> Separation Charging Assembly Output Adjustment

T-17-26 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-SP Sub item Description Level MEMO: At times, the indicated value for the following items may differ before and after input (maximum of +/-3). The fact has to do with the way indicated values are computed, and will not affect the operation of the machine. SP-N1 Use it to enter the output adjustment value of the separation charging current. (plain paper, simplex mode; or, 1st side of doublesided print) range: 0 to 800 (uA) [Default: 520 uA] - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. Do not use with the normal service. MEMO: A remedy when re-transfer/white spot at the leading edge occurs due to the drum separation fault. - Select COPIER > OPTION > BODY > ACFRQNY/ACFRQ-R/ACFRQ-T, and increase the degree of foggy. SP-N2 Use it to enter the output adjustment value of the separation charging current. (plain paper, 2nd side of double-sided print) range: 0 to 800 (uA) [Default: 520 uA] - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. Do not use with the normal service. MEMO: A remedy when re-transfer/white spot at the leading edge occurs due to the drum separation fault. 1. Select COPIER > OPTION > BODY > ACFRQNY/ACFRQ-R/ACFRQ-T, and increase the degree of foggy. 2. When the drum separation fault (re-transfer) occurs only at the 2nd side, select COPIER > OPTION > BODY > TEMP-TBL, and decrease the temperature of the fixing temperature control. HVT-SP Use it to enter the offset value of the separation high-voltage output for the high-voltage unit. range: -100 to 100 - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new unit if you have replace the high-voltage unit. - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. Do not use with the normal service. 1 1

D-HV-SP

Use it to enter the offset value of the separation high-voltage output for the DC controller PCB. range: -100 to 100 - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new PCB if you have replaced the DC controller PCB. - Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB. - Use the item only when performing the foregoing operation. Do not use with the normal service. 1

17-48

Chapter 17

<FEED-ADJ>
T-17-27 COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ Sub item REGIST Description Use it to adjust the timing at which the registration roller clutch goes on. A higher setting will delay the timing at which the registration roller clutch goes on, thus decreasing the lead edge margin. range: -100 to 100 (unit: 0.1 mm) ADJ-REFE Use it to adjust the horizontal registration for re-pickup (2nd side of 2-sided print). Increase the value if the image is displaced to the front. range: -100 to 100 (unit: 01 mm) Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM. 1 1 Level

<CST-ADJ>
T-17-28 COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ Sub item Use it to make adjustments related to the cassette/manual feeder tray. Be sure to enter the value indicated on the service label if you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM. Be sure to execute FUNCTION>CST if you have replaced the paper width detecting VR. (C-3STMTR/A4R, C4-STMTR/A4R, MF-A4R/A6R/A4) C3-STMTR C3-A4R C4-STMTR C4-A4R MF-A4R MF-A6R MF-A4 C3-LVOL C3-HVOL C4-LVOL C4-HVOL Use it to enter the paper width basic value for cassette 3. (STMTR) range: 0 to 255 Use it to enter the paper width basic value for cassette 3. (A4R) range: 0 to 255 Use it to enter the paper width basic value for cassette 4. (STMTR). range: 0 to 255 Use it to enter the paper width basic value for cassette 4. (A4R) range: 0 to 255 Use it to enter the paper width basic value for the manual feeder tray. (A4R) range: 0 to 255 Use it to enter the paper width basic value for the manual feeder tray. (A6R) range: 0 to 255 Use it to enter the paper width bias value for the manual feeder tray. (A4) range: 0 to 255 Use it to enter the capacity of cassette 3. (50 sheets) range: 0 to 255 Use it to enter the capacity of cassette 3. (250 sheets) range: 0 to 255 Use it to enter the capacity of cassette 4. (50 sheets) range: 0 to 255 Use it to enter the capacity of cassette 4. (250 sheets) range: 0 to 255 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Level

<EXP-LED> Pre-Transfer Exposure LED Output Adjustment

T-17-29 COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED Sub item PRE-TR Description Use it to enter the output adjustment value of the pre-transfer exposure. range: 20 to 80 [Default: 50] This item is available only for Japanese models, not for models for outside Japan. (Because it is specified not to light the pre-transfer exposure for models for outside Japan. Thus, although the value is changed, the setting of the pre-transfer exposure LED output remains OFF.) - Do not use with the normal service. - By setting the value larger, the degree of drum separation fault decreases whereas the degree of toner scattering image increases. MEMO: In case re-transfer/white spot at the leading edge occurs due to the drum separation fault, select COPIER > OPTION > BODY > ACFRQNY/ACFRQ-R/ACFRQ-T, and increase the degree of foggy. 1 Level

17-49

Chapter 17

17.4.2 FEEDER 17.4.2.1 FEEDER Items

<ADJUST>
T-17-30 FEEDER > ADJUST *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). Sub item DOCST Description Use it to adjust the original stop position for ADF mode (pickup from the original tray). range: -7 to 7 (unit: 0.5 mm) A higher value decreases the lead edge margin. <Procedure> 1) Place the original in the original tray. 2) Select the item, and enter the appropriate value; then, press the OK key. 3) Press the OK key so that the original will be picked up. 4) Open the ADF, and check the original stop position. 5) Press the OK key so that the original is delivered. DOCST-M * Use it to adjust the original stop position for ADF mode (pickup from the manual feeder tray). range: -7 to 7 (unit: 0.5 mm) Use the same procedure used for FEEDER > ADJUST > DOCST. LA-SPEED Use it to adjust the original transport speed for ADF stream reading mode. A higher setting will increase the speed. range: -30 to 30 (unit: 0.1%) STRD-S * Use it to adjust the scanner stop position for stream reading mode (small-size). range: -7 to 7 (unit: 0.5 mm) bigger the value, bigger the lead edge while smaller the value, smaller the lead edge STRD-L * Use it to adjust the scanner stop position for stream reading mode (large-size). range: -7 to 7 (unit: 0.5 mm) bigger the value, bigger the lead edge while smaller the value, smaller the lead edge RVM-SPD * Use it to adjust the speed of the reversal motor. A higher setting will increase the speed. range: -30 to 30 (unit: 0.1%) 2 1 1 1 1 Level
0011-6094

17.4.3 SORTER 17.4.3.1 SORTER Items

0011-6104

T-17-31 SORTER > ADJUST ***: Applied to upgraded machine Sub item PNCH-HLE PNCH-Y Not used Use it to adjust the punch hole position (side registration direction). range: -5 to 5 (unit: 0.45 mm) By setting the value larger, the punch hole position shifts toward the rear. By setting the value smaller, it shifts toward the front. CV-REG-L Position adjustment for the cover sheet side registration (large-size) Adjustment range; -50 to 50 (In 0.1 mm unit) Adjust the position in the depth direction of the cover sheet of 298 mm or more in length of the depth direction. Increment: Move the cover sheet to the front side. Decrement: Move the cover sheet to the rear side. CV-REG-S Position adjustment for the cover sheet side registration (small-size) Adjustment range; -50 to 50 (In 0.1mm unit) Adjust the position in the depth direction of the cover sheet smaller than 298 mm in length of the depth direction. Increment: Move the cover sheet to the front side. Decrement: Move the cover sheet to the rear side. CV-CENT Position adjustment of the cover sheet center Adjustment range; -50 to 50 (In 0.1mm unit) Adjust the position of the cover sheet in the feeding direction. Increment: Move the cover sheet to the delivery side. Decrement: Move the cover sheet to the inlet side. CLCT-SB Adjustment of the movement in stacking switchback Adjustment range; -50 to 50 (In 0.1 mm unit) Adjust the level of pushing the inner sheets to the guide wall of the stacking assembly. (For the adjustment value 0, the target of pushon level is 10mm.) Increment: Increase the push-on level. Decrement: Decrease the push-on level. 1 1 1 1 1 Description Level 1

17-50

Chapter 17
SORTER > ADJUST ***: Applied to upgraded machine Sub item ALG-F-A4 Description Adjustment of the movement of the alignment F motor (A4 size) Adjustment range; -30 to 30 (In 0.1 mm unit) Adjust the movement of the front-side aligning plate in the case of aligning the inner sheets smaller than 298 mm in length of the depth direction. Increment: Increase the movement of the aligning plate. Decrement: Decrease the movement of the aligning plate. ALG-R-A4 Adjustment of the movement of the alignment R motor (A4 size) Adjustment range; -30 to 30 (In 0.1 mm unit) Adjust the movement of the rear-side aligning plate in the case of aligning the inner sheets smaller than 298 in length of the depth direction. Increment: Increase the movement of the aligning plate. Decrement: Decrease the movement of the aligning plate. ALG-F-L Adjustment of the movement of the alignment F motor (large-size) Adjustment range; -30 to 30 (In 0.1 mm unit) Adjust the movement of the front-side aligning plate in the case of aligning the inner sheets of 298 mm or more in length of the depth direction. Increment: Increase the movement of the aligning plate. Decrement: Decrease the movement of the aligning plate. ALG-R-L Adjustment of the movement of the alignment R motor (large-size) Adjustment range; -30 to 30 (In 0.1 mm unit) Adjust the movement of the rear-side aligning plate in the case of aligning the inner sheets of 298 mm or more in length of the depth direction. Increment: Increase the movement of the aligning plate. Decrement: Decrese the movement of the aligning plate. GLUING Adjustment of the pasting position Adjustment range; -60 to 60 (In 0.05 mm unit) Adjust the height of the main grip at the time of pasting the paper stack in order to adjust the gap between the paper stack and the scraping plate. Increment: Lower the position of the paper stack (narrow the gap) ->The amount of glue applied decreases. Decrement: Lift the position of the paper stack (widen the gap) ->The amount of glue applied increases. STK-VR0 0 mm adjustment value of the stack thickness volume Adjustment range; 0 to 1023 Stack thickness volume 0 mm adjustment attached to the main grip STK-VR25 25 mm adjustment value of the stack thickness volume Adjustment range; 0 to 1023 Stack thickness volume 25 mm adjustment attached to the main grip GLU-LOW Adjustment value of the liquid level 1 (lower limit) Adjustment range; 0 to 255 Adjustment value of the liquid level 1 (lower limit) of the glue level detection thermistor in the glue receptacle. GLU-UP Adjustment value of the liquid level 2 (upper limit) Adjustment range; 0 to 255 Adjustment value of the liquid level 2 (upper limit) of the glue level detection thermistor in the glue receptacle. GLU-EDG1 *** End face processing setting 1 (with trimming of the head and tail - rear side (head of sheet)) Set the level of processing the end face at the rear side (the head of sheet) with the trimming at the head and tail of sheet. Increment: Increase the portion of the end face to be processed. Decrement: Decrease the portion of the end face to be processed. Setting range; 0 to 5 (0 to 5mm, Value displayed 1 = 1mm) [Factory setting/default; 0] Use to eliminate the unglued end face (decrease the portion processed) or to prevent the glue running out (increase the portion processed). GLU-EDG2 *** End face processing setting 2 (with trimming of the head and tail - front side (tail of sheet)) Set the level of processing the end face at the front side (the tail of sheet) with the trimming at the head and tail of sheet. Increment: Increase the portion of the end face to be processed. Decrement: Decrease the portion of the end face to be processed. Setting range; 0 to 5 (0 to 5mm, Value displayed 1 = 1mm) [Factory setting/default; 2] Use to eliminate the unglued end face (decrease the portion processed) or to prevent the glue running out (increase the portion processed). GLU-EDG3 *** End face processing setting 3 (without trimming of the head and tail - rear side (head of sheet)) Set the level of processing the end face at the rear side (the head of sheet) without the trimming at the head and tail of sheet. Increment: Increase the portion of the end face to be processed. Decrement: Decrease the portion of the end face to be processed. Setting range; 0 to 5 (0 to 5mm, Value displayed 1 = 1mm) [Factory setting/default; 2] Use to eliminate the unglued end face (decrease the portion processed) or to prevent the glue running out (increase the portion processed). 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Level

17-51

Chapter 17
SORTER > ADJUST ***: Applied to upgraded machine Sub item GLU-EDG4 *** Description End face processing setting 4 (without trimming of the head and tail - front side (tail of sheet)) Set the level of processing the end face at the front side (the tail of sheet) without the trimming at the head and tail of sheet. Increment: Increase the portion of the end face to be processed. Decrement: Decrease the portion of the end face to be processed. Setting range; 0 to 5 (0 to 5mm, Value displayed 1 = 1mm) [Factory setting/default; 2] Use to eliminate the unglued end face (decrease the portion processed) or to prevent the glue running out (increase the portion processed). GLU-AMT1 *** Adjustment of the glue applied 1 (stack thickness; 0 to 1.4mm) Adjust the gap between the end face of the paper stack and the glue scraper on the way back of applying the glue (heavy glue) in order to change the amount of the glue applied. Setting range -20 to +20 (-1 to +1mm, Value displayed 1 = 0.05mm) [Factory setting/default; 0] Use when the amount of glue applied to the paper stack is small or large. GLU-AMT2 *** Adjustment of the glue applied 2 (stack thickness; 1.5 to 3.4mm) Adjust the gap between the end face of the paper stack and the glue scraper on the way back of applying the glue (heavy glue) in order to change the amount of the glue applied. Setting range -20 to +20 (-1 to +1mm, Value displayed 1 = 0.05mm) [Factory setting/default; 0] Use when the amount of glue applied to the paper stack is small or large. GLU-AMT3 *** Adjustment of the glue applied 3 (stack thickness; 3.5 to 6.4mm) Adjust the gap between the end face of the paper stack and the glue scraper on the way back of applying the glue (heavy glue) in order to change the amount of the glue applied. Setting range -20 to +20 (-1 to +1mm, Value displayed 1 = 0.05mm) [Factory setting/default; 0] Use when the amount of glue applied to the paper stack is small or large. GLU-AMT4 *** Adjustment of the glue applied 4 (stack thickness; 6.5 to 11.4mm) Adjust the gap between the end face of the paper stack and the glue scraper on the way back of applying the glue (heavy glue) in order to change the amount of the glue applied. Setting range -20 to +20 (-1 to +1mm, Value displayed 1 = 0.05mm) [Factory setting/default; 0] Use when the amount of glue applied to the paper stack is small or large. GLU-AMT5 *** Adjustment of the glue applied 5 (stack thickness; 11.5 to 22.4mm) Adjust the gap between the end face of the paper stack and the glue scraper on the way back of applying the glue (heavy glue) in order to change the amount of the glue applied. Setting range -20 to +20 (-1 to +1mm, Value displayed 1 = 0.05mm) [Factory setting/default; 0] Use when the amount of glue applied to the paper stack is small or large. GLU-AMT6 *** Adjustment of the glue applied 6 (stack thickness; 22.5 to 25mm) Adjust the gap between the end face of the paper stack and the glue scraper on the way back of applying the glue (heavy glue) in order to change the amount of the glue applied. Setting range -20 to +20 (-1 to +1mm, Value displayed 1 = 0.05mm) [Factory setting/default; 0] Use when the amount of glue applied to the paper stack is small or large. GLU-MOVE *** Adjustment of the position for starting pasting Adjust the position of starting pasting. Increment: Move the position of starting pasting to the front side. Decrement: Move the position of starting pasting to the rear side. Setting range; -80 to +80 (-8 to +8mm, Value displayed 1 = 0.1mm) [Factory setting/default; 0] Use when the glue receptacle does not fit the position of the end face of sheet at the time of pasting. GLU-TEMP *** Not in use. 1 Level

17-52

Chapter 17
SORTER > ADJUST ***: Applied to upgraded machine Sub item STK-DLV Adjustment of the movement of the stack delivery motor Adjustment range; -50 to 50 (In 0.1 mm unit) Adjust the amount of feeding the stack from the pasting assembly to the cutter. Increment: Increase the feeding amount. Decrement: Decrease the feeding amount. GRP-CHNG Adjustment of the position of shifting the main grip Adjustment range; -50 to 0 (In 0.1 mm unit) Adjust the position of the grip at the time of shifting the main grip in order to adjust the nip position of the stack with the stack delivery roller at the tme of delivering the stack from the main grip to the stack delivery roller. (When the adjustment value is 0, the stack nip position with the stack delivery roller is 10 mm from the end of the stack.) Decrement; Lower the position of the grip. * No adjustment for increment. SIZE-H Adjustment of the feeding direction for the finisnig size Adjustment range; -50 to +50 (In 0.1 mm unit) Adjust the length of the finishing size in the feeding direction. Increment: Increase the length of the finising size. Decrement: Decrease the length of the finishing size. SIZE-W Adjustment of the finishing size in the head-tail direction Adjustment range; -50 to +50 (In 0.1 mm increment) Adjust the finishing size in the head-tail direction. Increment: Increase the length of the finishing size. Decrement: Decrease the length of the finishing size. CV-LNG Adjustment of the position of trimming the head of sheet Adjustment range; -50 to +50 (In 0.1 mm unit) Adjust the trimming position for the finishing size. Increment: Increase the trimming level. Decrement: Decrease the trimming level. 10RGT-1 10-sheet stack right angle accuracy adjustment data 1 Adjustment range; -100 to +100 (In 0.1 mm unit) Adjust when the right angle accuracy is not achieved for the output of 10-sheet stack with its three sides being trimmed. Head of the sheet Increment: Increase the rotation and decrease the trimming angle. Decrement: Decrease the rotation and increase the trimming angle. 10RGT-2 10-sheet stack right angle accuracy adjustment data 2 Adjustment range; -100 to +100 (In 0.1 mm unit) Adjust when the right angle accuracy is not achieved for the output of 10-sheet stack with its three sides being trimmed. Tail of the sheet Increment: Increase the rotation and the trimming angle. Decrement: Decrease the rotation and the trimming angle. 10RGT-3 10-sheet stack right angle accuracy adjustment data 3 Adjustment range; -100 to +100 (In 0.1 mm unit) Adjust when the right angle accuracy is not achieved for the output of 10-sheet stack with its three sides being trimmed. Fore edge of the sheet Increment: Increase the rotation and decrease the trimming angle. Decrement: Decrease the rotation and increase the trimming angle. 200RGT-1 200-sheet stack right angle accuracy adjustment data 1 Adjustment range; -100 to +100 (In 0.1 mm unit) Adjust when the right angle accuracy is not achieved for the output of 200-sheet stack with its three sides being trimmed. Head of the sheet Increment: Increase the rotation and decrease the trimming angle. Decrement: Decrease the rotation and increase the trimming angle. 200RGT-2 200-sheet stack right angle accuracy adjustment data 2 Adjustment range; -100 to +100 (In 0.1 mm unit) Adjust when the right angle accuracy is not achieved for the output of 200-sheet stack with its three sides being trimmed. Tail of the sheet Increment: Increase the rotation and the trimming angle. Decrement: Decrease the rotation and the trimming angle. 200RGT-3 200-sheet stack right angle accuracy adjustment data 3 Adjustment range; -100 to +100 (In 0.1 mm unit) Adjust when the right angle accuracy is not achieved for the output of 200-sheet stack with its three sides being trimmed. Fore edge of the sheet Increment: Increase the rotation and decrease the trimming angle. Decrement: Decrease the rotation and increase the trimming angle. SLD-MTR Adjustment of the slide motor HP position Adjustment range; -20 to +20 (In 0.1 mm unit) Adjust when the blade and the slide motor home position do not match each other. Increment: Decrease the finishing size. Decrement: Increase the finishing size. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Description Level

17-53

Chapter 17

17.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode)

17.5.1 COPIER 17.5.1.1 COPIER Items
<INSTALL> Operation for Installation
T-17-32 COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL Sub item TONER-S Description Use it to stir the toner inside the developing assembly at time of installation. Level
0011-5844

- Implement visual check if the developing assembly and the connector of the developing assembly are correctly connected before TONER-S execution. - During execution, do not turn the power OFF or open/close each cover/ADF. Operation method: 1) Select the item, highlight it ( 'Check the Developer' is displayed. Do not check the connection of the developing assembly and the connector of the developing assembly at that time, but check them in advance at the time of installing the developing assembly). 2) Press the OK key to start the operation. The machine will stop automatically when 600 sec count has been taken. CARD Use it to make card reader settings as part of installation work. Procedure Enter a number between 1 and 2001, and press the OK key. (As many as 1000 cards may be used starting with the one bearing the number you enter.) At this time, the machine initializes the card control information (group ID and ID number). E-RDS Use it to make E-RDS settings (embedded RDS). At using E-RDS function, set to '1'. Range 0: disable RDS (off); 1: enable RDS (transmit all counter information) See the chapter of RDS in service manual for more detail. RGW-PORT COM-TEST Use it to set the port number for the server used by E-RDS. range: 1 to 65535 Use it to check the connection to the server used for E-RDS. 1) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) Check the result expressed in OK or NG. COM-LOG Use it to indicate the details of the result of a test executed on the communication with the server used for E-RDS. Procedure 1) Select the item to highlight, and press an information item. history particulars: calendar, date, time, error code, error details (128 characters max.) RGW-ADR Use it to specify the URL of the server used for E-RDS. Procedure 1) Select the item to highlight, and press an information item. 2) When the URL input screen appears, press the OK key. (default: htts://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010)

17-54

Chapter 17

<CCD>
T-17-33 COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). Sub item CCD-ADJ Use it to execute CCD auto adjustment. <Procedure> 1) Place 10 or more sheets of paper on the copyboard glass. (Make sure the paper is the whitest of all used by the user but is not one for color printing). 2) Select 'CCD-ADJ' to highlight, and press the OK key. 3) See that auto adjustment takes place (about 15 sec), during which 'ACTIVE' appears in the upper right of the screen. 4) See that the LED (scanning lamp) goes on twice in the course of the adjustment and the screen indicates 'OK!' to end the adjustment. 5) All items under COPIER > ADJUST > CCD will be updated. Print out a service sheet for future reference. LUT-ADJ * Use it to execute CCD gain abridged correction. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key so that auto adjustment takes place. 2) See that adjustment ends automatically. 3) The items under COPIER>ADJUST>LAMP, COPIER>ADJUST>CCD in service mode are updated. Print out a service sheet for future reference. DF-WLVL1 ** DF-WLVL2 ** Use it to adjust the ADF white level. <Procedure> 1) Place paper on the copyboard glass, and execute DF-WLVL1. (Make sure that the paper is a type used by the user.) -> The machine will read the white level used for copyboard mode (i.e., checks the transmissivity of the copyboard glass). 2) Place paper in the ADF, and execute DF-WLVL2. (Make sure that the paper is a type used by the user.) -> The machine reads the white level used for ADF stream reading mode (i.e., to check the transmissivity of the stream reading glass). Be sure to execute the foregoing always in combination in the correct order, i.e., DF-WLVL1 and then DF-WLVL2. Use it to fine-adjust the CCD gain. Use it if the difference, if any, in density cannot be corrected using LUT-ADJ (CCD gain abridged correction). <Procedure> 1) Place the 10-gradation chart (D-10 Test Sheet ; FY9-9129) on the copyboard glass. 2) Select the item, and press the OK key so that auto adjustment takes place. 3) See that the machine ends the adjustment automatically. 4) The items under COPIER > ADJUST > LAMP, COPIER > ADJUST > CCD are updated. Print out a service sheet for future reference. 1 Description Level

LUT-ADJ2 *

<LASER> Operation Concerning Laser

T-17-34 COPIER > FUNCTION > LASER Sub item Description Level POWER-A/B/ Use it to turn on the laser (A, B, C, D). C/D <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) See that the laser goes on, and 'START' -> 'ACTIVE' appears. 3) See that the laser goes off in about 60 sec automatically and 'OK!' appears. MEMO: Do not use for servicing.

<DPC> Operation Concerning Potential Sensor

T-17-35 COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC Sub item OFST Use it to adjust the offset of the potential sensor. Description Level

- Do not execute this item on its own. It is part of a series of operations performed when replacing the potential sensor unit. - Do not use it except when changing the potential sensor unit <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key so that offset adjustment takes place. 2) See that the machine ends the adjustment automatically.

17-55

Chapter 17

<CST>
T-17-36 COPIER > FUNCTION > CST Sub item Use it to execute size auto adjustment of the cassette/manual feeder tray. C3-STMTR C3-A4R C4-STMTR C4-A4R Use it to register the paper width basic value for cassette 3/4. STMTR width: 139.5 mm; A4R width: 210 mm <Procedure> 1) Place paper in the cassette, and adjust the side guide plate to suit the width of the paper. 2) Select the item, and press the OK key. The value will be registered at the end of the adjustment. Notes: If fine-adjustment is needed after registration of the basic value, use ADJUST > CST-ADJ > C3-STMTR, C3-A4R, CR-STMTR, C4A4R. Use it to register the paper width basic value of the manual feeder tray. A4R width: 210 mm; A6R width: 105 mm; A4 width: 297 mm <Procedure> 1) Place paper in the manual feeder tray, and adjust the guide to suit the width of the paper. 2) Select the item, and press the OK key. The value will be registered at the end of the adjustment. Notes: If fine-adjustment is needed after registration of the basic value, use ADJUST > CST > ADJ > MF-A4R, MF-A6R, MF-A4. 1 1 Description Level

MF-A4R MF-A6R MF-A4

<CLEANING>
T-17-37 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING Sub item WIRE-CLN Use it to execute auto cleaning of the charging wire. Execute the item after replacing the primary charging wire or the transfer charging wire. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key so that wire cleaning starts (5 trips). 2) See that the machine stops automatically when cleaning is done. 1 Description Level

<FIXING> Adjustment Concerning Fixing Assembly

T-17-38 COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING Sub item NIP-CHK Use it to adjust the fixing nip width. Make test prints for measurement of the fixing nip width. <Procedure> 1) Implement printing of 20 test sheets in A4 or LTR size. 2) Set paper in A4 or LTR size on the manual feed tray. 3) Select the item, and press the OK key. The paper will be stopped at the fixing nip area, and then discharged in about 20 sec. 4) Measure the nip. (The points of reference are 10 mm from the edges of the paper.) b = 100V/200V: 9.0mm +/- 0.5mm 208/230V: 10.0mm +/- 0.5mm |a-c|= 0.5mm or less 1 Description Level

17-56

Chapter 17

<PANEL>
T-17-39 COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL Sub item LCD-CHK Use it to check for missing dots. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key so that the LCD will go on in the following sequence: white, black, red, green, blue. 2) Press the stop key to stop the operation. LED-CHK Use it to check the activation of the LEDs on the control panel. Use it to check the activation of the LEDs on the control panel. 1) Select the item, and press the OK key so that the LEDs will go on in sequence. 2) Select LED-OFF to stop the operation. LED-OFF Use it to check the activation of the LEDs on the control panel (to stop). <Procedure> 1) Select the item to stop LED-CHK operation. KEY-CHK Use it to check key inputs. <Procedure> 1) Select the item so that the number/name of a specific input key appears. 2) Press a key to check. If normal, the corresponding character will appear on the LCD. (See the table.) 3) Select the item once again to stop the operation. TOUCHCHK Use it to adjust the coordinates of the LCD. Execute this item if you have replaced the control panel so that specific points on the LCD will match specific coordinates. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) Press the 9 +s that appear in sequence on the LCD. 1 1 1 1 1 Description Level

<Input Key Names and Screen Indications>

Key 0 to 9,#,* Reset Stop Indications 0 to 9,#,* RESET STOP Key Initial Setup/Register Start Clear Indications USER START CLEAR Key Authenticate Help Check Counter Indications ID ? BILL

<PART-CHK>
T-17-40 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK Sub item CL <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Type in the appropriate number using the keypad. 3) Press the OK key. CL-ON Use it to start a check on the operation of a clutch. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key so that the clutch repeatedly goes on and off as follows: on for 05 sec -> off for 10 sec -> on for 0.5 sec -> off for 10 sec -> on for 0.5 speed -> off MTR Use it to select a motor whose operation you want to check. (settings: 1 to 13) <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Type in the appropriate number using the keypad. 3) Press the OK key. MTR-ON Use it to start a check on the operation of a motor. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. - on for 20 sec -> off - if buffer motor or duplexing horizontal registration motor, on for 10 sec -> off - if shift tray motor, stops at front/rear HP - if vibration motor (M10/M20), repeats on and off at intervals of about 5 sec SL Use it to select the operation of a solenoid. <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Enter the appropriate number using the keypad. 3) Press the OK key. SL-ON Use it to start a check on the operation of a solenoid. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. on for 0.5 sec -> off for 5 sec -> on for 0.5 sec -> off for 5 sec, on for 0.5 sec -> of 1 1 1 1 Description Use it to specify the clutch whose operation you want to check. (settings: 1 to 21) 1 Level

17-57

Chapter 17 <Clutch>
Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name manual feeder tray pickup clutch (CL7) cassette 3 pickup clutch (CL12) vertical path 3 clutch (CL13) cassette 4 pickup clutch (CL14) vertical path 4 clutch (CL15) deck (right) pickup clutch (CL10) vertical path 1 clutch (CL8) Code 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Name deck (left) pickup clutch (CL11) vertical path 2 clutch (CL9) pre-registration clutch (CL5) lower transport middle clutch (CL16) lower transport right clutch (CL17) deck (left) transport clutch (CL19) delivery speed switchover clutch (CL21) Code 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Name registration brake clutch (CL3) manual feeder tray transport clutch (CL18) buffer inside magnet roller drive clutch (CL1) developing cylinder clutch (CL4) registration roller clutch (CL2) side paper deck transport clutch (CL101) side paper deck pickup clutch (CL102)

<Motor>
Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 drum motor (M0) main motor (M1) pickup motor (M2) fixing motor (M3) laser scanner motor (M4) sub hopper inside toner feed motor (M22) buffer motor (M18) Name Code 8 9 10 11 12 13 Name horizontal registration motor (M15) duplexing reversal motor (M11) duplexing transport motor (M12) deck main motor (M101) vibration motor1 (M10) vibration motor2 (M20)

<Solenoid>
Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 Name deck (right) pickup solenoid (SL7) deck (left) pickup solenoid (SL8) deck 3 pickup solenoid (SL9) cassette 4 pickup solenoid (SL10) manual feed pickup clutch solenoid (SL6) (The manual feeder pickup roller moves up.) manual feeder pickup clutch solenoid (SL6) (The manual feeder pickup roller moves down.) Code 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Name delivery flapper solenoid (SL3) reversal flapper solenoid (SL11) fixing web solenoid (SL2) fixing feed unit lock solenoid (SL4) lock fixing transport unit lock solenoid (SL4) unlock not used side paper deck pickup solenoid not used

<CLEAR>
T-17-41 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). Sub item ERR Use it to reset an error code. <Target Error Code> E000, E001, E002, E003, E005, E013, E019, E020, E717, E719 <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then on the main power.(Cleared after turning OFF/ON the main power.) DC-CON Use it to initialize the RAM on the DC controller PCB. <Procedure> 1) Print out the particulars of service mode by making the following selections: COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT. 2) Select the item, and press the OK key. 3) Turn off and then back on the main power.(Cleared after turning OFF/ON the main power.) 4) As necessary, enter the data printed out using P-PRINT. R-CON Use it to initialize the RAM on the reader controller PCB. <Procedure> 1) Print out the particulars of service mode by making the following selections: COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT. 2) Select the item, and press the OK key. 3) Turn off and then back on the main power. (Cleared after turning OFF/ON the main power.) 4) As necessary, enter the data printed using P-PRINT. JAM-HIST Use it to reset the jam history. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key.(Cleared when pressing the OK key.) ERR-HIST Use it to reset the error code history. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key.(Cleared when pressing the OK key.) PWD-CLR Use it to reset the password for 'system administrator' set in user mode. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key.(Cleared when pressing the OK key.) ADRS-BK Use it to reset the address book data. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then back on the main power switch.(Cleared after turning OFF/ON the main power.) 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Level

17-58

Chapter 17
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). Sub item CNT-MCON Description Use it to reset the service counter controlled by the main controller PCB. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key.(Cleared when pressing the OK key.) CNT-DCON Use it to reset the service counter controlled by the DC controller PCB. 1 1 Level

Execute the operation when replacing the DC Controller or clearing RAM. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key.(Cleared when pressing the OK key.) OPTION ** Use it to initialize the RAM on the reader controller PCB. (items under COPIER>OPTION only) <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key.(Cleared when pressing the OK key.) MMI Use it to reset user mode settings. <Target of Clear> - backup data for copier control panel (user settings) - backup data for common settings (user settings) - various backup data (user settings) <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then back on the power.(Cleared after turning OFF/ON the main power.) MN-CON Use it to initialize the RAM on the main controller PCB. <Procedure> 1) Print out the particulars of service mode by making the following selections: COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > P-PRINT. 2) Select the item, and press the OK key. 3) Turn off and then back on the main power.(Cleared after turning OFF/ON the main power.) 4) As necessary, enter the data printed out using P-PRINT. CARD Use it to reset the data related to the card ID (group). <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) Turns off and then back on the main power.(Cleared after turning OFF/ON the main power.) ALARM Use it to reset the alarm log. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then back on the main power.(Cleared after turning OFF/ON the main power.) SLT-CLR LANG-ERR Not in use. Use it to reset a language-related error (E747). Use it when a language-related error (E747) occurs after changing into other language than the default language. By implementing this item, the status recovers from the error. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then back on the main power.After the main power OFF/ON, return to the default language. ERDS-DAT Use it to reset the E-RDS-related settings. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then back on the main power.(Cleared after the main power OFF/ON) See the chapter of RDS in service manual for more detail. SND-STUP Use it to reset the transmission read settings. Use it when the reading setting display of the sending screen has garbage characters after changing the language. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then back on the main power.(Cleared after the main power OFF/ON) CA-KEY Use it to reset the CA certificate and key.

1 1

In the case that the following works or operations were implemented, perform this item. - At changing HDD/formatting - At changing the main controller/clearing RAM - At replacing or disposing the machine (To prevent compromise) Do not use it for other cases than the above. Key/certificate/CA certificate installed by users may be cleared. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) Turn off and then back on the main power.(Cleared after the main power OFF/ON) MEMO: CA certificate is MEAP application using Embedded-RDS, SSL client connection, and key pair is the function for IPP SSL function, RUI SSL function and MEAP SSL function.

17-59

Chapter 17

<MISC-R>
T-17-42 COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R Sub item SCANLAMP Use it to turn on the scanning lamp. <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key so that the scanning lamp goes on and remains on for about 3 sec. 1 Description Level

<MISC-P> Checking the Printer Portion

T-17-43 COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P Sub item P-PRINT Use it to print out the settings of service mode. <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to obtain a printout. KEY-HIST Use it to print out control panel key inputs. <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to obtain a printout. HIST-PRT Use it to print out a jam and error history. <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to obtain a printout. TRS-DATA Use it to move data received in memory to a Box. <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to move the data. USER-PRT Use it to print out the settings of service mode. <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to obtain a printout. LBL-PRNT Use it to print out the service label. <Procedure> 1) Place A4/LTR paper in cassette 1. 2) Select the item. 3) Press the OK key to obtain a printout. PRE-EXP Use it to check the activation of the charging pre-exposure lamp (LED). <Procedure> 1) Select the item to highlight. 2) Press the OK key so that individual operations take place for several seconds and end. (all LEDs ON) 3) Press the OK key to obtain a printout. ENV-PRT Use it to print out the data on the history of changes that have taken place in the machine inside temperature/humidity and fixing temperature. <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to obtain a printout. PJH-P-1 Use it to print out the data on the history of print jobs with details. (most recent 100 jobs) <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to obtain a printout. PJH-P-2 Use it to print out the data on the history of print jobs with details. (all jobs) <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to obtain a printout. P-TR-EXP Use it to check the activation of the pre-transfer exposure lamp. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key so that the pre-transfer exposure lamp goes on. 2) See that the lamp goes on and remains on for several seconds and then goes off automatically. 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Level

17-60

Chapter 17
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P Sub item CL-ADJ Description Use it to adjust the timing at which a clutch goes on and off. <Clutches in Question> Vertical path 1 clutch /Vertical path 2 clutch /Vertical path 3 clutch /Vertical path 4 clutch /Lower feeder middle clutch /Lower feeder right clutch /Deck (left) feeding clutch /Side paper deck feeding clutch <Operation Method> 1) Set two or more of A4 or LTR sheets on the following pick-up slot. - Left deck - Cassette 4 - Paper deck (option) 2) Select this item, press OK key. Two sheets are delivered from the left deck, one from the cassette 4 and one from the paper deck (when connected). 3) OK is displayed if it was normally completed, NG if not after delivering all of the papers. Be sure to execute this mode item whenever you have replaced the DC controller PCB. Otherwise, there will likely be a drop in the accuracy of positioning the paper being moved, in turn increasing the frequency of jams. Level

<SENS-ADJ> Operation of Sensor/Maintenance/Auto Adjustment

T-17-44 COPIER > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ Sub item OP-SENS Use it to execute automatic adjustment of the optical sensor. <Target sensor> RD-FS: Right deck pick-up sensor/RD-PS: Right deck feeder sensor LD-FS: Left deck pick-up sensor/LD-PS: Left deck feeder sensor C3-FS: Cassette 3 pick-up sensor/T3-S: Vertical pass 3 paper sensor C4-FS: Cassette 4 pick-up sensor/T4-S: Vertical pass 4 paper sensor OP-FS: Side paper deck pick-up sensor: OP-PS: Side paper deck feeder sensor 1) Place paper in all decks, cassettes and side paper deck. 2) Select the item, and press the OK key. 3) See that 'ACTIVE' is indicated, with the result (OK/NG) indicated for the sensors that have been checked in sequence. In the case of NG display, clean the surface of the target sensor and implement the adjustment again. Description Level

17-61

Chapter 17

<SYSTEM>
T-17-45 COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM Sub item DOWNLOAD Use it to switch over to download mode. <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key to switch to the Download mode screen. CHK-TYPE Use it to specify the partition (No.) for which HD-CHECK, HD-CLEAR will be executed. <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Type in the number of the partition using the keypad, and press the OK key. 0: entire HDD* 1: FSTDEV (compression image data), IMG_MNG (file control table, profile), FSTCDEV (job archiving) 2: AP_GEN (general-purpose data, TMP_GEN (temporary file), TMP_PSS (for PDL spooling) 3: PDLDEV (PDL-related file) 4: BOOTDEV (various firmware such as system software and content)* 5: APL_MEAP (MEAP application) 6: APL_SEND (address book, filter) 7: not used 8: APL_KEEP (non-initialization; for storage) *: HD-CLEAR will not initialize the HDD. If necessary, use the SST/USB memory in safe mode. HD-CHECK Use it to check and recover the partition selected by CHK-TYPE. <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key. 3) See the result (1: OK; 2: NG (hardware); 3: NG (software); recovery/alternative sector). HD-CLEAR Use it to initialize the partition selected using CHK-TYPE. <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key. 3) Turn off and then on the main power so that initialization starts. Do not turn off the power while initialization is under way. DEBUG-1 Use it to set the type of log to store/timing of storage to the HDD. settings 0 to 3 (default: 0) - Do not use for servicing (For the analysis of the cause of trouble) - Obey the instruction by the quality support section for usage. 2 1 1 Description Level

DEBUG-2

Use it to print out logs stored on the HDD. <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Press the OK key. 3) See that the log is printed. (about 2 sheets of A4) - Do not use for servicing (For the analysis of the cause of trouble) - Obey the instruction by the quality support section for usage.

17.5.2 FEEDER 17.5.2.1 FEEDER Items

0011-6095

T-17-46 FEEDER > FUNCTION *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). Sub item SENS-INT Description Use it to adjust the sensitivity of the various sensors of the ADF. Be sure to clean the sensors before executing the item. Procedure 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) See that the adjustment ends automatically. BLT-CLN * Use it to clean the separation belt of the ADF. <Procedure> 1) Select the time, and press the OK key. 2) See that the separation belt goes on. Press the Stop key to stop the operation. REG-CLN * Use it to clean the registration roller of the ADF. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) See that the registration roller rotates. Press the Stop key to stop the operation. 1 1 1 Level

17-62

Chapter 17
FEEDER > FUNCTION *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). Sub item Description <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Type in the number of a specific part using the keypad. 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press MTR-ON to check the operation. No. and Part 0: pickup motor 1: transport motor TRY-A4 ** TRY-A5R ** TRY-LTR ** TRY-LTRR ** FEED-CHK ** Use it to execute auto adjustment on paper width detection reference point 1 for the original pickup tray of the ADF. (A4) Use it to execute auto adjustment on paper width detection reference point 2 for the original pickup tray of the ADF. (A5R) Use it to execute auto adjustment on paper width detection reference point 1 for the original pickup tray of the ADF. (LTR) Use it to execute auto adjustment on paper width detection reference point 2 for the original pickup tray of the ADF. (LTRR) Use it to check paper passage for the ADF on its own. <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Type in the number of a specific paper passage mode using the keypad. 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press FEED-ON to check the operation. No. and Paper Passage Mode 0: simplexing pickup delivery operation 1: duplexing pickup delivery operation 2: simplexing pickup delivery operation w/ stamp 3: duplexing pickup delivery operation w/ stamp Use it to check the ADF clutch on its own. <Procedure> 1) Select the item 2) Type in the number of a specific part using the keypad. 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press CL-ON to check the operation. No. and Part 0: pickup clutch CL-ON ** Use it to start the operation of the clutch. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK to start the operation of the clutch. 2) Press the OK key to stop the operation. (It will stop automatically in about 2 sec. But the indication will not change to 'STOP' until the OK key is pressed once again.) FAN-CHK ** Use it to check the operation of the clutch on its own. <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Type in the number of a specific part using the keypad. 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press FAN-ON to check the operation. No. and Part 0, 1: cooling fan FAN-ON ** Use it to start fan operation. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key to start fan operation. 2) Press the OK key to stop the operation. (The operation will stop automatically in about 5 sec, but the indication will not change to 'STOP' until the OK key is pressed once again.) SL-CHK ** Use it to check the ADF solenoid on its own. <Procedure> 1) Select the item. 2) Type in the number of a specific part using the keypad. 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press SL-ON to check the operation. No. and Part 0: locking solenoid 1: stamp solenoid SL-ON ** Use it to start the operation of the solenoid. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key to start the motor operation. 2) Press the OK key to stop the operation. (The operation will stop automatically in about 5 sec, but the indication will not change to 'STOP' until the OK key is pressed once again.) MTR-ON ** Use it to start motor operation. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key so that the motor will start. 2) Press the OK key to stop the operation. (The operation will stop automatically in about 5 sec, but the indication will not change to 'STOP' until the OK key is pressed once again.) ROLL-CLN ** Use it to clean the ADF roller. <Procedure> 1) Select the item so that the roller starts to rotate. 2) While the roller is rotating, clean it by pressing lint-free paper (moistened with alcohol) against it. 3) Select ROLL-CLN to highlight, and press the OK key so that the roller will stop. 1 1 1 1 1 Level MTR-CHK ** Use it to check the ADF motor on its own.

1 1 1 1

CL-CHK **

17-63

Chapter 17
FEEDER > FUNCTION *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). Sub item FEED-ON ** Description Use it to check the passage of paper on the ADF on its own. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key so that paper movement starts according to the operation mode selected using FEED-CHK. 1 Level

17.5.3 SORTER 17.5.3.1 SORTER Items

0011-6678

T-17-47 SORTER > FUNCTION Sub item PCH-STUP Description Use it to setup up a professional puncher. (non-Japanese model only) Use it to adjust the horizontal registration position when installing a professional puncher. Operation method 1) Connect the machine and the puncher, turn the power ON. 2) Change the hardware switch of the puncher to setup mode. 3) It enters into the service mode. After selecting item, press OK key. 4) When 'OK!' is displayed, set A4 or LTR original on the arbitrary pick-up slot, and press start key at the status that the service mode screen is displayed. 5) Copy operation is implemented, the paper is stopped at the delivery slot of the puncher. For the actual horizontal registration adjustment procedure, see the installation procedure of the puncher. Level

17-64

Chapter 17

17.6 OPTION (Machine Settings Mode)

17.6.1 COPIER 17.6.1.1 COPIER Items
<BODY> Select Machine Specification Concerning the Machine Body
T-17-48 COPIER > OPTION > BODY *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: up graded version Sub item PO-CNT Use it to enable/disable the potential control mechanism. settings 0: off; 1: on (default) TRNSG-SW Use it to select an appropriate transfer guide bias control mode. settings 0: absolute moisture content (if 22 g or higher, 200 V; otherwise, 600 V) 1: fixed to 600 V 2: fixed to 200 V 3: if absolute water content of 18 g or more, 200 V; otherwise, 600 V (default) 4: if absolute waste content of 14 g or more, 200 V; otherwise, 600 V - Normally, use the item with the default setting. (At the normal temperature and low humidity, +600V to prevent the transfer guide to be soiled. At the high humidity, +200V to prevent the transfer failure.) - If a paper absorbs moisture, the transfer current flows to the transfer guide, and it may cause the transfer failure. In such case, adjust this service mode depending on the paper and environment. MODEL-SZ Use it to switch over the display of default magnifications and ADF original size detection. settings 0: AB (6R5E) (default) 1: INCH (5R4E) 2: A (3R3E) 3: AB/INCH (6R5E) FIX-TEMP Use it to set the down sequence start temperature for heavy paper. settings 0: 194 deg C; 1: 189 deg C (default); 2: 184 deg C Usage: Select '0' when giving preference to the image quality (fixing), '2' when giving preference to the speed (productivity). FUZZY Use it to enable/disable the fuzzy control mechanism and make environment settings. Affects the charging current level for pre-transfer, transfer, and separation. - Act on the separation current value. - if set to '1' thorough '3', the mechanism will be free of the environment sensor readings. settings 0: fuzzy control on (default) 1: low humidity environment mode (The separation current value becomes 20 uA higher than the standard value (the normal temperature environment mode), only on the first surface.) 2: normal humidity environment mode 3: high humidity environment mode (The separation current value becomes 20 uA on the first surface, 40 uA on the second surface lower than the standard value (normal temperature environment mode).) MEMO: Do not use for servicing. CNT-W/PR Use it to enable/disable the density variation mode mechanism for a printing session (PDL input). settings 0: correct target value to enable density variation during printing (default) 1: disable density variation during printing CONFIG Select several system software stored in the hard disk, change the nation/area, paper size. <Procedure> 1) Select <CONFIG>. 2) Select the item to change. 3) Press the +/- key. (Each press changes the setting.) 4) Display the contents to be needed, press OK key. 5) Turn off and then back on the main power switch. XXYYZZAA XX: country (e.g., JP=Japan) YY (*): language (e.g., ja=Japanese) ZZ: (*) destination (e.g., 00=Canon) AA: paper size series (00=AB; 01=inch; 02=A; 03=inch/AB) *: Cannot change the setting. TR-SP-C1 Use it to change the transfer/separation output settings for pickup from the right deck. settings MEMO: 0: plain paper (default); 1: recycled paper; 2: tracing paper; 3: Thick paper - In the case that the setting value is 0, control as for the paper that was set at the user mode or manual feeding. - In the case that the setting value is 1~3, control as for the recycled paper/tracing paper/thick paper. However, only in the case of the setting of tracing paper/tab paper at the user mode or manual feeding, the setting of the user mode and manual feeding is prioritized over this service mode setting. 1 1 1 1 Description Level
0011-6021

17-65

Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: up graded version Sub item TR-SP-C2 Description Use it to change the transfer/separation output setting for pickup from the left deck. settings 0: plain paper (defeat); 1: recycled paper; 2: tracing paper; 3: For thick paper MEMO: - In the case that the setting value is 0, control as for the paper that was set at the user mode or manual feeding. - In the case that the setting value is 1~3, control as for the recycled paper/tracing paper/thick paper. However, only in the case of the setting of tracing paper/tab paper at the user mode or manual feeding, the setting of the user mode and manual feeding is prioritized over this service mode setting. TR-SP-C3 Use it to change the transfer/separation output setting for cassette 3. settings 0: plain paper (default); 1: recycled paper; 2: tracing paper; 3: For thick paper MEMO: - In the case that the setting value is 0, control as for the paper that was set at the user mode or manual feeding. - In the case that the setting value is 1~3, control as for the recycled paper/tracing paper/thick paper. However, only in the case of the setting of tracing paper/tab paper at the user mode or manual feeding, the setting of the user mode and manual feeding is prioritized over this service mode setting. TR-SP-C4 Use it to change the transfer/separation output setting for pickup from cassette 4. settings 0: plain paper (default); 1: recycled paper; 2: tracing paper; 3: For thick paper MEMO: - In the case that the setting value is 0, control as for the paper that was set at the user mode or manual feeding. - In the case that the setting value is 1~3, control as for the recycled paper/tracing paper/thick paper. However, only in the case of the setting of tracing paper/tab paper at the user mode or manual feeding, the setting of the user mode and manual feeding is prioritized over this service mode setting. TR-SP-MF Use it to change the transfer/separation output setting for pickup from the manual feeder tray. settings 0: plain paper (default); 1: recycled paper; 2: tracing paper; 3: For thick paper MEMO: - In the case that the setting value is 0, control as for the paper that was set at the user mode or manual feeding. - In the case that the setting value is 1~3, control as for the recycled paper/tracing paper/thick paper. However, only in the case of the setting of tracing paper/tab paper at the user mode or manual feeding, the setting of the user mode and manual feeding is prioritized over this service mode setting. TR-SP-DK Use it to change the transfer/separation output setting for pickup from the side paper deck. settings 0: plain paper (default); 1: recycled paper; 2; tracing paper; 3: For thick paper MEMO: - In the case that the setting value is 0, control as for the paper that was set at the user mode or manual feeding. - In the case that the setting value is 1~3, control as for the recycled paper/tracing paper/thick paper. However, only in the case of the setting of tracing paper/tab paper at the user mode or manual feeding, the setting of the user mode and manual feeding is prioritized over this service mode setting. DEV-SLOW Use it to enable/disable the developing cylinder speed variation mechanism. settings 0: change to suit environment; 1: high speed; 2: low speed (default) MEMO: Do not use for servicing. W/SCNR Use it to indicate the presence/absence of a reader unit. settings 0: printer model (w/o reader); 1: copier model (w/ reader) If the reader unit is detected at start-up, '1' will be set automatically. STPL-SFT Use it to enable/disable offset stacking in stapler mode. settings 0: use offset stacking in stapler mode (default) 1: do not use offset stacking in stapler mode The foregoing choice is valid only when 1-point stapling is used. DFDST-L1 Use it to adjust the dust detection level when the ADF is in use. (sheet-to-sheet correction) A higher setting will make the mechanism more sensitive, detecting finer particles of dust. settings: 0 to 255 [Default: 80] DFDST-L2 Use it to adjust the dust detection level when the ADF is in use. (post-job detection) A higher setting will make the mechanism more sensitive, detecting finer particles of dust. settings: 0 to 255 [Default: 80] CCD-LUT * Use it to indicate whether or not to use data for CCD gain correction. Use it to correct the deterioration of the image due to aging (the density difference at the center joint area of the image). Indicates whether or not to use the data collected by COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD > LUT-ADJ2. settings 0: do not use [Default]; 1: use (1-point correction); 2: use (3-point correction) ENVP-INT Use it to set the intervals at which the history data is collected on the machine inside temperature/fixing temperature. settings: 0 to 480 (unit: min) If '0', the history data is not collected. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Level

17-66

Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: up graded version Sub item BASE-SW Description Use it to switch from the MEAP full model to the base model. Use it when trouble attributable to MEAP application occurs. By setting to '0', the operation of MEAP application can be controlled. settings 0: off (base model); 1: on (full model) [Default] MEMO: The change only from '1' to '0' is possible. SC-L-CNT Use it to set the threshold for identifying large size paper for the scan counter. Settings 0: Count the paper larger than B4 as large size. (A paper that is B4 or smaller is considered as small size.) [Default] 1: Count the paper larger than LTR as large size. (A paper that is LTR or smaller is considered as small size.) The scan counter threshold at copy is determined as follow depending on the combination with the setting value of B4-L-CNT (COPIER > OPTION > USER > B4-L-CNT): <In case SC-L-CNT, B4-L-CNT=(0, 0)> Count the paper larger than B4 as large size. (A paper that is B4 or smaller is considered as small size.) <In case SC-L-CNT, B4-L-CNT=(0, 1)> Count the paper that is B4 or larger as large size. (A paper smaller than B4 is considered as small size.) <In case SC-L-CNT, B4-L-CNT=(1, 0) or (1, 1)> Count the paper larger than LTR as large size. (A paper that is LTR or smaller is considered as small size.) LDAP-ADD Use it to indicate whether or not to add a LDAP search switch. Indicates whether or not to add 'Object Class' and 'SrchNameRow' (Search Name Row) to the pull-down list showing the normal set of conditions (name, group, organization unit, e-mail). settings 0: do not add; 1: add The addresses to be searched are limited to e-mail addresses. ACFRQNY Use it to set the developing AC bias frequency (remedy for retransfer/fogging; for plain paper and other papers). Set the developing AC bias frequency for other papers than recycled paper/thin paper/thick paper. Varies the developing AC bias frequency to adjust the level of fogging. - if retransfer is too noticeable, decrease the setting (i.e., increase the level of fogging). - if fogging is too noticeable, increase the setting. settings: -5: 2.0KHz -4: 2.1KHz -3: 2.2KHz -2 :2.3KHz -1: 2.4KHz 0: 2.5KHz (default) Usage: - Make the value smaller at re-transfer occurrence (Increase the fogging amount). - When decreasing the fogging amount, increase the value. 1: 2.6KHz 2: 2.7KHz 3: 2.8KHz 4: 2.9KHz 5: 3.0KHz MEMO: The foregoing settings are valid only if '0' is set for the following: COPIER > OPTION > BODY > TR-SP-C1/C2/C3/C4/MF/DK. CNT-TMG Use it to switch over the counter increment specifications when a delivery accessory is in use. Use it in order to change the timing of accounting count-up in the case that several delivery options are connected. settings 0: increase count upon delivery of paper from delivery accessory (default); 1: increase count upon delivery of paper from host machine 1: Count-up at the time of delivery from the machine body ACFRQ-R Use it to set the developing AC bias frequency (remedy for retransfer/fogging; for recycled paper). Set the developing AC bias frequency for the paper on the setting of recycle paper/thin paper. Varies the developing AC bias frequency to adjust the level of fogging. Usage: - if retransfer is too noticeable, decrease the setting (i.e., increase the level of fogging). - if fogging is too noticeable, increase the settings. settings -5: 2.0KHz -4: 2.1KHz -3: 2.2KHz -2 :2.3KHz -1: 2.4KHz 0: 2.5KHz (default) 1: 2.6KHz 2: 2.7KHz 3: 2.8KHz 4: 2.9KHz 5: 3.0KHz MEMO: The foregoing settings are valid only when '0' is set for the fogging: COPIER > OPTION > BODY > TR-SP-C1/C2/C3/C4/MF/DK. ACFRQ-T Use it to set the developing AC bias frequency (remedy for retransfer/fogging; for heavy paper). Varies the developing AC bias frequency to adjust the level of following. Usage: - if retransfer is too noticeable, decrease the setting (i.e., increase the level of fogging). - if fogging is too noticeable, increase the setting. settings -5: 2.0KHz -4: 2.1KHz -3: 2.2KHz -2 :2.3KHz -1: 2.4KHz 0: 2.5KHz (default) 1: 2.6KHz 2: 2.7KHz 3: 2.8KHz 4: 2.9KHz 5: 3.0KHz MEMO: The foregoing settings are valid only when '0' is set for the following: COPIER > OPTION > BODY > TR-SP-C1/C2/C3/C4/MF/DK. 1 1 1 Level

17-67

Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: up graded version Sub item K-DOT Description Selection of the drum separation faulty (re-transfer/leading edge white spot) remedy mode Selects a mode in which minute dots are formed over the entire surface of the print (outside the image) as a remedy for retransfer. A higher setting will decrease the level of retransfer. Usage: The larger the value, the larger the dot ratio (fogging amount). It is effective for re-transfer. When reducing the fogging amount, use COPIER>OPTION>BODY>ACFRQNY/ACFRQ-R/ACFRQ-T. settings 0: off (default); 1: 1-dot/75% frequency; 2: 1-dot/100% frequency; 3: 1 to 1.5-dot/100% frequency; 4: 1.5-dot/75% frequency This item is valid only when a type of paper other than heavy paper has been selected. MEMO: - Do not use for servicing. - This item is effective only when the paper other than thick paper was designated. FIX-EXP Selection of fixing splash/streak restriction mode Aiming at restricting fixing splash/streak, select VD down (toner level down/density down) control mode. settings 0: OFF (Select it when the developing assembly durable number of sheets is 10,000 or less and the density is thin) 1: VD down control according to the developing assembly durable number of sheets (0~10,000 sheets)/water volume. 2: VD down control [default] according to the developing assembly durable number of sheets (0~10,000 sheets) 3: Fixed amount VD down control (Select when the developing assembly durable number of sheets is 10,000 or more and the level of fixing splash/streak is bad) Usage: - When this setting value was changed, open/close the front cover or turn OFF/ON the main power supply (to operate the potential control). - If the level of fixing splash/streak is bad at the setting value '1~3', return the setting value to '2 [default]' and make smaller the value of COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>VD-OFST (However, it should be adjusted within the tolerance range of the density). - When the density is thin at changing DC controller PCB/clearing RAM, make the setting value '0' (Because the developing assembly durable number of sheets count is cleared to 0 also when the developing assembly durable number of sheets exceeds 10,000). In the case that the density is normal, keep the setting value '2 (default)'. - When setting the setting value other than '2 (default)', return the setting value to '2 (default)' later at changing to a new developing assembly. MEMO: The developing assembly durable number of sheets is the internal counter and not displayed. Level

OVLP-MD

Use it to enable/disable double-feeding detection mechanism. 0: enable (default); 1: disable 1

ABC-MODE *

Use it to switch over original background processing. (digital ABC setting switchover) A higher setting (between 1 and 3) will limit the background more. settings -1: limits removal of background density (for photo original or originals with complex elements) 0: off (no idle rotation) 1: remove background 1 2: remove background 2 3: remove background 3

SJOB-CL ***

Switch for enabling scan job cancellation by logout To enable scan jobs to be canceled upon completion of the scanning operation if logout is initiated. When the user asks for the item to be provided 0: Canceling is disabled. [default] 1: Canceling is enabled. Setting of character count for ignoring IFAX received mail text When the text of a mail during IFAX reception is shorter than the number of characters set, it is ignored, and the text is neither printed nor sent. If the mail text has been lost as a result of setting the value to a number other than "0", and there is no attached TIFF file, a blank page (except the header and footer) will be printed and sent. * Kanji are treated as 2-byte characters, and the carriage return and other control codes are also included in the character count. Settings 0 to 999 (unit: number of characters) 0: The mail text is not ignored. [Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 0] Support switch for print jobs exceeding 400 binders To select whether to support print jobs for which the number of binders exceeds 400. In accordance with the job attributes, the print jobs are performed while making repeated use of the binders. 0: Whether to provide support is automatically set depending on the connection status of the print server. When the print server is not connected: Not supported When the print server is connected: Supported 1: Not supported Users who do not wish to print jobs containing large numbers of binders (*) should use the '1' setting. *: These are jobs that use staples or other finishing to a great extent in a single job. This does not apply to jobs which feature heavy finishing involving the output of multiple numbers of copies. 1

IFX-CHIG ***

UNLMTBND ***

17-68

Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: up graded version Sub item DNSTRANS *** Switching the priority of DNS transfer Determine the priority of protocol (IPv4/IPv6) used for DNS inquiry based on the DNStrans value. Setting range 0: ipv4, 1: ipv6 Method of Adjustment When DNS query is first executed for IPv6 in the environment where both IPv6 and IPv4 are used and the DNS server only supports IPv4, timeout occurs and it takes time. In such a case, execute this mode to set priority to IPv4. Charging counter MIB switch Change the scope range of the charging counter MIB. Setting range 0: Display all charging counter MIB information. 1: Display all charging counter MIB information that is displayed in LUI. 2: Do not display charging counter MIB information. Method of Adjustment When the charging counter MIB is not disclosed, request a serviceman to change the counter value. [Value after execution of RAM clear: 0] Meap Remote Console switch When the service personnel take the Function Composer log in the field, turn on this switch and execute logging with Remote Console. 0: OFF [default] 1: ON Use it to enable/disable the mechanism that computes the scan area based on the selected paper size. It aims to increase the charging level by idling of the developing cylinder. It works with COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DEV-IDLR. Setting 0: OFF (Not idling) 1: Auto control by the environment sensor [Default] 2: Start idling at the point that the temperature of the fixing roller became 100 deg C. 3: Start idling at the main power switch ON. Usage: When there is dropping of toner from the photosensitive drum separation claw and the density becomes thin due to a long period of leaving or the high-temperature environment, the following settings are recommended. Setting value of COPIER>OPTION>BODY>DEV-IDLR: '1' Setting value of COPIER>OPTION>BODY>IDL-MODE: '2' MEMO: Do not use for servicing. SCANSLCT Use it to enable/disable computation of the scan area with reference to selected paper size. settings 0: off (determine scan area based on original detection; default) 1: on (determine scan area based on paper size) When setting as '1', if the media size is larger than the original size, productivity decreases due to a larger scanning area. OHP-TEMP Use it to switch over the transparency mode temperature control setting. Decreases the fixing temperature to facilitate separation of transparencies from the fixing roller. 0: 198 deg C (default) 1: 193 deg C 2: 188 deg C 3: 183 deg C OHP-CNT Use it to enable/disable the transparency mode potential control mechanism. settings 0: use the target value obtained from transparency mode (default) 1: do not execute potential control during transparency mode (Use potential control for plain paper mode) How to use: In the transparency mode, change as '1' if the density is light. (Use charging control for plain paper mode) -This is not used for servicing normally. -Potential control for transparency mode is normally used for transparency/intermediate paper/postcard FIX-TMP1 Use it to select a start temperature for plain paper down sequence. If the user places priority on image quality, set it to '0'; on speed, to '2'. settings: 0: 183 deg C; 1:178 deg C (default); 2: 173 deg C How to use: When prioritizing image quality (fixing performance), select '0'. When prioritizing speed (productivity), select '2'. 2 2 2 1 Description Level

MIBCOUNT ***

RMT-CNSL ***

IDL-MODE

17-69

Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: up graded version Sub item TRSW-P-B Description Use it to enable/disable the transfer current output correction mechanism for the trail edge of paper. As a remedy for transfer fault that occurs in case of large degree of lower curl of paper, decrease the transfer current onto the trailing edge of the paper. Settings 0: ON 1: OFF (default) When setting as '0', transfer current onto the trailing edge of paper is changed as follows: 1-sided print (1-sided print, 1st side of 2-sided print) Decrease by 220 uA in the low humidity environment (absolute moisture content: 5g or less) Decrease by 150 uA in the normal humidity environment (absolute moisture content: 5.01-17.99g) No change in the high humidity environment (absolute moisture content: 18g or more) 2-sided print (2nd side of 2-sided print) No change for Low/Normal/High environment Remarks This is not used for servicing normally. Level

SP-MODE

Separation voltage (Vpp) output offset ON/OFF control Decrease separation voltage as a remedy for separation voltage leak that occurs in low-pressure environment such as high altitude area. Settings 0: standard mode (10KVpp) (default) 1: low voltage mode (9KVpp) 2

FTMP-DWN

Select finisher loading capacity improvement mode (the mode to decrease degree of curl) This setting value (setting temperature) becomes effective on and after 1000th-delivered sheet. settings 0: off (default); 1: -5 deg C; 2: -10 deg C; 3; -15 deg C MEMO: This is not used for servicing normally. When decreasing the fixing temperature for the purpose of decreasing the degree of curl, COPIER > OPTION > BODY > TEMPTBL is recommended

DRUM-CLN

Use it to select an appropriate drum cleaning performance enhancement mode (stop sequence). - use it if cleaning faults occur. - during copying, stops the rotation of the drum for 1 sec when the setting is reached, recovering the cleaning performance of the cleaning blade. - the higher the setting (0 to 3), the more effective it is. settings 0: if single-sided, 1,000 prints; if double-sided, 500 prints (default) 1: if single-sided, 500 prints; if double-sided, 250 prints 2: if single-sided, 250 prints; if double-sided, 125 prints 3: at absolute moisture content of 9 g or more, if single-sided, passage of 1,000 prints/if double-sided, of 500 prints at absolute moisture content of less than 9 g, if single-sided, passage of 250 prints/if double-sided, of 125 prints 4: off (do not stop drum rotation)

DRM-IDL

Use it to set the drum idle rotation mode executed at power-on. -This is used in case of toner adhesion onto the photosensitive drum or light density due to distorted image. -This is used for the purpose of improving the drum polishing performance. Adhesion of toner onto the photosensitive drum and distorted image are prevented by idling of the photosensitive drum while the cleaning roller is stopped. settings 0: off (do not execute idle rotation; default) 1: rotate drum idly for 30 sec if absolute moisture content is 18 g or more 2: rotate drum idly for 2 min if absolute moisture content is 18 g or more 3: rotate drum for 30 sec regardless of environment 4: rotate drum for 2 min regardless of environment 5: Performs 2min of idling, followed by wire cleaning, and then 5 sec of idling regardless of environment. 6: Performs 2min of idling, followed by wire cleaning, and then 10 sec of idling regardless of environment. 7: Performs 2min of idling, followed by wire cleaning, and then 30 sec of idling regardless of environment.

SENS-CNF

Use it to set up the original sensor. settings 0: AB; 1: inch (Factory default value: varies by destinations / value after RAM clear: 0) Due to the reader controller PCB RAM clear, the value is set as '0'. Re-define the value as '1' for inch-configuration destination machines (North America etc.,)

RAW-DATA

Use it to set the reception image troubleshooting mode. Isolates faults occurring in reception images between received image data and image processing. settings 0: normal operation (default); 1: print out without image processing 2

SHARP

Use it to change the image sharpness level. A higher setting will make the images sharper. settings 1 to 5 (default: 3) 2

FDW-DLV

Use it to switch over face-down delivery for multiple printing (to ensure proper stacking). settings 0: normal (if 1 original, face-down for all) 1: if 1 original, face-up delivery for 1 set, but face-down delivery for multiple sets (default) 2

17-70

Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: up graded version Sub item COTDPC-D Use it to set toner save mode. settings 0: off (do not use toner save mode; default) 1: about -10%; 2: about -20%; 3: about -30% RMT-LANG Use it to switch over languages for the remote UI. To switch over, use the +/- key to select an appropriate language. IFAX-LIM Use it to limit the number of output characters for i-fax reception. settings 0 (no limit) to 999 (default: 500) DF-BLINE Enabling/disabling of dust detection at ADF stream reading (countermeasure for black line) This is used for occurrence of black line due to a dust on the platen roller. setting 0: Not detect dust at stream-reading 1: detect dust at stream-reading By setting the value as '1', black line issue is solved, but density of image edge area gets lighter. THICK-PR Use it to set potential control for heavy paper mode. This is used for reducing amount of toner deposit (which leads to decrease of intensity) and thus securing fixing performance in the case of faulty fixing. settings 0: use the value determined at time of potential control for plain paper mode (default) 1: use the value determined at time of potential control for transparency mode MEMO: - This is not used for servicing normally. - Potential control for transparency mode is normally used for transparency/intermediate paper/postcard. TEMP-TBL Use it to select an appropriate fixing temperature. settings - if 200V model 0: 188 deg C (default) 1: 198 deg C 2: 183 deg C 3: 178 deg C 4 to 6: 173 deg C - if 100V/208V/230V model 0: 198 deg C (default) 1: 203 deg C 2: 193 deg C 3: 188 deg C 4: 183 deg C 5: 178 deg C 4: 173 deg C However, the following settings will apply regardless of the model (voltage/country) if '1' or '2' is set for COPIER>OPTION>BODY>PAPER-TY (level 2): - if PAPER-TY = 1 0: 188 deg C 1: 198 deg C 2: 183 deg C 3: 178 deg C 4 to 6: 173 deg C (for 200V model fixing temperature control temperature table) - if PAPER-TY=2 0: 198 deg C 1: 203 deg C 2: 193 deg C 3: 188 deg C 4: 183 deg C 5: 178 deg C 6: 173 deg C (100V/208V/230V model fixing temperature control temperature table) DRM-H-SW Enabling/Disabling control of nighttime drum heater Settings 0: Normal control (at sleep mode, DC controller is disabled and follows the environmental SW) (default) 1: Environment humidity is monitored every 2 hours. When absolute moisture content is 9g or less, the drum heater is turned OFF. When absolute moisture content is more than 9, the drum heater is turned ON. How to use: In case of distorted image, set as '1'. Also in the sleep mode, the DC controller (power distribution) is turned ON and in the high humidity environment (absolute moisture content: >9g), drum heater is turned ON. However, it is recommended to enable the environmental SW on a steady basis instead of using this item (leaving the setting value as '0'). MEMO: - This is not used for servicing normally. - Environmental SW control Environmental SW OFF [default]: The drum heater is turned OFF at sleep mode/when turning OFF the main power (when DC controller power distribution is disabled) Environmental SW ON: The drum heater is turned ON at sleep mode / when turning OFF the main power (when DC controller power distribution is disabled) DEV-IDLR Use it to set the forced developing assembly idle rotation mode. (before execution of black band sequence at power-on) This is used in for the purpose of increasing the toner charge by idling of the developing cylinder. This is linked to COPIER > OPTION > BODY > IDLR-MODE. Settings 0: Executed in case 2000 or more sheets are printed on the previous day and absolute moisture content is 16g or more. (Default) 1: Always How to use: In case of toner drop from the photosensitive drum separation claw or light density because of being left for a long time or high humidity environment, following settings are recommended. COPIER > OPTION > BODY > DEV-IDLR setting value: '1' COPIER > OPTION > BODY > IDL-MODE setting value: '2' MEMO: -This is not used for servicing normally. BK-BD-1 to BK- Use it to set the month-based black band sequence mode (January to December). BD-12 As a countermeasure of light density, set a black belt sequence (toner ejecting sequence) settings 0: do not execute if absolute moisture content is less than 9 g; if 9 g or more, execute every 200 prints (default); 1: execute every 60 prints; 2: execute every 20 prints; 3: execute every 6 prints MEMO: -This is not used for servicing normally. 2 2 2 2 Description Level

17-71

Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: up graded version Sub item PAPER-TY Description Selection of fixing temperature control and pre-transfer exposure ON/OFF control suitable for media (Inside/Outside Japan) Settings 0: Control by factory default settings suitable for each destination (A-, AB-, Inch-, AB/Inch-configuration) (default) 1: Control as media for inside Japan 2: Control as media for outside Japan MEMO: By changing the value as '1', setting is forcibly changed to control suitable for inside Japan, and for outside Japan by '2'. SMTPTXPN Use it to change the SMTP transmission port number. settings 0 to 6535 (default: 25) SMTPRXPN Use it to change the SMTP transmission port number. settings 0 to 65535 (default: 25) POP3PN Use it to change the POP reception port number. settings 0 to 6535 (default: 110) RUI-DSP Use it to set the copier function option switch of the remote UI (for compliance with disability laws). settings 0: do not show copier screen for remote UI (default); 1: display ORG-LGL Use it to set special paper sizes (not recognized when the ADF is in use). settings: * 0: Legal-R (default); 1: Bolivian Officio-R; 2: Argentine Officio-R; 3: Argentine Legal-R; 4: Mexican Officio-R ** 0: Legal-R; 1: Foolscap-R; 2: Officio-R; 3: Folio-R; 4: Australian Foolscap-R; 5: Ecuadorian Officio-R; 6: Bolivian Office-R; 7: Argentine Officio-R; 8: Argentine Legal-R; 9: Government Legal-R; 10: Mexican-R ORG-LTR Use it to select special paper sizes (not recognized when the ADF is in use). settings * 0: Letter (default); 1: Executive; 2: Korean Government; 3: Argentine Letter; 4: Government Letter ** 0: Letter (default); 1: Executive; 2: Argentine Letter; 3: Government Letter ORG-B5 ** Use it to set a special paper size (not recognized when the ADF is in use). settings 0: B5 (delay); 1: Korean Government UI-COPY Use it to enable/disable display of the copier screen on the control panel. settings 0: do not display; 1: display (default) UI-BOX Use it to enable/disable display of the box screen on the control panel. settings 0: do not display; 1: display (default) UI-SEND Use it to enable/disable display of the transmission screen on the control panel. settings 0: do not display; 1: display (default) UI-FAX UI-EXT not used Use it to enable/disable display of the extension screen on the control panel. settings 0: do not display; 1: display (default) NW-SPEED Use it to select an appropriate data transmission speed for service when connected to a network. settings 0: auto (default); 1: 100Base-TX; 2: 10Base-T Normally, there should be no problem to leave the setting as '0' when downloading the firmware via network. However, in case communication speed needs to be fixed for some reasons, set the value as '1' or '2' depending on the required communication speed. TRY-CHG Use it to switch over the tray control mechanism for a tray full condition. settings: 0: delivers to priority tray (default); 1: delivers to tray used for previous job Normally (when set as '0'), when removing paper on the lower tray during delivery to the upper tray after filling the lower tray, the machine switches the delivery tray to the lower tray at the timing of job-to-job interval although the upper tray is not yet full. If you don't want the tray to be changed until one tray gets full, set the value as '1'. STS-PORT Use it to turn off/on the T.O.T (TUIF over TCP/IP) sync type command communication port. Turns on/off the inquiry/response (sync) type command communication port for TUIF over TCP/IP. settings 0: off (default); 1: on For service NAVI, set the value as '1' when connecting the PC and main body by crossing cable. MEMO: T.O.T (TUIF over TCP/IP) Communication protocol between embedded application presentation (UI) and applications within the device including COPY/ SEND/BOX etc., (Canon original protocol) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Level

17-72

Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: up graded version Sub item CMD-PORT Description Use it to turn on/off the T.O.T (TUIF over TCP/IP) async type status communication port. Turns on/off the inquiry/response (sync) type status communication port for TUF over TCP/IP. settings 0: off (default); 1: on For service NAVI, set the value as '1' when connecting the PC and main body by crossing cable. MEMO: T.O.T (TUIF over TCP/IP) Communication protocol between embedded application presentation (UI) and applications within the device including COPY/ SEND/BOX etc., (Canon original protocol) MODELSZ2 Use it to make global support settings for copyboard original size detection. Settings 0: normal (Detection size for each destination) (default) ; 1: Inch/AB mix detection - This is for individual user, not used normally. - For different-sized originals detection (Inch/AB-configuration), original size sensor is required. SZDT-SW Use it to switch between means of copyboard original size detection (CCD -> photosensor). settings 0: Size detection by CCD (Default) ; 1: Size detection by photo sensor - This is for individual user (glare protection), not used normally. - When the value is set as '1', original size detection at open/close of the pressure plate is not performed. For detection of the original size (without lightning the scanning lamp), original size sensor (photo sensor) is required. NS-CMD5 Use it to set restrictions on the use of CRAM-MD5 authentication for SMTP authentication. settings 0: depend on SMTP server (default); 1: disable NS-GSAPI Use it to set restrictions on the use of GSSAPI authentication on SMTP authentication. settings 0: depend on SMTP server (default); 1: disable NS-NTLM Use it to set restrictions on the use of NTLM authentication for SMTP authentication. settings 0: depend on SMTP server (default); 1: disable NS-PLNWS Use it to set restrictions on the use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication for SMTP authentication. Use it to set restrictions on the use of PLAIN/LOGIN (plain text authentication for SMTP authentication) in an environment in which communication packets are encrypted. settings 0: depend on SMTP server (default); 1: disable NS-PLN Use it to set restrictions on PLAIN/LOGIN authentication (plain text authentication) for SMTP authentication. Use it to set restrictions on the use of PLAIN/LOGIN (plain text authentication for SMTP authentication) in an environment in which communication packets are not encrypted. 0: depend on SMTP server (default); 1: disable NS-LGN Use it to set restrictions on the use of LOGIN authentication for SMTP authentication. settings 0: depend on SMTP server (default); 1: disable MEAP-PN Use it to change the HTTP port number for MEAP applications. settings 0 to 65535 (default: 8000) SPECK-SW * Use it to switch between the timing of white plate dust detection. This is used at the occurrence of image line due to floating dust. Settings 0: normal timing (default) ; 1: for each job When setting the value as '1', first copy time (FCOT) gets longer. SVMD-ENT Use it to switch between methods of starting service mode. settings 0: user mode key -> 2 and 8 at same time -> user mode key (default) 1: user mode key -> 4 and 9 at same time -> user mode key DA-CNCT Use it to set WPGW(Workplace Gateway) connection. settings 0: off (default); 1: on MEMO: This is used only inside Japan, not outside Japan. CHNG-STS Use it to set the T.O.T (TUIF over TCP/IP) status connection port number. Changes the port number for status connection in a TUIF over TCP/IP environment. This is used for changing the port No. in service NAVI. settings 1 to 65535 (default: 20010) MEMO: T.O.T (TUIF over TCP/IP) Communication protocol between embedded application presentation (UI) and applications within the device including COPY/ SEND/BOX etc., (Canon original protocol) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Level

17-73

Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: up graded version Sub item CHNG-CMD Description Use it to set the T.O.T (TUIF over TCP/IP) command connection port number. Use it to set the port number for the command connection in an TUIF over TCP/IP environment. This is used for changing the port No. in service NAVI. settings 1 to 65535 (default: 20000) MEMO: T.O.T (TUIF over TCP/IP) Communication protocol between embedded application presentation (UI) and applications within the device including COPY/ SEND/BOX etc., (Canon original protocol) MEAP-DSP Use it to prohibit a switch-over from the MEAP screen to the standard screen (COPY/SEND/BOX screen etc.,). settings 0: off (shift to standard screen; default); 1: on (do not shift to atandard screen) MEMO: Although setting the value as '1' in COPIER > OPTION > BODY > MEAP-DSP, at the occurrence of error/jam/alarm, the display transits to the standard screen for showing a warning. ANIM-SW Use it to prohibit display of the Error/Jam screen while a MEAP application is in operation. Although setting the value as '1' in COPIER > OPTION > BODY > MEAP-DSP, at the occurrence of error/jam/alarm, the display transits to the standard screen for showing a warning. When setting this value as '1', at the occurrence of error/jam/alarm, - Display transition to the standard screen is prohibited. - Warning is displayed on the MEAP screen to urge the user to contact servicing. settings 0: off (display warning screen; default); 1: on (do not display warning screen) MEAP-SSL Use it to set the HTTPS port for MEAP. settings 0 to 65535 (default: 8443) KSIZE-SW Use it to support Chinese paper (K size). settings 0: do not support (default); 1: support LPD-PORT Use it to set the LPD port number. settings 1 to 65535 (default: 515) DFDST-L3 * Use it to adjust the dust detection level when the ADF is in use (sheet-to-sheet correction; large-size paper). A higher setting will make the mechanism more sensitive, detecting finer particles of dust. settings: 0 to 255 (default: 160) DFDST-L4 * Use it to adjust the dust detection level when the ADF is in use (post-job detection; large-size paper) A higher setting will make the mechanism more sensitive, detecting finer particles of dust. settings: 0 to 255 (default: 160) ORG-A4R Use it to set a special paper size not recognized when the ADF is in use. With machines for INCH/AB configuration, image formation is executed correctly by setting the size of the special paper that fails to be recognized at original pickup from the ADF. Settings 0: A4R (default) 1: FOLIO-R When detecting the A4R original in the ADF, it converts to the original size that was set in this item to execute image formation using the original size after conversion. ORG-FLSC * Use it to set a specific paper size not recognized when the ADF is in use. With machines for INCH/AB configuration, image formation is executed correctly by setting the size of the special paper that fails to be recognized at original pickup from the ADF. settings 0: Foolscap-R (default); 1: Officio-R; 2: Folio-R; 3: Australian Foolscap-R; 4; Ecuadorian Officio-R; 5; Argentine Officio-R; 7: Argentine Legal-R; 8: Government Legal-R; 10: Mexican Officio-R When detecting the FOOLSCAP size in the ADF, it converts to the original size that was set in this item to execute image formation using the original size after conversion PDF-RDCT Use it to enable/disable reduction for transmission (PDF transmission). Use it to enable/disable reduction of images received in fax mode (by converting into PDF for e-mail or file transmission). settings 0: do not reduced for transmission (default); 1: reduce for transmission REBOOTSW enables/disables the rebooting mechanism in conjunction with E240 settings: 0: reboot (default); 1: do not reboot Do not use for servicing. UI-PRINT *** Set whether or not to display the print job screen in the control panel. This is a switch to set whether or not to display the print job screen in the control panel. This is a specification for a user who does not desire to display the screen in the control panel. Setting range 0: Do not display the print job screen. 1: Display the print job screen. Standard value 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Level

17-74

Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: up graded version Sub item WUEV-SW *** Description Set whether or not to provide a notice of the sleep mode operation. Set whether or not to provide a notice of the sleep mode operation to the DS application on network when the copier main unit entered the sleep mode or recovered from the sleep mode. Setting range 0: Provide a notice. 1: Do not provide a notice. Standard value 0 Set the interval to provide a notice of the sleep mode operation. Setting range 60 to 65535 Standard value 600 Set a port number for the destination to provide a notice of the sleep mode operation. Setting range 1 to 65535 Standard value 11427 Set a range to provide a notice of the sleep mode operation. Set the number of routers that can be used for a notice of the sleep mode operation. Setting range 0 to 254 Standard value 3 Switch the number of reserved jobs for secure print jobs. Switch the number of reserved jobs for secure print jobs to 50 or 90. Setting range 0: 50 1: 90 Standard value 0 Set whether or not to display the remote scan screen in the control panel. This mode is used to set whether or not to display the remote scan screen in the control panel. This is a specification for a user who does not desire to display the screen in the control panel. Setting range 0: Do not display the screen. 1: Display the screen. Standard value 1 Set whether or not to display the expansion printing screen in the control panel. This mode is used to set whether or not to display the expansion printing screen (EFI print screen) in the control panel. This is a specification for a user who does not desire to display the screen in the control panel. Setting range 0: Do not display the screen. 1: Display the screen. Standard value 1 Set whether or not to display the Web browser screen in the control panel. This mode is used to set whether or not to display the Web browser screen in the control panel. This is a specification for a user who does not desire to display the screen in the control panel. Setting range 0: Do not display the screen. 1: Display the screen. Standard value 1 Restriction of displaying the Hold Job screen on the control panel Set whether or not to display the Hold Job screen on the control panel. (This is provided for users who want to hide the screen on the control panel.) Setting value 0: Do not display the screen. 1: Display the screen. [Factory setting value / Value after execution of RAM clear: 1] 2 2 2 Level

WUEV-INT ***

WUEV-POT ***

WUEV-RTR ***

SJB-UNW ***

UI-RSCAN ***

UI-EPRNT ***

UI-WEB ***

UI-HOLD ***

17-75

Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: up graded version Sub item WEBV-SW *** Set whether or not to use the WEBDAV function. When 1 (ON) is set to this mode, the WEBDAV function is unavailable. (WEBDAV related information disappears from the following items. - User mode -> Setting of destination list specifications -> Registration of destinations -> File -> "WEBDAV" in the protocol - User mode -> "Use the chunk split transmission for WEBDAV transmission" in the setting of specifications for transmission [Reference] The WEBDAV function is installed in the main unit as standards, but there are cases when this function is not used in order to reduce the memory usage. Setting range: 0: Use the WEBDAV function. 1: Do not use the WEBDAV function. Factory setting value: 0 When changing into "1", it takes 1 to 2 minutes before the display of WEBDAV is off. After that, return to user mode, check to see that the display of WEBDAV in the above user mode is off and then turn off the power. If turning off the power before the display of WEBDAV is off, the display of WEBDAV is not off by turning on the power again. Set the number of cards available. Set the number of cards available when using a card reader. Setting range 1 to 1000 Standard value 1000 Set the activation interval after a sleep notice was provided from network. Set the interval from when sleep activation was performed to the copier main unit from network without sending a job to when the machine enters the sleep mode next. Setting range 10 to 600 Standard value 15 DHCP-Option 12 request ON/OFF selector switch This uses DHCP option 55 to enable host name (option 12) inquiries when the DHCP-12 switch is set to ON. It is used to prevent option 12 and option 81 from being included in DHCP packets in conditions where the packets passing over the network are being monitored. (Supported through separate business negotiations, etc.) { DHCP = Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol } Settings 0: OFF 1: ON [Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 1] DHCP-option 81 request ON/OFF selector switch When the DHCP-81 switch is set to ON and the user mode dynamic DNS setting is ON, this enables dynamic changes in the IP address using DHCP option 81. It is used to prevent option 12 and option 81 from being included in DHCP packets in conditions where the packets passing over the network are being monitored. (Supported through separate business negotiations, etc.) Settings 0: OFF 1: ON [Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 1] Enable switch for paper brand Type 3 import/export To enable the paper brand Type 3 information to be handled by the following functions: - Import/export using remote UI - Distribution of equipment information - Import/export from iWEMC 0: Not enabled 1: Enabled (Default: 0) Changing the task priority of MEAP The task priority of MEAP increased when this mode is on. 0: OFF 1: ON Default: 1 Use this mode when increasing the MEAP performance. - Enable to logout even during the process of PDL job. - Display the VxWorks task list from the Console menu, and check the task priority of JVM. 2 Description Level

CARD-RNG ***

WUEN-LIV ***

DHCP-12 ***

DHCP-81 ***

PT3-INEX ***

MEAP-PRI ***

17-76

Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > BODY *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: up graded version Sub item PDLEVCT1 *** PDL continuous job event decimation To increase the speed of the PDL continuous jobs, install a decimation function for the events to be sent to PDL-PIPIT on the CPCA. The UI display has some mismatch regarding event processing, therefore it shall be allowed for the service technician to turn off the Event Decimation function with Service Switch. This item displays the CPCA event to be decimated and the Status. Setting range 0: No event decimation 1: Decimates job status change/job list change. Status of interaction/executing/complete are excluded. 2: Decimates job status change/job list change. Status of interaction is excluded. [Value of factory shipping/default: 0] Use when there occurs a complaint of the UI display. Description Level

<USER>
COPIER > OPTION > USER *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: up graded version Sub item COPY-LIM Use it to change the upper limit for the number of copies. settings 1 to 9999 prints (default: 9999) SLEEP Use it to enable/disable the sleep function. settings 0: off; 1: on (default) The sleep function depends on the timer set in user mode. WEB-DISP Use it to enable/disable the indication of a fixing web length warning message. settings 0: off (do not indicate warning; default); 1: on (indicate warning) If set to '0', the message will be limited to the service mode screen. W-TONER Use it to turn off/on the waste toner case full message. settings 0: off (do not indicate message; default); 1: on (indicate message) If set to '0', the warning message will be limited to the service mode screen. COUNTER1 Use it to set soft counter 1 for the counter status verification screen. settings 101: total 1 (fixed) COUNTER2 to COUNTER6 CONTROL Use it to set soft counters 2 through 6 for the counter status verification screen. settings 0 to 999 For a list of settings, see the "Soft Counter Specifications" found later. enables/disables the charging mechanism (PDL job) When connecting with the account-managing device (e.g., coin vendor, non-Canon control card), it switches over the count pulse (on/ off) in the account-managing device. settings 0: do not restrict (default); 1: restrict When charging against PDL prints, set '1'. B4-L-CNT For soft counters 1 through 6, use it to specify whether B4 should be counted as large-size or small-size. settings 0: small size (default); 1: large size COPY-JOB Use it to prohibit reservation of a copy job when a card reader/coin vender is in use. settings 0: enable reservation (default); 1: disable reservation TAB-ROT Use it to enable/disable rotation of images by 180 deg for PDL printing (if tab paper is used for landscape orientation). settings 0: do not rotate (default); 1: rotate PR-PSESW Use it to enable/disable display of the print pause function switch. settings 0: do not display (default); 1: display IDPRN-SW Use it to switch between job types that initiate increases in group counters. settings 0: for print category, Box Print, Report Print, End Local Print, PDL Print for copy category, Copy (default) 1: for print category, Report Print, Send Local Print, PDL Print for copy category, Copy, Box Print 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Level

17-77

Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > USER *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: up graded version Sub item CNT-SW Description Use it to switch between charge counter default indication items. settings 0: 101 (total 1; default) 1: 102 (total 2), 202 (copy total 2), 127 (total A2) 2: 101 (total 1), 104 (total small), 103 (total large), 501 (scan total 1) TAB-ACC Use it to enable/disable auto cassette switchover in response to the absence of tab paper (index paper). settings 0: do not switch between cassettes (default); 1: switch between cassettes BCNT-AST Use it to switch between job types that initiate an increase in the box print count for the NE controller. settings 0: count as PDL job (default); 1: count as copy job DOC-REM * Use it to enable/disable the indication of the Remove Original message. Normally, when an original is placed in the ADF and the Start button is pressed without opening and then closing the copyboard cover after an original has been read from the copyboard, the machine will indicate a message asking for the removal of the original. Use it to enable/disable the indication of the message. settings 0: do not indicate (default); 1: indicate TRAY-SEL Use it to select the delivery tray. (finisher) Use it to select the target of delivery for the following: multiple originals, copy count at 1, sort selected, special tray A and B. settings 0: use sample tray (default); 1: use tray B LDAP-SW Use it to switch cover search conditions for the LDAP server. settings 0: 'includes next'; 1: 'does not include next'; 2: 'is identical to'; 3: 'is not identical to'; 4: 'begins with' (default); 5: 'ends with' FROM-OF Use it to enable/disable the deletion of 'from address' for mail transmissions. settings 0: do not delete (default); 1: delete SPEAKER Use it to enable/disable display of the speaker/headset switch for additional functions mode. Enables/disables display of the speaker/headset switch for user mode. settings 0: do not display (default); 1: display FILE-OF Use it to enable/disable transmission to a file address. Enables/disables transmission to a file address by prohibiting input of a file address from the address book. settings 0: do not prohibit (default); 1: prohibit If a file address has already been registered, the address may be used even after selecting '1'; be sure to remove it manually. MAIL-OF Use it to enable/disable transmission to an e-mail address. Enables/disables transmission to an e-mail address by prohibiting input of an e-mail address from the address book. settings 0: do not prohibit (default); 1: prohibit If an e-mail address has already been registered, the address may be used even after selecting '1'; be sure to remove it manually. IFAX-OF Use it to enable/disable transmission to an i-fax address. Enables/disables transmission to an i-fax address by prohibiting input of an i-fax address from the address book. settings 0: do not prohibit (default); 1: prohibit If an i-fax address has already been registered, the address may be used even after '1' has been selected; be sure to delete it manually. LDAP-DEF Use it to change the LDAP server search condition default settings. Use it to change the default conditions for the search attributes specified at time of making an LDAP server detail search. settings 0: 'name' 'default'; 1: 'e-mail'; 2: 'fax'; 3: 'group'; 4; 'group unit'; 5; user setting 1; 6: user setting 2 ENCR-SW Use it to enable/disable the HDD encryption function. Enables/disables the encryption function when the security expansion kit (encryption) and the iR security kit (HDD deletion) are used in combination. Performance improves compared to at parallel usage, but the security level decreases. 0: do no use encryption; 1: use encryption (default) ATCT-ADD *** Auto clear time additional SW This function is to set the auto clear time(or auto-offline transfer time that correspounds with auto clear time) to less than 1 min. Auto clear time additional SW This function allows to set the auto clear time to 10sec, 20sec, 30sec, 40sec, 50sec. (Conventionally, 1 to 9 min) This function is to set the auto clear time(or auto-offline transfer time that correspounds with auto clear time) to less than 1 min. Setting range 0: Without addition 1: With addition (10sec, 20sec, 30sec, 40sec, 50sec additions) Remarks When this SW is activated, there is no message of [Numeric key is also available for entering (0min=none/1 to 9 min)] at the auto clear setting screen in user mode. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Level

17-78

Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > USER *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: up graded version Sub item HDCR-DSW *** Description Selection of whether to display 'all HDD data clear ON/OFF' item in user mode To select whether to display the 'all HDD data clear ON/OFF' item in the user mode. This mode takes effect only when the all HDD data clear function (licensed) is activated. When the user asks for the item to be provided. 0: The item is not displayed.[default] 1: The item is displayed. Not for use Not for use Use it to enable/disable the original size detection function. The machine is designed so that the scanning lamp goes on for detection of the size of the original when the copyboard cover is opened and then closed; if the user finds its light to be too intense, set it to '0'. settings 0: off; 1: on (default) DATE-DSP Use it to switch between date notations. settings 0: YYMM/DD; 1: DD/MM/YY; 2: MM/DD/YY MB-CCV Use it to set restrictions on the individuals permitted the use of mail box control card. settings 0: do not restrict (default); 1: restrict PR-D-SEL Use it to set the density for printing (PDL input). settings 0: (light) <->4 (standard; default) <-> 8 (dark) TRY-STP Use it to set the output interrupt mode used in response to a tray full condition. settings 0: normal mode (suspend when finisher tray becomes full; default); 1: suspend in relation to height MF-LG-ST Use it to set extra length mode key. settings 0: normal (default); 1: indicate extra length key on supported mode screen SPECK-DP Use it to enable/disable display of a warning message in response to the result of dust detection for stream reading. settings 0: do not indicate; 1: indicate (default) CNT-DISP Use it to enable/disable the indication of a serial number in response to a press on the counter check mode. settings 0: indicate (default); 1: do not indicate PH-D-SEL Use it to specify the number of lines for photo mode copy. settings 0: 141 lines (default); 1: 134 lines If setting '1', the degree of half-tone unevenness decreases despite of lower resolution. MEMO: -Effective only at copying (ineffective at printing) -This item is not used at normal servicing. OP-SZ-DT Use it to enable/disable the original size detection function in reference to the opening of the copyboard cover. The machine may be set so that it detects the size of an original with the copyboard cover open (e.g., for a book). settings 0: off (default); 1: on If set to '1', the machine executes original size detection in response to a press on the Start key. NW-SCAN Use it to enable/disable the network scan function. settings 0: do not permit; 1: permit This choice is not available on a Japanese model. For a non-Japanese PS/PCL model, the settings is fixed to '1'. INS-C/S Use it to expand the inserter function.(Only the inserter for the finisher) settings 0: support only cover (default); 1: support multi-inserter (cover + interleaf) MEMO: - This item is only available to the inserter for the finisher. (The inserter for the perfect binder always support the multi inserter (cover + insert papers). - This item is available both at copying and at printing. TBIC-RNK Use it to enable/disable halftone uneven density reduction mode. By changing the degree of dot distribution, the half-tone pitch unevenness at copying is lightened. When setting the value bigger, the dots are concentrated and the degree of half-tone pitch unevenness is lightened. settings 1 to 5 (default: 2) Take care not to set the value small because the dots are diversified and the degree of half-tone pitch unevenness is increased if setting the value smaller. MEMO: This item is not used in normal servicing. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 Level

PB-MAX-N *** PB-MAX-T *** SIZE-DET

1 1

17-79

Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > USER *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: up graded version Sub item HDCR-DSP Use it to switch between HDD deletion modes. settings 1: once using 0s (default); 2: once using random data; 3: 3 times using random data MEMO: function for HDD initialization This is the function to clear the data on HDD completely by overwriting the 0 (null) data and random data to file data area at the moment of deleting files logically (timing for deleting the administrative information data) in HDD. BCK-CVR Use it to enable/disable the back cover function. settings 0: off (default) ; 1: on Effective at attaching cover inserter. JOB-INVL Use it to set job intervals for an interrupt. settings 0: continue with next job immediately for interrupt (default) 1: start next job after delivery of last sheet of interrupt 2: start next job after last sheet of all jobs LGSW-DSP Use it to enable/disable display of 'enable/disable log indication' for Additional Functions Mode. settings 0: do not display (default); 1: display PCL-COPY Binder control mode for COPIES command of PCL This is the mode to unite the operations because the way to control the COPIES command of PCL is different between the Canon PCL and the non-Canon PCL. settings 0: [default] to control by page according to the value of COPIES command specified at each page. 1: It regards the value of COPIES command specified at page-1 as the number of bind, and invalid the value of COPIES command of the following page and after (only at sort mode. in the case of non-sort mode, it will be the same control as at '0' setting). 2 through 65535: backup '0' is for control method with Canon. By setting '1', it will be the same control method with non-Canon PCL. PRJOB-CP Setting for count pulse (on/off) at receipt print/report print. When using account-managing device (e.g., coin vendor, non-Canon control card), it switches over (on/off) the count pulse notice for every page at receipt print/report print. settings 0: do not generate count pulse (default); 1: generate count pulse DPT-ID-7 Use it to enable/disable group ID registration and 7-character authentication input. settings 0: normal (default); 1: 7-cahrceter input RUI-RJT Use it to cut the HTTP port in response to 3 attempts at illegal authentication from a remote UI. settings 0: disable (default); 1: enable CTM-S06 Use it to enable/disable deletion of the password from an export file with a file transmission address. settings 0: do no delete (default); 1: delete When setting '1', in the case of exporting the address book data from remote UI, the password of file server is hidden from the exported file (to avoid leakage of information). FREG-SW Switching over of display/nondisplay for free register area of MEAP counter (for SEND) settings 0: do not display (default); 1: display MEMO: - This is not used at normal servicing because it is for trouble analysis. - Obey the instruction by the quality support section for usage. IFAX-SZL Use it to set restrictions on transmission sizes for i-fax transmission. settings 0: set restrictions; 1: do not set restrictions (only if not through server; default) In the case of setting '0', - as for upper limit value, set it in transmission data size by selecting the following: additional functions mode>System Settings>Communications Settings>E-mail/I-Fax Settings>Maximum Data Size For Setting - if sending data that the size exceeds the upper limit value, it will be #830 error. IFAX-PGD Use it to enable/disable page division for transmission in i-fax simple mode (when the data exceeds the upper limit for transmission size). settings 0: do not permit (default); 1: permit MEAPSAFE Use it to switch to MEAP safe mode. settings 0: normal mode (default); 1: safe mode Safe mode works to stop the added MEAP application, and to startup the only system application that was activated at initial state to start up the system safely. Set '1' to startup in safe mode in the case of system recovery processing when MEAP platform does not startup normally because of resource competition among MEAP applications, or the order to register/use the service. "MPSF" is indicated in the control panel screen when in safe mode. TRAY-FLL Use it to set the notification mechanism used in response to a tray full condition. settings 0: issue when all available trays are full 1: when special trays are full 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Description Level

17-80

Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > USER *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: up graded version Sub item PRNT-POS Description Use it to specify whether or not to suspend subsequent jobs when the ongoing job is cancelled in the presence of an error. Enables/disables suspension of subsequent jobs when a job cancel (e.g., #037) has occurred because of an error (other than a service call) during PDL printing. settings 0: do not suspend; 1: suspend AFN-PSWD Use it to set restrictions on access in additinal functions mode. settings 0: off (shift to user mode scan without requiring password; default) 1: on (shift to user mode scan after password match) PTJAM-RC Use it to set the PDL jam recovery switch. settings 0: off (do not execute recovery); 1: on (execute recovery; default) SLP-SLCT Use it to set the switch designed to switch between existing network-based applications. A certain packet needs to be received as a condition for the machine to recover from sleep mode via network. Because the existing network system applications (e.g., Net Spot Accountant, image WARE) do not send such packet, the machine fails to recover via network if it's shifted to sleep mode 3. When setting '1', the machine able to recover from sleep mode via network because it does not shift to sleep mode 3 (1wsleep), resulting the trade-off with the increase of consuming electricity. settings 0: do not use (default); 1: use MEMO: This is not used at normal servicing. PDL-NCSW *** PDL print job card control mode setting To place the PDL print jobs under the control of the card reader. When the user asks for the item to be provided 0: PDL printing is performed regardless of whether a card is inserted. [default] 1: PDL printing is not performed when a card has not been inserted or the department ID does not match; PDL printing is performed when a card has been inserted and when the department ID matches. Selecting compatibility mode when using PS (image processing, print specification) This is the mode to simulate REPLACE to hold compatibility for image processing and print specification. settings 0: no use of PS compatibility mode (default) 1: image processing equivalent of iR2220/2800/3300 series (compatibility with existing machines) 2: image processing equivalent of iR105 (compatibility with existing machine) 3: backup 4: landscape image and portrait image can be duplexed printing using Canon controller. This is the compatible mode with non-Canon controller. 5 through 65535: backup When the setting value is '1', the output will be equivalent to that of iR2200 / 2800 / 3300 series. Whereas when the setting value is '2', the output will be equivalent to that of iR105 series. 2 2 2 2 Level

PS-MODE

CNCT-RLZ

Use it to enable/disable the connection serialization function. Connection serialize function works to secure job grouping function of imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition V1.0. Because MFP (such as iR machine) is able to gain multiple connections, the job grouping function is secured by setting not to receive multiple connections at host machine side. If setting '1', it is able to avoid rearrangement of jobs that the machine does not execute job reception by other connections until the job data reception of a certain connection completes. settings 0: off (default) ; 1: on MEMO: Connection - connection established among multiple hosts (e.g., PC) via network Job grouping function - imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition V1.0 to work not to let a job interruption from other PC by group job (sending multiple jobs for 1 session when sending jobs)

JA-JOB ***

Designates job archive jobs. When the job archive function is activated, the job archive operates when a job is run, in accordance with the job type designation. *The settings cannot be changed in service mode, but only referenced. Settings can only be made from a job archive-enabled MEAP programme. Setting values 0: None 3: FAX/IFAX only 0xFFFFFFFF: all jobs [Factory settings and after RAM clear: 0] Job archive restriction settings When the job archive function is activated, spec. restrictions are applied against those functions for what spec. restrictions are set. *The settings cannot be changed in service mode, but only referenced. Settings can only be made from a job archive-enabled MEAP programme. Setting values 0, 1 32 spec. restrictions by bit setting. Bit0: Image file acquisition function (0: OFF, 1: ON) Bit1: Form registration merge function (0: OFF, 1: ON) Bit2: Document edit function (0: OFF, 1: ON)

JA-RESTR ***

17-81

Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > USER *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: up graded version Sub item DOM-ADD Description Use it to set the transmission target domain input complementary switch for mail transmission. Use it to enable/disable combination of the address entered for transmission with a domain (e.g., @xxx.co.jp) set in user mode. settings 0: do not combine (default); 1: combine <when sending mail to aaaa@xxxx.co.jp> 1) Set 'xxxx.co.jp' in the domain in user mode; then, set '1' for the item. 2) At time of transmission, type 'aaaa' so that the address will read 'aaaa@xxxx.co.jp'. FREE-DSP *** Charging/non-charging indication switch When a vendor does not have a hardware switch that changes charging/non-charging indication, a software switch is needed. If such is a case, this mode can be used whether to display the software switch. 0: not display (default) 1: display Set the timing of complete deletion of processing data. Select the timing to execute complete deletion using the security kit. When complete deletion is executed, performance of job processing may decrease depending on the data. This occurs because processed page data is deleted during job processing and much load is applied to the processing to access the CPU or HDD. When this processing is performed after job processing is completed, job processing capability can be improved. Setting range: 0, 1 (0: Delete data during job processing. 1: Delete data after job processing is completed.) Factory setting value: 0 SNMP access restriction switch for internal community name (administrative privilege) Restrict the SNMP access regarding the internally obtained community name (administrative privilege). Setting range 0: OFF 1: ON (Read only) 2: ON (Read/Write available) [default] Usually the SNMP community name can be set using the following item; [Additional Functions]>[System Settings]>[Network Settings]>[SNMP Settings]. There is an internal community name (administrative privilege) in addition to the community name that is set in the above item, and it is used at the time of access using the Canon utility software such as NetSpot. In the case that the SNMP access using an internal community name needs to be restricted in view of security, set this item to "0" or "1". SNMP access restriction switch for internal community name (user privilege) Restrict the SNMP access regarding the internally obtained community name (user privilege). Setting range 0: OFF 1: ON (Read only) 2: ON (Read/Write available) [default] Usually the SNMP community name can be set using the following item; [Additional Functions]>[System Settings]>[Network Settings]>[SNMP Settings]. There is an internal community name (user privilege) in addition to the community name that is set in the above item, and it is used at the time of access using the Canon utility software such as NetSpot. In the case that the SNMP access using an internal community name needs to be restricted in view of security, set this item to "0" or "1". 2 Level

CLR-TIM ***

SNMP-COA ***

SNMP-COU ***

<CST>
T-17-49 COPIER > OPTION > CST Sub item P-SZ-C1/C2 settings 6: A4 (default); 15: B5; 18: LTR U1-NAME to U4-NAME Use it to enable/disable indication of the paper name when paper of a particular size group (U1 through U4) is detected. settings 0: indicate 'U1, U2, U3, U4' on touch panel (default) 1: indicate paper name set in service mode (CST-UI, U2, USE, U4) Use it to specify the name of paper used in a paper size group (U1). When any of the following special size papers is set for U1, the paper may be used as a special size paper for U1 (universal cassette). settings 22: K-LGL; 31: Government LETTER (default) CST-U2 Use it to specify the name of paper used in a paper size group (U2). When any of the following special size papers is set for U2, the paper may be used as a special size paper for U2 (universal cassette). settings 24: Foolscap (default); 26: Officio; 27: Ecuadorian Officio; 33: Argentine Legal; 36: Argentina Officio; 37: Mexican Officio CST-U3 Use it to specify the name of paper in a paper size group (U3). When any of the special size papers is specified for U3, the paper may be used as a special size paper for U3 (universal cassette). settings 25: Australian Foolscap; 34: Government Legal (default); 35: Folio CST-U4 Use it to specify the image of paper used in a paper size group (U4). When any of the following special size papers is set for U4, the paper may be used as a special size paper for U4 (universal cassette). settings 18: LTR (default); 29: Argentine Letter 2 2 2 2 2 Description Use it to select the size of the paper used in the front deck (C1: right deck; C2: left deck). 1 Sub item

CST-U1

17-82

Chapter 17

<ACC>
T-17-50 COPIER > OPTION > ACC ***: up graded version Sub item COIN Use it to set the coin vendor mechanism. settings 0: coin vendor not used (default); 1: coin vendor used; 2: remote counter DK-P Use it to specify the size of the paper in the side paper deck (small). settings 0: A4 (default); 1: B5; 2: LTR PD-SIZE Use it to specify the size of the paper in the side paper deck (large). settings 0: as set in user mode (default); 22: Korean Government; 23: Korean Government-R; 24: Foolscap; 25: Australian Foolscap; 26: Officio; 27: Ecuadorian Officio; 28: Bolivian Officio; 29: Argentine Letter; 30: Argentine Letter-R; 31: Government Letter; 32: Government Letter-R; 33: Argentine Legal; 34: Government Legal; 35: Folio; 36; Argentine Officio; 37: Mexican Officio This mode item is indicated only when a large paper deck is connected. TRM-CTR Use it to enable/disable display of the message for replacement of the trimmer blade on the user screen settings 0: do not display (default); 1: display TRM-CTRH enabling/disabling display of the trimmer blade replacement message on the user screen settings 0: do not display (default); 1: display BND-CTR Hide/display the screen for perfect binder blade replacement on user screen Setting value 0: Hide [Default] 1: Display BND-CTRH Hide/display the screen for perfect binder blade holder replacement on user screen Setting value 0: Hide [Default] 1: Display MIN-PRC *** Coin manager minimum value setting This determines the minimum value handled by the coin manager which is connected. For instance, the service technician inputs "10" if the minimum value supported by the Japanese yen coin manager is 10 yen. This item takes effect only when 4 is set for ACC>COIN. Additional note When a number from 1 to 4 (Euros, pounds, Swiss francs, dollars) is set for COPIER>OPTION>ACC>UNIT-PRC, a fractional monetary unit can be input. For instance, an input of "50" signifies 50 cents ($0.50). Setting range: 0 to 9999 [Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 10] Coin manager maximum value setting This determines the maximum value handled by the coin manager which is connected. An error screen is displayed if a value lower than the smallest unit is input when inputting the charge amount using initial settings/registration. For instance, the service technician inputs "8900" if the maximum value supported by the Japanese yen coin manager is 8900 yen. This item takes effect only when 4 is set for ACC>COIN. Additional note When a number from 1 to 4 (Euros, pounds, Swiss francs, dollars) is set for COPIER>OPTION>ACC>UNIT-PRC, a fractional monetary unit can be input. For instance, an input of "50" signifies 50 cents ($0.50). Setting range: 0 to 9999 [Factory setting/value after clearing RAM: 8800] Use it to change the I/F support level for the control card (CC IV/CC V). settings 0: do not support (default); 1: support (priority on speed); 2: support (control by priority on upper limit) If set to '1', suspension of printing may not be accurate based on the upper limit owing to the priority given to the maintenance of performance of the printer engine. If set to '2', suspension of printing is possible based on the upper limit, but the printer engine performance may drop depending on which source of paper is selected. UNIT-PRC *** Unit price setting for coin vendors Sets unit price for coin vendors. Setting values 0: yen 1: euro 2: pound 3: Swiss franc 4: dollar [Factory settings and after RAM clear: 0] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Level

MAX-PRC ***

CC-SPSW

17-83

Chapter 17

<INT-FACE>
T-17-51 COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE Sub item IMG-CONT Use it to indicate the connection of a PS print server unit. settings 0: PS print server unit not connected (default); 1 to 3: not used; 4: PS print server unit connected AP-OPT Use it to enable/disable printing from a PS print server unit application (PrintME). settings 0: permit printing by specific account; 1: permit printing by all accounts (default); 2: do not permit printing (permit only specific group ID) AP-ACCNT Use it to set a group ID for printing (job) from a PS print server unit application (PrintMe). settings 0 to 9999999 (default: 0) AP-CODE Use it set the path for printing (CPCA) from a PS print server unit application (PrintMe). settings 0 to 9999999 (default: 0) NWCT-TM Use it to set the time-out length in a network environment. settings 1 to 5 (unit: min; default: 5) 2 2 2 2 1 Description Level

<LCNS-TR>
T-17-52 COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ***: up graded version Indication EX: ST-XXXX 1 <-( 0) [0 to 0] [1] [2] [1] status indication; 0: not installed (default); 1: installed [2] invalidation execution; 0: invalidation execution (accepts only 0) <Invalidation Transfer> 1) Select SET-XXXX, and type in '0'; then press the OK key. 2) See that TR-XXXX indicates a license number (24 characters) for transfer. Sub item ST-SEND TR-SEND ST-ENPDF TR-ENPDF ST-SPDF TR-SPDF ST-EXPDF TR-EXPDF ST-LIPS TR-LIPS ST-PDFDR TR-PDFDR ST-SCR TR-SCR ST-HDCLR TR-HDCLR ST-BRDIM TR-BRDIM ST-VNC TR-VNC ST-WEB TR-WEB ST-TRSND TR-TRSND ST-WTMRK TR-WTMRK ST-TSPDF *** TR-TSPDF *** Description for the SEND function in relation to transfer invalidation, indicates the installation status/executes transfer invalidation for the SEND function in relation to transfer invalidation, obtains a transfer license key for the SEND encryption PDF transmission function in relation to transfer invalidation, indicates installation status/executes transfer invalidation for the SEND encryption PDF transmission function in relation to transfer invalidation, obtains a transfer license for the SEND searchable PDF transmission function in relation to transfer invalidation, indicates installation status/executes transfer invalidation for the SEND searchable PDF transmission function in relation to transfer invalidation, obtains a transfer license key for the PDF expansion kit (encryption PDF + searchable PDF, compound function) in relation to transfer invalidation, indicates installation status/executes transfer invalidation for the PDF expansion kit (encryption PDF + searchable PDF, compound function) in relation to transfer invalidation, obtains a transfer license key for LIPS in relation to transfer invalidation, indicates installation status/executes transfer invalidation for LIPS in relation to transfer invalidation, obtains a transfer license key for PDF direct in relation to transfer invalidation, indicates installation status/executes transfer invalidation for PDF direct in relation to transfer invalidation, obtains a transfer license key for encryption secure print in relation to transfer invalidation, indicates installation status/executes transfer invalidation for encryption secure print in relation to transfer invalidation, obtains a transfer license key for HDD encryption/full deletion in relation to transfer invalidation, indicates invalidation status/executes transfer invalidation for HDD encryption/full deletion in relation to transfer invalidation, obtains a transfer license key for BarDIMM in relation to transfer invalidation, obtains a transfer license for BarDIMM in relation to transfer invalidation, obtains a transfer license key for VNC in relation to transfer invalidation, indicates installation status/executes transfer invalidation for VNC in relation to transfer invalidation, obtains a transfer license key for the Web browser in relation to transfer invalidation, indicates installation status/executes transfer invalidation for the Web browser in relation to transfer invalidation, obtains a transfer license key for the trial SEND function in relation to transfer invalidation, indicates installation status/executes transfer invalidation for the trial SEND function in relation to transfer invalidation, obtains a transfer license key for the background print function in relation to transfer invalidation, indicates installation status/executes transfer invalidation for the background print function in relation to transfer invalidation, obtains a transfer license key Displaying the installation state of the time stamp PDF transmission function upon the transfer invalidation Obtaining the transfer license key of the time stamp PDF transmission function upon the transfer invalidation Level 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

17-84

Chapter 17
COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR ***: up graded version Indication EX: ST-XXXX 1 <-( 0) [0 to 0] [1] [2] [1] status indication; 0: not installed (default); 1: installed [2] invalidation execution; 0: invalidation execution (accepts only 0) <Invalidation Transfer> 1) Select SET-XXXX, and type in '0'; then press the OK key. 2) See that TR-XXXX indicates a license number (24 characters) for transfer. Sub item ST-USPDF *** TR-USPDF *** ST-DVPDF *** TR-DVPDF *** ST-SCPDF *** TR-SCPDF *** ST-AMS *** TR-AMS *** ST-ERDS *** TR-ERDS *** ST-PS *** TR-PS *** ST-PCL *** TR-PCL *** ST-PSLI5 *** TR-PSLI5 *** ST-LIPS5 *** TR-LIPS5 *** ST-LIPS4 *** TR-LIPS4 *** ST-PSPCL *** TR-PSPCL *** ST-PCLUF *** TR-PCLUF *** ST-PSLIP *** TR-PSLIP *** ST-PSPCU *** TR-PSPCU *** ST-LXUFR *** TR-LXUFR *** ST-HDCR2 *** TR-HDCR2 *** Description Displaying the installation state of the digital user signature PDF transmission function upon the transfer invalidation Obtaining the transfer license key of the digital user signature PDF transmission function upon the transfer invalidation Displaying the installation state of the digital device signature PDF transmission function upon the transfer invalidation Obtaining the transfer license key of the digital device signature PDF transmission function upon the transfer invalidation Displaying the installation state of the scalable PDF transmission function upon the transfer invalidation Obtaining the transfer license key of the scalable PDF transmission function upon the transfer invalidation Displaying the installation state of the ACQ upon the transfer invalidation Obtaining the transfer license key of the ACQ upon the transfer invalidation Displaying the installation state of the E-RDS 3rd party advanced function upon the transfer invalidation Obtaining the transfer license key of the E-RDS 3rd party advanced function upon the transfer invalidation Displaying the installation state of the PS upon the transfer invalidation Obtaining the transfer license key of the PS function upon the transfer invalidation Displaying the installation state of the PCL function upon the transfer invalidation Obtaining the transfer license key of the PCL function upon the transfer invalidation Displaying the installation state of the PS / LIPS4 / LIPS LX (UFR II) upon the transfer invalidation Obtaining the transfer license key of the PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX (UFR II) upon the transfer invalidation Displaying the installation state of the LIPS LX (UFR II for outside Japan) and the LIPS4 upon the transfer invalidation Obtaining the transfer license key of the LIPS LX (UFR II for outside Japan) and the LIPS4 upon the transfer invalidation Displaying the installation state of the LIPS IV function upon the transfer invalidation Obtaining the transfer license key of the LIPS IV function upon the transfer invalidation Displaying the installation state of the PS/PCL function upon the transfer invalidation Obtaining the transfer license key of the PS/PCL function upon the transfer invalidation Displaying the installation state of the PCL/UFR function upon the transfer invalidation Obtaining the transfer license key of the PCL/UFR function upon the transfer invalidation Displaying the installation state of the PS and LIPS function upon the transfer invalidation Obtaining the transfer license key of the PS and LIPS function upon the transfer invalidation Displaying the installation state of the PS/PCL/UFR function upon the transfer invalidation Obtaining the transfer license key of the PS/PCL/UFR function upon the transfer invalidation Displaying the installation state of the LIPS LX (UFR II) function upon the transfer invalidation Obtaining the transfer license key of the LIPS LX (UFR II) function upon the transfer invalidation Displaying the installation state of the HDD erase function upon the transfer invalidation Obtaining the transfer license key of the HDD erase function upon the transfer invalidation Level 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

17-85

Chapter 17

<ACCPST-D>
T-17-53 COPIER > OPTION > ACCPST-D Sub item ACC1 to ACC8 Description Use it to set the order of connection of ARCNET accessories (delivery system). Sets the order of connection of delivery accessories connected to the ARCNET network, starting from the host machine moving upstream. Be sure to use the item at time of installation or when you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM; otherwise, the break in the ARCNET network between the host machine and accessories will prevent the use of accessories. <Procedure> 1) Of ACC1 through ACC8, select the item for which the name of the accessory in question is indicated. 2) Check to find out the position of the accessory with reference to the host machine, and type in the number indicating its order. 3) Press the OK key. 4) Turn off and then back on the host machine and the accessory in the correct sequence. settings 0 to 99 Level

Stacker Finisher
------------------------------------

01 00001001 02
00010001
-----------------------------------------

01 02
------

[1]

[2]
F-17-14

[3]

[1] Names of connected accessories [2] IDs of connected accessories (unique, 8-character) [3] Order of connection

17.6.1.2 Soft Counter Specifications

0011-6022

T-17-54 No. 101 102 103 104 105 106 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 total 1 total 2 total (large) total (small) total (full color 1) total (full color 2) total (black-and-white 1) total (black-and-white 2) total (mono color; large) total (mono color; small) total (black-and-white; large) total (black-and-white: small) total 1 (double-sided) total 2 (double-sided) large (double-sided) small (double-sided) total (mono color 1) total (mono color 2) total (full color; large) yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Counter description Support yes yes yes yes

17-86

Chapter 17
No. 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 total (full color; small) total (full color + mono color; large) total (full color + mono color; small) total (full color + mono color 2) total (full color + mono color 1) total A1 total A2 total A (large) total A (small) total A (full color 1) total A (full color 2) total A (black-and-white 1) total A (black-and-white 2) total A (mono color; large) total A (mono color; small) total A (black-and-white; large) total A (black-and-white; small) total A1 (double-sided) total A2 (double-sided) large A (double-sided) small A (double-sided) total A (mono color 1) total A (mono color 2) total A (full color; large) total A (full color; small) total A (full color + mono color; large) total A (full color + mono color; small) total A (full color + mono color 2) total A (full color + mono color 1) total B1 total B2 total B (large) total B (small) total B (full color 1) total B (full color 2) total B (black-and-white 1) total B (black-and-white 2) total B (mono color; large) total B (mono color; small) total B (black-and-white; large) total B (black-and-white; small) total B1 (double-sided) total B2 (double-sided) large B (double-sided) small B (double-sided) total B (mono color 1) total B (mono color 2) total B (full color; large) total B (full color; small) total B (full color + mono color; large) total B (full color + mono color; small) total B (full color + mono color 2) total B (full color + mono color 1) T-17-55 No. 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 copy (total 1) copy (total 2) copy (large) copy (small) copy A (total 1) copy A (total 2) copy A (large) copy A (small) local copy (total 1) local copy (total 2) Counter description Support yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Counter description Support

17-87

Chapter 17
No. 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 local copy (large) local copy (small) remote copy (total 1) remote copy (total 2) remote copy (large) remote copy (small) copy (full color 1) copy (full color 2) copy (mono color 1) copy (mono color 2) copy (black-and-white 1) copy (black-and-white 2) copy (full color; large) copy (full color; small) copy (mono color; large) copy (mono color; small) copy (black-and-white; large) copy (black-and-white; small) copy (full color + mono color; large) copy (full color + mono color; small) copy (full color + mono color; 2) copy (full color + mono color; 1) copy (full color; large; double-sided) copy (full color; small; double-sided) copy (mono color; large; double-sided) copy (mono color; small; double-sided) copy (black-and-white; large; double-sided) copy (black-and-white; small; double-sided) copy A (full color 1) copy A (full color 2) copy A (mono color 1) copy A (mono color 2) copy A (black-and-white 1) copy A (black-and-white 2) copy A (full color; large) copy A (full color; small) copy A (mono color; large) copy A (mono color; small) copy A (black-and-white; large) copy A (black-and-white; small) copy A (full color + mono color; large) copy A (full color + mono color; small) copy A (full color + mono color 2) copy A (full color + mono color 1) copy A (full color; large; double-sided) copy A (full color; small; double-sided) copy A (mono color; large; double-sided) copy A (mono color; small; double-sided) copy A (black-and-white; large; double-sided) copy A (black-and-white; small; double-sided) local copy (full color 1) local copy (full color 2) local copy (mono color 1) local copy (mono color 2) local copy (black-and-white 1) local copy (black-and-white 2) local copy (full color; large) local copy (full color; small) local copy (mono color; large) local copy (mono color; small) local copy (black-and-white; large) local copy (black-and-white; small) local copy (full color + mono color; large) local copy (full color + mono color; small) local copy (full color + mono color 2) local copy (full color + mono color 1) yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Counter description Support yes yes yes yes yes yes

17-88

Chapter 17
No. 289 290 291 292 293 294 Counter description local copy (full color; large; double-sided) local copy (full color; small; double-sided) local copy (mono color; large; double-sided) local copy (mono color; small; double-sided) local copy (black-and-white; large; double-sided) local copy (black-and-white; small; double-sided) T-17-56 No. 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 Counter description remote copy (full color 1) remote copy (full color 2) remote copy (mono color 1) remote copy (mono color 2) remote copy (black-and-white 1) remote copy (black-and-white 2) remote copy (full color; large) remove copy (full color; small) remote copy (mono color; large) remote copy (mono color; small) remote copy (black-and-white; large) remote copy (black-and-white; small) remote copy (full color + mono color; large) remote copy (full color + mono color; small) remote copy (full color + mono color 2) remote copy (full color + mono color 1) remote copy (full color; large; double-sided) remote copy (full color; small; double-sided) remote copy (mono color; large; double-sided) remote copy (mono color; small; double-sided) remote copy (black-and-white; large; double-sided) remote copy (black-and-white; small; double-sided) T-17-57 No. 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 print (total 1) print (total 2) print (large) print (small) print A (total 1) print A (total 2) print A (large) print A (small) print (full color 1) print (full color 2) print (mono color 1) print (mono color 2) print (black-and-white 1) print (black-and-white 2) print (full color; large) print (full color; small) print (mono color; large) print (mono color; small) print (black-and-white; large) print (black-and-white; small) print (full color + mono color; large) print (full color + mono color; small) print (full color + mono color; 2) print (full color + mono color; 1) print (full color; large; double-sided) print (full color; small; double-sided) print (mono color; large; double-sided) print (mono color; small; double-sided) print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) print (black-and-white; small; double-sided) PDL print (total 1) yes yes yes yes yes Counter description Support yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Support Support

17-89

Chapter 17
No. 332 333 334 335 336 339 340 341 342 345 346 351 352 355 356 PDL print (total 2) PDL print (large) PDL print (small) PDL print (full color 1) PDL print (full color 2) PDL print (black-and-white 1) PDL print (black-and-white 2) PDL print (full color; large) PDL print (full color; small) PDL print (black-and-white; large) PDL print (black-and-white; small) PDL print (full color; large; double-sided) PDL print (full color; small double-sided) PDL print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) PDL print (black-and-white; small; double-sided) T-17-58 No. 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 Counter description copy + print (full color; large) copy + print (full color; small) copy + print (black-and-white; large) copy + print (black-and-white; small) copy + print (black-and-white 2) copy + print (black-and-white 1) copy + print (full color + mono color; large) copy + print (full color + mono color; small) copy + print (full color + mono color; 2) copy + print (full color + mono color; 1) opy + print (large) copy + print (small) copy + print (2) copy + print (1) copy + print (mono color; large) copy + print (mono color; small) copy + print (full color; large; double-sided) copy + print (full color; small; double-sided) copy + print (mono color; large; double-sided) copy + print (mono color; small; double-sided) copy + print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) copy + print (black-and-white; small; double-sided) T-17-59 No. 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 scan (total 1) scan (total 2) scan (large) scan (small) black-and-white scan (total 1) black-and-white scan (total 2) black-and-white scan (large) black-and-white scan (small) color scan (total 1) color scan (total 2) color scan (large) color scan (small) T-17-60 No. 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 box print (total 1) box print (total 2) box print (large) box print (small) box print (full color 1) box print (full color 2) box print (mono color 1) Counter description Support yes yes yes yes Counter description Support yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Support yes yes yes yes Counter description Support yes yes yes

17-90

Chapter 17
No. 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 Counter description box print (mono color 2) box print (black-and-white 1) box print (black-and-white 2) box print (full color; large) box print (full color; small) box print (mono color; large) box print (mono color; small) box print (black-and-white; large) box print (black-and-white; small) box print (full color + mono color; large) box print (full color + mono color; small) box print (full color + mono color 2) box print (full color + mono color 1) box print (full color; large; double-sided) box print (full color; small; double-sided) box print (mono color; large; double-sided) box print (mono color; small; double-sided) box print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) box print (black-and-white; small; double-sided) T-17-61 No. 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 reception print (total 1) reception print (total 2) reception print (large) reception print (small) reception print (full color 1) reception print (full color 2) reception print (grayscale 1) reception print (grayscale 2) reception print (black-and-white 1) reception print (black-and-white 2) reception print (full color; large) reception print (full color; small) reception print (grayscale; large) reception print (grayscale; small) reception print (black-and-white; large) reception print (black-and-white; small) reception print (full color + grayscale; large) reception print (full color + grayscale; small) reception print (full color + grayscale 2) reception print (full color + grayscale 1) reception print (full color; large; double-sided) reception print (full color; small; double-sided) reception print (grayscale; large; double-sided) reception print (grayscale; small; double-sided) reception print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) reception print (black-and-white; small; double-sided) T-17-62 No. 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 report print (total 1) report print (total 2) report print (large) report print (small) report print (full color 1) report print (full color 2) report print (grayscale 1) report print (grayscale 2) report print (black-and-white 1) report print (black-and-white 2) report print (full color; large) report print (full color; small) report print (grayscale; large) report print (grayscale; small) yes yes Counter description Support yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Counter description Support yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Support

17-91

Chapter 17
No. 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 826 Counter description report print (black-and-white; large) report print (black-and-white; small) report print (full color + grayscale; large) report print (full color + ray scale; small) report print (full color + grayscale 2) report print (full color + grayscale 1) report print (full color; large; double-sided) report print (full color; small; double-sided) report print (grayscale; large; double-sided) report print (grayscale; small; double-sided) report print (black-and-white; large; double-sided) report print (black-and-white; small; double-sided) T-17-63 No. 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 Counter description copy scan total 1 (color) copy scan total 1 (black-and-white) copy scan total 2 (color) copy scan total 2 (black-and-white) copy scan total 3 (color) copy scan total 3 (black-and-white) copy scan total 4 (color) copy scan total 4 (black-and-white) local copy scan (color) local copy scan (black-and-white) remote copy scan (color) remote copy scan (black-and-white) transmission scan total 1 (color) transmission scan total 1 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 2 (color) transmission scan total 2 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 3 (color) transmission scan total 3 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 4 (color) transmission scan total 4 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 5 (color) transmission scan total 5 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 6 (color) transmission scan total 6 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 7 (color) transmission scan total 7 (black-and-white) transmission scan total 8 (color) transmission scan total 8 (black-and-white) universal transmission scan total (color) universal transmission scan total (black-and-white) box scan (color) box scan (black-and-white) remote san (color) remote scan (black-and-white) transmission scan /fax (color) transmission scan/fax (black-and-white) transmission scan/i-fax (color) transmission scan/i-fax (black-and-white) transmission scan/e-mail (color) transmission scan/e-mail (black-and-white) transmission scan/FTP (color) transmission scan/FTP (black-and-white) transmission scan/SMB (color) transmission scan/SMB (black-and-white) transmission scan/IPX (color) transmission scan/IPX (black-and-white) transmission scan/database (color) transmission scan/database (black-and-white) transmission scan/local print (color) transmission scan/local print (black-and-white) transmission scan/box (color) yes yes yes yes yes Support Support yes yes

17-92

Chapter 17
No. 958 Counter description transmission scan/box (black-and-white) Support

17.6.2 FEEDER 17.6.2.1 FEEDER Items

0011-6102

T-17-64 FEEDER > OPTION

*: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086).

Sub item DOC-F-SW *

Description Use it to enable/disable stream reading mode. settings 0: stream reading (default); 1: stream reading for small size only; 2: fixed reading

Level 1

SIZE-SW

Use it to enable/disable the mixed original detection mechanism (AB and inch). settings 0: on (disable detection; default); 1: off (enable detection) 1

SLW-SPRT *

Use it to decrease the separation speed for original pickup. settings 0: normal mode (default); 1: deceleration mode 1

LS-DBL **

Use it to enable/disable ADF high-speed duplexing mode. settings 0: on (high-speed duplexing mode; default); 1: off (low-speed duplexing mode) 1

STAMP-SW ** HS-DBL *

Use it to indicate the installation of a stamp. settings 0: stamp not installed; 1: stamp installed (default) Use it to enable/disable ADF high-speed reversal mode. settings 0: off (normal mode; default); 1: on (high-speed duplexing mode) If an increase in productivity is desired in ADF duplexing mode, set it to '1'. 1 1

17-93

Chapter 17

17.6.3 SORTER 17.6.3.1 SORTER Items

0018-2759

T-17-65 SORTER > OPTION ***: up graded version Sub item BLNK-SW Description Use it to set the margin width for the left and right sides of the crease when the saddle stitcher is used. settings 0: normal width (5 mm); 1: large width (10 mm); 2: no margin (default) MD-SPRTN Use it to enable/disable bare-minimum (regression) mode. settings 0: normal operation (default); 1: enable bare-minimum operation (no stapling, alignment) SDL-PRS Use it to specify saddle stitcher press operation. settings 0: enable pressing (one-way; default); 1: disable pressing; 2: enable pressing (both ways) BUFF-SW Use it to enable/disable buffer operation of the finisher. settings 0: enable buffer operation (fault); 1: disable buffer operation The use of paper with a low friction coefficient (e.g., coated paper) tends to cause displacement in the buffer assembly. If such is the case, set it to '1' (a drop in productivity, however, will be a trade-off). TRY-EJCT Use it to switch over delivery operation for the stack tray of the finisher. settings 0: normal operation (default); 1: delivery for thin paper The use of thin paper (i.e., paper with little body) can cause poor stacking. If such is the case, set it to '1'. PN-SKEW Use it to increase the accuracy of punch hole positioning (in the direction of horizontal registration). settings 0: normal mode (default); 1: hole position enhancement mode If an increase in the accuracy of punch hole positioning is desired when the puncher unit is in use, set it to '1'. standard: +/-1.0 mm -> +/-0.5 mm A trade-off will be a drop in productivity (100 -> about 80 ppm). CNTNS-PT STK-LMT Not for use 5K stacker stacking assembly, loading limit Setting value 0: No limit (Default) 1: 5000 sheet 2: 4000 sheet 3: 3000 sheet 4: 2000 sheet 5: 1000 sheet STK-LMT2 5K stacker stacking assembly, loading limit (At face up delivery) Setting value 0: No limit (Default) 1: 5000 sheet 2: 4000 sheet 3: 3000 sheet 4: 2000 sheet 5: 1000 sheet STK-MIX Stack assembly with paper size mix mode operation Setting value 0: Disable mix mode (default) 1: Enable mix mode MHPN-OHP Multiple-hole puncer unit OHP forcible paper feed mode Setting value 0: Disable (default) 1: Enable TBWRNLVL *** Number of blade replacement alarm setting Set the number of blade replacement alarm + direction adjustment: blade replacement alarm interval decreases - direction adjustment: blade replacement alarm interval increases Adjustment scale is 1000. Setting range 01 to 00 (10,000 to 100,000 cut) [Factory setting value/default setting: 04 (40,000 cut)] Use this to adjust the blade replacement alarm timing for each user. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Level

17-94

Chapter 17
SORTER > OPTION ***: up graded version Sub item TBPCOUNT *** Number of blade holder usage setting Set the number of blade holder usage setting + direction adjustment: Number of usage increases at each blade holder. Life of blade holder gets longer. - direction adjustment: Number of usage decreases at each blade holder. Life of blade holder gets shorter. Setting range 01 to 00 (100 to 1,000 times) [Factory setting value/default setting: 55 (550 times)] Blade holder position setting Set the blade holder trimming position. + direction adjustment: Blade holder moves to the new trimming position. Life of blade holder gets shorter. - direction adjustment: Blade holder moves to the used trimming position. Life of blade holder gets longer. However, trimming error may occur. Setting range 0 to 5 [Factory setting value/default setting: 0] Use this to change the trimming position when trimming failure occurs. TBP-MVSW *** Blade holder shift mode change setting Set the blade holder movement mode shift. 0: Use blade holder without head and tail /fore edge divided. 1: Use blade holder with head and tail /fore edge divided. Setting range 0 to 1 [Factory setting value/default setting: 1] Use this to change the blade holder usage with blade holder replacement simultaneously when cover sheet cuts occurs. CNTR-OUT Use it to set the delivery center position for the stacker. settings 0: disable center position delivery (default); 1: enable center position delivery This mode item is valid when a stacker is connected. 2 Description Level

TBP-POSW ***

17.6.4 BOARD 17.6.4.1 BOARD Items

0011-6132

T-17-66 BOARD > OPTION Sub item FONTDL settings 0: disable display (default); 1: enable display MENU-1 to MENU-4 Use it to enable/disable display of levels 1 thorough 4 for the printer setup menu. settings 0: disable display (default); 1: enable display 2 Description Use it to enable/disable display of the service setup screen for fonts listed by the PS kanji font downloader. 1 Level

17.7 TEST (Test Print Mode)

17.7.1 COPIER 17.7.1.1 COPIER Items
<PG>
T-17-67 COPIER > TEST > PG Sub item TYPE Use it to select a type of test print. <Procedure> 1) Select the item, and type in the number of the test print you want. 2) Press the Start key so that test printing starts. 3) When done, put back the value to '0'. settings: 0 to 50 0: image from CCD (normal print); 1: grid; 2: 17-gradation (error diffusion); 3: 17-gradation (dither screen); 4: blank; 5: halftone 80H (error diffusion); 6: halftone 80 H (dither screen); 7: solid black; 8: horizontal lines (space: 27 dots; line width: 40 dots); 9: horizontal lines (space: 50 dots; line width: 60 dots); 10: horizontal lines (space: 3 dots; line width: 2 dots); 11: halftone 60 H (error diffusion); 12: halftone 60 H (dither screen); 13: halftone 30 H (error diffusion); 14: halftone 30 H (dither screen); 31: 1200-dpi vertical lines (space: 21 dots; line width: 8 dots); 32: 1200-dpi horizontal lines (space: 21 dots; line width: 8 dots); 33: for check on displacement of image in main scanning direction TXPH Use it to set the image mode for test printing. settings: 0 to 4 0: text (default); 1: photo; 2: auto; 3: text/photo/map; 4: film print 1 Description Level 1
0011-6092

17-95

Chapter 17
COPIER > TEST > PG Sub item PG-PICK Use it to select the source of paper for test printing. settings: 1 to 8 1: right deck (default); 2: left deck; 3: cassette 3; 4: cassette 4; 5: side paper deck; 6: manual feeder tray; 7 to 8: not used; Description Level 1

2-SIDE

Use it to set the output mode for test printing. settings: 0: simplexing; 1: duplexing

PG-QTY

Use it to set a copy count for test printing. setting: 1 to 999 (default: 1)

<NETWORK>
T-17-68 COPIER > TEST > NETWORK ***: up graded version Sub item PING Use it to issue the PING command. Use it to check the connection between the machine and the network (TCP/IP only). Use it to check the connection to the network at time of installation or when suspecting a fault in the connection to the network. IPV6-ADR *** Destination address of PING (IPv6) Set the destination address of PING issued in "COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING-IP6". IPv6 address Hexadecimal characters (0-9, a-f) and separators (:)(.), 39 characters at maximum It should be a consistent character string as an address of IPv6. Usage PING is issued to check continuity in the network in the IPv6 environment. Set the destination address of IPv6 in this mode. Issue of PING to the specified IPv6 address Issue PING to the address specified from MFP to check continuity in the network in the IPv6 environment. 1 1 Description Level

PING-IP6 ***

17-96

Chapter 17

17.8 COUNTER (Counter Mode)

17.8.1 COPIER 17.8.1.1 COPIER Items
<TOTAL>
T-17-69 COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL Sub item SERVICE1 SERVICE2 COPY PDL-PRT FAX-PRT RMT-PRT BOX-PRT RPT-PRT 2-SIDE SCAN total counter 1 for service total counter 2 for service large size: increase by 2; small size: increase by 1 total copy counter PDL print counter A blank sheet will not be counted. The counter reading may be reset. fax reception printer counter A blank sheet will not be counted. The counter reading may be reset. remote print counter A blank sheet will not be counted. The counter reading may be reset. box print counter A blank sheet will not be counted. The counter reading may be reset. report print counter A blank sheet will not be counted. The counter reading may be reset. double-sided copy/printer counter A blank sheet will not be counted. The counter reading may be reset. scan counter A blank sheet will not be counted. The counter reading may be reset. Description Level 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0011-6289

<SCANNER>
T-17-70 COPIER > COUNTER > SCANNER Sub item SC-TTL SC-STRM SC-NRM scanner total scan counter ADF stream reading counter ADF fixed reading counter Description Level 1 1 1

<PICK-UP>
T-17-71 COPIER > COUNTER > PICK-UP Sub item C1 C2 C3/C4 MF DK 2-SIDE right deck pickup total counter left deck pickup total counter cassette 3/4 pickup total counter manual feeder tray pickup total counter side paper deck pickup total counter duplexing pickup total counter Description Level 1 1 1 1 1 1

<FEEDER>
T-17-72 COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER Sub item FEED L-FEED S-FEED TTL-MF DFOP-CNT ADF original pickup total counter large-size original ADF pickup total counter small-size original ADF pickup total counter ADF manual feeder pickup total counter ADF hinge operation (open/close) counter Description Level 1 1 1 1 1

17-97

Chapter 17

<JAM>
T-17-73 COPIER > COUNTER > JAM Sub item TOTAL FEEDER SORTER 2-SIDE MF C1 C2 C3/C4 DK total jam counter ADF total jam counter finisher total jam counter duplexing unit jam counter manual feeder pickup jam counter right deck pickup jam counter left deck pickup jam counter cassette 3/4 pickup jam counter side paper deck jam counter Description Level 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

<MISC>
T-17-74 COPIER > COUNTER > MISC ***: up graded version Sub item FIX-WEB WST-TNR R-PD-SEN L-PD-SEN C3-SEN C4-SEN SDPD-SEN RK-F-SEN LK-F-SEN VPT3-SEN VPT4-SEN SP-F-SEN ALLPW-ON *** fixing web counter Be sure to reset it after replacing the fixing web. waste toner counter Be sure to reset it after replacing the waste toner. right deck pickup sensor left deck pickup sensor cassette 3 pickup sensor cassette 4 pickup sensor side paper deck sensor right deck pull-off sensor left deck pull-off sensor vertical path 3 sensor vertical path 4 sensor side paper deck transport sensor Non-all-night startup counter (Clear at replacing the power supply) Description Level 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

HDD-ON *** HDD startup counter (Clear at replacing the HDD)

<PRDC-1>
T-17-75 COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1 Sub item PRM-WIRE PRM-GRID PO-WIRE TR-WIRE SP-WIRE FIX-TH1 FIX-TH2 FX-TSW OZ-FIL1 OZ-FIL2 OZ-FIL3 primary charging wire counter primary grid wire counter pre-transfer charging counter pre-transfer charging counter separation charging wire counter fixing main thermistor (TH1) counter fixing sub thermistor (TH2) counter fixing thermal switch (TP1) counter ozone filter (drum) counter ozone filter (separation) counter ozone filter (fixing) counter Description Level 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

17-98

Chapter 17

<DRBL-1>
T-17-76 COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1 *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). Sub item SCN-LMP * PRM-UNIT PRM-CLN PO-UNIT PO-CLN PO-SCRPR TR-CLN T/S-UNIT SP-CLN CLN-BLD SP-CLAW BS-SL-F BS-SL-R DVG-CYL DVG-ROLL DEV-1CL not used primary charging assembly counter primary charging wire cleaner counter pre-transfer charging assembly counter pre-transfer charging wire cleaner counter pre-transfer charging assembly scraper counter pre-transfer charging wire cleaner counter transfer/separation charging assembly counter separation charging wire cleaner counter cleaning blade counter cleaner separation claw counter drum cleaner assembly side seal (front) counter drum cleaner assembly side seal (rear) counter developing cylinder counter developing roll counter developing cylinder clutch counter Description Level 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

C3/C4/LD/ cassette 3/cassette 4/left deck/right deck/manual feeder tray pickup roller counter RD/M-PU-RL C3/C4/LD/ cassette 3/cassette 4/left deck/right deck/manual feeder tray separation roller counter RD/M-SP-RL C3/C4/LD/ cassette 3/cassette 4/left deck/right deck/manual feeder tray feeder roller counter RD/M-FD-RL FX-UP-RL FX-LW-RL FX-IN-BS FIX-WEB FX-BRG-U FX-BRG-L DLV-UCLW DLV-LCLW fixing upper roller counter fixing lower roller (pressure roller) counter fixing heat insulating bush counter fixing web counter fixing upper bearing counter fixing lower bearing counter delivery upper separation claw counter delivery lower separation claw counter

<DRBL-2>
T-17-77 COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: for outside Japan only. Sub item DF-PU-RL pickup roller counter (ADF) regardless of the selected read mode (single-sided/double-sided) or paper size (small-size/large-size), the count is increased by 1 for each original DF-SP-PL ** DF-SP-PD ** DF-FD-RL separation plate counter (ADF) separation pad counter (ADF) transport roller counter (ADF) single-sided mode: increase by 1 per original read double-sided mode: increase by 3 per original read (for passage of face, back, and idle) no distinction between large side and small size DF-SP-BL * DF-F-BLT * LNT-TAP1/2/3/ 4/5 ** STAMP ** DF-HNG-L * DF-HNG-R * DF-SP-M * DF-DL-RL * separation belt counter (ADF) transport belt counter (ADF) dust removing sheet A/B/C/D/E counter (ADF) stamp counter (ADF) hinge (left) counter (ADF) increase by 1 per opening/closing of the copyboard hinge (right counter; DF) increase by 1 per opening/closing of the copyboard cover separation motor counter (ADF) delivery roller counter (ADF) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Level

17-99

Chapter 17
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: for outside Japan only. Sub item DF-DL-M * DF-TRL-U * delivery motor counter (ADF) turn roller unit counter (ADF) turn roller unit counter (ADF) single-sided mode: increase by 1 per original read double-sided mode: increase by 3 per original read (for passage of face, back, and idle) no distinction between large size and small size PD-PU-RL PD-SP-RL PD-PU-CL PD-FD-RL PD-PL-CL PD-PU-MR PD-PU-SL NON-SORT FIN-STPR SDL-STPL PUNCH SORT-2 STCK DL-STC-L DL-STC-R STK-STC SDL-STC1 SDL-STC2 FLAP-STC SDL-RL PF-STC-L PF-STC-R IS-P-RL1 IS-S-RL1 IS-F-RL1 IS-TQLM1 IS-P-RL2 IS-S-RL2 IS-F-RL2 IS-TQLM2 IS-P-RL3 IS-S-RL3 IS-F-RL3 IS-TQLM3 IS-P-RL4 IS-S-RL4 IS-F-RL4 IS-TQLM4 BND-STC1 BND-STC2 SWBK-RL ALMT-MTR ST-DT-VR GRIP-MTR HEATER BND-COLL SNS-ARM1 SNS-ARM2 SNS-ARM3 BND-CUT CUT-HLDR TRM-CUT1 TRM-CUT2 TRM-BLT STK-STC1 STK-STC2 STK-STC3 pickup roller counter (side paper deck) separation roller counter (side paper deck) pickup clutch counter (side paper deck) transport roller counter (side paper deck) pull-off clutch counter (side paper deck) pickup motor counter (side paper deck) pickup solenoid counter (side paper deck) static eliminator counter (finisher upper delivery slot) stapler counter (finisher) side stapler counter (finisher) punch unit counter (inside finisher) knurled belt counter (finisher) stack delivery upper roller counter (finisher) static eliminator counter (delivery guide inside finisher) static eliminator counter (delivery roller inside finisher) stack discharge roller static eliminator counter (finisher) inlet stack eliminator counter (finisher saddle transport upper guide) static eliminator counter (finisher transport upper guide) flapper static eliminator counter (finisher saddle transport upper guide) shift roller counter (finisher) paper stack eliminator counter (paper folding unit left guide) paper static eliminator counter (paper folding unit right guide) pickup roller counter (inserter upper tray for finisher) separation roller counter (inserter upper tray for finisher) transport roller counter (inserter upper tray for finisher) torque limiter counter (inserter upper tray for finisher) separation roller counter (inserter lower tray for finisher) transport roller counter (inserter lower tray for finisher) transport roller counter (inserter lower tray for finisher) torque limiter counter (inserter lower tray for finisher) pickup roller counter (Inserter upper tray for perfect binder) separation roller counter (Inserter upper tray for perfect binder) feed roller counter (Inserter upper tray for perfect binder) torque limiter counter (Inserter upper tray for perfect binder) pickup roller counter (Inserter lower tray for perfect binder) separation roller counter (Inserter lower tray for perfect binder) feed roller counter (Inserter lower tray for perfect binder) torque limiter counter (Inserter lower tray for perfect binder) static eliminator 1 Count for signature path (perfect binder) static eliminator 2 Count for signature path (perfect binder) switch back roller (integrate tray assembly) Count for signature path (perfect binder) alignment motor counter (perfect binder) stack thickness detect volume The umber of booklet (perfect binder) grip motor The number of booklet (perfect binder) heater (vat unit) Glue temperature time (perfect binder) corrugation roller The number of inner paper path fed (perfect binder) sensor arm (signature path) Counter (perfect binder) sensor arm (through path) Counter (perfect binder) sensor arm (inlet part) Counter (perfect binder) trimming blade unit The number of trim (perfect binder) the number of blade holder usage (perfect binder) trimming upper blade counter (trimmer) trimming lower blade counter (trimmer) flat belt counter (trimmer) static eliminating brush counter (stacker sample tray outlet) static eliminating brush counter (stacker stacking assembly outlet) static eliminating brush counter (stacker inlet) 1 Description Level 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

17-100

Chapter 17
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-2 *: model equipped with DADF-Q1 (outside Japan: iR7105/7095; inside Japan: All model). **: model equipped with DADF-M1 (outside Japan: iR7086). ***: for outside Japan only. Sub item STK-STC4 PNCH-RL *** PN-BP-RL *** PN-DR-RL *** PNCH-BLT *** PNCH-SL *** BND-STC3 BND-STC4 SWBK-RL2 DEO-FIL BEHL-RL TQ-DIOD TMG-BLT BL-SCRW DR-CNCT TRN-PTH STK-PTH GL-BIND GL-HEAT Description static eliminating brush counter (stacker downstream outlet) aligning idle roller assembly counter (professional puncher) bypass roller kit counter (professional puncher) roller energy drive counter (professional puncher) aligning belt counter (professional puncher) back gauge solenoid counter (professional puncher) static eliminator (signature path) Counter (perfect binder) static eliminator (through path) Counter (perfect binder) switch back roller (cover sheet feed assembly) Counter (perfect binder) deodorant filter counter (perfect binder) trailing edge retaining roller (collection tray) Counter (perfect binder) torque diode (stack rotation assembly) Counter (perfect binder) timing belt (stack rotation assembly) Counter (perfect binder) press boll screw counter (perfect binder) drawer connector counter (perfect binder) through path paper feed counter (perfect binder) relay path paper feed counter (perfect binder) counter for booklet (perfect binder) glue temperature adjustment time counter (perfect binder) Level 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

<H-DRBL-1> Counters for Durables (used as reference after a long period of use of the host machine, i.e., at 6,000,000 prints)
T-17-78 COPIER > COUNTER > H-DRBL-1 Sub item DEV-U PT-DRM DRM-DR-U D-CLW-AM BRUSH-U O-DLV-RL D-CLW-CL D-CLW-GR RV-RL I-DLV-RL REG-RL REG-COL RD-FD-SH LD-FD-SH REV-GD FLP-SL RV-G-SL RD-PU-SL PU-DR-U PR-RG-RL PU-D-GR M-DR-PT DLV-S-AM DLV-UP-U LD-PU-1W RD-PU-CL LD-PU-CL V-FD-RL DUP-F-RL DUP-D-GR WEB-SL CL-DR-U DEV-DR-U PU-D-BLT M-D-BLT developing assembly counter photosensitive drum counter drum drive counter reciprocating arm counter power supply brush unit counter outside delivery roller counter delivery separation claw reciprocating one-way counter delivery separation claw reciprocating gear counter reversal rubber roller counter inside delivery roller counter registration upper roller counter registration lower color counter roller B shaft (right deck) right deck counter roller B shaft (left deck) left deck counter reversing guide counter flapper solenoid duplexing unit counter reversing guide solenoid (SL11) duplexing unit counter right deck pickup solenoid (SL7) right deck counter pickup main drive (except pickup motor) counter sponge roller (pre-registration roller) counter pickup drive gear counter multifeeder door hinge counter delivery sensor lever counter delivery roller guide (delivery upper unit) counter transport roller shaft one-way left deck counter right deck pickup clutch (CL10) right deck counter left deck pickup clutch (CL11) left deck counter vertical path drive shaft (roller) counter duplexing sponge roller duplexing unit counter pulley gear 2 duplexing unit counter web solenoid (SL2) counter cleaner drive assembly counter development drive assembly counter pickup drive timing belt counter main drive timing belt counter Description Level 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

17-101

<H-DRBL-2> Counters for Durables (used as reference after a long period of use of the host machine, i.e., 12,000,000 prints)
T-17-79 COPIER > COUNTER > H-DRBL-2 Sub item P-KIT CRG-D-U X-FD-U RD-U LD-U C-PU-U V-FD-SNS V-FD-RL V-P-SNS1 PRG-V-GD V-P-SNS2 DUP-U FX-PS-PL VFD-SH-U DRM-SFT GEAR-U V-FD-D-U L-PU-D-U C-PU-D-U R-LFT-DR L-LFT-DR MLT-DR-U MN-DR-U AR-FIL1 AR-FIL2 AR-FIL3 AR-FIL4 DRM-FAN W-T-PIPE BUSH-1 BUSH-2 BUSH-3 BUSH-4 BUSH-5 AP kit counter toner cartridge drive unit counter fixing unit counter right deck unit right deck counter left deck unit left deck counter cassette pickup unit counter vertical path sensor base counter vertical path roller counter paper detection base counter pre-registration vertical path guide counter vertical path paper sensor 2 counter duplexing unit counter fixing positioning plate counter vertical path drive shaft unit counter drum shaft unit counter 90-T gear unit counter vertical path drive unit counter left pickup drive unit left deck counter cassette pickup drive unit counter right deck lifter drive unit counter left deck lifter drive assembly counter multifeeder pickup drive unit counter main drive unit counter air filter counter air filter 2 counter air filter 3 counter air filter 4 counter drum suction fan counter waste toner pipe counter bushing 1 counter bushing 2 counter bushing 3 counter bushing 4 counter bushing 5 counter Description Level 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Chapter 18 Upgrading

Contents

Contents
18.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................18-1
18.1.1 Overview of Upgrading Work ................................................................................................................................................. 18-1 18.1.2 Outline of the Functions and Operations ................................................................................................................................. 18-2 18.1.3 Points to Note at Time of Downloading .................................................................................................................................. 18-4

18.2 Making Preparations ..................................................................................................................................................18-5

18.2.1 Installing the System Software (System CD -> SST).............................................................................................................. 18-5 18.2.2 Copying the System Software (SST -> USB).......................................................................................................................... 18-6 18.2.3 Making Connections (SST in use) ........................................................................................................................................... 18-8 18.2.4 Making Connections (USB device in use)............................................................................................................................... 18-9

18.3 Formatting the HDD ................................................................................................................................................18-10

18.3.1 Formatting the HDD for All Partition.................................................................................................................................... 18-10 18.3.2 Formatting the HDD for Selected Partitions.......................................................................................................................... 18-11 18.3.3 Formatting the Partitions........................................................................................................................................................ 18-11

18.4 Downloading System Software................................................................................................................................18-13

18.4.1 Downloading the System Software (ALL) ............................................................................................................................ 18-13
18.4.1.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................18-13 18.4.1.2 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................18-13

18.4.2 Downloading the System Software (Single).......................................................................................................................... 18-16

18.4.2.1 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................18-16

18.4.3 Other Upgrade Methods......................................................................................................................................................... 18-19

18.4.3.1 Upgrading an old model to the upgraded device ......................................................................................................................................18-19

18.4.4 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data ........................................................................................................................... 18-20

18.4.4.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................................18-20 18.4.4.2 Uploading Procedure.................................................................................................................................................................................18-21 18.4.4.3 Downloading Procedure............................................................................................................................................................................18-23

18.4.5 Version Upgrade using USB.................................................................................................................................................. 18-24

18.4.5.1 Overview of Menus and Functions ...........................................................................................................................................................18-24 18.4.5.2 Points to Note............................................................................................................................................................................................18-25 18.4.5.3 Downloading/Writing the System Software (auto)...................................................................................................................................18-26 18.4.5.4 Downloading the System Software (auto or selective) .............................................................................................................................18-27 18.4.5.5 Downloading the System Software (overwriting).....................................................................................................................................18-28 18.4.5.6 Formatting the HDD .................................................................................................................................................................................18-30 18.4.5.7 Other Functions.........................................................................................................................................................................................18-31

Chapter 18

18.1 Outline
18.1.1 Overview of Upgrading Work
The machine and its system software options may be upgraded as follows: - downloading from a PC to which the Service Support Tool (SST) has been installed - downloading from a USB device - replacing the DIMM-ROM
T-18-1 Machine System software type SST Host Machine main controller language module remote UI content boot program MEAP library voice dictionary Web browser DC controller reader controller (DADF-Q1 model) reader controller (DADF-M1 model) OCR dictionary yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Upgrading tool USB yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Other replacing the DIMMROM SST display Product name iR7105 System software name SYSTEM LANGUAGE RUI BOOT MEAPCONT TTS BROWSER DCON RCON DADF-Q1 model outside Japan: iR7105/7095 inside Japan: iR7105i/7095i/7086N DADF-M1 model outside Japan: iR7086 controls also ADF mechanisms used when adding the Searchable PDF Kit (optional) used for SSL communication/e-RDS communication requires a special service tool (downloader PCB; FY9-2034) used when adding the Voice Guidance Kit (optional) used when adding the Web Browser Kit (optional) Remarks
0011-6749

yes

yes

iR5570

RCON

yes

yes yes yes yes -

special software (PC in use)

iRYYYY

SDICT KEY

encryption communication key/ yes certificate/CA certificate ADF (DADF-Q1) Finisher Inserter Trimmer ADF controller finisher controller inserter trimmer yes yes yes -

ADFY4 FIN_V FIN_V -

CPU FIN_CON INSRTR -

- special software supplied together with the system software - calls for a PC possessing an RS232C interface - non-Japanese model only - special software supplied together with the system software - calls for a PC possessing an RS232C interface - HyperTerminal comes standard with Windows

Professional Puncher professional puncher

HyperTerminal (PC in use)

Hi-Capacity Stacker stacker controller network controller Perfect binder Master controller Sleeve controller Cutter controller Option controller

yes yes yes yes yes yes

yes yes yes yes yes yes

HSTK_A1 STK HSTK_A1 OP_CON BND_A1 MST_CON SLV_CON CUTTER OP_CON

18-1

Chapter 18

18.1.2 Outline of the Functions and Operations

When connected to a PC (to which the SST and system software have been installed) and USB device (to which system software has been copied), the machine provides the following functions:
iR - - - PC for service work USB device
0011-6750

Initializing the HDD HDD setting information

System software

Downloading system software

HDD

Flash ROM Uploading backup data *1 Backup data Downloading backup data *1 Back up RAM
F-18-1

*1: Not when USB is in use. To use these functions, the machine must be in download mode, which may be either of the following: - Normal Mode (download mode B) Turn on the main power while holding down the keys 1+7; then, make the following selections in service mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD. - Safe Mode (download mode A) Turn on the main power while holding down the keys 2+8.

18-2

Chapter 18

on keypad, 2+8

Main power switch ON

on keypad, 1+7

Safe mode program

Boot ROM

Boot program

HDD

SYSTEM program In service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD Normal mode program

Safe mode (Download mode A)

F-18-2

Normal mode (Download mode B)

Use safe mode for the following: - after replacing the HDD - when the system fails to start up normally The following shows combinations of download modes and functions:
T-18-2 Download mode Function Formatting the HDD Normal mode (download mode B) Safe mode (download mode A) All BOOTDEV

Downloading the system software System *1 Language RUI Boot Dcon Rcon SDICT MEAPCONT KEY TTS BROWSER FIN_CON INSRTR STK OP_CON

System Language RUI Boot Dcon Rcon SDICT MEAPCONT KEY TTS BROWSER FIN_CON INSRTR STK OP_CON

Uploading/downloading of backup data *2 SramRCON SramDCON

SramImg Meapback -

*1: Not all software to download may be selected for downloading while USB is in use. *2: Not when USB device is in use.

18-3

Chapter 18 Installing the System Software When downloaded, the system software is stored in the temporary storage area of the HDD. At the end of downloading, the main power switch must be turned off and then back on, thus restarting the machine and writing the system software to both system area and flash ROM from the temporary storage area. When the main power switch is turned off and then back on once again, the machine will start up using the new system software.
1) The system software is downloaded.
[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ - - Do Download wnload Mode - - iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - - - - - - - Complete iR2270iM-JPjaxxxx-1F77-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG .PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete iR2270iW iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG -JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete iR2270iW iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG -ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG .PRG ] - - - - Complete iR2270iW iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG -ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG .PRG ] - - - - Complete

Status of reception (sample)

- - - Do Download wnload Mode - - [ iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - xx%

HDD
System Software
Temporary storage area

System Software

2) The main power switch is turned off and then on.

3) Writing takes place.

<<<<< do download wnload shell >>>>> Upgrading ading complete [ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upg Upgrading ading complete [ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upg Upgrading ading complete [ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upg Upgrading ading complete [ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upg Upgrading ading complete [ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upg Upgrading ading complete [ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upg +++ Switch OFF the po power er then ON. +++

HDD
System Software
Temporary storage area System area

Boot ROM 4) The main motor switch is turned off and then on.

FLASH ROM

5) The machine starts up using the new version.

F-18-3

18.1.3 Points to Note at Time of Downloading

0011-6811

Do Not Turn Off the Power During Download/Write Operation Do not turn off the power while the system software is being downloaded/written. Otherwise, the machine may fail to start up when its power is turned back on. (If such is the case, execute HDD formatting, and download the system software. In the case of a boot ROM, replace the DIMM-ROM.) Points to Note About Upgrading the DC Controller/Reader Controller The DC controller/reader controller may be downloaded in either in normal mode or in safe mode. If done in safe mode, however, the controller version information cannot be obtained, causing the data retained by the SST to be written over. It is a good idea, therefore, to use normal mode (so that the software will not be replaced with software of a previous version).

18-4

Chapter 18

18.2 Making Preparations

18.2.1 Installing the System Software (System CD -> SST)
Here, you will be copying the system software found on the System CD to the SST. [Preparatory Work] Requirements - PC to which the SST (version 3.21 or later) has been installed - System CD [Installing the System Software] 1) Turn on the PC. 2) Set the System CD in the PC. 3) Start up the SST. 4) Click [Register Firmware].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)
0011-6751

Target Selection Select the target. MFP

CONTROL C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Model List Select a model to connect

CONNECT
MFP USB

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a

USB

System Management

c:

START
CANCEL

EXIT

F-18-4

5) Select the drive in which the System CD has been set, and click [SEARCH].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Registerd Firms Registered fir mware

CONTROL C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Regist Firm S e l e c t a d r i ve a n d fo l d e r.

CONNECT
e:

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e
e:

D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a System Management

iR7105C-XXxx-BOOT iR7105-USen iR7105-XXen0107-RUI iR7105XXen0111-TTS iR7105-XXen-LANG iR7105-XXxx0100-BROWS

REGISTER
CANCEL

SEARCH

EXIT

F-18-5

6) A list of system software found on the System CD appears. Remove the check marks from the folders and software files you do not need, and click [REGISTER].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Registerd Firms Registered fir mware

CONTROL C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Found Firm T h e f i r m wa r e l i s t e d b e l ow i s fo u n d . U n c h e cke d f i r m wa r e i s r e g i s t e r e d .

CONNECT R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a System Management

iR7105 SYSTEM USenv0112 LANGUAGE XXenv0112 RUI XXenv0107 MEAPCONT XXxxv0105 BOOT XXxxv0103 BROWSER XXxxv0100

REGISTER
CANCEL

EXIT

F-18-6

18-5

Chapter 18 7) When a message has appeared to indicate that the system software has been installed, click [OK].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Registerd Firms Registered fir mware

CONTROL C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Found Firm F i r m wa r e r e g i s t ra t i o n c o m p l e t e d . > > > B a t c h R e g i s t ra t i o n R e s u l t s

CONNECT
TTS XXenv0111 iRCXXXX HDFormat XXxxv0002 KEY XXxcv0101 XXxpv0101 SDICT

iR7105 SYSTEM USenv0112 >>> With no LANGUAGE XXenv0112 >>> Regist RUI XXenv0107 >>> Regist MEAPCONT XXxxv0105 >>> Regist BOOT XXxxv0103 >>> Regist BROWSER XXxxv0100 >>> Regist G3FAX XXxxv6102 >>> Regist DCON XXxxv0102 >>> Regist TTS XXxxv0111 >>> Regist iRYYYY HDFormat XXxxv0002 >>> Regist KEY XXenv0111 OK!

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a System Management

O K
CANCEL

EXIT

F-18-7

18.2.2 Copying the System Software (SST -> USB)

Here, you will be copying the system software from the SST to a USB device. [Preparatory Work] Requirements - PC to which the SST (version 3.21 or later) has been installed - USB device *
*: USB Requirements Interface Capacity Format USB 1.1 or higher (USB 2.0 recommended) 1 GB or more recommended (A set of system software is in excess of 512 MB.) FAT (FAT16), FAT32 (It must not be NTFS or HFS.) single partition (There must not be multiple partitions.)
0011-6752

You will not be able to use a security-protected USB device. Be sure to remove the protection before use. [Copying the System Software] 1) Start up the PC. 2) Connect the USB device to the USB port of the PC. 3) Start up the SST. 4) Click the USB icon on the Target Selection screen.
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Target Selection Select the target. MFP

CONTROL C l i ck a bu t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Export Firm Selection S e l e c t t h e d e s t i n a t e d r i ve .

E x p o r t F ir mwa re
MFP USB

Series Version

R e g is te r F ir mwa re D e le te F ir mwa re D e le te B a ck u p D a ta

Firmware registration status

USB

S y s te m Ma n a g e me n t

c:
Select the destinate drive.

START
CANCEL

EXIT

F-18-8

18-6

Chapter 18 5) Select the drive to which the USB device has been connected.
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Target Selection Select the target. MFP

CONTROL C l i ck a bu t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Export Firm Selection Select the series.

E x p o r t F ir mwa re
MFP USB

Series Version

R e g is te r F ir mwa re D e le te F ir mwa re D e le te B a ck u p D a ta

Firmware registration status

USB

S y s te m Ma n a g e me n t

d:
Valid drive DriveType:1 FileSystem:FAT TotalSize:1,001MB FreeSpace:1,001MB

START
CANCEL

EXIT

F-18-9

6) Select the appropriate series and version of the system software you want to copy.
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Target Selection Select the target. MFP

CONTROL C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Export Firm Selection Click the <Star t> button to star t f i l e c o py.

E x p o r t F i r m wa r e
MFP USB

Series Version

iR7105 USen0112(US)

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a

Firmware registration status iR7105 BOOT Y XXxxv0103 BROWSER Y XXxxv0100 DCON Y XXxxv0102 LANGUAGE Y XXenv0112 N XXjav0112 MEAPCONT Y XXxxv0105 RUI Y XXenv0107 N XXjav0107 SDICT N XXxxv0107 SYSTEM N JPenv0112

USB

System Management

d:
Valid drive DriveType:1 FileSystem:FAT TotalSize:1,001MB FreeSpace:1,001MB

START
CANCEL

EXIT

F-18-10

MEMO: The notations that appear in the column under "Firmware registration status" mean the following: Y: exists in the SST. N: does not exist in the SST. 7) Click [START] so that copying to the USB device starts.
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Target Selection Select the target. MFP

CONTROL C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Export Firm Selection Click the <Star t> button to star t f i l e c o py.

E x p o r t F i r m wa r e
MFP USB

Series Version

iR7105 USen0112(US)

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a

Firmware registration status iR7105 BOOT Y XXxxv0103 BROWSER Y XXxxv0100 DCON Y XXxxv0102 LANGUAGE Y XXenv0112 N XXjav0112 MEAPCONT Y XXxxv0105 RUI Y XXenv0107 N XXjav0107 SDICT N XXxxv0107 SYSTEM N JPenv0112

USB

System Management

d:
Valid drive DriveType:1 FileSystem:FAT TotalSize:1,001MB FreeSpace:1,001MB

START
CANCEL

EXIT

F-18-11

18-7

Chapter 18 8) When done, click [OK].

Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Target Selection Select the target. MFP

CONTROL C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Export Firm Selection F i l e c o py h a s b e e n c o m p l e t e d .

E x p o r t F i r m wa r e
MFP USB

Series Version

iR7105 USen0112(US)

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a

Firmware registration status iR7105 BOOT Y XXxxv0103 BROWSER Y XXxxv0100 DCON Y XXxxv0102 LANGUAGE Y XXenv0112 N XXjav0112 MEAPCONT Y XXxxv0105 RUI Y XXenv0107 N XXjav0107 SDICT N XXxxv0107 SYSTEM N JPenv0112

USB

System Management

d:
Valid drive DriveType:1 FileSystem:FAT TotalSize:1,001MB FreeSpace:1,001MB

CANCEL

EXIT

F-18-12

18.2.3 Making Connections (SST in use)

[Requirements] - PC to which the SST (version 3.21 or later) has been installed and the system software has been copied - twisted-pair cross cable 10Base-T: Category 3 or 5 100Base-TX: Category 5 [Procedure] 1) Start up the PC. 2) Check the network settings of the PC. 2-1) Start the command prompt, and type in "IPCONFIG," and press the Return key. 2-2) Check to be sure that the network settings appearing on the screen are as follows; if not, change the PC network settings: IP address: 172.16.1.160 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 Default gateway: any
0011-6753

Do not use the following IP addresses: - 172.16.1.0 - 172.16.1.100 - 172.16.1.255 3) Check to make sure that the Execute/Memory lamp on the control panel is off; then, turn off the main power switch. 3-1) Hold down the power switch on the control panel for 3 sec or more. 3-2) Go through the shut-down instructions appearing on the control panel screen so that the main power switch may be turned off. 3-3) Turn off the main power switch. 4) Connect the PC to the machine with a cross cable.

IP sddress: 172.16.1.160 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 IP address: 172.16.1.100 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0

Cross cable 10Base-T: category 3, 5 or later 100Base-TX: category 5 or later

F-18-13

5) Set the machine to the appropriate mode: - Normal Mode Turn on the main power switch while holding down the keys 1 and 7. When the machine has started, make the following selections in service mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD; then, click [OK]. - Safe Mode Turn on the main power switch while holding down the keys 2 and 8. In response, the machine will start up in safe mode.

18-8

Chapter 18

18.2.4 Making Connections (USB device in use)

[Requirements] - USB device to which the system software has been copied. [Procedure] 1) Check to make sure that the Execute/Memory on the control panel is off; then, turn off the main power switch as follows: 1-1) Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more. 1-2) Go through the shut-down instructions. 1-3) Turn off the main power switch. 2) Connect the USB device [2] to the USB port [1].
0011-6754

[1]

[2]
F-18-14

3) If a network cable is connected to the machine, disconnect it. 4) Set the machine to the appropriate download mode: - Normal Mode Turn on the main power switch while holding down the keys 1 and 7. When the machine has started up, make the following selections in service mode, and press [OK]: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD. - Safe Mode Turn on the main power switch while holding down the keys 2 and 8 so that the machine will start up in safe mode. 5) See the following menu appearing on the control panel screen, indicating that the machine has recognized the presence of a USB device.

F-18-15

The machine may not recognize certain types of USB device or USB device from certain manufacturers. The machine looks for a USB deivce for a maximum of 60 sec after its main power is turned on, not indicating the menu if it fails to detect one. (If such is the case, obtain an appropriate USB device.) The SST cannot be run while the USB device is in use. (The machine will not communicate with the SST when it detects the presence of a USB device.)

18-9

Chapter 18

18.3 Formatting the HDD

18.3.1 Formatting the HDD for All Partition
When formatting the HDD for all partition, there will be partitions on the HDD and all these partitions will be formatted (initialized) and the main controller will be made ready for use. All the information needed to set up the partition is found in the partition settings file (on the SST, 'HDFormat' in the folder 'iRYYYY').
0011-6755

HDD

[4] iRYYYY HDFormat

FSTDEV TMP_GEN TMP_PSS TMP_FAX APL_SEND

[2]

APL_MEAP APL_GEN APL_KEEP IMG_MNG PDLDEV FSTCDEV BOOTDEV

[1]
F-18-16

[3]

[1] HDD (service part; without partitions) [2] Formatting for full partition (only in safe mode) [3] HDD after formatting [4] Partition settings information file

18-10

Chapter 18

18.3.2 Formatting the HDD for Selected Partitions

When formatting the HDD for selected partitions, only those selected partitions will be initialized.
0011-6756

FSTDEV TMP_GEN TMP_PSS

HDD

TMP_FAX APL_SEND APL_MEAP APL_GEN APL_KEEP IMG_MNG PDLDEV FSTCDEV BOOTDEV

[1]

[2]

F-18-17

[1] Formatting not possible [2] Formatting possible in safe mode

MEMO: Partition-based formatting is possible in service mode ( COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > HD-CLEAR ), with the exception of BOOTDEV.

18.3.3 Formatting the Partitions

1) Start up the SST. 2) Select the model [1] and the type of system software [2] ('Single'); then, check the network settings, and click [START].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E) Interface Network IP Address 172.16.1.100 Target Selection Select the target. MFP
REGISTER REMOVE
0011-6757

CONTROL C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Export Firm Selection C l i c k t h e i n t e r fa c e a n d c l i c k t h e < S TA RT > b u t t o n .

iR7105 CONNECT
MFP USB iR7105 ALL ALL_HDF Single

[1] [2]

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a

USB

System Management

c:

START
CANCEL EXIT

F-18-18

18-11

Chapter 18 3) Click [Format HDD].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iR7105 SAFE Clear SelectableFirmware S e l e c t t h e f i r m wa r e t o b e d ow n l o a d e d . t h e n c l i ck t h e [ S t a r t ] bu t t o n . SelectableFir mware iR7105 BOOT BROWSER DCON LANGUAGE MEAPCONT RUI TTS iRYYYY HDFormat KEY SDICT Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d .

Firmware Version SYSTEM Active USen01 02n Hold USen01 02i

Download Firmware Upload Data Download Data Restore Backup System Format HDD

RCON XXxx3003 DCON XXxx0101 RUI XXja0101 XXen0101 MEAPCONT XXxx0102 LANGUAGE XXja0102 XXen0102 BOOTROM XXxx0102C

Start
Shutdown Return to Main Menu

F-18-19

4) Specify BOOTDEV partition or full partition (ALL), and click [Start].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iR7105 SAFE Clear Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d . HDDFormat S e l e c t t h e p a r t i t i o n . t h e n c l i ck [ S t a r t ] bu t t o n .

Download Firmware Upload Data Download Data Restore Backup System Format HDD
ALL: Safe Mode ALL BOOTDEV Normal Mode

Start
Cansel Return to Main Menu

F-18-20

5) Click [Execute Formatting].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iRC3170 SAFE Clear Control C l i ck t h e bu t t o n o f t h e t a s k t o b e exe c u t e d . HDDFormat Execute for matting ?

Download Firmware Upload Data Download Data Restore Backup System Format HDD
ALL: Safe Mode ALL BOOTDEV Normal Mode

Start
Cancel Return to Main Menu

Confirmation

E xe c u te Fo r ma ttin g

Cansel

F-18-21

6) When formatting has ended, click [OK] to return to the Menu screen. 7) Move on to download the system software.

Whenever you have executed HDD formatting, be sure to download the system software; otherwise, an error (E602) will occur when the main power is turned on.

18-12

Chapter 18

18.4 Downloading System Software

18.4.1 Downloading the System Software (ALL) 18.4.1.1 Outline
You can collectively download various system software files at one time. The groups of system software files that may be downloaded in a batch are identified in the batch download information file, which is found on the System CD. Copy the file to the SST to enable the batch downloading mechanism. <Batch Download Information File> ALL: for downloading in normal mode Use it to collectively download all system software files that are found. Use it as when upgrading the system software. ALL_HDF: for downloading in safe mode Use it to collectively download system software files other than the following: - BOOT - DCON - RCON Use it when reinstalling the system software as after formatting the HDD. The foregoing 3 system software files may be downloaded using different steps.
0011-6758

18.4.1.2 Downloading Procedure

Here, the discussions are in reference to batch downloading in safe mode. 1) Start up the SST. 2) Select the model [1] and the batch download information file [2] ('ALL_HDF').
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)
0011-6759

Target Selection Select the target. MFP

CONTROL C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Model List Select a model to connect

iR7105

[1] [2]

CONNECT
MFP USB

iR7105 ALL ALL_HDF Single

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a

USB

System Management

c:

START
CANCEL EXIT

F-18-22

3) Make sure of the network settings, and click [Start Batch Download].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E) Interface Network IP Address 172.16.1.100 Batch List iR7105 v1.12 rev.0 Copy/PDL-Boot HDFormat Job 1.Wait 2.iR7105_SYSTEM_JPja0112 Not register 3.iR7105_LANGUAGE_XXen0112 4.iR7105_LANGUAGE_XXja0112 Not regi 5.iR7105_RUI_XXen0107 6.iR7105RUI_XXja0107 Not registered 7.iR7105_MEAPCONT_XXxx0105 8.iR7105_SDICT_XXja0107 Not registered 9.iR7105_TTS_XXen0111 10.iR7105_TTS_XXja0110 Not registered 11.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxc0101 12.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxp0101 13.Wait 14.Wait 15.Wait 16.iR7105_BOOT_XXxx0103 17.iR7105_DCON_XXxx0102
REGISTER REMOVE

CONTROL C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Model List Check the interface and click the <START> button.

iR7105 CONNECT R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a System Management

iR7105 ALL ALL_HDF Single

Star t Batch Download

Confirm firmware versions Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm Confirm Overwrite

CANCEL EXIT

F-18-23

18-13

Chapter 18 4) Click [Resume].

Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E) Interface Network IP Address 172.16.1.100 Batch List Batch download list BATCH CONTROL
REGISTER REMOVE

Batch Result Batch download results

i R 7 1 0 5 v 1 . 1 2 r e v. 0 Copy/PDL-Boot HDFor mat

Job 1.Wait 2.iR7105_SYSTEM_JPja0112 Not register 3.iR7105_LANGUAGE_XXen0112 4.iR7105_LANGUAGE_XXja0112 Not regi 5.iR7105_RUI_XXen0107 6.iR7105_RUI_XXja0107 Not registered 7.iR7105_MEAPCONT_XXxx0105 8.iR7105_SDICT_XXja0107 Not registered 9.iR7105_TTS_XXen0111 10.iR7105_TTS_XXja0110 Not registered 11.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxc0101 12.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxp0101 13.Wait 14.Wait 15.Wait 16.iR7105_BOOT_XXxx0103 17.iR7105_DCON_XXxx0102

Click < RESUME > button to restart batch download.

Resume
Confirm firmware versions Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm Confirm Overwrite

Pause Finish

F-18-24

MEMO: Refer to the Batch Download List screen [1] for the progress of downloading.
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Batch List Batch download list

BATCH CONTROL

Batch Result Batch download results

i R 7 1 0 5 v 1 . 1 2 r e v. 0 Copy/PDL-Boot HDFor mat

Job 1.Wait 2.iR7105_SYSTEM_JPja0112 Not register 3.iR7105_LANGUAGE_XXen0112 4.iR7105_LANGUAGE_XXja0112 Not regi 5.iR7105_RUI_XXen0107 6.iR7105_RUI_XXja0107 Not registered 7.iR7105_MEAPCONT_XXxx0105 8.iR7105_SDICT_XXja0107 Not registered 9.iR7105_TTS_XXen0111 10.iR7105_TTS_XXja0110 Not registered 11.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxc0101 12.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxp0101 13.Wait 14.Wait 15.Wait 16.iR7105_BOOT_XXxx0103 17.iR7105_DCON_XXxx0102 Results 1. 3.iR7105_LANGUAGE_XXen0112_XXenv0112 5.iR7105_RUI_XXen0101_XXenv0107 : OK

[1]

Processing batch download... To pause or finish this process, Click < PAUSE > or < FINISH > button in 5 seconds.

Resume
Confirm firmware versions Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm Confirm Overwrite

Pause Finish

F-18-25

5) The Download End screen appears for the system software files to be stored on the HDD. To stop downloading, click [Finish]; if you want to download BOOT, DCON, and RCON, on the other hand, click [Resume], and go to the next step.
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Batch List Batch download list

BATCH CONTROL

Batch Result Batch download results

i R 7 1 0 5 v 1 . 1 2 r e v. 0 Copy/PDL-Boot HDFor mat

Job 1.Wait 2.iR7105_SYSTEM_JPja0112 Not register 3.iR7105_LANGUAGE_XXen0112 4.iR7105_LANGUAGE_XXja0112 Not regi 5.iR7105_RUI_XXen0107 6.iR7105_RUI_XXja0107 Not registered 7.iR7105_MEAPCONT_XXxx0105 8.iR7105_SDICT_XXja0107 Not registered 9.iR7105_TTS_XXen0111 10.iR7105_TTS_XXja0110 Not registered 11.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxc0101 12.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxp0101 13.Wait 14.Wait 15.Wait 16.iR7105_BOOT_XXxx0103 17.iR7105_DCON_XXxx0102 Results 1. 3.iR7105_LANGUAGE_XXen0102_XXenv0112 5.iR7105_RUI_XXen0101_XXenv0107 : OK 7.iR7105_MEAPCONT_XXxx0102_XXxxv0105 9.iR7105_TTS_XXenv0111 : OK 11.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxcv0101 : OK 12.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxpv0101 : OK

Click < RESUME > button to restart batch download.

Resume
Confirm firmware versions Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm Confirm Overwrite

Pause Finish

F-18-26

18-14

Chapter 18 6) Turn off the machine's main power switch, and start it up in normal mode (turn on the main power switch while holding down the 1 and 7 keys; then, start download mode in service mode). Click [Resume].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Batch List Batch download list

BATCH CONTROL

Batch Result Batch download results

i R 7 1 0 5 v 1 . 1 2 r e v. 0 Copy/PDL-Boot HDFor mat

Job 1.Wait 2.iR7105_SYSTEM_JPja0112 Not register 3.iR7105_LANGUAGE_XXen0112 4.iR7105_LANGUAGE_XXja0112 Not regi 5.iR7105_RUI_XXen0107 6.iR7105_RUI_XXja0107 Not registered 7.iR7105_MEAPCONT_XXxx0105 8.iR7105_SDICT_XXja0107 Not registered 9.iR7105_TTS_XXen0111 10.iR7105_TTS_XXja0110 Not registered 11.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxc0101 12.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxp0101 13.Wait 14.Wait 15.Wait 16.iR7105_BOOT_XXxx0103 17.iR7105_DCON_XXxx0102 Results 1. 3.iR7105_LANGUAGE_XXen0102_XXenv0112 5.iR7105_RUI_XXen0101_XXenv0107 : OK 7.iR7105_MEAPCONT_XXxx0102_XXxxv0105 9.iR7105_TTS_XXenv0111 : OK 11.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxcv0101 : OK 12.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxpv0101 : OK 13.HDD

Click < RESUME > button to restart batch download.

Resume
Confirm firmware versions Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm Confirm Overwrite

Pause Finish

F-18-27

7) Click [Resume] to start downloading BOOT, DCON, and RCON.

Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Batch List Batch download list

BATCH CONTROL

Batch Result Batch download results

i R 7 1 0 5 v 1 . 1 2 r e v. 0 Copy/PDL-Boot HDFor mat

Job 1.Wait 2.iR7105_SYSTEM_JPja0112 Not register 3.iR7105_LANGUAGE_XXen0112 4.iR7105_LANGUAGE_XXja0112 Not regi 5.iR7105_RUI_XXen0107 6.iR7105_RUI_XXja0107 Not registered 7.iR7105_MEAPCONT_XXxx0105 8.iR7105_SDICT_XXja0107 Not registered 9.iR7105_TTS_XXen0111 10.iR7105_TTS_XXja0110 Not registered 11.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxc0101 12.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxp0101 13.Wait 14.Wait 15.Wait 16.iR7105_BOOT_XXxx0103 17.iR7105_DCON_XXxx0102 Results 1. 3.iR7105_LANGUAGE_XXen0102_XXenv0112 5.iR7105_RUI_XXen0101_XXenv0107 : OK 7.iR7105_MEAPCONT_XXxx0102_XXxxv0105 9.iR7105_TTS_XXenv0111 : OK 11.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxcv0101 : OK 12.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxpv0101 : OK 13.HDD 14.OFF 1+7

Click < RESUME > button to restart batch download.

Resume
Confirm firmware versions Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm Confirm Overwrite

Pause Finish

F-18-28

8) Click [OK].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E)

Batch List Batch download list

BATCH CONTROL

Batch Result Batch download results

i R 7 1 0 5 v 1 . 1 2 r e v. 0 Copy/PDL-Boot HDFor mat

Job 1.Wait 2.iR7105_SYSTEM_JPja0112 Not register 3.iR7105_LANGUAGE_XXen0112 4.iR7105_LANGUAGE_XXja0112 Not regi 5.iR7105_RUI_XXen0107 6.iR7105_RUI_XXja0107 Not registered 7.iR7105_MEAPCONT_XXxx0105 8.iR7105_SDICT_XXja0107 Not registered 9.iR7105_TTS_XXen0111 10.iR7105_TTS_XXja0110 Not registered 11.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxc0101 12.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxp0101 13.Wait 14.Wait 15.Wait 16.iR7105_BOOT_XXxx0103 17.iR7105_DCON_XXxx0102 Results 1. 3.iR7105_LANGUAGE_XXen0102_XXenv0112 5.iR7105_RUI_XXen0101_XXenv0107 : OK 7.iR7105_MEAPCONT_XXxx0102_XXxxv0105 9.iRC7105_TTS_XXenv0111 : OK 11.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxcv0101 : OK 12.iRYYYY_KEY_XXxpv0101 : OK 13.HDD 14.OFF 1+7 15. 16.iR7105_BOOT_XXxx0102_XXxxv0103 : OK 17.iR7105_DCON_XXxx0101_XXxxv0102 : OK

All of the batch download processes have been completed.

OK
Confirm firmware versions Same Ver:Skip/ Ver down:Comfirm Confirm Overwrite

Pause Finish

F-18-29

Turning Off the Power Do not turn off the power while downloading or writing is under way; otherwise, the machine may fail to start up. If such is the case, execute HDD formatting, and download the system software once gain.

18-15

Chapter 18

18.4.2 Downloading the System Software (Single) 18.4.2.1 Downloading Procedure

Here is the downloading procedure of the SYSTEM as a sample. 1) Start up the SST. 2) Select the model [1] and the type of system software [2] ('Single'); then, check the network settings, and click [START].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E) Interface Network IP Address 172.16.1.100 Target Selection Select the target. MFP
REGISTER REMOVE
0011-6812

CONTROL C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Export Firm Selection C l i c k t h e i n t e r fa c e a n d c l i c k t h e < S TA RT > b u t t o n .

iR7105 CONNECT
MFP USB iR7105 ALL ALL_HDF Single

[1] [2]

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a

USB

System Management

c:

START
CANCEL EXIT

F-18-30

3) Select the version of the System software you want to download, and click [Start].
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iR7105 NORMAL Clear SelectableFirmware S e l e c t t h e f i r m wa r e t o b e d ow n l o a d e d . t h e n c l i ck t h e [ S t a r t ] bu t t o n . SelectableFir mware iR7105 BOOT BROWSER DCON LANGUAGE MEAPCONT RUI SYSTEM USenv0112 TTS iRYYYY HDFormat KEY SDICT Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d .

Firmware Version SYSTEM Active USen01 02n Hold USen01 02i

Download Firmware Upload Data Download Data Restore Backup System Format HDD

RCON XXxx3003 DCON XXxx0101 RUI XXja0101 XXen0101 MEAPCONT XXxx0102 LANGUAGE XXja0102 XXen0102 BOOTROM XXxx0102C G3FAX

Start
Cancel Return to Main Menu

XXxx6101

F-18-31

4) When downloading has ended, click [OK] to go back to the previous screen.
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iR7105 NORMAL Clear SelectableFirmware D ow n l o a d i n g c o m p l e t e Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d .

Firmware Version SYSTEM Active USen01 02n Hold USen01 02i

SelectableFir mware iR7105 BOOT BROWSER DCON LANGUAGE MEAPCONT RUI SYSTEM USenv0112 TTS iRYYYY HDFormat KEY SDICT

Download Firmware Upload Data Download Data Restore Backup System Format HDD

RCON XXxx3003 DCON XXxx0101 RUI XXja0101 XXen0101 MEAPCONT XXxx0102 LANGUAGE XXja0102 XXen0102 BOOTROM XXxx0102C

Shutdown Return to Main Menu

F-18-32

5) Start up the machine. The subsequent procedure differs depending on the download mode.

18-16

Chapter 18 If the machine is in normal mode, 5-1) Click [Shutdown].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iR7105 NORMAL Clear SelectableFirmware S e l e c t t h e f i r m wa r e t o b e d ow n l o a d e d . t h e n c l i ck t h e [ S t a r t ] bu t t o n . SelectableFir mware iR7105 BOOT BROWSER DCON LANGUAGE MEAPCONT RUI SYSTEM USenv0112 TTS iRYYYY HDFormat KEY SDICT Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d .

Firmware Version SYSTEM Active USen01 02n Hold USen01 02i

Download Firmware Upload Data Download Data Restore Backup System Format HDD

RCON XXxx3003 DCON XXxx0101 RUI XXja0101 XXen0101 MEAPCONT XXxx0102 LANGUAGE XXja0102 XXen0102 BOOTROM XXxx0102C

Start
Shutdown Return to Main Menu

F-18-33

5-2) Click [Start Shutdown] so that the machine starts the shut-down sequence.
Message

Have you finished downloading and want to star t shutdown sequence for restar ting machine ?

Start Shutdown Cancel

F-18-34

5-3) Click [OK], and turn off and then back on the machine's main power switch.
Message

Follow the instructions shown on the machine for shutdown process. Click [OK] button to return to Main Menu.

F-18-35

If the machine is in safe mode, 5-1) Turn off and then back on the machine's main power switch. 6) When the machine starts up, it will write the system software to its HDD and flash ROM while showing the progress of writing on the control panel screen. When done, it will indicate a message asking you to turn off and then back on the power. In response, turn off and then back on the main power.

Turning Off the Power Do not turn off the machine's power while downloading or writing is under way; otherwise, the machine may fail to start up. If such is the case, execute HDD formatting, and download the system software once again.

18-17

Chapter 18 MEMO: You can remove the downloaded system software before it is written to the HDD or flash ROM. To do so, go through the following before restarting the machine: 1) Click [Clear] [1].
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iR7105 NORMAL Clear SelectableFirmware D ow n l o a d i n g c o m p l e t e Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d .

[1]

Firmware Version SYSTEM Active USen01 02n Hold USen01 02i

SelectableFir mware iR7105 BOOT BROWSER DCON LANGUAGE MEAPCONT RUI SYSTEM TTS iRYYYY HDFormat KEY SDICT

Download Firmware Upload Data Download Data Restore Backup System Format HDD

RCON XXxx3003 DCON XXxx0101 RUI XXja0101 XXen0101 MEAPCONT XXxx0102 LANGUAGE XXja0102 XXen0102 BOOTROM XXxx0102C

Shutdown Return to Main Menu

F-18-36

2) Click [Execute Clear] so that the system software that has been stored in the temporary storage area of the HDD will be removed.
Message

Do you want to clear whole firmware downloaded to the machine?

Execute Clear Cancel

F-18-37

3) Click [OK].
Message

The downloaded firmware has been deleted.

F-18-38

MEMO: When a connection is made, the upper right area of the SST screen will indicate the following device information [1]: - IP address - product name - download mode
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iR7105 NORMAL Clear SelectableFirmware Select the fir mware to be downloaded. then click the [Star t] button. SelectableFirmware iR7105 BOOT BROWSER DCON LANGUAGE MEAPCONT RUI TTS iRYYYY HDFormat KEY SDICT Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d .

[1]

Firmware Version SYSTEM Active USen01 02n Hold USen01 02i

D ow n l o a d F i r m wa r e Upload Data D ow n l o a d D a t a R e s t o r e B a ck u p S y s t e m Fo r m a t H D D

RCON XXxx3003 DCON XXxx0101 RUI XXja0101 XXen0101 MEAPCONT XXxx0102 LANGUAGE XXja0102 XXen0102 BOOTROM XXxx0102C

Star t
Shutdown Retur n to Main Menu

F-18-39

18-18

Chapter 18

18.4.3 Other Upgrade Methods 18.4.3.1 Upgrading an old model to the upgraded device
An old model has to be upgraded to the V50.00 system or later for an upgraded device. See the following procedure to upgrade. 1) Before upgrade, backup the data if needed.
0018-2036

At upgrade, HDD must be all formatted; thus, user data saved in HDD will be initialized. The data in additional function cannot be imported with the upgraded device; thus, backup is not needed. Main data items which cannot be taken over after upgrade <Common Settings>Stack Bypass Standard Settings <Mail Box Settings>User Inboxes Settings <Mail Box Settings>Standard Scan Settings <Mail Box Settings>Confidential Fax Inboxes Settings <Copy Settings>Standard Settings <System Settings>Device Information Delivery Settings: Transmitting Settings <COPY>Mode memory <COPY>Recall <BOX>BOX Scan mode memory <BOX>BOX Print mode memory <SEND>Recall <SEND>Standard Send Settings <Log>Send/Receive log <Log>Copy log <Log>Printer log <Log>Network log <Log>Job No. <Device Information Delivery Settings>Destination registered at the destination settings <Device Information Delivery Settings>Receive Restriction for Each Function <Device Information Delivery Settings>Communication Log Document data items in the box User Inbox Conf.Fax Inbox, Memory Rx Inbox, Form for Form Compositon Service action at upgrade Ask user to reset Ask user to reset Ask user to reset Ask user to reset Ask user to reset Ask user to reset Ask user to reset Tell user that it will be deleted Ask user to reset Ask user to reset Tell user that it will be deleted Ask user to reset Tell user that it will be deleted Tell user that it will be deleted Tell user that it will be deleted Tell user that it will be deleted Tell user that it will be deleted Ask user to reset Ask user to reset Tell user that it will be deleted Service action at upgrade Ask user to backup with BOX backup function. If an environment privents users from backing up, ask them to output. Before upgrade, it cannot be backed up and it will be deleted. So ask users to output.

<System Settings>Device Information Delivery Settings: Receive Restriction for Each Function Ask user to reset

Address Book related data items Favorites Button Address Book (Including the one-touch button) Fowarding Settings MEAP related data items If application supports J2ME1.1 If the application which does not support J2ME1.1 is included. If the application uses the limited license If the application uses the unlimited license (reusable license).

Service action at upgrade Import after export Import after export Import after export Service action at upgrade Prepare the supporting .jar file System cannot be upgraded Save the invalid license at uninstallation and reinstall by using it Can be reinstalled with the same license

2) Register the Boot V10.99 and each firmware for upgrade device in SST (Ver.3.34 or later) beforehand. 3) Start with pressing 2 + 8 and rewrite the Boot ROM with using SST. (For upgrade device Boot V10.99) After rewriting, becomes V4.44.

Note that once Boot ROM is rewritten, it cannot be returned to the old model.

4) After turning OFF the power, start with pressing 2 + 8.

If it does not start, E0602-0002 error will occur.

18-19

Chapter 18 5) Execute ALL format with using SST. At this time, connect with iR7105_V2.
MEMO: Formatting with using USB memory is not available. It is available with SST only.

6) After turning ON/OFF the power switch, start with 2+8 and install the complete System firmware for upgraded device with using SST or USB memory. 7) After normal start, start with pressing 1 + 7 and upgrade the ACC firmware of ARCNET connection to the upgrade device compliant from the download mode in service mode.

When the perfect binder is connected, E721-0061 error occurs because of combination mismatch error between the system software and the old perfect binder. In that case, upgrade the OP-CNT of perfect binder to V10.00 or later to solve the problem.

18.4.4 Uploading and Downloading Backup Data 18.4.4.1 Outline

The file SramImg is data stored in the SRAM of the Main controller PCB. The file MeapBack is a MEAP application and its data stored on the HDD. The file SramDCON is data stored in the SRAM of the DC controller PCB. The file SramRCON is data stored in the EEPROM of the reader controller PCB.
Backup data Main controller PCB backup MEAP application For R&D Reader controller PCB backup DC controller PCB backup File to select for downloading SramImg.bin (may be uploaded/downloaded in safe mode) MeapBack.bin (may be uploaded/downloaded in safe mode) Sublog.txt (do not select this file) SramRCON (may be uploaded/downloaded in normal mode) SramDCON (may be uploaded/downloaded in normal mode)
0011-6773

Points to Note When Uploading/Downloading MeapBack If you need to re-install the system software to correct a fault, you may upload MeapBack and then download it back after formatting the HDD (by temporarily putting aside the MEAP application). 1) Upload MeapBack. 2) Execute HDD all format. 3) Re-install the system software. At this time, be sure that the system software is the same as that existed before formatting the HDD. Otherwise, you will not be able to download MeapBack you have uploaded. 4) Download MeapBack. You will not be able to download MeapBack you have uploaded unless you are downloading it to the machine you have uploaded it from. MEMO: - If you are planning to replace the Main controller PCB, you can upload the SramImg file in advance, and download it after replacement so that the service mode and other settings may be inherited. - If you are planning to replace the DC controller PCB, you can upload the SramDCON file in advance, and download it after replacement so that the service mode and other settings may be inherited. - If you are planning to replace the DC controller PCB, you can upload the SramDCON file in advance, and download it after replacement so that the service mode and other settings may be inherited.

18-20

Chapter 18

18.4.4.2 Uploading Procedure

0011-6774

- When uploading the data, do not select 'Sublog.txt'. - The machine must be in normal mode for uploading/downloading SramDCON or SramRCON. - The machine must be in safe mode when uploading/downloading SramImg or MeapBack. [In the Case of MeapBack] 1) Start up the SST. 2) Select the model [1] and the type of system software [2] ('Single'); then, check the network settings, and click [START].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E) Interface Network IP Address 172.16.1.100 Target Selection Select the target. MFP
REGISTER REMOVE

CONTROL C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Export Firm Selection C l i c k t h e i n t e r fa c e a n d c l i c k t h e < S TA RT > b u t t o n .

iR7105 CONNECT
MFP USB iR7105 ALL ALL_HDF Single

[1] [2]

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a

USB

System Management

c:

START
CANCEL EXIT

F-18-40

3) Click [Upload Data].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iR7105 SAFE Clear SelectableFirmware S e l e c t t h e f i r m wa r e t o b e d ow n l o a d e d . t h e n c l i ck t h e [ S t a r t ] bu t t o n . SelectableFir mware iRC3170 BOOT BROWSER DCON LANGUAGE MEAPCONT RUI SYSTEM TTS iRCXXXX HDFormat KEY SDICT Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d .

Firmware Version SYSTEM Active USen01 02n Hold USen01 02i

Download Firmware Upload Data Download Data Restore Backup System Format HDD

RCON XXxx3003 DCON XXxx0101 RUI XXja0101 XXen0101 MEAPCONT XXxx0102 LANGUAGE XXja0102 XXen0102 BOOTROM XXxx0102C

Start
Shutdown Return to Main Menu

F-18-41

4) Select 'MeapBack.bin', and click [Start].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iR7105 SAFE Clear FileSave Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d . SelectableDate Select the data to be uploaded. then click the [Start] button.

File Name

Download Firmware
Memo

SramImg.bin MeapBack.bin Sublog.txt

Upload Data Download Data Restore Backup System Format HDD

backup of meap

c:

Start
Cansel Return to Main Menu

F-18-42

18-21

Chapter 18 5) Type in the name of the file to store and, as necessary, a brief description; then, click [Save].
ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iR7105 SAFE Clear FileSave Enter desired file name. then click the [Save] button. Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d . SelectableDate Uploading complete

File Name MeapBack.bin Memo Memo

Download Firmware Upload Data Download Data Restore Backup System Format HDD

SramImg.bin MeapBack.bin Sublog.txt

backup of meap

c:

Save
Discard Return to Main Menu

F-18-43

6) Click [OK].

The file SramImg, SramRCON, SramDCON, or MeapBack may only be downloaded to their source machine.

Reader controller PCB Service PC SST iR ---System

EEPROM

Printer unit
Uploading/Downloading Main controller PCB

SramImg (safe mode only) Meapback (safe mode only) SramRCON (normal mode only) SramDCON (normal mode only)

SRAM

SramImg.bin

DC controller PCB HDD SRAM

Meapback.bin

Main controller unit

F-18-44

18-22

Chapter 18

18.4.4.3 Downloading Procedure

0011-6775

- The machine must be in normal mode for uploading/downloading the file SramDCON or SramRCON. - The machine must be in safe mode for uploading/downloading the file SramImg or MeapBack. [In the Case of MeapBack] 1) Start up the SST. 2) Select the model [1] and the type of system software [2] ('Single'); then, check the network settings, and click [START].
Service Support Tool DLM0 (Ver.3.21E) Interface Network IP Address 172.16.1.100 Target Selection Select the target. MFP
REGISTER REMOVE

CONTROL C l i c k a b u t t o n t o exe c u t e .

Export Firm Selection C l i c k t h e i n t e r fa c e a n d c l i c k t h e < S TA RT > b u t t o n .

iR7105 CONNECT
MFP USB iR7105 ALL ALL_HDF Single

[1] [2]

R e g i s t e r F i r m wa r e D e l e t e F i r m wa r e D e l e t e B a ck u p D a t a

USB

System Management

c:

START
CANCEL EXIT

F-18-45

3) Click [Download Data].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iR7105 SAFE Clear SelectableFirmware S e l e c t t h e f i r m wa r e t o b e d ow n l o a d e d . t h e n c l i ck t h e [ S t a r t ] bu t t o n . SelectableFir mware iR7105 BOOT BROWSER DCON LANGUAGE MEAPCONT RUI SYSTEM TTS iRYYYY HDFormat KEY SDICT Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d .

Firmware Version SYSTEM Active USen01 02n Hold USen01 02i

Download Firmware Upload Data Download Data Restore Backup System Format HDD

RCON XXxx3003 DCON XXxx0101 RUI XXja0101 XXen0101 MEAPCONT XXxx0102 LANGUAGE XXja0102 XXen0102 BOOTROM XXxx0102C

Start
Shutdown Return to Main Menu

F-18-46

4) Select the data to download, and click [Start].

ServiceSupportTool DLM10 (Ver.3.21E) 172.16.1.100 iR7105 SAFE Clear SelectableFile S e l e c t t h e f i l e t o b e d ow n l o a d e d . t h e n c l i ck t h e [ S t a r t ] bu t t o n . Control Click the button of the task to be exe c u t e d . DownloadedFile

c:

Download Firmware Upload Data Download Data Restore Backup System Format HDD

MeapBack.bin.upd

Series:iR7105 Serial No:F641G002 DataType:backup of meap Date:2005/ 04/ 18 20:13:33 Memo:Memo

Start
Cansel Return to Main Menu

F-18-47

5) When downloading has ended, click [OK] to return to the previous screen.

18-23

Chapter 18

18.4.5 Version Upgrade using USB 18.4.5.1 Overview of Menus and Functions
0011-6776

F-18-48

Downloading the System Software [1]: Upgrade (Auto) Use it to download/write the system software. (auto) [2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation) Use it to download the system software. (auto or selective) [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) Use it to download the system software. (overwrite) Formatting the HDD (only in safe mode) [4]: Format HDD (in the presence of BOOTDEV) Use it to format the HDD for BOOTDEV partition. [4]: Format HDD (ALL) (in the absence of BOOTDEV) Use it to format the HDD for full partition. Other Functions [5]: Backup Do not use it. (for use by R&D only) [6]: Restore former version (in the presence of a backup of the system software) Use it to restore the backup of the system software. [7]: Clear downloaded files Use it to remove the system software immediately before downloading (before writing). [Stop]: Shutdown (in normal mode) Use it to execute shut-down instructions. To select/execute a function, use the keys on the control panel.

18-24

Chapter 18

18.4.5.2 Points to Note

0011-6777

Turning Off the Power Do not turn off the machine while downloading or writing is under way. Doing so could prevent the machine from starting up. If this is the case, execute HDD formatting (menu [4]), and download the system software. If the machine fails to start up because of failed downloading of BOOT the DIMM ROM must be replaced.

Downgrading Be sure that the system software in the USB device is of the latest version. The following files of the system software do not permit collection of version information. As such, they necessarily overwrite the system software on the HDD: - KEY (in both normal and safe mode) - TTS (in both normal and safe mode) - BROWSER (in both normal and safe mode) - DCON (in safe mode only) - RCON (in safe mode only) The following is recommended for normal downloading (i.e., downloading of the system software, not after HDD replacement or formatting): download mode: normal download menu: [1]: Upgrade (Auto)

Turning Off the Power After Normal Mode When ending download mode, be sure to execute the HDD shut-down instructions. On the Initial Menu screen, press [stop]>[0]; then, go through the shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power switch.

F-18-49

18-25

Chapter 18

18.4.5.3 Downloading/Writing the System Software (auto)

[1]: Upgrade (AUTO) The system software on the HDD and that in the USB device are compared. If the latter is new, it will be downloaded to the temporary storage area of the HDD. At the end of the downloading, the machine restarts on its own to write the downloaded system software to the system area of the HDD and the flash ROM. <Procedure> 1) If the machine is on, go through the HDD shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power. 2) Connect the USB device to the sub port. 3) Put the machine in download mode (normal or safe). 4) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key. [1] -> [0]: execute download / other than [0]: go back to Menu screen
0011-6778

F-18-50

5) While downloading is under way, the control panel screen shows its progress. At the end of the downloading, the machine restarts on its own to start writing to the system area of the HDD or the flash ROM. - Screen Showing the Progress of Downloading

- Screen Showing the Progress of Writing to the HDD

F-18-51

18-26

Chapter 18 6) At the end of writing to the HDD, a message will appear asking you to turn off and then back on the power. Turn off the power, remove the USB device, and turn the power back on.

F-18-52

18.4.5.4 Downloading the System Software (auto or selective)

[2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation) The system software on the HDD is compared against that in the USB device. Those system files that are newer will then be downloaded to the temporary storage area of the HDD. If the system software in the USB is of the same or older version, however, a message will appear on the screen, offering a choice. Unlike menu item [1], the machine will not restart on its own. When you turn it off and then back on manually, it will start to write the system software when it starts up. <Procedure> 1) If the machine is on, go through the HDD shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power. 2) Connect the USB device to the USB port. 3) Put the machine in download mode (normal or safe). 4) Go through the instructions indicated on the control panel, and press the appropriate key. [2] -> [0]: execute download / other than [0]: go back to Menu screen
0011-6779

F-18-53

MEMO: If the system software in the USB device is found to be of the same or older version, a message will appear asking you if you want to overwrite. Go though the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key. [0]: overwrite / other than [0]: do not overwrite

F-18-54

18-27

Chapter 18 5) While downloading is under way, the control panel screen shows its progress. At the end of downloading, a message will appear asking you to press a key. Press the appropriate key. If the machine is in normal mode, it starts the shut-down instructions.

F-18-55

6) When a message appears asking you to turn off the power, turn off the main power switch, remove the USB device, and turn on the main power switch. 7) Upon start-up, the machine starts to write the system software to the system area of the HDD or the flash ROM. At the end of writing to the HDD, a message will appear asking you to turn off and then back on the power. Turn off and then back on the main power switch.

F-18-56

18.4.5.5 Downloading the System Software (overwriting)

[3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) The system software in the USB device will overwrite the software on the HDD regardless of the version of the latter. Unlike menu item [1], however, the machine will not restart on its own at the end of downloading. When the power is turned off and then back on manually, the machine starts writing the system software. <Procedure> 1) If the machine is on, go through the HDD shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power. 2) Connect the USB device to the USB port. 3) Put the machine in download mode (normal or safe).
0011-6780

18-28

Chapter 18 4) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key. [3] -> [0]: execute download / other that [0]: go back to Menu screen

F-18-57

5) While downloading is under way, the control panel screen shows its progress. At the end of downloading, a message will appear asking you to press a key. Press the appropriate key. If the machine is in normal mode, the shut-down sequence will start.

F-18-58

6) When a message appears asking you to turn off the power, turn off the main power, remove the USB device, and turn the main power switch back on. 7) Upon start-up, the machine starts writing the system software to the system area of the HDD or the flash ROM. At the end of writing, a message will appear asking you to turn off and then back on the power. Turn off and then on the main switch.

F-18-59

18-29

Chapter 18

18.4.5.6 Formatting the HDD

0011-6781

This function is available only when the machine is in safe mode. [4]: Format HDD (in the presence of BOOTDEV) Use it to format the HDD for BOOTDEV partition. [4]: Format HDD (ALL) (in the absence of BOOTDEV, as when replacing with new HDD) Use it to format the HDD for full partition. <Procedure> Go through the following to format the HDD for BOOTDEV partition: 1) If the machine is on, go through the HDD shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power. 2) Connect the USB device to the USB port. 3) Start up the machine in safe mode. 4) Follow the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key. [4] -> [0]: go to Partition Selection screen / other that [0]: go back to Menu screen

F-18-60

5) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key. [1] -> [0]: execute BOOTDEV formatting / other than [0]: go back to Menu screen [C]: go back to Menu screen

F-18-61

18-30

Chapter 18 6) At the end of formatting, a message will appear asking you to press a key. Press any key to go back to the Men screen.

F-18-62

7) Start downloading the system software. For instructions, see "Downloading the System Software."

18.4.5.7 Other Functions

[5]: Backup
0011-6782

This function is for R&D purposes only. Do not use it. [6]: Restore former version (in the presence of backup of system software) Use it to restore the backup of the system software while saving the system software that is current as a backup. <Procedure> 1) If the machine is on, go through the HDD shut-down instructions, and turn off the main power. 2) Connect the USB device to the USB port. 3) Put the machine in download mode (normal or safe). 4) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press the appropriate key. [6] -> [0]: initialize / other than [0]: go back to Menu screen After execution, a message will appear asking you to turn off and then on the power.

F-18-63

5) Turn off the main power switch, remove the USB memory, and turn on the main power switch.

18-31

Chapter 18 [7]: Clear downloaded files Use it to remove the system software files that have been saved in the temporary storage area of the HDD. Use it if you want to remove the files without writing them to the HDD after downloading (menu [2] and [3]). <Procedure> 1) When you have downloaded the system software using menu item [2] or [3], go to step 2) without turning off and then on the power. (If you already have turned off the power, start up the machine in safe mode.) 2) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press an appropriate key. [7] -> 10: execute / other than [0]: go back to Menu screen Upon execution, the Menu screen will return.

F-18-64

[Stop]: Shutdown (in normal mode only) Use it to start up the shut-down sequence. <Procedure> 1) Go through the instructions on the control panel, and press an appropriate key. [Stop]->[0]: execute/ other than [0]: go to Menu screen The shut-down sequence will be executed, and a message will appear asking you to turn off the power.

F-18-65

2) Turn off the main power switch, and remove the USB device.

18-32

Chapter 19 Service Tools

Contents

Contents
19.1 Service Tools..............................................................................................................................................................19-1
19.1.1 Special Tools Table.................................................................................................................................................................. 19-1 19.1.2 Solvents/Oils ............................................................................................................................................................................ 19-2

Chapter 19

19.1 Service Tools

19.1.1 Special Tools Table
You will need the following tools in addition to the standard tools set to service the copier.
T-19-1 No. Tool name Tool No. Shape Rank* Remarks
0010-9251

Digital multimeter

FY9-2002

For adjusting the laser intensity together with the laser power checker (for electrical checks).

Laser power checker

FY9-4008

For adjusting the light intensity together with the digital multimeter.

Door switch

TKN-0093

Mirror positioning tool (front, rear)

FY9-3040

For adjusting the distance between No. 1 and No. 2 mirrors.

NA-3 test sheet

FY9-9196

For adjusting images and making checks.

Potential sensor tester electrode

FY9-3041

For checking the zero level of the surface potential sensor.

Environment sensor meter sensor

FY9-3014

For checking the environment sensor.

19-1

Chapter 19
No. Tool name Tool No. Shape Rank* Remarks

Tester extension pin

FY9-3038

For making electrical checks (attachment to the meter).

Tester extension pin (L-tipped)

FY9-3039

For making electrical checks (attachment to the meter).

10

D-10 Test Sheet

FY9-9129000

For adjusting images.

11

Loupe

CK-0056000

For checking images.

*Rank: A: Each service person is expected to carry one. B: Each five or so service persons is expected to carry one. C: Each workshop is expected to carry one.

19.1.2 Solvents/Oils
0010-9252

T-19-2 No. Name Uses Composition Remarks

Alcohol

Cleaning; e.g., glass, plastic, rubber (external covers)

Hydrocarbon of the fluorine family, alcohol, - Do not bring near fire. surface activating agent, - Procure locally. water - IPA (isopropyl alcohol)

Solvent

Cleaning; e.g., metal areas; removing oil or toner.

Hydrocarbon of fluorine family, hydrocarbon of chlorine family, alcohol

- Do not bring near fire. - Procure locally.

Heat-resisting grease

Lubricating; e.g., fixing drive parts.

Lithium soap of mineral family, molybdenum disulfide

- CK-0427 (500 g/can)

19-2

Chapter 19
No. Name Uses Composition Remarks

Lubricant

Mineral oil (paraffin family)

- CK-0524 (100 cc)

Lubricant

Lubricating; e.g., friction parts.

Silicone oil

- CK-0551 (20 g)

Drum cleaning powder

Cleaning; e/g., photosensitive drum.

Selenium oxide

- CK-0429

Lubricant

Lubricating; e.g., scanner rail.

Silicone oil

- FY9-6011 (50 cc)

Conducting grease

Drum heater contact

Fluorine poly ethyl, Poly tetra fluorine ethylene

- FY9-6008 (10 g)

19-3

Mar 27 2009